initial commit of ebook 31590HEADmain

19 files changed, 24250 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/31590-8.txt b/31590-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f44cd98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8089 @@
+Project Gutenberg's Scouting with Daniel Boone, by Everett T. Tomlinson
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Scouting with Daniel Boone
+
+Author: Everett T. Tomlinson
+
+Illustrator: Norman Rockwell
+
+Release Date: March 10, 2010 [EBook #31590]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by David Garcia, Martin Pettit and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Kentuckiana Digital Library)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+BOOKS BY THE SAME AUTHOR
+
+
+THREE COLONIAL BOYS
+
+THREE YOUNG CONTINENTALS
+
+WASHINGTON'S YOUNG AIDS
+
+THE BOYS OF OLD MONMOUTH
+
+A JERSEY BOY IN THE REVOLUTION
+
+THE RIDER OF THE BLACK HORSE
+
+THE RED CHIEF
+
+MARCHING AGAINST THE IROQUOIS
+
+THE CAMP-FIRE OF MAD ANTHONY
+
+LIGHTHORSE HARRY'S LEGION
+
+THE YOUNG SHARPSHOOTER
+
+TECUMSEH'S YOUNG BRAVES
+
+THE BOY SOLDIERS OF 1812
+
+FOUR BOYS IN THE YELLOWSTONE
+
+FOUR BOYS IN THE YOSEMITE
+
+WARD HILL AT WESTON
+
+WITH FLINTLOCK AND FIFE
+
+THE FORT IN THE FOREST
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+[Illustration: "On the August air arose the reports of many rifles and
+the terrifying whoops of the Indians"]
+
+
+
+
+_PIONEER SCOUT SERIES_
+
+
+SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE
+
+BY EVERETT T. TOMLINSON
+
+[Illustration: Logo]
+
+_Illustrated by_ NORMAN ROCKWELL
+
+GARDEN CITY NEW YORK
+DOUBLEDAY, PAGE & COMPANY
+1917
+
+
+_Copyright, 1914, by_
+THE BOY SCOUTS OF AMERICA
+_For Boys' Life_
+
+_Copyright, 1914, by_
+EVERETT T. TOMLINSON
+
+_All rights reserved, including that of
+translation into foreign languages,
+including the Scandinavian_
+
+
+
+
+Preface
+
+
+Perhaps not unnaturally in certain details there is a slight confusion
+or divergence in the various works that recount the heroic deeds of
+Daniel Boone. The men of that day were making history rather than
+recording what they did. There is, however, a striking uniformity in all
+the records as to the simple faith and almost fatalistic conviction of
+Daniel Boone that he was called to be a pathfinder for the new nation in
+America. His courage, reverence, rugged honesty, and unselfishness, his
+childlike simplicity that was mixed with a certain shrewdness, at least
+in his dealings with the Indians, are, however, qualities in which the
+historians mostly agree.
+
+I have cast this record into story form and have used the license of a
+story-teller. I have incorporated a few adventures on the border which
+strictly do not belong to this tale. Every one of them, however, is
+true, and I hope will help in giving a true picture of those early and
+trying days.
+
+In the midst of it all I have placed the great scout. The qualities he
+displayed are the same that are necessary for success in our day or any
+day. The problems may vary from generation to generation, but the
+elements of true manhood are ever the same.
+
+I have made free use of the many historical works which portray the
+character of the great scout.
+
+First of all is the diary of Daniel Boone himself. In addition to that
+fascinating story, the following works also should be read by those who
+are interested in his life:
+
+"The Adventures of Colonel Daniel Boone," by General Filson;
+
+"Life of Boone," by Timothy Flint;
+
+"Daniel Boone and the Hunters of Kentucky," by W. H. Bogart;
+
+"Daniel Boone, the Pioneer of Kentucky," by J. S. C. Abbott;
+
+"The Adventures of Daniel Boone, the Kentucky Rifleman," by the author
+of "Uncle Philip's Conversations ";
+
+"Four American Pioneers," by Frances M. Perry and Katherine Beebe.
+
+The various publications of the Filson Club of Louisville, Kentucky,
+have also been helpful. "The Siege of Bryant's Station," by the
+President of the Club, Colonel Reuben Durrett, and "The Battle of Blue
+Licks," by Colonel Bennett H. Young, are most interesting.
+
+McClung's "Sketches of Western Adventure," and Strickland's "Pioneers
+of the West" have provided many interesting details. The author also
+gratefully acknowledges the aid he has had from some of the lineal
+descendants of Boone himself.
+
+If English boys are eager to hear about the heroic adventures of King
+Arthur, Robin Hood, and other characters, in part at least legendary,
+why should not American boys be equally interested in the true stories
+of the rugged heroes of their own land?
+
+There never has been a time when the development of a true patriotism
+was more needed than it is to-day. Our perils and problems are not
+concerned with savages and wild beasts, but they may be no less
+dangerous than those which confronted our forefathers. How to meet them,
+what qualities ought to be strengthened in the life of an American boy,
+how best to inspire the younger generation with love and devotion for
+our country, are vital questions of the present.
+
+The author believes there is no better way of doing this than by
+interesting our boys in such heroic men as Daniel Boone.
+
+EVERETT T. TOMLINSON.
+
+Elizabeth, New Jersey.
+
+
+
+
+Contents
+
+
+CHAPTER                                        PAGE
+
+    I. IN THE WILDERNESS                          3
+
+   II. HUNTER SAM                                13
+
+  III. THE HUNT FOR GAME                         23
+
+   IV. THE GOBBLERS                              33
+
+    V. PELEG'S NEW PLACE                         42
+
+   VI. SCHOOLMASTER HARGRAVE                     51
+
+  VII. TWO SCOUTS                                61
+
+ VIII. PELEG'S ENCOUNTER                         72
+
+   IX. AT THE SPRINGS                            80
+
+    X. A TERRIFIED BAND                          90
+
+   XI. THE ADVENTURE OF THE SCHOOLMASTER        100
+
+  XII. AN ATTACK                                110
+
+ XIII. THE WHITE SHAWNEE                        121
+
+  XIV. THE HIDDEN CANOE                         131
+
+   XV. GATHERING CLOUDS                         141
+
+  XVI. CAPTIVES                                 151
+
+ XVII. THE PURSUIT                              161
+
+XVIII. A BAND OF SCOUTS                         171
+
+  XIX. THE CAPTURE                              181
+
+    XX. AN OFFER OF RELEASE                     190
+
+   XXI. FLIGHT                                  200
+
+  XXII. THE COMING OF BLACKFISH                 211
+
+ XXIII. FOUR WARRIORS AND MORE                  223
+
+  XXIV. A DECOY AND AN ATTACK                   233
+
+   XXV. A FIELD OF CORN                         242
+
+  XXVI. THE WHITE SHAWNEE AGAIN                 251
+
+ XXVII. THE STRUGGLE IN THE RAVINE              260
+
+XXVIII. AT THE LOWER BLUE LICKS                 271
+
+  XXIX. TO THE MEETING-PLACE                    282
+
+   XXX. CONCLUSION                              293
+
+
+ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+"On the August air arose the reports of many rifles and
+the terrifying whoops of the Indians"           _Frontispiece_
+
+                                                   FACING PAGE
+
+"'What is that?' At the question the two pioneer
+boys stopped abruptly"                                      10
+
+"He was a tall, lean man, quiet in his bearing, and with
+every indication of self-control, as well as of strength,
+stamped upon his face and form"                             28
+
+"The Indian had been able to draw his knife and
+struck at her again and again while the bear held
+him in one of her most fervent hugs"                        76
+
+"Boone quickly rallied his startled followers and when
+the red men returned the hardy settlers were ready
+and awaiting their coming"                                 116
+
+"One of the men who had been stationed as a guard
+was shot early in the morning"                             126
+
+"The scout, with his family, returned to Boonesborough"    220
+
+"Silently the men crossed the ford"                        276
+
+
+
+
+SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+IN THE WILDERNESS
+
+
+"What is that?"
+
+At the question the two pioneer boys stopped abruptly. From within the
+forest they had heard the sound of a snapping branch. The sound itself
+had not been loud, but the quiet of that September day in 1773 had been
+sharply broken by the slight noise from the brush. For a brief time both
+boys listened intently and then one of them went back a short distance
+along the trail over which the little procession had advanced, carefully
+looking for signs of danger on either side.
+
+And there was need for caution. Under the leadership of Daniel Boone
+five families besides his own had been making their way slowly through
+the unbroken wilderness from the settlement on the Yadkin in North
+Carolina. At Powell's Valley, through which they recently had passed,
+forty men had joined the little company, thereby adding greatly to its
+strength, and increasing the confidence of the hardy settlers.
+
+As the little cavalcade spread out in a long line, an advance guard of
+five opened the way, while three rear guards, of two each at irregular
+intervals, were stationed to prevent surprises from the hostile Indians
+or attacks by the prowling beasts of prey that were wont to follow the
+trail of men in the wilderness.
+
+At this time the band was crossing Powell's Mountain, and the extreme
+rear guard was made up of James, the oldest son of Daniel Boone, and his
+friend, Peleg Barnes, the latter being one of the number that had been
+added to the company when the settlers arrived at Powell's Valley.
+Persuaded that no enemy was near, the two boys resumed their positions
+and proceeded on their way.
+
+Each boy was dressed in a hunting costume and wore leggings and fringed
+trousers made from the skin of the deer. Each also was armed with a
+rifle which he carried almost as naturally as if it was a part of
+himself. Powder-horns and bullet-pouches were swinging from their
+shoulders. It was manifest from the attitude and the manner of both
+young hunters that they were familiar with the ways of the wilderness
+and were alert to detect signs of the presence of friend or foe.
+
+"I don't like that noise," suggested Peleg in a low voice. "'Tis the
+second time we have heard it since we have been the rear guard to-day."
+
+His companion smiled and did not reply, and for a time Peleg also
+remained silent. He was a restless, dark-haired, muscular, and
+well-grown boy, perhaps seventeen or eighteen years of age, which also
+was the age of his more quiet comrade. The boys were warm friends, but
+like many men of the earlier days, they were prone to silence, though
+little that occurred in the nearby forest escaped their attention.
+
+The wilderness through which they were advancing was almost untrodden.
+Confidence and hope were expressed on the rugged faces of the boys,
+however, for they early had learned to live in the presence of continual
+danger from the prowling beasts and the hostile red men.
+
+"I never knew a man just like your father," suggested Peleg, at last
+breaking the silence.
+
+"Neither did I," replied James Boone, with a smile that strongly lighted
+up his face, as he turned to his friend.
+
+"He never seems to think about himself. He is taking this expedition to
+the land he has found because he believes it to be for our advantage for
+him to do so."
+
+"He knows it is."
+
+"I heard him tell about the wonderful sky and soil he had found there;
+and it must be worth while to go, else he would not be advising us to
+leave the Yadkin and cross all these mountains into the wilderness. I
+never saw such a strong man as your father is. I don't believe he has an
+ounce of fat on his body. Is it true that he is having a record kept of
+the places he has found and the journeys he has made?"
+
+"It is."
+
+"I should like much to see it. I can read writing, and if some time you
+will ask him to grant me the privilege I shall want to read what he has
+had written----"
+
+Peleg stopped abruptly and grasped his companion's arm, as both boys
+were startled once more by the sudden snapping of a branch apparently
+only a few yards to the left. Instantly both were listening
+breathlessly, and were holding their rifles in readiness, while they
+peered anxiously into the brush from which the threatening sound had
+come.
+
+"I declare to you," whispered Peleg, "that there is some one following
+us."
+
+"Verily," whispered James Boone, although he did not turn away his eyes
+from the forest as he spoke.
+
+The alarm of the two young guards was not unnatural, as has been said.
+On the lower slopes of the mountain great trees were growing, but as
+the band of emigrants had steadily climbed, the timber diminished, and
+even underbrush had become somewhat thinned. Still, on every side of the
+trail there were sufficient bushes to hide the presence of an enemy that
+might be following the pioneers. Both boys knew that game of many kinds
+abounded in the wilderness. Many a time their skill had been tested long
+before they had left their homes on the Yadkin.
+
+That their perils would be increased as they withdrew into the region in
+which the foot of no white men except Daniel Boone and his comrade had
+ever trod they both were well aware. On this September day the advancing
+settlers had been moving in a much longer and thinner line than had been
+adopted the preceding day. The difficulties of the ascent and the
+frequent great rocks in their way made their progress over the mountain
+more difficult and different from the easier march through the valley on
+the opposite side. Only an occasional white man had been seen since they
+had left their homes, and there was constant fear of the red men, almost
+all of whom were exceedingly hostile at this time and very jealous in
+guarding their own domains from the incursions of the whites.
+
+Perhaps not unnaturally most of those who were in Boone's party looked
+upon the Indian as a natural enemy. Few were mindful of the fact that
+the red men were but doing their utmost to defend their own homes and
+retain their hunting grounds from the trespassing whites, who, they were
+fearful, would soon push them from the region, unless by determined
+warfare the Shawnees and other neighbouring tribes might be able to
+prevent their entrance and settlement.
+
+It was well known that the region into which Daniel Boone was leading
+his company on that September day was considered by the Indians to be
+the best of all their hunting grounds. There the buffalo and the deer
+abounded. Wild turkeys were so numerous that the report which Daniel
+Boone had brought scarcely had been credited by his friends. There were
+times in the autumn when great flocks of wild pigeons sweeping through
+the woods might be felled with a club by a man standing in the way of
+their advance. It is true that where so much game was found dangerous
+animals also abounded. The panther and bear were much in evidence, and
+prowling wolves often made the night hideous with their weird and
+terrifying howls.
+
+There was no one in the advancing company who did not fully understand
+what the cost of seeking and making a new home in the wilderness was
+likely to be. Doubtless some would fall victims to the cunning of the
+hostile red men. Others were certain to lose their lives in attacks by
+the treacherous panther, the deadliest four-footed foe of the white men
+in the new world.
+
+When the two young pioneers, who formed the rear guard of the slowly
+moving procession, resumed their advance, both were silent for a time
+and keenly observant of the woods on either side of the trail left by
+those who had preceded them. In places the autumn foliage already was
+tinted with scarlet or gold. The soft air of the September day became
+slightly cooler as the party steadily approached the higher regions of
+Powell's Mountain.
+
+In the midst of such surroundings it was impossible for the young
+hunters long to retain their anxiety, though neither ceased his keen
+watchfulness.
+
+"How old is your father?" inquired Peleg at last.
+
+"About forty."
+
+"I wish much to hear him tell of his adventures in this land which he
+says the Indian calls Kantuckee. Do you know what that word means?"
+
+"No."
+
+"Do you think your father is fearful the redskins may attack us before
+we come to the Licks, where he affirms he will make our settlement?"
+
+"You must ask him," replied young Boone. "I do not believe he thinks
+that we or any other band of settlers will ever build a home in such a
+country as he has found without having to fight for it. Peleg, I have
+almost decided that one never gets anything worth having without having
+to fight some kind of a battle."
+
+"That is surely so," replied Peleg, laughing softly as he spoke. "I
+shall never forget how Schoolmaster Hargrave had to fight to teach me to
+use a quill. The letters somehow would not come, not even when he set
+his best copy for me. He told me one day that they looked like a
+whirlwind in distress. I was minded several times to give up the whole
+attempt, but he told me to fight on, and now I am glad that I did."
+
+"I am told that the schoolmaster later expects to come where we are
+going."
+
+"So I have heard. I hope he will leave his ferrule behind. Whew! My
+knuckles ache now with the mention! Still _he_ seemed to get some
+pleasure out of it, but----"
+
+Peleg stopped suddenly as a faint cry was heard far in their rear. It
+was a sound not unlike that made by a child in distress. Weird,
+pathetic, startling as it was, neither of the boys was for a moment
+unaware of its meaning. It was the cry of a panther far in the distance.
+
+[Illustration: "'What is that?' At the question the two pioneer boys
+stopped abruptly"]
+
+And panthers not infrequently hunted in pairs. It might be possible that
+two of the treacherous creatures had been following the slowly moving
+caravan, for slow-moving it was indeed. The children and women were
+carried on the backs of the horses. The few heavy wagons were dragged
+with difficulty over the rough ground, and many a time the entire band
+was compelled to halt while the men felled a tree which blocked their
+advance.
+
+"I tell you," said Peleg in a whisper, "that sound we heard before was
+made by a painter."
+
+"It may be true."
+
+"Will you stay here while I go back over the trail a little way to see
+if I can find any signs of the varmints? It is yet too light for them to
+attack us, but I should like to know if there is a pair on our trail."
+
+"Do not go far," said James Boone hesitatingly.
+
+"You may be sure that I shall not be over-venturesome. I shall return
+directly."
+
+In a moment Peleg disappeared from the sight of his companion as he
+lightly and yet swiftly sped back over the way by which they had come.
+
+Left alone, young Boone seated himself upon a fallen tree and awaited
+the return of his companion. Holding his rifle lightly in his hands
+after he had carefully looked to its priming, he was keenly observant of
+all about him. He had been disturbed more than he had acknowledged to
+Peleg by the sounds which they had heard. He had known of instances in
+which a panther had trailed a man for many hours. The conjecture of
+Peleg that a pair of the hated beasts might be following the slowly
+moving settlers was not improbable.
+
+As the moments passed the anxiety of the young hunter for his companion
+increased. No sound to alarm him had broken in upon the silence, and yet
+somehow the son of the great pioneer scout was anxious for his friend.
+
+Rising from his seat he ran swiftly in the direction in which Peleg had
+gone. In a few moments he discovered his friend standing beneath a
+spreading chestnut and holding his gun in such a manner that it was
+manifest that he had heard some sound to alarm him. A huge panther
+crouched upon the limb of the chestnut tree, almost directly above the
+place where Peleg was standing.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+HUNTER SAM
+
+
+If the vision of James Boone had not been trained, and unusually keen,
+the sight of the crouching animal would have escaped him. Its tawny skin
+was of a colour not unlike that of the tinged foliage of the branches of
+the chestnut upon which it was lying. There was an occasional nervous
+twitching of its tail, but otherwise it was as motionless as if it had
+been carved of marble.
+
+So intense was the interest of the savage beast in the young hunter
+directly beneath it that it was unaware of the approach of James Boone.
+Even as he perceived the animal, however, its muscles tightened, and it
+prepared for a leap upon the unsuspecting boy.
+
+Instantly bringing his rifle to his shoulder, and taking careful aim,
+James fired at the motionless target. He ignored the exclamation of the
+startled Peleg, who leaped to one side at the report of the rifle, and
+then, glancing at his friend, followed the direction of his gaze, and
+became aware of the peril above him.
+
+For a moment the beast seemed to be unharmed. It remained in the same
+position, motionless, and with its head leaning below the limb to which
+it clung.
+
+Young Boone did not move from the place where he was standing, but
+instantly began to reload his rifle, all the time keeping careful watch
+upon the movements of the beast.
+
+Suddenly the panther began to claw at the limb to which it had been
+clinging. It was manifest that its hold was broken or breaking. The long
+claws were driven savagely into the bark, but in spite of all its
+efforts the creature plainly was slipping. There were two or three
+snarls, and once it turned and snapped savagely at its side. The tail
+began to lash the branch, and then suddenly became motionless.
+
+Slowly the ability of the savage beast to maintain itself was departing.
+A stream of red showed the effect which young Boone's bullet had taken.
+He had aimed just a little back of the fore-shoulder, and it was
+difficult for him now to understand how even a panther, tenacious of
+life as the beast was known to be, was still able to cling to the
+branch.
+
+Struggling, snarling, the great beast turned and gradually but surely
+began to slip from its perch. For a moment it almost seemed that it
+would be able to maintain its grasp even after its body had turned to
+the underside of the huge branch. But all at once, without a sound, the
+long body fell, striking hard upon the ground twenty feet or more below.
+
+Before the animal could show whether or not it was still alive, Peleg,
+who now had recovered from his first alarm, raised his rifle and fired
+at the prostrate body.
+
+There was slight question now as to the approaching death of the savage
+beast. It lay almost motionless on the ground, but there was still an
+occasional nervous twitching of its long tail. Both boys, however, were
+too skilled in the art of the hunter to venture within reach of the
+terrible claws until they were satisfied that the dreaded enemy was
+indeed dead.
+
+"There may be another," said Peleg nervously, as he glanced into the
+woods after he had hastily reloaded his rifle. "That cry we heard
+probably was the call of this one's mate."
+
+"That may be so," said young Boone.
+
+"What are you going to do?" inquired Peleg in surprise, as he saw his
+companion place his rifle against a tree and draw his hunting-knife from
+his belt.
+
+"I am going to skin this big cat."
+
+"Do you think we ought to stop for that?" asked Peleg.
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Then let me help."
+
+"No, you keep guard. Our guns may have stirred up more trouble than we
+know."
+
+Acting upon this suggestion, both boys became silent while young Boone
+began his task.
+
+Swiftly and deftly he slit the beautiful skin the length of the body,
+and then did likewise on each leg. So skilful was the young hunter that
+in a brief time he had drawn back the skin sufficiently to cause him to
+call to his companion, "Come here and help me."
+
+Together the two boys then tore the skin from the body, and young Boone
+rolled the panther's hide into a small, compact bundle. He tied this
+securely with a deerskin thong, and then added it to his burden.
+
+At once the boys began to run swiftly to regain the distance they had
+lost. They had not advanced far, however, before they saw some one
+approaching them on the trail.
+
+"'Tis as I thought," said James Boone with a smile. "Our guns have
+'roused our friends."
+
+"That's Sam Oliver."
+
+"I see it is," replied James.
+
+Neither of the boys spoke again as the man rapidly approached them. Both
+knew him as one of the hunters of the company, and as one whose labours
+chiefly were confined to that field.
+
+Sam was perhaps fifty years of age, tall, rawboned, sunburned, with an
+expression of face not unpleasing, and a frequent twinkle in his eyes.
+As for felling the trees or building the houses of logs, Sam was willing
+for others to assume those labours, and whatever honours might accrue
+from such tasks. For himself he much preferred to do his part by
+supplying the band with game.
+
+Frequently the two boys had gone with the trapper when he had made the
+rounds of his traps, and in the warm days of summer nothing had
+delighted either more than to accompany him into the forest, where they
+were interested in the weird, and at times fantastic, tales Sam related
+of his personal adventures, and also of the characteristics of the
+denizens of the forest.
+
+"What's wrong, lads?" inquired the hunter as he approached.
+
+"Nothing is wrong now," laughed Peleg. "We shot a painter back here. And
+there is its hide," he added as he pointed with pride to the bundle
+which was suspended from his companion's shoulders.
+
+Glancing at the object to which his attention had been directed, Sam
+whistled and then said, "Seen any more?"
+
+"No, sir."
+
+"Seen any signs o' redskins?"
+
+"No, sir. Have you seen any?"
+
+"That's for the King to say," replied the hunter, laughing in apparent
+heartiness, though no sound escaped his lips.
+
+The expression, "that's for the King to say," was one that fell so
+frequently from the lips of Sam Oliver that both boys understood what he
+meant. It was his method of evading a direct reply to any question he
+did not wish to answer.
+
+"All of which means," said James, "that you _have_ seen some redskins."
+
+"A few signs. Nothing very bad, and nothing that should be spoken of by
+either of you. In course we are bound to find the varmints following us,
+but I don't think they will attack us if we are on our guard. We must do
+our best, and after that there is no good in trying to do anything more.
+Your father says everything that happens is right, or it wouldn't be.
+Strange," he added, as he again looked at the panther's skin which James
+Boone was carrying, "strange that you should have got him so easy. I
+have known the time when it would have taken half-dozen bullets to put
+an end to a fighting painter."
+
+"Have you shot a good many of them?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"Oh, a few, a few," replied the hunter. "The strangest sight I ever see
+was one time when I was followin' three o' the varmints. They led me a
+hard chase, and it was two days before I caught up with them, and when
+I did, I almost wished I had not."
+
+"Why?"
+
+"I will tell you. When I came near a big open space there in the woods I
+heard the worst screechin' I ever heard in my life. You simply cannot
+describe it. They were snarlin' and spittin' and screamin' and growlin',
+and sometimes it seemed as if they were doin' all four things at once.
+My first thought was that this was no place for Sam Oliver. It sounded
+like a hundred painters were fightin' to the death. I reckon I did turn
+back a little way, but the screechin' and the screamin' kep' up so that
+I finally decided that I must find out what was goin' on."
+
+"What was it?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"When I crep' up close to the clearin' and peeped out I saw two painters
+a-fightin'. They were crouchin' on the ground facin' each other and
+callin' each other every name they could think of in painter language. I
+did not know what had happened to the third painter, but I knew I ought
+not to stay there long. But all at once the two varmints leaped at each
+other and a minute later they were in such a plight that you would not
+have known what kind of beasts they was. They had ripped and torn and
+clawed and scratched and bit each other until it did not seem as if what
+was left could hang together. Then all at once one of them got the
+other fellow by the throat and it wasn't long before he said good-bye."
+
+"Did you shoot him?" asked Peleg.
+
+"No, for just then I heard a noise right behind me and when I looked
+back I see the third painter creepin' toward me and I fired at it and
+ran. Somehow I managed to get away, and next day I went back to the
+scene o' battle but I could not find anythin' there except the dead
+painter. The others had gone. I had been so long trailin' them that I
+thought I wouldn't follow any further. But if I live to be a hundred
+years old I shall never forget that there fight I saw between those two
+big cats! There are some animals," continued the hunter, "that seem to
+have reg'lar feuds, jest like fam'ly troubles. They may fight one
+another once in a while, but they will make up to fight the enemies of
+the fam'ly every time they get a chance."
+
+"What do you mean?" asked Peleg.
+
+"Well, for instance, there's the beaver and the otter. They seem to have
+had a declaration of war from the very beginning same as cats and dogs.
+I see a beaver house one day las' winter standin' right in the middle o'
+the pond which the beavers had made. You know they build a long tube
+right up through the centre o' the floor which looks somethin' like a
+chimney. The top o' this one was about four feet higher than the floor,
+and it was a good two feet through. The water round their house came
+almost to the top of the door. Mr. Beaver, when he wanted to go into his
+house, used to dive and come up through the tube, then he would shake
+himself, and slide down to his floor, which was always dry. It was
+always warm, too, for even in the coldest weather the water all round
+the house kep' it from freezin'. I reckon this particular fam'ly was
+pretty well provided for because they were all fat. Leastwise they
+looked as if they might have been, though they were dead when I saw
+them."
+
+"How was that?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"Why, the otter had gone after them."
+
+"Into their house?"
+
+"No! No! No otter would ever dare do that. In a fight in a place like
+that the beaver, which has such strong teeth and is such a strong little
+brute anyway, would have the advantage every time. The otter works in
+'nother way. The beaver fam'ly had been busy all through the summer
+hidin' their strips o' poplar and birch and willows in the bottom o' the
+lake which they had made. They intended to have their easy time in the
+winter, and they do, too, unless some otters happen along.
+
+"In this case I am tellin' you about, a couple o' otters had tried to
+break into the house, but the walls was hard as granite. If the otter
+can only get the beaver into the water he can catch him easily, because
+the otter is as quick as a fish. So the beaver simply works on the
+defensive and builds a house strong enough to keep out any otter that
+may happen along. But pretty soon the otters begin to look into the
+beavers' dam. By and by, when they find a weak spot, where they can work
+a hole straight through, they begin their job. When the weather is not
+too cold and the ice not too thick, just as soon as the water in the
+lake begins to drop a little, then the beavers begin to hunt for the
+leak. But when the water falls fast and there is a covering of ice all
+over the lake and sometimes the ice caves in, you see the beavers then
+cannot get their provisions, and the inside o' their houses is as cold
+as it is outside.
+
+"The otters have a reg'lar course they follow, goin' from one place to
+'nother and making their rounds 'bout every ten days to two weeks. I
+reckon in the case o' this beaver fam'ly I am tellin' you about that the
+otters came back in a fortnight or so and found the beavers all dead or
+in no shape to fight. Here comes Daniel Boone himself," the hunter
+exclaimed suddenly, "and I reckon you boys will have to explain to him
+what you meant by your shots back yonder."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+THE HUNT FOR GAME
+
+
+At the words of the hunter the boys looked up and saw the scout
+approaching. He was a tall, lean man, quiet in his bearing, in the prime
+of middle life, and with every indication of self-control, as well as of
+strength, stamped upon his face and form. His expression showed that he
+was anxious concerning the shots which had been fired, but as he drew
+near the boys he was not the first to speak. Peleg's admiration was
+manifest in the manner in which the young pioneer looked up to the great
+leader, though the boy, like others of his day and age, seldom spoke to
+his elders unless first they had spoken to him.
+
+In response to the question which was expressed in the eyes of Daniel
+Boone, rather than in words, Sam Oliver said quietly, "The boys shot a
+painter."
+
+There was a slight smile on the face of Daniel Boone as he said, "Did
+they? Was it necessary?" he added, as he turned to his son.
+
+"Yes, sir," replied young Boone. "The varmint was just ready to spring
+on Peleg. He was crouching on the branch of a tree directly over him,
+and if I had not fired he would have had him."
+
+"It must be right. You know," added Boone quietly, smiling again as he
+spoke, "I am one of those who believe that whatever happens is right."
+
+"And yet," suggested the hunter, "you don't stop tryin' for yourself,
+nor for others, either."
+
+"Not at all," answered the scout. "A man must follow the best light he
+can get and then, beyond that, where he cannot go, he must believe that
+things do not 'happen.' I have heard some men blame their 'luck' for
+what befell them. I have never thought there was any such thing as
+'luck.' The trouble is we do not always see the connection in events,
+and in our ignorance we say a thing 'happens.' I am sorry the boys had
+to shoot the painter."
+
+"I never knew," laughed the loquacious Sam, "that you had any sympathy
+to waste on those critters."
+
+"I haven't," replied Daniel Boone, a trace of a smile again appearing on
+his face as he spoke. "I am not sorry that the painter was shot. I am
+sorry that the boys had to shoot it. Just now I am more afraid of their
+rifles than I am of painters."
+
+The trio looked quickly into the face of the leader, but his quiet
+expression was unchanged, and what he may have implied by his statement
+he did not explain.
+
+"I do not love the varmints," said Sam, shaking his head. "I shall put
+them out of the world every chance I get."
+
+"So shall I," assented Boone, "although sometimes I feel sorry that I
+have to do so. I do not suppose that a painter is following anything
+else than the instinct which was given him, the same as a hound dog
+follows the track of a rabbit."
+
+"How about men?" inquired Sam.
+
+"I believe the same thing is true of men," said Daniel Boone seriously.
+"Fortunately for me, I had a good father and a good mother, so that when
+I was a child I was kept free from many of the things which drive some
+people I have known into divers sorts of evil."
+
+The little party was advancing steadily during this conversation, and
+apparently, now that the explanation of the two shots had been given,
+the leader was no longer apprehensive. To Peleg, however, who was
+watchful of the man's every movement, it seemed as if he was continually
+listening for sounds which the others were unable to hear. The boy was
+aware of the threatening peril from the Indians, although not once had a
+red man been seen since the emigrants had departed from Powell's Valley.
+But the fact that the Shawnees kept themselves hidden from sight by no
+means proved that they might not be near. Frequently he and James Boone
+had talked over the possibility of an attack by their foes, but the
+presence of the additional forty men that had joined the expedition
+recently provided an added sense of security. They felt that it was
+doubtful if even a large band of warriors would venture to attack a
+party so well defended as was that now led by Daniel Boone.
+
+When the sun set the entire band halted and preparations were made for
+the night. The few wagons were drawn toward one spot and left with their
+rear ends turned toward the forest. An enclosure was formed in this way,
+in the centre of which a fire was kindled and preparations for supper
+were speedily made. Meat from the deer which had been shot the preceding
+day was roasted on spits turned by some of the younger children. Only a
+scanty supply of vegetables was to be had, and for the most part the
+hardy settlers were compelled to rely upon the supplies of game which
+the boys and Sam Oliver and other hunters had no difficulty in obtaining
+in the forest.
+
+Guards were assigned for the night, one man being stationed on each of
+the four sides of the camp and close to the encircling wagons. The dogs
+which accompanied the expedition were also used as aids in detecting
+the presence of enemies, but throughout the night nothing more dangerous
+than a deer or a curious night-bird was heard.
+
+There were several young girls in the company whose duties consisted
+largely in looking after the younger children and in helping prepare the
+meals when the emigrants halted. There was an air of confidence in the
+bearing of almost all the members of the expedition, but Peleg Barnes
+was convinced that Daniel Boone himself was far from feeling at ease.
+The boy felt sure, of course, that the leader was anxious not for his
+own safety, but for those who were following him in their search for the
+wonderful land which he had found in Kantuckee.
+
+Before sunrise preparations for the resumption of the journey were
+completed, and after an ample breakfast, though the food did not differ
+materially from that of the preceding evening, the word to depart was
+given.
+
+The little children and many of the women rode on the backs of the
+horses, some of which were hauling the heavy wagons that contained the
+simple household possessions of the emigrants. As there were more horses
+than wagons, there was ample provision made for all who were unable to
+endure the hardships of the march. The sister of young Boone, however,
+frequently insisted upon walking with her brother, except when he was
+to be one of the guards. No fresh excitement occurred and no fears were
+aroused until after the band had passed Walden's Mountain.
+
+"Cumberland Mountain is not far beyond," said Sam to Peleg and young
+Boone when the nightly camp had been made after a second mountain had
+been crossed. "When once we get beyond that we shall soon see the land
+o' promise. I think to-morrow I shall have to take you two boys with me
+and see if we cannot get some fresh venison. Our stores are runnin' low,
+and a few pa'tridges or wild turkeys would not be bad, either, and I am
+sure we shall find plenty o' both in the valley."
+
+"There must be pigeons left from those we shot yesterday," suggested
+Peleg.
+
+"There are some," replied the hunter, who was in general charge of the
+larder, "but it would be a change for us if we could get a few turkeys.
+We ought to find some fish, too, in the stream in the valley, and I
+think I shall set some o' the boys to catchin' them. We shall go ahead
+o' the main party to-morrow, or else let the band go ahead of us, so
+that if there happen to be any redskins on our trail they will not
+mistake us for the whole band."
+
+"Have you seen any more signs?" inquired Peleg quickly.
+
+[Illustration: "He was a tall, lean man, quiet in his bearing, and with
+every indication of self-control, as well as of strength, stamped upon
+his face and form"]
+
+"Plenty o' signs, but we have not seen one o' the varmints. I know from
+the way Daniel Boone is watchin' that he is a bit fearful. I think I
+shall tell him to-morrow when we start for our game that we will let the
+rest o' the party go ahead of us and we will bring up the rear. It may
+save time to do that, because it will be easy to follow the trail they
+will leave. Most of this country is new to me and the only one that is
+sure of his way is the scout himself."
+
+"I think that would be better," assented young Boone, "and, besides, if
+we hunt in the rear of the party we shall be able to do double duty by
+serving as a rear guard at the same time."
+
+"That is right," laughed Sam. "Though that's for the King to say. The
+great trouble with him is that he does not say very much."
+
+"You have never been troubled that way, have you, Sam?" laughed Peleg.
+
+"I can't say that I have. I think o' so many things; and if I think o'
+them I want some one else to know what they are, too. You make your
+arrangements with the King and we will be ready to do our share on the
+morrow."
+
+Accordingly, on the following day, when the advance was resumed, Sam
+Oliver and his two young comrades waited for the cavalcade to pass and
+then began their task of providing supplies and game for the company.
+
+The emigrants now were nearing Cumberland Mountain. The three mountains
+were not far apart and looked almost as if they had been carefully
+planted at equal distances in the midst of the wilderness by some giant
+hand. Some of the cliffs were so wild and rugged that when the creaking
+wagons drew near the edge the children screamed in their terror. In the
+main, however, the trail was less difficult than had been expected. The
+huge masses of rock had been torn asunder in places by some volcanic
+action in preceding ages and had left narrow passageways through which
+the moving cavalcade was able to proceed without much difficulty.
+
+October had come and the foliage which had been slightly tinted in the
+preceding days had turned to a deeper shade. The trees were now ablaze
+with colour. Sam Oliver in his enthusiasm declared that within a half
+hour he and his companions would be able to rejoin the company with
+ample supplies for the following day.
+
+When the boys began their search for game his words seemed about to be
+verified: near the mountain brook they spied three deer, two of which
+fell at their first shot. Sam, who had preferred to hunt alone, also
+must have found game plentiful, the boys concluded, because twice within
+five minutes the report of his gun had been heard.
+
+"We must get some turkeys before we go back," suggested Peleg.
+
+"I am afraid you will have to wait until later in the day if you want to
+get them," responded young Boone.
+
+"I don't know about that," began Peleg. He stopped abruptly when, as if
+in confirmation of his own opinion, a gobble was heard not far to their
+right. This was quickly followed by an answering gobble from their left.
+
+"You take one and I will look for the other," eagerly suggested young
+Boone.
+
+The plan was instantly adopted, and each of the boys, crouching low and
+stealthily making his way among the trees and through the brush, tried
+to steal upon the bird, which still was noisily announcing its presence.
+
+James Boone moved forward thirty yards from the place where he had left
+his comrade and cautiously peered about him for a sight of the calling
+turkey. His feet, clad in moccasins, made little noise as he advanced
+over the moist ground. Deftly he parted the bushes in making his way,
+and they closed behind him with no more noise than as if they had been
+swayed by a gentle breeze.
+
+Suddenly young Boone came to a place from which he was able to see
+plainly a short distance before him. The gobble now was so distinct
+that, he held his gun in readiness for instant use. Cautiously
+advancing, he peeped from behind a tree, hopeful that he might obtain a
+sight of the bird he was seeking. To his terror he saw an Indian
+directly before him leaning against the trunk of a huge tree. The mouth
+of the warrior was partly closed by his hands. His face was daubed with
+paint, and his discoloured cheeks seemed to be doubly disgusting as he
+emitted sounds which even the keenest of the wild turkeys would scarcely
+have detected as different from its own.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+THE GOBBLERS
+
+
+At the moment when the young pioneer discovered the Indian, the warrior
+also became aware of the presence of his enemy. Whether it was because
+James was amazed at the redskin's skill in mimicking the call of the
+wild turkey, or because his enemy was somewhat quicker in his movements
+than he, is not known. At any rate, before young Boone could raise his
+gun to his shoulder the Indian turned and with all his strength hurled
+his tomahawk.
+
+True to its aim, the weapon struck the face of the young hunter, almost
+cleaving his head in twain.
+
+As the body of the stricken boy fell forward, the Indian halted a moment
+and then in his shrillest tones imitated the call of the crow four
+times. He waited until there was a response similar to his own, and
+then, running to the prostrate young hunter, deftly removed his scalp.
+He then dashed into the woods and ran in the direction from which the
+answering call had been heard.
+
+Meanwhile Peleg Barnes, who had been striving to locate the "turkey"
+which had been gobbling steadily in response to the calls of the one
+first heard, was more fortunate than his friend. Stealthily creeping
+through the bushes and darting from tree to tree, he discovered the
+warrior that was imitating the "gobbles" before the latter was aware of
+his presence.
+
+The boy almost intuitively was aware of the purpose of the warrior, and
+without hesitation raised his gun and fired.
+
+As the Indian fell to the ground Peleg did not wait to discover the
+effect of his shot, but ran back at his utmost speed toward the camp.
+Frequently, as he ran, the terrified young hunter shouted his warning of
+the presence of his enemies.
+
+Before he had regained the camp he was joined by Sam Oliver, who was
+angry as well as startled by the wild shouts of his young companion.
+
+"What's the trouble, Peleg?" he demanded.
+
+"I shot a redskin! There must be a good many more!" replied the boy,
+almost breathless in his excitement. "The varmint was daubed with paint
+and gobbling like a turkey, trying to draw some one into his trap."
+
+"Did young Boone go with you?"
+
+"No, he heard another 'turkey.'"
+
+"Where is he now?" demanded Sam sharply.
+
+"I do not know. We must get word to the scout."
+
+Nothing more was said until the returning hunters, both of whom were
+running at their utmost speed, came within sight of the place where the
+camp had been made. In a brief time they gained the open place in front,
+for the camp this time had been pitched on a small plateau, sheltered by
+a frowning cliff on one side and protected by a steep, rocky gulch on
+another, while in front of it was sufficient space to enable the
+watching guard to detect the approach of an enemy from that direction.
+
+As soon as they were within hearing, both hunters shouted their
+warnings; but even as they raised their voices the sound of rifles was
+heard and a moment later there was a sudden cry and rush made by at
+least three score of the Indians. The suddenness of the attack as well
+as the lack of preparation, due to the faith of the emigrants in the
+security of the position which they had selected for their halt, and
+their confidence in the guards which had been stationed, prevented an
+immediate response.
+
+The Indian warriors, hideously painted, crouching low and running
+swiftly, and at the same time emitting their terrifying whoops, fired at
+every paleface that they could see.
+
+To the startled pioneers the region seemed to be filled with their
+foes. The screams of frightened children, the calls of the women, and
+the shouts of the men as they summoned their companions increased the
+confusion. For a time the din was almost deafening. Above the shouts and
+cries were heard the frequent reports of the rifles of the attacking
+party.
+
+Peleg and Sam, who by this time had gained the shelter of the camp,
+instantly joined the few men that had rallied as soon as the warning was
+given. All now were doing their utmost to check the onslaught. Every
+man, without waiting for orders, fired at the shouting, leaping savages.
+As soon as their guns had been discharged, however, it was plain that
+the attacking party had many other weapons. Those who had emptied their
+rifles brandished their tomahawks and tried to make amends by the
+fierceness of their cries for their lack of more formidable ways of
+attacking. In a brief time the defenders were thrown into confusion,
+outnumbered as they were at the moment, and driven back toward the place
+where the camp was located.
+
+It was speedily known that several had fallen before the fire of the
+warriors, but just who or how many there was no time to ascertain. It
+was now every man for himself as they sought protection behind the
+great trees or darted for the friendly shelter of rocks, which were
+numerous in the region.
+
+It was at this time, however, that the great leader himself appeared
+upon the scene. Familiar with the ways of the Indians, Daniel Boone
+ordered every man to conceal himself behind some tree and make no
+attempt to flee from the place until the entire party had been driven
+away. The presence of Boone seemed to revive the courage of the
+retreating guards. As soon as sheltering places had been secured, every
+man reloaded his rifle and, following the example of the great scout,
+fired at the enemy, who now almost had crossed the open space before the
+camp.
+
+The fierceness of the onslaught of the Indian warriors was well known,
+but it was also understood by every white man that the red men seldom
+persisted in a long attack. A stealthy and sudden dash was their
+favourite method of fighting, but if the resistance was determined or
+prolonged they would usually withdraw to the shelter of the forest.
+
+In their present attack the Indians followed their customary plan. As
+soon as Boone and his companions ceased to flee and began to return the
+fire with vigour, the Indians faltered, and then, after they had given
+several unusually wild whoops and a final discharge of their weapons,
+they all fled back to the protecting forest from which they had so
+suddenly emerged.
+
+As soon as the enemy had departed, Daniel Boone, who thoroughly
+understood Indian nature and ways, doubled the guards, assigned some of
+his followers to the task of bringing in the bodies of the fallen, and
+then ordered the others to withdraw within the camp itself, and hold
+themselves in readiness for a sudden call. Meanwhile they were told to
+do their utmost to quiet the frightened women and children, the latter
+still vocally expressing their terror.
+
+It was soon learned that five of the whites had fallen. Their bodies
+were hastily borne within the protecting circle of the camp and two men
+who had been wounded were at once cared for.
+
+Peleg, whose excitement during the short, sharp fight had been intense,
+now recalled that he had not seen young Boone since his comrades had
+returned. Without voicing his fears he made a hasty tour of the camp,
+searching in every conceivable place for his friend.
+
+When at last the young hunter was convinced that James was nowhere to be
+found among the emigrants, he ran to Daniel Boone himself and said,
+"Have you seen James anywhere?"
+
+"No," replied the scout, glancing keenly at the young hunter. "Was he
+not with you?"
+
+"We were together until we heard the 'turkeys' gobbling. Then he
+followed the sound of one and I went after the other. When I came near
+the place I saw it was a warrior trying to decoy us."
+
+"And James was not with you?"
+
+"No, sir."
+
+"Did you call to him?"
+
+"No, sir. I shot the redskin and then started for the camp as fast as I
+could go. Sam Oliver came with me, and if it had not been for our alarm
+I am afraid the redskins would have done more damage than they did."
+
+The leader was silent as he gazed into the surrounding forest. He was
+well aware that the woods might conceal many more hostile Indians than
+had appeared in the sudden attack upon the camp. That he was deeply
+troubled by the message Peleg had brought him was manifest. Had his
+enemies already killed his son or had they made him a prisoner? What had
+become of James?
+
+"Do you think they have taken him?" inquired Peleg in a low voice.
+
+"That is what I hope," replied Daniel Boone; and then in response to the
+unspoken question of the young hunter he added: "If they have made him
+prisoner we may be able to get him again, but if they have not----"
+
+What the pioneer scout left unsaid was fully understood by Peleg, whose
+face became pale as he saw the anxiety of the leader for his boy.
+
+"A man must do his best, and it is useless to rebel," said Daniel Boone,
+almost as if he were speaking to himself. "If James has fallen, all that
+we may try to do will be useless. If he has escaped, he will not need
+all our help. If the Shawnees have made him their prisoner, then we
+shall do more to help him by quick action than in any other way."
+
+Turning from the women, who were weeping over the bodies of the dead men
+that had been brought back to the camp, in a few words Daniel Boone
+related to his companions what Peleg had told him. A band of twenty or
+more was speedily formed, every one eager to join in the search for the
+missing boy.
+
+"Peleg," inquired the scout just before the men departed from the camp,
+"do you think you can lead the way to the place where you and James
+heard the 'turkey'?"
+
+"Yes, sir," replied Peleg.
+
+"Then let us start at once."
+
+No man in the band was without fear when they entered the forest lest he
+might be the target of some concealed Indian. And yet the little force
+was relying upon the very boldness of their venture for its success.
+
+There was no trace of fright, however, when the men ran across the open
+space and followed Daniel Boone as he led the way in the direction
+indicated by Peleg, who was close behind him.
+
+In a brief time the party came to the place where Peleg had shot the
+Indian that had been imitating the gobble of a turkey. There was no
+delay, however, and as soon as Boone was convinced that the red man was
+dead he turned with his companions in the direction in which the other
+"turkey" had been heard.
+
+As yet not a sign of the presence of their enemy had been discovered,
+although every one was aware that dark eyes were doubtless watching
+their every movement. Why they had not been fired upon was as yet not
+understood.
+
+In a few minutes, however, these things were forgotten when Peleg led
+the way to the place toward which his young companion had gone to seek
+the "turkey" which had so noisily announced its presence.
+
+A low exclamation escaped the young hunter's lips when he and the leader
+halted a few minutes later and saw upon the ground before them the
+prostrate body of the missing boy.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+PELEG'S NEW PLACE
+
+
+Not a word escaped Daniel Boone's lips at the gruesome discovery of the
+body of his oldest son. He ran quickly forward, turned the body so that
+the face could be seen, and in this manner instantly realized the
+terrible fate which had overtaken James.
+
+Peleg Barnes, who was close behind him, never was able to forget the
+sound of the one long, dry sob to which Daniel Boone gave utterance.
+Then, almost as if he still was unaware of the presence of any one
+except the dead boy, he lifted the body tenderly, and with exceeding
+care placed it across his shoulders. Then, turning about, the great
+scout started back toward the camp.
+
+For a moment the other members of the party stood silent as they watched
+their suffering leader. There was not one of the men who would not have
+been glad to express his sympathy in words, but they were all aware of
+Daniel Boone's prejudices against giving full expression to one's
+feelings; and they had not yet recovered from the staggering surprise
+which the discovery of the body of James had created.
+
+When Daniel Boone disappeared in the brush, Sam Oliver ran to the spot
+where this discovery had been made and, picking up the gun of James,
+turned to his companions and said: "We must follow him. We must keep
+close to him. The redskins might almost scalp him and he would not
+understand what they are doing, the way he feels now."
+
+Acting upon this suggestion, the men all turned to follow the direction
+in which their leader had disappeared. Peleg had run in advance of the
+other members of the band, eager to help the scout in his task. Quietly
+the leader shook his head, but did not speak in response to the young
+hunter's offer to aid. Apparently he was hardly aware that his friends
+were so near him.
+
+Without delay the party soon gained the open space in front of the camp.
+There Daniel Boone stopped, and, turning to his friends, whose presence
+apparently neither surprised nor startled him, said: "I shall take my
+boy to the place where the other bodies are lying. I desire you to say
+nothing of what has befallen him until first I shall break the news to
+my wife."
+
+No reply was given to the request of the hunter, nor was any expected.
+There was no protest by the scout, however, when Sam Oliver and Peleg
+followed him as he bore his burden to the place where the bodies of the
+men who had fallen in the sudden attack by the Indians were lying,
+covered by blankets. There, still quiet, and as tender in his manner as
+a woman, Daniel Boone lifted the body of his boy from his shoulders and
+laid it beside those who were his fellow victims.
+
+Peleg, whose eyes were watching every movement of the man for whom his
+feeling was little less than adoration, in spite of his grief, marvelled
+at the wonderful strength the scout displayed. There was no evidence of
+struggle on his part, and as soon as he had deposited the body, Daniel
+Boone turned away, and the two hunters required no word from him to
+inform them that he had gone to tell his wife of the great sorrow which
+had come into their lives. Peleg's eager look followed him even when he
+saw him beckon her to one side of the company, and then both withdrew
+from the sight of the entire band. The bearing of the scout was still
+unchanged. So great was his self-control that no one in the party, who
+did not know of the calamity, suspected that anything had befallen the
+leader beyond the common feeling of sorrow for the loss of the five men.
+
+What was said by Daniel Boone to his wife in that heartbreaking
+interview no one ever knew. When the scout rejoined the band, which now
+had assembled behind the protecting barricade, he said simply: "We must
+prepare for a hasty burial. These bodies must not be left for the wolves
+to maltreat." The leader spoke as quietly as if he were referring to one
+of the ordinary experiences of life, instead of one that would have
+wrung the heart of the strongest man.
+
+On the hillside, near the place where the camp had been pitched, the
+bodies of the fallen men were hastily buried. There were cries and sobs
+from many of those who had been bereaved, and the unutterable fear and
+horror which more or less possessed all the emigrant band were apparent
+in the glances of terror which were frequently cast toward the forest.
+Even some of the men gave way to their sorrow and anxiety. Not a trace
+of either emotion, however, was to be seen in the face of Daniel Boone
+when at last the leader turned away from the place of burial.
+
+Later in the day Peleg chanced upon the scout when the latter believed
+himself to be alone. Seated upon a log looking steadily upon the ground,
+still without a cry, the man's frame was shaken in his agony of grief.
+Abashed by the discovery, Peleg, whose sorrow at the loss of his friend
+also had been keen, stealthily withdrew from the place and did not refer
+to his discovery when later he joined his companions. Before the scout
+returned, the boy had decided that at his first opportunity he would
+explain to him how strong had been the friendship between himself and
+James. Peleg was too modest to believe that the great man had ever been
+aware of the friendship between the two boys. Such matters were of too
+minor importance for him even to recognize, much less to remember,
+thought the lad.
+
+Great then was the young hunter's surprise, and greater still his
+pleasure, when the scout stopped by his side the next day and, looking
+into his face, said calmly, "Peleg, you and James were great friends."
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"Hereafter I shall have a special love for you, Peleg, because you loved
+my boy."
+
+Tears, which the young hunter was unable to control, sprang into his
+eyes at the words which were evidence not only of the keen observation
+of Daniel Boone but also of his regard for one who had been the friend
+of his son. Still the scout's voice was quiet and calm. Peleg was
+convinced that he was not unaware of his inability to reply. "It is one
+of the things, Peleg, which cannot be changed," continued Daniel Boone.
+"James was a good son and I looked forward to a useful life for him, but
+he is not to be here. It does no one any good to rebel uselessly, and
+only children and savages complain when everything they desire is not
+arranged as they wish."
+
+"Yes, sir," assented Peleg. At first he suspected that the words of the
+leader were intended as a rebuke to him for the display of his feelings.
+Perhaps it was a weakness, he thought, and yet, somehow, the young
+soldier was convinced that the father of his friend perhaps did not
+think any the less of him because he had been deeply moved by the tragic
+death of James Boone.
+
+"It is not the first time," continued the scout, "that I have been
+compelled to face sorrow. Somehow I feel that one is like a leaf carried
+on the stream. It may whirl about and turn and twist, but it is always
+carried forward." As he spoke, the leader stooped, and taking a tiny
+branch which had fallen to the ground tossed it into the noisy little
+stream which went tumbling down the side of Cumberland Mountain on its
+way to the great river and the sea beyond. "It is somewhat like that, my
+lad," continued Daniel Boone, running his fingers through his hair as he
+spoke. "Man is borne onward by a Power which he does not understand, and
+yet which he must recognize as greater than his own. It is so that one
+is carried by the years. One is helpless to stop them in their course,
+as helpless as that little branch which I threw into the water. It does
+no one any good to rebel or complain. Every man must accept the facts of
+his life, believing that there is a Power that guides and controls far
+better than he knows how to do."
+
+The scout spoke musingly, almost as if he thought himself to be alone. A
+brief silence followed his words, and then Daniel Boone turned once more
+to Peleg. "My lad," he said, "all I say is that one cannot turn back.
+However much I may sorrow over the loss of my boy, I cannot go back to
+him. The only direction in which I can move is forward. If one can only
+find the right way, that is not so bad."
+
+"Yes, sir," said Peleg, hardly aware of the full meaning of Boone's
+words.
+
+"You were a friend of my boy."
+
+"Yes, sir," again responded Peleg, his voice breaking once more in spite
+of his efforts at self-control.
+
+"You shall be _my_ friend from this time forward. You cannot take the
+place of James, but because you were his friend you shall have a share,
+if you so desire, such as he might have had, in my life and my plans.
+Your father is not living?"
+
+"He has been dead three years."
+
+"And your mother?"
+
+"She died when I was a baby."
+
+"Then there is no one to whom you can turn?"
+
+"I have lived with my uncle, but I have no desire to go back to him."
+
+Boone looked keenly into the face of the boy by his side and was silent
+a moment. "Peleg," he resumed, "I meant what I said just now. If you so
+desire, you shall be my friend."
+
+"I do desire it," said Peleg impulsively. "There Is nothing I want so
+much as I do to be with you. It is good of you to think of me----"
+
+"Say no more," interrupted Boone. "I shall not forget, though I may not
+speak to you soon of this matter again. When the time comes, I shall not
+fail to let you know."
+
+When night fell the guards of the camp were doubled, for with the coming
+of darkness the terror of some of the emigrants increased. There were
+frequent cries heard from the little children, cries which the mothers
+were unable to quiet and in which some of them even joined. A feeling of
+terror had settled over the whole camp.
+
+To Peleg was assigned a post of danger, as his position as guard was to
+be near the gulch. Steep as this was, it would have been possible for a
+warrior to climb its rocky sides if he were familiar with the spot.
+
+Before Peleg departed for his station he was joined by Israel Boone, a
+younger brother of James, who insisted upon sharing the vigil. In the
+light of the campfire Peleg saw the face of the scout change colour
+when the suggestion was made by his son, but he did not offer any
+objection, and in spite of Sam Oliver's declaration that "One boy was a
+boy and two boys was half a boy," the leader quietly gave his consent.
+
+When the silence of the outer night became more marked in the deepening
+darkness, the occasional cries of the children did not cease. They were
+cries not of suffering, but of terror. There were times when even the
+two young guards shared in the prevailing fear. The darkness that
+surrounded them might conceal painted warriors who were watchful of
+their every act. At any moment a bullet from some unseen enemy might
+find its way to the heart of a watching sentinel. Such a condition was
+not long to be endured. As the hours passed, both boys grew more eager
+for the coming of the morning, when, whatever plan might be formed, at
+least relief from the depressing silence would come.
+
+To Peleg no thought of any change in the plans of the emigrants had
+occurred, and he was therefore the more astonished the following morning
+when, after he had been relieved from duty and had obtained a few hours
+of sleep, he was informed before breakfast that the men were assembling
+for a council. Even his feeling of hunger was ignored in the exciting
+announcement which soon was made by Boone.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+SCHOOLMASTER HARGRAVE
+
+
+Before breakfast had been prepared Peleg was aware of a certain partly
+suppressed excitement among the members of the band. The women, with
+tears in their eyes and with their children clinging to their skirts,
+frequently had been in conference with Daniel Boone or with other men of
+the party.
+
+It was therefore not without some previous intimation that Peleg heard
+the scout summon the men to a new conference.
+
+As soon as they were assembled Boone said, "It will not be possible for
+us to proceed at this time."
+
+"Why not?" demanded Sam Oliver.
+
+"The women are terror-stricken. I myself had not thought that we should
+so soon be attacked by the savages. I have reason to remember our stay
+on Cumberland Mountain----" For a moment the scout was silent, and an
+expression of sympathy ran through the entire assembly. Once more in
+control of his feelings, Boone continued: "It is not for myself, as you
+know, that I am asking this return. It is useless, however, now to go
+on with such fear among our womenfolk, and the redskins opposing us more
+strongly the farther we go into Kantuckee."
+
+"Where can we go?" inquired one of the assembly.
+
+"I have decided that our best plan is to return to the settlement on the
+Clinch River."
+
+"How far is that from here?" asked the inquirer.
+
+"About forty miles."
+
+"I am not one to favour return just because we have been
+unfortunate----"
+
+"There is no question," said Daniel Boone, his eyes flashing in spite of
+the quiet manner of his speech, "about what we shall do. We shall make
+our plans to return at once."
+
+Whatever feeling of rebellion may have been aroused in the minds of some
+of his followers, the decision of the leader was not to be disputed. The
+confidence of every one in his courage, integrity, and judgment was so
+strong that no one at the time would have dared oppose the great scout.
+
+Accordingly, hasty preparations were made for the return of the entire
+band, and within an hour the emigrants were on their way.
+
+The same order was maintained which previously had been used. An advance
+party of five and three rear guards were formed, but now the scout had
+in addition a small body moving on each flank, parallel with the main
+body.
+
+With the departure, renewed confidence came to all. As the band withdrew
+further from Cumberland Mountain their spirits in a measure revived, and
+when on the third day they arrived at the little settlement which they
+were seeking on the Clinch River, even the tragedy which had befallen
+them was seldom mentioned. Even the packhorses pricked up their ears and
+required no incentive to induce them to move rapidly down the
+mountainside.
+
+When the emigrants at last arrived at their destination it was found
+necessary to erect several new houses. The nights already were cool, and
+a snowfall might be expected at any time. Even Sam Oliver, who seldom
+assisted in the labours of the settlements, was induced to aid his
+companions in felling the trees and cutting the logs for the little
+houses which must be the sole protection of the people throughout the
+coming winter.
+
+Not many weeks after the return of Daniel Boone and his party,
+Schoolmaster Hargrave found his way into the settlement. He was a
+peculiar man in his appearance, exceedingly awkward and angular, a fact
+which was made more marked by the odd clothing he wore. Disdaining
+garments made from the skins of wild beasts, his clothes were of
+woollen material, and made, too, after a fashion that in itself was
+fearful and wonderful to behold. Even his cocked hat did not become him,
+but in some way seemed to make more prominent his long nose, which was
+covered with splotches of red, as were also his cheeks. That he was
+earnest and deeply interested in his tasks no one denied. The prime
+qualification for the work of the schoolmaster in that day, however,
+consisted in the fact that he was very muscular and able to compel the
+obedience of even the oldest boys in his school, who frequently were
+tempted to pit their strength against his.
+
+At the suggestion of the scout, a schoolhouse of logs was erected soon
+after the coming of Master Hargrave. In this little schoolhouse there
+was a fireplace, or chimney, which extended nearly across one entire end
+of the building. When a huge log fire was burning there it sent out not
+only its genial heat, but at frequent intervals with the changing winds
+it drew clouds of smoke down the chimney and into the eyes of the
+children that were seated on the rude benches. The little building was
+equipped with more windows than the cabins which had been built for
+dwellings. The windowpanes were of paper and made transparent by oiling
+or greasing them.
+
+Young Daniel Morgan Boone, the third son of Daniel, became a constant
+companion of Peleg in the days that followed the return of the
+emigrants. Daniel had begun to attend school as soon as the rude little
+building was erected, and many of his experiences with the awkward
+schoolmaster were gleefully related to Peleg, who now was no longer
+counted a pupil of the master.
+
+"Master Hargrave," said Daniel one day, "makes us learn many verses of
+Scripture."
+
+"Does he?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"Indeed he does. To-day he gave us three: 'The rod and rule give
+wisdom,' 'A rod fits a fool's back,' and 'He that spoils the rod is not
+wise.'"
+
+Peleg laughed and said: "I remember those verses myself. He taught them
+to me. Does he rap your knuckles with his ferrule?"
+
+"Sometimes he uses a ferrule, but more often he stands there by one of
+the windows making a pen, and out of the corners of his eyes watches
+every one of the eighteen scholars. He always has a stout hickory in his
+hand or under his arm. The other day there was a disturbance on one of
+the benches, and without waiting to find who was guilty he laid his
+hickory across the backs of every one of us."
+
+"So you have your share, too, do you?"
+
+"Indeed I do. But the strangest part was day before yesterday, when
+Schoolmaster Hargrave chased Return Sharp. Return would rather go
+fishing or swimming or hunting any day than go to school. He says he
+does not care for learning."
+
+"He is a stout, burly fellow. I suppose a beating does not trouble him
+much?"
+
+"That's the strange part of it," laughed Daniel gleefully. "He doesn't
+seem to mind one at all. The other afternoon when the boys had been
+called in from recess, Return ducked around the corner of the house and
+began to run. Master Hargrave spied him, and, spitting on both his
+hands, he grasped his hickory and sallied forth to catch him. Return saw
+him coming and took to his heels. Every one in the school was out there
+in front of the schoolhouse watching the sport. We were ready to dodge
+back into our seats, but we wanted to see the race."
+
+"What did he do? Did the master get him?"
+
+"Return took a circuit and started for the meadow, and in a little while
+he was of course coming back toward the schoolhouse. Master Hargrave was
+gaining upon him at every jump, and just as Return cleared the fence
+Master Hargrave let him have it with the hickory. For once in his life
+Return made haste, I can tell you. He was not very long in reaching the
+ground from the top of that fence! The schoolmaster was on the other
+side, and as he saw that all the scholars were watching him he jumped
+over the fence and started after Return faster than ever. I would not
+have believed that he could run so fast. Return looked back to see how
+near the schoolmaster was, and just then he stumbled and fell, and
+Master Hargrave was so close behind that he, too, stumbled over Return
+and then tumbled to the ground. Return jumped up and took a back track,
+but the Master was after him in a minute, and before he got halfway to
+the schoolhouse he had caught up with him, and at every jump the master
+also let him have it with the hickory. Return got the last love pat just
+as he tumbled over the fence and crawled into the schoolhouse. We all
+thought when the master came in that he would use his hickory on Return
+plentifully, and also on all the rest of us; but for some strange reason
+he seemed to have given Return all that he had to spare that day.
+Strange how he seems to take delight in beating poor Return."
+
+"He always took his whaling like an ox," laughed Peleg, "and grows fat
+on it every day. I have marks yet on my knuckles that the schoolmaster
+gave me."
+
+"What are you doing?" demanded Daniel, apparently for the first time
+becoming aware of Peleg's occupation.
+
+"I am making a new stock for this rifle-barrel."
+
+"The gun looks like it might kick," commented Daniel sagely, looking
+critically at the rifle-barrel which was lying upon the rude little
+bench at which Peleg was working.
+
+"It would if a boy like you should try to use it."
+
+Daniel laughed derisively and said: "Pray, Mr. Venerable Barnes, how
+long since you were a boy yourself?"
+
+"If you think you can fire this gun, I shall let you be the first one to
+try it. I have it almost ready now, and all I have to do is to fit the
+barrel into the stock----"
+
+"Hello!" called Daniel, looking up sharply as he became aware of the
+approach of a man on horseback. "This is some stranger. I wonder what he
+can be wanting."
+
+A visitor from any of the faraway settlements was a matter of moment,
+and Peleg advanced to the door to see who the newcomer might be.
+
+The man was a stranger to both boys. As soon as he spied the lads he
+said, "Is Daniel Boone in this settlement?"
+
+"He is, sir," answered Peleg promptly.
+
+"Where can I find him? I would have word with him."
+
+"Daniel, do you tell your father there is a gentleman here who desires
+to speak to him."
+
+"I am a messenger," spoke up the stranger, "a courier from Governor
+Dunmore. 'Tis a matter of importance, and Mr. Daniel Boone will do well
+to report promptly."
+
+Peleg looked at the messenger, who was not much older than he. His air
+of importance was not lost upon the young settler, who laughed slightly
+when, after Daniel's departure in search of his father, he turned again
+to the visitor.
+
+"It is a great honour I have for Daniel Boone," suggested the courier.
+
+"That depends somewhat, I fancy, upon who you are and what you have to
+bring him."
+
+"I have told you already that I am a messenger from Governor Dunmore. It
+is meet in you, young man, to respect men who are high in authority."
+
+"I do respect the Governor," said Peleg dryly.
+
+"Then you should have respect for the Governor's messenger."
+
+"I have respect for all who are respectable."
+
+"What mean you by that?" demanded the visitor hotly; as he spoke he
+leaped from the seat on the back of his horse and advanced threateningly
+upon Peleg.
+
+His attitude changed, however, when Peleg quietly stood his ground and
+even slightly smiled at the pompous words and manner of the visitor.
+
+The return of young Daniel Boone interrupted the interview.
+
+"My father will be pleased to see you," said the lad, glancing
+questioningly first at Peleg and then at the messenger.
+
+"Of course he will see me," declared the courier. "Why did he not return
+with you?"
+
+"He is awaiting your coming and bade me conduct you to our home."
+
+"Is it far from here?"
+
+"No, sir"
+
+"Very good. I shall be pleased to go with you and give my message to
+Daniel Boone."
+
+Peleg was an interested observer of the departing visitor, and his
+interest would have been still keener had he known how much the message
+from Governor Dunmore concerned his own future.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+TWO SCOUTS
+
+
+Peleg resumed his congenial occupation, working steadily upon the rifle
+which he was fashioning. The barrel had been part of a gun which
+belonged to one of the men who had fallen in the recent attack by the
+Indians, its stock having been shattered by the blow of a hatchet. After
+the weapon had been found, instead of throwing it aside as its finder
+was tempted to do, Peleg had taken it for himself. All the way from
+Cumberland Mountain he had carried the barrel, which was all that he had
+saved of the rifle. He was aware of the confidence which its recent
+owner had in its qualities, and he had determined to fashion from it a
+gun for himself upon which he might rely.
+
+A smile of satisfaction lighted up the countenance of the young hunter
+when after several hours had elapsed he critically examined his new
+weapon, the parts of which now had all been joined.
+
+At supper time at the home of Daniel Boone, of whose family Peleg had
+been made a member since the death of James, the visitor of the
+afternoon was recalled by a question of Israel Boone, the second of the
+five sons of Daniel Boone.
+
+"Why did not that man stay all night?" he inquired of his father when
+the family was seated about the rude table.
+
+"He would not remain," replied his father quietly.
+
+"Who was he?" continued Israel.
+
+"A messenger from Governor Dunmore."
+
+The lad was eager to continue his questioning, but evidently he saw
+something in the glance of his father which precluded further attempts,
+and he became silent.
+
+It was not until the following morning that Peleg learned of the reason,
+and then only in part, for the coming of their recent visitor.
+
+"Peleg," said Daniel Boone quietly, "would you prefer to remain here in
+the settlement, or go with me on a scout?"
+
+"I would rather go with you," responded Peleg promptly.
+
+"It is possible that we may be gone two months or more."
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"And may have to travel something like eight hundred miles."
+
+"I shall do my best."
+
+"You are well aware, lad, that we shall meet many hard experiences."
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"And you are not afraid?"
+
+"Not if you are to find the way."
+
+Daniel Boone smiled and reached for Peleg's new gun. He examined the
+weapon critically, raising it to his shoulder and sighting it several
+times.
+
+"'Tis a handy rifle, lad," he remarked, when his inspection was ended.
+"Have you tried it?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"And is it true?"
+
+"It is as far as I am able to make it so."
+
+"If you go with me, is this the gun you will take?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"Why do you not prefer to remain in the settlement? There is work to be
+done here. The gardens are to be cared for and the game must be provided
+for the people. Here is where I should remain were it not that when I
+hear the call of Governor Dunmore I realize that there is work for me
+which I must not neglect."
+
+Peleg was silent as he watched the great scout. Even while the man was
+speaking there came into his eyes an expression such as the boy had seen
+only when he and his friend had been together in the forest. It was the
+look of one seeing visions, and yet there was also in it the expression
+of a man of resolute purpose.
+
+"'Twill not do," continued Daniel Boone turning again to Peleg, "to take
+any chances. I had thought at first to take Sam Oliver with me, but now
+it seems good to me for you to go, if you so desire."
+
+"I do."
+
+"I suggest that you try out your new rifle several times before we
+leave. The time to prepare is before we start. After we have gone on our
+way a hundred miles or more 'twill be difficult then to correct any
+fault or change any plans. More than half the winning of any battle
+depends upon the preparations one makes, I care not whether it be a
+fight with the Indians or with one's own weaknesses. There are other
+rifles from which you may make a selection," Boone added.
+
+"Yes, sir, but I think I prefer this. I have made it myself and have
+tested and tried it every way. I have chosen a name for it."
+
+"What have you named it?" inquired Boone.
+
+"Singing Susan."
+
+"And you have sufficient bullets?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"And powder?"
+
+"Yes, sir," responded Peleg. As he spoke he showed a huge powder-horn
+which he had polished and upon which he had carved the following dire
+warning:
+
+
+     "Ye mann what steles this powd^r horne,
+     Will go to helle as sure as y^re borne."
+
+
+The scout slowly read the inscription and, shaking his head, said: "I
+think I should leave that horn behind. There are plenty more which are
+not so sharp in their warnings."
+
+"But it is true, isn't it? If a man steals, isn't that the place where
+he belongs?"
+
+Apparently the thoughts of the great leader were withdrawn to other
+matters, for, ignoring the question, he said: "Peleg, we shall start
+before sunrise to-morrow morning. These June days are long and we do not
+want to lose any of the hours."
+
+"Shall we stop at night?"
+
+"That will depend much upon events. There may be times when we shall be
+glad to have the night protect us in our advance, and when it will be
+necessary for us to hide in the daytime. There are some things to see to
+before we go. One of these is that you must learn how to follow my
+trail."
+
+Peleg's eager manner expressed a question. His interest was keen.
+
+"If you are lost or are not able to find me I shall mark my trail with
+five stones placed like this." As he spoke the pioneer arranged five
+small stones in a semicircle on the ground near him. "You may expect to
+find these near the springs or at the places where I may cross the
+rivers. We must plan to keep closely together, but I am referring to
+this in case anything should happen to separate us. There are some other
+things about which I shall tell you after we have started. I wish I felt
+a little more confidence in that rifle," he added. "What did you say you
+have named it?"
+
+"Singing Susan."
+
+Boone said no more, and Peleg withdrew beyond the border of the
+settlement to make additional tests of his newly made rifle. Apparently
+these were satisfactory, for at three o'clock the following morning when
+he and Daniel Boone departed from the little settlement it was "Singing
+Susan," which Peleg was carrying over his shoulder.
+
+As yet the boy did not know whither he and his comrade were going. Only
+in a general way had Boone explained how long they might be absent.
+However, it was clear to the mind of Peleg that the scout was moved by a
+feeling that he was engaging in an enterprise from which there was to be
+no turning back, and that he felt that he needed some one to accompany
+him.
+
+To be near Boone was sufficient reward in itself, and buoyantly the
+young man carried himself as they moved in single file through the
+passes of the mountains. It was seldom that either spoke, and it was
+agreed that their guns were not to be fired except when it was necessary
+to secure game.
+
+Many miles had been covered when the two hunters decided to rest, for
+night was at hand. Selecting a sheltered spot near a swiftly running
+brook, they were protected from peril from the rear of their camp by the
+huge walls of the hill which rose abruptly behind it. A fire was kindled
+with Peleg's flint and tinder and allowed to burn only long enough to
+roast the loin of deer which had been secured by a shot from the scout's
+rifle early that morning.
+
+As soon as their supper had been eaten the fire was extinguished. The
+June air was warm and it was with a sense of comfort that Peleg seated
+himself upon the ground with his back against the protecting cliff. His
+companion had seldom spoken to him throughout their journey, and the
+pace at which they had been travelling had told more severely upon the
+younger hunter than upon Boone. Yet there was a feeling of deep comfort
+in Peleg's heart. The stars were twinkling in the sky, the gentle breeze
+that swept the treetops was softly musical in its sound, and beyond all
+these was the pleasure of being in the company of the man to whom he
+looked up as to no one else. All combined to make the young hunter
+happy.
+
+To his surprise he found that Daniel Boone was willing to talk more
+freely than he ever had known him to do before.
+
+"Yes," Daniel Boone was saying, "my grandfather came from England and
+settled in Pennsylvania. He had nine sons and ten daughters. My father
+he called Squire. I do not know just why, unless it was because he was
+more active than his brothers. I was born on the right bank of the
+Delaware in Bucks County, Pennsylvania, in 1734. Not long after my
+father married he moved to another part of the colony, and when I was a
+little lad he took us overland through Maryland and Virginia and settled
+at the headwaters of the Yadkin."
+
+"A fine place, too, that is," said Peleg.
+
+"Indeed it is," assented the scout, "but it was not for me. Somehow I
+seem destined to find the way for others rather than to be able to enjoy
+much of quiet and rest myself. It was on the first day of May, 1769,
+that I left my family in quest of the country of Kantuckee. Five men
+travelled with me, all of us relying upon the reports of John Finley,
+one of our number, who had been trading with the Indians there. He
+averred that he had found the most beautiful of all lands. I shall not
+soon forget the seventh day of June that year, when John Finley and I,
+from the top of an eminence, looked out upon the beautiful land of
+Kantuckee. Buffalo were more numerous than are cattle in the
+settlements. They fed upon the grass that grows marvellously on those
+plains. We saw hundreds in a drove, and the numbers about the salt
+springs were amazing. On the 22d of December, John Stuart and I were
+having a pleasing ramble. We had passed through a great forest and were
+amazed at the variety of the blossoms we saw. As for game, why it almost
+seemed to seek us out instead of making us the hunters. It was near
+sunset and we were near the Kantuckee River, when a number of Indians
+rushed out of a canebrake and made us their prisoners."
+
+"How long did they keep you?"
+
+"Seven days. We did our utmost not to show any uneasiness, and gradually
+they became less suspicious of us. But in the dead of the night of that
+seventh day, when we were lying by a large fire and all the others were
+asleep, I gently shook my companion, whispered my plan, and we left the
+camp without disturbing any one. My brother and another man, who had
+started after us to explore the country, found the camp of our party,
+but it had been plundered and the other men in our band had fled.
+Strangely enough, we soon came upon one another in the forest. You may
+be sure that this meeting with my brother was most welcome. The man who
+was with him, however, soon went on a private excursion and was attacked
+and killed by wolves. John Stuart was killed by the Indians. There we
+were in a howling wilderness, hundreds of miles from our families and
+surrounded by Indians who were determined to kill us. All through that
+winter we had no trouble, however, and on the first of the following May
+my brother went home for a new recruit of horses and ammunition, leaving
+me alone. I had been without bread for a year; I had no salt nor sugar,
+and not even a horse or a dog for company.
+
+"I knew I must not lament, however, and accordingly I undertook a tour
+which I thought might be of benefit to others who, I had no doubt, soon
+would follow me. Often I heard the hideous yells of the savages
+searching for me. On the 27th of July my brother returned, and together
+we went as far as the Cumberland River, scouting through that part of
+the country and giving names to the different rivers. In the following
+March I went back to my family, determined to bring them as soon as
+possible, even at the risk of life and fortune, to make a home in
+Kantuckee, which I esteemed a second Paradise.
+
+"You know, my lad, how I sold my land on the Yadkin and disposed of
+such goods as we could not carry with us, and how with five other
+families we started on the 25th of September to journey to Kantuckee.
+You were one of us at that time.
+
+"You well remember also what occurred on the 10th of October, when our
+company was attacked by the Indians, how I lost my boy, and how we all
+journeyed back to the settlement on the Clinch River."
+
+"And now?" queried Peleg.
+
+"And now," answered Daniel Boone, "you and I are to journey to the Falls
+of the Ohio. Our surveyors there are in great peril from the Indians. We
+shall, without doubt, find ourselves often in danger, and I am selecting
+you to accompany me because already I have found that I could rely upon
+you. You have been quick to learn what I have taught you, and I do not
+believe you will easily be taken unawares, because you have already
+learned how to prepare yourself for any event. Any one who has not
+learned that lesson can never become a successful man, to say nothing of
+succeeding as a scout."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+PELEG'S ENCOUNTER
+
+
+The following morning dawned clear and warm, and as no signs of Indians
+had been seen the two scouts renewed their journey with lighter hearts.
+At least a part of Peleg's fear was gone, though it was impossible for
+him to determine by anything his companion said whether or not he shared
+his feeling.
+
+Without an open declaration of war, the Shawnees, Wyandottes, Cherokees,
+and Delawares were working more or less together at this time and were
+untiring in their determination to prevent the whites from entering and
+establishing homes in the region which the Indians believed was entirely
+their own.
+
+The second day passed, and the progress of the two scouts was unbroken.
+Still Daniel Boone was using great caution, forbidding the discharge of
+guns except when food was required, and insisting upon the fire being
+extinguished as soon as the meals had been prepared.
+
+On the fourth day of their journey the anxiety of the great scout
+became more manifest. "I have seen some things," he explained to his
+companion, "which are troubling me."
+
+"Are the Indians near us?"
+
+"I have been convinced that they have been near us all our journey, but
+I fear now they are approaching still nearer. My suggestion is that we
+separate, and I will go to the south and you to the north of the path we
+would have taken and meet again in our camp here a few hours from this
+time. We may throw them off our trail."
+
+"Shall we start now?" inquired Peleg, rising at once as he spoke.
+
+"'Twill be well to do so. The sun is now two hours high, and we must
+both be back here in camp by noon."
+
+As he finished speaking, Daniel Boone departed silently into the forest
+and his example was promptly followed by the younger scout.
+
+The young hunter had been gone almost an hour and as yet had discovered
+only a few signs of the presence of their enemies. He was near the bank
+of a stream some twenty feet or more in width when, glancing behind him,
+he saw two Indians swiftly approaching.
+
+His first impulse was to fire upon them, but holding his rifle in
+readiness he waited for them to come nearer. Suddenly one of the red men
+raised his gun and fired at Peleg. The young scout heard the bullet
+whistling close to his head, and, instantly taking aim, returned the
+fire, causing one of the Indians to fall forward upon his face. The
+other warrior, however, was armed, and was swiftly approaching.
+
+Peleg's first impulse to use his gun as a club and strive to defend
+himself was quickly abandoned when in some consternation he became aware
+of the size of the advancing red man. Never before had he seen an Indian
+so large as the one who was now approaching. Not merely was the man
+tall, but his breadth of shoulder and every movement alike showed the
+great strength which he possessed.
+
+Thinking this was a case where discretion was the better part of valor,
+Peleg darted swiftly into the woods. As he did so his enemy fired at
+him, but fortunately the boy escaped unhurt. He ran at his utmost speed,
+but as he glanced over his shoulder he saw that his pursuer was speedily
+gaining upon him. Peleg Barnes was considered the best wrestler and the
+strongest of the younger men in the little settlement on the Clinch
+River. He now was more than six feet tall and the muscles in his arms
+and legs were marvellously developed. If the man behind him had not been
+of such gigantic and ferocious aspect, the young hunter would have
+ventured a single combat; but Peleg had decided that flight was the
+safer course.
+
+For several hundred yards he ran at his utmost speed, but every glance
+backward showed him that, swiftly as he was running, his pursuer was
+steadily gaining upon him.
+
+The woods through which they were speeding consisted almost entirely of
+small trees, few of which were large enough to provide protection or
+even shelter.
+
+Peleg had passed a large walnut tree, which he had noticed standing like
+a patriarch among the surrounding saplings, and suddenly he paused in
+his flight and ran back ten steps to gain it. This action of the young
+scout plainly startled the Indian, who halted a moment, thereby giving
+his adversary the advantage of reaching the shelter he was seeking.
+
+If Peleg's gun had been loaded the solution of his troubles would not
+have been difficult. As it was, the huge warrior resumed his rapid
+advance. Again Peleg fled, but he was well aware that sooner or later he
+must stop and strive to defend himself by using his rifle as a club.
+
+The moment for such action soon came, and, abruptly halting, Peleg
+seized his rifle by the barrel and raised it above his head. The Indian
+dropped his empty gun and advanced upon his victim with his tomahawk.
+
+Instead of waiting to receive the attack, Peleg suddenly leaped forward
+and struck with the stock of his gun. The warrior at the same moment
+whirled his tomahawk and threw it.
+
+In a manner both blows took effect. The stock of the rifle was
+dislocated by the blow which Peleg struck the Indian's skull, and at the
+same time the vicious blow of the tomahawk was deflected by the barrel
+of the rifle, though it cut deeply into Peleg's hand between his thumb
+and forefinger as it glanced.
+
+As the Indian attempted to draw his knife, Peleg seized him and together
+both fell to the ground.
+
+For a time the efforts of the Indian were by no means violent, and Peleg
+was hopeful that the blow which the warrior had received had partly
+disabled him; but it was soon manifest that the Indian had recovered,
+for, wrapping his long arms around Peleg's body, he pressed him to his
+breast with well-nigh crushing force.
+
+[Illustration: "The Indian had been able to draw his knife and struck at
+her again and again, while the bear held him in one of her most fervent
+hugs"]
+
+Peleg, powerful young scout that he was, had never felt an embrace like
+that of the huge warrior. Relaxing his efforts for a moment, he
+endeavoured to convince his enemy that his strength was well-nigh gone.
+The Indian apparently was deceived by his trick and made an attempt to
+reach for Peleg's gun, which had fallen on the ground nearby. The young
+hunter at the same moment made a sudden and desperate attempt to free
+himself from the arms of the giant.
+
+Success crowned his efforts, but before he was able to escape from the
+place the Indian leaped to his feet, and, seizing Peleg with one hand
+and grasping the collar of his hunting shirt with the other, he drew his
+enemy steadily to his hip, and then by a sudden effort threw him at
+least ten feet into the air, much as he might have tossed a little
+child. Peleg fell upon his back at the edge of the stream, but before
+the savage could spring upon him, he was again upon his feet, and, stung
+with rage as well as desperation, instantly, and with a violence which
+for a time made up for his lack of strength, he renewed his attack upon
+his gigantic enemy.
+
+The Indian, however, closed again with Peleg and hurled him to the
+ground, though the young hunter still doggedly clung to his foe.
+Together they rolled into the water, where the struggle continued
+unabated for a time, as each did his utmost to thrust and hold the head
+of his opponent beneath the surface.
+
+It soon was plain that the Indian was unused to such long-continued and
+violent exertion, and Peleg felt sure that his enemy was weaker than
+when the struggle began.
+
+Suddenly the young hunter by a supreme effort seized the warrior by his
+scalp-lock and thrust his head under the water, where he succeeded in
+holding it until the struggles of the Indian became faint and convinced
+Peleg that the contest was ended.
+
+The cunning warrior, however, had been shamming, and as soon as Peleg
+released his hold he quickly regained his foothold and in turn forced
+Peleg under the water. In the struggle which followed both contestants
+were carried into the current of the stream beyond their depth, and were
+compelled to let go their hold and swim for their lives.
+
+Peleg was the first to gain the shore. A low hill, partly wooded, was
+directly before him, and he ran as swiftly as his strength permitted up
+the long, sloping ridge. In a brief time he discovered that the Indian
+was gaining upon him so rapidly that all hope of escape departed.
+
+At that moment the young scout saw at his side a large tree, which in
+some storm had been torn up by its roots and was lying prostrate on the
+ground.
+
+Instantly he ran along the side of the tree, aware that his enemy was
+following upon the opposite side. Doubtless the red man expected to
+seize him when the huge roots of the tree had been gained.
+
+On the warm ground at the roots of the tree, all unknown to the pursuer
+and the pursued, a huge she-bear was lying with her two cubs. The Indian
+was the first to arrive at the spot, and as he darted around the roots
+the savage animal with a snarl of rage instantly sprang upon him. The
+growls of the bear and the cries of the warrior instantly produced a
+deafening uproar.
+
+The Indian had been able to draw his knife, and struck at her again and
+again while the bear held him in one of her most fervent hugs. Peleg,
+without waiting to learn the result of the startling and noisy contest,
+instantly turned and ran back over the way he had come.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+AT THE SPRINGS
+
+
+The young scout was breathless and exhausted when at last he arrived
+safely at the camp. His appearance was such that no explanation was
+required by Daniel Boone, who was already there. He instantly noticed
+the wound which Peleg had received on his hand and how blood-stained his
+clothing was. He asked no questions, however, and at once attended to
+the wants of his companion.
+
+In a short time Peleg had recovered sufficiently to enable him to relate
+the story of the adventures which had befallen him.
+
+"You have lost Singing Susan?" suggested Boone.
+
+Peleg nodded in response, but did not speak.
+
+"Can you find the place where you dropped her?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"And the place where the Indian was hugged by the bear?"
+
+Again Peleg nodded.
+
+"If you will tell me where the places are I might go to both of them."
+
+"Very well," said Peleg quickly, "but I shall go with you."
+
+Boone said no more and busied himself in arranging the small packs which
+the two scouts were carrying. It was not long before Peleg declared he
+was ready to accompany his friend, and without a further word they
+departed from their camp.
+
+It was not difficult for the young hunter to find his way to the place
+where the Indian had been seized by the angry mother-bear. Cautiously
+approaching, both men peered intently about them, but they were unable
+to discover any signs of either the warrior or the animal that had
+attacked him. When they advanced to the spot where the tree had been
+uptorn by the roots they found an abundance of footprints of the bear
+and also of the moccasined Indian, but that was all.
+
+"They both got away," said Boone at last.
+
+"Or ate each other up," suggested Peleg with a smile.
+
+"We will look for Singing Susan. You lead the way, Peleg."
+
+Wearied as Peleg was by his recent contest, he nevertheless responded
+promptly, and in a brief time the hunters arrived at the border of the
+stream near which Peleg had been compelled to drop his rifle. When he
+had cast it from him he had tossed it into the nearby bushes, dimly
+thinking that if by chance he should escape he might return and find the
+weapon which he prized so highly. A part of the scout's teachings
+already had taken effect in this forethought of his young comrade. To be
+prepared for any emergency was an essential part of life in the woods.
+As they drew near the spot, Peleg was thinking of the great lesson he
+had learned from Boone. He ran to the bushes, pushed aside the brush and
+drew forth his gun with some pride. A smile lighted the face of Boone as
+he nodded his head in approval of the forethought of his young friend,
+and advancing, he extended his hand to inspect the weapon.
+
+"What happened to the gun?" he inquired, as he marked the condition of
+the stock.
+
+"I struck the skull of the Indian."
+
+"'Twas a hard blow, son, and I have slight doubt the Indian's head is
+aching."
+
+"If it had not been for that, I should not be here to tell you about it
+now."
+
+"No one can say about that. You _are_ here, Peleg, and we must act upon
+that which _is_ rather than upon what might have been. Indeed, I have
+long since learned to accept my life with that understanding. I had
+nothing to say about when I should come into the world, and I have as
+little to say about when I shall leave it. The only part I can guide is
+that which is in between. I can fix this stock," he added, "and soon we
+shall have Susan singing again. We will push forward a little farther
+and find some place where we can camp for the night. A good sleep will
+do you more good than anything else, though first I must attend again to
+that hand of yours."
+
+Selecting a linen bandage, a small supply of which Boone always carried
+with him on his expeditions, he gathered some leaves of the witch-hazel
+plant and, pounding them to a pulp, spread them upon the cloth.
+Thoroughly washing the wounded hand of Peleg, he then bound the cloth
+and pulp of the leaves upon the wound, saying as he did so: "In a week
+you will be as good as new."
+
+As soon as this task had been accomplished the journey was resumed,
+although only two miles was covered before Boone was convinced that his
+companion was too weary to proceed farther.
+
+The following day, although Peleg's hand still was sore from his wound,
+he found little difficulty in carrying his rifle, for the great scout
+had been successful in restoring Singing Susan to her former efficient
+condition.
+
+Increasing signs of the presence of the Indians were seen, and once
+Boone turned aside from his pathway when an old canoe was found, which
+with a little effort he was able to patch up.
+
+"I am fearful of the water," he said, "for I cannot swim. Can you, son?"
+
+"Yes, sir," replied Peleg, glancing up in astonishment at this
+acknowledgment of his friend's one weakness.
+
+"It is well you can," said Boone with a smile. "I never was able to get
+the knack. You will have to be the leader now. We can go down this
+stream five or six miles, perhaps more, before we strike across the
+country again."
+
+"How is it," inquired Peleg, "that you find your way through the
+forests? I am never afraid of being lost in any of the woods where I
+have been before, but I should not be sure of myself in trying to go to
+the Falls of the Ohio, although even now we must be within a few days of
+the place."
+
+Boone smiled as he replied: "There are some things which a man can learn
+and some which must be born in him to help him in the forests. A man who
+can sing, if he will go to the singing schools faithfully, may become a
+better singer; but if he has no voice to begin with, there is little use
+in his saying _do, ra, me, fa, so, la, si, do_ over and over again. So
+it is in the woods. I watch the birds, the trees, and the leaves, as
+well as the lay of the land, but beyond all that there is a part which
+I cannot explain. It must be my nature, just the same as it is for a
+fish to live in the water or a bee to seek the flowers."
+
+"Do you think I ever can learn?"
+
+"I do, son. I have marked you often and know that you have the ability
+as well as the will to learn."
+
+Signs of the presence of Indians increased as the two scouts proceeded.
+It seemed to Boone that the Indians were moving eastward, a matter which
+promised ill for the scattered settlements on the border.
+
+However, the days passed, and Boone and his companion evaded their foes,
+and on the twenty-ninth day arrived at the Falls of the Ohio, whither
+Governor Dunmore had directed them to go.
+
+Only once had Daniel Boone referred to the purpose of his journey, and
+then he had explained to Peleg how the Governor had become exceedingly
+anxious concerning the safety of the surveyors. Cut off as they were in
+their faraway camp from the help of others, they also were unaware that
+the hunters were bringing word of the increasing restlessness among the
+Indians. Some of the scattered settlers recently had been killed by the
+angry tribes, and the rumours and reports all had it that the Shawnees,
+Delawares, and Wyandottes were becoming more and more savage in their
+attacks upon the whites, upon whom they now looked with deadly hatred
+because they were making homes in their land.
+
+The coming of Daniel Boone and his young companion aroused much interest
+among the band of surveyors whose headquarters were at the Falls of the
+Ohio. Several log houses had been erected by them there, and the little
+settlement bore more evidences of refinement than one usually found on
+the frontier. There were many questions asked and a deep interest shown
+in the doings of the great world beyond, with which the lonely men had
+had nothing to do for many long months.
+
+When, however, Daniel Boone explained the purpose of his coming, most of
+the men received his word with incredulity. They acknowledged that
+occasionally they had seen a few Indians, but not yet had they been
+molested, nor had any threats been made against their remaining where
+they were.
+
+To such statements the great scout made no reply except to repeat the
+reason for his coming, and the anxiety of Governor Dunmore in their
+behalf.
+
+"We will sleep over it and let you know to-morrow," declared one of the
+men laughingly. "You don't think anything will happen to-night, do you?"
+
+"I am willing to wait until the morrow," said Boone quietly. "You must
+decide, however, within two days what you will do."
+
+There was one young member of the surveyors' party who apparently had
+not been long in the new world. He explained to Peleg, to whom he was
+drawn because they were nearly of the same age, that he had come to
+America to make a fortune. "I am the youngest son of Earl Russell. In
+England the younger boys do not have many opportunities, because all the
+property is left to the oldest son, so I have come to America, and hope
+to secure for myself some great tracts of land over here. They may not
+be valuable to-day or in the near future, but some time, as surely as
+the sun rises, they will be of great worth. You must come with me," he
+continued, "early to-morrow morning to Fontainebleau."
+
+"Where?" demanded Peleg.
+
+"Fontainebleau."
+
+"Where is that, and what is it?" demanded the young scout.
+
+"It is a name we have given to a spring about a mile from here on the
+opposite side of the river. Five or six of us go there every morning and
+drink the waters. We have an idea that they are better than the waters
+of the real Fontainebleau."
+
+"Where is that?"
+
+The young Englishman laughed as he said: "'Tis plain that you have
+never travelled in France."
+
+"I never did," acknowledged Peleg. "I have travelled in the woods,
+though, and before we get back to the settlement some of you may be glad
+that Daniel Boone and I have had that experience."
+
+The young Englishman again laughed, but made no reply.
+
+In the morning, however, he, together with six other men, stopped at the
+little cabin in which Daniel Boone and Peleg had been spending the
+night, and in response to his invitation the young scout joined the
+party when they explained that they were going to Fontainebleau to drink
+of its marvellous waters.
+
+The carelessness and indifference of the men somewhat alarmed Peleg, who
+was still under the influence of his recent companion, the scout. Daniel
+Boone had impressed upon the boy the need of continual vigilance and
+silence. No one could say when danger might suddenly present itself.
+Frequently he recalled the escape he had had through the shot which
+James Boone in the preceding year had fired at the panther crouching
+above his head. This always impressed the young woodsman afresh with the
+need of continual care. Nevertheless he enjoyed the conversation of the
+men with whom he was walking, though he himself seldom spoke.
+
+When the little party arrived at the spring the waters caused Peleg to
+express his disgust. Heavily charged with sulphur and various other
+chemicals, the taste was one that did not appeal to the young scout. His
+companions, however, professed to enjoy the water, which was
+marvellously clear and sparkling, and drank deeply, casting themselves
+prostrate upon the ground as they did so, and drinking from the spring.
+
+Three of them were in this position and the other four were urging their
+companions to make haste, when suddenly wild yells arose that seemed to
+come from every direction at once. Before the startled men were fully
+aware of what was occurring a band of Indians rushed from the woods,
+some armed with rifles and others using their bows and arrows.
+
+Only part of the little band of surveyors had been armed when they had
+started that morning from the settlement for the spring at
+Fontainebleau. The young scout, however, who was mindful of the
+teachings of his leader, had brought Singing Susan with him. As Peleg
+was about to fire, an arrow pierced the young Englishman between the
+shoulder blades, and with a loud cry he fell to the ground.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+A TERRIFIED BAND
+
+
+It was Peleg's first experience in taking command of a party. The
+helplessness of the surveyors, however, and the fact that they all
+turned to him for directions, at once decided the young scout to lead,
+and he well knew there was no time to be lost.
+
+In his position he was aware also that the Englishman was in dire
+distress, and apparently he was the only one who could aid him. The
+decision to act had come to the young scout promptly, and he had almost
+instinctively raised Singing Susan to his shoulder and fired at the
+Indians, whom he could see darting from tree to tree and plainly trying
+to come nearer the spring.
+
+Before he reloaded his gun Peleg turned to his companions, two of whom
+were already disappearing among the trees in the distance.
+
+"Come here," he said in a low voice. "Help me with this man."
+
+Two of the young surveyors obeyed his word, and with all speed the trio
+carried the body of their fallen comrade within the shelter of the
+forest. When Peleg looked down into the face of the suffering man he was
+convinced that his wound was fatal.
+
+It would never do, however, to leave the man in his misery. Turning to
+his companions he called: "Retreat cautiously! Use the tree trunks for
+shelter! Take this man with you!"
+
+While speaking, the young scout hastily reloaded his gun. This task
+completed, he turned once more to his companions and said: "Take the man
+now and go! Do as I tell you! I shall bring up the rear and do my best
+to stave off the Indians. They are sure to follow us, though I do not
+think there are more than eight or ten in the whole band."
+
+Three of the men who were members of the party which had visited the
+spring had brought their guns with them. Two of these weapons were in
+the hands of the men who were to carry the young surveyor back to the
+settlement.
+
+Seizing these weapons and making certain that all were loaded and
+primed, Peleg darted behind a huge maple, from which he was able to see
+that the Indians were stealthily approaching. No cry had been heard from
+them since the loud whoop they had given when first they had darted into
+the open space and fired upon the unsuspecting men.
+
+Peleg waited until the men who were carrying the surveyor had had an
+opportunity to withdraw to a considerable distance among the trees, and
+as he saw the red men were coming nearer he abruptly fired upon them. He
+first discharged Singing Susan, and then, before the smoke had cleared,
+he fired the other two guns in quick succession.
+
+A low exclamation of pleasure escaped his lips when he saw that his
+shots had taken sufficient effect to cause the Indians hastily to
+disappear from sight and to send forth several of their noisy
+challenges.
+
+Taking advantage of the favouring opportunity, the young scout reloaded
+his own rifle and, casting the other two guns from him, ran at his
+utmost speed in the direction in which his recent companions had
+disappeared.
+
+As soon as he had overtaken them he was aware that the Indians were
+again closing in upon the retreating band. He was startled to find that
+the red men were moving in the form of a semicircle. By this means they
+doubtless hoped to cut off the men before they could regain the safety
+of the settlement.
+
+Bidding his friends make haste with their burden, Peleg once more fired
+upon the yelling Indians. His main purpose was to try to impress upon
+their minds the fact that the retreating band was armed and prepared to
+defend itself. He was more and more disturbed, however, by his
+increasing fear that their retreat would be cut off, and all three might
+fall into the hands of the yelling savages.
+
+Several times the same maneuvers were followed, Peleg bidding his
+friends, who still were carrying the young surveyor, to precede him on
+their way back to the settlement, while he himself remained behind to
+fire Singing Susan at such of the Indians as exposed themselves. After
+each shot he hastily reloaded his rifle and withdrew to join his
+companions.
+
+After his third shot Peleg was almost persuaded that escape was
+impossible. The semicircle had been extended until he was fearful that
+if the warriors should rush upon them they would enclose the three white
+men.
+
+Still the boy was determined to do his utmost to help the fallen
+surveyor and protect the two men who were bearing their unconscious
+comrade through the forest. In his zeal the young scout had almost
+forgotten his own peril. His attention was divided between the
+retreating party and the Indians who were pressing so swiftly upon them.
+
+Suddenly Peleg said to himself, as he heard the report of a rifle far
+away, "There is Daniel Boone! If he and the other surveyors have come
+out to help us we may stand a little better chance of getting out of
+this alive."
+
+The report of the rifle which had been heard by Peleg was speedily
+followed by the sound of other guns. Convinced by what he had heard that
+help was at hand, Peleg regretted the loss of the guns which he had cast
+aside in his fear that they might hinder him and his friends in their
+efforts to withdraw from the spring. Soon the reports of the guns were
+repeated, and as Peleg sent forth his wild halloo he was answered by a
+cry which he recognized as coming from Daniel Boone himself.
+
+It was not long before Peleg saw the scout approaching through the
+forest. The silent man was thoroughly aroused. Usually quiet in his
+manner and deliberate in his actions, it now seemed as if his every
+nerve was tingling in his excitement. Sheltered behind nearby trees,
+Peleg watched the approaching surveyors, some of whom were loading their
+rifles rapidly, while others were firing at the enemy.
+
+It was soon evident that the Indians, disheartened by this fresh attack,
+were withdrawing into the forest.
+
+As soon as Daniel Boone saw Peleg and the two men approaching with their
+burden, his plan instantly changed. Summoning the young scout, he said,
+"Send all the rest of them back to the settlement as fast as they can
+go. You and I, lad, are the only ones prepared, so we are the only ones
+who can protect these men."
+
+"Will the Indians leave?" inquired Peleg in a low voice.
+
+"For a time, yes," answered Daniel Boone. "If the surveyors make haste
+they will be able to get back to the settlement. You and I, lad, must
+try to hold these Indians off until our friends have had time to carry
+back the man who was shot. Was he killed?"
+
+"No. He was alive when I saw him last, but I do not think he will live
+long."
+
+"Was it an arrow?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+Daniel Boone nodded his head and made no further reply. Darting from
+tree to tree, the two scouts stealthily made their way through the
+forest in the direction in which their friends had gone.
+
+Apparently there was no longer any peril of an immediate attack by the
+Indians. None of them appeared within sight, and the sound of their wild
+cries no longer was heard.
+
+Alternately stopping and retreating, Daniel Boone and his young
+companion at last regained the shelter of the settlement at the Falls of
+the Ohio.
+
+The little houses of logs were well protected, and as there was an
+abundance of ammunition as well as of food on hand, the great scout said
+to Peleg: "We could hold out here two months if it should be necessary."
+
+"But we are not to stay here, are we?" inquired Peleg anxiously.
+
+"No. We must leave just as soon as we can do so safely."
+
+The conversation was interrupted by the entrance of the surveyors in a
+body. Fear, and even panic, was manifest in the face of every one. The
+unexpected attack upon their comrade had confirmed the warning which
+Governor Dunmore had sent by the two scouts, and not only did no one
+want to remain, but all were eager to be gone at once.
+
+"We must start to-night," said MacHale, the oldest of the party. "We
+must not remain!"
+
+"Not to-night," said Daniel Boone quietly.
+
+"Why not?"
+
+"It is as necessary for us to know our way as it is for us to retreat."
+
+"But you found your way here! Why can you not find it when you go back?"
+
+"I can," replied Boone quietly. "It is not for myself I fear. I would
+not be the leader of a party unfamiliar with the woods and facing what
+we must if we leave here in the night. You must be prepared to start as
+soon as the gray of dawn appears."
+
+"But we want to go before!" persisted the surveyor.
+
+Boone quietly shook his head and gave no further explanation. The matter
+was decided, and plainly the scout thought there was nothing more to be
+said. Ignoring the anger as well as the alarm of the surveyors, the
+great scout at once busied himself in preparing for the departure which
+would not take place until the following morning. The services of Boone,
+however, were not required in caring for the wounded surveyor, because
+life had fled before the party regained the settlement.
+
+There was a hasty burial in the dim light, and then Boone bade his
+companions obtain such sleep as they could, he himself preparing to
+serve as guard throughout the night.
+
+At last, however, he consented to the pleadings of Peleg and permitted
+the lad to keep watch during the earlier hours. As soon as this had been
+decided Boone cast himself upon the ground and, apparently confiding in
+the ability of Peleg to protect the camp, was soon sleeping soundly.
+
+Just before daybreak the entire band departed from the Falls of the
+Ohio. In advance went Daniel Boone as guide, while Peleg was to serve as
+the rear guard.
+
+"It is a long race," the scout explained to his companions. "We have
+four hundred miles to cross before we arrive at the settlement on the
+Clinch River. Our safety depends largely upon the promptness with which
+you do my bidding. If there is one of you who is not willing to obey me
+in every particular I shall greatly prefer to have him go by himself."
+
+Every member of the party, however, assured the scout that his word was
+to be law and that every one would implicitly follow his directions
+throughout the long journey. When daylight came it was manifest in the
+faces of the surveyors that the terror of the forest was still strong
+upon them. Every man was armed, and every one carried a small pack upon
+his back.
+
+It was impossible to make as good time on the return as had been made by
+Boone and Peleg in the journey to the Falls. However, both hunters were
+urgent and seldom stopped even when heavy storms came upon them.
+
+At last, when the long journey had been safely made, and the settlement
+on the Clinch River had been gained, the spirits of the surveyors
+revived, although they were free to declare that it was the care and
+wisdom of Boone and his young companion which had brought them safely
+through the wilderness.
+
+Nearly eight hundred miles had been covered by the two scouts in their
+long journey, and only sixty-two days had been required to complete it.
+
+Boone and his companion, however, were not to be permitted to rest long.
+Less than a week had elapsed after their return when Boone called Peleg
+aside one morning and explained to him that a new project, and one still
+more perilous than that through which they had safely come, was now to
+be undertaken.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+THE ADVENTURE OF THE SCHOOLMASTER
+
+
+"Peleg," said the great scout, "Governor Dunmore has sent another
+request to me."
+
+"Has he?" inquired Peleg eagerly.
+
+In spite of the perils and labours of the long journey which had been
+made to the Falls of the Ohio, Peleg was eager to be with Daniel Boone
+wherever he might be. The boy's admiration for his friend had increased
+with every passing day. The coolness and calmness of the great scout,
+his gentleness and consideration of others, his fearlessness in time of
+peril, the readiness with which he met every event, and above all the
+conviction which held him that he was divinely called to be a pathfinder
+for the coming generations, all had made a deep impression upon his
+young companion. Peleg was not without hope, too, that somehow he was
+coming to hold a place in the interest and affection of the man which
+once had been held by his son James.
+
+"Yes," continued Boone thoughtfully, "the Governor has given me the
+command of three garrisons in the campaign which is to be made against
+the Shawnees."
+
+"When do you go?" queried Peleg.
+
+"Immediately--that is, if I can persuade you to look after my family
+while I am absent. Israel is beginning to feel that he is almost old
+enough to take the place of his brother James, but I shall feel very
+much more at ease if I can go with the assurance that you will be
+looking out for the welfare of my wife and children."
+
+Striving to repress the disappointment which he felt at the words of his
+friend, Peleg said quietly, "You know, sir, that I shall be willing to
+do all in my power for you at any time. I do not know, but----"
+
+The rare smile known only to his closest friends appeared for a moment
+on the strong face of the hunter as he shook his head and said: "Nay,
+Peleg, not this time. I fancy there will be other and perhaps greater
+work soon to be done, and in that you shall have your share. The time is
+coming when I hope to take my family again to that marvellous region I
+have found in Kantuckee. No land I have ever seen can compare with it.
+There I would live and there I would die. Meanwhile I must do my part in
+trying to make the lives of these hardly beset settlers a little safer."
+
+"You may depend upon me to do my best," said Peleg cordially.
+
+"That is all I need to know, lad, and I shall be at ease while I am
+gone."
+
+The great scout immediately departed from the little shop which Peleg
+had built and in which he was accustomed to make or repair the various
+utensils used by the household of Daniel Boone. Here he had fashioned
+Singing Susan, and in this place he had rebuilt his gun after his return
+from the long journey he had made with the scout and in which, as we
+know, the rifle had suffered from the blow of the tomahawk which the
+huge Indian had hurled at him.
+
+A moment Peleg stood in the doorway watching the scout as he departed.
+The expression of the lad's face plainly showed his love and admiration
+for the man. The calm courage of Boone, softened as it was by his
+gentleness and guided by his prudence, was crowned by a marvellous
+modesty. His robust, somewhat uncouth body showed the great strength of
+the hunter, while it concealed his quickness. His manner was dignified,
+almost cold, so silent and quiet was he under ordinary circumstances.
+His face, however, homely though it was, was at times lighted by an
+expression that was exceedingly kind and tender. He seldom spoke, and
+almost never of himself, except in reply to direct questions.
+
+Several times during the months that followed Daniel Boone returned to
+the little settlement on the Clinch, to visit his family and make
+certain of their safety. On each occasion he was warm in his expressions
+of gratitude to Peleg for the care which he was taking of those who were
+in a measure dependent upon him.
+
+There was work to be done every day, and the time passed rapidly for the
+young scout. One day, while he was busy in his little shop fashioning a
+new hunting knife, he was suddenly interrupted by the voice of Mrs.
+Boone. "Peleg! Peleg!" she called. "Come! Come!"
+
+Instantly running toward the log house, Peleg was met by the frightened
+woman, who, touching him on the arm, said: "Do you hear that sound? What
+is it?"
+
+Peleg turned abruptly toward the log schoolhouse and listened intently.
+From within the rude little building sounds such as he never before had
+heard were issuing. There seemed to be snarls and growls such as a wild
+beast might have emitted, and mingled with these were cries and screams
+as of some one in dire distress.
+
+A moment served to convince the young scout that either Schoolmaster
+Hargrave was in trouble, or some of the school children were in peril;
+and he darted into his little shop, returning with Singing Susan in his
+hands.
+
+Swiftly as he ran toward the little building, which was not more than
+two hundred and fifty feet away, when he arrived he discovered that
+already several of the women from the settlement were there in advance
+of him, and with terror-stricken faces were looking first within the
+schoolhouse, and then to the road for help.
+
+"What is it?" demanded Peleg, as he ran to the door.
+
+"We do not know. We cannot tell," answered one of the women. "It may be
+evil spirits." She was almost hysterical, and convinced that he could
+obtain no information from her, Peleg pushed back the door and entered
+the room.
+
+The sight which greeted his eyes was more perplexing than startling. He
+saw Schoolmaster Hargrave leaning against one corner of the rude desk
+over which he presided, his face plainly expressing agony or fear; Peleg
+was unable to determine which feeling predominated.
+
+"What is it, Master Hargrave?" called the boy anxiously.
+
+In reply no articulate words were spoken; but a scream was followed by a
+groan, and in the midst of it all were also sounds like the gasping and
+snarling of some wild beast. The suffering of the man was manifest, but
+the cause was nowhere to be seen.
+
+There flashed into the mind of the young hunter the suggestion which
+Mistress Horan had made that evil spirits were the cause of the
+commotion. Such beliefs were not uncommon at the time, and although
+Peleg had never shared in the superstitions of the more ignorant people,
+nevertheless the mystery of the terrifying sounds, as well as the
+expression of Schoolmaster Hargrave's face, caused even the young hunter
+to hesitate.
+
+"What is it, Master Hargrave?" he shouted, for the uproar still
+continued.
+
+"Oh-h-h-h! Help me! Help me!"
+
+The cries of the schoolmaster were interrupted by strange noises, that
+still appeared to come from within the desk. Moans and cries and snarls,
+such as a wild beast might have emitted, were plainly to be
+distinguished in the midst of the uproar.
+
+Peleg had stopped a few feet in front of the desk, and in amazement was
+watching the man before him. Apparently the schoolmaster was struggling
+and striving with some unseen body or person, and with intense effort he
+had grasped both sides of the desk and held it with all his strength, as
+if he was fearful it might escape. In one hand he also held a
+cylindrical ruler.
+
+At this moment Mrs. Horan, who had gained sufficient courage to enter
+the building, advanced to Peleg's side. "I fear 'tis sick the man is,"
+she said. Turning to the schoolmaster she suggested in a loud whisper:
+"If 'tis colic you are suffering from, Master Hargrave, I would
+recommend----"
+
+Her recommendation, however, was interrupted by a terrible scream from
+the suffering man.
+
+"'Tis good for you," said the kind-hearted woman once more. The
+schoolmaster, however, still writhed as if in great agony and looked at
+the woman with an expression that might have quieted the tongue of a
+less courageous woman than Mrs. Horan.
+
+"Why do you cling to the desk in that manner?" demanded the woman.
+
+The agony in the expression of the schoolmaster's face seemed to be
+deepened by the question, but he made no response.
+
+"What's the matter, Master Hargrave?" demanded the woman once more.
+"'Tis Peleg and I who are here to help you."
+
+Suddenly from the lips of the tormented man came the cry, "I have caught
+a cat!" Perspiration was streaming from his face, and his manner,
+expressive of fright, agony, and fatigue combined, made his words
+scarcely recognizable.
+
+Peleg glanced behind him and saw that many more of the neighbours had
+arrived and were curiously standing within the room at a safe distance
+from the desk, watching the actions of the man, who still writhed and
+twisted as he clung to the desk in front of him.
+
+The young hunter darted around the corner of the rude desk, to discover
+the cause of all the trouble. He first saw that a part of the clothing
+of the unfortunate man had been torn from his body, which was pressed
+against the edge of the desk. Closer inspection showed that the teeth of
+a huge "cat," or lynx, were fastened in the side of the schoolmaster.
+Bringing his gun to his shoulder the scout was about to fire, when the
+fear of Master Hargrave became stronger even than his sufferings.
+
+"Don't shoot! Don't shoot! You will hit me! Oh-h-h-h!" he screamed,
+still striving to hold his adversary against the edge of the desk.
+
+Disregarding the appeal, Peleg fired, and after a few confused
+struggles, the huge cat was lifeless.
+
+Still the schoolmaster held the body in its place, however, and when his
+sympathetic friends drew him back they were horrified to discover that
+the jaws of the dead lynx were locked about one of his ribs. Several
+minutes elapsed before the man was freed from this death grip.
+
+Meanwhile the assembly in the room had increased, and several children
+that had been brought by their mothers lifted up their voices to add to
+the general confusion.
+
+In the midst of it all, Mrs. Horan was not to be denied the
+satisfaction of her curiosity. Pressing more closely upon the man who
+now had been placed on one of the rude benches almost in a fainting
+condition, she said: "I thought at first, Master Hargrave, that it was
+spirits, but now I see it was just a cat. Why did you fight the lynx in
+that way?"
+
+Ignoring his suffering, the schoolmaster managed to gasp out a tolerably
+full explanation:
+
+"What do you suppose? I was sitting alone at my desk, writing copy for
+the children to use on the morrow, when I heard a noise at the door and
+saw this enormous cat with her forefeet upon the step, every hair
+standing erect and her eyes shining as if they were on fire. My position
+behind the desk at first concealed me from her sight, but a slight
+motion of my chair revealed my presence, and in a moment the cat and I
+were each looking into the eyes of the other."
+
+Master Hargrave stopped to recover his breath, and aware of the interest
+of his hearers, for all the visitors now had gathered about him, he
+resumed his story: "I had heard much from hunters concerning the power
+of the human eye to quell the fury of wild beasts. Accordingly, I
+frowned savagely at my visitor. Apparently, however, she was not
+alarmed. Her eyes flashed fire and she began to gnash her teeth,
+seemingly bent upon serious hostilities. Aware of my danger, I
+immediately made great haste and snatched this cylindrical ruler from
+the desk, but the wildcat was too quick for me."
+
+"Why didn't you hit her?"
+
+"I had nothing but the ruler with which to strike; besides, she was too
+quick. Springing upon me with all the proverbial ferocity and activity
+of her tribe, she fastened upon my side with her teeth and began to rend
+and tear with her claws like unto a fury. In vain did I strive to
+disengage her. Her teeth seemed to be fastened about my ribs, and all my
+efforts served but to enrage her the more.
+
+"When I saw the blood flowing so copiously from my wounded side I became
+seriously alarmed, and as a last resort threw myself upon the edge of
+the desk and with the entire weight of my body pressed the animal
+against a sharp corner. It was at this moment that the cat began to
+utter the most discordant cries to which I ever listened, and as
+doubtless I was somewhat excited at the time and lost a measure of my
+self-control, I have no question that we engaged in a duet that must
+have resounded loudly throughout the settlement."
+
+"That's enough of the story," said Peleg. "We have killed the cat and we
+shall now take you and put you in bed."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+AN ATTACK
+
+
+Several weeks elapsed before the schoolmaster recovered sufficiently
+from his wounds to enable him to resume his task.
+
+It was now March, 1775, and Daniel Boone had returned to the settlement
+on the Clinch. The task which Governor Dunmore had assigned him had been
+accomplished. He found Peleg and the members of his family engaged in
+their preparations for the spring work.
+
+At the close of the first day after his homecoming, the great scout once
+more had an interview with Peleg. "I have just come from Watage," he
+explained when no one was near, "where there has been an assembly of the
+Cherokees. I went at the request of a gentleman named Henderson, who is
+acting for several other men as well as for himself. He desired me to
+represent him in the purchase of land south of the river of Kantuckee. I
+did as he requested, and arrangements for the purchase of all the land
+as far as the Tennessee River were completed."
+
+"Why did Mr. Henderson----"
+
+"Colonel Henderson," broke in the scout; "Colonel Richard Henderson."
+
+"Why did Colonel Richard Henderson," repeated Peleg, "and the other
+gentlemen wish to purchase so much land?"
+
+"Because they had learned of the fertility of the soil through the
+reports which my brother and I had given them. In a way I am to be their
+agent."
+
+"Did the Cherokees sell to him?"
+
+"They did. I fancy they were glad to part with an empty title for a
+solid though moderate recompense. Trouble arose, though, when Colonel
+Henderson and his friends prepared to take possession, relying upon the
+validity of the deed which the Indians had given them. Unfortunately,
+the land lies within the limits of Virginia, according to the old
+charter which King James gave, and I understand that the Virginians are
+claiming for themselves the privilege of purchasing the title to all
+land which the Indians held within the limits of their state. Already
+the treaty of Colonel Henderson has been pronounced null and void as far
+as he is concerned, but the Virginians declare that the title given by
+the Cherokees is valid, and that they will assume the rights. That is a
+very peculiar method of dealing, according to my light. But 'tis not
+concerning that, lad, that I would speak to you to-day."
+
+The scout was silent a moment, and Peleg, interested far more than his
+quiet manner betrayed, looked eagerly into the face of his friend,
+waiting for him to explain.
+
+"I agreed," resumed Boone, "to take a band of men with me and mark out
+or clear a road to this region in Kantuckee."
+
+"A road?" asked Peleg in surprise.
+
+"Yes, a road over which packhorses and wagons can be driven. It will
+require patience and much labour, but the reward will be great. Whenever
+I think of that marvellous country and of the possibilities contained in
+it for families like my own, I am eager to open the way to it. I am
+authorized by Colonel Henderson to say that he will pay thirty-three
+cents per day to every man whom I may select to be of our company."
+
+"When do we go?" inquired Peleg eagerly.
+
+"On the day after to-morrow. How is Singing Susan?" inquired Boone with
+a smile.
+
+"She is doing famously. I have gained a reputation in the settlement for
+being a better shot than I would be warranted in claiming to be, unless
+I had the song of Susan to help me."
+
+"That is good," said Boone cordially. "Now if you can secure an axe that
+will render you as efficient service in its way as Singing Susan does
+in hers, you will be well equipped for our expedition. It is important
+that we make haste, if the way is to be opened in time for settlers to
+sow any crops this spring."
+
+Hard as it was for Daniel Boone to leave his family again in charge of
+Israel and Samuel, nevertheless his strong feeling that he was simply an
+instrument being used to further the advance of the rapidly growing
+nation in the American colonies was sufficient to induce him to accept
+this task. In addition, his wife shared the same conviction. She, too,
+was eager for him to continue his labours, and in spite of the anxiety
+she would suffer during his absence, she urged him to accept the offer
+which Colonel Henderson had made.
+
+At the appointed time a band of twenty-five men, every one fully armed
+and all equipped with axes, departed from the settlement on the Clinch.
+Confidence in their leader and the hope that not only would they be able
+to open a way into the marvellous land, but that their own families also
+might share in the reward, made all the men eager to go. It was not
+believed that the task would require many weeks, but the necessity of
+preparing the soil and planting some crops before the summer came was an
+inducement for haste.
+
+There were places where trees had to be felled, and the ringing of the
+axes was heard all the day long. In other regions, however, very little
+labour was required, because the road, as it was selected, led in its
+winding course around many open ledges and through sparsely wooded
+passes of the hills and mountains.
+
+Nearly three weeks passed and the hardy band of hunters and woodsmen was
+drawing near the region which they were seeking. They had not been
+molested by the Indians, and were beginning to congratulate themselves
+that they were to escape the perils which every day threatened them.
+
+Without warning, one day, however, above the ringing of the axes were
+heard the wild cries of the red men. Darting from the woods, shouting
+and brandishing their guns and hatchets, the Indians suddenly appeared.
+Dodging from tree to tree and firing upon the startled white men, they
+seemed to be on all sides at once.
+
+Instantly the coolness and courage of Daniel Boone became invaluable.
+Though many of his comrades had been surprised and terrified by the
+sudden onslaught, the great scout had held himself prepared for the
+present emergency.
+
+"Run for the trees!" shouted Boone. "Run! Hold your fire until you gain
+cover and then give the rascals your best!" As Boone looked out from his
+own shelter after his rifle had been discharged, he saw several of his
+companions lying dead or wounded upon the ground.
+
+Calmly yet swiftly Boone darted from the protection of the forest, and
+lifting one of the men in his arms bore him back within shelter.
+
+The example of the leader, mindful of the needs of others in the hour of
+his own peril, inspired his companions to similar action, and, in the
+midst of all the turmoil and danger, the other wounded men were rescued.
+It soon was discovered, however, that three of the fallen men were
+already dead.
+
+The temporary withdrawal of the warriors to the forest left the field
+free once more, and Boone turned to his companions and said, "Come with
+me, every one!"
+
+Instantly his followers responded, and, dashing to the place where their
+companions had fallen, they bore the bodies back to a place of safety,
+thankful to find that they had not yet been mutilated.
+
+There was no time for ceremony or for lamentations, and the three who
+had fallen to rise no more were hastily buried in one grave by their
+comrades.
+
+The unexpected attack, following as it had the long days of quiet, was
+seriously disturbing to the roadmakers. That evening there were no
+camp-fires, and guards were established to watch through the night.
+
+When morning came the alarm had not been repeated, and many were
+persuaded that the assault of the previous day was merely the act of a
+desperate band which had attacked the settlers without any preconceived
+plan. Nevertheless Daniel Boone declared that it was necessary to
+maintain a guard throughout the day.
+
+The labour was entered into with zeal, and though a renewal of the
+attack was not made, thoughts of the new peril were in the minds of
+every man, and made all serious. At the request of his followers Boone
+devoted most of his time to scouting in the nearby region, a duty which
+he insisted upon sharing with his younger companion, Peleg.
+
+The sun had dropped below the borders of the forest, and the men were
+congratulating themselves that the day had passed without a renewal of
+hostilities, when suddenly both scouts were seen running swiftly toward
+the place where the men had encamped for the night.
+
+This startling sight was sufficient to arouse every member of the party.
+Every man seized his gun and ran for the shelter of some huge tree.
+
+[Illustration: "Boone quickly rallied his startled followers, and when
+the red men returned the hardy settlers were ready and awaiting their
+coming"]
+
+Boone was wildly gesticulating as he drew near, but his gestures were
+misunderstood by his friends. Before either scout was able to regain the
+place where the pioneers were hiding, there was another wild whoop and
+a band of Indians larger than that which had been seen the previous day
+darted from the woods in the rear of the settlers. Before they were able
+to return the unlooked-for fire, two of their number fell dead from the
+bullets of their enemies, while three more were wounded.
+
+Like a flash the Indians were gone again. But Boone quickly rallied his
+startled followers and when the red men returned, as they did within a
+few minutes, appearing from another section of the forest, the hardy
+settlers were ready and awaiting their coming.
+
+Once more had the careful preparation of Boone for what he thought was
+likely to occur saved his followers and himself from peril.
+
+Several of the Indians fell under the deadly fire of the white men, and
+with loud cries and lamentations the warriors dragged their fallen
+comrades into the forest and once more disappeared.
+
+"Never have I seen the Indians so savage as in these two attacks," said
+Boone soberly to Peleg, after guards had been established for the night
+and the men had stretched themselves on their blankets to obtain such
+sleep as was possible in the midst of the threatening dangers. "They
+seem almost beside themselves with rage."
+
+"Do you still plan to go on?"
+
+"I shall go on," said Boone simply. "The way must be opened for our
+people to gain some of the advantages of this wonderful region toward
+which we are moving. The tribes hereabout are a strange people. I have
+never known Indians more hospitable than are the Cherokees and Shawnees.
+If one brave enters the wigwam of another, even if it be that of a
+stranger, he is deeply offended if he is not given an invitation to eat,
+though he may just have had a meal at his own wigwam. Nor is it
+sufficient on these occasions that the ordinary food be offered him. You
+know the Indians live mostly on venison and hominy, but when a visitor
+comes, sugar, bear's oil, honey, and rum, if they have it, are to be set
+before him."
+
+"Suppose they do not have anything in the house to eat?"
+
+"Then the fact is stated quietly. It is at once accepted as sufficient.
+I was in a wigwam not long ago where the visitor thought the host was
+not as hospitable as he ought to be and he took him severely to task. He
+said: 'You have behaved just like a Dutchman. I shall excuse you this
+time, for you are young, and have been brought up close to the white
+people, but you must remember to behave like a warrior and never be
+caught in such _little_ actions. Great actions alone can ever make a
+great man.' They are a strange people," added Boone thoughtfully. "I saw
+a white man some time ago trying to help in carrying some game which
+the warriors had shot. I shall never forget how the Indians laughed
+when, after the squaws and the boys had started to bring back the meat,
+this white man took a large piece of buffalo meat on his own back. After
+he had gone two or three miles he found it was becoming too heavy for
+him and he threw it down. Then I saw one of the squaws, laughing as if
+it was a huge joke, take the meat which the white man had dropped and
+put it on her own pack, which already was as large as that of the man,
+and carry the double burden back to camp."
+
+"They are not as swift as our men, though," suggested Peleg.
+
+"Not for a short distance," assented Boone, "but they can keep up a pace
+for an almost incredible length of time. I have known Indians who could
+run twelve or fourteen hours without a morsel of food, and then, after a
+light meal and a short rest, start again and go as far as they had
+before they stopped."
+
+"They never do that in fighting, though."
+
+"No, they may keep up a warfare for many years, but they never make a
+prolonged attack. They like a sudden dash such as they made upon us and
+in which those poor fellows were killed. Peleg, I fear the morrow. The
+Shawnees that are watching us see our axes, and they are sure now that
+we are trying to enter their hunting grounds and take away their lands.
+We shall have serious trouble, I fear."
+
+And the following day Boone's fears were confirmed.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+THE WHITE SHAWNEE
+
+
+There was no open attack by the Indians such as had been made
+previously, though the yells of the warriors were frequently heard in
+the distance. It was plain that they were striving to terrorize the
+hardy settlers and make them turn back on their way.
+
+One of the men who had been stationed as a guard was shot early in the
+morning and his mutilated body was not found until Daniel Boone, making
+a tour of the camp, discovered what had befallen his companion.
+
+Returning to the camp, Boone summoned his men, and as soon as they were
+assembled, said to them: "We must stop our work on the road for a time
+and build a fort."
+
+There was an expression of consternation on the faces of some of his
+comrades as they heard this quiet statement from the scout, and, aware
+of what was in their minds, though no one spoke, Daniel Boone continued;
+"It will not require many days. I think a fortnight will be sufficient
+for us to build such a fort as will protect us. We are now almost as
+far on our way as we wish to go. We will begin the work at once."
+
+Whatever disappointment or fears may have been in the minds of his
+companions, no one made any open protest, and the task immediately was
+begun. Certain of the men were assigned to the felling of trees, others
+dug trenches and set the logs in the stockade, which was erected first.
+
+When the stockade had been completed, various cabins were built wherein
+the men might live if they were compelled to seek the refuge of the
+fort.
+
+The defences were erected near a spring of water that promised to be
+never-failing. Nearby was the river, so close to the fort as to enable
+the defenders to escape if flight became necessary. And yet the fort was
+sufficiently far from the banks to prevent an approach by their enemies
+without being discovered.
+
+So steadily did the men labour that Boone's prophecy was fulfilled, and
+when fourteen days had elapsed the little fort was declared to be ready
+for occupancy. The stockade was strong and had been made of the stakes
+fashioned from the trees. One end of each log was sharpened and then all
+were driven into the ground side by side; portholes being provided at
+frequent intervals.
+
+A feeling of intense relief came to the hardly beset men when the work
+was completed. The supreme thought, however, in the mind of the leader,
+was voiced when he explained to Peleg the following day: "It is now
+April, and I must go back to the settlement on the Clinch for my
+family."
+
+"Alone?" inquired Peleg quickly.
+
+"Yes, alone. I must not take one man away from the party here, and I
+shall be doubly anxious for you all while I am gone; but the time has
+come when I may think of my family and myself. In this wonderful land I,
+too, would make my home."
+
+"But will you dare to come back with your family with only you and
+Israel to protect them?"
+
+Boone's face lighted up with the rare smile which occasionally appeared
+upon it as he said: "There will be others, many others, I hope, who will
+join us on our way."
+
+"I never knew the Indians to be so savage as they are now," suggested
+Peleg anxiously.
+
+"That is true," said Boone, "and one cannot altogether blame them. They
+seem to be well-nigh mad in their hatred of us because we have begun to
+build our homes in the land which they planned to keep as their own. If
+it were not for their fear of the 'Long Knives,' as they term us, I
+fancy they would make a desperate assault very soon. As it is, however,
+they have a wholesome feeling of fear mingled with their anger, and
+although you will have to be continually on your guard, I do not
+believe they will venture to attack the fort while I am gone."
+
+Peleg made no reply, and the scout, acting as if the last word had been
+spoken, soon after set forth on his long journey to the Clinch.
+
+During the absence of their leader the men continued their labours,
+felling the trees and clearing the land, until in the immediate vicinity
+of the fort sufficient ground had been made tillable to enable them to
+plant the few seeds which Boone had insisted should be brought with
+them.
+
+The days now were warm, and the delights of the marvellous climate were
+appreciated by all the men.
+
+The only event of special interest that occurred during the absence of
+the scout was the coming of Sam Oliver. As unconcerned as if he had long
+been a member of the company and had earned his thirty-three cents per
+day for his labours, the hunter entered the fort one night and
+composedly received the warm greetings which were given him. It was well
+known that the newcomer was a famous shot, and the coming of even one
+man strengthened the little garrison not a little.
+
+The general line of the defence of the fort was at once mapped out by
+Sam, who without a word assumed the position of leader. It was he who
+arranged the details and the nightly guards which were maintained, and
+it was his word which decided any dispute that arose among the men.
+
+One day Peleg was on guard in the adjacent forest. His watch was almost
+ended and he was about to return to the fort, when he was startled to
+behold an Indian approaching with the palms of both hands extended.
+
+Holding Singing Susan in readiness for instant use, and glancing keenly
+about him into the adjacent forest to make sure that his visitor was
+unaccompanied, Peleg waited patiently for the stranger to approach.
+
+As the warrior drew near Peleg looked at him with increasing
+astonishment. Dressed in the Indian garb, the warrior, who seemed to be
+only about twenty years of age, nevertheless had no features like those
+of the neighbouring tribes. Tanned, the stranger undoubtedly was, but
+nevertheless his skin did not have the bronze colouring of the Indian.
+His figure and even his walk were more like the white man's. And yet in
+every other point the stranger apparently was of the Indian race.
+
+As he drew near Peleg, his face was lighted by a smile as he said, "Me
+broder. Me white Shawnee."
+
+Peleg did not respond, although his astonishment was increased by the
+speech of the approaching warrior.
+
+"Me wan' go home. No fader. Me Shawnee fader. Me wan' white fader.
+White moder dead. White fader dead. No Shawnee fader some more."
+
+The puzzling statements were followed by some words unintelligible to
+Peleg, though he concluded that they were spoken in the Shawnee tongue.
+
+"Do you want to see Daniel Boone?" he inquired.
+
+Gesticulating forcefully, the young man inquired, "He me fader?"
+
+"No."
+
+"White fader dead. White moder dead. Shawnee warriors kill me fader.
+Kill moder. Many moons ago."
+
+"How many?"
+
+A puzzled expression for a moment appeared on the stranger's face, and
+then, comprehending the meaning of the question, he opened and closed
+his hands so many times that, although Peleg was unable to count the
+number of moons indicated, he concluded that the Shawnee was
+approximately of his own age.
+
+"Me live in Shawnee wigwam many moons. Me Shawnee. Me white Shawnee. Me
+have Shawnee fader and Shawnee broder," and he held up two fingers to
+indicate the number of his brothers.
+
+[Illustration: "One of the men who had been stationed as a guard was
+shot early in the morning"]
+
+"What are you doing here? What do you want?" demanded Peleg sharply. He
+was mystified by the statements which had been made and was fearful of
+some trap or treachery on the part of his visitor or his companions, who
+might even then be watching from the nearby forest.
+
+"Me fader, me broder, me go," the visitor replied, pointing to himself.
+"All go trap many beaver, many mink, many muskrat," he added, making a
+circle with his hand to indicate his inability to count the pelts which
+had been taken. "Me broder he wan' go on warpath. He wan' help drive
+palefaces out Kantuckee. Me fader he say he go," nodding his head many
+times to emphasize his statement. "But one night many owls scream and
+cry. He say then no go. Me broder he say go. Me fader say yes."
+
+"Where are they now?"
+
+The young stranger gazed earnestly into the face of his questioner, and
+at last, apparently comprehending his question, turned and waved his
+hand toward the forest to indicate that the men to whom he had referred
+were far away.
+
+"Why are you here? Why do you not go with them?"
+
+"Me wan' see white faces some more. Me wan' find white broder. Me white
+Shawnee, where go? Must see paleface wigwam."
+
+For a moment Peleg was silent as he gazed earnestly into the face of the
+young man who had so strongly impressed him. He was convinced that he
+was indeed white, and he concluded that he must have been adopted by the
+Indians many years ago. As a consequence of his association with the
+Shawnees, doubtless he had almost forgotten the language of his own
+people.
+
+In his statement words unknown to Peleg were spoken, but he had
+understood enough to convince him that either the white Shawnee was
+speaking the truth, or else was trying to set some trap into which the
+defenders of the fort might be drawn.
+
+"Come with me," said the young scout finally. As they turned toward the
+fort they met Sam Oliver, who stopped and gazed in surprise at Peleg's
+companion, and laughed scornfully when he heard the story of the
+stranger.
+
+"You say you and your Shawnee father and brother buried the canoe in
+which you came down the river?" demanded the hunter brutally as he
+turned upon the visitor.
+
+"Bury canoe."
+
+"Then you take us straight to the place where it is. I know well enough
+you are trying to play some sneaking game on us, and if you are, you
+will be the first one to suffer for it. If you try to lead us into any
+trap, no matter what happens to us, I will put a bullet into you."
+
+"No go," pleaded the young warrior.
+
+"You must go!" retorted Sam Oliver harshly.
+
+Peleg sympathized with the stranger. He understood, he thought, the
+desire of the returning white man to shield his foster-father and
+brother. The young hunter was now convinced that his visitor had spoken
+truthfully.
+
+"Sam," he ventured to suggest, "this young brave was stolen when he was
+a little child, and he has lived with his Shawnee father ever since. He
+doesn't want to betray him. You cannot blame him for that, can you?"
+
+"There is only one way to deal with the varmints!" retorted Sam hotly.
+"You might just as well try to make a pet out of a nest of rattlesnakes
+as to try to be friends with an Indian. No, sir! This--whatever he is,
+white man, or red man--he must prove what he has said, and the only way
+for him to do it is to take us to the place where he pretends that canoe
+is buried in the ground."
+
+The brutal manner of the hunter apparently had made a deep impression
+upon the stranger. With manifest reluctance he finally consented to
+conduct the party to the place where the canoe was buried. It was well
+known among the settlers that the Indians, after their voyages on the
+river, buried their light canoes to prevent them from being warped by
+sun and rain.
+
+"You go where owl cry. Owl scream, me fader--iron----" The stranger
+stopped as if he was unable to recollect the word he wished to use,
+making motions with his hands to describe what he wished to say.
+
+Peleg suggested, "Was it an iron kettle?"
+
+A vigorous nod from the stranger indicated that was the word he was
+trying to recall, and he continued, "Me fader hide iron kettle in hole
+in tree. Me show you."
+
+"You wait here," ordered Sam, "while I get two or three more men and we
+will soon look up that kettle."
+
+Peleg suspected that the white Shawnee, in order to delay the quest of
+the hidden canoe and thereby give his foster-father and brother an
+opportunity to escape from the region, had suggested a visit to the tree
+where the cry of the owl had alarmed his father.
+
+In a brief time, however, Sam and his companions returned, and the
+hunter roughly ordered the stranger to lead the way.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+THE HIDDEN CANOE
+
+
+While Sam Oliver had been gone to the fort to secure a few of his
+comrades to accompany him, the young Indian, or white, or white
+Indian--Peleg was uncertain to which class his visitor really
+belonged--entered with apparent confidence into conversation with the
+young scout. In his broken English he related many things concerning the
+life which he had lived in the wigwam of his foster father.
+
+Peleg was impressed by the increasing facility with which the white
+Shawnee, as the young brave preferred to call himself, was using the
+language of the whites.
+
+It may have been that the words he now heard recalled to his mind
+expressions which had almost faded from his memory. At all events he
+talked more freely and with an increasing ability to express himself.
+
+"Me fader hear owl cry. He know from strange cry that some die or be
+pris'ner. He old man. He 'fraid. He say go back up river. Me broder he
+say no. Me say no. Me fader still 'fraid, but he keep him promise."
+
+"What was his promise?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"He say he take us on warpath to help keep palefaces from going into
+Kantuckee. He no wan' go, but he say he go. We all lie down sleep.
+Pretty quick me fader wake up. Me fader wake me broder. Wake me, too."
+
+"What was the trouble?" asked Peleg.
+
+"Me fader have sleep and see----"
+
+"What do you mean, he had a dream?"
+
+"That so," replied the visitor, nodding his head. "Me fader have dream."
+
+"What did he dream?"
+
+"He say we go to Kantuckee, we die. Me fader cry. He no wan' go on
+warpath."
+
+"But you came," suggested Peleg.
+
+His visitor nodded and continued: "Me fader say he keep him promise. But
+he say more. He say we go back to wigwam. Go quick. He good man. Heap
+good man. He keep him promise. Me broder say me fader mus' keep him
+promise now."
+
+"So you came?"
+
+"We go on warpath. Me fader say he go quick. No stay any more where we
+sleep."
+
+"So you started right away, did you?"
+
+"We go on warpath all night. When light come we turn to place where
+white man build fort."
+
+"Are there many Shawnees here?"
+
+The young visitor, nodding, said: "Pretty quick, heap Shawnee come."
+
+He held up three and then four fingers to express the idea that the
+Indian bands were advancing in parties of three or more, and at some
+prearranged place or by some well-known signals the scattered little
+parties would be brought together and one large band formed.
+
+The information was startling to the young scout and seemed to him to be
+altogether probable. It was in accordance with the well-known methods of
+Indian fighting, and agreed with experiences which the young hunter
+already had had.
+
+He deeply regretted the absence of the great leader. The gentleness and
+firmness, the courage and resource of Daniel Boone would be greatly
+needed if the Shawnees attacked the little fort. Boone, however, was not
+near and his help could not be relied upon.
+
+Meanwhile Peleg was awaiting the return of Sam Oliver. He was well aware
+of the excellent qualities which the hunter possessed, and he was
+familiar also with the intense bitterness with which Sam looked upon the
+Indians. For him they possessed no good qualities. They were simply
+enemies of the whites and to be exterminated like the rattlesnake and
+the panther. He recognized no feeling of patriotism on their part, and,
+because the method of their warfare was cruel, he judged their motives
+accordingly.
+
+"Me no wan' go where canoe is," said the young brave earnestly. "Me love
+Shawnee fader. Me no betray him. Him good man. Me fader kind to me. No
+wan' him lose scalp."
+
+"It is too bad," acknowledged Peleg. He was distressed by the fear that
+Sam Oliver and his companions would have little mercy upon the Indian
+father to whom they were compelling the young man to conduct them. In
+his heart there was a desire to help the young stranger who had felt the
+call of his own people so strongly that he had even deserted the family
+which had cared for him since his early childhood.
+
+Peleg's thoughts were interrupted by the return of the hunter and four
+of his comrades. It was evident that all five were suspicious of
+treachery, and also that they were determined to put the strange
+visitor's words to the test.
+
+"Now, then!" ordered Sam, as he turned sharply upon the white Shawnee.
+"You take us straight to that place where you say your canoe was hid."
+
+Apparently unmoved by the brutal demand, the young visitor answered, "Me
+no wan' you hurt me fader. Him good fader. Him take care me."
+
+"Why didn't you stay with him then?" laughed Sam.
+
+"Me wan' see white fader's people, too. Me wan' find white moder's
+people," said the visitor simply.
+
+"You will have time enough to look them up after we have found out
+whether you are telling us the truth or not," declared Sam. "I have my
+suspicions that you are trying to get us into some trap, and as I told
+you before, if you are I shall fill you full of lead the first thing. If
+I find you are trying to trap us, you cannot complain if I do just what
+I tell you I shall do."
+
+"Me no wan' go," repeated the young man.
+
+"You are going whether you want to go or not," retorted Sam Oliver
+brutally. "Are you coming with us, Peleg?" he inquired, turning to the
+young scout.
+
+"I am," said Peleg quietly. He had made his decision instantly in his
+desire to protect or help the young visitor, whose suffering in the
+prospect of being compelled to betray his father had deeply stirred the
+heart of the young hunter. Aware that there was no escape from the
+demand, the white Shawnee turned and led the way into the forest.
+
+The men who were following him were continually alert, suspicious as
+they were of the treachery of their guide, and fearful of the presence
+of other Shawnees in the forest through which they were moving.
+
+The confidence of Sam Oliver, who followed close upon the heels of the
+stranger, in a measure strengthened the courage of his followers.
+
+Peleg, who was next behind the leader, was as observant of the hunter as
+he was of the signs in the woods. He was convinced, too, that the young
+stranger was using time either to delay his followers or to give them an
+opportunity to abandon their demand for him to be false to the
+foster-father who had cared for him since his childhood.
+
+If such thoughts had been in the mind of the young white Shawnee they
+were not expressed and certainly were not fulfilled. There was no
+escaping the demands of Sam Oliver and his companions.
+
+At last, when an hour or more had elapsed, the guide stopped and,
+raising his hand in token of silence, in a low voice explained that they
+were approaching the tree in which the iron kettle had been concealed.
+
+Instantly the demeanour of the settlers changed and they began to creep
+forward more stealthily. Every man was alert to discover the presence of
+the Indian who still might be near the place where the kettle had been
+hidden.
+
+After a few moments Peleg perceived two Indians not far before him.
+Both were seated before a fire cooking some venison. One of the warriors
+was an old man and his companion not much more than a boy.
+
+The guide discovered the two Indians at the same time that Peleg did and
+instantly he became greatly agitated. Once more he turned to Sam Oliver
+and in low tones begged him not to kill the man who had been his
+foster-father nor the other who had been his foster-brother.
+
+"Sam," whispered Peleg, "it will be better for us just to make prisoners
+of these two men. I think we ought to do this. The boy plainly has
+spoken the truth. He did not want to betray his father and his brother,
+and you and I cannot blame him. Take both the Indians prisoners, but do
+not fire upon them."
+
+Aware that Sam was somewhat moved by his plea, Peleg repeated his
+request more urgently and was almost as relieved as the guide when at
+last Sam reluctantly consented.
+
+In accordance with the directions of the hunter the band scattered to
+surround the place where the two unsuspecting Indians were cooking their
+dinner. When all the preliminaries had been completed, Sam Oliver
+stepped forward and in his loudest tones demanded the surrender of both
+men. At the same time his companions darted forward, making a rush upon
+the unarmed warriors.
+
+To the surprise of every one, the old Indian made a desperate
+resistance. With an almost incredible quickness the Indian boy dodged
+his enemies and escaped to the forest. The old man, apparently striving
+to hold back the attacking party, resisted to the utmost of his strength
+until in his rage Sam Oliver raised his rifle to his shoulder and shot
+him.
+
+The recent guide, when he saw his foster-father fall, instantly rushed
+to the spot where the old man was lying. The aged warrior was bleeding
+profusely, but he was still conscious. Flinging himself upon the ground
+beside the prostrate body, with the tears streaming down his cheeks and
+his voice broken by sobs, again and again the white Shawnee spoke to the
+aged warrior. Even Sam Oliver was silent as he saw the grief of their
+guide.
+
+His companions indifferently watched the bereaved boy, but Peleg looked
+away when he saw the old man raise his hand feebly and place it upon the
+head of his adopted son. It was a token of his forgiveness, although his
+few words were not understood by the listening group. The meaning of the
+act, however, was clear to every one.
+
+Soon the old warrior breathed his last, and as soon as Sam Oliver was
+aware that the end had come his sympathy speedily departed. Turning
+once more to the guide and ignoring the grief of the boy, he roughly
+said: "Now take us where that canoe is buried. The other Indian has got
+away from us, and he will probably make straight for the canoe. You lead
+us there about as fast as you can travel and we will try to head him off
+before he can go down the river!"
+
+In broken utterances the young white Shawnee begged the hunter not to
+enforce this last demand. "Me show where me fader was. Me fader dead. Me
+no show where broder is. Me wan' broder escape. No go broder! No go
+broder!" he besought the hunter earnestly.
+
+Sam Oliver, however, was not to be turned from his decision. "You go
+with us or I shall make you!" he said, and in spite of Peleg's protests
+he turned the young guide's face to the forest and with many threats
+compelled him to lead the way.
+
+Two hours elapsed before they came near the place where the canoe had
+been buried. Creeping cautiously among the trees, the settlers came
+within rifle shot of the spot, and as they peered keenly about them no
+one at first was able to discover the presence of the young Indian.
+
+By the direction of Oliver every man remained in his hiding-place
+waiting for the arrival of the Indian boy, who, Sam was convinced, would
+soon come to the place. This expectation was fulfilled, as in about ten
+minutes the young Indian appeared and started to the sandy shore of the
+river.
+
+Without hesitation he proceeded to the spot where the canoe had been
+hidden and, as he began to dig the sand, the hunter ordered his
+companions to fire upon him. The reports of the five rifles rang out
+together.
+
+The young Shawnee leaped high into the air and fell dead upon the sand.
+Doubtless he never knew of the unwilling treachery of his foster-brother
+by which he and his father had lost their lives.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+GATHERING CLOUDS
+
+
+The grief of the white Shawnee at the death of his foster-brother was
+pitiful to behold. Even Sam Oliver and his companions, who seldom showed
+any sympathy for the Indians, were not unmoved by his agonized cries of
+grief.
+
+In the Shawnee tongue, some words of which all the white men present
+understood, the young stranger poured forth his sorrows. He called upon
+the spirits of his foster-father and brother to wait for him in their
+journey to the happy hunting-grounds. He explained that in no way had
+his treachery been of his own choosing. In spite of his protest, he
+explained, he had been compelled to direct the white men to the place
+where those who were nearest and dearest to him had fallen before their
+fire.
+
+Several minutes elapsed and no one of the settlers spoke. Then Sam
+Oliver said sharply: "We have had enough of this! I feel just about as
+guilty as I do when I shoot a panther cub." Without a further word the
+hunter stepped to the place where the body of the young Indian was
+lying and scalped his victim. Even Peleg, hardened though he was to the
+scenes that were enacted upon the border, shuddered as he saw his
+companion perform this act.
+
+At the urgent request of Peleg the white Shawnee was permitted to return
+with his newly found friend to bury the body of his foster-father, after
+his brother also had received decent burial at his hands.
+
+When this act, in which Peleg had aided, was completed, the young hunter
+turned to his heartbroken companion and said, "You must come to the fort
+with me."
+
+"No go! No go!" wailed the visitor.
+
+"I do not blame you very much," acknowledged Peleg, "but you have no
+other home, and you might just as well come with me. I am sure you will
+be treated kindly, and as soon as Daniel Boone comes back you need have
+no further fears. If you go back to the Shawnees they will think you
+have betrayed your father and brother. Of course I understand that you
+did not do anything of the kind."
+
+"Me do! Me false to me fader," interrupted the white Shawnee, his
+lamentations breaking forth afresh.
+
+"What is your name?" abruptly demanded Peleg.
+
+The reply of his companion sounded to him very like Tontileaugo, but
+although it was repeated several times Peleg was unable to pronounce it
+distinctly.
+
+"I might call you Tonti, and I might call you Henry. Which do you like
+better?"
+
+"No call Tonti."
+
+"Then I will call you Henry. Don't you remember what your name was when
+you were a white boy?"
+
+"Henry" shook his head, although plainly he was striving to recall the
+name which belonged to the years that were now dim in his memory.
+
+"You come with me," said Peleg.
+
+Together the two boys returned to the fort. Neither of them spoke until
+they entered within the stockade, where the men of the settlement were
+assembled listening to Sam Oliver's dramatic description of the events
+which had just taken place.
+
+The sight of the hunter seemed to revive the sorrow of Henry, as Peleg
+henceforth called the young stranger, and bring back recollections of
+his own, unwilling treachery to the family which had been kind to him
+since the time of his adoption into the tribe.
+
+However, Peleg did his utmost to shield his friend, to whom his heart
+went out in strong sympathy.
+
+"What you goin' to do with your friend?" laughed Sam as he spoke to
+Peleg when the group at last scattered.
+
+"I am going to take care of him," replied Peleg quietly.
+
+"Make a pet of him, are you? The next rattler I find or the next wolf's
+cub I run across I will bring back to you, lad, and let you make a pet
+of that, too. The only trouble is that a rattlesnake is kinder at heart
+than an Indian."
+
+Peleg shook his head but did not reply to this statement of the hunter.
+
+"It is true, what I am tellin' you," continued Sam, as if somehow he was
+striving to justify himself. "It's got to be extermination. Either you
+kill the redskins or they will kill you. There isn't room for both in
+the same land. They are trying to kill us off, and I am not one to sit
+down quietly and invite them to bring their tomahawks and brain me. If I
+can get the drop on them before they can get it on me, that's all to my
+advantage."
+
+"I think Henry feels----" began Peleg.
+
+"Henry? Who's Henry?" broke in Sam Oliver.
+
+"That's the name I have given this boy. He told me what his name was in
+Shawnee, but I could not quite get it. It sounded like Tontileaugo, and
+I offered to call him Tonti for short but he didn't like that."
+
+"You will live to regret the day you ever took him in," warned Sam.
+
+"But he is a white boy," persisted Peleg.
+
+"Born white, but raised an Indian. It doesn't make much difference where
+a man is born. He grows to be like what he sees and is used to. He has
+been brought up to look at things through Indian eyes and he thinks
+Indian thoughts. You will find he will play you false before you are
+done with him."
+
+"I shall have to take my chance as to that," said Peleg. "Daniel Boone
+has told me to try to do something to help somebody every day. He told
+me to start out with that in my mind the first thing every morning."
+
+"You are makin' a mistake, lad," said Sam Oliver more quietly.
+
+It was plain to Peleg that the old hunter was convinced that what he
+said was true, and there had been many experiences along the border to
+justify him in his conclusion. What Sam Oliver had been unable to
+comprehend was that, much as the methods of the Indians in their warfare
+were to be condemned, they still were fighting for the protection of the
+lands which they believed to be their own.
+
+A few days afterward Daniel Boone and his family arrived with their
+little caravan, which included two milch cows and several pack-horses.
+The scout was hilariously greeted by the settlers, and without
+opposition at once resumed his position as leader of the little
+community.
+
+Every one that could share in the labour was busily engaged now
+throughout the long hours of the day. The sound of the axe was
+continually heard, and the few crops which had been planted were
+carefully tended, and, what is more, were giving promise of an abounding
+harvest from the small sowing.
+
+Peleg had related to the great scout the events which had been connected
+with the coming of Henry to the settlements. The young scout's heart was
+still sore for his friend, who now had little to say to any one except
+Peleg. Together the boys toiled in the field or hunted game in the
+forests; but Henry was never stationed as a guard.
+
+"It is this way, lad," said Boone, after he had heard the entire story.
+"Sam Oliver means right, but he has no understanding of the feelings of
+any one else. Because _I_ shoot an Indian and _he_ shoots an Indian, he
+thinks we both act from the same motive. Never yet have I raised my
+rifle to fire at an Indian without feeling in my heart that perhaps he
+might be as fully entitled to the land for which he is struggling as I
+am. I should be glad to share with him. The trouble is he will not share
+with me. There ought to be room enough here for us both; but, now I am
+sure, lad, through the actions of the Indians themselves, it must be
+either white man or red man who will dwell in this wonderful country."
+As he spoke, Daniel Boone looked around him at the wonderful vision that
+spread before his eyes. It was a day late in the summer and a slight
+haze rested over the forests and the fields. The silence which enveloped
+all things was in itself impressive. The cloudless sky and the colours
+of the trees below the hill where the scout and his companion were
+standing combined to impress upon their minds the marvellous beauty of
+the region. "This is destined to be a great land, lad," Boone said
+simply. "It is a wonderful thing that you and I should have a little
+part in opening it up. When I close my eyes, almost I see the homes that
+will be built here, the men and women who will find resting-places here;
+even the voices of the little children who will be born two hundred
+years from now are sounding in my ears." Changing his tone, Boone said:
+"Have you seen anything in your friend to make you feel suspicious of
+him?"
+
+"Never!" said Peleg positively. "Have you?"
+
+"No. There are some men in the settlement, however, who are fearful that
+he may try to betray us when trouble comes."
+
+"He never will," said Peleg positively. "If you had been with me and
+seen him when Sam Oliver shot his foster-father and brother I am sure
+you would never suspect Henry of not being true."
+
+"That is my feeling, lad," said Boone gently. "Do all in your power to
+prevent him from doing anything which might arouse the anger or even the
+suspicions of our men."
+
+"He never talks to Sam Oliver and very seldom to any one else. He stays
+with me all through the day, except when I am on guard."
+
+"You are welcome to bring him to our home any time."
+
+"To stay there?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"That is what I mean, lad," replied the great scout, his face lighting
+up with the occasional smile that appeared upon it. "My wife and
+daughters feel toward him as I do. Do you know that they were the first
+white women ever to stand on the banks of the Kantuckee River?"
+
+"I had not thought of that," replied Peleg.
+
+"There are many others coming soon. Already I have received word that
+Mrs. McGary, Mrs. Hogan, and Mrs. Denton are on their way here."
+
+The arrival soon afterward of more than a score of white men to join the
+settlers aroused great enthusiasm, because now it was confidently
+believed that, after so many had passed safely over the roadway which
+Boone and his companions had opened to the beautiful region, many more
+would surely follow. These expectations were soon fulfilled.
+
+The continued labours of the whites, however, had increased the intense
+hostility of the Indians, who naturally believed all these lands
+belonged to them. When they saw the settlers felling the trees and
+erecting their houses and planting their crops, a spirit of
+determination to drive the whites from the region spread among the
+tribes.
+
+There was just now, however, a lull in the direct warfare. Dusky faces
+occasionally were seen in the forest, but there was no open attack.
+
+Daniel Boone, however, was not to be deceived. He was confident that it
+was simply the hush which at times precedes the coming of the tempest.
+In his own mind he was convinced that the Indians simply were reserving
+their strength until they could rally a sufficient number to make an
+attack worth while. And Boone in the midst of all his labours--for he
+was toiling with the men of the settlement--was forming plans by which
+he hoped to meet the fierce attacks he expected the Shawnees to make.
+
+Frequent sallies upon the men when they were at work in the fields now
+began to be made. While they were plowing, the stealthy warriors did
+their utmost to waylay and shoot them. When they were hunting they were
+chased and sometimes fired upon. Sometimes an Indian would creep up near
+the fort in the night and fire upon the first of the garrison to appear
+in the morning. The little settlement soon was in a state of continual
+and increasing alarm.
+
+Even many of the ordinary duties of life were performed only at great
+risk. But the determination in the hearts of the hardy people to defend
+their new homes in the wonderful region strengthened with every passing
+day.
+
+Many of the settlers every night assembled within the walls of the fort.
+It was the expressed desire of Boone that all should do this, for in
+this way only could the safety of every one be assured. For the most
+part the people responded willingly to his appeal, and after a certain
+eventful night all were willing to heed his counsel. On that particular
+night occurred a struggle with the prowling Indians which made the name
+of one of the heroic women long to be remembered.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+CAPTIVES
+
+
+As has been stated, the opening by Daniel Boone of the road through the
+wilderness to the new settlement, and the safety with which the journey
+thither had been accomplished, were strong inducements now to other
+families to make similar ventures.
+
+Within a few months the little settlement had increased until it
+contained at least one hundred and fifty people. Trees had been felled,
+log houses had been built, and with great energy the new people were
+preparing to make permanent homes in the fertile valleys. Most of the
+newcomers were more than willing to follow the suggestion of Boone, who
+strongly advised all the settlers to seek safety in the shelter of the
+fort when night fell.
+
+The great scout was convinced that the Shawnees were continually
+watching the little community, and that their anger at the determination
+of the settlers to make permanent abodes in the beautiful region was
+steadily increasing. Every day Boone was watchful. Occasionally the red
+men were seen, and not infrequently they crept close enough to the fort,
+or to the men when they were toiling in the forests or fields, to fire
+upon them; but as yet no concerted attack had been made.
+
+Among the families which had come was one named Merrill. Mr. Merrill was
+a vigorous, active young man, and his wife was almost as large as he and
+as strong. So convinced were the two young people of their ability to
+withstand any attack that might be made upon their home that they had
+been somewhat unmindful of the request of the leader.
+
+One morning in December Daniel Boone said to Peleg: "I wish you to go to
+Mr. Merrill's at once, and say to him that I have seen recently some
+signs of the Indians which greatly disturb me. It will not be necessary
+for you to say more, except that I strongly urge the Merrills to comply
+with my suggestion and come nightly to the fort."
+
+Peleg, at the request of the scout, mounted a horse and rode in the
+direction of the little log cabin which the Merrills had erected on the
+extreme border beyond the settlement. He and Henry, accompanied by young
+Israel Boone, who now had become almost a man in size, had been frequent
+visitors at the friendly home of the Merrills. It was therefore with a
+feeling of personal interest as well as anxiety that the young hunter
+hastened to carry out the suggestion of the great scout.
+
+Before he arrived at the little house its appearance suggested to him
+that something was wrong. It was early in the morning and yet no smoke
+was rising from the chimney. The silence which rested over the place
+seemed ominous. So anxious was the young scout that he dismounted before
+he entered the clearing, tied his horse to one of the trees, and then
+cautiously crept forward to discover what might be amiss with the
+household.
+
+When Peleg approached the border of the little clearing he halted and
+peered anxiously before him. No one was seen about the place. Delaying
+only a brief time, and holding Singing Susan in his hands ready for
+instant use if occasion required, Peleg called to the inmates of the
+house.
+
+"Hello!" he called. As no response was given to his hail, he raised his
+voice and called again, "Hello! Mr. Merrill!" Not even the dog, which
+was a great pet of Peleg's, made any response. Several minutes elapsed
+and the silence was still unbroken.
+
+Troubled by his failure to arouse any one, Peleg darted swiftly across
+the clearing and, as he approached the door, stopped in astonishment
+when he beheld near the threshold the bodies of two dead Indians. As he
+looked about he saw bloody trails leading into the forest, which
+indicated that others also had been wounded. In the door a large breach
+had been made which was evidently the work of the Indian tomahawks.
+
+The young scout, his flesh creeping at his discovery, glanced about him
+in every direction, but no sign of friend or enemy could he see. The
+door itself was partly open, and as Peleg stepped within the little
+cabin the odour of burned feathers greeted him.
+
+There were many indications of a struggle which plainly had taken place
+within the room, but it was not until he had passed out to the rear of
+the little building and descried Mrs. Merrill approaching that his full
+courage returned. The resolute woman, her face pale, but otherwise not
+betraying any emotion, approached the young scout and said quietly: "I
+have just buried my husband."
+
+The astonishment of Peleg was so great that he was unable to reply to
+the staggering statement, and then aware that the silent grief of his
+friend was almost more than she could bear, he assisted her within the
+house and soon was listening to her story.
+
+"I did not like to bury my husband so soon," began the woman at last,
+"but I dared not wait to ask any one to come."
+
+"Tell me about it," said Peleg quietly, "unless you think that we had
+better start for the fort right away."
+
+Mrs. Merrill shook her head as she said: "I do not think there is need
+of immediate haste. It must have been about midnight when our dog began
+to growl so savagely that my husband thought something must be wrong. He
+got up, and when he opened the door to find out what the trouble was he
+received the fire of six or seven Indians. He sank to the floor, but
+managed to call me to close the door and let down the bars.
+
+"I don't know that I ever had such a thrilling or awful moment in my
+life! I could hear the savages on the porch, and I was afraid they would
+get to the door before I could shut and bar it. Just as I managed to
+close it and let the bar fall, the Indians began to pound upon it with
+their tomahawks. If I had been one second later they would have got
+inside the house and I should now be where my husband is. They kept
+pounding on the door until they made a large hole in it. They did not
+know that I stood close by, waiting for them with an axe, and as fast as
+one after another--four of them--tried to crawl through, I killed or
+badly wounded every one that made the attempt. They could not force
+their way into the cabin," she added simply.
+
+"How many Indians did you say there were at the door?" inquired Peleg
+in astonishment.
+
+"Four, but only two of them were killed. At least there are only two
+left here, and the others may have got away."
+
+"I saw two," said Peleg. "How many were there altogether?"
+
+"Seven, I think. They kept away from the door after that, but pretty
+soon I heard them up on the roof. I knew then that they were trying to
+get into the house by coming down the chimney."
+
+"I think I know how you kept them out," said Peleg, smiling slightly.
+
+"Yes," replied the woman. "I grabbed the only feather bed we had in our
+cabin and ripped it open, in desperate haste, feeling just as I did when
+I was trying to close the door. I knew if I was not quick enough the
+Shawnees would be in the room. It was fortunate that there were coals on
+the fireplace, and just as soon as I put the feathers on them a blaze
+sprang up and such smoke as I never saw began to pour up the chimney. In
+less than one minute two of the redskins fell into the fireplace, and
+with the same axe with which I had defended the door I quickly put an
+end to both varmints."
+
+"That made six of the seven, then," suggested Peleg.
+
+"Yes. But the seventh wasn't ready to leave yet. He ran around to the
+door and tried to crawl through while I was busy at the chimney. It was
+fortunate that I chanced to see him. He got a gash in the cheek, and you
+ought to have heard him yell when he ran away from the door. Talk to me
+about the Indians never making any fuss! This man was yelling so that
+you might have heard him at the fort. He called me the 'Long Knife
+Squaw,' but I didn't care so long as he cleared out for good and all!
+And I don't believe any of them will come again very soon."
+
+"What are you going to do now?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"I haven't any plans."
+
+"You must come with me to the fort."
+
+"But I must not leave my clearing," said the heroic woman. "Now that my
+husband is dead, I shall have everything to do."
+
+"Come with me, and I will find some one to do what ought to be done
+here."
+
+Yielding to the persuasion of the young scout, Mrs. Merrill accompanied
+him to the fort, where at once some of the women offered her the solace
+of their sympathy.
+
+Peleg at once assembled a little company of men, and led by Daniel Boone
+himself they returned to the scene of the brave woman's struggles. The
+dead Indians were buried and the two cows were driven within the
+stockade.
+
+"It will not be safe," said Daniel Boone to Peleg, "for Mrs. Merrill to
+come back here alone. If she does insist upon coming, either you or
+Israel must be with her. She should be persuaded, however, not to expose
+herself to such dangers as she will meet here."
+
+"She seems to be able to protect herself," said Peleg dryly.
+
+"Indeed she does. I question if there is another woman in our settlement
+who would have been able to do what she did. Single-handed, to keep off
+seven Shawnees! I believe that the story of her bravery will be told to
+your grandchildren, Peleg."
+
+Mrs. Merrill, however, was found to be more reasonable than the great
+scout's fear had warranted. She was quite willing to make her home for
+the present where the peril and the loneliness were not so great as in
+her cabin.
+
+The attacks of the Indians continued, although no party as large as that
+which had attacked the home of the Merrills was seen. The plowmen in the
+fields, the men cutting the timber, and those who separated from their
+fellows while hunting game were continually in danger.
+
+The determination of the whites was as great as that of the Indians,
+and although every one was anxious, no one thought of withdrawing from
+the settlement.
+
+To Daniel Boone himself there came a little later an experience almost
+as thrilling as that which had befallen Mrs. Merrill.
+
+Among the new families was one named Callaway. In this family there was
+a girl of nearly the same age as Daniel's Boone's daughter Jemima. One
+morning, early in the summer, the girls, taking the one canoe which was
+kept near the fort, paddled out upon the river.
+
+"Do not go more than one hundred feet above or below the fort," warned
+Daniel Boone, who stood on the bank watching the girls. Both promised,
+and soon in their light-hearted way were paddling the canoe back and
+forth from shore to shore.
+
+Satisfied that the girls were well within the protection they needed,
+Daniel Boone returned to his labours and no one was left upon the bank
+to watch them.
+
+As the sport continued, and before either of the girls was aware of the
+fact, the light canoe had drifted beyond the points which had been
+designated by the scout as the limits of safety. Discovering some
+flowers along the shore, they pushed the little craft in among the tall
+rushes while they plucked the blossoms they were seeking. The canoe was
+well within the rushes and concealed, as the girls thought, from the
+sight of any one on the bank.
+
+Suddenly the younger girl, emitting a piercing shriek, turned to Jemima
+Boone, and exclaimed: "Look there! Oh, look there!"
+
+As Jemima sharply turned about she saw, creeping through the rushes and
+concealed from the sight of any one on the shore, a huge Shawnee
+warrior, who already had seized the painter of the little craft.
+
+Scream followed scream when the Indian began to pull the canoe toward
+him. In a moment he was joined by several of his dusky comrades. The
+canoe was drawn to the shore and the girls, prisoners of the savages,
+were dragged up the bank.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+THE PURSUIT
+
+
+The screams of the terrified girls were plainly heard at the fort. A
+little company of frightened women and frantic men quickly assembled
+upon the bank, but in spite of the piteous appeals it was too late to
+help the unfortunate prisoners. Four additional Indians appeared and,
+assisting their comrades, seized the girls and with them rushed into the
+wilderness.
+
+The men from the fort who were standing on the bank of the stream were
+unable to cross, the only canoe being now on the opposite shore.
+
+Calling to one another, the men endeavoured to find some one who would
+venture to swim to the other shore. No one volunteered, however, as all
+were afraid that the Indians might return if such an attempt should be
+made. Both Daniel Boone and the father of Miss Callaway were absent from
+the settlement at the time, and it was nearly night when they returned.
+
+Stopping only a moment to comfort his heartbroken wife, Daniel Boone, as
+soon as he was informed, acted promptly and decisively, as was his
+habit. He was well aware that no time should be lost, and fortunately he
+discovered Peleg at that moment returning to the fort.
+
+"The girls have been taken by the Indians," said Boone, suppressing his
+emotion.
+
+"What girls? What do you mean?" inquired Peleg, aghast.
+
+"Jemima and her friend, the Callaway girl."
+
+"When?"
+
+"This noon. I have no time to explain. We must get a party to start
+right away. Find every man you can and I, too, will look about, and we
+will meet here at the fort just as soon as we can get our party
+together."
+
+Darting into the house, Peleg secured Singing Susan, and then, finding
+Israel Boone, who was almost as aroused as his father, the two instantly
+began their search for men who would join the rescue party.
+
+Soon afterward a band of eight men stood with the scout on the bank of
+the Kentucky River near the fort. The quiet of the summer evening was
+unbroken save by the occasional cry of some night-bird. It had been long
+since the screams of the disappearing girls had been heard, but the
+direction from which they had come indicated the way in which to start
+the pursuit.
+
+"How many are here?" inquired Boone, as he glanced about the group.
+
+"Eight," replied Peleg, "including you and Israel."
+
+"We need more, but I shall not wait. We will start at once."
+
+The canoe meanwhile had been secured by one of the boys of the
+settlement who swam across the river at dusk and returned in the little
+craft, paddling with his hand, for the blades had been broken by the
+Indians to delay pursuit.
+
+The men now were ferried across the river, and as soon as every one was
+standing on the opposite bank Daniel Boone again inquired: "Is every one
+prepared?"
+
+Every member of the party declared that he was ready to follow wherever
+the great scout might lead.
+
+Instantly Daniel Boone led the way into the forest. The anxious scout
+was so quiet and self-controlled that an uninformed spectator would
+never have suspected that he was labouring under special stress. Even
+Peleg was astonished at the composed bearing of the man.
+
+Turning to Israel, the young scout remarked: "Your father is saving
+every ounce of his strength for the work ahead of us. He is not wasting
+any time crying."
+
+"He never does," responded Israel proudly. "Do you know, Peleg," young
+Boone said, "there are times when Parson John Lythe preaches to us that
+he speaks of the Great Father of us all, and somehow I always think of
+Him as if He looked somewhat as _my_ father does."
+
+Deeply impressed as Peleg was by the reverence in which the son of
+Daniel Boone held his father, there was no opportunity at the time for
+further conversation.
+
+In Indian file the pursuers advanced, and all soon were running,
+following the custom of the Indians. So skilled was the leader in this
+work that it was well known that he was able for many hours to maintain
+the pace at which he was now moving.
+
+"One time," said Israel to Peleg, "my father ran like this for eight
+hours, then rested two hours, and then ran eight more, and after he had
+taken another rest he made the third stretch of the same number of
+hours."
+
+The leader had not spoken except when in the dim light of the moon he
+was compelled to stop to search for the trail. Once when he halted he
+said to his companions: "The Shawnees are not moving in one body. They
+have broken up into ten parties and are moving in parallel lines."
+
+"Did they expect to throw us off the trail in that way?" asked Israel
+scornfully.
+
+"Doubtless they hoped to. Peleg," inquired Boone, turning to the young
+scout, "how many do you make out were in this band that stole Jemima?"
+
+"About thirty, I should say," replied Peleg.
+
+"It is more nearly thirty-five," declared Boone, as he turned to direct
+his followers to resume the pursuit.
+
+Somehow the night did not prove to be a serious obstacle to the great
+leader. Almost as if by instinct Boone found his way, and the parallel
+trails made by the Indians, instead of throwing the pursuers into
+confusion, really aided them. If the trail was lost in one place it then
+became comparatively easy for the men to scatter and in a brief time
+discover it nearby.
+
+"How far have we come?" Israel inquired of his father when a halt was
+made in the morning.
+
+"Thirty miles," replied Daniel Boone.
+
+"Do you find anything new?"
+
+"Yes," replied the scout, nodding his head. "The Indians are less
+careful than they were. The trail is becoming plainer. I hope we shall
+overtake them before noon."
+
+It was not long before the pursuit was resumed, and the pace of the
+entire party was increased when it was discovered that the Indians had
+entered a buffalo road and were following that clearly defined path.
+
+The expression upon the face of Boone, who, with Peleg and Israel, was
+in advance of the little band, made every one aware that he expected
+soon to overtake the savages. The time of anxiety as well as peril was
+surely approaching.
+
+"Peleg," whispered Israel, "what do you think will be done to the girls
+if the Indians see us before we get within rifle shot?"
+
+Peleg shook his head and did not reply, although both he and his friend
+were aware that the Indians would doubtless tomahawk their captives and
+then flee if they should discover their pursuers close upon them.
+
+Nearly ten more miles were covered before the escaping band was
+overtaken. Each party discovered the other almost at the same moment.
+The Indians were in the act of kindling a fire and preparing camp for
+the night. Almost as if it was one sound, the rifles of Daniel Boone,
+Peleg, and Israel rang out together.
+
+Two of the Indians fell to the ground. All the other braves, as if
+driven by one impulse, instantly turned and fled from the spot, leaving
+the terrified girls behind them. So sudden had been the flight of the
+savages that when they darted into the adjacent forest they had been
+unable to don their moccasins. Not a man in the pursuing party had been
+injured.
+
+The cry of Jemima Boone when in the dim light she beheld her father
+approaching at the head of the rescuing party was one that those who
+heard her never were able to forget. She sprang from the ground where
+she had been seated and threw herself into her father's arms. For a time
+not a word was spoken by any one, while the well-nigh exhausted girl
+clung to Daniel Boone sobbing as if her heart would break.
+
+The pursuit which had been led by the great scout had been so swift and
+unrelenting that scarcely any time for rest had been given the band
+since its departure from the fort the preceding evening; and only a
+short time for recuperation could be allowed even now. This was some
+hardship for the men, but for the girls, who, in addition to the terror
+and despair which had possessed them, had been compelled to travel
+through the forests at a speed which exhausted their strength, it was
+doubly hard.
+
+Jemima explained to her father that they had arrived at the place where
+they had been discovered only a few moments before the coming of the
+hunter and his friends. The girl shuddered as she said: "If the Shawnees
+had had two minutes more they would have killed both of us before they
+ran; and I do not understand why they ran, anyway."
+
+"How many warriors were in the band?" inquired her father.
+
+"Thirty-six."
+
+"We cannot stay here long. The varmints will be coming back, and they
+outnumber us so greatly that we may have serious trouble."
+
+It was accordingly decided that the party should begin their return at
+once. For a time Daniel Boone carried his daughter in his arms, while
+her companion, almost exhausted, was also carried by one of the men.
+
+When several miles had been covered word for rest was given, and then,
+after a hasty meal was made from the loin of a deer which Peleg shot,
+the flight toward the fort was resumed.
+
+It was soon discovered, however, that the Indians were not pursuing, and
+when Boone became convinced that this was so, his anxiety was relieved,
+and he decided not to maintain the swift pace at which they had been
+moving.
+
+Two days later the party arrived at the fort on the bank of the
+Kentucky, and the relief of the distracted mothers as well as the
+general rejoicing over the safe return of the rescuers was great. After
+a rest of a day, the scout and all the party resumed their accustomed
+summer tasks.
+
+It was a few days afterward, while Peleg and Israel were engaged in
+hoeing a field of corn that belonged to Peleg, that the scout approached
+his friend.
+
+"Peleg," he said, as he halted in front of the boy, "we are to have a
+meeting in the fort to-morrow at noon and I hope you surely will be
+present."
+
+"What is the meeting for?"
+
+"We are to pass some laws. We now have more than one hundred and fifty
+souls in this little settlement, and up to the present time every one
+has been a law unto himself. We now must pass some laws which shall
+govern us as a community."
+
+"Is Sam Oliver here again?" inquired Peleg with a laugh.
+
+"Not as yet," answered Boone quizzically, smiling as he appreciated the
+discovery his young friend had made as to one of the causes for his
+desire to pass some laws by which all should be regulated.
+
+"Colonel Henderson will preside," said Boone. "He, as you know, was the
+original purchaser of this tract of land from the Cherokees, and he
+kindly consented to permit us to make a settlement here."
+
+"I shall try to be there," promised Peleg, as the scout passed on to
+make further arrangements for the meeting, and the two boys resumed
+their task.
+
+It was a serious assemblage of men that met the following noon. After
+accepting the chair, Colonel Henderson said: "I shall ask the Reverend
+John Lythe, our pioneer preacher, to address the Throne of Grace."
+
+At the conclusion of the old minister's prayer, Colonel Henderson
+solemnly said: "This legislature is now opened in the name of his
+Majesty the King of Great Britain." In his address he reminded his
+hearers of the importance of laying a broad and strong foundation for
+the future. He declared that the secret of future success depended
+largely upon the carefulness of their present preparation. He also
+explained how good and wholesome laws, such as would command the respect
+and support of the people, would benefit not merely the settlement as a
+whole, but also every individual member.
+
+Various laws then were proposed, discussed, and adopted by vote of the
+assembly.
+
+In the midst of the meeting, which both Peleg and Israel were enjoying
+keenly, Daniel Boone arose and asked for recognition from the chairman.
+
+"My father is going to make a speech!" whispered Israel in amazement, as
+he leaned toward Peleg. Never had either heard the scout speak under
+such circumstances. He was so self-contained in his manner and spoke so
+seldom that no one had thought of him as a man to make a public address.
+It was therefore with intense interest that every one present turned to
+listen to what Daniel Boone might say.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+A BAND OF SCOUTS
+
+
+"He would rather face three live painters," whispered Israel gleefully.
+"I never saw my father scared before."
+
+In a moment, however, the boys were listening intently to what the great
+scout was saying.
+
+"I am no speechmaker," began Daniel Boone, his voice trembling slightly
+as he spoke. "I know a little of the language of the deer and of the
+songs of the birds. The cry of the nighthawk has its meaning for me, to
+which it almost would be possible for me to reply. Even the scream of
+the painter is in a language which I understand, but when I look into
+the faces of my friends, who are much better fitted than I am to say
+what is best for this little community, I am at a loss how to proceed."
+The hunter paused a moment and the sympathetic interest of his hearers
+plainly encouraged him to go on. "It is true," he continued quietly, "I
+have a name for being somewhat successful as a scout and a hunter. I
+think you will all bear me witness, however, that never yet willingly
+have I inflicted pain upon even the weakest of God's creatures.
+Whenever I draw a bead on a deer I do so with the thought in my mind
+that here is the provision of the Almighty for food for His children.
+With all my might, mind, and strength I am opposed to any cruelty to
+dumb creatures, and also to any wanton waste of the game in our forests.
+I am sure I am giving voice to your convictions also when I say that we
+want no man within our settlement who does not have some such feeling as
+I have just described. Sometimes our boys are thoughtless and shoot
+perhaps more for the sake of killing than to secure provisions for our
+homes. We must be patient with them and strive to show them how mistaken
+they are. What I desire greatly just now is that a law shall be adopted
+to protect the game in our forests." The hunter took his seat and a
+murmur of applause at once came from the little assembly.
+
+"Do you make that as a motion?" inquired Colonel Henderson.
+
+"I do," responded the scout, rising and gravely bowing as he spoke.
+
+The motion was seconded, and without one opposing vote the assembly
+agreed to the suggestion of Daniel Boone.
+
+As soon as this motion was adopted the great scout once more arose and
+in his quiet and dignified manner again began to speak: "There is
+another matter in which I am deeply interested. I have never been able
+to understand how any man made in the image of his Creator could take
+his Creator's name in vain. In my experience I have noticed that
+profanity is limited to men who are either weak or vicious. I think, my
+friends, that you will agree with me that we want neither class in our
+little settlement on the banks of the Kentucky. I therefore move that we
+adopt a law prohibiting profanity."
+
+It was manifest that not every one in the assembly agreed with these
+sentiments of the hunter, and there was a moment of hesitation. Peleg,
+however, always ready to further the efforts of his friend, whom he
+admired more than he did any living man, promptly arose and seconded the
+motion, which then was passed without any opposition, though not with
+the enthusiasm which had greeted the preceding motion.
+
+Once more the tall scout arose and said: "I have still one other desire
+in my heart. As you all know, our little settlement has been unusually
+free from the brawls which occur in so many of the hamlets on the
+border. I am confident it is the desire of every one here that the same
+things shall continue to be true. If we must fight, then let us fight
+hard; but all petty quarrellings and brawls, let them not henceforth
+even be mentioned among us. With this peaceful desire in our minds, I
+greatly desire that a law shall be adopted to express the wish of this
+settlement that the Sabbath shall not be like other days. We surely toil
+so hard throughout six days of the week that if there were no other
+purpose in our minds we ought to rest on the Lord's Day. In order that
+this may be clearly understood, I move that a law be adopted which shall
+voice the sentiment of this community against the profanation of the
+Sabbath Day."
+
+There was no openly expressed opposition to the desire of the scout, and
+Peleg having promptly seconded this motion, his third suggestion also
+was adopted.
+
+Soon afterward, Colonel Henderson called upon the pioneer preacher to
+close the meeting with prayer, and the assembly dispersed.
+
+Peleg, Israel Boone, and Henry departed together from the fort. The last
+named was now able to express himself in English and, though he was
+still reserved in his bearings toward the people in general, his
+friendship for Peleg and Israel had strengthened with every passing day.
+
+"I never know such man like your father," said Henry to Israel.
+
+"He is the best man that ever lived!" broke in Peleg enthusiastically.
+"He has been just like a father to me, and if he was my real father I
+should be the proudest man in all Kentucky."
+
+"That would mean a great many people," suggested Israel with a smile. "I
+understand there are new settlers arriving every day. I have heard that
+Logan's Fort and Harrodsburgh are filling in very fast."
+
+"So I have heard," responded Peleg.
+
+"If the Indians would only leave us free!"
+
+"But they will not," broke in Henry. "They say white people not make any
+more settlements, and it not long before they drive out those that are
+here."
+
+"Let them try!" said Israel dryly.
+
+"They have been trying," remarked Peleg. "There is not a day that we
+have not seen some signs of the Shawnees or Delawares prowling around
+the forts."
+
+"They have not made any open attack for some time now," suggested Israel
+Boone.
+
+Henry shook his head as he said: "That means they only wait. Pretty soon
+you see. They feel for white men like wolf feel for bear."
+
+"And that is about the same love that a dog has for a cat," suggested
+Peleg with a laugh.
+
+"That is it," acknowledged Henry soberly. "I never know why bear and
+wolf no like each other. They kill many other things, but when wolf
+find trail of bear he call to all his friends and they begin to chase
+Mr. Bear. One day I saw a pack of wolves chasing big bear."
+
+"Was the bear running from them?" inquired Israel.
+
+"Yes, he run much fast. By and by he come to place where he can go no
+more, then he stand up with his back to tree, and the way he cuff those
+wolves first one side, then on other, make me laugh."
+
+"Yes," said Peleg, "I have seen the same thing myself. It is like the
+feeling that Sam Oliver says the otter has for the beaver."
+
+"Or the mink for the ermine," suggested Israel.
+
+"Both mink and ermine bad as they can be," said Henry, shaking his head.
+"They kill all things not so strong as they."
+
+"Yes," suggested Peleg, "I think the mink and ermine are about the worst
+animals alive. The mink is three or four times as big as the ermine is
+and has a good deal more strength----"
+
+"But the ermine so quick," interrupted Henry. "He so quick," he
+repeated, "and he most bloodthirsty little animal in the forest. When he
+begin to fight he always fight on until either he is killed or mink is
+killed."
+
+"Sam Oliver was telling me the last time he was in the settlement," said
+Peleg, "that last winter he was trailing a fox that was chasing a
+rabbit, and when Sam came to his trap-line he heard, away off to one
+side, a mink scream. He says you can hear a mink scream almost a quarter
+of a mile away. He was trapping minks and he thought he had one caught,
+so he turned and started for his trap. When he got there he saw, so he
+said, the biggest fight he ever saw in the woods. A mink was caught in
+his trap and an ermine was fighting him.
+
+"Pretty quick he saw that instead of there being only one there were two
+of the ermine. They kept walking around the mink in a circle and kept
+going faster and faster until by and by one of them, quick as lightning,
+right in front of the mink, jumped for him, and almost at the same time
+the other ermine jumped in, too, and tried to get a grip on the mink's
+neck. They must have tried that same thing before, because this time he
+heard the mink scream, too, though he was doing something besides. For
+about half a minute Sam said he couldn't hear or see much of anything
+except the fracas. Then just about as swiftly as the two ermine had
+jumped into the fight, they jumped out and began to circle around the
+mink again. The next time they tried to get the neck hold only one of
+them slipped back. The other got his teeth fastened right where he
+wanted them, and you know they are like needles. Then the other ermine
+came back and he, too, got a throat hold. In just a few minutes the
+whole affair was ended and the ermine came out ahead. Sam said he could
+have walked up to them and picked them up, they were so excited,
+squeaking like mice, and trying to tear the dead mink all to pieces."
+
+"Sam got the two ermine then, didn't he?" inquired Israel.
+
+"Yes. I told him, though, I thought they had earned their right to live,
+but Sam never feels that way about such things."
+
+The reference to Sam Oliver had brought a scowl to the face of Henry and
+caused him to become silent as long as the hunter was a topic of
+conversation.
+
+In the succeeding days reports of the presence of Indians steadily
+increased. Several men toiling in the fields were fired upon by Shawnees
+who had crept up to the border of the forest.
+
+Steadily the Indians showed their determination to do their utmost to
+prevent the settlers from making homes in their hunting grounds. The
+hostilities of the Shawnees became more marked with every passing month.
+Indeed, so many were the manifestations of their plan to attack the
+settlements that finally Colonel Clark, who at this time had been given
+the command of all military forces in Kentucky, became so convinced
+that there was a plan in the minds of the Indians to assemble a great
+body of their warriors to destroy the border forts and their inhabitants
+that he begged the pioneer scout to act as a spy and to assume charge of
+other spies that were to be sent among the tribes to learn their numbers
+as well as their designs.
+
+Daniel Boone, fully aware of the danger, and in spite of his desire to
+remain at home, responded to this new call because he looked upon
+himself as in a measure answerable for the safety of the people whom he
+had induced to come into Kentucky. At this time the region was known as
+the "dark and bloody ground," so many had been the attacks and conflicts
+between the incoming whites and their Indian foes.
+
+Daniel Boone ordered his spies to start out in different directions, and
+after they had scoured the country for miles around, they were to meet
+at a time and place agreed upon and report what they had discovered and
+form their plans for the future.
+
+Convinced at last that there was no immediate danger of a concerted
+attack by the Indians, the scout returned to Boonesborough and resumed
+his labours.
+
+"Peleg," said Boone one day not long after his return, "we must have
+some salt. I shall take a party to Blue Licks. Will you come?"
+
+"Yes, sir," replied Peleg promptly.
+
+"I shall leave Israel at home to protect the family, but I shall want
+you and Henry to go with me. We ought to have a party of twenty-five or
+thirty men not only to make the salt, but to keep back the Shawnees, who
+are likely to make trouble for us if we are not strong enough to defend
+ourselves."
+
+The following day Daniel Boone, together with Peleg and twenty-six other
+men, departed for the salt springs, or Blue Licks, as they were called
+by the settlers. Neither of the scouts, however, was aware that he was
+there to meet with the most thrilling adventure of his life.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+THE CAPTURE
+
+
+Several days of hard work followed the arrival of the party at the salt
+springs. Fireplaces had to be made, boilers arranged, and the water
+evaporated, leaving its deposit of salt, so necessary in the life of the
+people of Boonesborough.
+
+The process, however, was exceedingly slow, although the men toiled day
+and night because of their desire to return to their homes, and their
+fear of the prowling Indians. On the third day, when the supplies of
+food were low, Daniel Boone suggested that he should for a time leave
+his companions at their task while he secured some game which might be
+prepared for their dinner that night.
+
+Taking his rifle and shaking his head when Peleg offered to accompany
+him, the hunter departed. No one expected him to be gone more than an
+hour. When, however, three hours had elapsed his friends became
+increasingly uneasy. They had relied on their numbers as being a
+sufficient protection against the prowling Indians. The savages were
+known to be near, and occasionally they had been seen skulking from tree
+to tree. Because of this condition, the decision of Daniel Boone to go
+alone had been opposed by his companions, and as his absence continued
+there was increasing anxiety for his safety.
+
+Meanwhile, if Peleg and his companions had known what had befallen the
+scout, they would have had even stronger grounds for their fears.
+
+For some reason Boone was unable to discover any game in the immediate
+proximity of the camp, so he proceeded several miles through the forest
+in his search. When he halted at last and looked about him he concluded
+that he must be at least four miles from the Blue Lick Springs. He was
+aware of the peril which might beset a lonely hunter at such times, and
+as the afternoon sun was steadily declining, decided to retrace his way
+toward camp.
+
+As he turned abruptly he was startled to behold five young Indians
+swiftly approaching.
+
+Without hesitating a moment Boone whirled about and ran. Exerting
+himself to the utmost, he sped through the forest, closely followed by
+his pursuers, who, for some reason which he did not understand, had not
+fired upon him.
+
+Capable as Boone was of a long-continued race, speed could not be his
+main reliance. He was no longer a young man, and his pursuers were in
+the prime of their young manhood.
+
+Glancing behind him, Boone was aware that his enemies were gaining upon
+him. Wheeling suddenly he darted into the brush, then leaped into a
+swiftly running stream and ran with the current for one hundred feet or
+more before he jumped to the bank on the opposite side and once more
+resumed his flight.
+
+Apparently, however, it was impossible for him to shake off his
+pursuers. Doggedly they held to the chase, and the conviction was
+strengthening in Boone's mind that not only were the young warriors
+gaining steadily upon him, but also that they were maintaining a pace
+which would soon be too great for him to keep up. Indeed it was only a
+few minutes later when by an unusual burst of speed his enemies overtook
+and surrounded him.
+
+Boone smiled in spite of his peril when he saw that their first demand
+was for his rifle. It was plain that they knew who he was and were proud
+of their success in capturing the great scout. One of the young Indians
+was able to speak a few words of English, and advancing to Boone he
+extended his hand as a token of friendship and shook hands after the
+manner of the white people.
+
+"Big scout broder," said the young warrior, "No shoot. No kill."
+
+Boone smilingly nodded his head in token of comprehension and without
+demur followed his captors as they led him rapidly through the forest.
+If he was chagrined or cast down his feeling was not betrayed by his
+countenance.
+
+The Indians seldom spoke as they proceeded, and Boone's surprise was
+great when after an advance of an hour he was taken into the midst of a
+group of one hundred and fifty Shawnee warriors.
+
+Here, too, the hunter was recognized, and there were many expressions of
+delight over the capture of the man whom all the Indians of the region
+knew and feared. Boone soon was to learn that they also entertained for
+him a feeling close to affection.
+
+Apparently unmoved by the peril in which he now found himself, Boone
+looked quietly into the faces of the braves and awaited their action.
+
+In a brief time, in the midst of the band, he was conducted back toward
+Blue Lick Springs. Surprised at first by the direction in which they
+were moving, his fears for his friends increased with every passing
+mile. They were outnumbered by the Indians in the approaching party, and
+were without his leadership. How would they be able to defend themselves
+from an attack?
+
+This question was unanswered when the band arrived within a half mile of
+the place they were seeking. Then one of the younger chiefs approached
+Boone and said in his broken English: "Big hunter. No hurt. Broders of
+big hunter no hurt. No shoot."
+
+"Do you mean," inquired Boone, "that my friends will be taken prisoners
+and not shot?"
+
+The Indian laughed, for his pleasure at the apparent success of their
+undertaking was manifest, and he said: "No shoot. No kill white broder."
+
+"Do you mean," asked Boone once more, "that if they do not shoot, you
+will not?"
+
+"No shoot. No hurt," answered the Indian.
+
+"Which means that you will take us all to your village?"
+
+The Indian nodded in assent.
+
+"And if they do not shoot and you make captives of them, do you promise
+that you will not harm them when you take them to your village?"
+
+"No shoot. No hurt," repeated the Indian, nodding his head several times
+to add emphasis to his words. "Big scout go with Owaneeyo--tell
+broders."
+
+"You want me to tell them that you are here, and that if they do not
+shoot then you will not shoot, either, and that you give your word that
+they will not be harmed if they go with you to your village?"
+
+The Indian smiled broadly as he said: "Big scout go with Injun--tell
+broder. Shawnee no shoot. No hurt white broder. White broder shoot,
+Shawnee shoot. No take white broder to village, take white broder
+scalp."
+
+For a few moments Boone silently considered. He well knew that it would
+be impossible for his friends to escape the united attack of the
+Shawnees. Every warrior was armed with a gun, and, as the band
+outnumbered the whites nearly five to one, it would be worse than
+useless for them to attempt to defend themselves. On the other hand, if
+they submitted quietly it might be possible partly to disarm the captors
+of their watchfulness, and as there were so many of the whites some
+opportunity might arise that would provide an avenue for escape. In the
+latter event the chances that more of the men would escape alive were
+much better than they would be if they attempted to defend themselves at
+the present time.
+
+Accordingly, Boone said to the young chief: "I will go with you to tell
+my brothers what the chiefs say if you will come with me unarmed."
+
+For a moment there was an expression of anger or suspicion in the eyes
+of the stalwart young Indian, but it quickly passed, and he said: "Big
+scout no lie. Owaneeyo go without gun. Tell broders what Owaneeyo say to
+scout."
+
+Turning to his companions the young chief gave his command for them to
+encircle the springs where the white men were at work. As soon as his
+orders had been obeyed he stepped up to Boone and bowed low to indicate
+his readiness to accompany the scout.
+
+Without a word both advanced, with Boone moving directly before his
+companion. They soon came to the spot where the whites were engaged in
+their task, all unaware of the peril that was threatening them.
+
+Many curious glances were given the companion of the scout when Boone
+and the chief first appeared. In compliance with Boone's suggestion, the
+men gave up their labours and assembled to hear what the chief had to
+say.
+
+The speech of Owaneeyo was not long, but every word held a meaning which
+strongly impressed the listening settlers.
+
+When the chief ceased speaking Boone himself stepped forward and said:
+"My friends, there is nothing else to do. I am sure you would not credit
+me with being a coward. I am speaking that which I know. There are at
+least one hundred and fifty of the Shawnees here and they are in a
+circle all about us right now. We have no defences behind which to
+fight, and they are able to pick us off without exposing themselves. If
+we run we should find in whatever direction we went that we were going
+straight into their arms. They promise us that if we do not fire upon
+them they will not shoot any of us. The chief also has agreed to see
+that we have good treatment not only here and on our way to their
+village, but also after we arrive there."
+
+There were some murmurs of disapproval, but the word and the example of
+the scout were both so influential that assent was soon given, and the
+chief was told that the white men would make no protest.
+
+At his bidding their rifles were all deposited in one place. A moment
+later he emitted a loud call, and almost as if they had sprung from the
+ground itself the Shawnees came running to the place where the settlers
+were awaiting them.
+
+The entire party soon left the springs, the white prisoners being
+scattered among the warriors in such a manner that no two were able to
+converse. In spite of the fierce glances of some of the braves, there
+was slight fear on Boone's part that the word of Owaneeyo would be
+broken. Cruel the Indian might be in his own way, and treacherous
+according to the standards of the whites, but his promise, once having
+been given, was binding.
+
+The band moved rapidly, stopping only occasionally by night. Not one of
+the prisoners was aware what Indian village was to be their destination,
+although the scout, from his familiarity with the region through which
+they were conducted, was convinced that they were being taken to the
+place called Chillicothe.
+
+His surmise proved to be correct, and on the fifth day the returning
+party with their prisoners arrived at the capital of the Shawnees. Their
+coming was greeted with cries and shouts and many expressions of delight
+by the Indians of Chillicothe. To these, however, the warriors gave
+slight heed, and the prisoners endeavoured to follow their example,
+though it was difficult for some of them completely to assume an air of
+indifference. What the fate of the captives was to be was not to be
+known until the following day.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX
+
+AN OFFER OF RELEASE
+
+
+There had been slight opportunity for Peleg to have any conversation
+with his friend throughout the march.
+
+The Indians, rejoiced over their success in making a prisoner of the
+great scout, nevertheless appeared to be fearful lest the man whom they
+valued so highly should escape. Throughout the journey the prisoners
+were treated with consideration, although when night came and the halts
+were made for rest the white men were compelled to sleep within a circle
+formed by their captors. In this way they were deprived of every
+possibility of escape. When, however, they had arrived at the old
+village of Chillicothe, there were a few minutes when Daniel Boone and
+Peleg and several of their comrades were left together in the wigwam
+into which they had been thrust.
+
+"Peleg," said Daniel Boone in a low voice, "what a mistake our enemies
+have made."
+
+"What do you mean?" inquired Peleg quickly.
+
+"If they had taken us to Boonesborough or to Logan's Fort and there had
+shown us to the settlers they could have demanded almost any price they
+might choose for our ransom."
+
+"Will they not do it yet?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"I hardly think so," replied the scout, shaking his head. "The Indians
+are like children in many ways. When they have been successful, either
+on the warpath or in the chase, they immediately return to their friends
+to celebrate their good fortune with them. They are easily elated, and
+are almost childish in seeking the praise of those whose opinions they
+value. That is the reason why they have come back to the village with
+their twenty-eight prisoners."
+
+"What will happen to us?" inquired Peleg anxiously.
+
+"That no man can say. All that I am sure of is that we must bear
+whatever comes in the spirit of those who know that it is the best thing
+that could happen for every one of us."
+
+"If they burn us at the stake?" inquired Peleg bitterly.
+
+"Yes, even if they burn us at the stake. It will be hard to bear if they
+do that, but I am not without hope that they will adopt some other
+course."
+
+"They may make us run the gauntlet."
+
+"Yes, they may," admitted Boone, "but there is one thing, Peleg, we do
+not have to do."
+
+"What is that, sir?"
+
+"We do not have to bear anything before it comes. All that any man can
+do is to prepare for what may befall him, and then, whatever comes, bear
+it like a man. But he who worries over his troubles before they arrive
+is in no condition to bear them after they come."
+
+"I know that is your way of thinking," said Peleg, "but I have not
+learned it yet."
+
+"That's the correct word, Peleg."
+
+"What word?" inquired the younger scout quickly.
+
+"The word 'learned,' No one has it at the beginning of his life. Even
+Preacher Lythe told us one time that he, like Paul, 'learned' in
+whatsoever state he was, therewith to be content."
+
+"So have you!" said Peleg cordially.
+
+Boone smiled and shook his head as he replied: "I have learned not to
+reveal all my feelings. Beyond that I cannot say. But I am so fully
+convinced that whatever befalls me in this life is part of a great plan,
+that it would be foolish for me to complain or whine. Whatever happens,
+no one shall ever be able to say that he heard a whimper from Daniel
+Boone. Whate'er may come to us, lad, do not let any of these Shawnees
+see that you are in the least cast down."
+
+"I shall do my best."
+
+"I am hopeful," said Boone, "that we shall not be treated severely.
+Chief Owaneeyo gave us his promise when we surrendered that we should be
+treated with kindness both on our journey and after we arrived at the
+Indian village. I believe he spoke truly."
+
+"What I am afraid of," said Peleg, "is that some of these braves will
+not listen to him. I think Owaneeyo will live up to his promise as far
+as he is able."
+
+"There, Peleg, you are borrowing trouble again. What shall I do with
+you?" said Boone gently. "For myself, I shall look for the better side,
+and if the hard times come I shall bear them as I may be able, but I am
+expecting that things will not be as bad as you fear, and I shall keep
+myself ready if Providence reveals any opening for our release. I
+believe firmly that such an opening will come and that we shall yet go
+back to our friends."
+
+"I hope so," said Peleg fervently.
+
+"But whatever comes, Peleg, you must be cheerful, at least in your
+appearance. If the Indians see that you are cast down or afraid, they
+will immediately lose their respect for you, and no one can tell what
+may happen."
+
+In a measure the words of the scout proved to be true. The prisoners
+were treated with kindness and were assigned to various members of the
+tribe in such a manner that they seldom had an opportunity of
+conversing with one another.
+
+Mindful of the directions of the great scout, Peleg did his utmost to
+maintain a cheerful manner. He was confident, too, as the days passed,
+that however heavy his own heart might be the Shawnees were sure that he
+was adapting himself to the life of their tribe and was not unhappy in
+their midst.
+
+A few days after the captives had been brought into the village,
+Owaneeyo came to Boone one morning and said: "Big scout shoot. No shoot
+brave, shoot----"
+
+The word which he wished to use failed the young chief, but laughing
+heartily he conducted the hunter to a place where Daniel Boone saw that
+a target had been erected. He concluded that the plan of the Indian was
+for him to enter into a contest with some of the best shots among the
+Shawnees.
+
+With apparent eagerness he accepted the invitation, and soon many of the
+warriors were assembled, keenly watching the contest between Boone and
+three of the braves.
+
+Daniel Boone wisely was shooting well, but not too well. Two of his
+competitors he easily outdid, but the third, who was Owaneeyo himself,
+and no mean shot, he permitted to beat him. The glee of the Indian when
+the match was ended was so marked and childish that Boone instantly
+decided that if future contests of a similar character were held he knew
+what his own course of action must be.
+
+The following day a second contest was arranged, and at Boone's
+suggestion Peleg also was summoned to share in it.
+
+"Lad," whispered Boone, while he was apparently bending over his rifle
+and looking to its priming, "I am sure if we are careful we shall soon
+be permitted to have our own rifles. Perhaps you can get yours now for
+the match, if you want it, but my advice to you in any event is to let
+the Indians beat you, but not too easily."
+
+The delight of the Indians was even greater than on the preceding day,
+when Owaneeyo and one of his warriors succeeded in making a better
+record than Peleg and were tied with the work which the scout did.
+
+At frequent intervals throughout the autumn these contests were held. In
+every event the white scouts were careful to shoot well, but not too
+well. So manifest was the feeling of affection and confidence among the
+Shawnees, especially for Daniel Boone, that it was not long before the
+white men, one or two at a time, were permitted to accompany the Indians
+whenever they went on the hunting path.
+
+In this manner the winter passed and already there were promises of the
+return of spring. March had come and the snows were beginning to
+disappear from the depths of the forest. It was in this month that
+Owaneeyo came to Daniel Boone one day, saying eagerly: "Broder go with
+Shawnees."
+
+"Go where?" inquired Boone. His anxiety for his family in their faraway
+home by the Kentucky by this time had become almost unbearable. As they
+were unaware of the fate which had befallen him and his companions, and
+yet were fully aware of the cruelty of the Indians and the hatred which
+they had manifested for the settlers at Boonesborough, the scout was
+continually thinking of the anxiety which must possess his own family at
+this time. Not a word had come to them concerning his safety or his
+whereabouts, and there was no means by which such word might be sent. It
+was therefore with a feeling of consternation which it was difficult for
+him to conceal that he heard the statement of the young chief.
+
+"Broder see where go," laughed the Indian, as if he was preserving some
+great pleasure for his friend.
+
+Aware that protests were vain, Boone, with apparent cordiality,
+expressed his desire to accompany the Indians, although he was ignorant
+of the destination of the proposed journey.
+
+To his surprise, the following day when the party set forth from the
+village, he found Peleg and nine other whites in the company.
+
+There was no opportunity, however, for conversation among the captives,
+who, in spite of the freedom which of late had been granted them by the
+Shawnees, now were watched more carefully as the warriors sped through
+the forest.
+
+When the band at last arrived at Detroit, Boone was not surprised at the
+destination. Here several days elapsed before Owaneeyo expressed his
+purpose to return. Just why Boone had been compelled to accompany the
+Indians the scout did not yet understand.
+
+However, on the day before their departure, Governor Hamilton summoned
+Owaneeyo and Daniel Boone to his quarters.
+
+After a few preliminary words the Governor said to the Indian: "I will
+give you £100 for the ransom of this man."
+
+A scowl instantly appeared upon the face of the chief and he turned as
+if about to depart from the presence of the Governor.
+
+Wheeling abruptly about, however, his eyes shining and an expression
+upon his face which showed how deep his feeling was, he said: "No sell
+broder. He my broder." As he spoke, Owaneeyo looked steadily into the
+eyes of the scout, and there was no question in the mind of Daniel
+Boone as to the sincerity of the young chief's feelings.
+
+"But he is a white man," protested the Governor.
+
+"He my broder," declared Owaneeyo, as if no further explanation need be
+made.
+
+"Ask him if he would rather go with you or stay here."
+
+"I would rather go," said Daniel Boone, "than have you pay so much gold
+for my release. The Shawnees have been good to me, and though I am a
+white man, my own friends and country could not deal more kindly with me
+than have Owaneeyo and his tribe."
+
+"No take gold," said Owaneeyo, and strode from the Governor's quarters
+as he spoke.
+
+Boone delayed a few minutes, explaining to the Governor that it would be
+impossible for him to accept such a ransom, saying in his simple way: "I
+am in the hands of a greater Governor than even you, Governor Hamilton,
+and I am sure that the right in the end will be done."
+
+Apparently the commander was not yet fully persuaded, for on the
+following morning, before the Shawnees departed from Detroit, several of
+the Englishmen at the post, deeply touched with sympathy for the scout
+in his captivity, came to Boone himself with offerings of money for his
+release. The sturdy scout smiled, however, and shook his head,
+explaining that it would be impossible for him to accept such benefits
+which would forever be beyond his power to return or repay.
+
+"But you need never return the money to us. It may be our turn to be
+prisoners of the Indians soon, and then some one will have to do for us
+what we now are trying to do for you," protested one of the men.
+
+"I cannot take your gifts," said the hunter shortly. It was manifest
+that all efforts to induce him to change his decision would be
+fruitless.
+
+In a few hours the entire band of Shawnees and their captives set forth
+on their return to Chillicothe. No reference was made by Owaneeyo to the
+offer which had been made by the Governor and his friends, but it was
+plain to Daniel Boone throughout their long march that the chief's
+feeling of affection for him had been greatly strengthened by what had
+occurred at Detroit.
+
+However, when the party at last arrived at the Indian town, even Daniel
+Boone was startled by the proposition which was made by one of the
+Shawnee chiefs.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI
+
+FLIGHT
+
+
+"What do you think, Peleg?" inquired Boone a few days after the return
+from Detroit. "Blackfish wishes to adopt me into his family."
+
+"What!" exclaimed Peleg in amazement.
+
+"Yes. One of his sons was killed not long ago and he wishes me to take
+his place. I do not know how much older my foster-father will be than I
+am. As a rule I think it is wise for a father to be a little older than
+his son," added Boone quizzically. "But it won't make any great
+difference in this case."
+
+"You are not going to allow it, are you?" repeated Peleg.
+
+"I must. Blackfish seems to be very fond of me, and since we came back
+from Detroit, Owaneeyo has spread many reports of my devotion to the
+tribe. He little realizes what restraint I have had to put upon myself,
+and how there are times when it seems to me that I would almost give my
+life for the privilege of looking upon the faces of my family once
+more. It will never do for me to refuse."
+
+Peleg said no more, but in spite of the scout's information he was
+scarcely prepared for the "adoption" which followed in a short time.
+
+In the presence of the family of Blackfish and of some of the leading
+warriors of the tribe, a good deal of hair was pulled from the head of
+Boone, leaving his scalp-lock not unlike that of the Indians. His body
+then was bathed in several waters, the medicine-men who performed the
+act claiming that in this way his white blood was washed away, and he
+became essentially a Shawnee in nature as well as in name. A feast
+followed the formality of adoption, and then Daniel Boone was given a
+name--"The Man with the Long Rifle"--and formally declared to be a son
+of the great Chief Blackfish.
+
+There was a slight change in the treatment which Boone and his
+companions received after this event. The increasing confidence of the
+Indians was manifest, and found its most complete expression when a few
+days afterward they sent Boone, together with two or three white men and
+a score of warriors, to the springs of the Sciota to make salt.
+
+Upon their return from this expedition Boone was alarmed as well as
+astonished by the appearance of the Shawnee braves. Many of them were
+daubed in their war paint, and it was apparent on every side that the
+warriors were preparing for battle.
+
+It was not difficult for the great scout to learn that the object of the
+campaign was to take the little settlement on the Kentucky, where his
+home was located.
+
+Familiar as he was with the Indian customs, Boone was aware that more
+extensive preparations than he had yet seen would be made before the
+warriors started on the warpath. Meanwhile, he was determined to escape
+from the Indian village, and return with his warning to his friends on
+the Kentucky.
+
+In spite of the freedom he enjoyed, he knew that it would be extremely
+difficult for him to escape. At least one hundred and sixty miles of
+forest and wilderness intervened between the village and Boonesborough.
+To obtain supplies of food, or weapons by which he might defend himself
+from beasts and warriors, was well-nigh impossible.
+
+Nevertheless the determined man decided to try to escape from the
+Shawnees at the first favourable opportunity. He was fully aware that he
+must not do anything to arouse the suspicions of the tribe. Yet the time
+of the departure of the warriors could not be far distant.
+
+Meanwhile, he talked over these matters in the occasional interviews he
+was permitted to have with Peleg. Almost all the younger scout knew,
+however, was that his friend had determined, when the proper time
+arrived, to flee from the village and warn the settlers of their peril.
+It was also understood that, after the departure of the scout, if Peleg
+should see the least opportunity, he, too, would attempt to leave the
+Indian village.
+
+When June came the great scout saw that the men were preparing for a
+march within a few days. Whatever he was to do must be done quickly. No
+opportunity had been granted for a further word with his young friend,
+when early one morning Boone fled from Chillicothe.
+
+A small piece of jerked venison was all the food he had been able to
+take with him on his long journey. He was without rifle or knife and
+before him stretched a pathless forest through which he must flee one
+hundred and sixty miles before he again would be among his friends! No
+one knew better than Boone himself that it was to be a race for life,
+for pursuit on the morrow was as certain as the rising of the sun.
+
+Nevertheless with the same quiet courage which had ever been the great
+scout's strong reliance, he struck out for the Ohio River. Through the
+deep forests, over the high crags and rocks, across the creeks and
+following the courses of the river, by day and by night, he forced his
+tireless way.
+
+Success crowned his efforts at last, and he gained the shores of the
+Ohio. But when he arrived upon the bank he found the river full and at
+least a mile in width.
+
+Unable to swim, for a time the scout was uncertain what his next move
+should be. Fortunately, he found, on the bank near the place where he
+was standing, an old canoe which had been driven against the shore.
+Although the little craft was untrustworthy, one end having been badly
+broken, the intrepid man succeeded in paddling his way in it to the
+opposite bank.
+
+Four days and four nights the scout had been running with only an
+occasional brief respite. Throughout that time he had eaten but one
+meal. His strength was failing, but his hope was strong, for Daniel
+Boone was aware now that he was near to his home. At last the quaint
+fort was seen before him and the end of the journey had been gained.
+
+The return of the scout was almost like that of one who had come back
+from the dead. Every man in the little settlement had believed that
+Daniel Boone was to be seen no more. No tidings had come from faraway
+Chillicothe, and no one in Boonesborough had any means of knowing what
+had befallen the party in their labours at Blue Licks.
+
+"Where is my wife? Where are my children?" demanded Boone as soon as he
+entered the fort.
+
+"Gone," answered Sam Oliver, who at the time was making one of his
+occasional visits at the settlement.
+
+"'Gone!'" repeated Boone in astonishment. "'Gone!' Where?"
+
+"Your wife and all your children except Jemima have gone back to North
+Carolina. They all believed you to be dead and your wife felt that she
+could no longer remain here. Jemima is the only one that stayed."
+
+It was not long before the scout found his intrepid daughter, who in
+spite of the departure of the other members of the family had been
+strong in her conviction that either her father would return or some
+definite word concerning his fate would be received. For that reason she
+had remained in the fort.
+
+Not a moment was to be lost. Weary, indeed almost exhausted by his long
+flight, as soon as food and a brief rest had been obtained Boone at once
+helped the little garrison to work day and night upon their
+fortifications. New gates were made and double bastions were speedily
+completed. The horses and cattle were driven in from the fields, and
+powder and balls prepared. Before ten days had elapsed the fort was in
+readiness for the coming of the enemy.
+
+Early in the morning of the final day, while Daniel Boone was himself
+on guard, he discovered a man approaching from the forest. Keenly
+watching the indistinct figure and prepared for instant action, although
+as yet he had not summoned any of his companions, Boone soon was aware
+that the returning man was none other than his friend Peleg.
+
+The young scout was admitted by Boone, and in response to his queries he
+was soon describing what had befallen him.
+
+In the midst of the excitement which had followed the escape of Boone,
+Peleg found the opportunity for which he himself had been waiting, and
+he, too, fled from the little village. In some ways, however, he had
+been more successful than his friend, inasmuch as he had been able to
+secure both Singing Susan and some ammunition, together with a
+hunting-knife.
+
+"Have they followed you, lad?" inquired Boone eagerly.
+
+"I do not know. They were filled with the plan of attacking the fort and
+I do not know whether anything has been done to turn them aside from it.
+I have had many trials," continued the young scout. "If I had not found
+the circles of stones which you left I could not have followed your
+trail. I do not know how you crossed the Ohio."
+
+"I found an old canoe," explained Boone.
+
+"That makes everything plain, then," laughed Peleg, "for I used the same
+canoe. Some one must have brought it back or it had floated down stream;
+at any rate it saved me from getting Singing Susan wet. The first place
+I found your stones was about two miles from the river, at the spring
+where there is a little waterfall. I can't tell you what it meant to me,
+for I was not sure of my way. I tried to think of everything you had
+told me about the stars, the course of the streams, and the changes in
+the trees, and then every little while I climbed to the top of a hill
+when I came near one and got my bearings from there."
+
+"You are here, lad," said Boone. "You were led as I was. That is enough.
+Now tell me about the Shawnees. Are they coming?"
+
+"I think so, but the attack will be delayed several weeks."
+
+"Why is that?"
+
+"Because you escaped. They tried their best to overtake you, but when
+Owaneeyo and some of the other warriors of the tribe came back and said
+they had not found you, then Blackfish declared that you would come to
+the fort here to warn the settlers. They then decided, I think, to put
+off their march about three weeks."
+
+Boone nodded his head several times as if the explanation Peleg had
+given was one that commended itself to his judgment. There was no
+alteration, however, in the plans of the scout for strengthening the
+defences of the little fort. By this time the alarm had spread
+throughout the little settlement and every man was alert.
+
+The delay in the coming of the Shawnees, however, continued so long that
+Boone concluded that they might have become discouraged by the report of
+their spies concerning the condition of the fort.
+
+Prowling Indians had been seen frequently in the vicinity of
+Boonesborough after the arrival of Peleg, and the scout now decided that
+it would be a good plan for him to turn the tables and with a party
+invade the country of the Shawnees themselves.
+
+Choosing nineteen men from the little garrison, he led them swiftly and
+silently as far as Paint Creek on the Sciota. He had come within four
+miles of the little Indian village, when unexpectedly the band met a
+party of thirty warriors, who were marching to join the expedition
+against Boonesborough.
+
+There was no opportunity for retreat or deliberation. Instantly Boone
+called upon his companions to follow his example and fired upon the
+astonished warriors.
+
+The Shawnees without attempting to respond, and doubtless unaware of
+the numbers of their enemies, immediately turned and fled.
+
+The scout now halted his forces and sent two spies to discover what was
+taking place in the village. The men returned with the information that
+it had been abandoned.
+
+As soon as this information had been received, Boone summoned his
+followers and said to them: "I am convinced from the reports of our
+friends that a great army of the Indians is now marching against
+Boonesborough. Our friends are in almost as great danger as are we.
+There is nothing left for us except to return and make the best possible
+time in our march."
+
+Every one assented to the suggestion and the return was begun, the men
+marching day and night, hoping to elude the Indians, who, the scout now
+believed, were between them and Boonesborough.
+
+It was not long before the returning band discovered the trail of the
+advancing warriors. Thereupon the leader decided to make a detour and
+avoid his enemies. All unknown to the Indians, on the sixth day of the
+returning march the intrepid band passed the red men, and on the seventh
+arrived safely at Boonesborough.
+
+The following day five hundred hideously painted, thoroughly armed
+Indians appeared at the fort.
+
+The alarm of the little garrison would have been still greater had they
+known that Duquesne, for whom Fort Pitt was first named, was in command
+of the entire band. Even Blackfish for the time had resigned his
+position as leader, preferring to have the skilful Frenchman assume the
+command in the attack on the fort. Nor was Captain Duquesne alone, for
+twelve of his countrymen also were with him to assist in leading the
+savages in their attack.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII
+
+THE COMING OF BLACKFISH
+
+
+"Peleg," said Daniel Boone after the appearance of the enemy in front of
+the fort, "I understand now why it was that I was so long a prisoner of
+the Shawnees."
+
+Peleg expressed his question without replying in words and the hunter
+continued: "If I had not been a captive I never should have known how
+strong they are nor what their plans might be. And I think, too, that I
+never should have known what the relation is between the Shawnees and
+the French."
+
+"Do you think we can hold this place?" inquired Peleg anxiously.
+
+"We shall do our best, lad, and the result is not altogether in our
+hands. I have sent messengers all through the settlements asking for
+reinforcements."
+
+The conversation was interrupted by the appearance of a messenger from
+the attacking army--a white man. Before he arrived at the stockade he
+was hailed by Daniel Boone, who, with Peleg, was standing on one of the
+bastions.
+
+After a few preliminary words the man said: "I am instructed by Captain
+Duquesne to state to you that he has received orders from Governor
+Hamilton at Detroit to take this fort, but to save the lives of the
+people, if it is possible so to do."
+
+Boone gazed down into the face of the speaker, but did not reply.
+
+"I am further instructed by Captain Duquesne," resumed the messenger,
+"to ask you to send nine men from the fort to arrange for a treaty. You
+can meet the men from our army wherever you desire."
+
+"I shall report to you as soon as I have consulted my friends," said
+Daniel Boone as he and his companion retired to the fort.
+
+When the defenders were assembled Sam Oliver declared hotly: "I should
+never send nine men out to meet the redskins! It is one of their tricks,
+and not one of the nine will ever come back."
+
+"I do not feel that way about it," said Boone. "I suspect that it may be
+a trick, as you suggest, but it may help us to put off the beginning of
+the fight until some of the other settlers for whom we have sent can
+come to our aid. I favour sending a delegation of nine men to meet a
+delegation from the Indians, but the place must be within fire from the
+fort. I do not know how you feel, but for myself I am willing to say
+that we shall never surrender this place while there is one man left
+alive to defend it."
+
+"That's the way we all feel," said Sam Oliver, who still opposed the
+proposed meeting.
+
+Daniel Boone returned to the bastions and announced to the messenger
+that nine men would meet a party from the Indians in accordance with the
+proposition which had been made for the conference.
+
+Selecting eight of his followers, the scout led the way to the appointed
+place of meeting, which was sixty yards from the fort. There the little
+band met Captain Duquesne and eighteen or twenty Indians. The red
+warriors were silent, but their flashing eyes impressed the scout more
+than any words could have done.
+
+"What we propose," began Captain Duquesne, "is that every man in the
+fort shall swear allegiance to King George the Third and submit to our
+rule. If this can be done we can assure you that you may live in peace
+and retain all your property."
+
+Boone, who was the spokesman of the settlers, arose to reply. He knew
+little of the great struggle which at that time was going on for the
+independence of the colonies. His life on the border was too remote from
+the battlefields of the north and east, and only occasional rumours of
+the long contest came to the pioneers.
+
+Boone's speech, conditionally agreeing to Duquesne's proposal, was
+followed by one from Blackfish. The old chief, looking only once upon
+his adopted son, and by the gleam in his eyes expressing his hatred,
+asserted that when two great armies entered into a treaty it was
+customary for the men to shake hands, and in doing so for two Indians to
+shake the hands of each white man. There were smiles among the men from
+the fort as they heard the smooth words of the crafty old chief, but as
+all the warriors and white men were unarmed they were not unduly
+alarmed.
+
+At that moment a gun was fired as a signal from the forest, and the
+Indian members of the council, advancing with open hands, grasped the
+hands of the white men. Instantly the warriors endeavoured to drag their
+white enemies toward the woods where many of the Shawnees were
+concealed. A desperate conflict followed, and the Indians from the main
+body begun to rush quickly toward the spot.
+
+At the same time the watching men at the fort began to pour a fire upon
+the approaching enemy, and in a few minutes, under stress of the
+excitement, the scout and his friends tore themselves from the grasp of
+the Indians and fled back to the fort. The heavy gate was closed and
+bolted as soon as they were behind the defences. Fortunately only one
+man had been wounded by the fire of the savages.
+
+Captain Duquesne and Blackfish now ordered an attack upon the fort. As
+the place was almost surrounded by woods except on the side toward the
+river, the attacking party was well protected. The advance was made from
+three sides at once.
+
+Amid the wild yells of the Indians a volley of bullets was poured into
+the fort, and as soon as the guns were discharged they were again loaded
+and a steady fire maintained.
+
+The defenders of the fort, however, were not wasting their scanty
+ammunition. Every man from his porthole, or the place which he was
+occupying on the bastions, was selecting his own special mark and every
+shot was telling in the work of death. The fight continued throughout
+the day, and when night fell, contrary to their custom, the Indians
+still maintained their attack.
+
+Another day and another night followed, without any break in the
+struggle. Daniel Boone was aware that the Indians were now being guided
+by Captain Duquesne and were not following their usual custom of
+abandoning an attack when darkness fell. Meanwhile Boone was moving from
+place to place encouraging his men and making sure that all things were
+well.
+
+Jemima Boone, by the direction of her father, was firing through one of
+the portholes. In the second day of the fight a negro, who had fled from
+the fort, climbed into a tree near by, fired at the girl and wounded
+her.
+
+Daniel Boone, who at the moment was standing near his daughter,
+instantly peered through the porthole, discovered the deserter, and the
+report of his rifle was followed by the fall of the man from the tree in
+which he had hidden.
+
+Day followed day and still the attack was maintained. The Indians were
+unable to force an entrance into the place, but they were unwilling to
+abandon the attack.
+
+One afternoon Peleg came to Daniel Boone and, greatly excited, said:
+"Come with me!"
+
+Leading the way to the side of the fort which faced the river, he called
+the attention of the scout to the colour of the water.
+
+"What does that mean?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"It means that the varmints are trying to dig a trench from the bank of
+the river to the fort," said Boone. "The earth they have thrown out has
+coloured the water. If they once get inside the fort they may compel us
+to surrender."
+
+"What can we do?" inquired Peleg. "We must do something!"
+
+"Come, I will show you," replied Boone quietly.
+
+Selecting several men to aid Peleg in his task, he soon arranged for a
+counter trench to be dug which would cross that which the Indians were
+digging. Nor was it long before the discovery of the work of the
+defenders caused the red men to abandon their scheme.
+
+More furiously than before, the siege was continued. A new device was
+tried by the Indians on the fifth day.
+
+Arrows with burning brands attached to them were shot in such a manner
+that they struck the roofs of the houses within the fort. It was
+impossible for any one to prevent this work.
+
+At last a cry was raised that the fort itself was on fire. The cry,
+terrifying as it was, instantly brought Henry to the front, who said
+calmly: "I put out flame."
+
+For a moment every gun and voice within the fort was silent while the
+anxious inmates watched Henry as he made his way to the roof where the
+fire already was kindled. A wild yell from the Indians greeted the
+appearance of the young man and a shower of bullets fell all about him.
+
+Undismayed by his peril, Henry succeeded in making his way to the
+blazing arrow, flung it to the ground, and succeeded in putting out the
+fire. As he turned to make his way back to his friends another shower of
+bullets fell about him, and a groan escaped the watching defenders when
+they saw the young hero suddenly lose his grasp upon the roof, and
+after a brief struggle roll to the ground outside the walls.
+
+The numbers of those who had fallen within the fort had not been great,
+protected as they were by its wall and also by their own continued
+vigilance. The ranks of the assailants, however, steadily had been
+thinned, and on the ninth day, without any warning to the defenders, the
+attacking Shawnees withdrew from the place.
+
+Peleg was engaged in his duties in the fort on the morning following the
+siege when the scout approached him and, in response to the enthusiastic
+words of the boy, smiled as he said: "Well, we did pretty well, lad. We
+lost only two and had only four wounded."
+
+"And Henry was one of the killed," suggested Peleg.
+
+"I do not know. He has not been found," replied Boone. "If one had to
+die I think Henry was the best one to go." In response to a look of
+inquiry from the boy, the scout continued: "He had no family; his white
+blood prevented him from being entirely at home among the Indians, while
+his Indian bringing-up would have prevented him forever from feeling
+that he was one of us. There were times when I was afraid for the life
+of Sam Oliver, so bitter was Henry's hatred of him."
+
+"Do you know how many of the Indians were killed?"
+
+"It is reported that thirty-seven were killed and a great many wounded.
+It is difficult to say just what the losses were, because the Indians
+always carry away their dead and wounded."
+
+"Do you think they will come back again?"
+
+The scout shook his head as he said: "The country hereabouts is
+increasing so rapidly in its population, and there are so many other
+stations now between Boonesborough and the Ohio, that I hardly think
+they will attack us again. Certainly not in the near future."
+
+"How is Jemima this morning?" asked Peleg.
+
+"She will be all right in a few days," replied Boone. "It was only a
+flesh wound in the shoulder that she received."
+
+"What are you planning to do next?"
+
+"If you agree," replied Daniel Boone, "I shall leave you in charge of my
+farm and start as soon as I can for North Carolina, to bring back my
+family."
+
+It was not long before the scout set forth alone on his journey to the
+Yadkin, whither his wife had gone with all her children except Jemima,
+to find a refuge in her father's house, after she had become convinced
+that Daniel Boone had been killed by the Indians.
+
+The journey was successfully made and the coming of Boone was to his
+wife almost like the return of one from the dead. There were some
+matters on the Yadkin, however, which prevented their immediate
+departure, and it was not until several weeks had elapsed that the scout
+with his family returned to Boonesborough.
+
+Meanwhile Peleg had looked carefully after the farm which his friend
+owned, and he received warm words of praise for his efforts when Boone
+came back.
+
+As soon as the scout saw that his family once more was established in
+the settlement, and the attacks of the Indians, for a time at least, had
+ceased, with his brother, who also now had joined the settlers, he once
+more started for Blue Licks to make salt, of which the settlers and
+their cattle were greatly in need.
+
+"Are you not afraid to go to the Blue Licks?" inquired his brother when
+Boone was ready to set forth on his expedition.
+
+"Why should I be?" inquired Boone.
+
+"It was there that you were taken by the Indians."
+
+[Illustration: "The scout, with his family, returned to Boonesborough"]
+
+"They say," replied the scout with a smile, "that lightning never
+strikes twice in the same place. I am not afraid. I think the Shawnees
+have been taught a good lesson. Colonel Bowman and his one hundred and
+sixty men, though he was not very successful in his attack upon old
+Chillicothe, nevertheless showed the Indians that we were not unmindful
+of their plans. And Colonel Harrod at all events, when he made his
+attack with the horsemen, certainly scattered the Indians on every side.
+I think they will remember both men, although I wish that we might have
+inflicted greater damage upon their village. The report is that only two
+scalps were taken, but that may mean very little. The attacks which
+Colonel Bird, with his five hundred Indians and Canadians, made upon
+Riddle's Station and the little station upon the Licking River, seem to
+me to show that the Indians are not ready to give up yet."
+
+Boone's assurance overcame the objections of his brother and persuaded
+him that there was no special danger attending their labours at Blue
+Licks.
+
+The confidence of the scout seemed warranted when several days had
+passed, the necessary salt had been made, and the two men were preparing
+to return to the fort. Not an Indian had been seen, nor had there been
+any signs of their presence.
+
+Hardly had the two men, however, set forth on their return when, without
+warning, they were attacked by a band of Indians. Boone's brother was
+killed and scalped. But the scout instantly darted into the thickest
+part of the forest. Owing to his superior knowledge of the country he
+was not overtaken at once; and running steadily and as swiftly as he was
+able, he at last sought refuge in a ravine, followed by a dog which the
+Indians were using to trail him. Boone waited quietly until the savage
+animal approached and then calmly shot it. Aware that the report of his
+rifle would reveal his presence to his enemies, the intrepid man, as the
+woods about him were dense and darkness was approaching, resolutely made
+his way into the forest again and resumed his flight toward
+Boonesborough.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII
+
+FOUR WARRIORS AND MORE
+
+
+With his usual coolness and fortitude, the great scout continued on his
+way, and without further trouble arrived at the fort.
+
+"Peleg," he said the following day, when the two were labouring in the
+field together, "Blue Licks somehow seems to be destined to be a place
+of trouble and sorrow for me. Only a few days ago my brother was calling
+my attention to that fact and now his death has confirmed his words. It
+grieves me that I could not even bring away his body. That, however, is
+a part of the fortune of pioneers, and as no man ever yet has heard me
+whine, I do not intend to begin now. But my brother's death is a source
+of very heavy sorrow to me."
+
+"Do you think the Indians are planning another attack?"
+
+"Not right away. I suspect that they are trying to attack or capture me.
+Their anger against the settlement doubtless is as keen as ever, but
+they look upon me as one who has deserted their tribe. Some day they
+will find me. But I have one consolation, and that is that they will
+not find me unprepared."
+
+The words of the scout concerning the further attacks by the Indians
+were confirmed during the year that followed. The little settlement at
+Boonesborough steadily increased in numbers and prosperity. For a time,
+free from the attacks of the Indians, the families toiled in their
+fields. More extensive clearings were made and in the marvellously
+fertile soil the crops were bountiful. There were many new homes
+established in the community, too, for among the continually arriving
+settlers were many young women.
+
+In the quiet labours on his clearing Boone found peace and comfort such
+as he seldom had enjoyed. Peleg, who had secured some land adjoining the
+farm of his friend, worked with the scout and Israel, and as they
+assisted one another both places steadily improved.
+
+The feeling of Boone, however, that he was still an object of hatred
+among the Shawnees was confirmed repeatedly. His most critical
+experience came one day when, all unknown to the scout, four athletic
+Shawnees were detailed by Blackfish to approach the settlement without
+arousing any suspicions of their presence, watch the movements of the
+scout, and either bring him back to the tribe or bring his scalp.
+
+On his farm the scout had erected, not far from his cabin, a little
+house in which he dried the tobacco he cultivated. The little building
+stood in the midst of his tobacco patch. Within the house there were
+three tiers of timber from which the tobacco leaves were hanging to dry.
+
+Boone and Peleg were busily engaged here one autumn day, almost
+unmindful of peril, the younger scout believing that the fears of his
+friend were without foundation.
+
+"The tobacco on this lower tier," said Boone after he had made a careful
+investigation, "seems to be entirely dry."
+
+"Then we had better change the sticks to the tier above," responded
+Peleg. "That will leave plenty of room for the leaves we have not
+brought in as yet."
+
+"That's a good suggestion," answered Boone, and together the two scouts
+began to transfer the sticks from the lower to the second tier.
+
+Peleg departed from the building to bring in more of the tobacco leaves
+and left Boone standing on the poles that separated the upper tiers.
+
+Suddenly as the scout glanced below him he saw four Shawnee warriors
+stealthily enter through the door and laugh as they looked up to him.
+
+"You no get away some more," said one of them whom Boone recognized as
+Owaneeyo, "We take you to Chillicothe this time. You no cheat us some
+more."
+
+Every one of the savages was armed and looking up into Boone's face,
+while the direction in which the guns were aimed added force to this
+declaration.
+
+Not for a moment losing his self-control, and aware that he was in the
+greatest peril of his life, Boone's careful preparation now showed its
+value. "Ah!" said he quietly. "Glad to see you, my friends. How have you
+been this long time?"
+
+"Been heap mad," said Owaneeyo, frowning in a manner which betrayed his
+rising anger. "You come down."
+
+"I shall be very glad to go with you, my friends. Tell me, how is
+Blackfish these days?"
+
+"You come down!" repeated Owaneeyo.
+
+"I just told you," said Boone, "that I shall be glad to come down. I
+prefer, however, to have you wait until I finish with my tobacco." In
+the hunter's heart there was hope that Peleg would discover his
+predicament and bring him aid before he should be seized by the angry
+warriors.
+
+"Make yourselves comfortable," continued Boone pleasantly. "You see I
+cannot get down from here and I cannot get away from you." The scout
+paused a moment and glanced at his would-be captors.
+
+"You like tobacco?" he resumed. "When I have this cured I will give
+some of it to you and we will smoke together."
+
+The Indians were becoming impatient, and plainly were unaware of what
+the scout was doing. Continuing his conversation and making more
+inquiries concerning his friends in the Indian town, he did his utmost
+to hold the attention of his dangerous visitors while he gathered
+together some armfuls of tobacco.
+
+Carefully arranging the bundles of the dry tobacco between the poles and
+standing where he was able to look directly down into the faces of his
+enemies, Boone suddenly cut the strings by which the sticks of tobacco
+were held. At the same moment, with his arms full of the dried leaves,
+he leaped down upon the Indians, and instantly filled their mouths and
+eyes with dry tobacco dust. The Shawnees were blinded and well-nigh
+suffocated in the little tobacco house. There were sneezes and shouts
+and cries from the startled warriors, who now were unable to see even
+the direction in which the door was located.
+
+Darting from the little house, the scout made his escape and ran swiftly
+to his cabin. In a moment he seized his trusty rifle, but as he returned
+to the tobacco house he saw the Indians running blindly and staggering
+toward the woods.
+
+Boone restrained his impulse to fire upon the fleeing warriors, and
+called to Peleg and Israel, who with several of the younger members of
+the settlement were now hurriedly approaching, all of them prepared to
+pursue the departing Shawnees.
+
+"Do not go after them!" called Boone.
+
+Reluctantly the young men halted, and Peleg said: "Why do you not want
+us to chase them? We might have had every one of them."
+
+"If the Shawnees do not go on the warpath, why should we?"
+
+"They were on the warpath for you!" said Israel. "It was lucky you got
+away."
+
+Boone laughed silently as he recalled the appearance of the Indians when
+he had thrown the tobacco dust into their faces. "I am sure," he said,
+"the Shawnees will remember what I said to them and how they were
+treated by me. Perhaps it will do more good than it will to shoot them."
+
+The months passed and the peace of the settlement remained unbroken. Few
+even suspected the terrible struggle which was awaiting them.
+
+The game in the forest was becoming somewhat scarce. The settlers,
+increasing steadily in numbers, now were scattered from the Kentucky
+River to the Ohio. It was commonly believed that the Indians had finally
+accepted the coming of the whites as inevitable, and no longer were
+ready to dispute their occupation of the western forests.
+
+The one marked exception was Daniel Boone. To all the assertions of his
+friends he replied by expressing his own conviction that the red men
+were simply biding their time. No one was more familiar with the Indian
+ways and thoughts than the scout and he was positive that they had not
+forgotten the injuries which they had sustained at the hands of the
+whites. Sooner or later they would strive to obtain vengeance and at the
+same time unite in a supreme endeavour to drive the hated people from
+the lands which they believed to be their own.
+
+"I am more convinced than ever that trouble is brewing," said Boone one
+day to Peleg and Israel, who now were his frequent companions. "I know
+Simon Girty, and a worse man never lived. He is a renegade and a
+traitor. He has given up living among the whites, and in everything but
+colour and in their better qualities he has become an Indian. I am sure
+that we shall hear from him before many months have passed."
+
+Little the great scout dreamed that even while he was expressing his
+opinion to the boys, runners at that very time had been sent by Simon
+Girty to many of the northwestern tribes, urging them all to lay aside
+the jealousy they felt for one another and unite in one common cause
+against the white invaders.
+
+The following spring the storm burst. As the pattering raindrops
+sometimes fall at the beginning of a downpour, so among the scattered
+settlements a renewal of attacks by prowling bands of Indians indicated
+what was to follow.
+
+One day when Daniel Boone returned to his home he was unusually cast
+down. He explained that he had just learned of an attack which a party
+of twenty-five Wyandottes had made upon Estill's Station. The warriors
+had stolen into a little cabin which was apart from the others in the
+settlement. They had seized the occupants--a woman and her two
+daughters--and tomahawked and scalped all three. The bodies were still
+warm when they were discovered upon the floor of the cabin by
+neighbours. The scout told what followed.
+
+"Immediately Captain Estill collected a band of twenty-five daring men
+and followed the Indians more swiftly than I followed the band which
+took Jemima prisoner. The Wyandottes at first seemed to be frightened
+and began to run, but at last they made a stand on one side of a creek,
+while the whites were on the other. They were not more than fifty yards
+apart and every man was sheltered behind a tree or rock and firing at
+any enemy that could be seen. Captain Estill had lost one third of his
+men and had shot about as many of the Indians, but the braves were still
+returning his fire, and showed no signs of leaving. He thought if he
+should keep up that kind of a fight, every one at last would be killed,
+unless perhaps it should be the very last white or Indian.
+
+"Mindful of this, Captain Estill sent out a party of six men, led by
+Lieutenant Miller, telling them to creep around and attack the Indians
+on their flank. But the chief was as shrewd as the captain, and as soon
+as he saw that the fire of the whites was slowing up in front of him, he
+instantly made a stronger attack upon the men that were left. Jumping
+into the water, they fell upon the captain and his men, driving them
+before them and killing a good many. Those who escaped finally got back
+to the Station, and you can readily see how alarmed the people are."
+
+"What happened to Captain Estill?" inquired Israel, greatly shocked by
+the story of his father.
+
+"He and eight more of his men were killed, and, besides, four were
+wounded."
+
+"That's more than half that went out, isn't it?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"Yes," answered Daniel Boone.
+
+The report of the misfortune which had overtaken the men of Estill's
+Station was speedily succeeded by another report no less alarming. A
+band of Indians had crept up to Hoy's Station and there had stolen two
+little boys.
+
+Quickly Captain Holder gathered a band of seventeen angry men and
+started in pursuit of the Indians. It was not long before he overtook
+them, but he and his men were driven back after more than half the party
+had fallen.
+
+The alarm now became widespread. The success which had attended the
+plans of the Indians encouraged them to continue their efforts.
+Sometimes singly, frequently in small parties, they crept close to the
+settlements and by their stealthy attacks kept the people in continual
+alarm.
+
+There was no one now to dispute the great scout's prophecy that more
+serious trouble was to come. Within a few weeks an army of Indians, made
+up of bands from many of the northwestern tribes and numbering nearly
+six hundred warriors, began its march from Chillicothe.
+
+The renegade Girty was in command. The little army moved with great
+caution, and their approach was unsuspected by the whites. One August
+night they arrived at Bryant's Station, surrounded it, and prepared to
+dash upon the unsuspecting people the moment the gates should be opened
+the following morning.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV
+
+A DECOY AND AN ATTACK
+
+
+The fort at Bryant's Station was for the protection of forty cabins
+placed in parallel lines upon a little hill on the bank of the Elkhorn
+River.
+
+All through the night the garrison had been preparing as soon as
+daylight came to depart from the fort to carry aid to the men at Hoy's
+Station. A messenger had brought word to Bryant's Station of the defeat
+which almost had overwhelmed Holder and his men. If Girty's band of six
+hundred Indians had arrived a few hours later they would have found in
+the fort only a few women and children, besides a small number of old
+men, unable to fight.
+
+Afterward it was learned that the Indians were listening all through the
+night to the sounds of the activities within the fort, and when they saw
+the lights gleaming from the blockhouse and the cabins they must have
+suspected that news of their coming already had been received by the
+inmates.
+
+However, they made no attempt to steal upon the fort in the darkness,
+although Girty and the Indian chiefs were planning and arranging their
+attack for the following day.
+
+For some strange reason many of the forts on the border had been built
+at a considerable distance from the springs upon which the people
+depended for their water. The fort at Bryant's Station was no exception.
+
+By Girty's direction many of the Indians placed themselves in hiding,
+within shot of the spring. One hundred selected warriors also were
+stationed at a distance from the spring. The latter were ordered to open
+a sharp fire and make their presence known to the garrison. Doubtless
+the hope of the red men was that the actions of this party would draw
+the white defenders from their place of safety.
+
+If their plan succeeded Girty then expected that the other band of
+warriors instantly would rush upon the opposite gate of the fort and hew
+it down with their tomahawks while the men were chasing the little decoy
+force. In this manner all the leaders of the attacking force expected to
+make their way into the little cabins within the stockade.
+
+When daybreak came the garrison was almost ready to open the gates and
+march to the assistance of their friends at Hoy's Station.
+
+Suddenly there was a furious and continued discharge of rifles
+accompanied by such hideous yells and screams and whoops that they
+terrified not only the women and children of Bryant's Station, but
+alarmed even the men, accustomed though they were to the methods of
+Indian warfare.
+
+Running to the stockade and peering out through the loopholes, the
+startled white men saw before them a small band of Indians. These
+warriors were plainly exposed, yelling and making the most insulting and
+furious gestures toward the fort.
+
+All this was so different from their usual custom that some of the older
+men of the fort warned their comrades that a trick of some kind was
+being played upon them.
+
+"It is a decoy party," said one of the men positively. "They will draw
+you out of the fort and before you know it you will find yourselves
+surrounded by more than a hundred of those howling savages."
+
+"That is right" said another. "My suggestion is that we all make for the
+other side of the fort. I believe the Indians are trying to draw us out
+on this side and then attack us on the other."
+
+The experiences which many already had had with the Indians of the
+border confirmed the impression made by the words of the last speaker.
+Even the younger men, who were eager to sally forth and attack the young
+warriors that were making such a commotion, were held back by the
+suggestion.
+
+"We cannot protect ourselves very long in the fort," said one of the men
+when the defenders had been divided into two bands.
+
+"Why not?" inquired another.
+
+"Because we have no water. There is not enough water in the fort to last
+us thirty hours."
+
+"What can we do?" inquired one of the older men after a tense silence
+had followed the statement of the speaker. "If we go down to the spring
+the Indians will pick us off, every one."
+
+"Send the women," suggested another. "They go to the spring every
+morning. The Indians may not think we have any suspicion of what they
+are planning to do. If the women and girls go to the spring for water
+just as they usually do the Indians will not fire at them. They will
+want to save all their bullets for their attack on this side when our
+men have been drawn out to chase the savages who are yelling now on the
+other side."
+
+"It seems cowardly," said another man "to ask the women to go down to
+the spring when we know it would be sure death for us to go."
+
+"It will not be sure death for the women, and my opinion is that not one
+of them will be harmed," said the first speaker positively. "At all
+events we can ask them to go and let them say whether they will or not."
+
+When the proposition was made to the women there were some who made
+replies not unlike those which their male defenders had suggested in the
+council. Some of them said: "If the men were afraid that they might be
+shot, why should they ask the women to go in their place?" Then it was
+explained just why the request was made. Immediately some of the bolder
+women and girls, taking their buckets, opened the gates and started
+toward the spring, which was only a short distance from the fort.
+
+Frightened, the women undoubtedly were, and with good reason. But with
+unbroken lines they continued on their way to the spring. One by one
+they knelt and filled their buckets and then joined the line which was
+returning to the fort.
+
+When the matrons and maids had arrived within a few yards of the open
+gate their terror became so overpowering that they all began to run for
+the shelter. Many a dusky face had been seen on the borders of the
+forest, but not a shot was fired at the bold girls and the women of
+Bryant's Station when they brought the water from the spring to the
+inmates of the fort.
+
+"Now is our time," said one of the men, after the return of the women.
+"We ought to do two things: First we must get some one out of the fort
+to carry word to Boone of the trouble we are having."
+
+"And second?" inquired one of the company.
+
+"We must send out some of the younger men to attack that decoy party."
+
+"That's right," suggested one of the young men eagerly. "We must go out
+and make all the noise we can. Then all the other men here in the fort
+can be ready for Girty when he comes, and I know he will come."
+
+"I will carry the message to Boone," volunteered one of the younger men
+named Bell. It was arranged that he should depart with the young men who
+were to attack the decoy party, and then instead of returning to the
+fort he should make a dash into the forest and try to make his way to
+Boonesborough as speedily as possible.
+
+The men in the fort were all serious when they saw thirteen of their
+younger companions depart from the fort through the gate which opened
+toward the place where the decoy party had been seen.
+
+"Do not chase the varmints too far," charged one of the watching men.
+
+No response was given to the warning, and as soon as the hardy, young
+settlers had departed the gate was closed and the remaining men, cocking
+their guns, took their positions to await the result of the expected
+attack as soon as it should be unmasked.
+
+It was not long before the report of rifles was heard from the distant
+road, and gradually the sound indicated that the men were being decoyed
+farther and farther from the fort.
+
+"Girty will order an attack on us soon, now that the boys have made so
+much noise," suggested one of the waiting defenders.
+
+Scarcely had the man spoken when Simon Girty, springing from the forest
+at the head of five hundred of his painted warriors, rushed upon the
+western gate of the fort. It was plain that they were trying to force
+their way over the undefended palisade.
+
+The men of the Station had been carefully arranged in small divisions;
+and at the word from their leaders they fired upon the approaching
+warriors. The determination of the white men and their anxiety for their
+wives and children served to steady the nerve of every man and make of
+him a sharpshooter.
+
+The consternation of Girty's army cannot be described. Startled by the
+unexpected resistance and beholding their comrades falling on every side
+of them, with wild cries of anger and dismay the painted braves
+scattered, and in confusion all ran back into the sheltering forest.
+
+Two minutes after the sally not an Indian was to be seen, and the party
+of thirteen young settlers returned to the shelter of the fort.
+
+Every defender of Bryant's Station, however, was aware that this was but
+the beginning of the siege. The attack now was undertaken more in
+accordance with the usual methods of Indian warfare. From behind trees
+or protected by rocks the red men fired upon the defenders whenever any
+one showed himself. And the men of Bryant's Station were replying to the
+attack in kind. Not much time had elapsed before it was plain that this
+method of warfare was without marked effect on either party.
+
+By the middle of the afternoon, however, a sudden change occurred which
+instantly altered the entire combat. The cause of this change was due to
+the messenger who had been sent from Bryant's Station as soon as the
+discovery of the Indians had been made. Upon the fleetest horse in the
+settlement young Bell had succeeded in making his way to Lexington, with
+news of the dire need of help at Bryant's Station.
+
+The messenger, however, was keenly disappointed when he found only the
+women and children and a few old men in the place. He was informed that
+the able-bodied men had all marched to the rendezvous at Hoy's Station
+as soon as the knowledge of Holder's defeat had been received.
+
+Following the direction in which he had been informed the fighting band
+had gone, it was not long before Bell overtook them and gave them his
+message.
+
+In the band were sixteen mounted men and more than twice that number of
+men on foot. As they set forth in response to Bell's appeal, their
+courage was strengthened by the report of the coming of a force of men
+from Boone's Station, among whom were Peleg, Israel, and the great scout
+himself.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV
+
+A FIELD OF CORN
+
+
+At a good pace the band was moving steadily over the rough roadway that
+led to Bryant's Station. The men were silent for the most part, for they
+had serious work before them. What a siege by five hundred Indians was
+likely to be, led by such a man as Simon Girty, required no description.
+The mounted men, however, preceding the men on foot, found little on
+their way to indicate the peril of their friends.
+
+It was late summer now, and already some of the leaves of the forest
+were tinged with the colours of autumn. The song of a bird was seldom
+heard, although the locusts were noisily announcing their presence in
+the treetops.
+
+As the advancing men came nearer the end of their journey their
+precautions increased. The men on horseback still led, but were closer
+to their comrades than in the earlier part of the journey. The
+information which the courier had brought had been so meagre that the
+exact location of Girty's band of warriors was not known. Bell had
+reported only that Bryant's Station was besieged and that Girty was the
+leader of the howling horde of savages.
+
+Bryant's Station was less than a mile and a half distant. The advancing
+men were in a bend in the road, on one side of which stretched the
+primeval forest, while on the other one hundred or more acres had been
+cleared and planted to corn. The stalks of corn were higher than the
+head of the tallest man in the band.
+
+"Come on!" called Peleg to Israel and his friends. "Let the men who are
+riding go around by the road and we'll cut across lots through this
+cornfield."
+
+The suggestion at once was acted upon, and the men on foot, among whom
+were most of the boys and younger men in the rescuing party, ran into
+the cornfield where they were soon concealed from the sight of their
+companions. Around them the stalks were standing so high that it would
+have been an easy matter for one not accustomed to such places to lose
+his way.
+
+Meanwhile, the mounted men continued on their way. It was unknown to
+them, as it was also to their companions in the cornfield, that the
+keen-eyed Indians had been aware of the departure of the courier from
+Bryant's Station. Indeed, it was suspected afterward that intentionally
+the red men had permitted him to proceed through their lines. All the
+warriors apparently were eager for the messenger to return and bring the
+men who doubtless would respond to his appeal.
+
+Consequently, when the mounted men drew near the forest opposite the
+cornfield, they had no information or even suspicion that Girty's
+warriors, concealed behind the trunks of the great trees, were awaiting
+their coming. Steadily advancing, the horsemen soon were drawing near
+the place where the ambuscade had been formed.
+
+Meanwhile, Peleg and Israel, in advance of their comrades, had been
+moving through the cornfield. They had arrived at a point which they
+thought must be midway in the great field, when at the sound of a gun
+both young pioneers stopped short, and Israel seized Peleg's arm as his
+face became pale and he said, "What has happened?"
+
+There was slight need for Peleg to reply to the startling question. On
+the August air arose the reports of many rifles and the terrifying
+whoops of the Indians.
+
+It was impossible for the men in the cornfield to see what was occurring
+in the road. They were aware of the attack, of course, and there was
+slight doubt in the mind of any that the entrance of the men on foot
+into the cornfield had been seen by their watching enemies.
+
+"Keep close to me," said Peleg to his companion. "It is every man for
+himself, now, but I want you to stay by me. We will take our chances
+that way."
+
+Peleg started when a whoop wilder and fiercer than any that had preceded
+it came from the bend in the road.
+
+"I wonder if they got every man," whispered Israel, his voice trembling
+in his excitement. "I do not believe one of our men suspected there was
+any danger here. Not even my father spoke of it."
+
+"Your father does not always speak of his fears. If it is possible for
+any one to get away I am sure your father will be safe."
+
+"What's that?" whispered Israel sharply. From the sounds it was evident
+that some at least of the mounted men were fleeing from the place. The
+shots of the Indians were plainly heard, and it was clear that they were
+following the fugitives. Perhaps a few had contrived to force their way
+around the bend.
+
+The two anxious young settlers, however, soon were recalled to the
+perils of their own position. Suddenly, not far to their right, they
+heard a rustling sound, as of the furtive approach of some one moving
+through the standing corn.
+
+"Drop!" whispered Peleg. "Don't move! Do not say a word!"
+
+The two boys cast themselves upon the ground, each holding his rifle in
+readiness for instant use. The sound of some one moving in the midst of
+the corn might indicate the presence of an enemy or of a friend, and
+until the anxious boys could determine which was near, they remained
+motionless.
+
+All at once the silence which had continued for moments was broken by
+whoops nearby, and the reports of rifles from within the field. Both
+boys were startled when each looked into the other's face and found his
+suspicions confirmed. The Indians were aware of the presence of the
+settlers in the cornfield and were stealthily entering from every side
+of the field at the same time. Already some of the unfortunate settlers
+had been found and their fate had been sealed. The summer stillness was
+broken by the wild whoops which indicated the success of some warrior in
+bringing his victim to the ground. There were also calls and cries from
+the wounded, mingled with the frequent reports of the rifles.
+
+The standing corn, a few yards in advance of the place where Peleg and
+Israel were lying, now suddenly was drawn apart and the boys saw three
+painted Shawnee warriors in single file stealthily making their way
+between the tall stalks.
+
+They concluded that discovery was not to be avoided, and after Peleg had
+whispered to his companion to follow his example, one after the other
+the boys raised their rifles and fired upon their enemies.
+
+Aware that one and perhaps two of the approaching red men had fallen and
+that the third warrior had darted rapidly away at the discharge of the
+guns, both boys sprang to their feet, and, crouching low, began to run
+through the corn.
+
+Both were too experienced to lose their way easily, and not many minutes
+had elapsed before Peleg, without speaking, laid his hand warningly on
+his friend's shoulder. Instantly both stopped and listened.
+
+Peleg believed that they had arrived near the border of the field. He
+was fearful now that reserves had been stationed so that from whatever
+side the unfortunate settlers might attempt to escape they would be met
+by the bullets of the watching warriors. Both boys listened intently
+until several minutes had elapsed.
+
+"We had better separate here," whispered Israel. Peleg hesitated a
+moment and then quietly nodded his assent. The possibility of escape,
+slight as it was, would be increased if they proceeded singly rather
+than together.
+
+"You know the way to the Station?" whispered Peleg. Israel nodded his
+head, and, moving to a place twenty feet to his left, turned, and in a
+course parallel to the one Peleg was following, cautiously continued on
+his way toward the border of the field.
+
+When Peleg came near to the edge of the field he stopped once more and
+peered cautiously all about him, listening for sounds that might
+indicate the presence of his enemies. From behind him still were heard
+the shouts and shrieks that were mingled with the reports of the guns
+and the whoops of the excited Indians.
+
+Somehow, in spite of his peril, the beat of the young settler's heart
+seemed to be almost normal. He watched a little field mouse that
+fearlessly peered up at him from the ground. He even counted the swings
+of a spider making her web between the swaying branches of an enormous
+stalk of corn.
+
+Apparently the fighting was confined to the farther side of the field.
+Only infrequent sounds of the conflict were heard at his right and left,
+while from the region before him there had been almost no sounds of
+conflict at all.
+
+Was the border in front of him unguarded? Or was it doubly dangerous
+because the Indians were attempting from the other three sides to drive
+the unfortunate men into a trap?
+
+Stealthily Peleg still crept forward. After each step he paused and
+looked keenly about him as he listened for sounds which might indicate
+renewed peril. He had seen nothing of Israel since his friend had left
+him.
+
+Suddenly he was startled to hear what evidently were the sounds of a
+struggle between two men nearby. The laboured breathing and an
+occasional exclamation which he heard alike convinced him of this. With
+increasing anxiety Peleg crept forward.
+
+He was not molested when he came to the end of the row, but before him
+he saw a contest which threatened to terminate speedily as well as
+fatally for Israel Boone.
+
+The son of the great scout was in the hands of a white man, and was
+struggling desperately. His contestant, however, plainly was much the
+stronger. Peleg saw the face of the man distinctly, and he assured
+himself that never before had he looked upon so villainous a
+countenance. The man's face was distorted and discoloured by his
+efforts, and the perspiration streamed down his cheeks leaving furrows
+behind it. In spite of his excitement, Peleg asked himself if the man's
+face had ever been washed. The necessity for quick action, if his friend
+was to be rescued, caused Peleg instantly to raise his rifle to his
+shoulder and fire.
+
+Israel's contestant dropped to the ground as Peleg had seen an ox
+collapse from the blow of an axe.
+
+Instantly darting to the side of his friend, Peleg whispered, "Come!"
+
+"That is Simon Girty!" gasped Israel, looking down into the face of the
+fallen man before him.
+
+Startled as Peleg was by the words of his companion, he did not wait to
+verify them, but turned back at once into the cornfield. As soon as he
+had gone a short distance, bidding Israel follow him, he turned to his
+left, and, still running swiftly and silently, the boys advanced a
+hundred yards; they then turned abruptly to their right in the direction
+of the side of the field where they had first entered. Although
+mystified by the action of his companion, Israel did not protest as he
+followed Peleg in his flight.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI
+
+THE WHITE SHAWNEE AGAIN
+
+
+Again turning to his left, Peleg, still followed by his friend, ran
+swiftly toward the border of the cornfield.
+
+The cries and whoops in a measure had died away, and from what he could
+hear Peleg concluded that some of his friends had escaped from the field
+and were being pursued in their flight toward the fort.
+
+When Peleg and Israel found they were near the road, on the opposite
+side of which stood the forest where the Indians had made their
+ambuscade, they peered cautiously in all directions, but were unable to
+see any of their enemies. That another band of warriors had followed in
+pursuit of the men who had escaped from the first attack and from the
+fight in the cornfield was most likely, they concluded.
+
+Peleg whispered: "The safest place for us is where the Indians were
+hidden. They have gone from there and will not come back to look for any
+of us."
+
+Israel nodded his head in assent, and, firmly grasping their rifles,
+the boys darted across the road and gained the shelter of the trees.
+When the two young scouts were convinced that their immediate presence
+had not been discovered, Peleg said to Israel: "Are you sure you can
+find your way if we again separate?"
+
+"Yes," answered Israel. "But the Indians are between us and the fort. Do
+you think we can ever get through?"
+
+"We must," said Peleg. "The folk at Bryant's Station are in such danger
+that not one of us must fail them now."
+
+The words hardly had been spoken when there was a sharp report of a
+rifle, and a bullet passed so near them that both boys heard it singing
+on its way.
+
+Moved by a common impulse, they turned and dashed into the forest.
+Whether or no any of their enemies were hiding behind the trees toward
+which they were running neither knew.
+
+They were chiefly intent upon speed now, and ran on for several minutes,
+well knowing that their lives depended upon the success of their
+efforts.
+
+At last, breathless, both halted for a rest, and Peleg said to his
+companion, "I am sure it will be better for us to separate now. You know
+the way, and can look out for yourself. I shall come, too, and if we
+succeed In getting through, it had better be before night."
+
+"Yes," assented Israel. "If we wait until dark and then creep up to the
+fort, the guards will be likely to fire upon us, mistaking us for
+Indians."
+
+With these words Israel departed. Peleg watched his friend as long as he
+remained within sight, and then began with caution to retrace the way
+over which they had come. Keeping a firm grip upon Singing Susan, Peleg
+darted from tree to tree and did not venture from each refuge until he
+was convinced that no one was near him.
+
+His attempt to proceed was interrupted, however, by the report of a
+rifle, and again a bullet whistled uncomfortably close to his head,
+tearing some splinters from the tree at his elbow. The young scout at
+his utmost speed darted into the wood at his right.
+
+He was aware that a swift flight could not long be maintained because of
+his recent exertions. Where a refuge might be found he did not know. But
+just then he noticed the trunk of what appeared to be a huge hollow tree
+leaning over a shallow brook, across which he must leap if he continued
+his flight.
+
+He entered the stream, ran swiftly a few steps with the current, and
+then retraced his way to the tree. It was but the work of a moment for
+him to climb to the broken top, and great was his relief when he saw
+that the tree indeed was hollow. Without thought of where he might fall
+he dropped into the welcome opening.
+
+He fell several feet before the decayed wood provided a foothold strong
+enough to enable him to stand. Fortunately the hollow of the tree was
+larger than his body, and although he was cramped and almost blinded by
+the decayed mass, he nevertheless managed to reach his hunting-knife,
+and, making a small opening through the soft wood, peeped out to see if
+his enemies were within sight. As he did so his fears were aroused that
+the tree itself might fall. It was a mere shell and so decayed that he
+was surprised that his descent had not torn it asunder.
+
+At that moment a wild cry, plainly from the road, came to his ears. Then
+shouts were followed by the reports of guns and answering whoops from
+the Indians.
+
+Anxious for his friend Israel, Peleg turned once more to ascertain if
+any of his enemies were near his hiding-place. He was hopeful that his
+trail could not be followed farther than the bank of the little brook,
+although he was sufficiently familiar with Indian ways to know that the
+red men, if they really were pursuing him, would run in either direction
+along the banks until they found the place where he had left the water.
+He smiled as he recalled how he had been standing in the stream when he
+had thrown his arms around the trunk of the bending tree. Singing Susan
+was still held, but it would be impossible for him in his cramped
+position to make use of her musical voice.
+
+Suddenly Peleg was startled to behold an Indian step forth from the
+forest and stand for a moment on the bank of the stream almost directly
+beneath him. His surprise increased when he recognized the warrior as
+Henry. He had believed that the white Shawnee, as Henry had loved to
+call himself, had been killed in the attack on Boonesborough. His brave
+deed in extinguishing the fire that had been kindled by the burning
+arrow had been followed, as Peleg and others had believed, by his death.
+At least every one had seen him fall from the roof and roll to the
+ground. It is true, his body had not been recovered, but there were
+other bodies which had similarly disappeared.
+
+When his first feeling of astonishment had passed and Peleg was
+convinced that it indeed was Henry who was beneath him, a feeling of
+intense anger swept over the young settler. Henry was white, and yet had
+renounced his allegiance to his own people and gone back to the
+Shawnees, and with them he was now making war upon his own nation! There
+was little in his present appearance to distinguish him from other
+braves of the tribe. He wore the scalp-lock and was clad in the Indian
+garb.
+
+Peleg's problem in part was solved when at that moment the rotten wood
+gave way beneath him, and the tree, unable longer to support the weight
+of the young scout, fell with a crash to the ground. As it struck the
+bank the tree was rent asunder, and to the white Shawnee's astonishment
+Peleg scrambled to his feet from out of the wreckage.
+
+Before he could brush the dust from his eyes and bring Singing Susan to
+his shoulder Henry leaped forward and placed both hands upon the barrel
+of the rifle, saying, "No shoot broder."
+
+"You are no brother of mine!" said Peleg. "You are a Shawnee and not a
+white Shawnee, either! You are fighting us!"
+
+"No fight broder," repeated Henry. "Broder show way to fort."
+
+For some strange reason which Peleg was unable to explain even to
+himself, he said abruptly: "Lead the way, then! If you can take me
+safely through the line of these savages, I shall never forget you."
+
+The young scout was eager to inquire of his companion what had befallen
+him and why he had returned to the Shawnees. His present peril, however,
+was so great that he restrained his impulse, and in silence followed
+Henry as he led the way toward Bryant's Station.
+
+Occasionally a halt was made when from some nearby place shots were
+heard indicating that the scattered settlers were being pursued either
+in small detachments or individually, for the terrified men had
+scattered when first the ambuscade had been discovered.
+
+When Henry, who apparently was aware of the location of the besieging
+braves, drew near the fort he stopped and said: "Now go."
+
+Peleg looked about him, and, unable to discover any of his enemies
+nearby, followed the advice which had been given him, and, placing his
+hat on the end of the barrel of Singing Susan as a token of his peaceful
+intentions, approached the gate.
+
+He was at once admitted, and his relief was great when the first to
+greet him was Israel Boone.
+
+"How many are here?" asked Peleg.
+
+"I do not know," answered Israel. "I have heard that only six of our men
+were killed or wounded. When we all started toward Lexington they might
+have chased us all the way and taken the fort there, because there was
+nobody left to fight for it."
+
+"How many Indians were in that ambuscade?" asked Peleg.
+
+"I hear there were three hundred."
+
+"How did you get to the fort?"
+
+"I ran straight ahead for an hour," replied Israel with a smile. "How
+did you come?"
+
+"Henry got me through the lines."
+
+"Henry!" demanded Israel in surprise. "Henry! I thought he was dead."
+
+"So did I, but he is very much alive. I had no time to ask him how he
+came to be here. I was thinking mostly of getting inside the fort."
+
+"It is a comfort to know that at least Girty will not lead any more----"
+
+Israel stopped speaking as a lusty shout was heard from a stump that
+stood near one of the bastions, and the two young defenders to their
+amazement beheld Simon Girty himself standing erect upon the stump and
+waving a cloth which at some time in its history may have been white.
+
+In response to this hail every man ran to hear what the renegade leader
+of the Indians had to say.
+
+They were soon to know the purpose for which Girty, on his hands and
+knees, had crept to the place where he now was standing.
+
+"What do you want?" shouted one of the defenders.
+
+"I have come," replied Girty in a loud voice, "to save your lives. We
+have more than six hundred warriors here, and by to-morrow we shall have
+more. Some of our friends will bring cannon, and when we have them we
+can blow every cabin in Bryant's Station into flinders. If we storm your
+fort, as we sure can do when we get our cannon, I will not promise that
+one life will be spared. You know the redskins well enough to understand
+how I shall not be able to hold them back. If you surrender now, I give
+you my word of honour that not a hair of the head of any one of you
+shall be hurt. I am Simon Girty, and you know you can rely upon every
+word I speak."
+
+A derisive cry from several of the defenders greeted this assertion, but
+when Peleg and Israel looked about them they were aware that many of the
+men had been strongly moved by Girty's appeal.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII
+
+THE STRUGGLE IN THE RAVINE
+
+
+Before any conference of the defenders could be held, one of the younger
+men leaped to the wall to reply to Girty's plea.
+
+"You know who I am, don't you?" called Girty.
+
+"Indeed I do know!" shouted young Reynolds: "Everybody south of the
+Falls of Ohio knows that you are Simon Girty. I have a good-for-nothing
+cur dog which I have named Simon Girty, or Simon Dirty, he looks so much
+like you. If you have any reinforcements or artillery, bring them up!
+But let me warn you that if you or any of those naked rascals with you
+ever get into this fort we shall not use our guns upon them. We have no
+powder to waste on such wretches. We have cut some big bunches of birch
+switches and have scattered them all through the fort; and that is just
+what we cut them for--to thrash you and your rascally comrades. And let
+me tell you," he continued, "that you are not the only ones who are
+expecting reinforcements! We have received word that the whole country
+is aroused and marching to help us, Simon Girty!" he shouted. "If you
+and your gang of murderers stay twenty-four hours longer before the fort
+you will never be able to leave. Your scalps will be drying in the sun
+on the roofs of our cabins."
+
+A loud laugh from his friends greeted the words of the young backwoods
+orator, and it was plain that the spirit which young Reynolds had
+displayed had aroused the drooping courage of his companions. Many of
+the men were aware that on more than one occasion the Indians had indeed
+brought cannon with them, and by their aid had succeeded in destroying
+two of the stations.
+
+All became silent when Simon Girty once more stood up to reply. "It is
+too bad," began the renegade, "it's a pity that such people should be
+tomahawked and scalped! I can protect you now, if you will surrender,
+but I give you fair warning if you do not I shall not be able to hold
+back my warriors."
+
+A derisive shout greeted this declaration, and in apparent sorrow Simon
+Girty at once withdrew.
+
+It was not known within the fort that he instantly ordered preparations
+to be made for raising the siege. Throughout the night not a sound was
+heard, and when daylight came the Indian camp was deserted!
+
+When Peleg and Israel sought the place where the warriors had encamped
+they found the fires still burning brightly and even pieces of meat
+left on the roasting-sticks.
+
+"You see!" said Israel gleefully. "They left just a little while before
+daylight."
+
+"Yes," said Peleg, "that is when they usually roast their meat. I wonder
+if they are all really gone?"
+
+The rejoicing at Bryant's Station was great when it was known that the
+Indians had departed. Before noon the fighting force of white men was
+increased to one hundred and sixty-seven. Among those who entered came
+Daniel Boone, or Colonel Boone as some now called him, since he had
+received his commission from Colonel Clark.
+
+"What does this mean?" demanded Israel when he saw his younger brother
+Daniel among the men in the assembly, "What are you doing here?"
+
+"I think I have as good a right to come as you," retorted Boone's
+younger son. "I am almost seventeen."
+
+"And old enough to know better," laughed Peleg, who was fond of the boy
+and many a time had taken him with him on his expeditions into the
+forest.
+
+The officers, who had hastened to the place as soon as reports of its
+peril had been brought, now assembled, and at once called the men of
+Bryant's Station to a conference.
+
+"It is known," explained Colonel Todd, "that Colonel Logan has
+collected a strong force in Lincoln and that it will be here within
+twenty-four hours. If we wait for his coming we shall be that much
+stronger when we start in pursuit of Girty and his savages. What do you
+think?" he asked, addressing Boone, who stood leaning upon his rifle in
+the rear of the assembly.
+
+"It will be wise to wait," replied Boone quietly. "I have never found it
+to be a mistake to get ready before you attempt to do anything. Girty,
+according to his story, has treble our numbers. The trail which the
+Shawnees have left behind is so plain and so broad that I am suspicious
+that they have made signs which they hope will lead us to pursue them.
+My advice is to wait until Colonel Logan shall come with his men."
+
+The younger members of the force, however, were unwilling to delay. To
+them appearances were convincing that the Indians had fled because they
+were alarmed. Now was the time, they declared, when the savages ought to
+be chased and taught a lesson! If there should be a delay even of a day
+in following them, the Indians would gain such an advance that they
+could not be overtaken and punished for their evil deeds.
+
+The fiery zeal of the young men was not to be denied. Against the
+counsel of Boone and others of the older scouts, who had long
+experience in dealing with their Indian enemies, a swift pursuit
+instantly was begun. Many of the men were mounted on horses, but the
+entire mass, horse and foot, kept well together.
+
+The eager party had not gone far from Bryant's Station before a halt was
+called, when it was discovered that the retiring Indians had turned into
+the buffalo road and, almost as if they were attempting to make their
+trail still more evident, it was noticed that they had chopped many of
+the trees, on either side with their hatchets.
+
+Boone shook his head when he discovered these indications of apparent
+carelessness in the band they were following.
+
+"My opinion is," he said soberly to Colonel Todd, "that Girty is trying
+to lead us on. Just as our men ran into their trap on the way to
+Bryant's Station, I am afraid now that they will be led into another."
+
+"But it is too late to go back," said Colonel Todd.
+
+"Yes, I am afraid our men will not go back now. My only word of advice
+to you is to go ahead cautiously."
+
+"Will you be one of the advance guard?"
+
+"If you so desire."
+
+"At least you are not afraid, and you will not see what is not there."
+
+"I shall do my best," said Boone quietly.
+
+As Peleg, who was standing nearby and had heard the conversation, looked
+into the face of his friend he became aware that the years of anxiety
+had left their mark upon his rugged countenance. There was, however, a
+deeper expression of gentleness on the face of the great scout which in
+no way detracted from the impression of strength which his entire body
+still produced.
+
+Orders were soon given to camp for the night in the forest, and on the
+following day the little army arrived at the Lower Blue Licks. Just as
+the force, proceeding without any form of order, arrived at the southern
+bank of the Licking, some of the men saw several Indians climbing the
+rocky ridge on the opposite side. The red men halted when the
+Kentuckians appeared, looked at them intently a few minutes in silence,
+and then, as calmly and leisurely as if no enemies were near,
+disappeared over the top of the hill.
+
+A halt of the white men was made at once, and several of the officers
+held a consultation.
+
+Apparently there were differences of opinion among the leaders, for
+after a few minutes had elapsed Colonel Todd summoned Daniel Boone and
+inquired his opinion as to what had best be done. All the officers were
+now very serious.
+
+The great scout, leaning upon his rifle, spoke in the deep, quiet tones
+he usually used: "My opinion is that our situation is critical and
+difficult. The force before us without question is ready for battle and
+outnumbers us largely."
+
+"Why do you think that?" inquired Colonel Todd.
+
+"Because of the easy and slow retreat of the Indians who just went over
+the crest of yonder hill. I am familiar with all this region and I am
+fearful they are trying to draw us on. About a mile ahead of us there
+are two ravines, one on either side of the ridge. There the Indians can
+hide and attack us at the same time, both in front and on our flanks,
+almost before we could know they were there."
+
+"What do you think is the best thing to do, then?" inquired Colonel Todd
+seriously.
+
+"My advice," said Boone, "is to do one of two things: Either wait for
+the coming of Colonel Logan, who without doubt is on his way to join us;
+or, if it is decided to attack the Indians without waiting for him to
+come up, then my advice is that half our force ought to go up the river,
+cross the rapids, and fall upon the Indians from that side at the same
+time the others attack them from the front."
+
+"I am afraid that cannot be done," said Colonel Todd, shaking his head.
+
+"Whatever is done," said Boone quietly, "my advice to you is to go over
+the ground carefully before the men cross the river here. Send some
+scouts ahead. I have never found, Colonel Todd, that any man lost by
+being prepared for what might befall him."
+
+Every man in the little assembly was listening with deep attention to
+the great scout who was a man of silence unless his advice was sought.
+
+When he ceased some urged the adoption of his recommendation to wait for
+the coming of Colonel Logan and his men. There were others, however, who
+were strongly in favour of advancing at once.
+
+In the midst of the warm discussion Major McGary, one of the young
+officers who was unable to endure the thought of being near an enemy and
+not fighting, let out a wild whoop. At the same moment he waved his hand
+over his head, spurred his horse into the river and then shouted in his
+loudest tone, "Let all who are not cowards follow me!"
+
+Instantly the mounted men dashed into the river, every one apparently
+striving to be the first to gain the opposite shore. The men on foot
+also rushed into the stream, which for a time seemed to be a rolling
+mass of men and water. No order had been given and no order now was
+desired. Through the deep river horses and men staggered forward, with
+McGary still leading the way.
+
+They gained the opposite shore where the unprotected nature of the
+ground seemed to forbid their advance. Trampled by the buffalo, every
+bush and low tree had been stripped bare. Multitudes of rocks blackened
+by the sunlight were to be seen on every side. No scouts were sent in
+advance and none acted on the flanks. The contagious example of Major
+McGary acted like magic, and men and horses went forward as if every one
+was doing his utmost to outstrip his neighbour.
+
+Along with the others went Daniel Boone, his two boys, and Peleg. The
+expression of Boone's face had not changed since his sober advice had
+been disregarded by his impulsive comrades. But he was not one to draw
+back when his friends were rushing into action.
+
+Suddenly the men in front halted. They had arrived at the place
+mentioned by the scout, where the two ravines met. A small body of
+Indians appeared for a moment and fired at the approaching settlers.
+
+Instantly McGary and the men with him returned the fire, although they
+were at a great disadvantage because they were standing upon a bare and
+open ridge, while their enemies were in a ravine in which the bushes
+partly concealed the warriors.
+
+As the reports of the guns were heard, the men in the rear rushed
+forward to assist their friends. But before they were able to gain the
+ridge they were stopped by a terrible fire from the ravine which was on
+their flank. They halted, and it was almost as if they had been shut in
+by the jaws of some enormous beast. There was no cover, and a terrible
+fire was being poured into them from front and side, while their enemies
+still were hidden from sight.
+
+Gradually, however, the Indians pushed out from the ravine as the fire
+became fiercer. Indeed they were striving to extend their lines and turn
+the right of the Kentuckians so that their retreat would be cut off.
+
+As soon as this was made clear by the increase of the firing from that
+quarter, the men in the rear attempted to fall back, and then by
+breaking through the attacking party, gain their only way of escape--to
+the river.
+
+Their actions, in part misunderstood by their companions, created what
+was almost a panic. From the ravine to the river the sight was
+indescribable. Above the reports of the guns rose the shrieks and cries
+of the wounded and the wild and merciless whoops of the Indians.
+
+Many of the mounted men escaped, but those who were fighting on foot
+were in deadly peril. Daniel Boone, in the thick of the fight, saw his
+boy, Israel, fall lifeless before the guns of the Indians. Even the
+death of his son, however, did not prevent the great scout from becoming
+aware that he himself was almost entirely surrounded by the frantic,
+howling, whooping mob of warriors.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII
+
+AT THE LOWER BLUE LICKS
+
+
+It was in such crises that the great scout best displayed the qualities
+which had made him a marked man among the pioneers. It had been
+impossible for him to rescue the body of his fallen son. Around him on
+every side were heard shouts and cries and the continual report of the
+rifles.
+
+Whatever occurred, Daniel Boone was never long at a loss how to act.
+Controlling his feelings, he turned to the men who were near him and
+said quietly, "Come with me!"
+
+As the men obediently followed, the scout, who was familiar with the
+entire region, instead of running toward the ford as most of the
+fugitives now were doing, dashed into the ravine where many of the
+Indians previously had been concealed. Apparently they had now left to
+join in the wild pursuit of the demoralized settlers.
+
+Boone and his comrades were not to escape, however, without attracting
+the attention of some of the howling Indians. A half dozen or more
+discovered the fleeing settlers and with wild whoops started in swift
+pursuit.
+
+It was here that Boone's knowledge of the region, as well as his
+coolness, came to his aid. Leading the way to a place in the ravine
+where there was a narrow passage between the rocks, he ordered his
+companions to precede him, while he himself raised his rifle with
+deliberation and fired at the approaching Indians.
+
+The entire band halted, for their own rifles were not loaded at the time
+and they were depending upon a similar condition among the whites. The
+red men were now relying on their tomahawks.
+
+As soon as the band halted, Boone waited a moment to assure himself that
+his companions were safe, and then, running swiftly, rejoined them. When
+the fleeing men came to the end of the ravine, once more they found a
+small band of their foes awaiting them, and with wild cries they started
+toward them. But the great scout, in spite of the need of haste, had
+bidden his companions to reload in preparation for this very emergency.
+After receiving the fire from their guns, the Indians dropped back,
+while the white men, quickly making use of the advantage thus afforded,
+were able to escape to the woods beyond.
+
+"We shall now be able to make our way to Bryant's Station," said Boone.
+"There will be no Indians to interfere with us from this time on."
+
+His words proved to be correct, and by the middle of the afternoon the
+half-dozen men with the great scout arrived safely at the fort.
+
+Throughout the remainder of the day many of the men who had so
+confidently gone forth in the morning came straggling back to the fort.
+
+Peleg, who had been among those who rushed to the ford, returned to
+Bryant's Station when it was nearly dusk. He had secured the aid of two
+others, and the three were carrying young Daniel Boone, who also had
+been shot in the fight at the Licks.
+
+It was soon discovered that Boone's younger son was not seriously
+wounded. When the welcome information was received the face of the great
+scout remained unchanged in its expression, though the deathly pallor,
+that for a moment had spread over it when he had been informed of what
+had befallen his boy, disappeared.
+
+"'Tis a wonder," said Peleg, "that any of us are left alive to tell the
+story. Some of us ran up the stream and swam across. Young Dan was as
+brave as any man in the crowd. Even after he had been shot in the
+shoulder he did not give up, but he swam across the stream, keeping up
+with the rest of us. The men who could not swim were the ones that were
+shot down or were made prisoners without being able to do anything to
+defend themselves."
+
+"Were any shot after you had crossed the river?" inquired Boone.
+
+"I do not know of any," replied Peleg. "But from the ravine clear down
+to the ford the loss was heavy. One of the bravest deeds I ever saw in
+my life was that of young Aaron Reynolds--he is the one who made us
+laugh when Simon Girty mounted the stump and gave us his speech.
+Reynolds was on horseback, and about halfway between the battle ground
+and the ford he found Captain Patterson completely worn out. The captain
+had dropped in his tracks, he was so exhausted, for you see he had been
+wounded three or four times in the fights we had with the Indians two or
+three years ago."
+
+"I remember that he was," said Boone.
+
+"The Indians were almost ready to close up on the captain, but just at
+that moment Reynolds saw what was going on. He jumped from his saddle,
+helped Captain Patterson to mount, and then turned and ran on foot as
+fast as he could go. He ran like a deer after he was out of the main
+road, then jumped into the river right where you said you crossed, and
+swam to the other side. There he had some serious trouble, though. He
+was wearing a pair of buckskin breeches and they became so heavy and
+full of water when he was in the river that he could not run very fast
+when he struck the shore. When he sat down and tried to get rid of a
+part of the water some of the Indians rushed up and before he knew it he
+was their prisoner."
+
+"Did you say he is here now?" inquired Boone.
+
+"Yes, sir. I was afraid the Indians would tomahawk him, but they kept to
+their regular plan of not putting any of their prisoners to death until
+they get back to their own country, so Reynolds wasn't troubled very
+much at the time. They left him in charge of three of the braves while
+the others started for some more of our men who were nearby. The three
+Indians were so excited when they saw our men that two of them left
+Reynolds in charge of the third while they ran to join in the chase with
+the others. Then the Indian that had Reynolds in his charge started for
+the woods."
+
+"Were they both armed?" asked Boone.
+
+"Reynolds had had his rifle taken away from him, but the Indian had a
+tomahawk and a rifle in his hands. After they had gone a little way the
+Indian stooped to tie the string of his moccasin and Aaron instantly
+jumped upon him, knocked him down with his fist and then ran for the
+woods. Captain Patterson has just come in and he says he is going to
+give Aaron two hundred acres of the best land he owns."
+
+Such of the bodies as had been recovered were now being brought to the
+fort, and the fact that many of the men of Bryant's Station had been
+made prisoners by the attacking Indians increased the feeling of gloom
+that settled upon the place. Among the men who had fallen was Colonel
+Todd, who had sought the advice of the great scout and then did not
+follow it.
+
+Long before nightfall Colonel Logan and his men arrived at Bryant's
+Station. In his force were no less than four hundred and fifty men. Upon
+their arrival they learned from the men who had succeeded in returning
+to the fort of the fate which had befallen the band which Colonel Todd
+had led against the Indians.
+
+Waiting to hear no more, greatly alarmed for his friends and suspecting
+that only a part of the disaster had been reported, Colonel Logan at
+once led his men over the way by which the defenders of the fort had
+gone in their untimely pursuit of their wily foe.
+
+[Illustration: "Silently the men crossed the ford"]
+
+With Colonel Logan went Daniel Boone and Peleg, as well as many others
+of the defenders. The great scout showed plainly the suffering through
+which he was passing. Two of his boys had been shot by the relentless
+Shawnees and his third son had received a severe wound. Apparently Boone
+did not believe that his sufferings were to be relieved by anything his
+friends could do to aid him. He had seldom spoken since the men had
+departed from the Station, but Peleg was confident that he understood
+the purpose which was urging the gentle-hearted hunter forward.
+
+The second day the advancing soldiers came near to the place where the
+fight had occurred. Long before they had arrived, however, Peleg had
+shuddered when he discovered flocks of circling buzzards that were
+hovering over the battle ground. He glanced into the face of his
+companion when the discovery had been made, and knew that the scout also
+understood the meaning of their presence.
+
+When the advancing band approached the bank of the river they discovered
+many of the bodies still floating near the shore. They were the
+unfortunate victims that had been shot by the Indians after they had
+rushed into the stream.
+
+A silence, indescribable, intense, awful, settled over all the men.
+There were tears in the eyes of some of the hardiest of the settlers at
+the fearful sight upon which they looked. No man was able to recognize
+among the putrid bodies the face of his lost friend.
+
+Silently the men crossed the ford and advanced toward the ravine. In
+the scene of the recent fight the sight was even more heartbreaking.
+Here, too, the bodies of the many who had fallen could no longer be
+distinguished one from another.
+
+Daniel Boone, unmindful of the presence of his comrades, had been
+searching quietly among the bodies for that of his missing boy. Even the
+men who were most eager in their search for their friends stopped a
+moment as they watched the man in his agonizing and fruitless quest.
+
+The great scout soon turned to Colonel Logan and said: "'Tis no use,
+Colonel. We must give the poor fellows decent burial here and now."
+
+The men at once carried out the bidding which their leader gave.
+Silently the settlers, for the moment all thoughts of vengeance gone
+from their minds, dug trenches wherever the soil permitted, and in these
+the bodies of their dead and mutilated friends were buried.
+
+There were many faces in the band down which the tears were rolling
+while this task was being accomplished. The manner of the great scout,
+however, was unchanged. Only the deepening of the lines in his face and
+his unusual pallor gave indications of the strain through which he was
+passing. His manner still was silent and self-controlled, as in the days
+when the joyous things of life had more often been his portion.
+
+When the gruesome task at last was finished, it was Daniel Boone
+himself who said to Colonel Logan in reply to the latter's inquiries:
+"It is useless now to try to follow the Shawnees."
+
+"Why do you say that?" inquired the colonel.
+
+"Because by this time they are far beyond our reach. They have lost no
+time, you may be sure."
+
+"How many captives do you think they have taken with them?"
+
+"Not many," said Boone.
+
+"But there are some sixty-seven of our men missing."
+
+"Yes," assented Boone, "but we have accounted for nearly sixty this
+day."
+
+"I am told," suggested the colonel, "that they will put every prisoner
+to death, or so many of them as may be required to make good any loss
+they themselves have had."
+
+The great scout shook his head as he replied: "The Indians have not lost
+as many as we."
+
+"Why do you say that?"
+
+"Because the advantage was all with them. They greatly outnumbered us,
+and in a good part of the fight they were sheltered by the rocks while
+our men were fighting in the open. It was the bloodiest fight I was ever
+in."
+
+"And to you one of the saddest," suggested the colonel.
+
+Boone nodded his head but did not speak.
+
+"I cannot understand," continued the colonel, "why it is that you take
+your own troubles so quietly. You certainly have suffered more than most
+men on the border, and yet I fancy the man has yet to be born who has
+heard you complain."
+
+"And why should I complain?" inquired Boone, smiling as he looked into
+the face of his friend. "It does not make my own griefs less to try to
+have another share them. That is something no one can do. My heart, at
+least, must bear its own burden. If any one thinks that his troubles are
+less than those that come to his friends, he is probably mistaken. My
+experience has led me to believe that almost every one has about all he
+can bear. There are only two classes of people, at least as far as I
+have observed--and I am well aware how little I know in this
+particular--but as I said--there are only two classes of people that cry
+and laugh easily."
+
+"Who are they?"
+
+"Children and savages. Neither class has learned to control itself. A
+strong man shows his strength, at least in my humble judgment," Boone
+added modestly, "by being able to refrain from useless words, and by not
+whining over his troubles."
+
+"I think you are correct," said Colonel Logan musingly. "Now, then," he
+continued after a moment, "is it your judgment that the best thing for
+us to do is to return to Bryant's Station?"
+
+"It is."
+
+"Then if it is a good thing to do it will be well for us to do it
+quickly. I shall see that the order is given. We have some stirring days
+before us because I am sure it will never do to let the Shawnees believe
+for any length of time that they have been able to defeat the white
+men."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX
+
+TO THE MEETING-PLACE
+
+
+The judgment of Daniel Boone was accepted by all the men in the band.
+Indeed there were many now who were blaming others as well as themselves
+for not having listened to the word of the wise old scout before they
+had entered into the unequal struggle with the Indians at Blue Licks.
+
+Swiftly and seriously the men retraced their way to Bryant's Station,
+where they were dismissed by Colonel Logan with the understanding that
+they would respond if he should call for their help in the near future.
+This he fully expected to do.
+
+In a rude wagon Daniel Boone and Peleg carried the wounded boy back to
+his home. The wound itself was not believed to be serious, although
+naturally after the tragedies which had occurred in his family Daniel
+Boone was anxious for his son. Daniel Morgan Boone, or "young Dan," as
+he sometimes was called by the settlers, to distinguish him from his
+father, made light of his experiences and even declared that he was
+prepared to ride his horse back to Boonesborough instead of being
+carried in the jolting wagon. His protest, however, was not heeded, and
+in a short time the Boonesborough men were back in their settlement.
+
+To all it now was evident that Daniel Boone held a place in the regard
+of the settlers such as he never before had won. His deep sorrow over
+the distressing tragedies which had resulted in the loss of two
+promising sons, and his willingness to do all in his power to aid his
+friends: these qualities won him sympathy and affection in addition to
+the respect in which he was held because of his excellent judgment. The
+simple manner of the great scout, his skill as a hunter, his knowledge
+of the Indians, and his enduring friendship, were more highly
+appreciated with every passing day.
+
+Shortly after the return of Boone and his companions, the scout said to
+Peleg, "I have just received word from Colonel George Rogers Clark from
+the Falls of the Ohio."
+
+"What does he want?" asked Peleg quickly. The sturdy colonel in control
+of the forces of the entire region was known to be a man of action, and
+one whose activities were familiar to all the settlers.
+
+"He sends me word," said Boone quietly, "that he plans to raise a force
+of one thousand men to go against the Indian towns."
+
+"Why does he do that?"
+
+"He has two reasons: One is that the people are so discouraged and
+disappointed by the recent successes of the Indians that many are
+thinking of withdrawing from Kentucky. The other reason is that he
+thinks the Indians ought not to be permitted to rest upon the victories
+which they have won, and that the battle of Blue Licks and the fight at
+Bryant's Station must be avenged, or the Shawnees and the Wyandottes
+will soon be more active than they have been."
+
+"What do you think?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"It is not for me to say," replied Boone, his rare smile lighting his
+face for a moment as he spoke.
+
+"But you think what you do not say," persisted Peleg.
+
+"I think Colonel Clark is doing the only thing which will bring help to
+our stations. Either the Indians or we are to live in this country. It
+is a pity that we cannot say, the Indians _and_ we; but from the feeling
+they have shown, and the way in which I know many of the whites look
+upon them, I am afraid such a plan will be impossible. There is then
+only one thing for us to do."
+
+"What is that?"
+
+"It must be decided once for all whether the country is to be occupied
+by the white men or by the red. There can be but one answer. However,"
+continued Boone, "I have little time to discuss these matters with you,
+now. It is a time for action, and much as you and I may dislike to leave
+our homes, we cannot lightly regard such a summons as Colonel Clark has
+sent us."
+
+"What is the plan?"
+
+"He proposes to raise an army of one thousand men, as I said, and march
+to destroy the Indian villages."
+
+"Where do we meet?"
+
+"At the Falls of the Ohio. I have seen Colonel Logan, and he is to
+assemble his men and march in one body to the meeting-place. My own
+judgment is that it would be better for the force to split up into
+smaller parties, but that is not for me to say. I have, however,
+arranged with Colonel Logan for you and six other men to go as a band of
+scouts to the north of the route we are to take, and at the same time
+have several bands move to the south. I do not believe there will be any
+danger before we arrive at the meeting-place, but it is well to provide
+for what may happen before it comes to pass. As you know, that has
+always been my plan. I do not think I ever had a fight with an Indian
+that I did not try to think what he would do, or what I would do if I
+were in his place, before the real contest began."
+
+"Are you to lead the scouts on the south?"
+
+"That is for the King to say," replied Boone, smiling as he quoted the
+well-known saying of Sam Oliver.
+
+The following morning Peleg, as leader of his little band of scouts,
+departed for the place of assembly. The advance to the Falls of the Ohio
+would require three days or more. It was not believed that there would
+be anything more than occasional attacks on the main body by small bands
+of Indians, for few braves would dare to oppose the coming of this great
+army.
+
+In Peleg's little band was Sam Oliver, the hunter. Sam now was plainly
+showing the effects of the passing years. He was suffering from
+rheumatism acquired by exposure in the many winters during which he had
+been known throughout the settlements as a great hunter. His visits to
+the stations were more frequent than formerly, and he remained longer
+than in the preceding years. He was still sensitive, however, concerning
+his physical strength and skill, and refused to listen to any suggestion
+that he was not in condition to accompany the younger men on their way
+to the meeting-place of the army.
+
+"Peleg," said Sam Oliver, when the party, all mounted, had set forth on
+their expedition, "I know a little Indian town about seventy-five miles
+from here where we can get some horses."
+
+"Is it on our way?"
+
+"It is not far from the river. If we can get a dozen or more horses it
+will make the heart of Colonel Clark rejoice."
+
+In explanation of the hunter's words, it may be said that stealing
+horses from the Indians was not looked upon as any crime by the early
+pioneers. Such a conviction may have been due in part to the fact that
+the tribes and white settlers were usually in a state of war with one
+another. The Indians' intense distrust of the early settlers had, as we
+know, long ago deepened into enduring hatred.
+
+There were few who believed the Indians were governed by any other than
+treacherous, bloodthirsty motives. So intense had become this belief
+along the border that it was well-nigh impossible for the men of that
+time to look upon the simple questions of right and wrong in any way
+that might favour the red men or even do them simple justice. To them
+they simply were enemies that must be driven from the region or
+exterminated.
+
+Late in the following afternoon Sam Oliver, when his friends halted,
+donned his Indian garb. In his disguise he was scarcely to be
+distinguished from one of the warriors.
+
+"I have learned the lingo, too," he said laughingly. "A good many times
+I have gone right into their villages and no one has suspected that I
+was a white man. I want to get about fifteen horses," continued Sam,
+"and I want almost as much to get one of the Indians alive."
+
+"What for?" demanded Peleg in surprise.
+
+It was seldom that prisoners were made of the warriors at that time,
+because whenever a fight occurred it was usually a struggle to the
+death. The Indians, however, occasionally, as we know from the
+experiences of the great scout himself, not only made captives of their
+prisoners, but at times adopted them into their tribes in place of young
+braves that had been killed in battle.
+
+"I want one for a pet," laughed Sam Oliver.
+
+"I would sooner have a rattlesnake," declared one of the party.
+
+"That is what I used to say," said Sam, "but then that was years ago
+when I was young and slender. I know more about them now, and if I can
+get one alive I am going to make a pet of him."
+
+"You will be making a mistake," declared Schoolmaster Hargrave, who also
+was one of Peleg's band. It had been long since he had wielded the
+ferrule or had taught the boys and girls in Boonesborough. In recent
+years he had been toiling in the fields, as had the great scout and
+Peleg. He was, however, scarcely more successful in raising tobacco than
+he had been in training the children in his school. The title of
+"Schoolmaster" still clung to him, and when Sam Oliver laughed loudly
+and turned to answer his protest, he said, "Well, Schoolmaster, I can
+understand how you do not like the Indians. You had some pretty wild
+experiences yourself, in the schoolhouse. I understand that two or three
+of the boys disguised themselves the way I have and put you out through
+the window. Is that true?"
+
+Whether the statement was true or not it was never explained, for the
+hunter suddenly warned his companions to become silent as they were
+approaching the village he was seeking.
+
+Advancing with three of his companions and leaving Peleg and the
+remainder of the party behind to await their return, Sam stealthily
+began to make his way toward the little Indian village which he said was
+located only a few yards distant from the spot where a halt had been
+made.
+
+Sam was absent only two hours. His approach was heard by his waiting
+companions long before the hunter could be seen. It was plain, too, that
+he had been successful. The noise of snapping branches and an occasional
+whinny indicated that Sam was not returning empty-handed.
+
+"Did I not tell you what I would do?" boasted the hunter, when he
+returned. "I said I wanted a dozen horses. I have six, so that I am only
+half as happy as I ought to be."
+
+"You are happier now than you soon will be," retorted Peleg, "unless we
+leave this part of the country right away."
+
+The horses which had been secured were all young and only partly broken.
+It was impossible for the party to mount them, and there were times when
+it was difficult even to lead them by the leathern straps which were
+fastened about their necks.
+
+Sam acknowledged the seriousness of the situation, and no urging was
+required to make the men push forward rapidly.
+
+When night fell they selected for their camp a spot on the bend of a
+little stream. Two of the men were assigned positions in the rear of the
+camp to watch for any pursuing Indians. There was no fear of an attack
+from the opposite side of the stream.
+
+At midnight the guard was relieved, and as it was Peleg's turn to take
+the position, he said quietly, "I can do this alone. All the rest of you
+turn in and get your sleep."
+
+His directions were speedily followed. The night passed without alarm,
+and the young scout was beginning to think that either the warriors of
+the village were aware of the plan of Colonel Clark, and had departed to
+join their own bands, or that they were absent from the village at the
+time, and had not yet learned of Sam's theft.
+
+The first faint streaks of the dawn had appeared, and Peleg, taking a
+little bucket, stepped to the brook to secure some running water. The
+fire which had been kept alive throughout the night was burning low.
+When Peleg returned to the camp he was startled when he discovered by
+the dim light that the water in his bucket was muddy. There could be but
+one explanation, and the young scout hastily aroused his companions.
+
+"The brook was not muddy last night, but it is now," said the young
+leader. "To my mind that shows that we are being followed, and the
+Indians are coming down the stream to creep close to us."
+
+Just then the schoolmaster was seized with sharp pains and began to
+groan and writhe in his suffering. No one understood the nature of the
+attack, and the simple remedies which were used apparently produced no
+relief. At last the suffering man was covered with a blanket and placed
+near the ashes of the fire. All the men except Peleg then lay down once
+more upon the ground. A strenuous day was awaiting them, and whether
+Master Hargrave was ill or not, they must get their necessary rest. They
+were inclined to believe, too, after their long wait, that no Indians
+were near them. The stream might have been muddied by any one of half a
+dozen other means. Probably a 'coon had been the guilty party.
+
+And yet all unknown to the little body of settlers a band of twelve
+warriors had been furtively approaching them in the very manner Peleg
+had suspected. Their noiseless footsteps had even brought them within a
+few yards of the camp. Only the coming of the morning was required to
+enable them to attack.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX
+
+CONCLUSION
+
+
+The light of the rising sun had appeared when the crouching Indians
+together fired upon the silent little camp.
+
+By some strange chance almost all the bullets took effect in the body of
+the suffering schoolmaster. There was not even a cry from the stricken
+man, and as the Indians sent forth a wild whoop every one in the camp
+leaped to his feet and fled from the spot.
+
+There had been no time for plans to be made, and consequently every man
+fled by himself. They were followed by the shots and the cries of the
+pursuing Indians, but no one knew what had befallen his comrade.
+
+Peleg, who was fully dressed and better equipped than his friends for
+flight, with Singing Susan in his hand, suddenly fell as he ran along
+the border of a swamp which he had not noticed before.
+
+The warriors swept past him, all believing that the young scout had been
+shot, and that his scalp might be secured when they returned.
+
+Waiting only until the howling band had passed him, Peleg made his
+escape. He sped swiftly back in the direction of the camp, hoping to
+secure one of the stolen horses. When he arrived, however, his
+disappointment was keen when he found that not one of the horses was
+still there.
+
+Exerting himself to the utmost, and still gripping Singing Susan, Peleg
+ran swiftly into the forest in the direction of the meeting-place which
+Colonel Clark had selected.
+
+Several hours elapsed before the young scout arrived at the rendezvous.
+Before night fell three of his recent companions also appeared, but Sam
+Oliver was not of their number, and in fact he was never heard of again.
+
+Daniel Boone was now present, and when he and Peleg were together as
+darkness fell over the camp Boone said: "I am more hopeful now that we
+shall soon have peace than I have ever been before."
+
+"Just now," suggested Peleg with a laugh, "I am thinking more of
+something good to eat than I am of getting into the Indian villages."
+
+"That suggests the one mistake which I fear has been made. In his
+eagerness, the colonel has assembled his men before he has secured
+supplies. The result is that almost every man is hungry to-night."
+
+"I think I can endure it if the rest of the men do not complain," said
+Peleg sturdily. "I have not been with you through all these years
+without learning that I must not cry if everything I want does not come
+to me just when I want it."
+
+"That is well. I do not think we will remain here long. It may be that
+we shall start within a few hours. All the men are eager to be gone, and
+there is nothing to be gained by delay. Without sufficient supplies for
+our horses as well as our men, the sooner we start the better it will be
+for us all."
+
+"Are all here who are expected?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"There are about one thousand here now, including the regulars."
+
+This conversation was interrupted by the announcement that they would
+depart at once. There was a sufficient number of horses in the camp to
+provide one for Peleg and for others who had come on foot.
+
+Just previous to the start the great scout explained to Peleg, "We are
+not far from one of the largest villages of the Indians. It may be that
+we shall come to it before morning. That will depend upon the pace at
+which our men advance."
+
+The morning dawned, and still no sign of the first of the Indian
+villages had been seen. Not a trace of a warrior had been discovered
+throughout the night, nor had any been seen when several hours of the
+new day had passed. Whether or not the Indians had been informed of the
+approach of their enemies was not known.
+
+Steadily the hungry men pressed forward, their conviction that the time
+had arrived for them to obtain lasting relief from the attacks of the
+treacherous Shawnees being even stronger than their feeling of hunger.
+
+Peleg and the great scout were in the front lines, if indeed the
+advancing body could be said to be moving with any appearance of order.
+It is true the men kept closely together, but the nature of the ground
+over which they were moving and the forests through which they passed
+made any approach to military order well-nigh impossible.
+
+The men near Peleg abruptly halted when not far before them on the
+opposite shore of a large pond they spied a solitary Indian. The warrior
+was standing as motionless as the nearby trees as he gazed steadily at
+his approaching enemies.
+
+Suddenly he turned and fled into the forest, disregarding the calls of
+the men and even unmindful of the few scattered shots which followed
+him.
+
+"Who was that?" whispered Peleg to Daniel Boone.
+
+"It was Henry."
+
+"I believe it was," declared Peleg excitedly. "What will he do now?"
+
+"He will give the alarm to the village. We are not more than a mile
+from it now, and he will be there long before our horses can carry us
+over such ground as we have had for the past few miles."
+
+Just at that moment there was a sharp call for an advance. The entire
+body at once responded, although the hungry horses were in no condition
+for swift action.
+
+The words of the great scout were fulfilled when the force drew near the
+Indian village. Not one of its people was to be seen. Fires were still
+smouldering and even the meat which was being roasted and the corn that
+was boiling in the kettles had been abandoned in the precipitate flight
+of the Indians.
+
+The discovery of the food was perhaps more welcome to the hungry men
+than would have been the sight of their foes. At all events, a halt was
+made, and such food as could be obtained was speedily allotted.
+
+At the right of the village a large field of corn was seen, and the
+discovery that the corn was in the ear and ripe for food was good news
+indeed. It was not long before the hunger of every man was appeased, in
+a measure at least, and the entire force was ready for the further
+commands of Colonel Clark.
+
+The village was set on fire in several places, and flames were also
+kindled in the field. In less than an hour the men departed, leaving
+behind them only the smoking embers of what a short time before had
+been a prosperous village of the red men.
+
+Colonel Clark now urged his men forward with increasing speed. At times
+the force divided and the task of burning certain villages was assigned
+to the different bands. At other times the entire force proceeded as one
+body. But their enemies still had not been seen. Occasionally a solitary
+Indian would crawl within gunshot when the camp was pitched, discharge
+his gun, and then instantly flee; and once a small party of warriors,
+mounted upon superb horses, advanced boldly within gunshot. The red men
+coolly surveyed the little army, but when a force was sent to attack
+them they rode away so swiftly that pursuit was useless.
+
+Village after village was burned to the ground, and rich fields of corn
+were left in ruins. The pioneers were determined to rid themselves once
+and for all of further possibilities of attacks by the ferocious
+Shawnees.
+
+The alarm over the advance of Colonel Clark had spread throughout the
+entire region, and with one accord the red men had abandoned their homes
+and fled into the wilderness beyond.
+
+When the attacking forces at last disbanded and the men returned to
+their homes, Daniel Boone and Peleg Barnes went back with their friends
+into Kentucky. The warfare with the Indians was ended. The Kentucky
+homes were now free from the attacks of the Shawnees or Cherokees.
+
+Peleg was no longer a boy. The years that had passed during these
+pioneer days had made of him a man. He now had his own home and a tract
+of land adjoining that of his great friend, Daniel Boone.
+
+Not a word was heard concerning Henry. There were occasional vague
+reports of the presence of a white man among the Shawnees, but whether
+or not this referred to "the white Shawnee" was never known.
+
+As for Daniel Boone, it seemed as if the days of his peril were ended.
+The region which he had opened up for the incoming people had now become
+well settled. The sound of the axe was heard more frequently than the
+rifle. Prosperity smiled upon the efforts of the sturdy settlers, and
+the steadily advancing civilization and the spread of education wrought
+wonders among the people.
+
+In the diary of Daniel Boone there occurs the following:
+
+
+     "Two darling sons and a brother I have lost by savage hands which
+     have also taken from me 40 valuable horses and abundance of cattle.
+     Many dark and sleepless nights have I spent, separated from the
+     cheerful society of man, scorched by the summer's sun, and pinched
+     by the winter's cold, an instrument ordained to settle the
+     wilderness."
+
+
+Another writer has left the following:
+
+
+     "He (Boone) has left behind him a name strongly written in the
+     annals of Kentucky, and a reputation for calm courage softened by
+     humanity, conducted by prudence, and embellished by a singular
+     modesty of deportment. His person was rough, robust, and indicating
+     strength rather than activity; his manner was cold, grave, and
+     taciturn; his countenance homely but kind; his conversation
+     unadorned, unobtrusive, and touching only upon the needful. He
+     never spoke of himself unless particularly questioned."
+
+
+As the years passed he showed more and more the spirit which has been
+described by one of his admirers in the following words:
+
+
+     "There never beat in man a kindlier or more philanthropic heart.
+     While he was a stranger to selfish and sordid impressions he was
+     alike above mean actions; and he lived and toiled for others, amid
+     hardships and sufferings that would have crushed thousands of
+     hearts."
+
+
+The simple-hearted scout, shrewd in his dealing with the Indians, was
+honest and straightforward with the men of his own race, and looked for
+similar treatment from them. One can therefore imagine his surprise and
+indignation when he was informed that he had no legal right to an acre
+of the land which he had discovered, and into which he had led many
+families that already were sharing in the steadily increasing
+prosperity. The clearing he had made, the acres he had cultivated, he
+was informed, were not his property now, but belonged to a man _who had
+signed certain papers_!
+
+Boone intensely loved Kentucky. Its rocks and trees, its rivers, its
+forests, its very soil, were dear to his heart. In Kentucky he had
+experienced his deepest sorrows and many of his highest joys. Perplexed
+as well as disheartened, the great scout departed from the settlement
+which in a large measure was his own work. He was homeless in a land in
+which he had helped so many to secure homes for themselves.
+
+Deep as was Boone's sorrow, he was, as we know, a man whose feeling did
+not find expression in useless words. Quietly he returned to the banks
+of the Delaware where he had been born, and then went on to Virginia. On
+the borders of the great Kanawha he dwelt for five years in the woods
+with his dogs and gun.
+
+Meanwhile his son and a brother had gone out into the remote and almost
+unknown land beyond the Mississippi River. Their reports and appeals
+were so strong, that at last, when the great scout was sixty years of
+age, once more accompanied by his faithful wife, he journeyed away from
+civilization and went to join his sons in the faraway wilderness.
+
+The name of the great scout was so well-known and his character was so
+much admired that the Spanish Governor at once made him a present of
+eighty-five hundred acres of land in what is now the State of Missouri.
+
+Here the great scout in a measure renewed the experiences of his early
+life. By working steadily and saving the money which he received from
+his crops and his furs he acquired a considerable sum. He then returned
+to Kentucky and looked up every man to whom he owed any money through
+the loss that had come to him by his inability to retain his land in the
+region he had loved. It was not long, however, before "he went back to
+Missouri, his heart lighter and also his pocketbook."
+
+When the scout was seventy-five years of age, he still was a great
+hunter. Friendly with the Indians in the region, he paddled in his light
+canoe over the creeks and the little streams in the new territory, and
+it is said that even along the banks of the great Missouri River he set
+many of his traps for the beaver.
+
+As long as the Spanish and French were in control of the Missouri
+country, Boone continued to hold his land safely; but when Napoleon sold
+the vast territory to the United States Boone once more suffered a heavy
+loss, for his own government refused to recognize his claim to any part
+of the region. It seemed almost as if the closing days of the great
+scout were to end in darkness.
+
+Through his friends, Daniel Boone now appealed to the legislature of
+Kentucky to see that justice was done him. Eager to recognize the
+services of the man who had done so much for their state, the
+legislature urged Congress to do justice to the white-haired old scout.
+After some delay the petition was granted, and a gift of eight hundred
+and fifty acres of land was voted Daniel Boone.
+
+It was in December, 1813, when Daniel Boone received word of this gift,
+but his relief and pleasure were lessened by the death of his wife.
+Selecting a choice spot that overlooked the river for her grave, the old
+scout said that when he, too, should die he wished to be buried by her
+side.
+
+Seven years later, when he was eighty-five years old, this last request
+of Daniel Boone was granted.
+
+Missouri, however, was not to be the final resting-place of the famous
+old scout and his wife. A quarter of a century later the legislature of
+Kentucky requested the children of Boone to permit the people of the
+state for which he had done so much to bring the bodies of the great
+scout and his wife to Frankfort, Kentucky.
+
+To-day, on a beautiful site overlooking the banks of the Kentucky River,
+looking down upon the city of Frankfort, a fitting monument marks the
+place where all that is mortal of Daniel Boone lies resting.
+
+THE END
+
+[Illustration: Logo]
+
+THE COUNTRY LIFE PRESS GARDEN CITY, N. Y.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's Scouting with Daniel Boone, by Everett T. Tomlinson
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE ***
+
+***** This file should be named 31590-8.txt or 31590-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/3/1/5/9/31590/
+
+Produced by David Garcia, Martin Pettit and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Kentuckiana Digital Library)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/31590-8.zip b/31590-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8704ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590-8.zip
diff --git a/31590-h.zip b/31590-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c35506a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590-h.zip
diff --git a/31590-h/31590-h.htm b/31590-h/31590-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f0011a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590-h/31590-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,8056 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+  <head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" />
+    <title>
+      The Project Gutenberg eBook of Scouting With Daniel Boone, by Everett T. Tomlinson.
+    </title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+
+    p {  margin-top: .75em;
+         text-align: justify;
+         margin-bottom: .75em;
+         }
+    h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {
+         text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+         clear: both;
+         }
+    hr { width: 33%;
+	 margin-top: 2em;
+	 margin-bottom: 2em;
+         margin-left: auto;
+         margin-right: auto;
+         clear: both;
+       }
+
+    body{margin-left: 10%;
+         margin-right: 10%;
+        }
+
+    hr.full { width: 100%; }
+
+    table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; padding: 5px; border: none; text-align: right;}
+
+    .pagenum  { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */
+            /*  visibility: hidden;  */
+                position: absolute;
+                left: 92%;
+                font-size: smaller;
+                text-align: right;
+                text-indent: 0px;
+              } /* page numbers */
+
+    .center   {text-align: center;}
+    .smaller  {font-size: smaller;}
+    .smcap    {font-variant: small-caps;}
+    .block    {margin: auto; text-align: center; width: 22em; border: solid 1px black;}
+    .right            {text-align: right;}
+    .left             {text-align: left;}
+    .tbrk	  {margin-bottom: 2em;}
+    .s4        {display: inline; margin-left: 4em;}
+    .poem             {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%; text-align: left;}
+    .poem br          {display: none;}
+    .poem .stanza     {margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em;}
+    .poem div        {display: block; margin: 0; padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em;}
+
+    </style>
+  </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+Project Gutenberg's Scouting with Daniel Boone, by Everett T. Tomlinson
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Scouting with Daniel Boone
+
+Author: Everett T. Tomlinson
+
+Illustrator: Norman Rockwell
+
+Release Date: March 10, 2010 [EBook #31590]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by David Garcia, Martin Pettit and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Kentuckiana Digital Library)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_i" id="Page_i">[Pg i]</a></span></p>
+
+<h1>SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE</h1>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_ii" id="Page_ii">[Pg ii]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="block">
+<h3><span class="smcap">Books by the Same Author</span></h3>
+
+<hr class="full" />
+
+<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;THREE COLONIAL BOYS<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;THREE YOUNG CONTINENTALS<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;WASHINGTON'S YOUNG AIDS<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;THE BOYS OF OLD MONMOUTH<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;A JERSEY BOY IN THE REVOLUTION<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;THE RIDER OF THE BLACK HORSE<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;THE RED CHIEF<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;MARCHING AGAINST THE IROQUOIS<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;THE CAMP-FIRE OF MAD ANTHONY<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;LIGHTHORSE HARRY'S LEGION<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;THE YOUNG SHARPSHOOTER<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;TECUMSEH'S YOUNG BRAVES<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;THE BOY SOLDIERS OF 1812<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;FOUR BOYS IN THE YELLOWSTONE<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;FOUR BOYS IN THE YOSEMITE<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;WARD HILL AT WESTON<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;WITH FLINTLOCK AND FIFE<br /><br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;THE FORT IN THE FOREST<br /></p>
+</div>
+
+<hr />
+
+<div class="center"><a name="i004.jpg" id="i004.jpg"></a><img src="images/i004.jpg" width='492' height='700' alt="On the August air arose the reports of many rifles and the terrifying whoops of the Indians" /></div>
+
+<h4>"On the August air arose the reports of many rifles and<br />the terrifying whoops of the Indians"</h4>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_iii" id="Page_iii">[Pg iii]</a></span></p>
+
+<h3><i>PIONEER SCOUT SERIES</i></h3>
+
+<h1>SCOUTING WITH<br />DANIEL BOONE</h1>
+
+<h3>BY</h3>
+
+<h2>EVERETT T. TOMLINSON</h2>
+
+<p class="tbrk">&nbsp;</p>
+
+<div class="center"><img src="images/i005.jpg" width='100' height='95' alt="Logo" /></div>
+
+<p class="tbrk">&nbsp;</p>
+
+<h3><i>Illustrated by</i><br />NORMAN ROCKWELL</h3>
+
+<p class="tbrk">&nbsp;</p>
+
+<h3>GARDEN CITY<span class="s4">&nbsp;</span>NEW YORK<br />DOUBLEDAY, PAGE &amp; COMPANY<br />1917</h3>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_iv" id="Page_iv">[Pg iv]</a></span></p>
+
+<p class="tbrk">&nbsp;</p>
+
+<h4><i>Copyright, 1914, by</i><br />
+<span class="smcap">The Boy Scouts of America</span><br /><i>For Boys' Life</i></h4>
+
+<h4><i>Copyright, 1914, by</i><br /><span class="smcap">Everett T. Tomlinson</span></h4>
+
+<h5><i>All rights reserved, including that of<br />
+translation into foreign languages,<br />including the Scandinavian</i></h5>
+
+<p class="tbrk">&nbsp;</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_v" id="Page_v">[Pg v]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>Preface</h2>
+
+<p>Perhaps not unnaturally in certain details there is a slight confusion
+or divergence in the various works that recount the heroic deeds of
+Daniel Boone. The men of that day were making history rather than
+recording what they did. There is, however, a striking uniformity in all
+the records as to the simple faith and almost fatalistic conviction of
+Daniel Boone that he was called to be a pathfinder for the new nation in
+America. His courage, reverence, rugged honesty, and unselfishness, his
+childlike simplicity that was mixed with a certain shrewdness, at least
+in his dealings with the Indians, are, however, qualities in which the
+historians mostly agree.</p>
+
+<p>I have cast this record into story form and have used the license of a
+story-teller. I have incorporated a few adventures on the border which
+strictly do not belong to this tale. Every one of them, however, is
+true, and I hope will help in giving a true picture of those early and trying days.</p>
+
+<p>In the midst of it all I have placed the great scout. The qualities he
+displayed are the same<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_vi" id="Page_vi">[Pg vi]</a></span> that are necessary for success in our day or any
+day. The problems may vary from generation to generation, but the
+elements of true manhood are ever the same.</p>
+
+<p>I have made free use of the many historical works which portray the
+character of the great scout.</p>
+
+<p>First of all is the diary of Daniel Boone himself. In addition to that
+fascinating story, the following works also should be read by those who
+are interested in his life:</p>
+
+<p>"The Adventures of Colonel Daniel Boone," by General Filson;</p>
+
+<p>"Life of Boone," by Timothy Flint;</p>
+
+<p>"Daniel Boone and the Hunters of Kentucky," by W. H. Bogart;</p>
+
+<p>"Daniel Boone, the Pioneer of Kentucky," by J. S. C. Abbott;</p>
+
+<p>"The Adventures of Daniel Boone, the Kentucky Rifleman," by the author
+of "Uncle Philip's Conversations ";</p>
+
+<p>"Four American Pioneers," by Frances M. Perry and Katherine Beebe.</p>
+
+<p>The various publications of the Filson Club of Louisville, Kentucky,
+have also been helpful. "The Siege of Bryant's Station," by the
+President of the Club, Colonel Reuben Durrett, and "The Battle of Blue
+Licks," by Colonel Bennett H. Young, are most interesting.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_vii" id="Page_vii">[Pg vii]</a></span></p><p>McClung's "Sketches of Western Adventure," and Strickland's "Pioneers
+of the West" have provided many interesting details. The author also
+gratefully acknowledges the aid he has had from some of the lineal
+descendants of Boone himself.</p>
+
+<p>If English boys are eager to hear about the heroic adventures of King
+Arthur, Robin Hood, and other characters, in part at least legendary,
+why should not American boys be equally interested in the true stories
+of the rugged heroes of their own land?</p>
+
+<p>There never has been a time when the development of a true patriotism
+was more needed than it is to-day. Our perils and problems are not
+concerned with savages and wild beasts, but they may be no less
+dangerous than those which confronted our forefathers. How to meet them,
+what qualities ought to be strengthened in the life of an American boy,
+how best to inspire the younger generation with love and devotion for
+our country, are vital questions of the present.</p>
+
+<p>The author believes there is no better way of doing this than by
+interesting our boys in such heroic men as Daniel Boone.</p>
+
+<p class="right"><span class="smcap">Everett T. Tomlinson</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Elizabeth, New Jersey.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_ix" id="Page_ix">[Pg ix]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>Contents</h2>
+
+<table summary="CONTENTS">
+  <tr>
+    <td colspan="2" class="left"><span class="smaller">CHAPTER</span></td>
+    <td><span class="smaller">PAGE</span></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>I.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">In The Wilderness</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_3">3</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>II.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">Hunter Sam</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_13">13</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>III.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">The Hunt for Game</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_23">23</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>IV.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">The Gobblers</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_33">33</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>V.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">Peleg's New Place</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_42">42</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>VI.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">Schoolmaster Hargrave</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_51">51</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>VII.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">Two Scouts</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_61">61</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>VIII.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">Peleg's Encounter</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_72">72</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>IX.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">At the Springs</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_80">80</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>X.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">A Terrified Band</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_90">90</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XI.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">The Adventure of the Schoolmaster</span>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_100">100</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XII.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">An Attack</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_110">110</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XIII.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">The White Shawnee</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_121">121</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XIV.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">The Hidden Canoe</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_131">131</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XV.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">Gathering Clouds</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_141">141</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XVI.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">Captives</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_151">151</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XVII.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">The Pursuit</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_161">161</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XVIII.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">A Band of Scouts</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_171">171</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XIX.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">The Capture</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_181">181</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_x" id="Page_x">[Pg x]</a></span>XX.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">An Offer of Release</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_190">190</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XXI.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">Flight</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_200">200</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XXII.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">The Coming of Blackfish</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_211">211</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XXIII.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">Four Warriors and More</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_223">223</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XXIV.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">A Decoy and an Attack</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_233">233</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XXV.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">A Field of Corn</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_242">242</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XXVI.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">The White Shawnee Again</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_251">251</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XXVII.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">The Struggle in the Ravine</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_260">260</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XXVIII.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">At the Lower Blue Licks</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_271">271</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XXIX.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">To the Meeting-Place</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_282">282</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>XXX.</td>
+    <td class="left">&nbsp;&nbsp;<span class="smcap">Conclusion</span></td>
+    <td><a href="#Page_293">293</a></td>
+  </tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xi" id="Page_xi">[Pg xi]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>ILLUSTRATIONS</h2>
+
+<table summary="ILLUSTRATIONS">
+  <tr>
+    <td class="left">"On the August air arose the reports of many rifles and<br />the terrifying whoops of the Indians"</td>
+    <td><a href="#i004.jpg"><i>Frontispiece</i></a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td></td>
+    <td><span class="smaller">FACING PAGE</span></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td class="left">"'What is that?' At the question the two pioneer<br />boys stopped abruptly"</td>
+    <td><a href="#i025.jpg">10</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td class="left">"He was a tall, lean man, quiet in his bearing, and with<br />
+every indication of self-control, as well as of strength,<br />
+stamped upon his face and form"</td>
+    <td><a href="#i045.jpg">28</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td class="left">"The Indian had been able to draw his knife and<br />
+struck at her again and again while the bear held<br />
+him in one of her most fervent hugs"</td>
+    <td><a href="#i095.jpg">76</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td class="left">"Boone quickly rallied his startled followers and when<br />
+the red men returned the hardy settlers were ready<br />
+and awaiting their coming"</td>
+    <td><a href="#i137.jpg">116</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td class="left">"One of the men who had been stationed as a guard<br />
+was shot early in the morning"</td>
+    <td><a href="#i149.jpg">126</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td class="left">"The scout, with his family, returned to Boonesborough"</td>
+    <td><a href="#i245.jpg">220</a></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td class="left">"Silently the men crossed the ford"</td>
+    <td><a href="#i303.jpg">276</a></td>
+  </tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[Pg 1]</a></span></p>
+
+<p class="tbrk">&nbsp;</p>
+
+<h1>SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE</h1>
+
+<p class="tbrk">&nbsp;</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[Pg 3]</a></span></p>
+
+<h1>Scouting with Daniel Boone</h1>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER I</h2>
+
+<h3>IN THE WILDERNESS</h3>
+
+<p>"What is that?"</p>
+
+<p>At the question the two pioneer boys stopped abruptly. From within the
+forest they had heard the sound of a snapping branch. The sound itself
+had not been loud, but the quiet of that September day in 1773 had been
+sharply broken by the slight noise from the brush. For a brief time both
+boys listened intently and then one of them went back a short distance
+along the trail over which the little procession had advanced, carefully
+looking for signs of danger on either side.</p>
+
+<p>And there was need for caution. Under the leadership of Daniel Boone
+five families besides his own had been making their way slowly through
+the unbroken wilderness from the settlement on the Yadkin in North
+Carolina. At Powell's Valley, through which they recently had passed,
+forty men had joined the little company, thereby adding<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[Pg 4]</a></span> greatly to its
+strength, and increasing the confidence of the hardy settlers.</p>
+
+<p>As the little cavalcade spread out in a long line, an advance guard of
+five opened the way, while three rear guards, of two each at irregular
+intervals, were stationed to prevent surprises from the hostile Indians
+or attacks by the prowling beasts of prey that were wont to follow the
+trail of men in the wilderness.</p>
+
+<p>At this time the band was crossing Powell's Mountain, and the extreme
+rear guard was made up of James, the oldest son of Daniel Boone, and his
+friend, Peleg Barnes, the latter being one of the number that had been
+added to the company when the settlers arrived at Powell's Valley.
+Persuaded that no enemy was near, the two boys resumed their positions
+and proceeded on their way.</p>
+
+<p>Each boy was dressed in a hunting costume and wore leggings and fringed
+trousers made from the skin of the deer. Each also was armed with a
+rifle which he carried almost as naturally as if it was a part of
+himself. Powder-horns and bullet-pouches were swinging from their
+shoulders. It was manifest from the attitude and the manner of both
+young hunters that they were familiar with the ways of the wilderness
+and were alert to detect signs of the presence of friend or foe.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't like that noise," suggested Peleg in a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[Pg 5]</a></span> low voice. "'Tis the
+second time we have heard it since we have been the rear guard to-day."</p>
+
+<p>His companion smiled and did not reply, and for a time Peleg also
+remained silent. He was a restless, dark-haired, muscular, and
+well-grown boy, perhaps seventeen or eighteen years of age, which also
+was the age of his more quiet comrade. The boys were warm friends, but
+like many men of the earlier days, they were prone to silence, though
+little that occurred in the nearby forest escaped their attention.</p>
+
+<p>The wilderness through which they were advancing was almost untrodden.
+Confidence and hope were expressed on the rugged faces of the boys,
+however, for they early had learned to live in the presence of continual
+danger from the prowling beasts and the hostile red men.</p>
+
+<p>"I never knew a man just like your father," suggested Peleg, at last
+breaking the silence.</p>
+
+<p>"Neither did I," replied James Boone, with a smile that strongly lighted
+up his face, as he turned to his friend.</p>
+
+<p>"He never seems to think about himself. He is taking this expedition to
+the land he has found because he believes it to be for our advantage for him to do so."</p>
+
+<p>"He knows it is."</p>
+
+<p>"I heard him tell about the wonderful sky and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[Pg 6]</a></span> soil he had found there;
+and it must be worth while to go, else he would not be advising us to
+leave the Yadkin and cross all these mountains into the wilderness. I
+never saw such a strong man as your father is. I don't believe he has an
+ounce of fat on his body. Is it true that he is having a record kept of
+the places he has found and the journeys he has made?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is."</p>
+
+<p>"I should like much to see it. I can read writing, and if some time you
+will ask him to grant me the privilege I shall want to read what he has
+had written&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>Peleg stopped abruptly and grasped his companion's arm, as both boys
+were startled once more by the sudden snapping of a branch apparently
+only a few yards to the left. Instantly both were listening
+breathlessly, and were holding their rifles in readiness, while they
+peered anxiously into the brush from which the threatening sound had come.</p>
+
+<p>"I declare to you," whispered Peleg, "that there is some one following us."</p>
+
+<p>"Verily," whispered James Boone, although he did not turn away his eyes
+from the forest as he spoke.</p>
+
+<p>The alarm of the two young guards was not unnatural, as has been said.
+On the lower slopes of the mountain great trees were growing, but as
+the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</a></span> band of emigrants had steadily climbed, the timber diminished, and
+even underbrush had become somewhat thinned. Still, on every side of the
+trail there were sufficient bushes to hide the presence of an enemy that
+might be following the pioneers. Both boys knew that game of many kinds
+abounded in the wilderness. Many a time their skill had been tested long
+before they had left their homes on the Yadkin.</p>
+
+<p>That their perils would be increased as they withdrew into the region in
+which the foot of no white men except Daniel Boone and his comrade had
+ever trod they both were well aware. On this September day the advancing
+settlers had been moving in a much longer and thinner line than had been
+adopted the preceding day. The difficulties of the ascent and the
+frequent great rocks in their way made their progress over the mountain
+more difficult and different from the easier march through the valley on
+the opposite side. Only an occasional white man had been seen since they
+had left their homes, and there was constant fear of the red men, almost
+all of whom were exceedingly hostile at this time and very jealous in
+guarding their own domains from the incursions of the whites.</p>
+
+<p>Perhaps not unnaturally most of those who were in Boone's party looked
+upon the Indian as a natural enemy. Few were mindful of the fact that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</a></span>
+the red men were but doing their utmost to defend their own homes and
+retain their hunting grounds from the trespassing whites, who, they were
+fearful, would soon push them from the region, unless by determined
+warfare the Shawnees and other neighbouring tribes might be able to
+prevent their entrance and settlement.</p>
+
+<p>It was well known that the region into which Daniel Boone was leading
+his company on that September day was considered by the Indians to be
+the best of all their hunting grounds. There the buffalo and the deer
+abounded. Wild turkeys were so numerous that the report which Daniel
+Boone had brought scarcely had been credited by his friends. There were
+times in the autumn when great flocks of wild pigeons sweeping through
+the woods might be felled with a club by a man standing in the way of
+their advance. It is true that where so much game was found dangerous
+animals also abounded. The panther and bear were much in evidence, and
+prowling wolves often made the night hideous with their weird and terrifying howls.</p>
+
+<p>There was no one in the advancing company who did not fully understand
+what the cost of seeking and making a new home in the wilderness was
+likely to be. Doubtless some would fall victims to the cunning of the
+hostile red men. Others<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</a></span> were certain to lose their lives in attacks by
+the treacherous panther, the deadliest four-footed foe of the white men in the new world.</p>
+
+<p>When the two young pioneers, who formed the rear guard of the slowly
+moving procession, resumed their advance, both were silent for a time
+and keenly observant of the woods on either side of the trail left by
+those who had preceded them. In places the autumn foliage already was
+tinted with scarlet or gold. The soft air of the September day became
+slightly cooler as the party steadily approached the higher regions of Powell's Mountain.</p>
+
+<p>In the midst of such surroundings it was impossible for the young
+hunters long to retain their anxiety, though neither ceased his keen watchfulness.</p>
+
+<p>"How old is your father?" inquired Peleg at last.</p>
+
+<p>"About forty."</p>
+
+<p>"I wish much to hear him tell of his adventures in this land which he
+says the Indian calls Kantuckee. Do you know what that word means?"</p>
+
+<p>"No."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think your father is fearful the redskins may attack us before
+we come to the Licks, where he affirms he will make our settlement?"</p>
+
+<p>"You must ask him," replied young Boone. "I do not believe he thinks
+that we or any other band of settlers will ever build a home in such a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[Pg 10]</a></span>
+country as he has found without having to fight for it. Peleg, I have
+almost decided that one never gets anything worth having without having
+to fight some kind of a battle."</p>
+
+<p>"That is surely so," replied Peleg, laughing softly as he spoke. "I
+shall never forget how Schoolmaster Hargrave had to fight to teach me to
+use a quill. The letters somehow would not come, not even when he set
+his best copy for me. He told me one day that they looked like a
+whirlwind in distress. I was minded several times to give up the whole
+attempt, but he told me to fight on, and now I am glad that I did."</p>
+
+<p>"I am told that the schoolmaster later expects to come where we are going."</p>
+
+<p>"So I have heard. I hope he will leave his ferrule behind. Whew! My
+knuckles ache now with the mention! Still <i>he</i> seemed to get some
+pleasure out of it, but&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>Peleg stopped suddenly as a faint cry was heard far in their rear. It
+was a sound not unlike that made by a child in distress. Weird,
+pathetic, startling as it was, neither of the boys was for a moment
+unaware of its meaning. It was the cry of a panther far in the distance.</p>
+
+<div class="center"><a name="i025.jpg" id="i025.jpg"></a><img src="images/i025.jpg" width='487' height='700' alt="What is that? At the question the two pioneer boys stopped abruptly" /></div>
+
+<h4>"'What is that?' At the question the two pioneer boys stopped abruptly"</h4>
+
+<p>And panthers not infrequently hunted in pairs. It might be possible that
+two of the treacherous creatures had been following the slowly moving<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</a></span>
+caravan, for slow-moving it was indeed. The children and women were
+carried on the backs of the horses. The few heavy wagons were dragged
+with difficulty over the rough ground, and many a time the entire band
+was compelled to halt while the men felled a tree which blocked their advance.</p>
+
+<p>"I tell you," said Peleg in a whisper, "that sound we heard before was
+made by a painter."</p>
+
+<p>"It may be true."</p>
+
+<p>"Will you stay here while I go back over the trail a little way to see
+if I can find any signs of the varmints? It is yet too light for them to
+attack us, but I should like to know if there is a pair on our trail."</p>
+
+<p>"Do not go far," said James Boone hesitatingly.</p>
+
+<p>"You may be sure that I shall not be over-venturesome. I shall return directly."</p>
+
+<p>In a moment Peleg disappeared from the sight of his companion as he
+lightly and yet swiftly sped back over the way by which they had come.</p>
+
+<p>Left alone, young Boone seated himself upon a fallen tree and awaited
+the return of his companion. Holding his rifle lightly in his hands
+after he had carefully looked to its priming, he was keenly observant of
+all about him. He had been disturbed more than he had acknowledged to
+Peleg by the sounds which they had heard. He had known of instances in
+which a panther had trailed a man<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</a></span> for many hours. The conjecture of
+Peleg that a pair of the hated beasts might be following the slowly
+moving settlers was not improbable.</p>
+
+<p>As the moments passed the anxiety of the young hunter for his companion
+increased. No sound to alarm him had broken in upon the silence, and yet
+somehow the son of the great pioneer scout was anxious for his friend.</p>
+
+<p>Rising from his seat he ran swiftly in the direction in which Peleg had
+gone. In a few moments he discovered his friend standing beneath a
+spreading chestnut and holding his gun in such a manner that it was
+manifest that he had heard some sound to alarm him. A huge panther
+crouched upon the limb of the chestnut tree, almost directly above the
+place where Peleg was standing.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER II</h2>
+
+<h3>HUNTER SAM</h3>
+
+<p>If the vision of James Boone had not been trained, and unusually keen,
+the sight of the crouching animal would have escaped him. Its tawny skin
+was of a colour not unlike that of the tinged foliage of the branches of
+the chestnut upon which it was lying. There was an occasional nervous
+twitching of its tail, but otherwise it was as motionless as if it had
+been carved of marble.</p>
+
+<p>So intense was the interest of the savage beast in the young hunter
+directly beneath it that it was unaware of the approach of James Boone.
+Even as he perceived the animal, however, its muscles tightened, and it
+prepared for a leap upon the unsuspecting boy.</p>
+
+<p>Instantly bringing his rifle to his shoulder, and taking careful aim,
+James fired at the motionless target. He ignored the exclamation of the
+startled Peleg, who leaped to one side at the report of the rifle, and
+then, glancing at his friend, followed the direction of his gaze, and
+became aware of the peril above him.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span></p><p>For a moment the beast seemed to be unharmed. It remained in the same
+position, motionless, and with its head leaning below the limb to which it clung.</p>
+
+<p>Young Boone did not move from the place where he was standing, but
+instantly began to reload his rifle, all the time keeping careful watch
+upon the movements of the beast.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly the panther began to claw at the limb to which it had been
+clinging. It was manifest that its hold was broken or breaking. The long
+claws were driven savagely into the bark, but in spite of all its
+efforts the creature plainly was slipping. There were two or three
+snarls, and once it turned and snapped savagely at its side. The tail
+began to lash the branch, and then suddenly became motionless.</p>
+
+<p>Slowly the ability of the savage beast to maintain itself was departing.
+A stream of red showed the effect which young Boone's bullet had taken.
+He had aimed just a little back of the fore-shoulder, and it was
+difficult for him now to understand how even a panther, tenacious of
+life as the beast was known to be, was still able to cling to the branch.</p>
+
+<p>Struggling, snarling, the great beast turned and gradually but surely
+began to slip from its perch. For a moment it almost seemed that it
+would be able to maintain its grasp even after its body had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span> turned to
+the underside of the huge branch. But all at once, without a sound, the
+long body fell, striking hard upon the ground twenty feet or more below.</p>
+
+<p>Before the animal could show whether or not it was still alive, Peleg,
+who now had recovered from his first alarm, raised his rifle and fired
+at the prostrate body.</p>
+
+<p>There was slight question now as to the approaching death of the savage
+beast. It lay almost motionless on the ground, but there was still an
+occasional nervous twitching of its long tail. Both boys, however, were
+too skilled in the art of the hunter to venture within reach of the
+terrible claws until they were satisfied that the dreaded enemy was indeed dead.</p>
+
+<p>"There may be another," said Peleg nervously, as he glanced into the
+woods after he had hastily reloaded his rifle. "That cry we heard
+probably was the call of this one's mate."</p>
+
+<p>"That may be so," said young Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"What are you going to do?" inquired Peleg in surprise, as he saw his
+companion place his rifle against a tree and draw his hunting-knife from his belt.</p>
+
+<p>"I am going to skin this big cat."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think we ought to stop for that?" asked Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"Then let me help."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span></p><p>"No, you keep guard. Our guns may have stirred up more trouble than we
+know."</p>
+
+<p>Acting upon this suggestion, both boys became silent while young Boone began his task.</p>
+
+<p>Swiftly and deftly he slit the beautiful skin the length of the body,
+and then did likewise on each leg. So skilful was the young hunter that
+in a brief time he had drawn back the skin sufficiently to cause him to
+call to his companion, "Come here and help me."</p>
+
+<p>Together the two boys then tore the skin from the body, and young Boone
+rolled the panther's hide into a small, compact bundle. He tied this
+securely with a deerskin thong, and then added it to his burden.</p>
+
+<p>At once the boys began to run swiftly to regain the distance they had
+lost. They had not advanced far, however, before they saw some one
+approaching them on the trail.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis as I thought," said James Boone with a smile. "Our guns have
+'roused our friends."</p>
+
+<p>"That's Sam Oliver."</p>
+
+<p>"I see it is," replied James.</p>
+
+<p>Neither of the boys spoke again as the man rapidly approached them. Both
+knew him as one of the hunters of the company, and as one whose labours
+chiefly were confined to that field.</p>
+
+<p>Sam was perhaps fifty years of age, tall, <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span>rawboned, sunburned, with an
+expression of face not unpleasing, and a frequent twinkle in his eyes.
+As for felling the trees or building the houses of logs, Sam was willing
+for others to assume those labours, and whatever honours might accrue
+from such tasks. For himself he much preferred to do his part by
+supplying the band with game.</p>
+
+<p>Frequently the two boys had gone with the trapper when he had made the
+rounds of his traps, and in the warm days of summer nothing had
+delighted either more than to accompany him into the forest, where they
+were interested in the weird, and at times fantastic, tales Sam related
+of his personal adventures, and also of the characteristics of the
+denizens of the forest.</p>
+
+<p>"What's wrong, lads?" inquired the hunter as he approached.</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing is wrong now," laughed Peleg. "We shot a painter back here. And
+there is its hide," he added as he pointed with pride to the bundle
+which was suspended from his companion's shoulders.</p>
+
+<p>Glancing at the object to which his attention had been directed, Sam
+whistled and then said, "Seen any more?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"Seen any signs o' redskins?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, sir. Have you seen any?"</p>
+
+<p>"That's for the King to say," replied the hunter,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span> laughing in apparent
+heartiness, though no sound escaped his lips.</p>
+
+<p>The expression, "that's for the King to say," was one that fell so
+frequently from the lips of Sam Oliver that both boys understood what he
+meant. It was his method of evading a direct reply to any question he
+did not wish to answer.</p>
+
+<p>"All of which means," said James, "that you <i>have</i> seen some redskins."</p>
+
+<p>"A few signs. Nothing very bad, and nothing that should be spoken of by
+either of you. In course we are bound to find the varmints following us,
+but I don't think they will attack us if we are on our guard. We must do
+our best, and after that there is no good in trying to do anything more.
+Your father says everything that happens is right, or it wouldn't be.
+Strange," he added, as he again looked at the panther's skin which James
+Boone was carrying, "strange that you should have got him so easy. I
+have known the time when it would have taken half-dozen bullets to put
+an end to a fighting painter."</p>
+
+<p>"Have you shot a good many of them?" inquired Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, a few, a few," replied the hunter. "The strangest sight I ever see
+was one time when I was followin' three o' the varmints. They led me a
+hard chase, and it was two days before I caught<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span> up with them, and when
+I did, I almost wished I had not."</p>
+
+<p>"Why?"</p>
+
+<p>"I will tell you. When I came near a big open space there in the woods I
+heard the worst screechin' I ever heard in my life. You simply cannot
+describe it. They were snarlin' and spittin' and screamin' and growlin',
+and sometimes it seemed as if they were doin' all four things at once.
+My first thought was that this was no place for Sam Oliver. It sounded
+like a hundred painters were fightin' to the death. I reckon I did turn
+back a little way, but the screechin' and the screamin' kep' up so that
+I finally decided that I must find out what was goin' on."</p>
+
+<p>"What was it?" inquired Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"When I crep' up close to the clearin' and peeped out I saw two painters
+a-fightin'. They were crouchin' on the ground facin' each other and
+callin' each other every name they could think of in painter language. I
+did not know what had happened to the third painter, but I knew I ought
+not to stay there long. But all at once the two varmints leaped at each
+other and a minute later they were in such a plight that you would not
+have known what kind of beasts they was. They had ripped and torn and
+clawed and scratched and bit each other until it did not seem as if what
+was left<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span> could hang together. Then all at once one of them got the
+other fellow by the throat and it wasn't long before he said good-bye."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you shoot him?" asked Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"No, for just then I heard a noise right behind me and when I looked
+back I see the third painter creepin' toward me and I fired at it and
+ran. Somehow I managed to get away, and next day I went back to the
+scene o' battle but I could not find anythin' there except the dead
+painter. The others had gone. I had been so long trailin' them that I
+thought I wouldn't follow any further. But if I live to be a hundred
+years old I shall never forget that there fight I saw between those two
+big cats! There are some animals," continued the hunter, "that seem to
+have reg'lar feuds, jest like fam'ly troubles. They may fight one
+another once in a while, but they will make up to fight the enemies of
+the fam'ly every time they get a chance."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean?" asked Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, for instance, there's the beaver and the otter. They seem to have
+had a declaration of war from the very beginning same as cats and dogs.
+I see a beaver house one day las' winter standin' right in the middle o'
+the pond which the beavers had made. You know they build a long tube
+right up through the centre o' the floor which looks somethin' like a
+chimney. The top<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</a></span> o' this one was about four feet higher than the floor,
+and it was a good two feet through. The water round their house came
+almost to the top of the door. Mr. Beaver, when he wanted to go into his
+house, used to dive and come up through the tube, then he would shake
+himself, and slide down to his floor, which was always dry. It was
+always warm, too, for even in the coldest weather the water all round
+the house kep' it from freezin'. I reckon this particular fam'ly was
+pretty well provided for because they were all fat. Leastwise they
+looked as if they might have been, though they were dead when I saw them."</p>
+
+<p>"How was that?" inquired Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, the otter had gone after them."</p>
+
+<p>"Into their house?"</p>
+
+<p>"No! No! No otter would ever dare do that. In a fight in a place like
+that the beaver, which has such strong teeth and is such a strong little
+brute anyway, would have the advantage every time. The otter works in
+'nother way. The beaver fam'ly had been busy all through the summer
+hidin' their strips o' poplar and birch and willows in the bottom o' the
+lake which they had made. They intended to have their easy time in the
+winter, and they do, too, unless some otters happen along.</p>
+
+<p>"In this case I am tellin' you about, a couple o'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</a></span> otters had tried to
+break into the house, but the walls was hard as granite. If the otter
+can only get the beaver into the water he can catch him easily, because
+the otter is as quick as a fish. So the beaver simply works on the
+defensive and builds a house strong enough to keep out any otter that
+may happen along. But pretty soon the otters begin to look into the
+beavers' dam. By and by, when they find a weak spot, where they can work
+a hole straight through, they begin their job. When the weather is not
+too cold and the ice not too thick, just as soon as the water in the
+lake begins to drop a little, then the beavers begin to hunt for the
+leak. But when the water falls fast and there is a covering of ice all
+over the lake and sometimes the ice caves in, you see the beavers then
+cannot get their provisions, and the inside o' their houses is as cold
+as it is outside.</p>
+
+<p>"The otters have a reg'lar course they follow, goin' from one place to
+'nother and making their rounds 'bout every ten days to two weeks. I
+reckon in the case o' this beaver fam'ly I am tellin' you about that the
+otters came back in a fortnight or so and found the beavers all dead or
+in no shape to fight. Here comes Daniel Boone himself," the hunter
+exclaimed suddenly, "and I reckon you boys will have to explain to him
+what you meant by your shots back yonder."</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER III</h2>
+
+<h3>THE HUNT FOR GAME</h3>
+
+<p>At the words of the hunter the boys looked up and saw the scout
+approaching. He was a tall, lean man, quiet in his bearing, in the prime
+of middle life, and with every indication of self-control, as well as of
+strength, stamped upon his face and form. His expression showed that he
+was anxious concerning the shots which had been fired, but as he drew
+near the boys he was not the first to speak. Peleg's admiration was
+manifest in the manner in which the young pioneer looked up to the great
+leader, though the boy, like others of his day and age, seldom spoke to
+his elders unless first they had spoken to him.</p>
+
+<p>In response to the question which was expressed in the eyes of Daniel
+Boone, rather than in words, Sam Oliver said quietly, "The boys shot a painter."</p>
+
+<p>There was a slight smile on the face of Daniel Boone as he said, "Did
+they? Was it necessary?" he added, as he turned to his son.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," replied young Boone. "The varmint was just ready to spring
+on Peleg. He was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</a></span> crouching on the branch of a tree directly over him,
+and if I had not fired he would have had him."</p>
+
+<p>"It must be right. You know," added Boone quietly, smiling again as he
+spoke, "I am one of those who believe that whatever happens is right."</p>
+
+<p>"And yet," suggested the hunter, "you don't stop tryin' for yourself,
+nor for others, either."</p>
+
+<p>"Not at all," answered the scout. "A man must follow the best light he
+can get and then, beyond that, where he cannot go, he must believe that
+things do not 'happen.' I have heard some men blame their 'luck' for
+what befell them. I have never thought there was any such thing as
+'luck.' The trouble is we do not always see the connection in events,
+and in our ignorance we say a thing 'happens.' I am sorry the boys had
+to shoot the painter."</p>
+
+<p>"I never knew," laughed the loquacious Sam, "that you had any sympathy
+to waste on those critters."</p>
+
+<p>"I haven't," replied Daniel Boone, a trace of a smile again appearing on
+his face as he spoke. "I am not sorry that the painter was shot. I am
+sorry that the boys had to shoot it. Just now I am more afraid of their
+rifles than I am of painters."</p>
+
+<p>The trio looked quickly into the face of the leader, but his quiet
+expression was unchanged,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span> and what he may have implied by his statement
+he did not explain.</p>
+
+<p>"I do not love the varmints," said Sam, shaking his head. "I shall put
+them out of the world every chance I get."</p>
+
+<p>"So shall I," assented Boone, "although sometimes I feel sorry that I
+have to do so. I do not suppose that a painter is following anything
+else than the instinct which was given him, the same as a hound dog
+follows the track of a rabbit."</p>
+
+<p>"How about men?" inquired Sam.</p>
+
+<p>"I believe the same thing is true of men," said Daniel Boone seriously.
+"Fortunately for me, I had a good father and a good mother, so that when
+I was a child I was kept free from many of the things which drive some
+people I have known into divers sorts of evil."</p>
+
+<p>The little party was advancing steadily during this conversation, and
+apparently, now that the explanation of the two shots had been given,
+the leader was no longer apprehensive. To Peleg, however, who was
+watchful of the man's every movement, it seemed as if he was continually
+listening for sounds which the others were unable to hear. The boy was
+aware of the threatening peril from the Indians, although not once had a
+red man been seen since the emigrants had departed from Powell's Valley.
+But the fact that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span> the Shawnees kept themselves hidden from sight by no
+means proved that they might not be near. Frequently he and James Boone
+had talked over the possibility of an attack by their foes, but the
+presence of the additional forty men that had joined the expedition
+recently provided an added sense of security. They felt that it was
+doubtful if even a large band of warriors would venture to attack a
+party so well defended as was that now led by Daniel Boone.</p>
+
+<p>When the sun set the entire band halted and preparations were made for
+the night. The few wagons were drawn toward one spot and left with their
+rear ends turned toward the forest. An enclosure was formed in this way,
+in the centre of which a fire was kindled and preparations for supper
+were speedily made. Meat from the deer which had been shot the preceding
+day was roasted on spits turned by some of the younger children. Only a
+scanty supply of vegetables was to be had, and for the most part the
+hardy settlers were compelled to rely upon the supplies of game which
+the boys and Sam Oliver and other hunters had no difficulty in obtaining in the forest.</p>
+
+<p>Guards were assigned for the night, one man being stationed on each of
+the four sides of the camp and close to the encircling wagons. The dogs
+which accompanied the expedition were also used<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span> as aids in detecting
+the presence of enemies, but throughout the night nothing more dangerous
+than a deer or a curious night-bird was heard.</p>
+
+<p>There were several young girls in the company whose duties consisted
+largely in looking after the younger children and in helping prepare the
+meals when the emigrants halted. There was an air of confidence in the
+bearing of almost all the members of the expedition, but Peleg Barnes
+was convinced that Daniel Boone himself was far from feeling at ease.
+The boy felt sure, of course, that the leader was anxious not for his
+own safety, but for those who were following him in their search for the
+wonderful land which he had found in Kantuckee.</p>
+
+<p>Before sunrise preparations for the resumption of the journey were
+completed, and after an ample breakfast, though the food did not differ
+materially from that of the preceding evening, the word to depart was given.</p>
+
+<p>The little children and many of the women rode on the backs of the
+horses, some of which were hauling the heavy wagons that contained the
+simple household possessions of the emigrants. As there were more horses
+than wagons, there was ample provision made for all who were unable to
+endure the hardships of the march. The sister of young Boone, however,
+frequently insisted upon walking with her brother, except when he was
+to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span> be one of the guards. No fresh excitement occurred and no fears were
+aroused until after the band had passed Walden's Mountain.</p>
+
+<p>"Cumberland Mountain is not far beyond," said Sam to Peleg and young
+Boone when the nightly camp had been made after a second mountain had
+been crossed. "When once we get beyond that we shall soon see the land
+o' promise. I think to-morrow I shall have to take you two boys with me
+and see if we cannot get some fresh venison. Our stores are runnin' low,
+and a few pa'tridges or wild turkeys would not be bad, either, and I am
+sure we shall find plenty o' both in the valley."</p>
+
+<p>"There must be pigeons left from those we shot yesterday," suggested Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"There are some," replied the hunter, who was in general charge of the
+larder, "but it would be a change for us if we could get a few turkeys.
+We ought to find some fish, too, in the stream in the valley, and I
+think I shall set some o' the boys to catchin' them. We shall go ahead
+o' the main party to-morrow, or else let the band go ahead of us, so
+that if there happen to be any redskins on our trail they will not
+mistake us for the whole band."</p>
+
+<p>"Have you seen any more signs?" inquired Peleg quickly.</p>
+
+<div class="center"><a name="i045.jpg" id="i045.jpg"></a><img src="images/i045.jpg" width='488' height='700' alt="He was a tall, lean man, quiet in his bearing, and with
+every indication of self-control, as well as of strength, stamped upon
+his face and form" /></div>
+
+<h4>"He was a tall, lean man, quiet in his bearing, and with<br />
+every indication of self-control, as well as of strength,<br />stamped upon
+his face and form"</h4>
+
+<p>"Plenty o' signs, but we have not seen one o'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span> the varmints. I know from
+the way Daniel Boone is watchin' that he is a bit fearful. I think I
+shall tell him to-morrow when we start for our game that we will let the
+rest o' the party go ahead of us and we will bring up the rear. It may
+save time to do that, because it will be easy to follow the trail they
+will leave. Most of this country is new to me and the only one that is
+sure of his way is the scout himself."</p>
+
+<p>"I think that would be better," assented young Boone, "and, besides, if
+we hunt in the rear of the party we shall be able to do double duty by
+serving as a rear guard at the same time."</p>
+
+<p>"That is right," laughed Sam. "Though that's for the King to say. The
+great trouble with him is that he does not say very much."</p>
+
+<p>"You have never been troubled that way, have you, Sam?" laughed Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"I can't say that I have. I think o' so many things; and if I think o'
+them I want some one else to know what they are, too. You make your
+arrangements with the King and we will be ready to do our share on the morrow."</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly, on the following day, when the advance was resumed, Sam
+Oliver and his two young comrades waited for the cavalcade to pass and
+then began their task of providing supplies and game for the company.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</a></span></p><p>The emigrants now were nearing Cumberland Mountain. The three mountains
+were not far apart and looked almost as if they had been carefully
+planted at equal distances in the midst of the wilderness by some giant
+hand. Some of the cliffs were so wild and rugged that when the creaking
+wagons drew near the edge the children screamed in their terror. In the
+main, however, the trail was less difficult than had been expected. The
+huge masses of rock had been torn asunder in places by some volcanic
+action in preceding ages and had left narrow passageways through which
+the moving cavalcade was able to proceed without much difficulty.</p>
+
+<p>October had come and the foliage which had been slightly tinted in the
+preceding days had turned to a deeper shade. The trees were now ablaze
+with colour. Sam Oliver in his enthusiasm declared that within a half
+hour he and his companions would be able to rejoin the company with
+ample supplies for the following day.</p>
+
+<p>When the boys began their search for game his words seemed about to be
+verified: near the mountain brook they spied three deer, two of which
+fell at their first shot. Sam, who had preferred to hunt alone, also
+must have found game plentiful, the boys concluded, because twice within
+five minutes the report of his gun had been heard.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span></p><p>"We must get some turkeys before we go back," suggested Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"I am afraid you will have to wait until later in the day if you want to
+get them," responded young Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know about that," began Peleg. He stopped abruptly when, as if
+in confirmation of his own opinion, a gobble was heard not far to their
+right. This was quickly followed by an answering gobble from their left.</p>
+
+<p>"You take one and I will look for the other," eagerly suggested young Boone.</p>
+
+<p>The plan was instantly adopted, and each of the boys, crouching low and
+stealthily making his way among the trees and through the brush, tried
+to steal upon the bird, which still was noisily announcing its presence.</p>
+
+<p>James Boone moved forward thirty yards from the place where he had left
+his comrade and cautiously peered about him for a sight of the calling
+turkey. His feet, clad in moccasins, made little noise as he advanced
+over the moist ground. Deftly he parted the bushes in making his way,
+and they closed behind him with no more noise than as if they had been
+swayed by a gentle breeze.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly young Boone came to a place from which he was able to see
+plainly a short distance before him. The gobble now was so distinct<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span>
+that, he held his gun in readiness for instant use. Cautiously
+advancing, he peeped from behind a tree, hopeful that he might obtain a
+sight of the bird he was seeking. To his terror he saw an Indian
+directly before him leaning against the trunk of a huge tree. The mouth
+of the warrior was partly closed by his hands. His face was daubed with
+paint, and his discoloured cheeks seemed to be doubly disgusting as he
+emitted sounds which even the keenest of the wild turkeys would scarcely
+have detected as different from its own.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER IV</h2>
+
+<h3>THE GOBBLERS</h3>
+
+<p>At the moment when the young pioneer discovered the Indian, the warrior
+also became aware of the presence of his enemy. Whether it was because
+James was amazed at the redskin's skill in mimicking the call of the
+wild turkey, or because his enemy was somewhat quicker in his movements
+than he, is not known. At any rate, before young Boone could raise his
+gun to his shoulder the Indian turned and with all his strength hurled his tomahawk.</p>
+
+<p>True to its aim, the weapon struck the face of the young hunter, almost
+cleaving his head in twain.</p>
+
+<p>As the body of the stricken boy fell forward, the Indian halted a moment
+and then in his shrillest tones imitated the call of the crow four
+times. He waited until there was a response similar to his own, and
+then, running to the prostrate young hunter, deftly removed his scalp.
+He then dashed into the woods and ran in the direction from which the
+answering call had been heard.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span></p><p>Meanwhile Peleg Barnes, who had been striving to locate the "turkey"
+which had been gobbling steadily in response to the calls of the one
+first heard, was more fortunate than his friend. Stealthily creeping
+through the bushes and darting from tree to tree, he discovered the
+warrior that was imitating the "gobbles" before the latter was aware of his presence.</p>
+
+<p>The boy almost intuitively was aware of the purpose of the warrior, and
+without hesitation raised his gun and fired.</p>
+
+<p>As the Indian fell to the ground Peleg did not wait to discover the
+effect of his shot, but ran back at his utmost speed toward the camp.
+Frequently, as he ran, the terrified young hunter shouted his warning of
+the presence of his enemies.</p>
+
+<p>Before he had regained the camp he was joined by Sam Oliver, who was
+angry as well as startled by the wild shouts of his young companion.</p>
+
+<p>"What's the trouble, Peleg?" he demanded.</p>
+
+<p>"I shot a redskin! There must be a good many more!" replied the boy,
+almost breathless in his excitement. "The varmint was daubed with paint
+and gobbling like a turkey, trying to draw some one into his trap."</p>
+
+<p>"Did young Boone go with you?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, he heard another 'turkey.'"</p>
+
+<p>"Where is he now?" demanded Sam sharply.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</a></span></p><p>"I do not know. We must get word to the scout."</p>
+
+<p>Nothing more was said until the returning hunters, both of whom were
+running at their utmost speed, came within sight of the place where the
+camp had been made. In a brief time they gained the open place in front,
+for the camp this time had been pitched on a small plateau, sheltered by
+a frowning cliff on one side and protected by a steep, rocky gulch on
+another, while in front of it was sufficient space to enable the
+watching guard to detect the approach of an enemy from that direction.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as they were within hearing, both hunters shouted their
+warnings; but even as they raised their voices the sound of rifles was
+heard and a moment later there was a sudden cry and rush made by at
+least three score of the Indians. The suddenness of the attack as well
+as the lack of preparation, due to the faith of the emigrants in the
+security of the position which they had selected for their halt, and
+their confidence in the guards which had been stationed, prevented an immediate response.</p>
+
+<p>The Indian warriors, hideously painted, crouching low and running
+swiftly, and at the same time emitting their terrifying whoops, fired at
+every paleface that they could see.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</a></span></p><p>To the startled pioneers the region seemed to be filled with their
+foes. The screams of frightened children, the calls of the women, and
+the shouts of the men as they summoned their companions increased the
+confusion. For a time the din was almost deafening. Above the shouts and
+cries were heard the frequent reports of the rifles of the attacking party.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg and Sam, who by this time had gained the shelter of the camp,
+instantly joined the few men that had rallied as soon as the warning was
+given. All now were doing their utmost to check the onslaught. Every
+man, without waiting for orders, fired at the shouting, leaping savages.
+As soon as their guns had been discharged, however, it was plain that
+the attacking party had many other weapons. Those who had emptied their
+rifles brandished their tomahawks and tried to make amends by the
+fierceness of their cries for their lack of more formidable ways of
+attacking. In a brief time the defenders were thrown into confusion,
+outnumbered as they were at the moment, and driven back toward the place
+where the camp was located.</p>
+
+<p>It was speedily known that several had fallen before the fire of the
+warriors, but just who or how many there was no time to ascertain. It
+was now every man for himself as they sought protection<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</a></span> behind the
+great trees or darted for the friendly shelter of rocks, which were
+numerous in the region.</p>
+
+<p>It was at this time, however, that the great leader himself appeared
+upon the scene. Familiar with the ways of the Indians, Daniel Boone
+ordered every man to conceal himself behind some tree and make no
+attempt to flee from the place until the entire party had been driven
+away. The presence of Boone seemed to revive the courage of the
+retreating guards. As soon as sheltering places had been secured, every
+man reloaded his rifle and, following the example of the great scout,
+fired at the enemy, who now almost had crossed the open space before the camp.</p>
+
+<p>The fierceness of the onslaught of the Indian warriors was well known,
+but it was also understood by every white man that the red men seldom
+persisted in a long attack. A stealthy and sudden dash was their
+favourite method of fighting, but if the resistance was determined or
+prolonged they would usually withdraw to the shelter of the forest.</p>
+
+<p>In their present attack the Indians followed their customary plan. As
+soon as Boone and his companions ceased to flee and began to return the
+fire with vigour, the Indians faltered, and then, after they had given
+several unusually wild whoops and a final discharge of their weapons,
+they all fled<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</a></span> back to the protecting forest from which they had so
+suddenly emerged.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the enemy had departed, Daniel Boone, who thoroughly
+understood Indian nature and ways, doubled the guards, assigned some of
+his followers to the task of bringing in the bodies of the fallen, and
+then ordered the others to withdraw within the camp itself, and hold
+themselves in readiness for a sudden call. Meanwhile they were told to
+do their utmost to quiet the frightened women and children, the latter
+still vocally expressing their terror.</p>
+
+<p>It was soon learned that five of the whites had fallen. Their bodies
+were hastily borne within the protecting circle of the camp and two men
+who had been wounded were at once cared for.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg, whose excitement during the short, sharp fight had been intense,
+now recalled that he had not seen young Boone since his comrades had
+returned. Without voicing his fears he made a hasty tour of the camp,
+searching in every conceivable place for his friend.</p>
+
+<p>When at last the young hunter was convinced that James was nowhere to be
+found among the emigrants, he ran to Daniel Boone himself and said,
+"Have you seen James anywhere?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied the scout, glancing keenly at the young hunter. "Was he not with you?"</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span></p><p>"We were together until we heard the 'turkeys' gobbling. Then he
+followed the sound of one and I went after the other. When I came near
+the place I saw it was a warrior trying to decoy us."</p>
+
+<p>"And James was not with you?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you call to him?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, sir. I shot the redskin and then started for the camp as fast as I
+could go. Sam Oliver came with me, and if it had not been for our alarm
+I am afraid the redskins would have done more damage than they did."</p>
+
+<p>The leader was silent as he gazed into the surrounding forest. He was
+well aware that the woods might conceal many more hostile Indians than
+had appeared in the sudden attack upon the camp. That he was deeply
+troubled by the message Peleg had brought him was manifest. Had his
+enemies already killed his son or had they made him a prisoner? What had become of James?</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think they have taken him?" inquired Peleg in a low voice.</p>
+
+<p>"That is what I hope," replied Daniel Boone; and then in response to the
+unspoken question of the young hunter he added: "If they have made him
+prisoner we may be able to get him again, but if they have not&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>What the pioneer scout left unsaid was fully<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span> understood by Peleg, whose
+face became pale as he saw the anxiety of the leader for his boy.</p>
+
+<p>"A man must do his best, and it is useless to rebel," said Daniel Boone,
+almost as if he were speaking to himself. "If James has fallen, all that
+we may try to do will be useless. If he has escaped, he will not need
+all our help. If the Shawnees have made him their prisoner, then we
+shall do more to help him by quick action than in any other way."</p>
+
+<p>Turning from the women, who were weeping over the bodies of the dead men
+that had been brought back to the camp, in a few words Daniel Boone
+related to his companions what Peleg had told him. A band of twenty or
+more was speedily formed, every one eager to join in the search for the missing boy.</p>
+
+<p>"Peleg," inquired the scout just before the men departed from the camp,
+"do you think you can lead the way to the place where you and James
+heard the 'turkey'?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," replied Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"Then let us start at once."</p>
+
+<p>No man in the band was without fear when they entered the forest lest he
+might be the target of some concealed Indian. And yet the little force
+was relying upon the very boldness of their venture for its success.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span></p><p>There was no trace of fright, however, when the men ran across the open
+space and followed Daniel Boone as he led the way in the direction
+indicated by Peleg, who was close behind him.</p>
+
+<p>In a brief time the party came to the place where Peleg had shot the
+Indian that had been imitating the gobble of a turkey. There was no
+delay, however, and as soon as Boone was convinced that the red man was
+dead he turned with his companions in the direction in which the other
+"turkey" had been heard.</p>
+
+<p>As yet not a sign of the presence of their enemy had been discovered,
+although every one was aware that dark eyes were doubtless watching
+their every movement. Why they had not been fired upon was as yet not understood.</p>
+
+<p>In a few minutes, however, these things were forgotten when Peleg led
+the way to the place toward which his young companion had gone to seek
+the "turkey" which had so noisily announced its presence.</p>
+
+<p>A low exclamation escaped the young hunter's lips when he and the leader
+halted a few minutes later and saw upon the ground before them the
+prostrate body of the missing boy.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER V</h2>
+
+<h3>PELEG'S NEW PLACE</h3>
+
+<p>Not a word escaped Daniel Boone's lips at the gruesome discovery of the
+body of his oldest son. He ran quickly forward, turned the body so that
+the face could be seen, and in this manner instantly realized the
+terrible fate which had overtaken James.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg Barnes, who was close behind him, never was able to forget the
+sound of the one long, dry sob to which Daniel Boone gave utterance.
+Then, almost as if he still was unaware of the presence of any one
+except the dead boy, he lifted the body tenderly, and with exceeding
+care placed it across his shoulders. Then, turning about, the great
+scout started back toward the camp.</p>
+
+<p>For a moment the other members of the party stood silent as they watched
+their suffering leader. There was not one of the men who would not have
+been glad to express his sympathy in words, but they were all aware of
+Daniel Boone's prejudices against giving full expression to one's
+feelings; and they had not yet recovered from the staggering<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span> surprise
+which the discovery of the body of James had created.</p>
+
+<p>When Daniel Boone disappeared in the brush, Sam Oliver ran to the spot
+where this discovery had been made and, picking up the gun of James,
+turned to his companions and said: "We must follow him. We must keep
+close to him. The redskins might almost scalp him and he would not
+understand what they are doing, the way he feels now."</p>
+
+<p>Acting upon this suggestion, the men all turned to follow the direction
+in which their leader had disappeared. Peleg had run in advance of the
+other members of the band, eager to help the scout in his task. Quietly
+the leader shook his head, but did not speak in response to the young
+hunter's offer to aid. Apparently he was hardly aware that his friends
+were so near him.</p>
+
+<p>Without delay the party soon gained the open space in front of the camp.
+There Daniel Boone stopped, and, turning to his friends, whose presence
+apparently neither surprised nor startled him, said: "I shall take my
+boy to the place where the other bodies are lying. I desire you to say
+nothing of what has befallen him until first I shall break the news to my wife."</p>
+
+<p>No reply was given to the request of the hunter, nor was any expected.
+There was no protest by<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span> the scout, however, when Sam Oliver and Peleg
+followed him as he bore his burden to the place where the bodies of the
+men who had fallen in the sudden attack by the Indians were lying,
+covered by blankets. There, still quiet, and as tender in his manner as
+a woman, Daniel Boone lifted the body of his boy from his shoulders and
+laid it beside those who were his fellow victims.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg, whose eyes were watching every movement of the man for whom his
+feeling was little less than adoration, in spite of his grief, marvelled
+at the wonderful strength the scout displayed. There was no evidence of
+struggle on his part, and as soon as he had deposited the body, Daniel
+Boone turned away, and the two hunters required no word from him to
+inform them that he had gone to tell his wife of the great sorrow which
+had come into their lives. Peleg's eager look followed him even when he
+saw him beckon her to one side of the company, and then both withdrew
+from the sight of the entire band. The bearing of the scout was still
+unchanged. So great was his self-control that no one in the party, who
+did not know of the calamity, suspected that anything had befallen the
+leader beyond the common feeling of sorrow for the loss of the five men.</p>
+
+<p>What was said by Daniel Boone to his wife in that heartbreaking
+interview no one ever knew.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span> When the scout rejoined the band, which now
+had assembled behind the protecting barricade, he said simply: "We must
+prepare for a hasty burial. These bodies must not be left for the wolves
+to maltreat." The leader spoke as quietly as if he were referring to one
+of the ordinary experiences of life, instead of one that would have
+wrung the heart of the strongest man.</p>
+
+<p>On the hillside, near the place where the camp had been pitched, the
+bodies of the fallen men were hastily buried. There were cries and sobs
+from many of those who had been bereaved, and the unutterable fear and
+horror which more or less possessed all the emigrant band were apparent
+in the glances of terror which were frequently cast toward the forest.
+Even some of the men gave way to their sorrow and anxiety. Not a trace
+of either emotion, however, was to be seen in the face of Daniel Boone
+when at last the leader turned away from the place of burial.</p>
+
+<p>Later in the day Peleg chanced upon the scout when the latter believed
+himself to be alone. Seated upon a log looking steadily upon the ground,
+still without a cry, the man's frame was shaken in his agony of grief.
+Abashed by the discovery, Peleg, whose sorrow at the loss of his friend
+also had been keen, stealthily withdrew from the place and did not refer
+to his discovery when later he<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span> joined his companions. Before the scout
+returned, the boy had decided that at his first opportunity he would
+explain to him how strong had been the friendship between himself and
+James. Peleg was too modest to believe that the great man had ever been
+aware of the friendship between the two boys. Such matters were of too
+minor importance for him even to recognize, much less to remember, thought the lad.</p>
+
+<p>Great then was the young hunter's surprise, and greater still his
+pleasure, when the scout stopped by his side the next day and, looking
+into his face, said calmly, "Peleg, you and James were great friends."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"Hereafter I shall have a special love for you, Peleg, because you loved my boy."</p>
+
+<p>Tears, which the young hunter was unable to control, sprang into his
+eyes at the words which were evidence not only of the keen observation
+of Daniel Boone but also of his regard for one who had been the friend
+of his son. Still the scout's voice was quiet and calm. Peleg was
+convinced that he was not unaware of his inability to reply. "It is one
+of the things, Peleg, which cannot be changed," continued Daniel Boone.
+"James was a good son and I looked forward to a useful life for him, but
+he is not to be here. It does no one any<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span> good to rebel uselessly, and
+only children and savages complain when everything they desire is not
+arranged as they wish."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," assented Peleg. At first he suspected that the words of the
+leader were intended as a rebuke to him for the display of his feelings.
+Perhaps it was a weakness, he thought, and yet, somehow, the young
+soldier was convinced that the father of his friend perhaps did not
+think any the less of him because he had been deeply moved by the tragic
+death of James Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"It is not the first time," continued the scout, "that I have been
+compelled to face sorrow. Somehow I feel that one is like a leaf carried
+on the stream. It may whirl about and turn and twist, but it is always
+carried forward." As he spoke, the leader stooped, and taking a tiny
+branch which had fallen to the ground tossed it into the noisy little
+stream which went tumbling down the side of Cumberland Mountain on its
+way to the great river and the sea beyond. "It is somewhat like that, my
+lad," continued Daniel Boone, running his fingers through his hair as he
+spoke. "Man is borne onward by a Power which he does not understand, and
+yet which he must recognize as greater than his own. It is so that one
+is carried by the years. One is helpless to stop them in their course,
+as helpless as that little branch which I<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span> threw into the water. It does
+no one any good to rebel or complain. Every man must accept the facts of
+his life, believing that there is a Power that guides and controls far
+better than he knows how to do."</p>
+
+<p>The scout spoke musingly, almost as if he thought himself to be alone. A
+brief silence followed his words, and then Daniel Boone turned once more
+to Peleg. "My lad," he said, "all I say is that one cannot turn back.
+However much I may sorrow over the loss of my boy, I cannot go back to
+him. The only direction in which I can move is forward. If one can only
+find the right way, that is not so bad."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," said Peleg, hardly aware of the full meaning of Boone's words.</p>
+
+<p>"You were a friend of my boy."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," again responded Peleg, his voice breaking once more in spite
+of his efforts at self-control.</p>
+
+<p>"You shall be <i>my</i> friend from this time forward. You cannot take the
+place of James, but because you were his friend you shall have a share,
+if you so desire, such as he might have had, in my life and my plans.
+Your father is not living?"</p>
+
+<p>"He has been dead three years."</p>
+
+<p>"And your mother?"</p>
+
+<p>"She died when I was a baby."</p>
+
+<p>"Then there is no one to whom you can turn?"</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span></p><p>"I have lived with my uncle, but I have no desire to go back to him."</p>
+
+<p>Boone looked keenly into the face of the boy by his side and was silent
+a moment. "Peleg," he resumed, "I meant what I said just now. If you so
+desire, you shall be my friend."</p>
+
+<p>"I do desire it," said Peleg impulsively. "There Is nothing I want so
+much as I do to be with you. It is good of you to think of me&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Say no more," interrupted Boone. "I shall not forget, though I may not
+speak to you soon of this matter again. When the time comes, I shall not
+fail to let you know."</p>
+
+<p>When night fell the guards of the camp were doubled, for with the coming
+of darkness the terror of some of the emigrants increased. There were
+frequent cries heard from the little children, cries which the mothers
+were unable to quiet and in which some of them even joined. A feeling of
+terror had settled over the whole camp.</p>
+
+<p>To Peleg was assigned a post of danger, as his position as guard was to
+be near the gulch. Steep as this was, it would have been possible for a
+warrior to climb its rocky sides if he were familiar with the spot.</p>
+
+<p>Before Peleg departed for his station he was joined by Israel Boone, a
+younger brother of James, who insisted upon sharing the vigil. In the
+light of the campfire Peleg saw the face of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span> scout change colour
+when the suggestion was made by his son, but he did not offer any
+objection, and in spite of Sam Oliver's declaration that "One boy was a
+boy and two boys was half a boy," the leader quietly gave his consent.</p>
+
+<p>When the silence of the outer night became more marked in the deepening
+darkness, the occasional cries of the children did not cease. They were
+cries not of suffering, but of terror. There were times when even the
+two young guards shared in the prevailing fear. The darkness that
+surrounded them might conceal painted warriors who were watchful of
+their every act. At any moment a bullet from some unseen enemy might
+find its way to the heart of a watching sentinel. Such a condition was
+not long to be endured. As the hours passed, both boys grew more eager
+for the coming of the morning, when, whatever plan might be formed, at
+least relief from the depressing silence would come.</p>
+
+<p>To Peleg no thought of any change in the plans of the emigrants had
+occurred, and he was therefore the more astonished the following morning
+when, after he had been relieved from duty and had obtained a few hours
+of sleep, he was informed before breakfast that the men were assembling
+for a council. Even his feeling of hunger was ignored in the exciting
+announcement which soon was made by Boone.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER VI</h2>
+
+<h3>SCHOOLMASTER HARGRAVE</h3>
+
+<p>Before breakfast had been prepared Peleg was aware of a certain partly
+suppressed excitement among the members of the band. The women, with
+tears in their eyes and with their children clinging to their skirts,
+frequently had been in conference with Daniel Boone or with other men of the party.</p>
+
+<p>It was therefore not without some previous intimation that Peleg heard
+the scout summon the men to a new conference.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as they were assembled Boone said, "It will not be possible for
+us to proceed at this time."</p>
+
+<p>"Why not?" demanded Sam Oliver.</p>
+
+<p>"The women are terror-stricken. I myself had not thought that we should
+so soon be attacked by the savages. I have reason to remember our stay
+on Cumberland Mountain&mdash;&mdash;" For a moment the scout was silent, and an
+expression of sympathy ran through the entire assembly. Once more in
+control of his feelings, Boone continued: "It is not for myself, as you
+know, that I am asking<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</a></span> this return. It is useless, however, now to go
+on with such fear among our womenfolk, and the redskins opposing us more
+strongly the farther we go into Kantuckee."</p>
+
+<p>"Where can we go?" inquired one of the assembly.</p>
+
+<p>"I have decided that our best plan is to return to the settlement on the Clinch River."</p>
+
+<p>"How far is that from here?" asked the inquirer.</p>
+
+<p>"About forty miles."</p>
+
+<p>"I am not one to favour return just because we have been
+unfortunate&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"There is no question," said Daniel Boone, his eyes flashing in spite of
+the quiet manner of his speech, "about what we shall do. We shall make
+our plans to return at once."</p>
+
+<p>Whatever feeling of rebellion may have been aroused in the minds of some
+of his followers, the decision of the leader was not to be disputed. The
+confidence of every one in his courage, integrity, and judgment was so
+strong that no one at the time would have dared oppose the great scout.</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly, hasty preparations were made for the return of the entire
+band, and within an hour the emigrants were on their way.</p>
+
+<p>The same order was maintained which previously had been used. An advance
+party of five and three rear guards were formed, but now the scout<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</a></span> had
+in addition a small body moving on each flank, parallel with the main body.</p>
+
+<p>With the departure, renewed confidence came to all. As the band withdrew
+further from Cumberland Mountain their spirits in a measure revived, and
+when on the third day they arrived at the little settlement which they
+were seeking on the Clinch River, even the tragedy which had befallen
+them was seldom mentioned. Even the packhorses pricked up their ears and
+required no incentive to induce them to move rapidly down the mountainside.</p>
+
+<p>When the emigrants at last arrived at their destination it was found
+necessary to erect several new houses. The nights already were cool, and
+a snowfall might be expected at any time. Even Sam Oliver, who seldom
+assisted in the labours of the settlements, was induced to aid his
+companions in felling the trees and cutting the logs for the little
+houses which must be the sole protection of the people throughout the coming winter.</p>
+
+<p>Not many weeks after the return of Daniel Boone and his party,
+Schoolmaster Hargrave found his way into the settlement. He was a
+peculiar man in his appearance, exceedingly awkward and angular, a fact
+which was made more marked by the odd clothing he wore. Disdaining
+garments made from the skins of wild beasts, his clothes were<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</a></span> of
+woollen material, and made, too, after a fashion that in itself was
+fearful and wonderful to behold. Even his cocked hat did not become him,
+but in some way seemed to make more prominent his long nose, which was
+covered with splotches of red, as were also his cheeks. That he was
+earnest and deeply interested in his tasks no one denied. The prime
+qualification for the work of the schoolmaster in that day, however,
+consisted in the fact that he was very muscular and able to compel the
+obedience of even the oldest boys in his school, who frequently were
+tempted to pit their strength against his.</p>
+
+<p>At the suggestion of the scout, a schoolhouse of logs was erected soon
+after the coming of Master Hargrave. In this little schoolhouse there
+was a fireplace, or chimney, which extended nearly across one entire end
+of the building. When a huge log fire was burning there it sent out not
+only its genial heat, but at frequent intervals with the changing winds
+it drew clouds of smoke down the chimney and into the eyes of the
+children that were seated on the rude benches. The little building was
+equipped with more windows than the cabins which had been built for
+dwellings. The windowpanes were of paper and made transparent by oiling
+or greasing them.</p>
+
+<p>Young Daniel Morgan Boone, the third son of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span> Daniel, became a constant
+companion of Peleg in the days that followed the return of the
+emigrants. Daniel had begun to attend school as soon as the rude little
+building was erected, and many of his experiences with the awkward
+schoolmaster were gleefully related to Peleg, who now was no longer
+counted a pupil of the master.</p>
+
+<p>"Master Hargrave," said Daniel one day, "makes us learn many verses of Scripture."</p>
+
+<p>"Does he?" inquired Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"Indeed he does. To-day he gave us three: 'The rod and rule give
+wisdom,' 'A rod fits a fool's back,' and 'He that spoils the rod is not wise.'"</p>
+
+<p>Peleg laughed and said: "I remember those verses myself. He taught them
+to me. Does he rap your knuckles with his ferrule?"</p>
+
+<p>"Sometimes he uses a ferrule, but more often he stands there by one of
+the windows making a pen, and out of the corners of his eyes watches
+every one of the eighteen scholars. He always has a stout hickory in his
+hand or under his arm. The other day there was a disturbance on one of
+the benches, and without waiting to find who was guilty he laid his
+hickory across the backs of every one of us."</p>
+
+<p>"So you have your share, too, do you?"</p>
+
+<p>"Indeed I do. But the strangest part was day before yesterday, when
+Schoolmaster Hargrave<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span> chased Return Sharp. Return would rather go
+fishing or swimming or hunting any day than go to school. He says he
+does not care for learning."</p>
+
+<p>"He is a stout, burly fellow. I suppose a beating does not trouble him much?"</p>
+
+<p>"That's the strange part of it," laughed Daniel gleefully. "He doesn't
+seem to mind one at all. The other afternoon when the boys had been
+called in from recess, Return ducked around the corner of the house and
+began to run. Master Hargrave spied him, and, spitting on both his
+hands, he grasped his hickory and sallied forth to catch him. Return saw
+him coming and took to his heels. Every one in the school was out there
+in front of the schoolhouse watching the sport. We were ready to dodge
+back into our seats, but we wanted to see the race."</p>
+
+<p>"What did he do? Did the master get him?"</p>
+
+<p>"Return took a circuit and started for the meadow, and in a little while
+he was of course coming back toward the schoolhouse. Master Hargrave was
+gaining upon him at every jump, and just as Return cleared the fence
+Master Hargrave let him have it with the hickory. For once in his life
+Return made haste, I can tell you. He was not very long in reaching the
+ground from the top of that fence! The schoolmaster was on the other
+side, and as he saw that all the scholars were<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span> watching him he jumped
+over the fence and started after Return faster than ever. I would not
+have believed that he could run so fast. Return looked back to see how
+near the schoolmaster was, and just then he stumbled and fell, and
+Master Hargrave was so close behind that he, too, stumbled over Return
+and then tumbled to the ground. Return jumped up and took a back track,
+but the Master was after him in a minute, and before he got halfway to
+the schoolhouse he had caught up with him, and at every jump the master
+also let him have it with the hickory. Return got the last love pat just
+as he tumbled over the fence and crawled into the schoolhouse. We all
+thought when the master came in that he would use his hickory on Return
+plentifully, and also on all the rest of us; but for some strange reason
+he seemed to have given Return all that he had to spare that day.
+Strange how he seems to take delight in beating poor Return."</p>
+
+<p>"He always took his whaling like an ox," laughed Peleg, "and grows fat
+on it every day. I have marks yet on my knuckles that the schoolmaster gave me."</p>
+
+<p>"What are you doing?" demanded Daniel, apparently for the first time
+becoming aware of Peleg's occupation.</p>
+
+<p>"I am making a new stock for this rifle-barrel."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span></p><p>"The gun looks like it might kick," commented Daniel sagely, looking
+critically at the rifle-barrel which was lying upon the rude little
+bench at which Peleg was working.</p>
+
+<p>"It would if a boy like you should try to use it."</p>
+
+<p>Daniel laughed derisively and said: "Pray, Mr. Venerable Barnes, how
+long since you were a boy yourself?"</p>
+
+<p>"If you think you can fire this gun, I shall let you be the first one to
+try it. I have it almost ready now, and all I have to do is to fit the
+barrel into the stock&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Hello!" called Daniel, looking up sharply as he became aware of the
+approach of a man on horseback. "This is some stranger. I wonder what he
+can be wanting."</p>
+
+<p>A visitor from any of the faraway settlements was a matter of moment,
+and Peleg advanced to the door to see who the newcomer might be.</p>
+
+<p>The man was a stranger to both boys. As soon as he spied the lads he
+said, "Is Daniel Boone in this settlement?"</p>
+
+<p>"He is, sir," answered Peleg promptly.</p>
+
+<p>"Where can I find him? I would have word with him."</p>
+
+<p>"Daniel, do you tell your father there is a gentleman here who desires
+to speak to him."</p>
+
+<p>"I am a messenger," spoke up the stranger, "a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span> courier from Governor
+Dunmore. 'Tis a matter of importance, and Mr. Daniel Boone will do well
+to report promptly."</p>
+
+<p>Peleg looked at the messenger, who was not much older than he. His air
+of importance was not lost upon the young settler, who laughed slightly
+when, after Daniel's departure in search of his father, he turned again
+to the visitor.</p>
+
+<p>"It is a great honour I have for Daniel Boone," suggested the courier.</p>
+
+<p>"That depends somewhat, I fancy, upon who you are and what you have to bring him."</p>
+
+<p>"I have told you already that I am a messenger from Governor Dunmore. It
+is meet in you, young man, to respect men who are high in authority."</p>
+
+<p>"I do respect the Governor," said Peleg dryly.</p>
+
+<p>"Then you should have respect for the Governor's messenger."</p>
+
+<p>"I have respect for all who are respectable."</p>
+
+<p>"What mean you by that?" demanded the visitor hotly; as he spoke he
+leaped from the seat on the back of his horse and advanced threateningly upon Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>His attitude changed, however, when Peleg quietly stood his ground and
+even slightly smiled at the pompous words and manner of the visitor.</p>
+
+<p>The return of young Daniel Boone interrupted the interview.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span></p><p>"My father will be pleased to see you," said the lad, glancing
+questioningly first at Peleg and then at the messenger.</p>
+
+<p>"Of course he will see me," declared the courier. "Why did he not return with you?"</p>
+
+<p>"He is awaiting your coming and bade me conduct you to our home."</p>
+
+<p>"Is it far from here?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, sir"</p>
+
+<p>"Very good. I shall be pleased to go with you and give my message to Daniel Boone."</p>
+
+<p>Peleg was an interested observer of the departing visitor, and his
+interest would have been still keener had he known how much the message
+from Governor Dunmore concerned his own future.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER VII</h2>
+
+<h3>TWO SCOUTS</h3>
+
+<p>Peleg resumed his congenial occupation, working steadily upon the rifle
+which he was fashioning. The barrel had been part of a gun which
+belonged to one of the men who had fallen in the recent attack by the
+Indians, its stock having been shattered by the blow of a hatchet. After
+the weapon had been found, instead of throwing it aside as its finder
+was tempted to do, Peleg had taken it for himself. All the way from
+Cumberland Mountain he had carried the barrel, which was all that he had
+saved of the rifle. He was aware of the confidence which its recent
+owner had in its qualities, and he had determined to fashion from it a
+gun for himself upon which he might rely.</p>
+
+<p>A smile of satisfaction lighted up the countenance of the young hunter
+when after several hours had elapsed he critically examined his new
+weapon, the parts of which now had all been joined.</p>
+
+<p>At supper time at the home of Daniel Boone, of whose family Peleg had
+been made a member<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span> since the death of James, the visitor of the
+afternoon was recalled by a question of Israel Boone, the second of the
+five sons of Daniel Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"Why did not that man stay all night?" he inquired of his father when
+the family was seated about the rude table.</p>
+
+<p>"He would not remain," replied his father quietly.</p>
+
+<p>"Who was he?" continued Israel.</p>
+
+<p>"A messenger from Governor Dunmore."</p>
+
+<p>The lad was eager to continue his questioning, but evidently he saw
+something in the glance of his father which precluded further attempts,
+and he became silent.</p>
+
+<p>It was not until the following morning that Peleg learned of the reason,
+and then only in part, for the coming of their recent visitor.</p>
+
+<p>"Peleg," said Daniel Boone quietly, "would you prefer to remain here in
+the settlement, or go with me on a scout?"</p>
+
+<p>"I would rather go with you," responded Peleg promptly.</p>
+
+<p>"It is possible that we may be gone two months or more."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"And may have to travel something like eight hundred miles."</p>
+
+<p>"I shall do my best."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span></p><p>"You are well aware, lad, that we shall meet many hard experiences."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"And you are not afraid?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not if you are to find the way."</p>
+
+<p>Daniel Boone smiled and reached for Peleg's new gun. He examined the
+weapon critically, raising it to his shoulder and sighting it several times.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis a handy rifle, lad," he remarked, when his inspection was ended.
+"Have you tried it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"And is it true?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is as far as I am able to make it so."</p>
+
+<p>"If you go with me, is this the gun you will take?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you not prefer to remain in the settlement? There is work to be
+done here. The gardens are to be cared for and the game must be provided
+for the people. Here is where I should remain were it not that when I
+hear the call of Governor Dunmore I realize that there is work for me
+which I must not neglect."</p>
+
+<p>Peleg was silent as he watched the great scout. Even while the man was
+speaking there came into his eyes an expression such as the boy had seen
+only when he and his friend had been together in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span> the forest. It was the
+look of one seeing visions, and yet there was also in it the expression
+of a man of resolute purpose.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twill not do," continued Daniel Boone turning again to Peleg, "to take
+any chances. I had thought at first to take Sam Oliver with me, but now
+it seems good to me for you to go, if you so desire."</p>
+
+<p>"I do."</p>
+
+<p>"I suggest that you try out your new rifle several times before we
+leave. The time to prepare is before we start. After we have gone on our
+way a hundred miles or more 'twill be difficult then to correct any
+fault or change any plans. More than half the winning of any battle
+depends upon the preparations one makes, I care not whether it be a
+fight with the Indians or with one's own weaknesses. There are other
+rifles from which you may make a selection," Boone added.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir, but I think I prefer this. I have made it myself and have
+tested and tried it every way. I have chosen a name for it."</p>
+
+<p>"What have you named it?" inquired Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"Singing Susan."</p>
+
+<p>"And you have sufficient bullets?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"And powder?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," responded Peleg. As he spoke he<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span> showed a huge powder-horn
+which he had polished and upon which he had carved the following dire warning:</p>
+
+<div class="poem"><div class="stanza">
+<div>"Ye mann what steles this powd<sup>r</sup> horne,</div>
+<div>Will go to helle as sure as y<sup>re</sup> borne."</div>
+</div></div>
+
+<p>The scout slowly read the inscription and, shaking his head, said: "I
+think I should leave that horn behind. There are plenty more which are
+not so sharp in their warnings."</p>
+
+<p>"But it is true, isn't it? If a man steals, isn't that the place where he belongs?"</p>
+
+<p>Apparently the thoughts of the great leader were withdrawn to other
+matters, for, ignoring the question, he said: "Peleg, we shall start
+before sunrise to-morrow morning. These June days are long and we do not
+want to lose any of the hours."</p>
+
+<p>"Shall we stop at night?"</p>
+
+<p>"That will depend much upon events. There may be times when we shall be
+glad to have the night protect us in our advance, and when it will be
+necessary for us to hide in the daytime. There are some things to see to
+before we go. One of these is that you must learn how to follow my trail."</p>
+
+<p>Peleg's eager manner expressed a question. His interest was keen.</p>
+
+<p>"If you are lost or are not able to find me I shall<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span> mark my trail with
+five stones placed like this." As he spoke the pioneer arranged five
+small stones in a semicircle on the ground near him. "You may expect to
+find these near the springs or at the places where I may cross the
+rivers. We must plan to keep closely together, but I am referring to
+this in case anything should happen to separate us. There are some other
+things about which I shall tell you after we have started. I wish I felt
+a little more confidence in that rifle," he added. "What did you say you have named it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Singing Susan."</p>
+
+<p>Boone said no more, and Peleg withdrew beyond the border of the
+settlement to make additional tests of his newly made rifle. Apparently
+these were satisfactory, for at three o'clock the following morning when
+he and Daniel Boone departed from the little settlement it was "Singing
+Susan," which Peleg was carrying over his shoulder.</p>
+
+<p>As yet the boy did not know whither he and his comrade were going. Only
+in a general way had Boone explained how long they might be absent.
+However, it was clear to the mind of Peleg that the scout was moved by a
+feeling that he was engaging in an enterprise from which there was to be
+no turning back, and that he felt that he needed some one to accompany him.</p>
+
+<p>To be near Boone was sufficient reward in itself,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</a></span> and buoyantly the
+young man carried himself as they moved in single file through the
+passes of the mountains. It was seldom that either spoke, and it was
+agreed that their guns were not to be fired except when it was necessary to secure game.</p>
+
+<p>Many miles had been covered when the two hunters decided to rest, for
+night was at hand. Selecting a sheltered spot near a swiftly running
+brook, they were protected from peril from the rear of their camp by the
+huge walls of the hill which rose abruptly behind it. A fire was kindled
+with Peleg's flint and tinder and allowed to burn only long enough to
+roast the loin of deer which had been secured by a shot from the scout's
+rifle early that morning.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as their supper had been eaten the fire was extinguished. The
+June air was warm and it was with a sense of comfort that Peleg seated
+himself upon the ground with his back against the protecting cliff. His
+companion had seldom spoken to him throughout their journey, and the
+pace at which they had been travelling had told more severely upon the
+younger hunter than upon Boone. Yet there was a feeling of deep comfort
+in Peleg's heart. The stars were twinkling in the sky, the gentle breeze
+that swept the treetops was softly musical in its sound, and beyond all
+these was the pleasure of being in the company of the man to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</a></span> whom he
+looked up as to no one else. All combined to make the young hunter happy.</p>
+
+<p>To his surprise he found that Daniel Boone was willing to talk more
+freely than he ever had known him to do before.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," Daniel Boone was saying, "my grandfather came from England and
+settled in Pennsylvania. He had nine sons and ten daughters. My father
+he called Squire. I do not know just why, unless it was because he was
+more active than his brothers. I was born on the right bank of the
+Delaware in Bucks County, Pennsylvania, in 1734. Not long after my
+father married he moved to another part of the colony, and when I was a
+little lad he took us overland through Maryland and Virginia and settled
+at the headwaters of the Yadkin."</p>
+
+<p>"A fine place, too, that is," said Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"Indeed it is," assented the scout, "but it was not for me. Somehow I
+seem destined to find the way for others rather than to be able to enjoy
+much of quiet and rest myself. It was on the first day of May, 1769,
+that I left my family in quest of the country of Kantuckee. Five men
+travelled with me, all of us relying upon the reports of John Finley,
+one of our number, who had been trading with the Indians there. He
+averred that he had found the most beautiful of all lands. I<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span> shall not
+soon forget the seventh day of June that year, when John Finley and I,
+from the top of an eminence, looked out upon the beautiful land of
+Kantuckee. Buffalo were more numerous than are cattle in the
+settlements. They fed upon the grass that grows marvellously on those
+plains. We saw hundreds in a drove, and the numbers about the salt
+springs were amazing. On the 22d of December, John Stuart and I were
+having a pleasing ramble. We had passed through a great forest and were
+amazed at the variety of the blossoms we saw. As for game, why it almost
+seemed to seek us out instead of making us the hunters. It was near
+sunset and we were near the Kantuckee River, when a number of Indians
+rushed out of a canebrake and made us their prisoners."</p>
+
+<p>"How long did they keep you?"</p>
+
+<p>"Seven days. We did our utmost not to show any uneasiness, and gradually
+they became less suspicious of us. But in the dead of the night of that
+seventh day, when we were lying by a large fire and all the others were
+asleep, I gently shook my companion, whispered my plan, and we left the
+camp without disturbing any one. My brother and another man, who had
+started after us to explore the country, found the camp of our party,
+but it had been plundered and the other men in our band had fled.
+Strangely enough, we soon<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span> came upon one another in the forest. You may
+be sure that this meeting with my brother was most welcome. The man who
+was with him, however, soon went on a private excursion and was attacked
+and killed by wolves. John Stuart was killed by the Indians. There we
+were in a howling wilderness, hundreds of miles from our families and
+surrounded by Indians who were determined to kill us. All through that
+winter we had no trouble, however, and on the first of the following May
+my brother went home for a new recruit of horses and ammunition, leaving
+me alone. I had been without bread for a year; I had no salt nor sugar,
+and not even a horse or a dog for company.</p>
+
+<p>"I knew I must not lament, however, and accordingly I undertook a tour
+which I thought might be of benefit to others who, I had no doubt, soon
+would follow me. Often I heard the hideous yells of the savages
+searching for me. On the 27th of July my brother returned, and together
+we went as far as the Cumberland River, scouting through that part of
+the country and giving names to the different rivers. In the following
+March I went back to my family, determined to bring them as soon as
+possible, even at the risk of life and fortune, to make a home in
+Kantuckee, which I esteemed a second Paradise.</p>
+
+<p>"You know, my lad, how I sold my land on the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</a></span> Yadkin and disposed of
+such goods as we could not carry with us, and how with five other
+families we started on the 25th of September to journey to Kantuckee.
+You were one of us at that time.</p>
+
+<p>"You well remember also what occurred on the 10th of October, when our
+company was attacked by the Indians, how I lost my boy, and how we all
+journeyed back to the settlement on the Clinch River."</p>
+
+<p>"And now?" queried Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"And now," answered Daniel Boone, "you and I are to journey to the Falls
+of the Ohio. Our surveyors there are in great peril from the Indians. We
+shall, without doubt, find ourselves often in danger, and I am selecting
+you to accompany me because already I have found that I could rely upon
+you. You have been quick to learn what I have taught you, and I do not
+believe you will easily be taken unawares, because you have already
+learned how to prepare yourself for any event. Any one who has not
+learned that lesson can never become a successful man, to say nothing of
+succeeding as a scout."</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER VIII</h2>
+
+<h3>PELEG'S ENCOUNTER</h3>
+
+<p>The following morning dawned clear and warm, and as no signs of Indians
+had been seen the two scouts renewed their journey with lighter hearts.
+At least a part of Peleg's fear was gone, though it was impossible for
+him to determine by anything his companion said whether or not he shared his feeling.</p>
+
+<p>Without an open declaration of war, the Shawnees, Wyandottes, Cherokees,
+and Delawares were working more or less together at this time and were
+untiring in their determination to prevent the whites from entering and
+establishing homes in the region which the Indians believed was entirely their own.</p>
+
+<p>The second day passed, and the progress of the two scouts was unbroken.
+Still Daniel Boone was using great caution, forbidding the discharge of
+guns except when food was required, and insisting upon the fire being
+extinguished as soon as the meals had been prepared.</p>
+
+<p>On the fourth day of their journey the anxiety<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span> of the great scout
+became more manifest. "I have seen some things," he explained to his
+companion, "which are troubling me."</p>
+
+<p>"Are the Indians near us?"</p>
+
+<p>"I have been convinced that they have been near us all our journey, but
+I fear now they are approaching still nearer. My suggestion is that we
+separate, and I will go to the south and you to the north of the path we
+would have taken and meet again in our camp here a few hours from this
+time. We may throw them off our trail."</p>
+
+<p>"Shall we start now?" inquired Peleg, rising at once as he spoke.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twill be well to do so. The sun is now two hours high, and we must
+both be back here in camp by noon."</p>
+
+<p>As he finished speaking, Daniel Boone departed silently into the forest
+and his example was promptly followed by the younger scout.</p>
+
+<p>The young hunter had been gone almost an hour and as yet had discovered
+only a few signs of the presence of their enemies. He was near the bank
+of a stream some twenty feet or more in width when, glancing behind him,
+he saw two Indians swiftly approaching.</p>
+
+<p>His first impulse was to fire upon them, but holding his rifle in
+readiness he waited for them to come nearer. Suddenly one of the red men
+raised<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span> his gun and fired at Peleg. The young scout heard the bullet
+whistling close to his head, and, instantly taking aim, returned the
+fire, causing one of the Indians to fall forward upon his face. The
+other warrior, however, was armed, and was swiftly approaching.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg's first impulse to use his gun as a club and strive to defend
+himself was quickly abandoned when in some consternation he became aware
+of the size of the advancing red man. Never before had he seen an Indian
+so large as the one who was now approaching. Not merely was the man
+tall, but his breadth of shoulder and every movement alike showed the
+great strength which he possessed.</p>
+
+<p>Thinking this was a case where discretion was the better part of valor,
+Peleg darted swiftly into the woods. As he did so his enemy fired at
+him, but fortunately the boy escaped unhurt. He ran at his utmost speed,
+but as he glanced over his shoulder he saw that his pursuer was speedily
+gaining upon him. Peleg Barnes was considered the best wrestler and the
+strongest of the younger men in the little settlement on the Clinch
+River. He now was more than six feet tall and the muscles in his arms
+and legs were marvellously developed. If the man behind him had not been
+of such gigantic and ferocious aspect, the young hunter would have<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span>
+ventured a single combat; but Peleg had decided that flight was the safer course.</p>
+
+<p>For several hundred yards he ran at his utmost speed, but every glance
+backward showed him that, swiftly as he was running, his pursuer was
+steadily gaining upon him.</p>
+
+<p>The woods through which they were speeding consisted almost entirely of
+small trees, few of which were large enough to provide protection or even shelter.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg had passed a large walnut tree, which he had noticed standing like
+a patriarch among the surrounding saplings, and suddenly he paused in
+his flight and ran back ten steps to gain it. This action of the young
+scout plainly startled the Indian, who halted a moment, thereby giving
+his adversary the advantage of reaching the shelter he was seeking.</p>
+
+<p>If Peleg's gun had been loaded the solution of his troubles would not
+have been difficult. As it was, the huge warrior resumed his rapid
+advance. Again Peleg fled, but he was well aware that sooner or later he
+must stop and strive to defend himself by using his rifle as a club.</p>
+
+<p>The moment for such action soon came, and, abruptly halting, Peleg
+seized his rifle by the barrel and raised it above his head. The Indian
+dropped his empty gun and advanced upon his victim with his tomahawk.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span></p><p>Instead of waiting to receive the attack, Peleg suddenly leaped forward
+and struck with the stock of his gun. The warrior at the same moment
+whirled his tomahawk and threw it.</p>
+
+<p>In a manner both blows took effect. The stock of the rifle was
+dislocated by the blow which Peleg struck the Indian's skull, and at the
+same time the vicious blow of the tomahawk was deflected by the barrel
+of the rifle, though it cut deeply into Peleg's hand between his thumb
+and forefinger as it glanced.</p>
+
+<p>As the Indian attempted to draw his knife, Peleg seized him and together
+both fell to the ground.</p>
+
+<p>For a time the efforts of the Indian were by no means violent, and Peleg
+was hopeful that the blow which the warrior had received had partly
+disabled him; but it was soon manifest that the Indian had recovered,
+for, wrapping his long arms around Peleg's body, he pressed him to his
+breast with well-nigh crushing force.</p>
+
+<div class="center"><a name="i095.jpg" id="i095.jpg"></a><img src="images/i095.jpg" width='485' height='700' alt="The Indian had been able to draw his knife and struck at
+her again and again, while the bear held him in one of her most fervent hugs" /></div>
+
+<h4>"The Indian had been able to draw his knife and struck<br />at
+her again and again, while the bear held him in one<br />of her most fervent hugs"</h4>
+
+<p>Peleg, powerful young scout that he was, had never felt an embrace like
+that of the huge warrior. Relaxing his efforts for a moment, he
+endeavoured to convince his enemy that his strength was well-nigh gone.
+The Indian apparently was deceived by his trick and made an attempt to
+reach for Peleg's gun, which had fallen on the ground nearby. The young
+hunter at the same moment made<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span> a sudden and desperate attempt to free
+himself from the arms of the giant.</p>
+
+<p>Success crowned his efforts, but before he was able to escape from the
+place the Indian leaped to his feet, and, seizing Peleg with one hand
+and grasping the collar of his hunting shirt with the other, he drew his
+enemy steadily to his hip, and then by a sudden effort threw him at
+least ten feet into the air, much as he might have tossed a little
+child. Peleg fell upon his back at the edge of the stream, but before
+the savage could spring upon him, he was again upon his feet, and, stung
+with rage as well as desperation, instantly, and with a violence which
+for a time made up for his lack of strength, he renewed his attack upon
+his gigantic enemy.</p>
+
+<p>The Indian, however, closed again with Peleg and hurled him to the
+ground, though the young hunter still doggedly clung to his foe.
+Together they rolled into the water, where the struggle continued
+unabated for a time, as each did his utmost to thrust and hold the head
+of his opponent beneath the surface.</p>
+
+<p>It soon was plain that the Indian was unused to such long-continued and
+violent exertion, and Peleg felt sure that his enemy was weaker than
+when the struggle began.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly the young hunter by a supreme effort seized the warrior by his
+scalp-lock and thrust his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span> head under the water, where he succeeded in
+holding it until the struggles of the Indian became faint and convinced
+Peleg that the contest was ended.</p>
+
+<p>The cunning warrior, however, had been shamming, and as soon as Peleg
+released his hold he quickly regained his foothold and in turn forced
+Peleg under the water. In the struggle which followed both contestants
+were carried into the current of the stream beyond their depth, and were
+compelled to let go their hold and swim for their lives.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg was the first to gain the shore. A low hill, partly wooded, was
+directly before him, and he ran as swiftly as his strength permitted up
+the long, sloping ridge. In a brief time he discovered that the Indian
+was gaining upon him so rapidly that all hope of escape departed.</p>
+
+<p>At that moment the young scout saw at his side a large tree, which in
+some storm had been torn up by its roots and was lying prostrate on the ground.</p>
+
+<p>Instantly he ran along the side of the tree, aware that his enemy was
+following upon the opposite side. Doubtless the red man expected to
+seize him when the huge roots of the tree had been gained.</p>
+
+<p>On the warm ground at the roots of the tree, all unknown to the pursuer
+and the pursued, a huge she-bear was lying with her two cubs. The Indian
+was the first to arrive at the spot, and as he<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span> darted around the roots
+the savage animal with a snarl of rage instantly sprang upon him. The
+growls of the bear and the cries of the warrior instantly produced a
+deafening uproar.</p>
+
+<p>The Indian had been able to draw his knife, and struck at her again and
+again while the bear held him in one of her most fervent hugs. Peleg,
+without waiting to learn the result of the startling and noisy contest,
+instantly turned and ran back over the way he had come.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER IX</h2>
+
+<h3>AT THE SPRINGS</h3>
+
+<p>The young scout was breathless and exhausted when at last he arrived
+safely at the camp. His appearance was such that no explanation was
+required by Daniel Boone, who was already there. He instantly noticed
+the wound which Peleg had received on his hand and how blood-stained his
+clothing was. He asked no questions, however, and at once attended to
+the wants of his companion.</p>
+
+<p>In a short time Peleg had recovered sufficiently to enable him to relate
+the story of the adventures which had befallen him.</p>
+
+<p>"You have lost Singing Susan?" suggested Boone.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg nodded in response, but did not speak.</p>
+
+<p>"Can you find the place where you dropped her?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"And the place where the Indian was hugged by the bear?"</p>
+
+<p>Again Peleg nodded.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span></p><p>"If you will tell me where the places are I might go to both of them."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," said Peleg quickly, "but I shall go with you."</p>
+
+<p>Boone said no more and busied himself in arranging the small packs which
+the two scouts were carrying. It was not long before Peleg declared he
+was ready to accompany his friend, and without a further word they
+departed from their camp.</p>
+
+<p>It was not difficult for the young hunter to find his way to the place
+where the Indian had been seized by the angry mother-bear. Cautiously
+approaching, both men peered intently about them, but they were unable
+to discover any signs of either the warrior or the animal that had
+attacked him. When they advanced to the spot where the tree had been
+uptorn by the roots they found an abundance of footprints of the bear
+and also of the moccasined Indian, but that was all.</p>
+
+<p>"They both got away," said Boone at last.</p>
+
+<p>"Or ate each other up," suggested Peleg with a smile.</p>
+
+<p>"We will look for Singing Susan. You lead the way, Peleg."</p>
+
+<p>Wearied as Peleg was by his recent contest, he nevertheless responded
+promptly, and in a brief time the hunters arrived at the border of the
+stream<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span> near which Peleg had been compelled to drop his rifle. When he
+had cast it from him he had tossed it into the nearby bushes, dimly
+thinking that if by chance he should escape he might return and find the
+weapon which he prized so highly. A part of the scout's teachings
+already had taken effect in this forethought of his young comrade. To be
+prepared for any emergency was an essential part of life in the woods.
+As they drew near the spot, Peleg was thinking of the great lesson he
+had learned from Boone. He ran to the bushes, pushed aside the brush and
+drew forth his gun with some pride. A smile lighted the face of Boone as
+he nodded his head in approval of the forethought of his young friend,
+and advancing, he extended his hand to inspect the weapon.</p>
+
+<p>"What happened to the gun?" he inquired, as he marked the condition of the stock.</p>
+
+<p>"I struck the skull of the Indian."</p>
+
+<p>"'Twas a hard blow, son, and I have slight doubt the Indian's head is aching."</p>
+
+<p>"If it had not been for that, I should not be here to tell you about it now."</p>
+
+<p>"No one can say about that. You <i>are</i> here, Peleg, and we must act upon
+that which <i>is</i> rather than upon what might have been. Indeed, I have
+long since learned to accept my life with that understanding. I had
+nothing to say about when I<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span> should come into the world, and I have as
+little to say about when I shall leave it. The only part I can guide is
+that which is in between. I can fix this stock," he added, "and soon we
+shall have Susan singing again. We will push forward a little farther
+and find some place where we can camp for the night. A good sleep will
+do you more good than anything else, though first I must attend again to
+that hand of yours."</p>
+
+<p>Selecting a linen bandage, a small supply of which Boone always carried
+with him on his expeditions, he gathered some leaves of the witch-hazel
+plant and, pounding them to a pulp, spread them upon the cloth.
+Thoroughly washing the wounded hand of Peleg, he then bound the cloth
+and pulp of the leaves upon the wound, saying as he did so: "In a week
+you will be as good as new."</p>
+
+<p>As soon as this task had been accomplished the journey was resumed,
+although only two miles was covered before Boone was convinced that his
+companion was too weary to proceed farther.</p>
+
+<p>The following day, although Peleg's hand still was sore from his wound,
+he found little difficulty in carrying his rifle, for the great scout
+had been successful in restoring Singing Susan to her former efficient condition.</p>
+
+<p>Increasing signs of the presence of the Indians were seen, and once
+Boone turned aside from his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span> pathway when an old canoe was found, which
+with a little effort he was able to patch up.</p>
+
+<p>"I am fearful of the water," he said, "for I cannot swim. Can you, son?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," replied Peleg, glancing up in astonishment at this
+acknowledgment of his friend's one weakness.</p>
+
+<p>"It is well you can," said Boone with a smile. "I never was able to get
+the knack. You will have to be the leader now. We can go down this
+stream five or six miles, perhaps more, before we strike across the country again."</p>
+
+<p>"How is it," inquired Peleg, "that you find your way through the
+forests? I am never afraid of being lost in any of the woods where I
+have been before, but I should not be sure of myself in trying to go to
+the Falls of the Ohio, although even now we must be within a few days of the place."</p>
+
+<p>Boone smiled as he replied: "There are some things which a man can learn
+and some which must be born in him to help him in the forests. A man who
+can sing, if he will go to the singing schools faithfully, may become a
+better singer; but if he has no voice to begin with, there is little use
+in his saying <i>do, ra, me, fa, so, la, si, do</i> over and over again. So
+it is in the woods. I watch the birds, the trees, and the leaves, as
+well as the lay of the land, but beyond all that there is a part<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</a></span> which
+I cannot explain. It must be my nature, just the same as it is for a
+fish to live in the water or a bee to seek the flowers."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think I ever can learn?"</p>
+
+<p>"I do, son. I have marked you often and know that you have the ability
+as well as the will to learn."</p>
+
+<p>Signs of the presence of Indians increased as the two scouts proceeded.
+It seemed to Boone that the Indians were moving eastward, a matter which
+promised ill for the scattered settlements on the border.</p>
+
+<p>However, the days passed, and Boone and his companion evaded their foes,
+and on the twenty-ninth day arrived at the Falls of the Ohio, whither
+Governor Dunmore had directed them to go.</p>
+
+<p>Only once had Daniel Boone referred to the purpose of his journey, and
+then he had explained to Peleg how the Governor had become exceedingly
+anxious concerning the safety of the surveyors. Cut off as they were in
+their faraway camp from the help of others, they also were unaware that
+the hunters were bringing word of the increasing restlessness among the
+Indians. Some of the scattered settlers recently had been killed by the
+angry tribes, and the rumours and reports all had it that the Shawnees,
+Delawares, and Wyandottes were becoming more and more savage in their
+attacks<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</a></span> upon the whites, upon whom they now looked with deadly hatred
+because they were making homes in their land.</p>
+
+<p>The coming of Daniel Boone and his young companion aroused much interest
+among the band of surveyors whose headquarters were at the Falls of the
+Ohio. Several log houses had been erected by them there, and the little
+settlement bore more evidences of refinement than one usually found on
+the frontier. There were many questions asked and a deep interest shown
+in the doings of the great world beyond, with which the lonely men had
+had nothing to do for many long months.</p>
+
+<p>When, however, Daniel Boone explained the purpose of his coming, most of
+the men received his word with incredulity. They acknowledged that
+occasionally they had seen a few Indians, but not yet had they been
+molested, nor had any threats been made against their remaining where they were.</p>
+
+<p>To such statements the great scout made no reply except to repeat the
+reason for his coming, and the anxiety of Governor Dunmore in their behalf.</p>
+
+<p>"We will sleep over it and let you know to-morrow," declared one of the
+men laughingly. "You don't think anything will happen to-night, do you?"</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span></p><p>"I am willing to wait until the morrow," said Boone quietly. "You must
+decide, however, within two days what you will do."</p>
+
+<p>There was one young member of the surveyors' party who apparently had
+not been long in the new world. He explained to Peleg, to whom he was
+drawn because they were nearly of the same age, that he had come to
+America to make a fortune. "I am the youngest son of Earl Russell. In
+England the younger boys do not have many opportunities, because all the
+property is left to the oldest son, so I have come to America, and hope
+to secure for myself some great tracts of land over here. They may not
+be valuable to-day or in the near future, but some time, as surely as
+the sun rises, they will be of great worth. You must come with me," he
+continued, "early to-morrow morning to Fontainebleau."</p>
+
+<p>"Where?" demanded Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"Fontainebleau."</p>
+
+<p>"Where is that, and what is it?" demanded the young scout.</p>
+
+<p>"It is a name we have given to a spring about a mile from here on the
+opposite side of the river. Five or six of us go there every morning and
+drink the waters. We have an idea that they are better than the waters
+of the real Fontainebleau."</p>
+
+<p>"Where is that?"</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span></p><p>The young Englishman laughed as he said: "'Tis plain that you have
+never travelled in France."</p>
+
+<p>"I never did," acknowledged Peleg. "I have travelled in the woods,
+though, and before we get back to the settlement some of you may be glad
+that Daniel Boone and I have had that experience."</p>
+
+<p>The young Englishman again laughed, but made no reply.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning, however, he, together with six other men, stopped at the
+little cabin in which Daniel Boone and Peleg had been spending the
+night, and in response to his invitation the young scout joined the
+party when they explained that they were going to Fontainebleau to drink
+of its marvellous waters.</p>
+
+<p>The carelessness and indifference of the men somewhat alarmed Peleg, who
+was still under the influence of his recent companion, the scout. Daniel
+Boone had impressed upon the boy the need of continual vigilance and
+silence. No one could say when danger might suddenly present itself.
+Frequently he recalled the escape he had had through the shot which
+James Boone in the preceding year had fired at the panther crouching
+above his head. This always impressed the young woodsman afresh with the
+need of continual care. Nevertheless he enjoyed the conversation of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span>
+men with whom he was walking, though he himself seldom spoke.</p>
+
+<p>When the little party arrived at the spring the waters caused Peleg to
+express his disgust. Heavily charged with sulphur and various other
+chemicals, the taste was one that did not appeal to the young scout. His
+companions, however, professed to enjoy the water, which was
+marvellously clear and sparkling, and drank deeply, casting themselves
+prostrate upon the ground as they did so, and drinking from the spring.</p>
+
+<p>Three of them were in this position and the other four were urging their
+companions to make haste, when suddenly wild yells arose that seemed to
+come from every direction at once. Before the startled men were fully
+aware of what was occurring a band of Indians rushed from the woods,
+some armed with rifles and others using their bows and arrows.</p>
+
+<p>Only part of the little band of surveyors had been armed when they had
+started that morning from the settlement for the spring at
+Fontainebleau. The young scout, however, who was mindful of the
+teachings of his leader, had brought Singing Susan with him. As Peleg
+was about to fire, an arrow pierced the young Englishman between the
+shoulder blades, and with a loud cry he fell to the ground.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER X</h2>
+
+<h3>A TERRIFIED BAND</h3>
+
+<p>It was Peleg's first experience in taking command of a party. The
+helplessness of the surveyors, however, and the fact that they all
+turned to him for directions, at once decided the young scout to lead,
+and he well knew there was no time to be lost.</p>
+
+<p>In his position he was aware also that the Englishman was in dire
+distress, and apparently he was the only one who could aid him. The
+decision to act had come to the young scout promptly, and he had almost
+instinctively raised Singing Susan to his shoulder and fired at the
+Indians, whom he could see darting from tree to tree and plainly trying
+to come nearer the spring.</p>
+
+<p>Before he reloaded his gun Peleg turned to his companions, two of whom
+were already disappearing among the trees in the distance.</p>
+
+<p>"Come here," he said in a low voice. "Help me with this man."</p>
+
+<p>Two of the young surveyors obeyed his word, and with all speed the trio
+carried the body of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span> their fallen comrade within the shelter of the
+forest. When Peleg looked down into the face of the suffering man he was
+convinced that his wound was fatal.</p>
+
+<p>It would never do, however, to leave the man in his misery. Turning to
+his companions he called: "Retreat cautiously! Use the tree trunks for
+shelter! Take this man with you!"</p>
+
+<p>While speaking, the young scout hastily reloaded his gun. This task
+completed, he turned once more to his companions and said: "Take the man
+now and go! Do as I tell you! I shall bring up the rear and do my best
+to stave off the Indians. They are sure to follow us, though I do not
+think there are more than eight or ten in the whole band."</p>
+
+<p>Three of the men who were members of the party which had visited the
+spring had brought their guns with them. Two of these weapons were in
+the hands of the men who were to carry the young surveyor back to the settlement.</p>
+
+<p>Seizing these weapons and making certain that all were loaded and
+primed, Peleg darted behind a huge maple, from which he was able to see
+that the Indians were stealthily approaching. No cry had been heard from
+them since the loud whoop they had given when first they had darted into
+the open space and fired upon the unsuspecting men.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span></p><p>Peleg waited until the men who were carrying the surveyor had had an
+opportunity to withdraw to a considerable distance among the trees, and
+as he saw the red men were coming nearer he abruptly fired upon them. He
+first discharged Singing Susan, and then, before the smoke had cleared,
+he fired the other two guns in quick succession.</p>
+
+<p>A low exclamation of pleasure escaped his lips when he saw that his
+shots had taken sufficient effect to cause the Indians hastily to
+disappear from sight and to send forth several of their noisy challenges.</p>
+
+<p>Taking advantage of the favouring opportunity, the young scout reloaded
+his own rifle and, casting the other two guns from him, ran at his
+utmost speed in the direction in which his recent companions had disappeared.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as he had overtaken them he was aware that the Indians were
+again closing in upon the retreating band. He was startled to find that
+the red men were moving in the form of a semicircle. By this means they
+doubtless hoped to cut off the men before they could regain the safety of the settlement.</p>
+
+<p>Bidding his friends make haste with their burden, Peleg once more fired
+upon the yelling Indians. His main purpose was to try to impress upon
+their minds the fact that the retreating band was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span> armed and prepared to
+defend itself. He was more and more disturbed, however, by his
+increasing fear that their retreat would be cut off, and all three might
+fall into the hands of the yelling savages.</p>
+
+<p>Several times the same maneuvers were followed, Peleg bidding his
+friends, who still were carrying the young surveyor, to precede him on
+their way back to the settlement, while he himself remained behind to
+fire Singing Susan at such of the Indians as exposed themselves. After
+each shot he hastily reloaded his rifle and withdrew to join his companions.</p>
+
+<p>After his third shot Peleg was almost persuaded that escape was
+impossible. The semicircle had been extended until he was fearful that
+if the warriors should rush upon them they would enclose the three white men.</p>
+
+<p>Still the boy was determined to do his utmost to help the fallen
+surveyor and protect the two men who were bearing their unconscious
+comrade through the forest. In his zeal the young scout had almost
+forgotten his own peril. His attention was divided between the
+retreating party and the Indians who were pressing so swiftly upon them.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly Peleg said to himself, as he heard the report of a rifle far
+away, "There is Daniel Boone! If he and the other surveyors have come
+out to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span> help us we may stand a little better chance of getting out of
+this alive."</p>
+
+<p>The report of the rifle which had been heard by Peleg was speedily
+followed by the sound of other guns. Convinced by what he had heard that
+help was at hand, Peleg regretted the loss of the guns which he had cast
+aside in his fear that they might hinder him and his friends in their
+efforts to withdraw from the spring. Soon the reports of the guns were
+repeated, and as Peleg sent forth his wild halloo he was answered by a
+cry which he recognized as coming from Daniel Boone himself.</p>
+
+<p>It was not long before Peleg saw the scout approaching through the
+forest. The silent man was thoroughly aroused. Usually quiet in his
+manner and deliberate in his actions, it now seemed as if his every
+nerve was tingling in his excitement. Sheltered behind nearby trees,
+Peleg watched the approaching surveyors, some of whom were loading their
+rifles rapidly, while others were firing at the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>It was soon evident that the Indians, disheartened by this fresh attack,
+were withdrawing into the forest.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as Daniel Boone saw Peleg and the two men approaching with their
+burden, his plan instantly changed. Summoning the young scout, he said,
+"Send all the rest of them back to the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span> settlement as fast as they can
+go. You and I, lad, are the only ones prepared, so we are the only ones
+who can protect these men."</p>
+
+<p>"Will the Indians leave?" inquired Peleg in a low voice.</p>
+
+<p>"For a time, yes," answered Daniel Boone. "If the surveyors make haste
+they will be able to get back to the settlement. You and I, lad, must
+try to hold these Indians off until our friends have had time to carry
+back the man who was shot. Was he killed?"</p>
+
+<p>"No. He was alive when I saw him last, but I do not think he will live long."</p>
+
+<p>"Was it an arrow?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir."</p>
+
+<p>Daniel Boone nodded his head and made no further reply. Darting from
+tree to tree, the two scouts stealthily made their way through the
+forest in the direction in which their friends had gone.</p>
+
+<p>Apparently there was no longer any peril of an immediate attack by the
+Indians. None of them appeared within sight, and the sound of their wild
+cries no longer was heard.</p>
+
+<p>Alternately stopping and retreating, Daniel Boone and his young
+companion at last regained the shelter of the settlement at the Falls of the Ohio.</p>
+
+<p>The little houses of logs were well protected, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</a></span> as there was an
+abundance of ammunition as well as of food on hand, the great scout said
+to Peleg: "We could hold out here two months if it should be necessary."</p>
+
+<p>"But we are not to stay here, are we?" inquired Peleg anxiously.</p>
+
+<p>"No. We must leave just as soon as we can do so safely."</p>
+
+<p>The conversation was interrupted by the entrance of the surveyors in a
+body. Fear, and even panic, was manifest in the face of every one. The
+unexpected attack upon their comrade had confirmed the warning which
+Governor Dunmore had sent by the two scouts, and not only did no one
+want to remain, but all were eager to be gone at once.</p>
+
+<p>"We must start to-night," said MacHale, the oldest of the party. "We
+must not remain!"</p>
+
+<p>"Not to-night," said Daniel Boone quietly.</p>
+
+<p>"Why not?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is as necessary for us to know our way as it is for us to retreat."</p>
+
+<p>"But you found your way here! Why can you not find it when you go back?"</p>
+
+<p>"I can," replied Boone quietly. "It is not for myself I fear. I would
+not be the leader of a party unfamiliar with the woods and facing what
+we must if we leave here in the night. You must be<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</a></span> prepared to start as
+soon as the gray of dawn appears."</p>
+
+<p>"But we want to go before!" persisted the surveyor.</p>
+
+<p>Boone quietly shook his head and gave no further explanation. The matter
+was decided, and plainly the scout thought there was nothing more to be
+said. Ignoring the anger as well as the alarm of the surveyors, the
+great scout at once busied himself in preparing for the departure which
+would not take place until the following morning. The services of Boone,
+however, were not required in caring for the wounded surveyor, because
+life had fled before the party regained the settlement.</p>
+
+<p>There was a hasty burial in the dim light, and then Boone bade his
+companions obtain such sleep as they could, he himself preparing to
+serve as guard throughout the night.</p>
+
+<p>At last, however, he consented to the pleadings of Peleg and permitted
+the lad to keep watch during the earlier hours. As soon as this had been
+decided Boone cast himself upon the ground and, apparently confiding in
+the ability of Peleg to protect the camp, was soon sleeping soundly.</p>
+
+<p>Just before daybreak the entire band departed from the Falls of the
+Ohio. In advance went Daniel Boone as guide, while Peleg was to serve as the rear guard.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</a></span></p><p>"It is a long race," the scout explained to his companions. "We have
+four hundred miles to cross before we arrive at the settlement on the
+Clinch River. Our safety depends largely upon the promptness with which
+you do my bidding. If there is one of you who is not willing to obey me
+in every particular I shall greatly prefer to have him go by himself."</p>
+
+<p>Every member of the party, however, assured the scout that his word was
+to be law and that every one would implicitly follow his directions
+throughout the long journey. When daylight came it was manifest in the
+faces of the surveyors that the terror of the forest was still strong
+upon them. Every man was armed, and every one carried a small pack upon his back.</p>
+
+<p>It was impossible to make as good time on the return as had been made by
+Boone and Peleg in the journey to the Falls. However, both hunters were
+urgent and seldom stopped even when heavy storms came upon them.</p>
+
+<p>At last, when the long journey had been safely made, and the settlement
+on the Clinch River had been gained, the spirits of the surveyors
+revived, although they were free to declare that it was the care and
+wisdom of Boone and his young companion which had brought them safely
+through the wilderness.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</a></span></p><p>Nearly eight hundred miles had been covered by the two scouts in their
+long journey, and only sixty-two days had been required to complete it.</p>
+
+<p>Boone and his companion, however, were not to be permitted to rest long.
+Less than a week had elapsed after their return when Boone called Peleg
+aside one morning and explained to him that a new project, and one still
+more perilous than that through which they had safely come, was now to be undertaken.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XI</h2>
+
+<h3>THE ADVENTURE OF THE SCHOOLMASTER</h3>
+
+<p>"Peleg," said the great scout, "Governor Dunmore has sent another request to me."</p>
+
+<p>"Has he?" inquired Peleg eagerly.</p>
+
+<p>In spite of the perils and labours of the long journey which had been
+made to the Falls of the Ohio, Peleg was eager to be with Daniel Boone
+wherever he might be. The boy's admiration for his friend had increased
+with every passing day. The coolness and calmness of the great scout,
+his gentleness and consideration of others, his fearlessness in time of
+peril, the readiness with which he met every event, and above all the
+conviction which held him that he was divinely called to be a pathfinder
+for the coming generations, all had made a deep impression upon his
+young companion. Peleg was not without hope, too, that somehow he was
+coming to hold a place in the interest and affection of the man which
+once had been held by his son James.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," continued Boone thoughtfully, "the Governor has given me the
+command of three<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span> garrisons in the campaign which is to be made against
+the Shawnees."</p>
+
+<p>"When do you go?" queried Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"Immediately&mdash;that is, if I can persuade you to look after my family
+while I am absent. Israel is beginning to feel that he is almost old
+enough to take the place of his brother James, but I shall feel very
+much more at ease if I can go with the assurance that you will be
+looking out for the welfare of my wife and children."</p>
+
+<p>Striving to repress the disappointment which he felt at the words of his
+friend, Peleg said quietly, "You know, sir, that I shall be willing to
+do all in my power for you at any time. I do not know, but&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>The rare smile known only to his closest friends appeared for a moment
+on the strong face of the hunter as he shook his head and said: "Nay,
+Peleg, not this time. I fancy there will be other and perhaps greater
+work soon to be done, and in that you shall have your share. The time is
+coming when I hope to take my family again to that marvellous region I
+have found in Kantuckee. No land I have ever seen can compare with it.
+There I would live and there I would die. Meanwhile I must do my part in
+trying to make the lives of these hardly beset settlers a little safer."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span></p><p>"You may depend upon me to do my best," said Peleg cordially.</p>
+
+<p>"That is all I need to know, lad, and I shall be at ease while I am gone."</p>
+
+<p>The great scout immediately departed from the little shop which Peleg
+had built and in which he was accustomed to make or repair the various
+utensils used by the household of Daniel Boone. Here he had fashioned
+Singing Susan, and in this place he had rebuilt his gun after his return
+from the long journey he had made with the scout and in which, as we
+know, the rifle had suffered from the blow of the tomahawk which the
+huge Indian had hurled at him.</p>
+
+<p>A moment Peleg stood in the doorway watching the scout as he departed.
+The expression of the lad's face plainly showed his love and admiration
+for the man. The calm courage of Boone, softened as it was by his
+gentleness and guided by his prudence, was crowned by a marvellous
+modesty. His robust, somewhat uncouth body showed the great strength of
+the hunter, while it concealed his quickness. His manner was dignified,
+almost cold, so silent and quiet was he under ordinary circumstances.
+His face, however, homely though it was, was at times lighted by an
+expression that was exceedingly kind and tender. He seldom spoke, and
+almost never of himself, except in reply to direct questions.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span></p><p>Several times during the months that followed Daniel Boone returned to
+the little settlement on the Clinch, to visit his family and make
+certain of their safety. On each occasion he was warm in his expressions
+of gratitude to Peleg for the care which he was taking of those who were
+in a measure dependent upon him.</p>
+
+<p>There was work to be done every day, and the time passed rapidly for the
+young scout. One day, while he was busy in his little shop fashioning a
+new hunting knife, he was suddenly interrupted by the voice of Mrs.
+Boone. "Peleg! Peleg!" she called. "Come! Come!"</p>
+
+<p>Instantly running toward the log house, Peleg was met by the frightened
+woman, who, touching him on the arm, said: "Do you hear that sound? What is it?"</p>
+
+<p>Peleg turned abruptly toward the log schoolhouse and listened intently.
+From within the rude little building sounds such as he never before had
+heard were issuing. There seemed to be snarls and growls such as a wild
+beast might have emitted, and mingled with these were cries and screams
+as of some one in dire distress.</p>
+
+<p>A moment served to convince the young scout that either Schoolmaster
+Hargrave was in trouble, or some of the school children were in peril;
+and he darted into his little shop, returning with Singing Susan in his hands.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span></p><p>Swiftly as he ran toward the little building, which was not more than
+two hundred and fifty feet away, when he arrived he discovered that
+already several of the women from the settlement were there in advance
+of him, and with terror-stricken faces were looking first within the
+schoolhouse, and then to the road for help.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" demanded Peleg, as he ran to the door.</p>
+
+<p>"We do not know. We cannot tell," answered one of the women. "It may be
+evil spirits." She was almost hysterical, and convinced that he could
+obtain no information from her, Peleg pushed back the door and entered the room.</p>
+
+<p>The sight which greeted his eyes was more perplexing than startling. He
+saw Schoolmaster Hargrave leaning against one corner of the rude desk
+over which he presided, his face plainly expressing agony or fear; Peleg
+was unable to determine which feeling predominated.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it, Master Hargrave?" called the boy anxiously.</p>
+
+<p>In reply no articulate words were spoken; but a scream was followed by a
+groan, and in the midst of it all were also sounds like the gasping and
+snarling of some wild beast. The suffering of the man was manifest, but
+the cause was nowhere to be seen.</p>
+
+<p>There flashed into the mind of the young hunter<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span> the suggestion which
+Mistress Horan had made that evil spirits were the cause of the
+commotion. Such beliefs were not uncommon at the time, and although
+Peleg had never shared in the superstitions of the more ignorant people,
+nevertheless the mystery of the terrifying sounds, as well as the
+expression of Schoolmaster Hargrave's face, caused even the young hunter to hesitate.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it, Master Hargrave?" he shouted, for the uproar still continued.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh-h-h-h! Help me! Help me!"</p>
+
+<p>The cries of the schoolmaster were interrupted by strange noises, that
+still appeared to come from within the desk. Moans and cries and snarls,
+such as a wild beast might have emitted, were plainly to be
+distinguished in the midst of the uproar.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg had stopped a few feet in front of the desk, and in amazement was
+watching the man before him. Apparently the schoolmaster was struggling
+and striving with some unseen body or person, and with intense effort he
+had grasped both sides of the desk and held it with all his strength, as
+if he was fearful it might escape. In one hand he also held a
+cylindrical ruler.</p>
+
+<p>At this moment Mrs. Horan, who had gained sufficient courage to enter
+the building, advanced to Peleg's side. "I fear 'tis sick the man is,"
+she<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span> said. Turning to the schoolmaster she suggested in a loud whisper:
+"If 'tis colic you are suffering from, Master Hargrave, I would
+recommend&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>Her recommendation, however, was interrupted by a terrible scream from
+the suffering man.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis good for you," said the kind-hearted woman once more. The
+schoolmaster, however, still writhed as if in great agony and looked at
+the woman with an expression that might have quieted the tongue of a
+less courageous woman than Mrs. Horan.</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you cling to the desk in that manner?" demanded the woman.</p>
+
+<p>The agony in the expression of the schoolmaster's face seemed to be
+deepened by the question, but he made no response.</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter, Master Hargrave?" demanded the woman once more.
+"'Tis Peleg and I who are here to help you."</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly from the lips of the tormented man came the cry, "I have caught
+a cat!" Perspiration was streaming from his face, and his manner,
+expressive of fright, agony, and fatigue combined, made his words
+scarcely recognizable.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg glanced behind him and saw that many more of the neighbours had
+arrived and were curiously standing within the room at a safe distance
+from the desk, watching the actions of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span> man, who still writhed and
+twisted as he clung to the desk in front of him.</p>
+
+<p>The young hunter darted around the corner of the rude desk, to discover
+the cause of all the trouble. He first saw that a part of the clothing
+of the unfortunate man had been torn from his body, which was pressed
+against the edge of the desk. Closer inspection showed that the teeth of
+a huge "cat," or lynx, were fastened in the side of the schoolmaster.
+Bringing his gun to his shoulder the scout was about to fire, when the
+fear of Master Hargrave became stronger even than his sufferings.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't shoot! Don't shoot! You will hit me! Oh-h-h-h!" he screamed,
+still striving to hold his adversary against the edge of the desk.</p>
+
+<p>Disregarding the appeal, Peleg fired, and after a few confused
+struggles, the huge cat was lifeless.</p>
+
+<p>Still the schoolmaster held the body in its place, however, and when his
+sympathetic friends drew him back they were horrified to discover that
+the jaws of the dead lynx were locked about one of his ribs. Several
+minutes elapsed before the man was freed from this death grip.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile the assembly in the room had increased, and several children
+that had been brought by their mothers lifted up their voices to add to
+the general confusion.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span></p><p>In the midst of it all, Mrs. Horan was not to be denied the
+satisfaction of her curiosity. Pressing more closely upon the man who
+now had been placed on one of the rude benches almost in a fainting
+condition, she said: "I thought at first, Master Hargrave, that it was
+spirits, but now I see it was just a cat. Why did you fight the lynx in that way?"</p>
+
+<p>Ignoring his suffering, the schoolmaster managed to gasp out a tolerably full explanation:</p>
+
+<p>"What do you suppose? I was sitting alone at my desk, writing copy for
+the children to use on the morrow, when I heard a noise at the door and
+saw this enormous cat with her forefeet upon the step, every hair
+standing erect and her eyes shining as if they were on fire. My position
+behind the desk at first concealed me from her sight, but a slight
+motion of my chair revealed my presence, and in a moment the cat and I
+were each looking into the eyes of the other."</p>
+
+<p>Master Hargrave stopped to recover his breath, and aware of the interest
+of his hearers, for all the visitors now had gathered about him, he
+resumed his story: "I had heard much from hunters concerning the power
+of the human eye to quell the fury of wild beasts. Accordingly, I
+frowned savagely at my visitor. Apparently, however, she was not
+alarmed. Her eyes flashed fire and she<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</a></span> began to gnash her teeth,
+seemingly bent upon serious hostilities. Aware of my danger, I
+immediately made great haste and snatched this cylindrical ruler from
+the desk, but the wildcat was too quick for me."</p>
+
+<p>"Why didn't you hit her?"</p>
+
+<p>"I had nothing but the ruler with which to strike; besides, she was too
+quick. Springing upon me with all the proverbial ferocity and activity
+of her tribe, she fastened upon my side with her teeth and began to rend
+and tear with her claws like unto a fury. In vain did I strive to
+disengage her. Her teeth seemed to be fastened about my ribs, and all my
+efforts served but to enrage her the more.</p>
+
+<p>"When I saw the blood flowing so copiously from my wounded side I became
+seriously alarmed, and as a last resort threw myself upon the edge of
+the desk and with the entire weight of my body pressed the animal
+against a sharp corner. It was at this moment that the cat began to
+utter the most discordant cries to which I ever listened, and as
+doubtless I was somewhat excited at the time and lost a measure of my
+self-control, I have no question that we engaged in a duet that must
+have resounded loudly throughout the settlement."</p>
+
+<p>"That's enough of the story," said Peleg. "We have killed the cat and we
+shall now take you and put you in bed."</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XII</h2>
+
+<h3>AN ATTACK</h3>
+
+<p>Several weeks elapsed before the schoolmaster recovered sufficiently
+from his wounds to enable him to resume his task.</p>
+
+<p>It was now March, 1775, and Daniel Boone had returned to the settlement
+on the Clinch. The task which Governor Dunmore had assigned him had been
+accomplished. He found Peleg and the members of his family engaged in
+their preparations for the spring work.</p>
+
+<p>At the close of the first day after his homecoming, the great scout once
+more had an interview with Peleg. "I have just come from Watage," he
+explained when no one was near, "where there has been an assembly of the
+Cherokees. I went at the request of a gentleman named Henderson, who is
+acting for several other men as well as for himself. He desired me to
+represent him in the purchase of land south of the river of Kantuckee. I
+did as he requested, and arrangements for the purchase of all the land
+as far as the Tennessee River were completed."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</a></span></p><p>"Why did Mr. Henderson&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Colonel Henderson," broke in the scout; "Colonel Richard Henderson."</p>
+
+<p>"Why did Colonel Richard Henderson," repeated Peleg, "and the other
+gentlemen wish to purchase so much land?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because they had learned of the fertility of the soil through the
+reports which my brother and I had given them. In a way I am to be their agent."</p>
+
+<p>"Did the Cherokees sell to him?"</p>
+
+<p>"They did. I fancy they were glad to part with an empty title for a
+solid though moderate recompense. Trouble arose, though, when Colonel
+Henderson and his friends prepared to take possession, relying upon the
+validity of the deed which the Indians had given them. Unfortunately,
+the land lies within the limits of Virginia, according to the old
+charter which King James gave, and I understand that the Virginians are
+claiming for themselves the privilege of purchasing the title to all
+land which the Indians held within the limits of their state. Already
+the treaty of Colonel Henderson has been pronounced null and void as far
+as he is concerned, but the Virginians declare that the title given by
+the Cherokees is valid, and that they will assume the rights. That is a
+very peculiar method of dealing, according to my light. But 'tis not<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</a></span>
+concerning that, lad, that I would speak to you to-day."</p>
+
+<p>The scout was silent a moment, and Peleg, interested far more than his
+quiet manner betrayed, looked eagerly into the face of his friend,
+waiting for him to explain.</p>
+
+<p>"I agreed," resumed Boone, "to take a band of men with me and mark out
+or clear a road to this region in Kantuckee."</p>
+
+<p>"A road?" asked Peleg in surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, a road over which packhorses and wagons can be driven. It will
+require patience and much labour, but the reward will be great. Whenever
+I think of that marvellous country and of the possibilities contained in
+it for families like my own, I am eager to open the way to it. I am
+authorized by Colonel Henderson to say that he will pay thirty-three
+cents per day to every man whom I may select to be of our company."</p>
+
+<p>"When do we go?" inquired Peleg eagerly.</p>
+
+<p>"On the day after to-morrow. How is Singing Susan?" inquired Boone with a smile.</p>
+
+<p>"She is doing famously. I have gained a reputation in the settlement for
+being a better shot than I would be warranted in claiming to be, unless
+I had the song of Susan to help me."</p>
+
+<p>"That is good," said Boone cordially. "Now if you can secure an axe that
+will render you as<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</a></span> efficient service in its way as Singing Susan does
+in hers, you will be well equipped for our expedition. It is important
+that we make haste, if the way is to be opened in time for settlers to
+sow any crops this spring."</p>
+
+<p>Hard as it was for Daniel Boone to leave his family again in charge of
+Israel and Samuel, nevertheless his strong feeling that he was simply an
+instrument being used to further the advance of the rapidly growing
+nation in the American colonies was sufficient to induce him to accept
+this task. In addition, his wife shared the same conviction. She, too,
+was eager for him to continue his labours, and in spite of the anxiety
+she would suffer during his absence, she urged him to accept the offer
+which Colonel Henderson had made.</p>
+
+<p>At the appointed time a band of twenty-five men, every one fully armed
+and all equipped with axes, departed from the settlement on the Clinch.
+Confidence in their leader and the hope that not only would they be able
+to open a way into the marvellous land, but that their own families also
+might share in the reward, made all the men eager to go. It was not
+believed that the task would require many weeks, but the necessity of
+preparing the soil and planting some crops before the summer came was an
+inducement for haste.</p>
+
+<p>There were places where trees had to be felled,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</a></span> and the ringing of the
+axes was heard all the day long. In other regions, however, very little
+labour was required, because the road, as it was selected, led in its
+winding course around many open ledges and through sparsely wooded
+passes of the hills and mountains.</p>
+
+<p>Nearly three weeks passed and the hardy band of hunters and woodsmen was
+drawing near the region which they were seeking. They had not been
+molested by the Indians, and were beginning to congratulate themselves
+that they were to escape the perils which every day threatened them.</p>
+
+<p>Without warning, one day, however, above the ringing of the axes were
+heard the wild cries of the red men. Darting from the woods, shouting
+and brandishing their guns and hatchets, the Indians suddenly appeared.
+Dodging from tree to tree and firing upon the startled white men, they
+seemed to be on all sides at once.</p>
+
+<p>Instantly the coolness and courage of Daniel Boone became invaluable.
+Though many of his comrades had been surprised and terrified by the
+sudden onslaught, the great scout had held himself prepared for the present emergency.</p>
+
+<p>"Run for the trees!" shouted Boone. "Run! Hold your fire until you gain
+cover and then give the rascals your best!" As Boone looked out from his
+own shelter after his rifle had been <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</a></span>discharged, he saw several of his
+companions lying dead or wounded upon the ground.</p>
+
+<p>Calmly yet swiftly Boone darted from the protection of the forest, and
+lifting one of the men in his arms bore him back within shelter.</p>
+
+<p>The example of the leader, mindful of the needs of others in the hour of
+his own peril, inspired his companions to similar action, and, in the
+midst of all the turmoil and danger, the other wounded men were rescued.
+It soon was discovered, however, that three of the fallen men were already dead.</p>
+
+<p>The temporary withdrawal of the warriors to the forest left the field
+free once more, and Boone turned to his companions and said, "Come with me, every one!"</p>
+
+<p>Instantly his followers responded, and, dashing to the place where their
+companions had fallen, they bore the bodies back to a place of safety,
+thankful to find that they had not yet been mutilated.</p>
+
+<p>There was no time for ceremony or for lamentations, and the three who
+had fallen to rise no more were hastily buried in one grave by their comrades.</p>
+
+<p>The unexpected attack, following as it had the long days of quiet, was
+seriously disturbing to the roadmakers. That evening there were no
+camp-fires, and guards were established to watch through the night.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</a></span></p><p>When morning came the alarm had not been repeated, and many were
+persuaded that the assault of the previous day was merely the act of a
+desperate band which had attacked the settlers without any preconceived
+plan. Nevertheless Daniel Boone declared that it was necessary to
+maintain a guard throughout the day.</p>
+
+<p>The labour was entered into with zeal, and though a renewal of the
+attack was not made, thoughts of the new peril were in the minds of
+every man, and made all serious. At the request of his followers Boone
+devoted most of his time to scouting in the nearby region, a duty which
+he insisted upon sharing with his younger companion, Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>The sun had dropped below the borders of the forest, and the men were
+congratulating themselves that the day had passed without a renewal of
+hostilities, when suddenly both scouts were seen running swiftly toward
+the place where the men had encamped for the night.</p>
+
+<p>This startling sight was sufficient to arouse every member of the party.
+Every man seized his gun and ran for the shelter of some huge tree.</p>
+
+<div class="center"><a name="i137.jpg" id="i137.jpg"></a><img src="images/i137.jpg" width='552' height='700' alt="Boone quickly rallied his startled followers, and when
+the red men returned the hardy settlers were ready and awaiting their coming" /></div>
+
+<h4>"Boone quickly rallied his startled followers, and when<br />
+the red men returned the hardy settlers were ready and<br />awaiting their coming"</h4>
+
+<p>Boone was wildly gesticulating as he drew near, but his gestures were
+misunderstood by his friends. Before either scout was able to regain the
+place where the pioneers were hiding, there was another<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</a></span> wild whoop and
+a band of Indians larger than that which had been seen the previous day
+darted from the woods in the rear of the settlers. Before they were able
+to return the unlooked-for fire, two of their number fell dead from the
+bullets of their enemies, while three more were wounded.</p>
+
+<p>Like a flash the Indians were gone again. But Boone quickly rallied his
+startled followers and when the red men returned, as they did within a
+few minutes, appearing from another section of the forest, the hardy
+settlers were ready and awaiting their coming.</p>
+
+<p>Once more had the careful preparation of Boone for what he thought was
+likely to occur saved his followers and himself from peril.</p>
+
+<p>Several of the Indians fell under the deadly fire of the white men, and
+with loud cries and lamentations the warriors dragged their fallen
+comrades into the forest and once more disappeared.</p>
+
+<p>"Never have I seen the Indians so savage as in these two attacks," said
+Boone soberly to Peleg, after guards had been established for the night
+and the men had stretched themselves on their blankets to obtain such
+sleep as was possible in the midst of the threatening dangers. "They
+seem almost beside themselves with rage."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you still plan to go on?"</p>
+
+<p>"I shall go on," said Boone simply. "The way<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</a></span> must be opened for our
+people to gain some of the advantages of this wonderful region toward
+which we are moving. The tribes hereabout are a strange people. I have
+never known Indians more hospitable than are the Cherokees and Shawnees.
+If one brave enters the wigwam of another, even if it be that of a
+stranger, he is deeply offended if he is not given an invitation to eat,
+though he may just have had a meal at his own wigwam. Nor is it
+sufficient on these occasions that the ordinary food be offered him. You
+know the Indians live mostly on venison and hominy, but when a visitor
+comes, sugar, bear's oil, honey, and rum, if they have it, are to be set before him."</p>
+
+<p>"Suppose they do not have anything in the house to eat?"</p>
+
+<p>"Then the fact is stated quietly. It is at once accepted as sufficient.
+I was in a wigwam not long ago where the visitor thought the host was
+not as hospitable as he ought to be and he took him severely to task. He
+said: 'You have behaved just like a Dutchman. I shall excuse you this
+time, for you are young, and have been brought up close to the white
+people, but you must remember to behave like a warrior and never be
+caught in such <i>little</i> actions. Great actions alone can ever make a
+great man.' They are a strange people," added Boone thoughtfully. "I saw
+a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</a></span> white man some time ago trying to help in carrying some game which
+the warriors had shot. I shall never forget how the Indians laughed
+when, after the squaws and the boys had started to bring back the meat,
+this white man took a large piece of buffalo meat on his own back. After
+he had gone two or three miles he found it was becoming too heavy for
+him and he threw it down. Then I saw one of the squaws, laughing as if
+it was a huge joke, take the meat which the white man had dropped and
+put it on her own pack, which already was as large as that of the man,
+and carry the double burden back to camp."</p>
+
+<p>"They are not as swift as our men, though," suggested Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"Not for a short distance," assented Boone, "but they can keep up a pace
+for an almost incredible length of time. I have known Indians who could
+run twelve or fourteen hours without a morsel of food, and then, after a
+light meal and a short rest, start again and go as far as they had
+before they stopped."</p>
+
+<p>"They never do that in fighting, though."</p>
+
+<p>"No, they may keep up a warfare for many years, but they never make a
+prolonged attack. They like a sudden dash such as they made upon us and
+in which those poor fellows were killed. Peleg, I fear the morrow. The
+Shawnees that are watching<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</a></span> us see our axes, and they are sure now that
+we are trying to enter their hunting grounds and take away their lands.
+We shall have serious trouble, I fear."</p>
+
+<p>And the following day Boone's fears were confirmed.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XIII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE WHITE SHAWNEE</h3>
+
+<p>There was no open attack by the Indians such as had been made
+previously, though the yells of the warriors were frequently heard in
+the distance. It was plain that they were striving to terrorize the
+hardy settlers and make them turn back on their way.</p>
+
+<p>One of the men who had been stationed as a guard was shot early in the
+morning and his mutilated body was not found until Daniel Boone, making
+a tour of the camp, discovered what had befallen his companion.</p>
+
+<p>Returning to the camp, Boone summoned his men, and as soon as they were
+assembled, said to them: "We must stop our work on the road for a time
+and build a fort."</p>
+
+<p>There was an expression of consternation on the faces of some of his
+comrades as they heard this quiet statement from the scout, and, aware
+of what was in their minds, though no one spoke, Daniel Boone continued;
+"It will not require many days. I think a fortnight will be sufficient
+for us to build<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</a></span> such a fort as will protect us. We are now almost as
+far on our way as we wish to go. We will begin the work at once."</p>
+
+<p>Whatever disappointment or fears may have been in the minds of his
+companions, no one made any open protest, and the task immediately was
+begun. Certain of the men were assigned to the felling of trees, others
+dug trenches and set the logs in the stockade, which was erected first.</p>
+
+<p>When the stockade had been completed, various cabins were built wherein
+the men might live if they were compelled to seek the refuge of the fort.</p>
+
+<p>The defences were erected near a spring of water that promised to be
+never-failing. Nearby was the river, so close to the fort as to enable
+the defenders to escape if flight became necessary. And yet the fort was
+sufficiently far from the banks to prevent an approach by their enemies
+without being discovered.</p>
+
+<p>So steadily did the men labour that Boone's prophecy was fulfilled, and
+when fourteen days had elapsed the little fort was declared to be ready
+for occupancy. The stockade was strong and had been made of the stakes
+fashioned from the trees. One end of each log was sharpened and then all
+were driven into the ground side by side; portholes being provided at frequent intervals.</p>
+
+<p>A feeling of intense relief came to the hardly<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</a></span> beset men when the work
+was completed. The supreme thought, however, in the mind of the leader,
+was voiced when he explained to Peleg the following day: "It is now
+April, and I must go back to the settlement on the Clinch for my family."</p>
+
+<p>"Alone?" inquired Peleg quickly.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, alone. I must not take one man away from the party here, and I
+shall be doubly anxious for you all while I am gone; but the time has
+come when I may think of my family and myself. In this wonderful land I,
+too, would make my home."</p>
+
+<p>"But will you dare to come back with your family with only you and
+Israel to protect them?"</p>
+
+<p>Boone's face lighted up with the rare smile which occasionally appeared
+upon it as he said: "There will be others, many others, I hope, who will
+join us on our way."</p>
+
+<p>"I never knew the Indians to be so savage as they are now," suggested Peleg anxiously.</p>
+
+<p>"That is true," said Boone, "and one cannot altogether blame them. They
+seem to be well-nigh mad in their hatred of us because we have begun to
+build our homes in the land which they planned to keep as their own. If
+it were not for their fear of the 'Long Knives,' as they term us, I
+fancy they would make a desperate assault very soon. As it is, however,
+they have a wholesome feeling of fear mingled with their anger, and
+although you<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</a></span> will have to be continually on your guard, I do not
+believe they will venture to attack the fort while I am gone."</p>
+
+<p>Peleg made no reply, and the scout, acting as if the last word had been
+spoken, soon after set forth on his long journey to the Clinch.</p>
+
+<p>During the absence of their leader the men continued their labours,
+felling the trees and clearing the land, until in the immediate vicinity
+of the fort sufficient ground had been made tillable to enable them to
+plant the few seeds which Boone had insisted should be brought with them.</p>
+
+<p>The days now were warm, and the delights of the marvellous climate were
+appreciated by all the men.</p>
+
+<p>The only event of special interest that occurred during the absence of
+the scout was the coming of Sam Oliver. As unconcerned as if he had long
+been a member of the company and had earned his thirty-three cents per
+day for his labours, the hunter entered the fort one night and
+composedly received the warm greetings which were given him. It was well
+known that the newcomer was a famous shot, and the coming of even one
+man strengthened the little garrison not a little.</p>
+
+<p>The general line of the defence of the fort was at once mapped out by
+Sam, who without a word assumed the position of leader. It was he who
+arranged the details and the nightly guards which<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</a></span> were maintained, and
+it was his word which decided any dispute that arose among the men.</p>
+
+<p>One day Peleg was on guard in the adjacent forest. His watch was almost
+ended and he was about to return to the fort, when he was startled to
+behold an Indian approaching with the palms of both hands extended.</p>
+
+<p>Holding Singing Susan in readiness for instant use, and glancing keenly
+about him into the adjacent forest to make sure that his visitor was
+unaccompanied, Peleg waited patiently for the stranger to approach.</p>
+
+<p>As the warrior drew near Peleg looked at him with increasing
+astonishment. Dressed in the Indian garb, the warrior, who seemed to be
+only about twenty years of age, nevertheless had no features like those
+of the neighbouring tribes. Tanned, the stranger undoubtedly was, but
+nevertheless his skin did not have the bronze colouring of the Indian.
+His figure and even his walk were more like the white man's. And yet in
+every other point the stranger apparently was of the Indian race.</p>
+
+<p>As he drew near Peleg, his face was lighted by a smile as he said, "Me
+broder. Me white Shawnee."</p>
+
+<p>Peleg did not respond, although his astonishment was increased by the
+speech of the approaching warrior.</p>
+
+<p>"Me wan' go home. No fader. Me Shawnee<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</a></span> fader. Me wan' white fader.
+White moder dead. White fader dead. No Shawnee fader some more."</p>
+
+<p>The puzzling statements were followed by some words unintelligible to
+Peleg, though he concluded that they were spoken in the Shawnee tongue.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you want to see Daniel Boone?" he inquired.</p>
+
+<p>Gesticulating forcefully, the young man inquired, "He me fader?"</p>
+
+<p>"No."</p>
+
+<p>"White fader dead. White moder dead. Shawnee warriors kill me fader.
+Kill moder. Many moons ago."</p>
+
+<p>"How many?"</p>
+
+<p>A puzzled expression for a moment appeared on the stranger's face, and
+then, comprehending the meaning of the question, he opened and closed
+his hands so many times that, although Peleg was unable to count the
+number of moons indicated, he concluded that the Shawnee was
+approximately of his own age.</p>
+
+<p>"Me live in Shawnee wigwam many moons. Me Shawnee. Me white Shawnee. Me
+have Shawnee fader and Shawnee broder," and he held up two fingers to
+indicate the number of his brothers.</p>
+
+<div class="center"><a name="i149.jpg" id="i149.jpg"></a><img src="images/i149.jpg" width='482' height='700' alt="One of the men who had been stationed as a guard was
+shot early in the morning" /></div>
+
+<h4>"One of the men who had been stationed as a guard<br />was
+shot early in the morning"</h4>
+
+<p>"What are you doing here? What do you want?" demanded Peleg sharply. He
+was mystified by the statements which had been made and was <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[Pg 127]</a></span>fearful of
+some trap or treachery on the part of his visitor or his companions, who
+might even then be watching from the nearby forest.</p>
+
+<p>"Me fader, me broder, me go," the visitor replied, pointing to himself.
+"All go trap many beaver, many mink, many muskrat," he added, making a
+circle with his hand to indicate his inability to count the pelts which
+had been taken. "Me broder he wan' go on warpath. He wan' help drive
+palefaces out Kantuckee. Me fader he say he go," nodding his head many
+times to emphasize his statement. "But one night many owls scream and
+cry. He say then no go. Me broder he say go. Me fader say yes."</p>
+
+<p>"Where are they now?"</p>
+
+<p>The young stranger gazed earnestly into the face of his questioner, and
+at last, apparently comprehending his question, turned and waved his
+hand toward the forest to indicate that the men to whom he had referred
+were far away.</p>
+
+<p>"Why are you here? Why do you not go with them?"</p>
+
+<p>"Me wan' see white faces some more. Me wan' find white broder. Me white
+Shawnee, where go? Must see paleface wigwam."</p>
+
+<p>For a moment Peleg was silent as he gazed earnestly into the face of the
+young man who had so strongly impressed him. He was convinced<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[Pg 128]</a></span> that he
+was indeed white, and he concluded that he must have been adopted by the
+Indians many years ago. As a consequence of his association with the
+Shawnees, doubtless he had almost forgotten the language of his own people.</p>
+
+<p>In his statement words unknown to Peleg were spoken, but he had
+understood enough to convince him that either the white Shawnee was
+speaking the truth, or else was trying to set some trap into which the
+defenders of the fort might be drawn.</p>
+
+<p>"Come with me," said the young scout finally. As they turned toward the
+fort they met Sam Oliver, who stopped and gazed in surprise at Peleg's
+companion, and laughed scornfully when he heard the story of the stranger.</p>
+
+<p>"You say you and your Shawnee father and brother buried the canoe in
+which you came down the river?" demanded the hunter brutally as he
+turned upon the visitor.</p>
+
+<p>"Bury canoe."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you take us straight to the place where it is. I know well enough
+you are trying to play some sneaking game on us, and if you are, you
+will be the first one to suffer for it. If you try to lead us into any
+trap, no matter what happens to us, I will put a bullet into you."</p>
+
+<p>"No go," pleaded the young warrior.</p>
+
+<p>"You must go!" retorted Sam Oliver harshly.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[Pg 129]</a></span></p><p>Peleg sympathized with the stranger. He understood, he thought, the
+desire of the returning white man to shield his foster-father and
+brother. The young hunter was now convinced that his visitor had spoken truthfully.</p>
+
+<p>"Sam," he ventured to suggest, "this young brave was stolen when he was
+a little child, and he has lived with his Shawnee father ever since. He
+doesn't want to betray him. You cannot blame him for that, can you?"</p>
+
+<p>"There is only one way to deal with the varmints!" retorted Sam hotly.
+"You might just as well try to make a pet out of a nest of rattlesnakes
+as to try to be friends with an Indian. No, sir! This&mdash;whatever he is,
+white man, or red man&mdash;he must prove what he has said, and the only way
+for him to do it is to take us to the place where he pretends that canoe
+is buried in the ground."</p>
+
+<p>The brutal manner of the hunter apparently had made a deep impression
+upon the stranger. With manifest reluctance he finally consented to
+conduct the party to the place where the canoe was buried. It was well
+known among the settlers that the Indians, after their voyages on the
+river, buried their light canoes to prevent them from being warped by sun and rain.</p>
+
+<p>"You go where owl cry. Owl scream, me fader&mdash;iron&mdash;&mdash;" The stranger
+stopped as if<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[Pg 130]</a></span> he was unable to recollect the word he wished to use,
+making motions with his hands to describe what he wished to say.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg suggested, "Was it an iron kettle?"</p>
+
+<p>A vigorous nod from the stranger indicated that was the word he was
+trying to recall, and he continued, "Me fader hide iron kettle in hole
+in tree. Me show you."</p>
+
+<p>"You wait here," ordered Sam, "while I get two or three more men and we
+will soon look up that kettle."</p>
+
+<p>Peleg suspected that the white Shawnee, in order to delay the quest of
+the hidden canoe and thereby give his foster-father and brother an
+opportunity to escape from the region, had suggested a visit to the tree
+where the cry of the owl had alarmed his father.</p>
+
+<p>In a brief time, however, Sam and his companions returned, and the
+hunter roughly ordered the stranger to lead the way.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[Pg 131]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XIV</h2>
+
+<h3>THE HIDDEN CANOE</h3>
+
+<p>While Sam Oliver had been gone to the fort to secure a few of his
+comrades to accompany him, the young Indian, or white, or white
+Indian&mdash;Peleg was uncertain to which class his visitor really
+belonged&mdash;entered with apparent confidence into conversation with the
+young scout. In his broken English he related many things concerning the
+life which he had lived in the wigwam of his foster father.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg was impressed by the increasing facility with which the white
+Shawnee, as the young brave preferred to call himself, was using the
+language of the whites.</p>
+
+<p>It may have been that the words he now heard recalled to his mind
+expressions which had almost faded from his memory. At all events he
+talked more freely and with an increasing ability to express himself.</p>
+
+<p>"Me fader hear owl cry. He know from strange cry that some die or be
+pris'ner. He old man. He 'fraid. He say go back up river. Me broder he<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[Pg 132]</a></span>
+say no. Me say no. Me fader still 'fraid, but he keep him promise."</p>
+
+<p>"What was his promise?" inquired Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"He say he take us on warpath to help keep palefaces from going into
+Kantuckee. He no wan' go, but he say he go. We all lie down sleep.
+Pretty quick me fader wake up. Me fader wake me broder. Wake me, too."</p>
+
+<p>"What was the trouble?" asked Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"Me fader have sleep and see&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean, he had a dream?"</p>
+
+<p>"That so," replied the visitor, nodding his head. "Me fader have dream."</p>
+
+<p>"What did he dream?"</p>
+
+<p>"He say we go to Kantuckee, we die. Me fader cry. He no wan' go on warpath."</p>
+
+<p>"But you came," suggested Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>His visitor nodded and continued: "Me fader say he keep him promise. But
+he say more. He say we go back to wigwam. Go quick. He good man. Heap
+good man. He keep him promise. Me broder say me fader mus' keep him promise now."</p>
+
+<p>"So you came?"</p>
+
+<p>"We go on warpath. Me fader say he go quick. No stay any more where we sleep."</p>
+
+<p>"So you started right away, did you?"</p>
+
+<p>"We go on warpath all night. When light come we turn to place where
+white man build fort."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[Pg 133]</a></span></p><p>"Are there many Shawnees here?"</p>
+
+<p>The young visitor, nodding, said: "Pretty quick, heap Shawnee come."</p>
+
+<p>He held up three and then four fingers to express the idea that the
+Indian bands were advancing in parties of three or more, and at some
+prearranged place or by some well-known signals the scattered little
+parties would be brought together and one large band formed.</p>
+
+<p>The information was startling to the young scout and seemed to him to be
+altogether probable. It was in accordance with the well-known methods of
+Indian fighting, and agreed with experiences which the young hunter
+already had had.</p>
+
+<p>He deeply regretted the absence of the great leader. The gentleness and
+firmness, the courage and resource of Daniel Boone would be greatly
+needed if the Shawnees attacked the little fort. Boone, however, was not
+near and his help could not be relied upon.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile Peleg was awaiting the return of Sam Oliver. He was well aware
+of the excellent qualities which the hunter possessed, and he was
+familiar also with the intense bitterness with which Sam looked upon the
+Indians. For him they possessed no good qualities. They were simply
+enemies of the whites and to be exterminated like the rattlesnake and
+the panther. He<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[Pg 134]</a></span> recognized no feeling of patriotism on their part, and,
+because the method of their warfare was cruel, he judged their motives accordingly.</p>
+
+<p>"Me no wan' go where canoe is," said the young brave earnestly. "Me love
+Shawnee fader. Me no betray him. Him good man. Me fader kind to me. No
+wan' him lose scalp."</p>
+
+<p>"It is too bad," acknowledged Peleg. He was distressed by the fear that
+Sam Oliver and his companions would have little mercy upon the Indian
+father to whom they were compelling the young man to conduct them. In
+his heart there was a desire to help the young stranger who had felt the
+call of his own people so strongly that he had even deserted the family
+which had cared for him since his early childhood.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg's thoughts were interrupted by the return of the hunter and four
+of his comrades. It was evident that all five were suspicious of
+treachery, and also that they were determined to put the strange
+visitor's words to the test.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, then!" ordered Sam, as he turned sharply upon the white Shawnee.
+"You take us straight to that place where you say your canoe was hid."</p>
+
+<p>Apparently unmoved by the brutal demand, the young visitor answered, "Me
+no wan' you hurt me fader. Him good fader. Him take care me."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[Pg 135]</a></span></p><p>"Why didn't you stay with him then?" laughed Sam.</p>
+
+<p>"Me wan' see white fader's people, too. Me wan' find white moder's
+people," said the visitor simply.</p>
+
+<p>"You will have time enough to look them up after we have found out
+whether you are telling us the truth or not," declared Sam. "I have my
+suspicions that you are trying to get us into some trap, and as I told
+you before, if you are I shall fill you full of lead the first thing. If
+I find you are trying to trap us, you cannot complain if I do just what
+I tell you I shall do."</p>
+
+<p>"Me no wan' go," repeated the young man.</p>
+
+<p>"You are going whether you want to go or not," retorted Sam Oliver
+brutally. "Are you coming with us, Peleg?" he inquired, turning to the
+young scout.</p>
+
+<p>"I am," said Peleg quietly. He had made his decision instantly in his
+desire to protect or help the young visitor, whose suffering in the
+prospect of being compelled to betray his father had deeply stirred the
+heart of the young hunter. Aware that there was no escape from the
+demand, the white Shawnee turned and led the way into the forest.</p>
+
+<p>The men who were following him were continually alert, suspicious as
+they were of the <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[Pg 136]</a></span>treachery of their guide, and fearful of the presence
+of other Shawnees in the forest through which they were moving.</p>
+
+<p>The confidence of Sam Oliver, who followed close upon the heels of the
+stranger, in a measure strengthened the courage of his followers.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg, who was next behind the leader, was as observant of the hunter as
+he was of the signs in the woods. He was convinced, too, that the young
+stranger was using time either to delay his followers or to give them an
+opportunity to abandon their demand for him to be false to the
+foster-father who had cared for him since his childhood.</p>
+
+<p>If such thoughts had been in the mind of the young white Shawnee they
+were not expressed and certainly were not fulfilled. There was no
+escaping the demands of Sam Oliver and his companions.</p>
+
+<p>At last, when an hour or more had elapsed, the guide stopped and,
+raising his hand in token of silence, in a low voice explained that they
+were approaching the tree in which the iron kettle had been concealed.</p>
+
+<p>Instantly the demeanour of the settlers changed and they began to creep
+forward more stealthily. Every man was alert to discover the presence of
+the Indian who still might be near the place where the kettle had been hidden.</p>
+
+<p>After a few moments Peleg perceived two <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[Pg 137]</a></span>Indians not far before him.
+Both were seated before a fire cooking some venison. One of the warriors
+was an old man and his companion not much more than a boy.</p>
+
+<p>The guide discovered the two Indians at the same time that Peleg did and
+instantly he became greatly agitated. Once more he turned to Sam Oliver
+and in low tones begged him not to kill the man who had been his
+foster-father nor the other who had been his foster-brother.</p>
+
+<p>"Sam," whispered Peleg, "it will be better for us just to make prisoners
+of these two men. I think we ought to do this. The boy plainly has
+spoken the truth. He did not want to betray his father and his brother,
+and you and I cannot blame him. Take both the Indians prisoners, but do
+not fire upon them."</p>
+
+<p>Aware that Sam was somewhat moved by his plea, Peleg repeated his
+request more urgently and was almost as relieved as the guide when at
+last Sam reluctantly consented.</p>
+
+<p>In accordance with the directions of the hunter the band scattered to
+surround the place where the two unsuspecting Indians were cooking their
+dinner. When all the preliminaries had been completed, Sam Oliver
+stepped forward and in his loudest tones demanded the surrender of both
+men. At the same time his companions darted<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[Pg 138]</a></span> forward, making a rush upon
+the unarmed warriors.</p>
+
+<p>To the surprise of every one, the old Indian made a desperate
+resistance. With an almost incredible quickness the Indian boy dodged
+his enemies and escaped to the forest. The old man, apparently striving
+to hold back the attacking party, resisted to the utmost of his strength
+until in his rage Sam Oliver raised his rifle to his shoulder and shot him.</p>
+
+<p>The recent guide, when he saw his foster-father fall, instantly rushed
+to the spot where the old man was lying. The aged warrior was bleeding
+profusely, but he was still conscious. Flinging himself upon the ground
+beside the prostrate body, with the tears streaming down his cheeks and
+his voice broken by sobs, again and again the white Shawnee spoke to the
+aged warrior. Even Sam Oliver was silent as he saw the grief of their guide.</p>
+
+<p>His companions indifferently watched the bereaved boy, but Peleg looked
+away when he saw the old man raise his hand feebly and place it upon the
+head of his adopted son. It was a token of his forgiveness, although his
+few words were not understood by the listening group. The meaning of the
+act, however, was clear to every one.</p>
+
+<p>Soon the old warrior breathed his last, and as soon as Sam Oliver was
+aware that the end had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[Pg 139]</a></span> come his sympathy speedily departed. Turning
+once more to the guide and ignoring the grief of the boy, he roughly
+said: "Now take us where that canoe is buried. The other Indian has got
+away from us, and he will probably make straight for the canoe. You lead
+us there about as fast as you can travel and we will try to head him off
+before he can go down the river!"</p>
+
+<p>In broken utterances the young white Shawnee begged the hunter not to
+enforce this last demand. "Me show where me fader was. Me fader dead. Me
+no show where broder is. Me wan' broder escape. No go broder! No go
+broder!" he besought the hunter earnestly.</p>
+
+<p>Sam Oliver, however, was not to be turned from his decision. "You go
+with us or I shall make you!" he said, and in spite of Peleg's protests
+he turned the young guide's face to the forest and with many threats
+compelled him to lead the way.</p>
+
+<p>Two hours elapsed before they came near the place where the canoe had
+been buried. Creeping cautiously among the trees, the settlers came
+within rifle shot of the spot, and as they peered keenly about them no
+one at first was able to discover the presence of the young Indian.</p>
+
+<p>By the direction of Oliver every man remained in his hiding-place
+waiting for the arrival of the Indian boy, who, Sam was convinced, would
+soon<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[Pg 140]</a></span> come to the place. This expectation was fulfilled, as in about ten
+minutes the young Indian appeared and started to the sandy shore of the river.</p>
+
+<p>Without hesitation he proceeded to the spot where the canoe had been
+hidden and, as he began to dig the sand, the hunter ordered his
+companions to fire upon him. The reports of the five rifles rang out together.</p>
+
+<p>The young Shawnee leaped high into the air and fell dead upon the sand.
+Doubtless he never knew of the unwilling treachery of his foster-brother
+by which he and his father had lost their lives.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[Pg 141]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XV</h2>
+
+<h3>GATHERING CLOUDS</h3>
+
+<p>The grief of the white Shawnee at the death of his foster-brother was
+pitiful to behold. Even Sam Oliver and his companions, who seldom showed
+any sympathy for the Indians, were not unmoved by his agonized cries of grief.</p>
+
+<p>In the Shawnee tongue, some words of which all the white men present
+understood, the young stranger poured forth his sorrows. He called upon
+the spirits of his foster-father and brother to wait for him in their
+journey to the happy hunting-grounds. He explained that in no way had
+his treachery been of his own choosing. In spite of his protest, he
+explained, he had been compelled to direct the white men to the place
+where those who were nearest and dearest to him had fallen before their fire.</p>
+
+<p>Several minutes elapsed and no one of the settlers spoke. Then Sam
+Oliver said sharply: "We have had enough of this! I feel just about as
+guilty as I do when I shoot a panther cub." Without a further word the
+hunter stepped to the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[Pg 142]</a></span> place where the body of the young Indian was
+lying and scalped his victim. Even Peleg, hardened though he was to the
+scenes that were enacted upon the border, shuddered as he saw his
+companion perform this act.</p>
+
+<p>At the urgent request of Peleg the white Shawnee was permitted to return
+with his newly found friend to bury the body of his foster-father, after
+his brother also had received decent burial at his hands.</p>
+
+<p>When this act, in which Peleg had aided, was completed, the young hunter
+turned to his heartbroken companion and said, "You must come to the fort with me."</p>
+
+<p>"No go! No go!" wailed the visitor.</p>
+
+<p>"I do not blame you very much," acknowledged Peleg, "but you have no
+other home, and you might just as well come with me. I am sure you will
+be treated kindly, and as soon as Daniel Boone comes back you need have
+no further fears. If you go back to the Shawnees they will think you
+have betrayed your father and brother. Of course I understand that you
+did not do anything of the kind."</p>
+
+<p>"Me do! Me false to me fader," interrupted the white Shawnee, his
+lamentations breaking forth afresh.</p>
+
+<p>"What is your name?" abruptly demanded Peleg.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[Pg 143]</a></span></p><p>The reply of his companion sounded to him very like Tontileaugo, but
+although it was repeated several times Peleg was unable to pronounce it distinctly.</p>
+
+<p>"I might call you Tonti, and I might call you Henry. Which do you like better?"</p>
+
+<p>"No call Tonti."</p>
+
+<p>"Then I will call you Henry. Don't you remember what your name was when
+you were a white boy?"</p>
+
+<p>"Henry" shook his head, although plainly he was striving to recall the
+name which belonged to the years that were now dim in his memory.</p>
+
+<p>"You come with me," said Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>Together the two boys returned to the fort. Neither of them spoke until
+they entered within the stockade, where the men of the settlement were
+assembled listening to Sam Oliver's dramatic description of the events
+which had just taken place.</p>
+
+<p>The sight of the hunter seemed to revive the sorrow of Henry, as Peleg
+henceforth called the young stranger, and bring back recollections of
+his own, unwilling treachery to the family which had been kind to him
+since the time of his adoption into the tribe.</p>
+
+<p>However, Peleg did his utmost to shield his friend, to whom his heart
+went out in strong sympathy.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[Pg 144]</a></span></p><p>"What you goin' to do with your friend?" laughed Sam as he spoke to
+Peleg when the group at last scattered.</p>
+
+<p>"I am going to take care of him," replied Peleg quietly.</p>
+
+<p>"Make a pet of him, are you? The next rattler I find or the next wolf's
+cub I run across I will bring back to you, lad, and let you make a pet
+of that, too. The only trouble is that a rattlesnake is kinder at heart
+than an Indian."</p>
+
+<p>Peleg shook his head but did not reply to this statement of the hunter.</p>
+
+<p>"It is true, what I am tellin' you," continued Sam, as if somehow he was
+striving to justify himself. "It's got to be extermination. Either you
+kill the redskins or they will kill you. There isn't room for both in
+the same land. They are trying to kill us off, and I am not one to sit
+down quietly and invite them to bring their tomahawks and brain me. If I
+can get the drop on them before they can get it on me, that's all to my advantage."</p>
+
+<p>"I think Henry feels&mdash;&mdash;" began Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"Henry? Who's Henry?" broke in Sam Oliver.</p>
+
+<p>"That's the name I have given this boy. He told me what his name was in
+Shawnee, but I could not quite get it. It sounded like Tontileaugo, and
+I offered to call him Tonti for short but he didn't like that."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[Pg 145]</a></span></p><p>"You will live to regret the day you ever took him in," warned Sam.</p>
+
+<p>"But he is a white boy," persisted Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"Born white, but raised an Indian. It doesn't make much difference where
+a man is born. He grows to be like what he sees and is used to. He has
+been brought up to look at things through Indian eyes and he thinks
+Indian thoughts. You will find he will play you false before you are
+done with him."</p>
+
+<p>"I shall have to take my chance as to that," said Peleg. "Daniel Boone
+has told me to try to do something to help somebody every day. He told
+me to start out with that in my mind the first thing every morning."</p>
+
+<p>"You are makin' a mistake, lad," said Sam Oliver more quietly.</p>
+
+<p>It was plain to Peleg that the old hunter was convinced that what he
+said was true, and there had been many experiences along the border to
+justify him in his conclusion. What Sam Oliver had been unable to
+comprehend was that, much as the methods of the Indians in their warfare
+were to be condemned, they still were fighting for the protection of the
+lands which they believed to be their own.</p>
+
+<p>A few days afterward Daniel Boone and his family arrived with their
+little caravan, which<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[Pg 146]</a></span> included two milch cows and several pack-horses.
+The scout was hilariously greeted by the settlers, and without
+opposition at once resumed his position as leader of the little community.</p>
+
+<p>Every one that could share in the labour was busily engaged now
+throughout the long hours of the day. The sound of the axe was
+continually heard, and the few crops which had been planted were
+carefully tended, and, what is more, were giving promise of an abounding
+harvest from the small sowing.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg had related to the great scout the events which had been connected
+with the coming of Henry to the settlements. The young scout's heart was
+still sore for his friend, who now had little to say to any one except
+Peleg. Together the boys toiled in the field or hunted game in the
+forests; but Henry was never stationed as a guard.</p>
+
+<p>"It is this way, lad," said Boone, after he had heard the entire story.
+"Sam Oliver means right, but he has no understanding of the feelings of
+any one else. Because <i>I</i> shoot an Indian and <i>he</i> shoots an Indian, he
+thinks we both act from the same motive. Never yet have I raised my
+rifle to fire at an Indian without feeling in my heart that perhaps he
+might be as fully entitled to the land for which he is struggling as I
+am. I should be glad to share with him. The trouble is he will not share
+with<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[Pg 147]</a></span> me. There ought to be room enough here for us both; but, now I am
+sure, lad, through the actions of the Indians themselves, it must be
+either white man or red man who will dwell in this wonderful country."
+As he spoke, Daniel Boone looked around him at the wonderful vision that
+spread before his eyes. It was a day late in the summer and a slight
+haze rested over the forests and the fields. The silence which enveloped
+all things was in itself impressive. The cloudless sky and the colours
+of the trees below the hill where the scout and his companion were
+standing combined to impress upon their minds the marvellous beauty of
+the region. "This is destined to be a great land, lad," Boone said
+simply. "It is a wonderful thing that you and I should have a little
+part in opening it up. When I close my eyes, almost I see the homes that
+will be built here, the men and women who will find resting-places here;
+even the voices of the little children who will be born two hundred
+years from now are sounding in my ears." Changing his tone, Boone said:
+"Have you seen anything in your friend to make you feel suspicious of him?"</p>
+
+<p>"Never!" said Peleg positively. "Have you?"</p>
+
+<p>"No. There are some men in the settlement, however, who are fearful that
+he may try to betray us when trouble comes."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[Pg 148]</a></span></p><p>"He never will," said Peleg positively. "If you had been with me and
+seen him when Sam Oliver shot his foster-father and brother I am sure
+you would never suspect Henry of not being true."</p>
+
+<p>"That is my feeling, lad," said Boone gently. "Do all in your power to
+prevent him from doing anything which might arouse the anger or even the
+suspicions of our men."</p>
+
+<p>"He never talks to Sam Oliver and very seldom to any one else. He stays
+with me all through the day, except when I am on guard."</p>
+
+<p>"You are welcome to bring him to our home any time."</p>
+
+<p>"To stay there?" inquired Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"That is what I mean, lad," replied the great scout, his face lighting
+up with the occasional smile that appeared upon it. "My wife and
+daughters feel toward him as I do. Do you know that they were the first
+white women ever to stand on the banks of the Kantuckee River?"</p>
+
+<p>"I had not thought of that," replied Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"There are many others coming soon. Already I have received word that
+Mrs. McGary, Mrs. Hogan, and Mrs. Denton are on their way here."</p>
+
+<p>The arrival soon afterward of more than a score of white men to join the
+settlers aroused great enthusiasm, because now it was confidently
+believed that, after so many had passed safely over the <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[Pg 149]</a></span>roadway which
+Boone and his companions had opened to the beautiful region, many more
+would surely follow. These expectations were soon fulfilled.</p>
+
+<p>The continued labours of the whites, however, had increased the intense
+hostility of the Indians, who naturally believed all these lands
+belonged to them. When they saw the settlers felling the trees and
+erecting their houses and planting their crops, a spirit of
+determination to drive the whites from the region spread among the tribes.</p>
+
+<p>There was just now, however, a lull in the direct warfare. Dusky faces
+occasionally were seen in the forest, but there was no open attack.</p>
+
+<p>Daniel Boone, however, was not to be deceived. He was confident that it
+was simply the hush which at times precedes the coming of the tempest.
+In his own mind he was convinced that the Indians simply were reserving
+their strength until they could rally a sufficient number to make an
+attack worth while. And Boone in the midst of all his labours&mdash;for he
+was toiling with the men of the settlement&mdash;was forming plans by which
+he hoped to meet the fierce attacks he expected the Shawnees to make.</p>
+
+<p>Frequent sallies upon the men when they were at work in the fields now
+began to be made. While they were plowing, the stealthy warriors did
+their utmost to waylay and shoot them. When they<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[Pg 150]</a></span> were hunting they were
+chased and sometimes fired upon. Sometimes an Indian would creep up near
+the fort in the night and fire upon the first of the garrison to appear
+in the morning. The little settlement soon was in a state of continual
+and increasing alarm.</p>
+
+<p>Even many of the ordinary duties of life were performed only at great
+risk. But the determination in the hearts of the hardy people to defend
+their new homes in the wonderful region strengthened with every passing day.</p>
+
+<p>Many of the settlers every night assembled within the walls of the fort.
+It was the expressed desire of Boone that all should do this, for in
+this way only could the safety of every one be assured. For the most
+part the people responded willingly to his appeal, and after a certain
+eventful night all were willing to heed his counsel. On that particular
+night occurred a struggle with the prowling Indians which made the name
+of one of the heroic women long to be remembered.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[Pg 151]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XVI</h2>
+
+<h3>CAPTIVES</h3>
+
+<p>As has been stated, the opening by Daniel Boone of the road through the
+wilderness to the new settlement, and the safety with which the journey
+thither had been accomplished, were strong inducements now to other
+families to make similar ventures.</p>
+
+<p>Within a few months the little settlement had increased until it
+contained at least one hundred and fifty people. Trees had been felled,
+log houses had been built, and with great energy the new people were
+preparing to make permanent homes in the fertile valleys. Most of the
+newcomers were more than willing to follow the suggestion of Boone, who
+strongly advised all the settlers to seek safety in the shelter of the
+fort when night fell.</p>
+
+<p>The great scout was convinced that the Shawnees were continually
+watching the little community, and that their anger at the determination
+of the settlers to make permanent abodes in the beautiful region was
+steadily increasing. Every day Boone<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[Pg 152]</a></span> was watchful. Occasionally the red
+men were seen, and not infrequently they crept close enough to the fort,
+or to the men when they were toiling in the forests or fields, to fire
+upon them; but as yet no concerted attack had been made.</p>
+
+<p>Among the families which had come was one named Merrill. Mr. Merrill was
+a vigorous, active young man, and his wife was almost as large as he and
+as strong. So convinced were the two young people of their ability to
+withstand any attack that might be made upon their home that they had
+been somewhat unmindful of the request of the leader.</p>
+
+<p>One morning in December Daniel Boone said to Peleg: "I wish you to go to
+Mr. Merrill's at once, and say to him that I have seen recently some
+signs of the Indians which greatly disturb me. It will not be necessary
+for you to say more, except that I strongly urge the Merrills to comply
+with my suggestion and come nightly to the fort."</p>
+
+<p>Peleg, at the request of the scout, mounted a horse and rode in the
+direction of the little log cabin which the Merrills had erected on the
+extreme border beyond the settlement. He and Henry, accompanied by young
+Israel Boone, who now had become almost a man in size, had been frequent
+visitors at the friendly home of the Merrills. It was therefore with a
+feeling of personal<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[Pg 153]</a></span> interest as well as anxiety that the young hunter
+hastened to carry out the suggestion of the great scout.</p>
+
+<p>Before he arrived at the little house its appearance suggested to him
+that something was wrong. It was early in the morning and yet no smoke
+was rising from the chimney. The silence which rested over the place
+seemed ominous. So anxious was the young scout that he dismounted before
+he entered the clearing, tied his horse to one of the trees, and then
+cautiously crept forward to discover what might be amiss with the household.</p>
+
+<p>When Peleg approached the border of the little clearing he halted and
+peered anxiously before him. No one was seen about the place. Delaying
+only a brief time, and holding Singing Susan in his hands ready for
+instant use if occasion required, Peleg called to the inmates of the house.</p>
+
+<p>"Hello!" he called. As no response was given to his hail, he raised his
+voice and called again, "Hello! Mr. Merrill!" Not even the dog, which
+was a great pet of Peleg's, made any response. Several minutes elapsed
+and the silence was still unbroken.</p>
+
+<p>Troubled by his failure to arouse any one, Peleg darted swiftly across
+the clearing and, as he approached the door, stopped in astonishment
+when he beheld near the threshold the bodies of two<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[Pg 154]</a></span> dead Indians. As he
+looked about he saw bloody trails leading into the forest, which
+indicated that others also had been wounded. In the door a large breach
+had been made which was evidently the work of the Indian tomahawks.</p>
+
+<p>The young scout, his flesh creeping at his discovery, glanced about him
+in every direction, but no sign of friend or enemy could he see. The
+door itself was partly open, and as Peleg stepped within the little
+cabin the odour of burned feathers greeted him.</p>
+
+<p>There were many indications of a struggle which plainly had taken place
+within the room, but it was not until he had passed out to the rear of
+the little building and descried Mrs. Merrill approaching that his full
+courage returned. The resolute woman, her face pale, but otherwise not
+betraying any emotion, approached the young scout and said quietly: "I
+have just buried my husband."</p>
+
+<p>The astonishment of Peleg was so great that he was unable to reply to
+the staggering statement, and then aware that the silent grief of his
+friend was almost more than she could bear, he assisted her within the
+house and soon was listening to her story.</p>
+
+<p>"I did not like to bury my husband so soon," began the woman at last,
+"but I dared not wait to ask any one to come."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[Pg 155]</a></span></p><p>"Tell me about it," said Peleg quietly, "unless you think that we had
+better start for the fort right away."</p>
+
+<p>Mrs. Merrill shook her head as she said: "I do not think there is need
+of immediate haste. It must have been about midnight when our dog began
+to growl so savagely that my husband thought something must be wrong. He
+got up, and when he opened the door to find out what the trouble was he
+received the fire of six or seven Indians. He sank to the floor, but
+managed to call me to close the door and let down the bars.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know that I ever had such a thrilling or awful moment in my
+life! I could hear the savages on the porch, and I was afraid they would
+get to the door before I could shut and bar it. Just as I managed to
+close it and let the bar fall, the Indians began to pound upon it with
+their tomahawks. If I had been one second later they would have got
+inside the house and I should now be where my husband is. They kept
+pounding on the door until they made a large hole in it. They did not
+know that I stood close by, waiting for them with an axe, and as fast as
+one after another&mdash;four of them&mdash;tried to crawl through, I killed or
+badly wounded every one that made the attempt. They could not force
+their way into the cabin," she added simply.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[Pg 156]</a></span></p><p>"How many Indians did you say there were at the door?" inquired Peleg
+in astonishment.</p>
+
+<p>"Four, but only two of them were killed. At least there are only two
+left here, and the others may have got away."</p>
+
+<p>"I saw two," said Peleg. "How many were there altogether?"</p>
+
+<p>"Seven, I think. They kept away from the door after that, but pretty
+soon I heard them up on the roof. I knew then that they were trying to
+get into the house by coming down the chimney."</p>
+
+<p>"I think I know how you kept them out," said Peleg, smiling slightly.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied the woman. "I grabbed the only feather bed we had in our
+cabin and ripped it open, in desperate haste, feeling just as I did when
+I was trying to close the door. I knew if I was not quick enough the
+Shawnees would be in the room. It was fortunate that there were coals on
+the fireplace, and just as soon as I put the feathers on them a blaze
+sprang up and such smoke as I never saw began to pour up the chimney. In
+less than one minute two of the redskins fell into the fireplace, and
+with the same axe with which I had defended the door I quickly put an
+end to both varmints."</p>
+
+<p>"That made six of the seven, then," suggested Peleg.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[Pg 157]</a></span></p><p>"Yes. But the seventh wasn't ready to leave yet. He ran around to the
+door and tried to crawl through while I was busy at the chimney. It was
+fortunate that I chanced to see him. He got a gash in the cheek, and you
+ought to have heard him yell when he ran away from the door. Talk to me
+about the Indians never making any fuss! This man was yelling so that
+you might have heard him at the fort. He called me the 'Long Knife
+Squaw,' but I didn't care so long as he cleared out for good and all!
+And I don't believe any of them will come again very soon."</p>
+
+<p>"What are you going to do now?" inquired Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"I haven't any plans."</p>
+
+<p>"You must come with me to the fort."</p>
+
+<p>"But I must not leave my clearing," said the heroic woman. "Now that my
+husband is dead, I shall have everything to do."</p>
+
+<p>"Come with me, and I will find some one to do what ought to be done here."</p>
+
+<p>Yielding to the persuasion of the young scout, Mrs. Merrill accompanied
+him to the fort, where at once some of the women offered her the solace
+of their sympathy.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg at once assembled a little company of men, and led by Daniel Boone
+himself they returned to the scene of the brave woman's struggles.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[Pg 158]</a></span> The
+dead Indians were buried and the two cows were driven within the stockade.</p>
+
+<p>"It will not be safe," said Daniel Boone to Peleg, "for Mrs. Merrill to
+come back here alone. If she does insist upon coming, either you or
+Israel must be with her. She should be persuaded, however, not to expose
+herself to such dangers as she will meet here."</p>
+
+<p>"She seems to be able to protect herself," said Peleg dryly.</p>
+
+<p>"Indeed she does. I question if there is another woman in our settlement
+who would have been able to do what she did. Single-handed, to keep off
+seven Shawnees! I believe that the story of her bravery will be told to
+your grandchildren, Peleg."</p>
+
+<p>Mrs. Merrill, however, was found to be more reasonable than the great
+scout's fear had warranted. She was quite willing to make her home for
+the present where the peril and the loneliness were not so great as in her cabin.</p>
+
+<p>The attacks of the Indians continued, although no party as large as that
+which had attacked the home of the Merrills was seen. The plowmen in the
+fields, the men cutting the timber, and those who separated from their
+fellows while hunting game were continually in danger.</p>
+
+<p>The determination of the whites was as great as<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[Pg 159]</a></span> that of the Indians,
+and although every one was anxious, no one thought of withdrawing from the settlement.</p>
+
+<p>To Daniel Boone himself there came a little later an experience almost
+as thrilling as that which had befallen Mrs. Merrill.</p>
+
+<p>Among the new families was one named Callaway. In this family there was
+a girl of nearly the same age as Daniel's Boone's daughter Jemima. One
+morning, early in the summer, the girls, taking the one canoe which was
+kept near the fort, paddled out upon the river.</p>
+
+<p>"Do not go more than one hundred feet above or below the fort," warned
+Daniel Boone, who stood on the bank watching the girls. Both promised,
+and soon in their light-hearted way were paddling the canoe back and
+forth from shore to shore.</p>
+
+<p>Satisfied that the girls were well within the protection they needed,
+Daniel Boone returned to his labours and no one was left upon the bank to watch them.</p>
+
+<p>As the sport continued, and before either of the girls was aware of the
+fact, the light canoe had drifted beyond the points which had been
+designated by the scout as the limits of safety. Discovering some
+flowers along the shore, they pushed the little craft in among the tall
+rushes while they plucked the blossoms they were seeking. The canoe was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[Pg 160]</a></span>
+well within the rushes and concealed, as the girls thought, from the
+sight of any one on the bank.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly the younger girl, emitting a piercing shriek, turned to Jemima
+Boone, and exclaimed: "Look there! Oh, look there!"</p>
+
+<p>As Jemima sharply turned about she saw, creeping through the rushes and
+concealed from the sight of any one on the shore, a huge Shawnee
+warrior, who already had seized the painter of the little craft.</p>
+
+<p>Scream followed scream when the Indian began to pull the canoe toward
+him. In a moment he was joined by several of his dusky comrades. The
+canoe was drawn to the shore and the girls, prisoners of the savages,
+were dragged up the bank.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[Pg 161]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XVII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE PURSUIT</h3>
+
+<p>The screams of the terrified girls were plainly heard at the fort. A
+little company of frightened women and frantic men quickly assembled
+upon the bank, but in spite of the piteous appeals it was too late to
+help the unfortunate prisoners. Four additional Indians appeared and,
+assisting their comrades, seized the girls and with them rushed into the wilderness.</p>
+
+<p>The men from the fort who were standing on the bank of the stream were
+unable to cross, the only canoe being now on the opposite shore.</p>
+
+<p>Calling to one another, the men endeavoured to find some one who would
+venture to swim to the other shore. No one volunteered, however, as all
+were afraid that the Indians might return if such an attempt should be
+made. Both Daniel Boone and the father of Miss Callaway were absent from
+the settlement at the time, and it was nearly night when they returned.</p>
+
+<p>Stopping only a moment to comfort his heartbroken wife, Daniel Boone, as
+soon as he was <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[Pg 162]</a></span>informed, acted promptly and decisively, as was his
+habit. He was well aware that no time should be lost, and fortunately he
+discovered Peleg at that moment returning to the fort.</p>
+
+<p>"The girls have been taken by the Indians," said Boone, suppressing his emotion.</p>
+
+<p>"What girls? What do you mean?" inquired Peleg, aghast.</p>
+
+<p>"Jemima and her friend, the Callaway girl."</p>
+
+<p>"When?"</p>
+
+<p>"This noon. I have no time to explain. We must get a party to start
+right away. Find every man you can and I, too, will look about, and we
+will meet here at the fort just as soon as we can get our party together."</p>
+
+<p>Darting into the house, Peleg secured Singing Susan, and then, finding
+Israel Boone, who was almost as aroused as his father, the two instantly
+began their search for men who would join the rescue party.</p>
+
+<p>Soon afterward a band of eight men stood with the scout on the bank of
+the Kentucky River near the fort. The quiet of the summer evening was
+unbroken save by the occasional cry of some night-bird. It had been long
+since the screams of the disappearing girls had been heard, but the
+direction from which they had come indicated the way in which to start the pursuit.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[Pg 163]</a></span></p><p>"How many are here?" inquired Boone, as he glanced about the group.</p>
+
+<p>"Eight," replied Peleg, "including you and Israel."</p>
+
+<p>"We need more, but I shall not wait. We will start at once."</p>
+
+<p>The canoe meanwhile had been secured by one of the boys of the
+settlement who swam across the river at dusk and returned in the little
+craft, paddling with his hand, for the blades had been broken by the
+Indians to delay pursuit.</p>
+
+<p>The men now were ferried across the river, and as soon as every one was
+standing on the opposite bank Daniel Boone again inquired: "Is every one prepared?"</p>
+
+<p>Every member of the party declared that he was ready to follow wherever
+the great scout might lead.</p>
+
+<p>Instantly Daniel Boone led the way into the forest. The anxious scout
+was so quiet and self-controlled that an uninformed spectator would
+never have suspected that he was labouring under special stress. Even
+Peleg was astonished at the composed bearing of the man.</p>
+
+<p>Turning to Israel, the young scout remarked: "Your father is saving
+every ounce of his strength for the work ahead of us. He is not wasting any time crying."</p>
+
+<p>"He never does," responded Israel proudly.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[Pg 164]</a></span> "Do you know, Peleg," young
+Boone said, "there are times when Parson John Lythe preaches to us that
+he speaks of the Great Father of us all, and somehow I always think of
+Him as if He looked somewhat as <i>my</i> father does."</p>
+
+<p>Deeply impressed as Peleg was by the reverence in which the son of
+Daniel Boone held his father, there was no opportunity at the time for
+further conversation.</p>
+
+<p>In Indian file the pursuers advanced, and all soon were running,
+following the custom of the Indians. So skilled was the leader in this
+work that it was well known that he was able for many hours to maintain
+the pace at which he was now moving.</p>
+
+<p>"One time," said Israel to Peleg, "my father ran like this for eight
+hours, then rested two hours, and then ran eight more, and after he had
+taken another rest he made the third stretch of the same number of hours."</p>
+
+<p>The leader had not spoken except when in the dim light of the moon he
+was compelled to stop to search for the trail. Once when he halted he
+said to his companions: "The Shawnees are not moving in one body. They
+have broken up into ten parties and are moving in parallel lines."</p>
+
+<p>"Did they expect to throw us off the trail in that way?" asked Israel scornfully.</p>
+
+<p>"Doubtless they hoped to. Peleg," inquired<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[Pg 165]</a></span> Boone, turning to the young
+scout, "how many do you make out were in this band that stole Jemima?"</p>
+
+<p>"About thirty, I should say," replied Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"It is more nearly thirty-five," declared Boone, as he turned to direct
+his followers to resume the pursuit.</p>
+
+<p>Somehow the night did not prove to be a serious obstacle to the great
+leader. Almost as if by instinct Boone found his way, and the parallel
+trails made by the Indians, instead of throwing the pursuers into
+confusion, really aided them. If the trail was lost in one place it then
+became comparatively easy for the men to scatter and in a brief time
+discover it nearby.</p>
+
+<p>"How far have we come?" Israel inquired of his father when a halt was
+made in the morning.</p>
+
+<p>"Thirty miles," replied Daniel Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you find anything new?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied the scout, nodding his head. "The Indians are less
+careful than they were. The trail is becoming plainer. I hope we shall
+overtake them before noon."</p>
+
+<p>It was not long before the pursuit was resumed, and the pace of the
+entire party was increased when it was discovered that the Indians had
+entered a buffalo road and were following that clearly defined path.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[Pg 166]</a></span></p><p>The expression upon the face of Boone, who, with Peleg and Israel, was
+in advance of the little band, made every one aware that he expected
+soon to overtake the savages. The time of anxiety as well as peril was surely approaching.</p>
+
+<p>"Peleg," whispered Israel, "what do you think will be done to the girls
+if the Indians see us before we get within rifle shot?"</p>
+
+<p>Peleg shook his head and did not reply, although both he and his friend
+were aware that the Indians would doubtless tomahawk their captives and
+then flee if they should discover their pursuers close upon them.</p>
+
+<p>Nearly ten more miles were covered before the escaping band was
+overtaken. Each party discovered the other almost at the same moment.
+The Indians were in the act of kindling a fire and preparing camp for
+the night. Almost as if it was one sound, the rifles of Daniel Boone,
+Peleg, and Israel rang out together.</p>
+
+<p>Two of the Indians fell to the ground. All the other braves, as if
+driven by one impulse, instantly turned and fled from the spot, leaving
+the terrified girls behind them. So sudden had been the flight of the
+savages that when they darted into the adjacent forest they had been
+unable to don their moccasins. Not a man in the pursuing party had been injured.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[Pg 167]</a></span></p><p>The cry of Jemima Boone when in the dim light she beheld her father
+approaching at the head of the rescuing party was one that those who
+heard her never were able to forget. She sprang from the ground where
+she had been seated and threw herself into her father's arms. For a time
+not a word was spoken by any one, while the well-nigh exhausted girl
+clung to Daniel Boone sobbing as if her heart would break.</p>
+
+<p>The pursuit which had been led by the great scout had been so swift and
+unrelenting that scarcely any time for rest had been given the band
+since its departure from the fort the preceding evening; and only a
+short time for recuperation could be allowed even now. This was some
+hardship for the men, but for the girls, who, in addition to the terror
+and despair which had possessed them, had been compelled to travel
+through the forests at a speed which exhausted their strength, it was doubly hard.</p>
+
+<p>Jemima explained to her father that they had arrived at the place where
+they had been discovered only a few moments before the coming of the
+hunter and his friends. The girl shuddered as she said: "If the Shawnees
+had had two minutes more they would have killed both of us before they
+ran; and I do not understand why they ran, anyway."</p>
+
+<p>"How many warriors were in the band?" inquired her father.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[Pg 168]</a></span></p><p>"Thirty-six."</p>
+
+<p>"We cannot stay here long. The varmints will be coming back, and they
+outnumber us so greatly that we may have serious trouble."</p>
+
+<p>It was accordingly decided that the party should begin their return at
+once. For a time Daniel Boone carried his daughter in his arms, while
+her companion, almost exhausted, was also carried by one of the men.</p>
+
+<p>When several miles had been covered word for rest was given, and then,
+after a hasty meal was made from the loin of a deer which Peleg shot,
+the flight toward the fort was resumed.</p>
+
+<p>It was soon discovered, however, that the Indians were not pursuing, and
+when Boone became convinced that this was so, his anxiety was relieved,
+and he decided not to maintain the swift pace at which they had been moving.</p>
+
+<p>Two days later the party arrived at the fort on the bank of the
+Kentucky, and the relief of the distracted mothers as well as the
+general rejoicing over the safe return of the rescuers was great. After
+a rest of a day, the scout and all the party resumed their accustomed summer tasks.</p>
+
+<p>It was a few days afterward, while Peleg and Israel were engaged in
+hoeing a field of corn that belonged to Peleg, that the scout approached his friend.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[Pg 169]</a></span></p><p>"Peleg," he said, as he halted in front of the boy, "we are to have a
+meeting in the fort to-morrow at noon and I hope you surely will be present."</p>
+
+<p>"What is the meeting for?"</p>
+
+<p>"We are to pass some laws. We now have more than one hundred and fifty
+souls in this little settlement, and up to the present time every one
+has been a law unto himself. We now must pass some laws which shall
+govern us as a community."</p>
+
+<p>"Is Sam Oliver here again?" inquired Peleg with a laugh.</p>
+
+<p>"Not as yet," answered Boone quizzically, smiling as he appreciated the
+discovery his young friend had made as to one of the causes for his
+desire to pass some laws by which all should be regulated.</p>
+
+<p>"Colonel Henderson will preside," said Boone. "He, as you know, was the
+original purchaser of this tract of land from the Cherokees, and he
+kindly consented to permit us to make a settlement here."</p>
+
+<p>"I shall try to be there," promised Peleg, as the scout passed on to
+make further arrangements for the meeting, and the two boys resumed their task.</p>
+
+<p>It was a serious assemblage of men that met the following noon. After
+accepting the chair, Colonel Henderson said: "I shall ask the Reverend
+John<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[Pg 170]</a></span> Lythe, our pioneer preacher, to address the Throne of Grace."</p>
+
+<p>At the conclusion of the old minister's prayer, Colonel Henderson
+solemnly said: "This legislature is now opened in the name of his
+Majesty the King of Great Britain." In his address he reminded his
+hearers of the importance of laying a broad and strong foundation for
+the future. He declared that the secret of future success depended
+largely upon the carefulness of their present preparation. He also
+explained how good and wholesome laws, such as would command the respect
+and support of the people, would benefit not merely the settlement as a
+whole, but also every individual member.</p>
+
+<p>Various laws then were proposed, discussed, and adopted by vote of the assembly.</p>
+
+<p>In the midst of the meeting, which both Peleg and Israel were enjoying
+keenly, Daniel Boone arose and asked for recognition from the chairman.</p>
+
+<p>"My father is going to make a speech!" whispered Israel in amazement, as
+he leaned toward Peleg. Never had either heard the scout speak under
+such circumstances. He was so self-contained in his manner and spoke so
+seldom that no one had thought of him as a man to make a public address.
+It was therefore with intense interest that every one present turned to
+listen to what Daniel Boone might say.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[Pg 171]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XVIII</h2>
+
+<h3>A BAND OF SCOUTS</h3>
+
+<p>"He would rather face three live painters," whispered Israel gleefully.
+"I never saw my father scared before."</p>
+
+<p>In a moment, however, the boys were listening intently to what the great
+scout was saying.</p>
+
+<p>"I am no speechmaker," began Daniel Boone, his voice trembling slightly
+as he spoke. "I know a little of the language of the deer and of the
+songs of the birds. The cry of the nighthawk has its meaning for me, to
+which it almost would be possible for me to reply. Even the scream of
+the painter is in a language which I understand, but when I look into
+the faces of my friends, who are much better fitted than I am to say
+what is best for this little community, I am at a loss how to proceed."
+The hunter paused a moment and the sympathetic interest of his hearers
+plainly encouraged him to go on. "It is true," he continued quietly, "I
+have a name for being somewhat successful as a scout and a hunter. I
+think you will all bear me witness, however, that never yet willingly
+have I inflicted<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[Pg 172]</a></span> pain upon even the weakest of God's creatures.
+Whenever I draw a bead on a deer I do so with the thought in my mind
+that here is the provision of the Almighty for food for His children.
+With all my might, mind, and strength I am opposed to any cruelty to
+dumb creatures, and also to any wanton waste of the game in our forests.
+I am sure I am giving voice to your convictions also when I say that we
+want no man within our settlement who does not have some such feeling as
+I have just described. Sometimes our boys are thoughtless and shoot
+perhaps more for the sake of killing than to secure provisions for our
+homes. We must be patient with them and strive to show them how mistaken
+they are. What I desire greatly just now is that a law shall be adopted
+to protect the game in our forests." The hunter took his seat and a
+murmur of applause at once came from the little assembly.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you make that as a motion?" inquired Colonel Henderson.</p>
+
+<p>"I do," responded the scout, rising and gravely bowing as he spoke.</p>
+
+<p>The motion was seconded, and without one opposing vote the assembly
+agreed to the suggestion of Daniel Boone.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as this motion was adopted the great scout once more arose and
+in his quiet and <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[Pg 173]</a></span>dignified manner again began to speak: "There is
+another matter in which I am deeply interested. I have never been able
+to understand how any man made in the image of his Creator could take
+his Creator's name in vain. In my experience I have noticed that
+profanity is limited to men who are either weak or vicious. I think, my
+friends, that you will agree with me that we want neither class in our
+little settlement on the banks of the Kentucky. I therefore move that we
+adopt a law prohibiting profanity."</p>
+
+<p>It was manifest that not every one in the assembly agreed with these
+sentiments of the hunter, and there was a moment of hesitation. Peleg,
+however, always ready to further the efforts of his friend, whom he
+admired more than he did any living man, promptly arose and seconded the
+motion, which then was passed without any opposition, though not with
+the enthusiasm which had greeted the preceding motion.</p>
+
+<p>Once more the tall scout arose and said: "I have still one other desire
+in my heart. As you all know, our little settlement has been unusually
+free from the brawls which occur in so many of the hamlets on the
+border. I am confident it is the desire of every one here that the same
+things shall continue to be true. If we must fight, then let us fight
+hard; but all petty quarrellings and brawls, let them not<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[Pg 174]</a></span> henceforth
+even be mentioned among us. With this peaceful desire in our minds, I
+greatly desire that a law shall be adopted to express the wish of this
+settlement that the Sabbath shall not be like other days. We surely toil
+so hard throughout six days of the week that if there were no other
+purpose in our minds we ought to rest on the Lord's Day. In order that
+this may be clearly understood, I move that a law be adopted which shall
+voice the sentiment of this community against the profanation of the Sabbath Day."</p>
+
+<p>There was no openly expressed opposition to the desire of the scout, and
+Peleg having promptly seconded this motion, his third suggestion also was adopted.</p>
+
+<p>Soon afterward, Colonel Henderson called upon the pioneer preacher to
+close the meeting with prayer, and the assembly dispersed.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg, Israel Boone, and Henry departed together from the fort. The last
+named was now able to express himself in English and, though he was
+still reserved in his bearings toward the people in general, his
+friendship for Peleg and Israel had strengthened with every passing day.</p>
+
+<p>"I never know such man like your father," said Henry to Israel.</p>
+
+<p>"He is the best man that ever lived!" broke in Peleg enthusiastically.
+"He has been just like a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[Pg 175]</a></span> father to me, and if he was my real father I
+should be the proudest man in all Kentucky."</p>
+
+<p>"That would mean a great many people," suggested Israel with a smile. "I
+understand there are new settlers arriving every day. I have heard that
+Logan's Fort and Harrodsburgh are filling in very fast."</p>
+
+<p>"So I have heard," responded Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"If the Indians would only leave us free!"</p>
+
+<p>"But they will not," broke in Henry. "They say white people not make any
+more settlements, and it not long before they drive out those that are here."</p>
+
+<p>"Let them try!" said Israel dryly.</p>
+
+<p>"They have been trying," remarked Peleg. "There is not a day that we
+have not seen some signs of the Shawnees or Delawares prowling around the forts."</p>
+
+<p>"They have not made any open attack for some time now," suggested Israel Boone.</p>
+
+<p>Henry shook his head as he said: "That means they only wait. Pretty soon
+you see. They feel for white men like wolf feel for bear."</p>
+
+<p>"And that is about the same love that a dog has for a cat," suggested
+Peleg with a laugh.</p>
+
+<p>"That is it," acknowledged Henry soberly. "I never know why bear and
+wolf no like each other. They kill many other things, but when wolf
+find<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[Pg 176]</a></span> trail of bear he call to all his friends and they begin to chase
+Mr. Bear. One day I saw a pack of wolves chasing big bear."</p>
+
+<p>"Was the bear running from them?" inquired Israel.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, he run much fast. By and by he come to place where he can go no
+more, then he stand up with his back to tree, and the way he cuff those
+wolves first one side, then on other, make me laugh."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Peleg, "I have seen the same thing myself. It is like the
+feeling that Sam Oliver says the otter has for the beaver."</p>
+
+<p>"Or the mink for the ermine," suggested Israel.</p>
+
+<p>"Both mink and ermine bad as they can be," said Henry, shaking his head.
+"They kill all things not so strong as they."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," suggested Peleg, "I think the mink and ermine are about the worst
+animals alive. The mink is three or four times as big as the ermine is
+and has a good deal more strength&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"But the ermine so quick," interrupted Henry. "He so quick," he
+repeated, "and he most bloodthirsty little animal in the forest. When he
+begin to fight he always fight on until either he is killed or mink is killed."</p>
+
+<p>"Sam Oliver was telling me the last time he was in the settlement," said
+Peleg, "that last winter<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[Pg 177]</a></span> he was trailing a fox that was chasing a
+rabbit, and when Sam came to his trap-line he heard, away off to one
+side, a mink scream. He says you can hear a mink scream almost a quarter
+of a mile away. He was trapping minks and he thought he had one caught,
+so he turned and started for his trap. When he got there he saw, so he
+said, the biggest fight he ever saw in the woods. A mink was caught in
+his trap and an ermine was fighting him.</p>
+
+<p>"Pretty quick he saw that instead of there being only one there were two
+of the ermine. They kept walking around the mink in a circle and kept
+going faster and faster until by and by one of them, quick as lightning,
+right in front of the mink, jumped for him, and almost at the same time
+the other ermine jumped in, too, and tried to get a grip on the mink's
+neck. They must have tried that same thing before, because this time he
+heard the mink scream, too, though he was doing something besides. For
+about half a minute Sam said he couldn't hear or see much of anything
+except the fracas. Then just about as swiftly as the two ermine had
+jumped into the fight, they jumped out and began to circle around the
+mink again. The next time they tried to get the neck hold only one of
+them slipped back. The other got his teeth fastened right where he
+wanted them, and you know they are like needles. Then the other ermine
+came back and he, too, got<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[Pg 178]</a></span> a throat hold. In just a few minutes the
+whole affair was ended and the ermine came out ahead. Sam said he could
+have walked up to them and picked them up, they were so excited,
+squeaking like mice, and trying to tear the dead mink all to pieces."</p>
+
+<p>"Sam got the two ermine then, didn't he?" inquired Israel.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. I told him, though, I thought they had earned their right to live,
+but Sam never feels that way about such things."</p>
+
+<p>The reference to Sam Oliver had brought a scowl to the face of Henry and
+caused him to become silent as long as the hunter was a topic of
+conversation.</p>
+
+<p>In the succeeding days reports of the presence of Indians steadily
+increased. Several men toiling in the fields were fired upon by Shawnees
+who had crept up to the border of the forest.</p>
+
+<p>Steadily the Indians showed their determination to do their utmost to
+prevent the settlers from making homes in their hunting grounds. The
+hostilities of the Shawnees became more marked with every passing month.
+Indeed, so many were the manifestations of their plan to attack the
+settlements that finally Colonel Clark, who at this time had been given
+the command of all military forces in Kentucky, became so convinced
+that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[Pg 179]</a></span> there was a plan in the minds of the Indians to assemble a great
+body of their warriors to destroy the border forts and their inhabitants
+that he begged the pioneer scout to act as a spy and to assume charge of
+other spies that were to be sent among the tribes to learn their numbers
+as well as their designs.</p>
+
+<p>Daniel Boone, fully aware of the danger, and in spite of his desire to
+remain at home, responded to this new call because he looked upon
+himself as in a measure answerable for the safety of the people whom he
+had induced to come into Kentucky. At this time the region was known as
+the "dark and bloody ground," so many had been the attacks and conflicts
+between the incoming whites and their Indian foes.</p>
+
+<p>Daniel Boone ordered his spies to start out in different directions, and
+after they had scoured the country for miles around, they were to meet
+at a time and place agreed upon and report what they had discovered and
+form their plans for the future.</p>
+
+<p>Convinced at last that there was no immediate danger of a concerted
+attack by the Indians, the scout returned to Boonesborough and resumed his labours.</p>
+
+<p>"Peleg," said Boone one day not long after his return, "we must have
+some salt. I shall take a party to Blue Licks. Will you come?"</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[Pg 180]</a></span></p><p>"Yes, sir," replied Peleg promptly.</p>
+
+<p>"I shall leave Israel at home to protect the family, but I shall want
+you and Henry to go with me. We ought to have a party of twenty-five or
+thirty men not only to make the salt, but to keep back the Shawnees, who
+are likely to make trouble for us if we are not strong enough to defend ourselves."</p>
+
+<p>The following day Daniel Boone, together with Peleg and twenty-six other
+men, departed for the salt springs, or Blue Licks, as they were called
+by the settlers. Neither of the scouts, however, was aware that he was
+there to meet with the most thrilling adventure of his life.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[Pg 181]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XIX</h2>
+
+<h3>THE CAPTURE</h3>
+
+<p>Several days of hard work followed the arrival of the party at the salt
+springs. Fireplaces had to be made, boilers arranged, and the water
+evaporated, leaving its deposit of salt, so necessary in the life of the
+people of Boonesborough.</p>
+
+<p>The process, however, was exceedingly slow, although the men toiled day
+and night because of their desire to return to their homes, and their
+fear of the prowling Indians. On the third day, when the supplies of
+food were low, Daniel Boone suggested that he should for a time leave
+his companions at their task while he secured some game which might be
+prepared for their dinner that night.</p>
+
+<p>Taking his rifle and shaking his head when Peleg offered to accompany
+him, the hunter departed. No one expected him to be gone more than an
+hour. When, however, three hours had elapsed his friends became
+increasingly uneasy. They had relied on their numbers as being a
+sufficient protection against the prowling Indians. The savages<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[Pg 182]</a></span> were
+known to be near, and occasionally they had been seen skulking from tree
+to tree. Because of this condition, the decision of Daniel Boone to go
+alone had been opposed by his companions, and as his absence continued
+there was increasing anxiety for his safety.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile, if Peleg and his companions had known what had befallen the
+scout, they would have had even stronger grounds for their fears.</p>
+
+<p>For some reason Boone was unable to discover any game in the immediate
+proximity of the camp, so he proceeded several miles through the forest
+in his search. When he halted at last and looked about him he concluded
+that he must be at least four miles from the Blue Lick Springs. He was
+aware of the peril which might beset a lonely hunter at such times, and
+as the afternoon sun was steadily declining, decided to retrace his way toward camp.</p>
+
+<p>As he turned abruptly he was startled to behold five young Indians swiftly approaching.</p>
+
+<p>Without hesitating a moment Boone whirled about and ran. Exerting
+himself to the utmost, he sped through the forest, closely followed by
+his pursuers, who, for some reason which he did not understand, had not fired upon him.</p>
+
+<p>Capable as Boone was of a long-continued race, speed could not be his
+main reliance. He was no<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[Pg 183]</a></span> longer a young man, and his pursuers were in
+the prime of their young manhood.</p>
+
+<p>Glancing behind him, Boone was aware that his enemies were gaining upon
+him. Wheeling suddenly he darted into the brush, then leaped into a
+swiftly running stream and ran with the current for one hundred feet or
+more before he jumped to the bank on the opposite side and once more resumed his flight.</p>
+
+<p>Apparently, however, it was impossible for him to shake off his
+pursuers. Doggedly they held to the chase, and the conviction was
+strengthening in Boone's mind that not only were the young warriors
+gaining steadily upon him, but also that they were maintaining a pace
+which would soon be too great for him to keep up. Indeed it was only a
+few minutes later when by an unusual burst of speed his enemies overtook and surrounded him.</p>
+
+<p>Boone smiled in spite of his peril when he saw that their first demand
+was for his rifle. It was plain that they knew who he was and were proud
+of their success in capturing the great scout. One of the young Indians
+was able to speak a few words of English, and advancing to Boone he
+extended his hand as a token of friendship and shook hands after the
+manner of the white people.</p>
+
+<p>"Big scout broder," said the young warrior, "No shoot. No kill."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[Pg 184]</a></span></p><p>Boone smilingly nodded his head in token of comprehension and without
+demur followed his captors as they led him rapidly through the forest.
+If he was chagrined or cast down his feeling was not betrayed by his countenance.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians seldom spoke as they proceeded, and Boone's surprise was
+great when after an advance of an hour he was taken into the midst of a
+group of one hundred and fifty Shawnee warriors.</p>
+
+<p>Here, too, the hunter was recognized, and there were many expressions of
+delight over the capture of the man whom all the Indians of the region
+knew and feared. Boone soon was to learn that they also entertained for
+him a feeling close to affection.</p>
+
+<p>Apparently unmoved by the peril in which he now found himself, Boone
+looked quietly into the faces of the braves and awaited their action.</p>
+
+<p>In a brief time, in the midst of the band, he was conducted back toward
+Blue Lick Springs. Surprised at first by the direction in which they
+were moving, his fears for his friends increased with every passing
+mile. They were outnumbered by the Indians in the approaching party, and
+were without his leadership. How would they be able to defend themselves from an attack?</p>
+
+<p>This question was unanswered when the band arrived within a half mile of
+the place they were<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[Pg 185]</a></span> seeking. Then one of the younger chiefs approached
+Boone and said in his broken English: "Big hunter. No hurt. Broders of
+big hunter no hurt. No shoot."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean," inquired Boone, "that my friends will be taken prisoners and not shot?"</p>
+
+<p>The Indian laughed, for his pleasure at the apparent success of their
+undertaking was manifest, and he said: "No shoot. No kill white broder."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean," asked Boone once more, "that if they do not shoot, you will not?"</p>
+
+<p>"No shoot. No hurt," answered the Indian.</p>
+
+<p>"Which means that you will take us all to your village?"</p>
+
+<p>The Indian nodded in assent.</p>
+
+<p>"And if they do not shoot and you make captives of them, do you promise
+that you will not harm them when you take them to your village?"</p>
+
+<p>"No shoot. No hurt," repeated the Indian, nodding his head several times
+to add emphasis to his words. "Big scout go with Owaneeyo&mdash;tell broders."</p>
+
+<p>"You want me to tell them that you are here, and that if they do not
+shoot then you will not shoot, either, and that you give your word that
+they will not be harmed if they go with you to your village?"</p>
+
+<p>The Indian smiled broadly as he said: "Big scout go with Injun&mdash;tell
+broder. Shawnee no<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[Pg 186]</a></span> shoot. No hurt white broder. White broder shoot,
+Shawnee shoot. No take white broder to village, take white broder scalp."</p>
+
+<p>For a few moments Boone silently considered. He well knew that it would
+be impossible for his friends to escape the united attack of the
+Shawnees. Every warrior was armed with a gun, and, as the band
+outnumbered the whites nearly five to one, it would be worse than
+useless for them to attempt to defend themselves. On the other hand, if
+they submitted quietly it might be possible partly to disarm the captors
+of their watchfulness, and as there were so many of the whites some
+opportunity might arise that would provide an avenue for escape. In the
+latter event the chances that more of the men would escape alive were
+much better than they would be if they attempted to defend themselves at the present time.</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly, Boone said to the young chief: "I will go with you to tell
+my brothers what the chiefs say if you will come with me unarmed."</p>
+
+<p>For a moment there was an expression of anger or suspicion in the eyes
+of the stalwart young Indian, but it quickly passed, and he said: "Big
+scout no lie. Owaneeyo go without gun. Tell broders what Owaneeyo say to scout."</p>
+
+<p>Turning to his companions the young chief gave his command for them to
+encircle the springs where<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[Pg 187]</a></span> the white men were at work. As soon as his
+orders had been obeyed he stepped up to Boone and bowed low to indicate
+his readiness to accompany the scout.</p>
+
+<p>Without a word both advanced, with Boone moving directly before his
+companion. They soon came to the spot where the whites were engaged in
+their task, all unaware of the peril that was threatening them.</p>
+
+<p>Many curious glances were given the companion of the scout when Boone
+and the chief first appeared. In compliance with Boone's suggestion, the
+men gave up their labours and assembled to hear what the chief had to say.</p>
+
+<p>The speech of Owaneeyo was not long, but every word held a meaning which
+strongly impressed the listening settlers.</p>
+
+<p>When the chief ceased speaking Boone himself stepped forward and said:
+"My friends, there is nothing else to do. I am sure you would not credit
+me with being a coward. I am speaking that which I know. There are at
+least one hundred and fifty of the Shawnees here and they are in a
+circle all about us right now. We have no defences behind which to
+fight, and they are able to pick us off without exposing themselves. If
+we run we should find in whatever direction we went that we were going
+straight into their arms. They<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[Pg 188]</a></span> promise us that if we do not fire upon
+them they will not shoot any of us. The chief also has agreed to see
+that we have good treatment not only here and on our way to their
+village, but also after we arrive there."</p>
+
+<p>There were some murmurs of disapproval, but the word and the example of
+the scout were both so influential that assent was soon given, and the
+chief was told that the white men would make no protest.</p>
+
+<p>At his bidding their rifles were all deposited in one place. A moment
+later he emitted a loud call, and almost as if they had sprung from the
+ground itself the Shawnees came running to the place where the settlers
+were awaiting them.</p>
+
+<p>The entire party soon left the springs, the white prisoners being
+scattered among the warriors in such a manner that no two were able to
+converse. In spite of the fierce glances of some of the braves, there
+was slight fear on Boone's part that the word of Owaneeyo would be
+broken. Cruel the Indian might be in his own way, and treacherous
+according to the standards of the whites, but his promise, once having
+been given, was binding.</p>
+
+<p>The band moved rapidly, stopping only occasionally by night. Not one of
+the prisoners was aware what Indian village was to be their destination,
+although the scout, from his familiarity with the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[Pg 189]</a></span> region through which
+they were conducted, was convinced that they were being taken to the
+place called Chillicothe.</p>
+
+<p>His surmise proved to be correct, and on the fifth day the returning
+party with their prisoners arrived at the capital of the Shawnees. Their
+coming was greeted with cries and shouts and many expressions of delight
+by the Indians of Chillicothe. To these, however, the warriors gave
+slight heed, and the prisoners endeavoured to follow their example,
+though it was difficult for some of them completely to assume an air of
+indifference. What the fate of the captives was to be was not to be
+known until the following day.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[Pg 190]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XX</h2>
+
+<h3>AN OFFER OF RELEASE</h3>
+
+<p>There had been slight opportunity for Peleg to have any conversation
+with his friend throughout the march.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians, rejoiced over their success in making a prisoner of the
+great scout, nevertheless appeared to be fearful lest the man whom they
+valued so highly should escape. Throughout the journey the prisoners
+were treated with consideration, although when night came and the halts
+were made for rest the white men were compelled to sleep within a circle
+formed by their captors. In this way they were deprived of every
+possibility of escape. When, however, they had arrived at the old
+village of Chillicothe, there were a few minutes when Daniel Boone and
+Peleg and several of their comrades were left together in the wigwam
+into which they had been thrust.</p>
+
+<p>"Peleg," said Daniel Boone in a low voice, "what a mistake our enemies have made."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean?" inquired Peleg quickly.</p>
+
+<p>"If they had taken us to Boonesborough or to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[Pg 191]</a></span> Logan's Fort and there had
+shown us to the settlers they could have demanded almost any price they
+might choose for our ransom."</p>
+
+<p>"Will they not do it yet?" inquired Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"I hardly think so," replied the scout, shaking his head. "The Indians
+are like children in many ways. When they have been successful, either
+on the warpath or in the chase, they immediately return to their friends
+to celebrate their good fortune with them. They are easily elated, and
+are almost childish in seeking the praise of those whose opinions they
+value. That is the reason why they have come back to the village with
+their twenty-eight prisoners."</p>
+
+<p>"What will happen to us?" inquired Peleg anxiously.</p>
+
+<p>"That no man can say. All that I am sure of is that we must bear
+whatever comes in the spirit of those who know that it is the best thing
+that could happen for every one of us."</p>
+
+<p>"If they burn us at the stake?" inquired Peleg bitterly.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, even if they burn us at the stake. It will be hard to bear if they
+do that, but I am not without hope that they will adopt some other course."</p>
+
+<p>"They may make us run the gauntlet."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, they may," admitted Boone, "but there is one thing, Peleg, we do
+not have to do."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[Pg 192]</a></span></p><p>"What is that, sir?"</p>
+
+<p>"We do not have to bear anything before it comes. All that any man can
+do is to prepare for what may befall him, and then, whatever comes, bear
+it like a man. But he who worries over his troubles before they arrive
+is in no condition to bear them after they come."</p>
+
+<p>"I know that is your way of thinking," said Peleg, "but I have not learned it yet."</p>
+
+<p>"That's the correct word, Peleg."</p>
+
+<p>"What word?" inquired the younger scout quickly.</p>
+
+<p>"The word 'learned,' No one has it at the beginning of his life. Even
+Preacher Lythe told us one time that he, like Paul, 'learned' in
+whatsoever state he was, therewith to be content."</p>
+
+<p>"So have you!" said Peleg cordially.</p>
+
+<p>Boone smiled and shook his head as he replied: "I have learned not to
+reveal all my feelings. Beyond that I cannot say. But I am so fully
+convinced that whatever befalls me in this life is part of a great plan,
+that it would be foolish for me to complain or whine. Whatever happens,
+no one shall ever be able to say that he heard a whimper from Daniel
+Boone. Whate'er may come to us, lad, do not let any of these Shawnees
+see that you are in the least cast down."</p>
+
+<p>"I shall do my best."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[Pg 193]</a></span></p><p>"I am hopeful," said Boone, "that we shall not be treated severely.
+Chief Owaneeyo gave us his promise when we surrendered that we should be
+treated with kindness both on our journey and after we arrived at the
+Indian village. I believe he spoke truly."</p>
+
+<p>"What I am afraid of," said Peleg, "is that some of these braves will
+not listen to him. I think Owaneeyo will live up to his promise as far
+as he is able."</p>
+
+<p>"There, Peleg, you are borrowing trouble again. What shall I do with
+you?" said Boone gently. "For myself, I shall look for the better side,
+and if the hard times come I shall bear them as I may be able, but I am
+expecting that things will not be as bad as you fear, and I shall keep
+myself ready if Providence reveals any opening for our release. I
+believe firmly that such an opening will come and that we shall yet go
+back to our friends."</p>
+
+<p>"I hope so," said Peleg fervently.</p>
+
+<p>"But whatever comes, Peleg, you must be cheerful, at least in your
+appearance. If the Indians see that you are cast down or afraid, they
+will immediately lose their respect for you, and no one can tell what may happen."</p>
+
+<p>In a measure the words of the scout proved to be true. The prisoners
+were treated with kindness and were assigned to various members of the
+tribe<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[Pg 194]</a></span> in such a manner that they seldom had an opportunity of
+conversing with one another.</p>
+
+<p>Mindful of the directions of the great scout, Peleg did his utmost to
+maintain a cheerful manner. He was confident, too, as the days passed,
+that however heavy his own heart might be the Shawnees were sure that he
+was adapting himself to the life of their tribe and was not unhappy in their midst.</p>
+
+<p>A few days after the captives had been brought into the village,
+Owaneeyo came to Boone one morning and said: "Big scout shoot. No shoot
+brave, shoot&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>The word which he wished to use failed the young chief, but laughing
+heartily he conducted the hunter to a place where Daniel Boone saw that
+a target had been erected. He concluded that the plan of the Indian was
+for him to enter into a contest with some of the best shots among the Shawnees.</p>
+
+<p>With apparent eagerness he accepted the invitation, and soon many of the
+warriors were assembled, keenly watching the contest between Boone and
+three of the braves.</p>
+
+<p>Daniel Boone wisely was shooting well, but not too well. Two of his
+competitors he easily outdid, but the third, who was Owaneeyo himself,
+and no mean shot, he permitted to beat him. The glee<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[Pg 195]</a></span> of the Indian when
+the match was ended was so marked and childish that Boone instantly
+decided that if future contests of a similar character were held he knew
+what his own course of action must be.</p>
+
+<p>The following day a second contest was arranged, and at Boone's
+suggestion Peleg also was summoned to share in it.</p>
+
+<p>"Lad," whispered Boone, while he was apparently bending over his rifle
+and looking to its priming, "I am sure if we are careful we shall soon
+be permitted to have our own rifles. Perhaps you can get yours now for
+the match, if you want it, but my advice to you in any event is to let
+the Indians beat you, but not too easily."</p>
+
+<p>The delight of the Indians was even greater than on the preceding day,
+when Owaneeyo and one of his warriors succeeded in making a better
+record than Peleg and were tied with the work which the scout did.</p>
+
+<p>At frequent intervals throughout the autumn these contests were held. In
+every event the white scouts were careful to shoot well, but not too
+well. So manifest was the feeling of affection and confidence among the
+Shawnees, especially for Daniel Boone, that it was not long before the
+white men, one or two at a time, were permitted to accompany the Indians
+whenever they went on the hunting path.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[Pg 196]</a></span></p><p>In this manner the winter passed and already there were promises of the
+return of spring. March had come and the snows were beginning to
+disappear from the depths of the forest. It was in this month that
+Owaneeyo came to Daniel Boone one day, saying eagerly: "Broder go with Shawnees."</p>
+
+<p>"Go where?" inquired Boone. His anxiety for his family in their faraway
+home by the Kentucky by this time had become almost unbearable. As they
+were unaware of the fate which had befallen him and his companions, and
+yet were fully aware of the cruelty of the Indians and the hatred which
+they had manifested for the settlers at Boonesborough, the scout was
+continually thinking of the anxiety which must possess his own family at
+this time. Not a word had come to them concerning his safety or his
+whereabouts, and there was no means by which such word might be sent. It
+was therefore with a feeling of consternation which it was difficult for
+him to conceal that he heard the statement of the young chief.</p>
+
+<p>"Broder see where go," laughed the Indian, as if he was preserving some
+great pleasure for his friend.</p>
+
+<p>Aware that protests were vain, Boone, with apparent cordiality,
+expressed his desire to accompany the Indians, although he was ignorant
+of the destination of the proposed journey.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[Pg 197]</a></span></p><p>To his surprise, the following day when the party set forth from the
+village, he found Peleg and nine other whites in the company.</p>
+
+<p>There was no opportunity, however, for conversation among the captives,
+who, in spite of the freedom which of late had been granted them by the
+Shawnees, now were watched more carefully as the warriors sped through the forest.</p>
+
+<p>When the band at last arrived at Detroit, Boone was not surprised at the
+destination. Here several days elapsed before Owaneeyo expressed his
+purpose to return. Just why Boone had been compelled to accompany the
+Indians the scout did not yet understand.</p>
+
+<p>However, on the day before their departure, Governor Hamilton summoned
+Owaneeyo and Daniel Boone to his quarters.</p>
+
+<p>After a few preliminary words the Governor said to the Indian: "I will
+give you &pound;100 for the ransom of this man."</p>
+
+<p>A scowl instantly appeared upon the face of the chief and he turned as
+if about to depart from the presence of the Governor.</p>
+
+<p>Wheeling abruptly about, however, his eyes shining and an expression
+upon his face which showed how deep his feeling was, he said: "No sell
+broder. He my broder." As he spoke, Owaneeyo looked steadily into the
+eyes of the scout, and there was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[Pg 198]</a></span> no question in the mind of Daniel
+Boone as to the sincerity of the young chief's feelings.</p>
+
+<p>"But he is a white man," protested the Governor.</p>
+
+<p>"He my broder," declared Owaneeyo, as if no further explanation need be made.</p>
+
+<p>"Ask him if he would rather go with you or stay here."</p>
+
+<p>"I would rather go," said Daniel Boone, "than have you pay so much gold
+for my release. The Shawnees have been good to me, and though I am a
+white man, my own friends and country could not deal more kindly with me
+than have Owaneeyo and his tribe."</p>
+
+<p>"No take gold," said Owaneeyo, and strode from the Governor's quarters as he spoke.</p>
+
+<p>Boone delayed a few minutes, explaining to the Governor that it would be
+impossible for him to accept such a ransom, saying in his simple way: "I
+am in the hands of a greater Governor than even you, Governor Hamilton,
+and I am sure that the right in the end will be done."</p>
+
+<p>Apparently the commander was not yet fully persuaded, for on the
+following morning, before the Shawnees departed from Detroit, several of
+the Englishmen at the post, deeply touched with sympathy for the scout
+in his captivity, came to Boone himself with offerings of money for his
+release. The sturdy scout smiled, however, and shook his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[Pg 199]</a></span> head,
+explaining that it would be impossible for him to accept such benefits
+which would forever be beyond his power to return or repay.</p>
+
+<p>"But you need never return the money to us. It may be our turn to be
+prisoners of the Indians soon, and then some one will have to do for us
+what we now are trying to do for you," protested one of the men.</p>
+
+<p>"I cannot take your gifts," said the hunter shortly. It was manifest
+that all efforts to induce him to change his decision would be
+fruitless.</p>
+
+<p>In a few hours the entire band of Shawnees and their captives set forth
+on their return to Chillicothe. No reference was made by Owaneeyo to the
+offer which had been made by the Governor and his friends, but it was
+plain to Daniel Boone throughout their long march that the chief's
+feeling of affection for him had been greatly strengthened by what had
+occurred at Detroit.</p>
+
+<p>However, when the party at last arrived at the Indian town, even Daniel
+Boone was startled by the proposition which was made by one of the Shawnee chiefs.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[Pg 200]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XXI</h2>
+
+<h3>FLIGHT</h3>
+
+<p>"What do you think, Peleg?" inquired Boone a few days after the return
+from Detroit. "Blackfish wishes to adopt me into his family."</p>
+
+<p>"What!" exclaimed Peleg in amazement.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. One of his sons was killed not long ago and he wishes me to take
+his place. I do not know how much older my foster-father will be than I
+am. As a rule I think it is wise for a father to be a little older than
+his son," added Boone quizzically. "But it won't make any great
+difference in this case."</p>
+
+<p>"You are not going to allow it, are you?" repeated Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"I must. Blackfish seems to be very fond of me, and since we came back
+from Detroit, Owaneeyo has spread many reports of my devotion to the
+tribe. He little realizes what restraint I have had to put upon myself,
+and how there are times when it seems to me that I would almost give my
+life for the privilege of looking upon the faces of my<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[Pg 201]</a></span> family once
+more. It will never do for me to refuse."</p>
+
+<p>Peleg said no more, but in spite of the scout's information he was
+scarcely prepared for the "adoption" which followed in a short time.</p>
+
+<p>In the presence of the family of Blackfish and of some of the leading
+warriors of the tribe, a good deal of hair was pulled from the head of
+Boone, leaving his scalp-lock not unlike that of the Indians. His body
+then was bathed in several waters, the medicine-men who performed the
+act claiming that in this way his white blood was washed away, and he
+became essentially a Shawnee in nature as well as in name. A feast
+followed the formality of adoption, and then Daniel Boone was given a
+name&mdash;"The Man with the Long Rifle"&mdash;and formally declared to be a son
+of the great Chief Blackfish.</p>
+
+<p>There was a slight change in the treatment which Boone and his
+companions received after this event. The increasing confidence of the
+Indians was manifest, and found its most complete expression when a few
+days afterward they sent Boone, together with two or three white men and
+a score of warriors, to the springs of the Sciota to make salt.</p>
+
+<p>Upon their return from this expedition Boone was alarmed as well as
+astonished by the appearance of the Shawnee braves. Many of them were
+daubed in their war paint, and it was apparent on<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[Pg 202]</a></span> every side that the
+warriors were preparing for battle.</p>
+
+<p>It was not difficult for the great scout to learn that the object of the
+campaign was to take the little settlement on the Kentucky, where his
+home was located.</p>
+
+<p>Familiar as he was with the Indian customs, Boone was aware that more
+extensive preparations than he had yet seen would be made before the
+warriors started on the warpath. Meanwhile, he was determined to escape
+from the Indian village, and return with his warning to his friends on the Kentucky.</p>
+
+<p>In spite of the freedom he enjoyed, he knew that it would be extremely
+difficult for him to escape. At least one hundred and sixty miles of
+forest and wilderness intervened between the village and Boonesborough.
+To obtain supplies of food, or weapons by which he might defend himself
+from beasts and warriors, was well-nigh impossible.</p>
+
+<p>Nevertheless the determined man decided to try to escape from the
+Shawnees at the first favourable opportunity. He was fully aware that he
+must not do anything to arouse the suspicions of the tribe. Yet the time
+of the departure of the warriors could not be far distant.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile, he talked over these matters in the occasional interviews he
+was permitted to have<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[Pg 203]</a></span> with Peleg. Almost all the younger scout knew,
+however, was that his friend had determined, when the proper time
+arrived, to flee from the village and warn the settlers of their peril.
+It was also understood that, after the departure of the scout, if Peleg
+should see the least opportunity, he, too, would attempt to leave the Indian village.</p>
+
+<p>When June came the great scout saw that the men were preparing for a
+march within a few days. Whatever he was to do must be done quickly. No
+opportunity had been granted for a further word with his young friend,
+when early one morning Boone fled from Chillicothe.</p>
+
+<p>A small piece of jerked venison was all the food he had been able to
+take with him on his long journey. He was without rifle or knife and
+before him stretched a pathless forest through which he must flee one
+hundred and sixty miles before he again would be among his friends! No
+one knew better than Boone himself that it was to be a race for life,
+for pursuit on the morrow was as certain as the rising of the sun.</p>
+
+<p>Nevertheless with the same quiet courage which had ever been the great
+scout's strong reliance, he struck out for the Ohio River. Through the
+deep forests, over the high crags and rocks, across the creeks and
+following the courses of the river, by day and by night, he forced his tireless way.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[Pg 204]</a></span></p><p>Success crowned his efforts at last, and he gained the shores of the
+Ohio. But when he arrived upon the bank he found the river full and at
+least a mile in width.</p>
+
+<p>Unable to swim, for a time the scout was uncertain what his next move
+should be. Fortunately, he found, on the bank near the place where he
+was standing, an old canoe which had been driven against the shore.
+Although the little craft was untrustworthy, one end having been badly
+broken, the intrepid man succeeded in paddling his way in it to the opposite bank.</p>
+
+<p>Four days and four nights the scout had been running with only an
+occasional brief respite. Throughout that time he had eaten but one
+meal. His strength was failing, but his hope was strong, for Daniel
+Boone was aware now that he was near to his home. At last the quaint
+fort was seen before him and the end of the journey had been gained.</p>
+
+<p>The return of the scout was almost like that of one who had come back
+from the dead. Every man in the little settlement had believed that
+Daniel Boone was to be seen no more. No tidings had come from faraway
+Chillicothe, and no one in Boonesborough had any means of knowing what
+had befallen the party in their labours at Blue Licks.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[Pg 205]</a></span></p><p>"Where is my wife? Where are my children?" demanded Boone as soon as he
+entered the fort.</p>
+
+<p>"Gone," answered Sam Oliver, who at the time was making one of his
+occasional visits at the settlement.</p>
+
+<p>"'Gone!'" repeated Boone in astonishment. "'Gone!' Where?"</p>
+
+<p>"Your wife and all your children except Jemima have gone back to North
+Carolina. They all believed you to be dead and your wife felt that she
+could no longer remain here. Jemima is the only one that stayed."</p>
+
+<p>It was not long before the scout found his intrepid daughter, who in
+spite of the departure of the other members of the family had been
+strong in her conviction that either her father would return or some
+definite word concerning his fate would be received. For that reason she
+had remained in the fort.</p>
+
+<p>Not a moment was to be lost. Weary, indeed almost exhausted by his long
+flight, as soon as food and a brief rest had been obtained Boone at once
+helped the little garrison to work day and night upon their
+fortifications. New gates were made and double bastions were speedily
+completed. The horses and cattle were driven in from the fields, and
+powder and balls prepared. Before ten days had elapsed the fort was in
+readiness for the coming of the enemy.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[Pg 206]</a></span></p><p>Early in the morning of the final day, while Daniel Boone was himself
+on guard, he discovered a man approaching from the forest. Keenly
+watching the indistinct figure and prepared for instant action, although
+as yet he had not summoned any of his companions, Boone soon was aware
+that the returning man was none other than his friend Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>The young scout was admitted by Boone, and in response to his queries he
+was soon describing what had befallen him.</p>
+
+<p>In the midst of the excitement which had followed the escape of Boone,
+Peleg found the opportunity for which he himself had been waiting, and
+he, too, fled from the little village. In some ways, however, he had
+been more successful than his friend, inasmuch as he had been able to
+secure both Singing Susan and some ammunition, together with a hunting-knife.</p>
+
+<p>"Have they followed you, lad?" inquired Boone eagerly.</p>
+
+<p>"I do not know. They were filled with the plan of attacking the fort and
+I do not know whether anything has been done to turn them aside from it.
+I have had many trials," continued the young scout. "If I had not found
+the circles of stones which you left I could not have followed your
+trail. I do not know how you crossed the Ohio."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[Pg 207]</a></span></p><p>"I found an old canoe," explained Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"That makes everything plain, then," laughed Peleg, "for I used the same
+canoe. Some one must have brought it back or it had floated down stream;
+at any rate it saved me from getting Singing Susan wet. The first place
+I found your stones was about two miles from the river, at the spring
+where there is a little waterfall. I can't tell you what it meant to me,
+for I was not sure of my way. I tried to think of everything you had
+told me about the stars, the course of the streams, and the changes in
+the trees, and then every little while I climbed to the top of a hill
+when I came near one and got my bearings from there."</p>
+
+<p>"You are here, lad," said Boone. "You were led as I was. That is enough.
+Now tell me about the Shawnees. Are they coming?"</p>
+
+<p>"I think so, but the attack will be delayed several weeks."</p>
+
+<p>"Why is that?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because you escaped. They tried their best to overtake you, but when
+Owaneeyo and some of the other warriors of the tribe came back and said
+they had not found you, then Blackfish declared that you would come to
+the fort here to warn the settlers. They then decided, I think, to put
+off their march about three weeks."</p>
+
+<p>Boone nodded his head several times as if the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[Pg 208]</a></span> explanation Peleg had
+given was one that commended itself to his judgment. There was no
+alteration, however, in the plans of the scout for strengthening the
+defences of the little fort. By this time the alarm had spread
+throughout the little settlement and every man was alert.</p>
+
+<p>The delay in the coming of the Shawnees, however, continued so long that
+Boone concluded that they might have become discouraged by the report of
+their spies concerning the condition of the fort.</p>
+
+<p>Prowling Indians had been seen frequently in the vicinity of
+Boonesborough after the arrival of Peleg, and the scout now decided that
+it would be a good plan for him to turn the tables and with a party
+invade the country of the Shawnees themselves.</p>
+
+<p>Choosing nineteen men from the little garrison, he led them swiftly and
+silently as far as Paint Creek on the Sciota. He had come within four
+miles of the little Indian village, when unexpectedly the band met a
+party of thirty warriors, who were marching to join the expedition
+against Boonesborough.</p>
+
+<p>There was no opportunity for retreat or deliberation. Instantly Boone
+called upon his companions to follow his example and fired upon the
+astonished warriors.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[Pg 209]</a></span></p><p>The Shawnees without attempting to respond, and doubtless unaware of
+the numbers of their enemies, immediately turned and fled.</p>
+
+<p>The scout now halted his forces and sent two spies to discover what was
+taking place in the village. The men returned with the information that
+it had been abandoned.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as this information had been received, Boone summoned his
+followers and said to them: "I am convinced from the reports of our
+friends that a great army of the Indians is now marching against
+Boonesborough. Our friends are in almost as great danger as are we.
+There is nothing left for us except to return and make the best possible
+time in our march."</p>
+
+<p>Every one assented to the suggestion and the return was begun, the men
+marching day and night, hoping to elude the Indians, who, the scout now
+believed, were between them and Boonesborough.</p>
+
+<p>It was not long before the returning band discovered the trail of the
+advancing warriors. Thereupon the leader decided to make a detour and
+avoid his enemies. All unknown to the Indians, on the sixth day of the
+returning march the intrepid band passed the red men, and on the seventh
+arrived safely at Boonesborough.</p>
+
+<p>The following day five hundred hideously painted, thoroughly armed
+Indians appeared at the fort.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[Pg 210]</a></span></p><p>The alarm of the little garrison would have been still greater had they
+known that Duquesne, for whom Fort Pitt was first named, was in command
+of the entire band. Even Blackfish for the time had resigned his
+position as leader, preferring to have the skilful Frenchman assume the
+command in the attack on the fort. Nor was Captain Duquesne alone, for
+twelve of his countrymen also were with him to assist in leading the
+savages in their attack.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[Pg 211]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XXII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE COMING OF BLACKFISH</h3>
+
+<p>"Peleg," said Daniel Boone after the appearance of the enemy in front of
+the fort, "I understand now why it was that I was so long a prisoner of the Shawnees."</p>
+
+<p>Peleg expressed his question without replying in words and the hunter
+continued: "If I had not been a captive I never should have known how
+strong they are nor what their plans might be. And I think, too, that I
+never should have known what the relation is between the Shawnees and the French."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think we can hold this place?" inquired Peleg anxiously.</p>
+
+<p>"We shall do our best, lad, and the result is not altogether in our
+hands. I have sent messengers all through the settlements asking for reinforcements."</p>
+
+<p>The conversation was interrupted by the appearance of a messenger from
+the attacking army&mdash;a white man. Before he arrived at the stockade he
+was hailed by Daniel Boone, who, with Peleg, was standing on one of the bastions.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[Pg 212]</a></span></p><p>After a few preliminary words the man said: "I am instructed by Captain
+Duquesne to state to you that he has received orders from Governor
+Hamilton at Detroit to take this fort, but to save the lives of the
+people, if it is possible so to do."</p>
+
+<p>Boone gazed down into the face of the speaker, but did not reply.</p>
+
+<p>"I am further instructed by Captain Duquesne," resumed the messenger,
+"to ask you to send nine men from the fort to arrange for a treaty. You
+can meet the men from our army wherever you desire."</p>
+
+<p>"I shall report to you as soon as I have consulted my friends," said
+Daniel Boone as he and his companion retired to the fort.</p>
+
+<p>When the defenders were assembled Sam Oliver declared hotly: "I should
+never send nine men out to meet the redskins! It is one of their tricks,
+and not one of the nine will ever come back."</p>
+
+<p>"I do not feel that way about it," said Boone. "I suspect that it may be
+a trick, as you suggest, but it may help us to put off the beginning of
+the fight until some of the other settlers for whom we have sent can
+come to our aid. I favour sending a delegation of nine men to meet a
+delegation from the Indians, but the place must be within fire from the
+fort. I do not know how you feel, but for myself I am willing to say
+that we shall never <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[Pg 213]</a></span>surrender this place while there is one man left
+alive to defend it."</p>
+
+<p>"That's the way we all feel," said Sam Oliver, who still opposed the
+proposed meeting.</p>
+
+<p>Daniel Boone returned to the bastions and announced to the messenger
+that nine men would meet a party from the Indians in accordance with the
+proposition which had been made for the conference.</p>
+
+<p>Selecting eight of his followers, the scout led the way to the appointed
+place of meeting, which was sixty yards from the fort. There the little
+band met Captain Duquesne and eighteen or twenty Indians. The red
+warriors were silent, but their flashing eyes impressed the scout more
+than any words could have done.</p>
+
+<p>"What we propose," began Captain Duquesne, "is that every man in the
+fort shall swear allegiance to King George the Third and submit to our
+rule. If this can be done we can assure you that you may live in peace
+and retain all your property."</p>
+
+<p>Boone, who was the spokesman of the settlers, arose to reply. He knew
+little of the great struggle which at that time was going on for the
+independence of the colonies. His life on the border was too remote from
+the battlefields of the north and east, and only occasional rumours of
+the long contest came to the pioneers.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[Pg 214]</a></span></p><p>Boone's speech, conditionally agreeing to Duquesne's proposal, was
+followed by one from Blackfish. The old chief, looking only once upon
+his adopted son, and by the gleam in his eyes expressing his hatred,
+asserted that when two great armies entered into a treaty it was
+customary for the men to shake hands, and in doing so for two Indians to
+shake the hands of each white man. There were smiles among the men from
+the fort as they heard the smooth words of the crafty old chief, but as
+all the warriors and white men were unarmed they were not unduly alarmed.</p>
+
+<p>At that moment a gun was fired as a signal from the forest, and the
+Indian members of the council, advancing with open hands, grasped the
+hands of the white men. Instantly the warriors endeavoured to drag their
+white enemies toward the woods where many of the Shawnees were
+concealed. A desperate conflict followed, and the Indians from the main
+body begun to rush quickly toward the spot.</p>
+
+<p>At the same time the watching men at the fort began to pour a fire upon
+the approaching enemy, and in a few minutes, under stress of the
+excitement, the scout and his friends tore themselves from the grasp of
+the Indians and fled back to the fort. The heavy gate was closed and
+bolted as soon as they were behind the defences. <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[Pg 215]</a></span>Fortunately only one
+man had been wounded by the fire of the savages.</p>
+
+<p>Captain Duquesne and Blackfish now ordered an attack upon the fort. As
+the place was almost surrounded by woods except on the side toward the
+river, the attacking party was well protected. The advance was made from
+three sides at once.</p>
+
+<p>Amid the wild yells of the Indians a volley of bullets was poured into
+the fort, and as soon as the guns were discharged they were again loaded
+and a steady fire maintained.</p>
+
+<p>The defenders of the fort, however, were not wasting their scanty
+ammunition. Every man from his porthole, or the place which he was
+occupying on the bastions, was selecting his own special mark and every
+shot was telling in the work of death. The fight continued throughout
+the day, and when night fell, contrary to their custom, the Indians
+still maintained their attack.</p>
+
+<p>Another day and another night followed, without any break in the
+struggle. Daniel Boone was aware that the Indians were now being guided
+by Captain Duquesne and were not following their usual custom of
+abandoning an attack when darkness fell. Meanwhile Boone was moving from
+place to place encouraging his men and making sure that all things were well.</p>
+
+<p>Jemima Boone, by the direction of her father, was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[Pg 216]</a></span> firing through one of
+the portholes. In the second day of the fight a negro, who had fled from
+the fort, climbed into a tree near by, fired at the girl and wounded her.</p>
+
+<p>Daniel Boone, who at the moment was standing near his daughter,
+instantly peered through the porthole, discovered the deserter, and the
+report of his rifle was followed by the fall of the man from the tree in
+which he had hidden.</p>
+
+<p>Day followed day and still the attack was maintained. The Indians were
+unable to force an entrance into the place, but they were unwilling to
+abandon the attack.</p>
+
+<p>One afternoon Peleg came to Daniel Boone and, greatly excited, said: "Come with me!"</p>
+
+<p>Leading the way to the side of the fort which faced the river, he called
+the attention of the scout to the colour of the water.</p>
+
+<p>"What does that mean?" inquired Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"It means that the varmints are trying to dig a trench from the bank of
+the river to the fort," said Boone. "The earth they have thrown out has
+coloured the water. If they once get inside the fort they may compel us to surrender."</p>
+
+<p>"What can we do?" inquired Peleg. "We must do something!"</p>
+
+<p>"Come, I will show you," replied Boone quietly.</p>
+
+<p>Selecting several men to aid Peleg in his task,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[Pg 217]</a></span> he soon arranged for a
+counter trench to be dug which would cross that which the Indians were
+digging. Nor was it long before the discovery of the work of the
+defenders caused the red men to abandon their scheme.</p>
+
+<p>More furiously than before, the siege was continued. A new device was
+tried by the Indians on the fifth day.</p>
+
+<p>Arrows with burning brands attached to them were shot in such a manner
+that they struck the roofs of the houses within the fort. It was
+impossible for any one to prevent this work.</p>
+
+<p>At last a cry was raised that the fort itself was on fire. The cry,
+terrifying as it was, instantly brought Henry to the front, who said
+calmly: "I put out flame."</p>
+
+<p>For a moment every gun and voice within the fort was silent while the
+anxious inmates watched Henry as he made his way to the roof where the
+fire already was kindled. A wild yell from the Indians greeted the
+appearance of the young man and a shower of bullets fell all about him.</p>
+
+<p>Undismayed by his peril, Henry succeeded in making his way to the
+blazing arrow, flung it to the ground, and succeeded in putting out the
+fire. As he turned to make his way back to his friends another shower of
+bullets fell about him, and a groan escaped the watching defenders when
+they<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[Pg 218]</a></span> saw the young hero suddenly lose his grasp upon the roof, and
+after a brief struggle roll to the ground outside the walls.</p>
+
+<p>The numbers of those who had fallen within the fort had not been great,
+protected as they were by its wall and also by their own continued
+vigilance. The ranks of the assailants, however, steadily had been
+thinned, and on the ninth day, without any warning to the defenders, the
+attacking Shawnees withdrew from the place.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg was engaged in his duties in the fort on the morning following the
+siege when the scout approached him and, in response to the enthusiastic
+words of the boy, smiled as he said: "Well, we did pretty well, lad. We
+lost only two and had only four wounded."</p>
+
+<p>"And Henry was one of the killed," suggested Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"I do not know. He has not been found," replied Boone. "If one had to
+die I think Henry was the best one to go." In response to a look of
+inquiry from the boy, the scout continued: "He had no family; his white
+blood prevented him from being entirely at home among the Indians, while
+his Indian bringing-up would have prevented him forever from feeling
+that he was one of us. There were times when I was afraid for the life
+of Sam Oliver, so bitter was Henry's hatred of him."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[Pg 219]</a></span></p><p>"Do you know how many of the Indians were killed?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is reported that thirty-seven were killed and a great many wounded.
+It is difficult to say just what the losses were, because the Indians
+always carry away their dead and wounded."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think they will come back again?"</p>
+
+<p>The scout shook his head as he said: "The country hereabouts is
+increasing so rapidly in its population, and there are so many other
+stations now between Boonesborough and the Ohio, that I hardly think
+they will attack us again. Certainly not in the near future."</p>
+
+<p>"How is Jemima this morning?" asked Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"She will be all right in a few days," replied Boone. "It was only a
+flesh wound in the shoulder that she received."</p>
+
+<p>"What are you planning to do next?"</p>
+
+<p>"If you agree," replied Daniel Boone, "I shall leave you in charge of my
+farm and start as soon as I can for North Carolina, to bring back my family."</p>
+
+<p>It was not long before the scout set forth alone on his journey to the
+Yadkin, whither his wife had gone with all her children except Jemima,
+to find a refuge in her father's house, after she had become convinced
+that Daniel Boone had been killed by the Indians.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[Pg 220]</a></span></p><p>The journey was successfully made and the coming of Boone was to his
+wife almost like the return of one from the dead. There were some
+matters on the Yadkin, however, which prevented their immediate
+departure, and it was not until several weeks had elapsed that the scout
+with his family returned to Boonesborough.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile Peleg had looked carefully after the farm which his friend
+owned, and he received warm words of praise for his efforts when Boone came back.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the scout saw that his family once more was established in
+the settlement, and the attacks of the Indians, for a time at least, had
+ceased, with his brother, who also now had joined the settlers, he once
+more started for Blue Licks to make salt, of which the settlers and
+their cattle were greatly in need.</p>
+
+<p>"Are you not afraid to go to the Blue Licks?" inquired his brother when
+Boone was ready to set forth on his expedition.</p>
+
+<p>"Why should I be?" inquired Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"It was there that you were taken by the Indians."</p>
+
+<div class="center"><a name="i245.jpg" id="i245.jpg"></a><img src="images/i245.jpg" width='700' height='439' alt="The scout, with his family, returned to Boonesborough" /></div>
+
+<h4>"The scout, with his family, returned to Boonesborough"</h4>
+
+<p>"They say," replied the scout with a smile, "that lightning never
+strikes twice in the same place. I am not afraid. I think the Shawnees
+have been taught a good lesson. Colonel Bowman<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[Pg 221]</a></span> and his one hundred and
+sixty men, though he was not very successful in his attack upon old
+Chillicothe, nevertheless showed the Indians that we were not unmindful
+of their plans. And Colonel Harrod at all events, when he made his
+attack with the horsemen, certainly scattered the Indians on every side.
+I think they will remember both men, although I wish that we might have
+inflicted greater damage upon their village. The report is that only two
+scalps were taken, but that may mean very little. The attacks which
+Colonel Bird, with his five hundred Indians and Canadians, made upon
+Riddle's Station and the little station upon the Licking River, seem to
+me to show that the Indians are not ready to give up yet."</p>
+
+<p>Boone's assurance overcame the objections of his brother and persuaded
+him that there was no special danger attending their labours at Blue Licks.</p>
+
+<p>The confidence of the scout seemed warranted when several days had
+passed, the necessary salt had been made, and the two men were preparing
+to return to the fort. Not an Indian had been seen, nor had there been
+any signs of their presence.</p>
+
+<p>Hardly had the two men, however, set forth on their return when, without
+warning, they were attacked by a band of Indians. Boone's brother was
+killed and scalped. But the scout instantly darted into the thickest
+part of the forest. Owing<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[Pg 222]</a></span> to his superior knowledge of the country he
+was not overtaken at once; and running steadily and as swiftly as he was
+able, he at last sought refuge in a ravine, followed by a dog which the
+Indians were using to trail him. Boone waited quietly until the savage
+animal approached and then calmly shot it. Aware that the report of his
+rifle would reveal his presence to his enemies, the intrepid man, as the
+woods about him were dense and darkness was approaching, resolutely made
+his way into the forest again and resumed his flight toward Boonesborough.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[Pg 223]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XXIII</h2>
+
+<h3>FOUR WARRIORS AND MORE</h3>
+
+<p>With his usual coolness and fortitude, the great scout continued on his
+way, and without further trouble arrived at the fort.</p>
+
+<p>"Peleg," he said the following day, when the two were labouring in the
+field together, "Blue Licks somehow seems to be destined to be a place
+of trouble and sorrow for me. Only a few days ago my brother was calling
+my attention to that fact and now his death has confirmed his words. It
+grieves me that I could not even bring away his body. That, however, is
+a part of the fortune of pioneers, and as no man ever yet has heard me
+whine, I do not intend to begin now. But my brother's death is a source
+of very heavy sorrow to me."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think the Indians are planning another attack?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not right away. I suspect that they are trying to attack or capture me.
+Their anger against the settlement doubtless is as keen as ever, but
+they look upon me as one who has deserted their tribe. Some day they
+will find me. But I have<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[Pg 224]</a></span> one consolation, and that is that they will
+not find me unprepared."</p>
+
+<p>The words of the scout concerning the further attacks by the Indians
+were confirmed during the year that followed. The little settlement at
+Boonesborough steadily increased in numbers and prosperity. For a time,
+free from the attacks of the Indians, the families toiled in their
+fields. More extensive clearings were made and in the marvellously
+fertile soil the crops were bountiful. There were many new homes
+established in the community, too, for among the continually arriving
+settlers were many young women.</p>
+
+<p>In the quiet labours on his clearing Boone found peace and comfort such
+as he seldom had enjoyed. Peleg, who had secured some land adjoining the
+farm of his friend, worked with the scout and Israel, and as they
+assisted one another both places steadily improved.</p>
+
+<p>The feeling of Boone, however, that he was still an object of hatred
+among the Shawnees was confirmed repeatedly. His most critical
+experience came one day when, all unknown to the scout, four athletic
+Shawnees were detailed by Blackfish to approach the settlement without
+arousing any suspicions of their presence, watch the movements of the
+scout, and either bring him back to the tribe or bring his scalp.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[Pg 225]</a></span></p><p>On his farm the scout had erected, not far from his cabin, a little
+house in which he dried the tobacco he cultivated. The little building
+stood in the midst of his tobacco patch. Within the house there were
+three tiers of timber from which the tobacco leaves were hanging to dry.</p>
+
+<p>Boone and Peleg were busily engaged here one autumn day, almost
+unmindful of peril, the younger scout believing that the fears of his
+friend were without foundation.</p>
+
+<p>"The tobacco on this lower tier," said Boone after he had made a careful
+investigation, "seems to be entirely dry."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we had better change the sticks to the tier above," responded
+Peleg. "That will leave plenty of room for the leaves we have not
+brought in as yet."</p>
+
+<p>"That's a good suggestion," answered Boone, and together the two scouts
+began to transfer the sticks from the lower to the second tier.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg departed from the building to bring in more of the tobacco leaves
+and left Boone standing on the poles that separated the upper tiers.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly as the scout glanced below him he saw four Shawnee warriors
+stealthily enter through the door and laugh as they looked up to him.</p>
+
+<p>"You no get away some more," said one of them whom Boone recognized as
+Owaneeyo, "We take<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[Pg 226]</a></span> you to Chillicothe this time. You no cheat us some
+more."</p>
+
+<p>Every one of the savages was armed and looking up into Boone's face,
+while the direction in which the guns were aimed added force to this declaration.</p>
+
+<p>Not for a moment losing his self-control, and aware that he was in the
+greatest peril of his life, Boone's careful preparation now showed its
+value. "Ah!" said he quietly. "Glad to see you, my friends. How have you
+been this long time?"</p>
+
+<p>"Been heap mad," said Owaneeyo, frowning in a manner which betrayed his
+rising anger. "You come down."</p>
+
+<p>"I shall be very glad to go with you, my friends. Tell me, how is
+Blackfish these days?"</p>
+
+<p>"You come down!" repeated Owaneeyo.</p>
+
+<p>"I just told you," said Boone, "that I shall be glad to come down. I
+prefer, however, to have you wait until I finish with my tobacco." In
+the hunter's heart there was hope that Peleg would discover his
+predicament and bring him aid before he should be seized by the angry warriors.</p>
+
+<p>"Make yourselves comfortable," continued Boone pleasantly. "You see I
+cannot get down from here and I cannot get away from you." The scout
+paused a moment and glanced at his would-be captors.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[Pg 227]</a></span></p><p>"You like tobacco?" he resumed. "When I have this cured I will give
+some of it to you and we will smoke together."</p>
+
+<p>The Indians were becoming impatient, and plainly were unaware of what
+the scout was doing. Continuing his conversation and making more
+inquiries concerning his friends in the Indian town, he did his utmost
+to hold the attention of his dangerous visitors while he gathered
+together some armfuls of tobacco.</p>
+
+<p>Carefully arranging the bundles of the dry tobacco between the poles and
+standing where he was able to look directly down into the faces of his
+enemies, Boone suddenly cut the strings by which the sticks of tobacco
+were held. At the same moment, with his arms full of the dried leaves,
+he leaped down upon the Indians, and instantly filled their mouths and
+eyes with dry tobacco dust. The Shawnees were blinded and well-nigh
+suffocated in the little tobacco house. There were sneezes and shouts
+and cries from the startled warriors, who now were unable to see even
+the direction in which the door was located.</p>
+
+<p>Darting from the little house, the scout made his escape and ran swiftly
+to his cabin. In a moment he seized his trusty rifle, but as he returned
+to the tobacco house he saw the Indians running blindly and staggering
+toward the woods.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[Pg 228]</a></span></p><p>Boone restrained his impulse to fire upon the fleeing warriors, and
+called to Peleg and Israel, who with several of the younger members of
+the settlement were now hurriedly approaching, all of them prepared to
+pursue the departing Shawnees.</p>
+
+<p>"Do not go after them!" called Boone.</p>
+
+<p>Reluctantly the young men halted, and Peleg said: "Why do you not want
+us to chase them? We might have had every one of them."</p>
+
+<p>"If the Shawnees do not go on the warpath, why should we?"</p>
+
+<p>"They were on the warpath for you!" said Israel. "It was lucky you got away."</p>
+
+<p>Boone laughed silently as he recalled the appearance of the Indians when
+he had thrown the tobacco dust into their faces. "I am sure," he said,
+"the Shawnees will remember what I said to them and how they were
+treated by me. Perhaps it will do more good than it will to shoot them."</p>
+
+<p>The months passed and the peace of the settlement remained unbroken. Few
+even suspected the terrible struggle which was awaiting them.</p>
+
+<p>The game in the forest was becoming somewhat scarce. The settlers,
+increasing steadily in numbers, now were scattered from the Kentucky
+River to the Ohio. It was commonly believed that the Indians had finally
+accepted the coming of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[Pg 229]</a></span> whites as inevitable, and no longer were
+ready to dispute their occupation of the western forests.</p>
+
+<p>The one marked exception was Daniel Boone. To all the assertions of his
+friends he replied by expressing his own conviction that the red men
+were simply biding their time. No one was more familiar with the Indian
+ways and thoughts than the scout and he was positive that they had not
+forgotten the injuries which they had sustained at the hands of the
+whites. Sooner or later they would strive to obtain vengeance and at the
+same time unite in a supreme endeavour to drive the hated people from
+the lands which they believed to be their own.</p>
+
+<p>"I am more convinced than ever that trouble is brewing," said Boone one
+day to Peleg and Israel, who now were his frequent companions. "I know
+Simon Girty, and a worse man never lived. He is a renegade and a
+traitor. He has given up living among the whites, and in everything but
+colour and in their better qualities he has become an Indian. I am sure
+that we shall hear from him before many months have passed."</p>
+
+<p>Little the great scout dreamed that even while he was expressing his
+opinion to the boys, runners at that very time had been sent by Simon
+Girty to many of the northwestern tribes, urging them all to lay aside
+the jealousy they felt for one another<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[Pg 230]</a></span> and unite in one common cause
+against the white invaders.</p>
+
+<p>The following spring the storm burst. As the pattering raindrops
+sometimes fall at the beginning of a downpour, so among the scattered
+settlements a renewal of attacks by prowling bands of Indians indicated
+what was to follow.</p>
+
+<p>One day when Daniel Boone returned to his home he was unusually cast
+down. He explained that he had just learned of an attack which a party
+of twenty-five Wyandottes had made upon Estill's Station. The warriors
+had stolen into a little cabin which was apart from the others in the
+settlement. They had seized the occupants&mdash;a woman and her two
+daughters&mdash;and tomahawked and scalped all three. The bodies were still
+warm when they were discovered upon the floor of the cabin by
+neighbours. The scout told what followed.</p>
+
+<p>"Immediately Captain Estill collected a band of twenty-five daring men
+and followed the Indians more swiftly than I followed the band which
+took Jemima prisoner. The Wyandottes at first seemed to be frightened
+and began to run, but at last they made a stand on one side of a creek,
+while the whites were on the other. They were not more than fifty yards
+apart and every man was sheltered behind a tree or rock and firing at
+any enemy that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[Pg 231]</a></span> could be seen. Captain Estill had lost one third of his
+men and had shot about as many of the Indians, but the braves were still
+returning his fire, and showed no signs of leaving. He thought if he
+should keep up that kind of a fight, every one at last would be killed,
+unless perhaps it should be the very last white or Indian.</p>
+
+<p>"Mindful of this, Captain Estill sent out a party of six men, led by
+Lieutenant Miller, telling them to creep around and attack the Indians
+on their flank. But the chief was as shrewd as the captain, and as soon
+as he saw that the fire of the whites was slowing up in front of him, he
+instantly made a stronger attack upon the men that were left. Jumping
+into the water, they fell upon the captain and his men, driving them
+before them and killing a good many. Those who escaped finally got back
+to the Station, and you can readily see how alarmed the people are."</p>
+
+<p>"What happened to Captain Estill?" inquired Israel, greatly shocked by
+the story of his father.</p>
+
+<p>"He and eight more of his men were killed, and, besides, four were wounded."</p>
+
+<p>"That's more than half that went out, isn't it?" inquired Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," answered Daniel Boone.</p>
+
+<p>The report of the misfortune which had overtaken the men of Estill's
+Station was speedily<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[Pg 232]</a></span> succeeded by another report no less alarming. A
+band of Indians had crept up to Hoy's Station and there had stolen two little boys.</p>
+
+<p>Quickly Captain Holder gathered a band of seventeen angry men and
+started in pursuit of the Indians. It was not long before he overtook
+them, but he and his men were driven back after more than half the party had fallen.</p>
+
+<p>The alarm now became widespread. The success which had attended the
+plans of the Indians encouraged them to continue their efforts.
+Sometimes singly, frequently in small parties, they crept close to the
+settlements and by their stealthy attacks kept the people in continual alarm.</p>
+
+<p>There was no one now to dispute the great scout's prophecy that more
+serious trouble was to come. Within a few weeks an army of Indians, made
+up of bands from many of the northwestern tribes and numbering nearly
+six hundred warriors, began its march from Chillicothe.</p>
+
+<p>The renegade Girty was in command. The little army moved with great
+caution, and their approach was unsuspected by the whites. One August
+night they arrived at Bryant's Station, surrounded it, and prepared to
+dash upon the unsuspecting people the moment the gates should be opened
+the following morning.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[Pg 233]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XXIV</h2>
+
+<h3>A DECOY AND AN ATTACK</h3>
+
+<p>The fort at Bryant's Station was for the protection of forty cabins
+placed in parallel lines upon a little hill on the bank of the Elkhorn River.</p>
+
+<p>All through the night the garrison had been preparing as soon as
+daylight came to depart from the fort to carry aid to the men at Hoy's
+Station. A messenger had brought word to Bryant's Station of the defeat
+which almost had overwhelmed Holder and his men. If Girty's band of six
+hundred Indians had arrived a few hours later they would have found in
+the fort only a few women and children, besides a small number of old
+men, unable to fight.</p>
+
+<p>Afterward it was learned that the Indians were listening all through the
+night to the sounds of the activities within the fort, and when they saw
+the lights gleaming from the blockhouse and the cabins they must have
+suspected that news of their coming already had been received by the inmates.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[Pg 234]</a></span></p><p>However, they made no attempt to steal upon the fort in the darkness,
+although Girty and the Indian chiefs were planning and arranging their
+attack for the following day.</p>
+
+<p>For some strange reason many of the forts on the border had been built
+at a considerable distance from the springs upon which the people
+depended for their water. The fort at Bryant's Station was no exception.</p>
+
+<p>By Girty's direction many of the Indians placed themselves in hiding,
+within shot of the spring. One hundred selected warriors also were
+stationed at a distance from the spring. The latter were ordered to open
+a sharp fire and make their presence known to the garrison. Doubtless
+the hope of the red men was that the actions of this party would draw
+the white defenders from their place of safety.</p>
+
+<p>If their plan succeeded Girty then expected that the other band of
+warriors instantly would rush upon the opposite gate of the fort and hew
+it down with their tomahawks while the men were chasing the little decoy
+force. In this manner all the leaders of the attacking force expected to
+make their way into the little cabins within the stockade.</p>
+
+<p>When daybreak came the garrison was almost ready to open the gates and
+march to the assistance of their friends at Hoy's Station.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[Pg 235]</a></span></p><p>Suddenly there was a furious and continued discharge of rifles
+accompanied by such hideous yells and screams and whoops that they
+terrified not only the women and children of Bryant's Station, but
+alarmed even the men, accustomed though they were to the methods of Indian warfare.</p>
+
+<p>Running to the stockade and peering out through the loopholes, the
+startled white men saw before them a small band of Indians. These
+warriors were plainly exposed, yelling and making the most insulting and
+furious gestures toward the fort.</p>
+
+<p>All this was so different from their usual custom that some of the older
+men of the fort warned their comrades that a trick of some kind was
+being played upon them.</p>
+
+<p>"It is a decoy party," said one of the men positively. "They will draw
+you out of the fort and before you know it you will find yourselves
+surrounded by more than a hundred of those howling savages."</p>
+
+<p>"That is right" said another. "My suggestion is that we all make for the
+other side of the fort. I believe the Indians are trying to draw us out
+on this side and then attack us on the other."</p>
+
+<p>The experiences which many already had had with the Indians of the
+border confirmed the impression made by the words of the last speaker.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">[Pg 236]</a></span>
+Even the younger men, who were eager to sally forth and attack the young
+warriors that were making such a commotion, were held back by the suggestion.</p>
+
+<p>"We cannot protect ourselves very long in the fort," said one of the men
+when the defenders had been divided into two bands.</p>
+
+<p>"Why not?" inquired another.</p>
+
+<p>"Because we have no water. There is not enough water in the fort to last
+us thirty hours."</p>
+
+<p>"What can we do?" inquired one of the older men after a tense silence
+had followed the statement of the speaker. "If we go down to the spring
+the Indians will pick us off, every one."</p>
+
+<p>"Send the women," suggested another. "They go to the spring every
+morning. The Indians may not think we have any suspicion of what they
+are planning to do. If the women and girls go to the spring for water
+just as they usually do the Indians will not fire at them. They will
+want to save all their bullets for their attack on this side when our
+men have been drawn out to chase the savages who are yelling now on the other side."</p>
+
+<p>"It seems cowardly," said another man "to ask the women to go down to
+the spring when we know it would be sure death for us to go."</p>
+
+<p>"It will not be sure death for the women, and my opinion is that not one
+of them will be harmed,"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">[Pg 237]</a></span> said the first speaker positively. "At all
+events we can ask them to go and let them say whether they will or not."</p>
+
+<p>When the proposition was made to the women there were some who made
+replies not unlike those which their male defenders had suggested in the
+council. Some of them said: "If the men were afraid that they might be
+shot, why should they ask the women to go in their place?" Then it was
+explained just why the request was made. Immediately some of the bolder
+women and girls, taking their buckets, opened the gates and started
+toward the spring, which was only a short distance from the fort.</p>
+
+<p>Frightened, the women undoubtedly were, and with good reason. But with
+unbroken lines they continued on their way to the spring. One by one
+they knelt and filled their buckets and then joined the line which was
+returning to the fort.</p>
+
+<p>When the matrons and maids had arrived within a few yards of the open
+gate their terror became so overpowering that they all began to run for
+the shelter. Many a dusky face had been seen on the borders of the
+forest, but not a shot was fired at the bold girls and the women of
+Bryant's Station when they brought the water from the spring to the
+inmates of the fort.</p>
+
+<p>"Now is our time," said one of the men, after the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">[Pg 238]</a></span> return of the women.
+"We ought to do two things: First we must get some one out of the fort
+to carry word to Boone of the trouble we are having."</p>
+
+<p>"And second?" inquired one of the company.</p>
+
+<p>"We must send out some of the younger men to attack that decoy party."</p>
+
+<p>"That's right," suggested one of the young men eagerly. "We must go out
+and make all the noise we can. Then all the other men here in the fort
+can be ready for Girty when he comes, and I know he will come."</p>
+
+<p>"I will carry the message to Boone," volunteered one of the younger men
+named Bell. It was arranged that he should depart with the young men who
+were to attack the decoy party, and then instead of returning to the
+fort he should make a dash into the forest and try to make his way to
+Boonesborough as speedily as possible.</p>
+
+<p>The men in the fort were all serious when they saw thirteen of their
+younger companions depart from the fort through the gate which opened
+toward the place where the decoy party had been seen.</p>
+
+<p>"Do not chase the varmints too far," charged one of the watching men.</p>
+
+<p>No response was given to the warning, and as soon as the hardy, young
+settlers had departed the gate was closed and the remaining men, cocking
+their guns, took their positions to await the result<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">[Pg 239]</a></span> of the expected
+attack as soon as it should be unmasked.</p>
+
+<p>It was not long before the report of rifles was heard from the distant
+road, and gradually the sound indicated that the men were being decoyed
+farther and farther from the fort.</p>
+
+<p>"Girty will order an attack on us soon, now that the boys have made so
+much noise," suggested one of the waiting defenders.</p>
+
+<p>Scarcely had the man spoken when Simon Girty, springing from the forest
+at the head of five hundred of his painted warriors, rushed upon the
+western gate of the fort. It was plain that they were trying to force
+their way over the undefended palisade.</p>
+
+<p>The men of the Station had been carefully arranged in small divisions;
+and at the word from their leaders they fired upon the approaching
+warriors. The determination of the white men and their anxiety for their
+wives and children served to steady the nerve of every man and make of
+him a sharpshooter.</p>
+
+<p>The consternation of Girty's army cannot be described. Startled by the
+unexpected resistance and beholding their comrades falling on every side
+of them, with wild cries of anger and dismay the painted braves
+scattered, and in confusion all ran back into the sheltering forest.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">[Pg 240]</a></span></p><p>Two minutes after the sally not an Indian was to be seen, and the party
+of thirteen young settlers returned to the shelter of the fort.</p>
+
+<p>Every defender of Bryant's Station, however, was aware that this was but
+the beginning of the siege. The attack now was undertaken more in
+accordance with the usual methods of Indian warfare. From behind trees
+or protected by rocks the red men fired upon the defenders whenever any
+one showed himself. And the men of Bryant's Station were replying to the
+attack in kind. Not much time had elapsed before it was plain that this
+method of warfare was without marked effect on either party.</p>
+
+<p>By the middle of the afternoon, however, a sudden change occurred which
+instantly altered the entire combat. The cause of this change was due to
+the messenger who had been sent from Bryant's Station as soon as the
+discovery of the Indians had been made. Upon the fleetest horse in the
+settlement young Bell had succeeded in making his way to Lexington, with
+news of the dire need of help at Bryant's Station.</p>
+
+<p>The messenger, however, was keenly disappointed when he found only the
+women and children and a few old men in the place. He was informed that
+the able-bodied men had all marched to the rendezvous at Hoy's Station
+as soon as the knowledge of Holder's defeat had been received.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241">[Pg 241]</a></span></p><p>Following the direction in which he had been informed the fighting band
+had gone, it was not long before Bell overtook them and gave them his message.</p>
+
+<p>In the band were sixteen mounted men and more than twice that number of
+men on foot. As they set forth in response to Bell's appeal, their
+courage was strengthened by the report of the coming of a force of men
+from Boone's Station, among whom were Peleg, Israel, and the great scout himself.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">[Pg 242]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XXV</h2>
+
+<h3>A FIELD OF CORN</h3>
+
+<p>At a good pace the band was moving steadily over the rough roadway that
+led to Bryant's Station. The men were silent for the most part, for they
+had serious work before them. What a siege by five hundred Indians was
+likely to be, led by such a man as Simon Girty, required no description.
+The mounted men, however, preceding the men on foot, found little on
+their way to indicate the peril of their friends.</p>
+
+<p>It was late summer now, and already some of the leaves of the forest
+were tinged with the colours of autumn. The song of a bird was seldom
+heard, although the locusts were noisily announcing their presence in the treetops.</p>
+
+<p>As the advancing men came nearer the end of their journey their
+precautions increased. The men on horseback still led, but were closer
+to their comrades than in the earlier part of the journey. The
+information which the courier had brought had been so meagre that the
+exact location of Girty's band of warriors was not known. Bell had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">[Pg 243]</a></span>
+reported only that Bryant's Station was besieged and that Girty was the
+leader of the howling horde of savages.</p>
+
+<p>Bryant's Station was less than a mile and a half distant. The advancing
+men were in a bend in the road, on one side of which stretched the
+primeval forest, while on the other one hundred or more acres had been
+cleared and planted to corn. The stalks of corn were higher than the
+head of the tallest man in the band.</p>
+
+<p>"Come on!" called Peleg to Israel and his friends. "Let the men who are
+riding go around by the road and we'll cut across lots through this cornfield."</p>
+
+<p>The suggestion at once was acted upon, and the men on foot, among whom
+were most of the boys and younger men in the rescuing party, ran into
+the cornfield where they were soon concealed from the sight of their
+companions. Around them the stalks were standing so high that it would
+have been an easy matter for one not accustomed to such places to lose his way.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile, the mounted men continued on their way. It was unknown to
+them, as it was also to their companions in the cornfield, that the
+keen-eyed Indians had been aware of the departure of the courier from
+Bryant's Station. Indeed, it was suspected afterward that intentionally
+the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">[Pg 244]</a></span> red men had permitted him to proceed through their lines. All the
+warriors apparently were eager for the messenger to return and bring the
+men who doubtless would respond to his appeal.</p>
+
+<p>Consequently, when the mounted men drew near the forest opposite the
+cornfield, they had no information or even suspicion that Girty's
+warriors, concealed behind the trunks of the great trees, were awaiting
+their coming. Steadily advancing, the horsemen soon were drawing near
+the place where the ambuscade had been formed.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile, Peleg and Israel, in advance of their comrades, had been
+moving through the cornfield. They had arrived at a point which they
+thought must be midway in the great field, when at the sound of a gun
+both young pioneers stopped short, and Israel seized Peleg's arm as his
+face became pale and he said, "What has happened?"</p>
+
+<p>There was slight need for Peleg to reply to the startling question. On
+the August air arose the reports of many rifles and the terrifying
+whoops of the Indians.</p>
+
+<p>It was impossible for the men in the cornfield to see what was occurring
+in the road. They were aware of the attack, of course, and there was
+slight doubt in the mind of any that the entrance of the men on foot
+into the cornfield had been seen by their watching enemies.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">[Pg 245]</a></span></p><p>"Keep close to me," said Peleg to his companion. "It is every man for
+himself, now, but I want you to stay by me. We will take our chances that way."</p>
+
+<p>Peleg started when a whoop wilder and fiercer than any that had preceded
+it came from the bend in the road.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if they got every man," whispered Israel, his voice trembling
+in his excitement. "I do not believe one of our men suspected there was
+any danger here. Not even my father spoke of it."</p>
+
+<p>"Your father does not always speak of his fears. If it is possible for
+any one to get away I am sure your father will be safe."</p>
+
+<p>"What's that?" whispered Israel sharply. From the sounds it was evident
+that some at least of the mounted men were fleeing from the place. The
+shots of the Indians were plainly heard, and it was clear that they were
+following the fugitives. Perhaps a few had contrived to force their way
+around the bend.</p>
+
+<p>The two anxious young settlers, however, soon were recalled to the
+perils of their own position. Suddenly, not far to their right, they
+heard a rustling sound, as of the furtive approach of some one moving
+through the standing corn.</p>
+
+<p>"Drop!" whispered Peleg. "Don't move! Do not say a word!"</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246">[Pg 246]</a></span></p><p>The two boys cast themselves upon the ground, each holding his rifle in
+readiness for instant use. The sound of some one moving in the midst of
+the corn might indicate the presence of an enemy or of a friend, and
+until the anxious boys could determine which was near, they remained motionless.</p>
+
+<p>All at once the silence which had continued for moments was broken by
+whoops nearby, and the reports of rifles from within the field. Both
+boys were startled when each looked into the other's face and found his
+suspicions confirmed. The Indians were aware of the presence of the
+settlers in the cornfield and were stealthily entering from every side
+of the field at the same time. Already some of the unfortunate settlers
+had been found and their fate had been sealed. The summer stillness was
+broken by the wild whoops which indicated the success of some warrior in
+bringing his victim to the ground. There were also calls and cries from
+the wounded, mingled with the frequent reports of the rifles.</p>
+
+<p>The standing corn, a few yards in advance of the place where Peleg and
+Israel were lying, now suddenly was drawn apart and the boys saw three
+painted Shawnee warriors in single file stealthily making their way
+between the tall stalks.</p>
+
+<p>They concluded that discovery was not to be avoided, and after Peleg had
+whispered to his <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247">[Pg 247]</a></span>companion to follow his example, one after the other
+the boys raised their rifles and fired upon their enemies.</p>
+
+<p>Aware that one and perhaps two of the approaching red men had fallen and
+that the third warrior had darted rapidly away at the discharge of the
+guns, both boys sprang to their feet, and, crouching low, began to run through the corn.</p>
+
+<p>Both were too experienced to lose their way easily, and not many minutes
+had elapsed before Peleg, without speaking, laid his hand warningly on
+his friend's shoulder. Instantly both stopped and listened.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg believed that they had arrived near the border of the field. He
+was fearful now that reserves had been stationed so that from whatever
+side the unfortunate settlers might attempt to escape they would be met
+by the bullets of the watching warriors. Both boys listened intently
+until several minutes had elapsed.</p>
+
+<p>"We had better separate here," whispered Israel. Peleg hesitated a
+moment and then quietly nodded his assent. The possibility of escape,
+slight as it was, would be increased if they proceeded singly rather than together.</p>
+
+<p>"You know the way to the Station?" whispered Peleg. Israel nodded his
+head, and, moving to a place twenty feet to his left, turned, and in a
+course<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248">[Pg 248]</a></span> parallel to the one Peleg was following, cautiously continued on
+his way toward the border of the field.</p>
+
+<p>When Peleg came near to the edge of the field he stopped once more and
+peered cautiously all about him, listening for sounds that might
+indicate the presence of his enemies. From behind him still were heard
+the shouts and shrieks that were mingled with the reports of the guns
+and the whoops of the excited Indians.</p>
+
+<p>Somehow, in spite of his peril, the beat of the young settler's heart
+seemed to be almost normal. He watched a little field mouse that
+fearlessly peered up at him from the ground. He even counted the swings
+of a spider making her web between the swaying branches of an enormous stalk of corn.</p>
+
+<p>Apparently the fighting was confined to the farther side of the field.
+Only infrequent sounds of the conflict were heard at his right and left,
+while from the region before him there had been almost no sounds of conflict at all.</p>
+
+<p>Was the border in front of him unguarded? Or was it doubly dangerous
+because the Indians were attempting from the other three sides to drive
+the unfortunate men into a trap?</p>
+
+<p>Stealthily Peleg still crept forward. After each step he paused and
+looked keenly about him as he<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249">[Pg 249]</a></span> listened for sounds which might indicate
+renewed peril. He had seen nothing of Israel since his friend had left him.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly he was startled to hear what evidently were the sounds of a
+struggle between two men nearby. The laboured breathing and an
+occasional exclamation which he heard alike convinced him of this. With
+increasing anxiety Peleg crept forward.</p>
+
+<p>He was not molested when he came to the end of the row, but before him
+he saw a contest which threatened to terminate speedily as well as
+fatally for Israel Boone.</p>
+
+<p>The son of the great scout was in the hands of a white man, and was
+struggling desperately. His contestant, however, plainly was much the
+stronger. Peleg saw the face of the man distinctly, and he assured
+himself that never before had he looked upon so villainous a
+countenance. The man's face was distorted and discoloured by his
+efforts, and the perspiration streamed down his cheeks leaving furrows
+behind it. In spite of his excitement, Peleg asked himself if the man's
+face had ever been washed. The necessity for quick action, if his friend
+was to be rescued, caused Peleg instantly to raise his rifle to his shoulder and fire.</p>
+
+<p>Israel's contestant dropped to the ground as Peleg had seen an ox
+collapse from the blow of an axe.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_250" id="Page_250">[Pg 250]</a></span></p><p>Instantly darting to the side of his friend, Peleg whispered, "Come!"</p>
+
+<p>"That is Simon Girty!" gasped Israel, looking down into the face of the
+fallen man before him.</p>
+
+<p>Startled as Peleg was by the words of his companion, he did not wait to
+verify them, but turned back at once into the cornfield. As soon as he
+had gone a short distance, bidding Israel follow him, he turned to his
+left, and, still running swiftly and silently, the boys advanced a
+hundred yards; they then turned abruptly to their right in the direction
+of the side of the field where they had first entered. Although
+mystified by the action of his companion, Israel did not protest as he
+followed Peleg in his flight.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251">[Pg 251]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XXVI</h2>
+
+<h3>THE WHITE SHAWNEE AGAIN</h3>
+
+<p>Again turning to his left, Peleg, still followed by his friend, ran
+swiftly toward the border of the cornfield.</p>
+
+<p>The cries and whoops in a measure had died away, and from what he could
+hear Peleg concluded that some of his friends had escaped from the field
+and were being pursued in their flight toward the fort.</p>
+
+<p>When Peleg and Israel found they were near the road, on the opposite
+side of which stood the forest where the Indians had made their
+ambuscade, they peered cautiously in all directions, but were unable to
+see any of their enemies. That another band of warriors had followed in
+pursuit of the men who had escaped from the first attack and from the
+fight in the cornfield was most likely, they concluded.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg whispered: "The safest place for us is where the Indians were
+hidden. They have gone from there and will not come back to look for any of us."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252">[Pg 252]</a></span></p><p>Israel nodded his head in assent, and, firmly grasping their rifles,
+the boys darted across the road and gained the shelter of the trees.
+When the two young scouts were convinced that their immediate presence
+had not been discovered, Peleg said to Israel: "Are you sure you can
+find your way if we again separate?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," answered Israel. "But the Indians are between us and the fort. Do
+you think we can ever get through?"</p>
+
+<p>"We must," said Peleg. "The folk at Bryant's Station are in such danger
+that not one of us must fail them now."</p>
+
+<p>The words hardly had been spoken when there was a sharp report of a
+rifle, and a bullet passed so near them that both boys heard it singing on its way.</p>
+
+<p>Moved by a common impulse, they turned and dashed into the forest.
+Whether or no any of their enemies were hiding behind the trees toward
+which they were running neither knew.</p>
+
+<p>They were chiefly intent upon speed now, and ran on for several minutes,
+well knowing that their lives depended upon the success of their efforts.</p>
+
+<p>At last, breathless, both halted for a rest, and Peleg said to his
+companion, "I am sure it will be better for us to separate now. You know
+the way, and can look out for yourself. I shall come, too,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_253" id="Page_253">[Pg 253]</a></span> and if we
+succeed In getting through, it had better be before night."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," assented Israel. "If we wait until dark and then creep up to the
+fort, the guards will be likely to fire upon us, mistaking us for Indians."</p>
+
+<p>With these words Israel departed. Peleg watched his friend as long as he
+remained within sight, and then began with caution to retrace the way
+over which they had come. Keeping a firm grip upon Singing Susan, Peleg
+darted from tree to tree and did not venture from each refuge until he
+was convinced that no one was near him.</p>
+
+<p>His attempt to proceed was interrupted, however, by the report of a
+rifle, and again a bullet whistled uncomfortably close to his head,
+tearing some splinters from the tree at his elbow. The young scout at
+his utmost speed darted into the wood at his right.</p>
+
+<p>He was aware that a swift flight could not long be maintained because of
+his recent exertions. Where a refuge might be found he did not know. But
+just then he noticed the trunk of what appeared to be a huge hollow tree
+leaning over a shallow brook, across which he must leap if he continued his flight.</p>
+
+<p>He entered the stream, ran swiftly a few steps with the current, and
+then retraced his way to the tree. It was but the work of a moment for
+him<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_254" id="Page_254">[Pg 254]</a></span> to climb to the broken top, and great was his relief when he saw
+that the tree indeed was hollow. Without thought of where he might fall
+he dropped into the welcome opening.</p>
+
+<p>He fell several feet before the decayed wood provided a foothold strong
+enough to enable him to stand. Fortunately the hollow of the tree was
+larger than his body, and although he was cramped and almost blinded by
+the decayed mass, he nevertheless managed to reach his hunting-knife,
+and, making a small opening through the soft wood, peeped out to see if
+his enemies were within sight. As he did so his fears were aroused that
+the tree itself might fall. It was a mere shell and so decayed that he
+was surprised that his descent had not torn it asunder.</p>
+
+<p>At that moment a wild cry, plainly from the road, came to his ears. Then
+shouts were followed by the reports of guns and answering whoops from the Indians.</p>
+
+<p>Anxious for his friend Israel, Peleg turned once more to ascertain if
+any of his enemies were near his hiding-place. He was hopeful that his
+trail could not be followed farther than the bank of the little brook,
+although he was sufficiently familiar with Indian ways to know that the
+red men, if they really were pursuing him, would run in either direction
+along the banks until they found the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_255" id="Page_255">[Pg 255]</a></span> place where he had left the water.
+He smiled as he recalled how he had been standing in the stream when he
+had thrown his arms around the trunk of the bending tree. Singing Susan
+was still held, but it would be impossible for him in his cramped
+position to make use of her musical voice.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly Peleg was startled to behold an Indian step forth from the
+forest and stand for a moment on the bank of the stream almost directly
+beneath him. His surprise increased when he recognized the warrior as
+Henry. He had believed that the white Shawnee, as Henry had loved to
+call himself, had been killed in the attack on Boonesborough. His brave
+deed in extinguishing the fire that had been kindled by the burning
+arrow had been followed, as Peleg and others had believed, by his death.
+At least every one had seen him fall from the roof and roll to the
+ground. It is true, his body had not been recovered, but there were
+other bodies which had similarly disappeared.</p>
+
+<p>When his first feeling of astonishment had passed and Peleg was
+convinced that it indeed was Henry who was beneath him, a feeling of
+intense anger swept over the young settler. Henry was white, and yet had
+renounced his allegiance to his own people and gone back to the
+Shawnees, and with them he was now making war upon his own nation! There
+was little in his present appearance<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_256" id="Page_256">[Pg 256]</a></span> to distinguish him from other
+braves of the tribe. He wore the scalp-lock and was clad in the Indian garb.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg's problem in part was solved when at that moment the rotten wood
+gave way beneath him, and the tree, unable longer to support the weight
+of the young scout, fell with a crash to the ground. As it struck the
+bank the tree was rent asunder, and to the white Shawnee's astonishment
+Peleg scrambled to his feet from out of the wreckage.</p>
+
+<p>Before he could brush the dust from his eyes and bring Singing Susan to
+his shoulder Henry leaped forward and placed both hands upon the barrel
+of the rifle, saying, "No shoot broder."</p>
+
+<p>"You are no brother of mine!" said Peleg. "You are a Shawnee and not a
+white Shawnee, either! You are fighting us!"</p>
+
+<p>"No fight broder," repeated Henry. "Broder show way to fort."</p>
+
+<p>For some strange reason which Peleg was unable to explain even to
+himself, he said abruptly: "Lead the way, then! If you can take me
+safely through the line of these savages, I shall never forget you."</p>
+
+<p>The young scout was eager to inquire of his companion what had befallen
+him and why he had returned to the Shawnees. His present peril, however,
+was so great that he restrained his <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_257" id="Page_257">[Pg 257]</a></span>impulse, and in silence followed
+Henry as he led the way toward Bryant's Station.</p>
+
+<p>Occasionally a halt was made when from some nearby place shots were
+heard indicating that the scattered settlers were being pursued either
+in small detachments or individually, for the terrified men had
+scattered when first the ambuscade had been discovered.</p>
+
+<p>When Henry, who apparently was aware of the location of the besieging
+braves, drew near the fort he stopped and said: "Now go."</p>
+
+<p>Peleg looked about him, and, unable to discover any of his enemies
+nearby, followed the advice which had been given him, and, placing his
+hat on the end of the barrel of Singing Susan as a token of his peaceful
+intentions, approached the gate.</p>
+
+<p>He was at once admitted, and his relief was great when the first to
+greet him was Israel Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"How many are here?" asked Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"I do not know," answered Israel. "I have heard that only six of our men
+were killed or wounded. When we all started toward Lexington they might
+have chased us all the way and taken the fort there, because there was
+nobody left to fight for it."</p>
+
+<p>"How many Indians were in that ambuscade?" asked Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"I hear there were three hundred."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_258" id="Page_258">[Pg 258]</a></span></p><p>"How did you get to the fort?"</p>
+
+<p>"I ran straight ahead for an hour," replied Israel with a smile. "How did you come?"</p>
+
+<p>"Henry got me through the lines."</p>
+
+<p>"Henry!" demanded Israel in surprise. "Henry! I thought he was dead."</p>
+
+<p>"So did I, but he is very much alive. I had no time to ask him how he
+came to be here. I was thinking mostly of getting inside the fort."</p>
+
+<p>"It is a comfort to know that at least Girty will not lead any more&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>Israel stopped speaking as a lusty shout was heard from a stump that
+stood near one of the bastions, and the two young defenders to their
+amazement beheld Simon Girty himself standing erect upon the stump and
+waving a cloth which at some time in its history may have been white.</p>
+
+<p>In response to this hail every man ran to hear what the renegade leader
+of the Indians had to say.</p>
+
+<p>They were soon to know the purpose for which Girty, on his hands and
+knees, had crept to the place where he now was standing.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you want?" shouted one of the defenders.</p>
+
+<p>"I have come," replied Girty in a loud voice, "to save your lives. We
+have more than six hundred warriors here, and by to-morrow we shall have
+more. Some of our friends will bring cannon,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_259" id="Page_259">[Pg 259]</a></span> and when we have them we
+can blow every cabin in Bryant's Station into flinders. If we storm your
+fort, as we sure can do when we get our cannon, I will not promise that
+one life will be spared. You know the redskins well enough to understand
+how I shall not be able to hold them back. If you surrender now, I give
+you my word of honour that not a hair of the head of any one of you
+shall be hurt. I am Simon Girty, and you know you can rely upon every word I speak."</p>
+
+<p>A derisive cry from several of the defenders greeted this assertion, but
+when Peleg and Israel looked about them they were aware that many of the
+men had been strongly moved by Girty's appeal.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_260" id="Page_260">[Pg 260]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XXVII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE STRUGGLE IN THE RAVINE</h3>
+
+<p>Before any conference of the defenders could be held, one of the younger
+men leaped to the wall to reply to Girty's plea.</p>
+
+<p>"You know who I am, don't you?" called Girty.</p>
+
+<p>"Indeed I do know!" shouted young Reynolds: "Everybody south of the
+Falls of Ohio knows that you are Simon Girty. I have a good-for-nothing
+cur dog which I have named Simon Girty, or Simon Dirty, he looks so much
+like you. If you have any reinforcements or artillery, bring them up!
+But let me warn you that if you or any of those naked rascals with you
+ever get into this fort we shall not use our guns upon them. We have no
+powder to waste on such wretches. We have cut some big bunches of birch
+switches and have scattered them all through the fort; and that is just
+what we cut them for&mdash;to thrash you and your rascally comrades. And let
+me tell you," he continued, "that you are not the only ones who are
+expecting reinforcements! We have received word that the whole country
+is aroused and marching to help us, Simon Girty!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_261" id="Page_261">[Pg 261]</a></span> he shouted. "If you
+and your gang of murderers stay twenty-four hours longer before the fort
+you will never be able to leave. Your scalps will be drying in the sun
+on the roofs of our cabins."</p>
+
+<p>A loud laugh from his friends greeted the words of the young backwoods
+orator, and it was plain that the spirit which young Reynolds had
+displayed had aroused the drooping courage of his companions. Many of
+the men were aware that on more than one occasion the Indians had indeed
+brought cannon with them, and by their aid had succeeded in destroying
+two of the stations.</p>
+
+<p>All became silent when Simon Girty once more stood up to reply. "It is
+too bad," began the renegade, "it's a pity that such people should be
+tomahawked and scalped! I can protect you now, if you will surrender,
+but I give you fair warning if you do not I shall not be able to hold
+back my warriors."</p>
+
+<p>A derisive shout greeted this declaration, and in apparent sorrow Simon
+Girty at once withdrew.</p>
+
+<p>It was not known within the fort that he instantly ordered preparations
+to be made for raising the siege. Throughout the night not a sound was
+heard, and when daylight came the Indian camp was deserted!</p>
+
+<p>When Peleg and Israel sought the place where the warriors had encamped
+they found the fires<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_262" id="Page_262">[Pg 262]</a></span> still burning brightly and even pieces of meat
+left on the roasting-sticks.</p>
+
+<p>"You see!" said Israel gleefully. "They left just a little while before daylight."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Peleg, "that is when they usually roast their meat. I wonder
+if they are all really gone?"</p>
+
+<p>The rejoicing at Bryant's Station was great when it was known that the
+Indians had departed. Before noon the fighting force of white men was
+increased to one hundred and sixty-seven. Among those who entered came
+Daniel Boone, or Colonel Boone as some now called him, since he had
+received his commission from Colonel Clark.</p>
+
+<p>"What does this mean?" demanded Israel when he saw his younger brother
+Daniel among the men in the assembly, "What are you doing here?"</p>
+
+<p>"I think I have as good a right to come as you," retorted Boone's
+younger son. "I am almost seventeen."</p>
+
+<p>"And old enough to know better," laughed Peleg, who was fond of the boy
+and many a time had taken him with him on his expeditions into the forest.</p>
+
+<p>The officers, who had hastened to the place as soon as reports of its
+peril had been brought, now assembled, and at once called the men of
+Bryant's Station to a conference.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_263" id="Page_263">[Pg 263]</a></span></p><p>"It is known," explained Colonel Todd, "that Colonel Logan has
+collected a strong force in Lincoln and that it will be here within
+twenty-four hours. If we wait for his coming we shall be that much
+stronger when we start in pursuit of Girty and his savages. What do you
+think?" he asked, addressing Boone, who stood leaning upon his rifle in
+the rear of the assembly.</p>
+
+<p>"It will be wise to wait," replied Boone quietly. "I have never found it
+to be a mistake to get ready before you attempt to do anything. Girty,
+according to his story, has treble our numbers. The trail which the
+Shawnees have left behind is so plain and so broad that I am suspicious
+that they have made signs which they hope will lead us to pursue them.
+My advice is to wait until Colonel Logan shall come with his men."</p>
+
+<p>The younger members of the force, however, were unwilling to delay. To
+them appearances were convincing that the Indians had fled because they
+were alarmed. Now was the time, they declared, when the savages ought to
+be chased and taught a lesson! If there should be a delay even of a day
+in following them, the Indians would gain such an advance that they
+could not be overtaken and punished for their evil deeds.</p>
+
+<p>The fiery zeal of the young men was not to be denied. Against the
+counsel of Boone and others<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_264" id="Page_264">[Pg 264]</a></span> of the older scouts, who had long
+experience in dealing with their Indian enemies, a swift pursuit
+instantly was begun. Many of the men were mounted on horses, but the
+entire mass, horse and foot, kept well together.</p>
+
+<p>The eager party had not gone far from Bryant's Station before a halt was
+called, when it was discovered that the retiring Indians had turned into
+the buffalo road and, almost as if they were attempting to make their
+trail still more evident, it was noticed that they had chopped many of
+the trees, on either side with their hatchets.</p>
+
+<p>Boone shook his head when he discovered these indications of apparent
+carelessness in the band they were following.</p>
+
+<p>"My opinion is," he said soberly to Colonel Todd, "that Girty is trying
+to lead us on. Just as our men ran into their trap on the way to
+Bryant's Station, I am afraid now that they will be led into another."</p>
+
+<p>"But it is too late to go back," said Colonel Todd.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I am afraid our men will not go back now. My only word of advice
+to you is to go ahead cautiously."</p>
+
+<p>"Will you be one of the advance guard?"</p>
+
+<p>"If you so desire."</p>
+
+<p>"At least you are not afraid, and you will not see what is not there."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_265" id="Page_265">[Pg 265]</a></span></p><p>"I shall do my best," said Boone quietly.</p>
+
+<p>As Peleg, who was standing nearby and had heard the conversation, looked
+into the face of his friend he became aware that the years of anxiety
+had left their mark upon his rugged countenance. There was, however, a
+deeper expression of gentleness on the face of the great scout which in
+no way detracted from the impression of strength which his entire body still produced.</p>
+
+<p>Orders were soon given to camp for the night in the forest, and on the
+following day the little army arrived at the Lower Blue Licks. Just as
+the force, proceeding without any form of order, arrived at the southern
+bank of the Licking, some of the men saw several Indians climbing the
+rocky ridge on the opposite side. The red men halted when the
+Kentuckians appeared, looked at them intently a few minutes in silence,
+and then, as calmly and leisurely as if no enemies were near,
+disappeared over the top of the hill.</p>
+
+<p>A halt of the white men was made at once, and several of the officers
+held a consultation.</p>
+
+<p>Apparently there were differences of opinion among the leaders, for
+after a few minutes had elapsed Colonel Todd summoned Daniel Boone and
+inquired his opinion as to what had best be done. All the officers were
+now very serious.</p>
+
+<p>The great scout, leaning upon his rifle, spoke in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_266" id="Page_266">[Pg 266]</a></span> the deep, quiet tones
+he usually used: "My opinion is that our situation is critical and
+difficult. The force before us without question is ready for battle and
+outnumbers us largely."</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you think that?" inquired Colonel Todd.</p>
+
+<p>"Because of the easy and slow retreat of the Indians who just went over
+the crest of yonder hill. I am familiar with all this region and I am
+fearful they are trying to draw us on. About a mile ahead of us there
+are two ravines, one on either side of the ridge. There the Indians can
+hide and attack us at the same time, both in front and on our flanks,
+almost before we could know they were there."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you think is the best thing to do, then?" inquired Colonel Todd seriously.</p>
+
+<p>"My advice," said Boone, "is to do one of two things: Either wait for
+the coming of Colonel Logan, who without doubt is on his way to join us;
+or, if it is decided to attack the Indians without waiting for him to
+come up, then my advice is that half our force ought to go up the river,
+cross the rapids, and fall upon the Indians from that side at the same
+time the others attack them from the front."</p>
+
+<p>"I am afraid that cannot be done," said Colonel Todd, shaking his head.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_267" id="Page_267">[Pg 267]</a></span></p><p>"Whatever is done," said Boone quietly, "my advice to you is to go over
+the ground carefully before the men cross the river here. Send some
+scouts ahead. I have never found, Colonel Todd, that any man lost by
+being prepared for what might befall him."</p>
+
+<p>Every man in the little assembly was listening with deep attention to
+the great scout who was a man of silence unless his advice was sought.</p>
+
+<p>When he ceased some urged the adoption of his recommendation to wait for
+the coming of Colonel Logan and his men. There were others, however, who
+were strongly in favour of advancing at once.</p>
+
+<p>In the midst of the warm discussion Major McGary, one of the young
+officers who was unable to endure the thought of being near an enemy and
+not fighting, let out a wild whoop. At the same moment he waved his hand
+over his head, spurred his horse into the river and then shouted in his
+loudest tone, "Let all who are not cowards follow me!"</p>
+
+<p>Instantly the mounted men dashed into the river, every one apparently
+striving to be the first to gain the opposite shore. The men on foot
+also rushed into the stream, which for a time seemed to be a rolling
+mass of men and water. No order had been given and no order now was
+desired. Through<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_268" id="Page_268">[Pg 268]</a></span> the deep river horses and men staggered forward, with
+McGary still leading the way.</p>
+
+<p>They gained the opposite shore where the unprotected nature of the
+ground seemed to forbid their advance. Trampled by the buffalo, every
+bush and low tree had been stripped bare. Multitudes of rocks blackened
+by the sunlight were to be seen on every side. No scouts were sent in
+advance and none acted on the flanks. The contagious example of Major
+McGary acted like magic, and men and horses went forward as if every one
+was doing his utmost to outstrip his neighbour.</p>
+
+<p>Along with the others went Daniel Boone, his two boys, and Peleg. The
+expression of Boone's face had not changed since his sober advice had
+been disregarded by his impulsive comrades. But he was not one to draw
+back when his friends were rushing into action.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly the men in front halted. They had arrived at the place
+mentioned by the scout, where the two ravines met. A small body of
+Indians appeared for a moment and fired at the approaching settlers.</p>
+
+<p>Instantly McGary and the men with him returned the fire, although they
+were at a great disadvantage because they were standing upon a bare and
+open ridge, while their enemies were in a <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_269" id="Page_269">[Pg 269]</a></span>ravine in which the bushes
+partly concealed the warriors.</p>
+
+<p>As the reports of the guns were heard, the men in the rear rushed
+forward to assist their friends. But before they were able to gain the
+ridge they were stopped by a terrible fire from the ravine which was on
+their flank. They halted, and it was almost as if they had been shut in
+by the jaws of some enormous beast. There was no cover, and a terrible
+fire was being poured into them from front and side, while their enemies
+still were hidden from sight.</p>
+
+<p>Gradually, however, the Indians pushed out from the ravine as the fire
+became fiercer. Indeed they were striving to extend their lines and turn
+the right of the Kentuckians so that their retreat would be cut off.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as this was made clear by the increase of the firing from that
+quarter, the men in the rear attempted to fall back, and then by
+breaking through the attacking party, gain their only way of escape&mdash;to the river.</p>
+
+<p>Their actions, in part misunderstood by their companions, created what
+was almost a panic. From the ravine to the river the sight was
+indescribable. Above the reports of the guns rose the shrieks and cries
+of the wounded and the wild and merciless whoops of the Indians.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_270" id="Page_270">[Pg 270]</a></span></p><p>Many of the mounted men escaped, but those who were fighting on foot
+were in deadly peril. Daniel Boone, in the thick of the fight, saw his
+boy, Israel, fall lifeless before the guns of the Indians. Even the
+death of his son, however, did not prevent the great scout from becoming
+aware that he himself was almost entirely surrounded by the frantic,
+howling, whooping mob of warriors.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_271" id="Page_271">[Pg 271]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XXVIII</h2>
+
+<h3>AT THE LOWER BLUE LICKS</h3>
+
+<p>It was in such crises that the great scout best displayed the qualities
+which had made him a marked man among the pioneers. It had been
+impossible for him to rescue the body of his fallen son. Around him on
+every side were heard shouts and cries and the continual report of the rifles.</p>
+
+<p>Whatever occurred, Daniel Boone was never long at a loss how to act.
+Controlling his feelings, he turned to the men who were near him and
+said quietly, "Come with me!"</p>
+
+<p>As the men obediently followed, the scout, who was familiar with the
+entire region, instead of running toward the ford as most of the
+fugitives now were doing, dashed into the ravine where many of the
+Indians previously had been concealed. Apparently they had now left to
+join in the wild pursuit of the demoralized settlers.</p>
+
+<p>Boone and his comrades were not to escape, however, without attracting
+the attention of some of the howling Indians. A half dozen or more<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_272" id="Page_272">[Pg 272]</a></span>
+discovered the fleeing settlers and with wild whoops started in swift pursuit.</p>
+
+<p>It was here that Boone's knowledge of the region, as well as his
+coolness, came to his aid. Leading the way to a place in the ravine
+where there was a narrow passage between the rocks, he ordered his
+companions to precede him, while he himself raised his rifle with
+deliberation and fired at the approaching Indians.</p>
+
+<p>The entire band halted, for their own rifles were not loaded at the time
+and they were depending upon a similar condition among the whites. The
+red men were now relying on their tomahawks.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the band halted, Boone waited a moment to assure himself that
+his companions were safe, and then, running swiftly, rejoined them. When
+the fleeing men came to the end of the ravine, once more they found a
+small band of their foes awaiting them, and with wild cries they started
+toward them. But the great scout, in spite of the need of haste, had
+bidden his companions to reload in preparation for this very emergency.
+After receiving the fire from their guns, the Indians dropped back,
+while the white men, quickly making use of the advantage thus afforded,
+were able to escape to the woods beyond.</p>
+
+<p>"We shall now be able to make our way to <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_273" id="Page_273">[Pg 273]</a></span>Bryant's Station," said Boone.
+"There will be no Indians to interfere with us from this time on."</p>
+
+<p>His words proved to be correct, and by the middle of the afternoon the
+half-dozen men with the great scout arrived safely at the fort.</p>
+
+<p>Throughout the remainder of the day many of the men who had so
+confidently gone forth in the morning came straggling back to the fort.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg, who had been among those who rushed to the ford, returned to
+Bryant's Station when it was nearly dusk. He had secured the aid of two
+others, and the three were carrying young Daniel Boone, who also had
+been shot in the fight at the Licks.</p>
+
+<p>It was soon discovered that Boone's younger son was not seriously
+wounded. When the welcome information was received the face of the great
+scout remained unchanged in its expression, though the deathly pallor,
+that for a moment had spread over it when he had been informed of what
+had befallen his boy, disappeared.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis a wonder," said Peleg, "that any of us are left alive to tell the
+story. Some of us ran up the stream and swam across. Young Dan was as
+brave as any man in the crowd. Even after he had been shot in the
+shoulder he did not give up, but he swam across the stream, keeping up
+with the rest of us. The men who could not swim were<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_274" id="Page_274">[Pg 274]</a></span> the ones that were
+shot down or were made prisoners without being able to do anything to defend themselves."</p>
+
+<p>"Were any shot after you had crossed the river?" inquired Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"I do not know of any," replied Peleg. "But from the ravine clear down
+to the ford the loss was heavy. One of the bravest deeds I ever saw in
+my life was that of young Aaron Reynolds&mdash;he is the one who made us
+laugh when Simon Girty mounted the stump and gave us his speech.
+Reynolds was on horseback, and about halfway between the battle ground
+and the ford he found Captain Patterson completely worn out. The captain
+had dropped in his tracks, he was so exhausted, for you see he had been
+wounded three or four times in the fights we had with the Indians two or
+three years ago."</p>
+
+<p>"I remember that he was," said Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"The Indians were almost ready to close up on the captain, but just at
+that moment Reynolds saw what was going on. He jumped from his saddle,
+helped Captain Patterson to mount, and then turned and ran on foot as
+fast as he could go. He ran like a deer after he was out of the main
+road, then jumped into the river right where you said you crossed, and
+swam to the other side. There he had some serious trouble, though. He<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_275" id="Page_275">[Pg 275]</a></span>
+was wearing a pair of buckskin breeches and they became so heavy and
+full of water when he was in the river that he could not run very fast
+when he struck the shore. When he sat down and tried to get rid of a
+part of the water some of the Indians rushed up and before he knew it he
+was their prisoner."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you say he is here now?" inquired Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir. I was afraid the Indians would tomahawk him, but they kept to
+their regular plan of not putting any of their prisoners to death until
+they get back to their own country, so Reynolds wasn't troubled very
+much at the time. They left him in charge of three of the braves while
+the others started for some more of our men who were nearby. The three
+Indians were so excited when they saw our men that two of them left
+Reynolds in charge of the third while they ran to join in the chase with
+the others. Then the Indian that had Reynolds in his charge started for the woods."</p>
+
+<p>"Were they both armed?" asked Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"Reynolds had had his rifle taken away from him, but the Indian had a
+tomahawk and a rifle in his hands. After they had gone a little way the
+Indian stooped to tie the string of his moccasin and Aaron instantly
+jumped upon him, knocked him down with his fist and then ran for the
+woods.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_276" id="Page_276">[Pg 276]</a></span> Captain Patterson has just come in and he says he is going to
+give Aaron two hundred acres of the best land he owns."</p>
+
+<p>Such of the bodies as had been recovered were now being brought to the
+fort, and the fact that many of the men of Bryant's Station had been
+made prisoners by the attacking Indians increased the feeling of gloom
+that settled upon the place. Among the men who had fallen was Colonel
+Todd, who had sought the advice of the great scout and then did not follow it.</p>
+
+<p>Long before nightfall Colonel Logan and his men arrived at Bryant's
+Station. In his force were no less than four hundred and fifty men. Upon
+their arrival they learned from the men who had succeeded in returning
+to the fort of the fate which had befallen the band which Colonel Todd
+had led against the Indians.</p>
+
+<p>Waiting to hear no more, greatly alarmed for his friends and suspecting
+that only a part of the disaster had been reported, Colonel Logan at
+once led his men over the way by which the defenders of the fort had
+gone in their untimely pursuit of their wily foe.</p>
+
+<div class="center"><a name="i303.jpg" id="i303.jpg"></a><img src="images/i303.jpg" width='700' height='498' alt="Silently the men crossed the ford" /></div>
+
+<h4>"Silently the men crossed the ford"</h4>
+
+<p>With Colonel Logan went Daniel Boone and Peleg, as well as many others
+of the defenders. The great scout showed plainly the suffering through
+which he was passing. Two of his boys<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_277" id="Page_277">[Pg 277]</a></span> had been shot by the relentless
+Shawnees and his third son had received a severe wound. Apparently Boone
+did not believe that his sufferings were to be relieved by anything his
+friends could do to aid him. He had seldom spoken since the men had
+departed from the Station, but Peleg was confident that he understood
+the purpose which was urging the gentle-hearted hunter forward.</p>
+
+<p>The second day the advancing soldiers came near to the place where the
+fight had occurred. Long before they had arrived, however, Peleg had
+shuddered when he discovered flocks of circling buzzards that were
+hovering over the battle ground. He glanced into the face of his
+companion when the discovery had been made, and knew that the scout also
+understood the meaning of their presence.</p>
+
+<p>When the advancing band approached the bank of the river they discovered
+many of the bodies still floating near the shore. They were the
+unfortunate victims that had been shot by the Indians after they had
+rushed into the stream.</p>
+
+<p>A silence, indescribable, intense, awful, settled over all the men.
+There were tears in the eyes of some of the hardiest of the settlers at
+the fearful sight upon which they looked. No man was able to recognize
+among the putrid bodies the face of his lost friend.</p>
+
+<p>Silently the men crossed the ford and advanced<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_278" id="Page_278">[Pg 278]</a></span> toward the ravine. In
+the scene of the recent fight the sight was even more heartbreaking.
+Here, too, the bodies of the many who had fallen could no longer be
+distinguished one from another.</p>
+
+<p>Daniel Boone, unmindful of the presence of his comrades, had been
+searching quietly among the bodies for that of his missing boy. Even the
+men who were most eager in their search for their friends stopped a
+moment as they watched the man in his agonizing and fruitless quest.</p>
+
+<p>The great scout soon turned to Colonel Logan and said: "'Tis no use,
+Colonel. We must give the poor fellows decent burial here and now."</p>
+
+<p>The men at once carried out the bidding which their leader gave.
+Silently the settlers, for the moment all thoughts of vengeance gone
+from their minds, dug trenches wherever the soil permitted, and in these
+the bodies of their dead and mutilated friends were buried.</p>
+
+<p>There were many faces in the band down which the tears were rolling
+while this task was being accomplished. The manner of the great scout,
+however, was unchanged. Only the deepening of the lines in his face and
+his unusual pallor gave indications of the strain through which he was
+passing. His manner still was silent and self-controlled, as in the days
+when the joyous things of life had more often been his portion.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_279" id="Page_279">[Pg 279]</a></span></p><p>When the gruesome task at last was finished, it was Daniel Boone
+himself who said to Colonel Logan in reply to the latter's inquiries:
+"It is useless now to try to follow the Shawnees."</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you say that?" inquired the colonel.</p>
+
+<p>"Because by this time they are far beyond our reach. They have lost no
+time, you may be sure."</p>
+
+<p>"How many captives do you think they have taken with them?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not many," said Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"But there are some sixty-seven of our men missing."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," assented Boone, "but we have accounted for nearly sixty this day."</p>
+
+<p>"I am told," suggested the colonel, "that they will put every prisoner
+to death, or so many of them as may be required to make good any loss
+they themselves have had."</p>
+
+<p>The great scout shook his head as he replied: "The Indians have not lost
+as many as we."</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you say that?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because the advantage was all with them. They greatly outnumbered us,
+and in a good part of the fight they were sheltered by the rocks while
+our men were fighting in the open. It was the bloodiest fight I was ever in."</p>
+
+<p>"And to you one of the saddest," suggested the colonel.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_280" id="Page_280">[Pg 280]</a></span></p><p>Boone nodded his head but did not speak.</p>
+
+<p>"I cannot understand," continued the colonel, "why it is that you take
+your own troubles so quietly. You certainly have suffered more than most
+men on the border, and yet I fancy the man has yet to be born who has
+heard you complain."</p>
+
+<p>"And why should I complain?" inquired Boone, smiling as he looked into
+the face of his friend. "It does not make my own griefs less to try to
+have another share them. That is something no one can do. My heart, at
+least, must bear its own burden. If any one thinks that his troubles are
+less than those that come to his friends, he is probably mistaken. My
+experience has led me to believe that almost every one has about all he
+can bear. There are only two classes of people, at least as far as I
+have observed&mdash;and I am well aware how little I know in this
+particular&mdash;but as I said&mdash;there are only two classes of people that cry
+and laugh easily."</p>
+
+<p>"Who are they?"</p>
+
+<p>"Children and savages. Neither class has learned to control itself. A
+strong man shows his strength, at least in my humble judgment," Boone
+added modestly, "by being able to refrain from useless words, and by not
+whining over his troubles."</p>
+
+<p>"I think you are correct," said Colonel Logan musingly. "Now, then," he
+continued after a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_281" id="Page_281">[Pg 281]</a></span> moment, "is it your judgment that the best thing for
+us to do is to return to Bryant's Station?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is."</p>
+
+<p>"Then if it is a good thing to do it will be well for us to do it
+quickly. I shall see that the order is given. We have some stirring days
+before us because I am sure it will never do to let the Shawnees believe
+for any length of time that they have been able to defeat the white men."</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_282" id="Page_282">[Pg 282]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XXIX</h2>
+
+<h3>TO THE MEETING-PLACE</h3>
+
+<p>The judgment of Daniel Boone was accepted by all the men in the band.
+Indeed there were many now who were blaming others as well as themselves
+for not having listened to the word of the wise old scout before they
+had entered into the unequal struggle with the Indians at Blue Licks.</p>
+
+<p>Swiftly and seriously the men retraced their way to Bryant's Station,
+where they were dismissed by Colonel Logan with the understanding that
+they would respond if he should call for their help in the near future.
+This he fully expected to do.</p>
+
+<p>In a rude wagon Daniel Boone and Peleg carried the wounded boy back to
+his home. The wound itself was not believed to be serious, although
+naturally after the tragedies which had occurred in his family Daniel
+Boone was anxious for his son. Daniel Morgan Boone, or "young Dan," as
+he sometimes was called by the settlers, to distinguish him from his
+father, made light of his experiences and even declared that he was
+prepared<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_283" id="Page_283">[Pg 283]</a></span> to ride his horse back to Boonesborough instead of being
+carried in the jolting wagon. His protest, however, was not heeded, and
+in a short time the Boonesborough men were back in their settlement.</p>
+
+<p>To all it now was evident that Daniel Boone held a place in the regard
+of the settlers such as he never before had won. His deep sorrow over
+the distressing tragedies which had resulted in the loss of two
+promising sons, and his willingness to do all in his power to aid his
+friends: these qualities won him sympathy and affection in addition to
+the respect in which he was held because of his excellent judgment. The
+simple manner of the great scout, his skill as a hunter, his knowledge
+of the Indians, and his enduring friendship, were more highly
+appreciated with every passing day.</p>
+
+<p>Shortly after the return of Boone and his companions, the scout said to
+Peleg, "I have just received word from Colonel George Rogers Clark from
+the Falls of the Ohio."</p>
+
+<p>"What does he want?" asked Peleg quickly. The sturdy colonel in control
+of the forces of the entire region was known to be a man of action, and
+one whose activities were familiar to all the settlers.</p>
+
+<p>"He sends me word," said Boone quietly, "that he plans to raise a force
+of one thousand men to go against the Indian towns."</p>
+
+<p>"Why does he do that?"</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_284" id="Page_284">[Pg 284]</a></span></p><p>"He has two reasons: One is that the people are so discouraged and
+disappointed by the recent successes of the Indians that many are
+thinking of withdrawing from Kentucky. The other reason is that he
+thinks the Indians ought not to be permitted to rest upon the victories
+which they have won, and that the battle of Blue Licks and the fight at
+Bryant's Station must be avenged, or the Shawnees and the Wyandottes
+will soon be more active than they have been."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you think?" inquired Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"It is not for me to say," replied Boone, his rare smile lighting his
+face for a moment as he spoke.</p>
+
+<p>"But you think what you do not say," persisted Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"I think Colonel Clark is doing the only thing which will bring help to
+our stations. Either the Indians or we are to live in this country. It
+is a pity that we cannot say, the Indians <i>and</i> we; but from the feeling
+they have shown, and the way in which I know many of the whites look
+upon them, I am afraid such a plan will be impossible. There is then
+only one thing for us to do."</p>
+
+<p>"What is that?"</p>
+
+<p>"It must be decided once for all whether the country is to be occupied
+by the white men or by the red. There can be but one answer. However,"
+continued Boone, "I have little time to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_285" id="Page_285">[Pg 285]</a></span> discuss these matters with you,
+now. It is a time for action, and much as you and I may dislike to leave
+our homes, we cannot lightly regard such a summons as Colonel Clark has sent us."</p>
+
+<p>"What is the plan?"</p>
+
+<p>"He proposes to raise an army of one thousand men, as I said, and march
+to destroy the Indian villages."</p>
+
+<p>"Where do we meet?"</p>
+
+<p>"At the Falls of the Ohio. I have seen Colonel Logan, and he is to
+assemble his men and march in one body to the meeting-place. My own
+judgment is that it would be better for the force to split up into
+smaller parties, but that is not for me to say. I have, however,
+arranged with Colonel Logan for you and six other men to go as a band of
+scouts to the north of the route we are to take, and at the same time
+have several bands move to the south. I do not believe there will be any
+danger before we arrive at the meeting-place, but it is well to provide
+for what may happen before it comes to pass. As you know, that has
+always been my plan. I do not think I ever had a fight with an Indian
+that I did not try to think what he would do, or what I would do if I
+were in his place, before the real contest began."</p>
+
+<p>"Are you to lead the scouts on the south?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is for the King to say," replied Boone,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_286" id="Page_286">[Pg 286]</a></span> smiling as he quoted the
+well-known saying of Sam Oliver.</p>
+
+<p>The following morning Peleg, as leader of his little band of scouts,
+departed for the place of assembly. The advance to the Falls of the Ohio
+would require three days or more. It was not believed that there would
+be anything more than occasional attacks on the main body by small bands
+of Indians, for few braves would dare to oppose the coming of this great army.</p>
+
+<p>In Peleg's little band was Sam Oliver, the hunter. Sam now was plainly
+showing the effects of the passing years. He was suffering from
+rheumatism acquired by exposure in the many winters during which he had
+been known throughout the settlements as a great hunter. His visits to
+the stations were more frequent than formerly, and he remained longer
+than in the preceding years. He was still sensitive, however, concerning
+his physical strength and skill, and refused to listen to any suggestion
+that he was not in condition to accompany the younger men on their way
+to the meeting-place of the army.</p>
+
+<p>"Peleg," said Sam Oliver, when the party, all mounted, had set forth on
+their expedition, "I know a little Indian town about seventy-five miles
+from here where we can get some horses."</p>
+
+<p>"Is it on our way?"</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_287" id="Page_287">[Pg 287]</a></span></p><p>"It is not far from the river. If we can get a dozen or more horses it
+will make the heart of Colonel Clark rejoice."</p>
+
+<p>In explanation of the hunter's words, it may be said that stealing
+horses from the Indians was not looked upon as any crime by the early
+pioneers. Such a conviction may have been due in part to the fact that
+the tribes and white settlers were usually in a state of war with one
+another. The Indians' intense distrust of the early settlers had, as we
+know, long ago deepened into enduring hatred.</p>
+
+<p>There were few who believed the Indians were governed by any other than
+treacherous, bloodthirsty motives. So intense had become this belief
+along the border that it was well-nigh impossible for the men of that
+time to look upon the simple questions of right and wrong in any way
+that might favour the red men or even do them simple justice. To them
+they simply were enemies that must be driven from the region or exterminated.</p>
+
+<p>Late in the following afternoon Sam Oliver, when his friends halted,
+donned his Indian garb. In his disguise he was scarcely to be
+distinguished from one of the warriors.</p>
+
+<p>"I have learned the lingo, too," he said laughingly. "A good many times
+I have gone right into their villages and no one has suspected that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_288" id="Page_288">[Pg 288]</a></span> I
+was a white man. I want to get about fifteen horses," continued Sam,
+"and I want almost as much to get one of the Indians alive."</p>
+
+<p>"What for?" demanded Peleg in surprise.</p>
+
+<p>It was seldom that prisoners were made of the warriors at that time,
+because whenever a fight occurred it was usually a struggle to the
+death. The Indians, however, occasionally, as we know from the
+experiences of the great scout himself, not only made captives of their
+prisoners, but at times adopted them into their tribes in place of young
+braves that had been killed in battle.</p>
+
+<p>"I want one for a pet," laughed Sam Oliver.</p>
+
+<p>"I would sooner have a rattlesnake," declared one of the party.</p>
+
+<p>"That is what I used to say," said Sam, "but then that was years ago
+when I was young and slender. I know more about them now, and if I can
+get one alive I am going to make a pet of him."</p>
+
+<p>"You will be making a mistake," declared Schoolmaster Hargrave, who also
+was one of Peleg's band. It had been long since he had wielded the
+ferrule or had taught the boys and girls in Boonesborough. In recent
+years he had been toiling in the fields, as had the great scout and
+Peleg. He was, however, scarcely more successful in raising tobacco than
+he had been in training the children in his school. The title of
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_289" id="Page_289">[Pg 289]</a></span>"Schoolmaster" still clung to him, and when Sam Oliver laughed loudly
+and turned to answer his protest, he said, "Well, Schoolmaster, I can
+understand how you do not like the Indians. You had some pretty wild
+experiences yourself, in the schoolhouse. I understand that two or three
+of the boys disguised themselves the way I have and put you out through
+the window. Is that true?"</p>
+
+<p>Whether the statement was true or not it was never explained, for the
+hunter suddenly warned his companions to become silent as they were
+approaching the village he was seeking.</p>
+
+<p>Advancing with three of his companions and leaving Peleg and the
+remainder of the party behind to await their return, Sam stealthily
+began to make his way toward the little Indian village which he said was
+located only a few yards distant from the spot where a halt had been made.</p>
+
+<p>Sam was absent only two hours. His approach was heard by his waiting
+companions long before the hunter could be seen. It was plain, too, that
+he had been successful. The noise of snapping branches and an occasional
+whinny indicated that Sam was not returning empty-handed.</p>
+
+<p>"Did I not tell you what I would do?" boasted the hunter, when he
+returned. "I said I wanted a dozen horses. I have six, so that I am only
+half as happy as I ought to be."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_290" id="Page_290">[Pg 290]</a></span></p><p>"You are happier now than you soon will be," retorted Peleg, "unless we
+leave this part of the country right away."</p>
+
+<p>The horses which had been secured were all young and only partly broken.
+It was impossible for the party to mount them, and there were times when
+it was difficult even to lead them by the leathern straps which were
+fastened about their necks.</p>
+
+<p>Sam acknowledged the seriousness of the situation, and no urging was
+required to make the men push forward rapidly.</p>
+
+<p>When night fell they selected for their camp a spot on the bend of a
+little stream. Two of the men were assigned positions in the rear of the
+camp to watch for any pursuing Indians. There was no fear of an attack
+from the opposite side of the stream.</p>
+
+<p>At midnight the guard was relieved, and as it was Peleg's turn to take
+the position, he said quietly, "I can do this alone. All the rest of you
+turn in and get your sleep."</p>
+
+<p>His directions were speedily followed. The night passed without alarm,
+and the young scout was beginning to think that either the warriors of
+the village were aware of the plan of Colonel Clark, and had departed to
+join their own bands, or that they were absent from the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_291" id="Page_291">[Pg 291]</a></span> village at the
+time, and had not yet learned of Sam's theft.</p>
+
+<p>The first faint streaks of the dawn had appeared, and Peleg, taking a
+little bucket, stepped to the brook to secure some running water. The
+fire which had been kept alive throughout the night was burning low.
+When Peleg returned to the camp he was startled when he discovered by
+the dim light that the water in his bucket was muddy. There could be but
+one explanation, and the young scout hastily aroused his companions.</p>
+
+<p>"The brook was not muddy last night, but it is now," said the young
+leader. "To my mind that shows that we are being followed, and the
+Indians are coming down the stream to creep close to us."</p>
+
+<p>Just then the schoolmaster was seized with sharp pains and began to
+groan and writhe in his suffering. No one understood the nature of the
+attack, and the simple remedies which were used apparently produced no
+relief. At last the suffering man was covered with a blanket and placed
+near the ashes of the fire. All the men except Peleg then lay down once
+more upon the ground. A strenuous day was awaiting them, and whether
+Master Hargrave was ill or not, they must get their necessary rest. They
+were inclined to believe, too, after their long wait, that no Indians
+were near them. The stream might have been muddied by<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_292" id="Page_292">[Pg 292]</a></span> any one of half a
+dozen other means. Probably a 'coon had been the guilty party.</p>
+
+<p>And yet all unknown to the little body of settlers a band of twelve
+warriors had been furtively approaching them in the very manner Peleg
+had suspected. Their noiseless footsteps had even brought them within a
+few yards of the camp. Only the coming of the morning was required to
+enable them to attack.</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_293" id="Page_293">[Pg 293]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CHAPTER XXX</h2>
+
+<h3>CONCLUSION</h3>
+
+<p>The light of the rising sun had appeared when the crouching Indians
+together fired upon the silent little camp.</p>
+
+<p>By some strange chance almost all the bullets took effect in the body of
+the suffering schoolmaster. There was not even a cry from the stricken
+man, and as the Indians sent forth a wild whoop every one in the camp
+leaped to his feet and fled from the spot.</p>
+
+<p>There had been no time for plans to be made, and consequently every man
+fled by himself. They were followed by the shots and the cries of the
+pursuing Indians, but no one knew what had befallen his comrade.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg, who was fully dressed and better equipped than his friends for
+flight, with Singing Susan in his hand, suddenly fell as he ran along
+the border of a swamp which he had not noticed before.</p>
+
+<p>The warriors swept past him, all believing that the young scout had been
+shot, and that his scalp might be secured when they returned.</p>
+
+<p>Waiting only until the howling band had passed<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_294" id="Page_294">[Pg 294]</a></span> him, Peleg made his
+escape. He sped swiftly back in the direction of the camp, hoping to
+secure one of the stolen horses. When he arrived, however, his
+disappointment was keen when he found that not one of the horses was still there.</p>
+
+<p>Exerting himself to the utmost, and still gripping Singing Susan, Peleg
+ran swiftly into the forest in the direction of the meeting-place which
+Colonel Clark had selected.</p>
+
+<p>Several hours elapsed before the young scout arrived at the rendezvous.
+Before night fell three of his recent companions also appeared, but Sam
+Oliver was not of their number, and in fact he was never heard of again.</p>
+
+<p>Daniel Boone was now present, and when he and Peleg were together as
+darkness fell over the camp Boone said: "I am more hopeful now that we
+shall soon have peace than I have ever been before."</p>
+
+<p>"Just now," suggested Peleg with a laugh, "I am thinking more of
+something good to eat than I am of getting into the Indian villages."</p>
+
+<p>"That suggests the one mistake which I fear has been made. In his
+eagerness, the colonel has assembled his men before he has secured
+supplies. The result is that almost every man is hungry to-night."</p>
+
+<p>"I think I can endure it if the rest of the men do not complain," said
+Peleg sturdily. "I have<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_295" id="Page_295">[Pg 295]</a></span> not been with you through all these years
+without learning that I must not cry if everything I want does not come
+to me just when I want it."</p>
+
+<p>"That is well. I do not think we will remain here long. It may be that
+we shall start within a few hours. All the men are eager to be gone, and
+there is nothing to be gained by delay. Without sufficient supplies for
+our horses as well as our men, the sooner we start the better it will be
+for us all."</p>
+
+<p>"Are all here who are expected?" inquired Peleg.</p>
+
+<p>"There are about one thousand here now, including the regulars."</p>
+
+<p>This conversation was interrupted by the announcement that they would
+depart at once. There was a sufficient number of horses in the camp to
+provide one for Peleg and for others who had come on foot.</p>
+
+<p>Just previous to the start the great scout explained to Peleg, "We are
+not far from one of the largest villages of the Indians. It may be that
+we shall come to it before morning. That will depend upon the pace at
+which our men advance."</p>
+
+<p>The morning dawned, and still no sign of the first of the Indian
+villages had been seen. Not a trace of a warrior had been discovered
+throughout the night, nor had any been seen when several hours of the
+new day had passed. Whether or not the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_296" id="Page_296">[Pg 296]</a></span> Indians had been informed of the
+approach of their enemies was not known.</p>
+
+<p>Steadily the hungry men pressed forward, their conviction that the time
+had arrived for them to obtain lasting relief from the attacks of the
+treacherous Shawnees being even stronger than their feeling of hunger.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg and the great scout were in the front lines, if indeed the
+advancing body could be said to be moving with any appearance of order.
+It is true the men kept closely together, but the nature of the ground
+over which they were moving and the forests through which they passed
+made any approach to military order well-nigh impossible.</p>
+
+<p>The men near Peleg abruptly halted when not far before them on the
+opposite shore of a large pond they spied a solitary Indian. The warrior
+was standing as motionless as the nearby trees as he gazed steadily at
+his approaching enemies.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly he turned and fled into the forest, disregarding the calls of
+the men and even unmindful of the few scattered shots which followed him.</p>
+
+<p>"Who was that?" whispered Peleg to Daniel Boone.</p>
+
+<p>"It was Henry."</p>
+
+<p>"I believe it was," declared Peleg excitedly. "What will he do now?"</p>
+
+<p>"He will give the alarm to the village. We are<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_297" id="Page_297">[Pg 297]</a></span> not more than a mile
+from it now, and he will be there long before our horses can carry us
+over such ground as we have had for the past few miles."</p>
+
+<p>Just at that moment there was a sharp call for an advance. The entire
+body at once responded, although the hungry horses were in no condition for swift action.</p>
+
+<p>The words of the great scout were fulfilled when the force drew near the
+Indian village. Not one of its people was to be seen. Fires were still
+smouldering and even the meat which was being roasted and the corn that
+was boiling in the kettles had been abandoned in the precipitate flight of the Indians.</p>
+
+<p>The discovery of the food was perhaps more welcome to the hungry men
+than would have been the sight of their foes. At all events, a halt was
+made, and such food as could be obtained was speedily allotted.</p>
+
+<p>At the right of the village a large field of corn was seen, and the
+discovery that the corn was in the ear and ripe for food was good news
+indeed. It was not long before the hunger of every man was appeased, in
+a measure at least, and the entire force was ready for the further
+commands of Colonel Clark.</p>
+
+<p>The village was set on fire in several places, and flames were also
+kindled in the field. In less than an hour the men departed, leaving
+behind them<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_298" id="Page_298">[Pg 298]</a></span> only the smoking embers of what a short time before had
+been a prosperous village of the red men.</p>
+
+<p>Colonel Clark now urged his men forward with increasing speed. At times
+the force divided and the task of burning certain villages was assigned
+to the different bands. At other times the entire force proceeded as one
+body. But their enemies still had not been seen. Occasionally a solitary
+Indian would crawl within gunshot when the camp was pitched, discharge
+his gun, and then instantly flee; and once a small party of warriors,
+mounted upon superb horses, advanced boldly within gunshot. The red men
+coolly surveyed the little army, but when a force was sent to attack
+them they rode away so swiftly that pursuit was useless.</p>
+
+<p>Village after village was burned to the ground, and rich fields of corn
+were left in ruins. The pioneers were determined to rid themselves once
+and for all of further possibilities of attacks by the ferocious Shawnees.</p>
+
+<p>The alarm over the advance of Colonel Clark had spread throughout the
+entire region, and with one accord the red men had abandoned their homes
+and fled into the wilderness beyond.</p>
+
+<p>When the attacking forces at last disbanded and the men returned to
+their homes, Daniel Boone and Peleg Barnes went back with their friends
+into Kentucky. The warfare with the Indians was ended.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_299" id="Page_299">[Pg 299]</a></span> The Kentucky
+homes were now free from the attacks of the Shawnees or Cherokees.</p>
+
+<p>Peleg was no longer a boy. The years that had passed during these
+pioneer days had made of him a man. He now had his own home and a tract
+of land adjoining that of his great friend, Daniel Boone.</p>
+
+<p>Not a word was heard concerning Henry. There were occasional vague
+reports of the presence of a white man among the Shawnees, but whether
+or not this referred to "the white Shawnee" was never known.</p>
+
+<p>As for Daniel Boone, it seemed as if the days of his peril were ended.
+The region which he had opened up for the incoming people had now become
+well settled. The sound of the axe was heard more frequently than the
+rifle. Prosperity smiled upon the efforts of the sturdy settlers, and
+the steadily advancing civilization and the spread of education wrought
+wonders among the people.</p>
+
+<p>In the diary of Daniel Boone there occurs the following:</p>
+
+<blockquote><p>"Two darling sons and a brother I have lost by savage hands which
+have also taken from me 40 valuable horses and abundance of cattle.
+Many dark and sleepless nights have I spent, separated from the
+cheerful society of man, scorched by the summer's sun, and pinched
+by the winter's cold, an instrument ordained to settle the wilderness."</p></blockquote>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_300" id="Page_300">[Pg 300]</a></span></p><p>Another writer has left the following:</p>
+
+<blockquote><p>"He (Boone) has left behind him a name strongly written in the
+annals of Kentucky, and a reputation for calm courage softened by
+humanity, conducted by prudence, and embellished by a singular
+modesty of deportment. His person was rough, robust, and indicating
+strength rather than activity; his manner was cold, grave, and
+taciturn; his countenance homely but kind; his conversation
+unadorned, unobtrusive, and touching only upon the needful. He
+never spoke of himself unless particularly questioned."</p></blockquote>
+
+<p>As the years passed he showed more and more the spirit which has been
+described by one of his admirers in the following words:</p>
+
+<blockquote><p>"There never beat in man a kindlier or more philanthropic heart.
+While he was a stranger to selfish and sordid impressions he was
+alike above mean actions; and he lived and toiled for others, amid
+hardships and sufferings that would have crushed thousands of hearts."</p></blockquote>
+
+<p>The simple-hearted scout, shrewd in his dealing with the Indians, was
+honest and straightforward with the men of his own race, and looked for
+similar treatment from them. One can therefore imagine his surprise and
+indignation when he was informed that he had no legal right to an acre
+of the land which he had discovered, and into which he had led many
+families that already were sharing in the steadily increasing
+prosperity. The clearing he had made, the acres he had cultivated, he<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_301" id="Page_301">[Pg 301]</a></span>
+was informed, were not his property now, but belonged to a man <i>who had
+signed certain papers</i>!</p>
+
+<p>Boone intensely loved Kentucky. Its rocks and trees, its rivers, its
+forests, its very soil, were dear to his heart. In Kentucky he had
+experienced his deepest sorrows and many of his highest joys. Perplexed
+as well as disheartened, the great scout departed from the settlement
+which in a large measure was his own work. He was homeless in a land in
+which he had helped so many to secure homes for themselves.</p>
+
+<p>Deep as was Boone's sorrow, he was, as we know, a man whose feeling did
+not find expression in useless words. Quietly he returned to the banks
+of the Delaware where he had been born, and then went on to Virginia. On
+the borders of the great Kanawha he dwelt for five years in the woods
+with his dogs and gun.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile his son and a brother had gone out into the remote and almost
+unknown land beyond the Mississippi River. Their reports and appeals
+were so strong, that at last, when the great scout was sixty years of
+age, once more accompanied by his faithful wife, he journeyed away from
+civilization and went to join his sons in the faraway wilderness.</p>
+
+<p>The name of the great scout was so well-known and his character was so
+much admired that the Spanish Governor at once made him a present of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_302" id="Page_302">[Pg 302]</a></span>
+eighty-five hundred acres of land in what is now the State of Missouri.</p>
+
+<p>Here the great scout in a measure renewed the experiences of his early
+life. By working steadily and saving the money which he received from
+his crops and his furs he acquired a considerable sum. He then returned
+to Kentucky and looked up every man to whom he owed any money through
+the loss that had come to him by his inability to retain his land in the
+region he had loved. It was not long, however, before "he went back to
+Missouri, his heart lighter and also his pocketbook."</p>
+
+<p>When the scout was seventy-five years of age, he still was a great
+hunter. Friendly with the Indians in the region, he paddled in his light
+canoe over the creeks and the little streams in the new territory, and
+it is said that even along the banks of the great Missouri River he set
+many of his traps for the beaver.</p>
+
+<p>As long as the Spanish and French were in control of the Missouri
+country, Boone continued to hold his land safely; but when Napoleon sold
+the vast territory to the United States Boone once more suffered a heavy
+loss, for his own government refused to recognize his claim to any part
+of the region. It seemed almost as if the closing days of the great
+scout were to end in darkness.</p>
+
+<p>Through his friends, Daniel Boone now appealed<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_303" id="Page_303">[Pg 303]</a></span> to the legislature of
+Kentucky to see that justice was done him. Eager to recognize the
+services of the man who had done so much for their state, the
+legislature urged Congress to do justice to the white-haired old scout.
+After some delay the petition was granted, and a gift of eight hundred
+and fifty acres of land was voted Daniel Boone.</p>
+
+<p>It was in December, 1813, when Daniel Boone received word of this gift,
+but his relief and pleasure were lessened by the death of his wife.
+Selecting a choice spot that overlooked the river for her grave, the old
+scout said that when he, too, should die he wished to be buried by her side.</p>
+
+<p>Seven years later, when he was eighty-five years old, this last request
+of Daniel Boone was granted.</p>
+
+<p>Missouri, however, was not to be the final resting-place of the famous
+old scout and his wife. A quarter of a century later the legislature of
+Kentucky requested the children of Boone to permit the people of the
+state for which he had done so much to bring the bodies of the great
+scout and his wife to Frankfort, Kentucky.</p>
+
+<p>To-day, on a beautiful site overlooking the banks of the Kentucky River,
+looking down upon the city of Frankfort, a fitting monument marks the
+place where all that is mortal of Daniel Boone lies resting.</p>
+
+<h4>THE END</h4>
+
+<hr />
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_304" id="Page_304">[Pg 304]</a></span></p>
+
+<p class="tbrk">&nbsp;</p>
+
+<div class="center"><img src="images/i332.jpg" width='100' height='93' alt="Logo" /></div>
+
+<h5>THE COUNTRY LIFE PRESS<br />GARDEN CITY, N. Y.</h5>
+
+<p class="tbrk">&nbsp;</p>
+
+<hr />
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's Scouting with Daniel Boone, by Everett T. Tomlinson
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE ***
+
+***** This file should be named 31590-h.htm or 31590-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/3/1/5/9/31590/
+
+Produced by David Garcia, Martin Pettit and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Kentuckiana Digital Library)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/31590-h/images/i004.jpg b/31590-h/images/i004.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..acd1905
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590-h/images/i004.jpg
diff --git a/31590-h/images/i005.jpg b/31590-h/images/i005.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6cf6e01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590-h/images/i005.jpg
diff --git a/31590-h/images/i025.jpg b/31590-h/images/i025.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c52b835
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590-h/images/i025.jpg
diff --git a/31590-h/images/i045.jpg b/31590-h/images/i045.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..66044d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590-h/images/i045.jpg
diff --git a/31590-h/images/i095.jpg b/31590-h/images/i095.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f108d88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590-h/images/i095.jpg
diff --git a/31590-h/images/i137.jpg b/31590-h/images/i137.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..62cef1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590-h/images/i137.jpg
diff --git a/31590-h/images/i149.jpg b/31590-h/images/i149.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45d7cbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590-h/images/i149.jpg
diff --git a/31590-h/images/i245.jpg b/31590-h/images/i245.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c7f8fc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590-h/images/i245.jpg
diff --git a/31590-h/images/i303.jpg b/31590-h/images/i303.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e2fb194
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590-h/images/i303.jpg
diff --git a/31590-h/images/i332.jpg b/31590-h/images/i332.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3f486b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590-h/images/i332.jpg
diff --git a/31590.txt b/31590.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..af3d8cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8089 @@
+Project Gutenberg's Scouting with Daniel Boone, by Everett T. Tomlinson
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Scouting with Daniel Boone
+
+Author: Everett T. Tomlinson
+
+Illustrator: Norman Rockwell
+
+Release Date: March 10, 2010 [EBook #31590]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by David Garcia, Martin Pettit and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Kentuckiana Digital Library)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+BOOKS BY THE SAME AUTHOR
+
+
+THREE COLONIAL BOYS
+
+THREE YOUNG CONTINENTALS
+
+WASHINGTON'S YOUNG AIDS
+
+THE BOYS OF OLD MONMOUTH
+
+A JERSEY BOY IN THE REVOLUTION
+
+THE RIDER OF THE BLACK HORSE
+
+THE RED CHIEF
+
+MARCHING AGAINST THE IROQUOIS
+
+THE CAMP-FIRE OF MAD ANTHONY
+
+LIGHTHORSE HARRY'S LEGION
+
+THE YOUNG SHARPSHOOTER
+
+TECUMSEH'S YOUNG BRAVES
+
+THE BOY SOLDIERS OF 1812
+
+FOUR BOYS IN THE YELLOWSTONE
+
+FOUR BOYS IN THE YOSEMITE
+
+WARD HILL AT WESTON
+
+WITH FLINTLOCK AND FIFE
+
+THE FORT IN THE FOREST
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+[Illustration: "On the August air arose the reports of many rifles and
+the terrifying whoops of the Indians"]
+
+
+
+
+_PIONEER SCOUT SERIES_
+
+
+SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE
+
+BY EVERETT T. TOMLINSON
+
+[Illustration: Logo]
+
+_Illustrated by_ NORMAN ROCKWELL
+
+GARDEN CITY NEW YORK
+DOUBLEDAY, PAGE & COMPANY
+1917
+
+
+_Copyright, 1914, by_
+THE BOY SCOUTS OF AMERICA
+_For Boys' Life_
+
+_Copyright, 1914, by_
+EVERETT T. TOMLINSON
+
+_All rights reserved, including that of
+translation into foreign languages,
+including the Scandinavian_
+
+
+
+
+Preface
+
+
+Perhaps not unnaturally in certain details there is a slight confusion
+or divergence in the various works that recount the heroic deeds of
+Daniel Boone. The men of that day were making history rather than
+recording what they did. There is, however, a striking uniformity in all
+the records as to the simple faith and almost fatalistic conviction of
+Daniel Boone that he was called to be a pathfinder for the new nation in
+America. His courage, reverence, rugged honesty, and unselfishness, his
+childlike simplicity that was mixed with a certain shrewdness, at least
+in his dealings with the Indians, are, however, qualities in which the
+historians mostly agree.
+
+I have cast this record into story form and have used the license of a
+story-teller. I have incorporated a few adventures on the border which
+strictly do not belong to this tale. Every one of them, however, is
+true, and I hope will help in giving a true picture of those early and
+trying days.
+
+In the midst of it all I have placed the great scout. The qualities he
+displayed are the same that are necessary for success in our day or any
+day. The problems may vary from generation to generation, but the
+elements of true manhood are ever the same.
+
+I have made free use of the many historical works which portray the
+character of the great scout.
+
+First of all is the diary of Daniel Boone himself. In addition to that
+fascinating story, the following works also should be read by those who
+are interested in his life:
+
+"The Adventures of Colonel Daniel Boone," by General Filson;
+
+"Life of Boone," by Timothy Flint;
+
+"Daniel Boone and the Hunters of Kentucky," by W. H. Bogart;
+
+"Daniel Boone, the Pioneer of Kentucky," by J. S. C. Abbott;
+
+"The Adventures of Daniel Boone, the Kentucky Rifleman," by the author
+of "Uncle Philip's Conversations ";
+
+"Four American Pioneers," by Frances M. Perry and Katherine Beebe.
+
+The various publications of the Filson Club of Louisville, Kentucky,
+have also been helpful. "The Siege of Bryant's Station," by the
+President of the Club, Colonel Reuben Durrett, and "The Battle of Blue
+Licks," by Colonel Bennett H. Young, are most interesting.
+
+McClung's "Sketches of Western Adventure," and Strickland's "Pioneers
+of the West" have provided many interesting details. The author also
+gratefully acknowledges the aid he has had from some of the lineal
+descendants of Boone himself.
+
+If English boys are eager to hear about the heroic adventures of King
+Arthur, Robin Hood, and other characters, in part at least legendary,
+why should not American boys be equally interested in the true stories
+of the rugged heroes of their own land?
+
+There never has been a time when the development of a true patriotism
+was more needed than it is to-day. Our perils and problems are not
+concerned with savages and wild beasts, but they may be no less
+dangerous than those which confronted our forefathers. How to meet them,
+what qualities ought to be strengthened in the life of an American boy,
+how best to inspire the younger generation with love and devotion for
+our country, are vital questions of the present.
+
+The author believes there is no better way of doing this than by
+interesting our boys in such heroic men as Daniel Boone.
+
+EVERETT T. TOMLINSON.
+
+Elizabeth, New Jersey.
+
+
+
+
+Contents
+
+
+CHAPTER                                        PAGE
+
+    I. IN THE WILDERNESS                          3
+
+   II. HUNTER SAM                                13
+
+  III. THE HUNT FOR GAME                         23
+
+   IV. THE GOBBLERS                              33
+
+    V. PELEG'S NEW PLACE                         42
+
+   VI. SCHOOLMASTER HARGRAVE                     51
+
+  VII. TWO SCOUTS                                61
+
+ VIII. PELEG'S ENCOUNTER                         72
+
+   IX. AT THE SPRINGS                            80
+
+    X. A TERRIFIED BAND                          90
+
+   XI. THE ADVENTURE OF THE SCHOOLMASTER        100
+
+  XII. AN ATTACK                                110
+
+ XIII. THE WHITE SHAWNEE                        121
+
+  XIV. THE HIDDEN CANOE                         131
+
+   XV. GATHERING CLOUDS                         141
+
+  XVI. CAPTIVES                                 151
+
+ XVII. THE PURSUIT                              161
+
+XVIII. A BAND OF SCOUTS                         171
+
+  XIX. THE CAPTURE                              181
+
+    XX. AN OFFER OF RELEASE                     190
+
+   XXI. FLIGHT                                  200
+
+  XXII. THE COMING OF BLACKFISH                 211
+
+ XXIII. FOUR WARRIORS AND MORE                  223
+
+  XXIV. A DECOY AND AN ATTACK                   233
+
+   XXV. A FIELD OF CORN                         242
+
+  XXVI. THE WHITE SHAWNEE AGAIN                 251
+
+ XXVII. THE STRUGGLE IN THE RAVINE              260
+
+XXVIII. AT THE LOWER BLUE LICKS                 271
+
+  XXIX. TO THE MEETING-PLACE                    282
+
+   XXX. CONCLUSION                              293
+
+
+ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+"On the August air arose the reports of many rifles and
+the terrifying whoops of the Indians"           _Frontispiece_
+
+                                                   FACING PAGE
+
+"'What is that?' At the question the two pioneer
+boys stopped abruptly"                                      10
+
+"He was a tall, lean man, quiet in his bearing, and with
+every indication of self-control, as well as of strength,
+stamped upon his face and form"                             28
+
+"The Indian had been able to draw his knife and
+struck at her again and again while the bear held
+him in one of her most fervent hugs"                        76
+
+"Boone quickly rallied his startled followers and when
+the red men returned the hardy settlers were ready
+and awaiting their coming"                                 116
+
+"One of the men who had been stationed as a guard
+was shot early in the morning"                             126
+
+"The scout, with his family, returned to Boonesborough"    220
+
+"Silently the men crossed the ford"                        276
+
+
+
+
+SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+IN THE WILDERNESS
+
+
+"What is that?"
+
+At the question the two pioneer boys stopped abruptly. From within the
+forest they had heard the sound of a snapping branch. The sound itself
+had not been loud, but the quiet of that September day in 1773 had been
+sharply broken by the slight noise from the brush. For a brief time both
+boys listened intently and then one of them went back a short distance
+along the trail over which the little procession had advanced, carefully
+looking for signs of danger on either side.
+
+And there was need for caution. Under the leadership of Daniel Boone
+five families besides his own had been making their way slowly through
+the unbroken wilderness from the settlement on the Yadkin in North
+Carolina. At Powell's Valley, through which they recently had passed,
+forty men had joined the little company, thereby adding greatly to its
+strength, and increasing the confidence of the hardy settlers.
+
+As the little cavalcade spread out in a long line, an advance guard of
+five opened the way, while three rear guards, of two each at irregular
+intervals, were stationed to prevent surprises from the hostile Indians
+or attacks by the prowling beasts of prey that were wont to follow the
+trail of men in the wilderness.
+
+At this time the band was crossing Powell's Mountain, and the extreme
+rear guard was made up of James, the oldest son of Daniel Boone, and his
+friend, Peleg Barnes, the latter being one of the number that had been
+added to the company when the settlers arrived at Powell's Valley.
+Persuaded that no enemy was near, the two boys resumed their positions
+and proceeded on their way.
+
+Each boy was dressed in a hunting costume and wore leggings and fringed
+trousers made from the skin of the deer. Each also was armed with a
+rifle which he carried almost as naturally as if it was a part of
+himself. Powder-horns and bullet-pouches were swinging from their
+shoulders. It was manifest from the attitude and the manner of both
+young hunters that they were familiar with the ways of the wilderness
+and were alert to detect signs of the presence of friend or foe.
+
+"I don't like that noise," suggested Peleg in a low voice. "'Tis the
+second time we have heard it since we have been the rear guard to-day."
+
+His companion smiled and did not reply, and for a time Peleg also
+remained silent. He was a restless, dark-haired, muscular, and
+well-grown boy, perhaps seventeen or eighteen years of age, which also
+was the age of his more quiet comrade. The boys were warm friends, but
+like many men of the earlier days, they were prone to silence, though
+little that occurred in the nearby forest escaped their attention.
+
+The wilderness through which they were advancing was almost untrodden.
+Confidence and hope were expressed on the rugged faces of the boys,
+however, for they early had learned to live in the presence of continual
+danger from the prowling beasts and the hostile red men.
+
+"I never knew a man just like your father," suggested Peleg, at last
+breaking the silence.
+
+"Neither did I," replied James Boone, with a smile that strongly lighted
+up his face, as he turned to his friend.
+
+"He never seems to think about himself. He is taking this expedition to
+the land he has found because he believes it to be for our advantage for
+him to do so."
+
+"He knows it is."
+
+"I heard him tell about the wonderful sky and soil he had found there;
+and it must be worth while to go, else he would not be advising us to
+leave the Yadkin and cross all these mountains into the wilderness. I
+never saw such a strong man as your father is. I don't believe he has an
+ounce of fat on his body. Is it true that he is having a record kept of
+the places he has found and the journeys he has made?"
+
+"It is."
+
+"I should like much to see it. I can read writing, and if some time you
+will ask him to grant me the privilege I shall want to read what he has
+had written----"
+
+Peleg stopped abruptly and grasped his companion's arm, as both boys
+were startled once more by the sudden snapping of a branch apparently
+only a few yards to the left. Instantly both were listening
+breathlessly, and were holding their rifles in readiness, while they
+peered anxiously into the brush from which the threatening sound had
+come.
+
+"I declare to you," whispered Peleg, "that there is some one following
+us."
+
+"Verily," whispered James Boone, although he did not turn away his eyes
+from the forest as he spoke.
+
+The alarm of the two young guards was not unnatural, as has been said.
+On the lower slopes of the mountain great trees were growing, but as
+the band of emigrants had steadily climbed, the timber diminished, and
+even underbrush had become somewhat thinned. Still, on every side of the
+trail there were sufficient bushes to hide the presence of an enemy that
+might be following the pioneers. Both boys knew that game of many kinds
+abounded in the wilderness. Many a time their skill had been tested long
+before they had left their homes on the Yadkin.
+
+That their perils would be increased as they withdrew into the region in
+which the foot of no white men except Daniel Boone and his comrade had
+ever trod they both were well aware. On this September day the advancing
+settlers had been moving in a much longer and thinner line than had been
+adopted the preceding day. The difficulties of the ascent and the
+frequent great rocks in their way made their progress over the mountain
+more difficult and different from the easier march through the valley on
+the opposite side. Only an occasional white man had been seen since they
+had left their homes, and there was constant fear of the red men, almost
+all of whom were exceedingly hostile at this time and very jealous in
+guarding their own domains from the incursions of the whites.
+
+Perhaps not unnaturally most of those who were in Boone's party looked
+upon the Indian as a natural enemy. Few were mindful of the fact that
+the red men were but doing their utmost to defend their own homes and
+retain their hunting grounds from the trespassing whites, who, they were
+fearful, would soon push them from the region, unless by determined
+warfare the Shawnees and other neighbouring tribes might be able to
+prevent their entrance and settlement.
+
+It was well known that the region into which Daniel Boone was leading
+his company on that September day was considered by the Indians to be
+the best of all their hunting grounds. There the buffalo and the deer
+abounded. Wild turkeys were so numerous that the report which Daniel
+Boone had brought scarcely had been credited by his friends. There were
+times in the autumn when great flocks of wild pigeons sweeping through
+the woods might be felled with a club by a man standing in the way of
+their advance. It is true that where so much game was found dangerous
+animals also abounded. The panther and bear were much in evidence, and
+prowling wolves often made the night hideous with their weird and
+terrifying howls.
+
+There was no one in the advancing company who did not fully understand
+what the cost of seeking and making a new home in the wilderness was
+likely to be. Doubtless some would fall victims to the cunning of the
+hostile red men. Others were certain to lose their lives in attacks by
+the treacherous panther, the deadliest four-footed foe of the white men
+in the new world.
+
+When the two young pioneers, who formed the rear guard of the slowly
+moving procession, resumed their advance, both were silent for a time
+and keenly observant of the woods on either side of the trail left by
+those who had preceded them. In places the autumn foliage already was
+tinted with scarlet or gold. The soft air of the September day became
+slightly cooler as the party steadily approached the higher regions of
+Powell's Mountain.
+
+In the midst of such surroundings it was impossible for the young
+hunters long to retain their anxiety, though neither ceased his keen
+watchfulness.
+
+"How old is your father?" inquired Peleg at last.
+
+"About forty."
+
+"I wish much to hear him tell of his adventures in this land which he
+says the Indian calls Kantuckee. Do you know what that word means?"
+
+"No."
+
+"Do you think your father is fearful the redskins may attack us before
+we come to the Licks, where he affirms he will make our settlement?"
+
+"You must ask him," replied young Boone. "I do not believe he thinks
+that we or any other band of settlers will ever build a home in such a
+country as he has found without having to fight for it. Peleg, I have
+almost decided that one never gets anything worth having without having
+to fight some kind of a battle."
+
+"That is surely so," replied Peleg, laughing softly as he spoke. "I
+shall never forget how Schoolmaster Hargrave had to fight to teach me to
+use a quill. The letters somehow would not come, not even when he set
+his best copy for me. He told me one day that they looked like a
+whirlwind in distress. I was minded several times to give up the whole
+attempt, but he told me to fight on, and now I am glad that I did."
+
+"I am told that the schoolmaster later expects to come where we are
+going."
+
+"So I have heard. I hope he will leave his ferrule behind. Whew! My
+knuckles ache now with the mention! Still _he_ seemed to get some
+pleasure out of it, but----"
+
+Peleg stopped suddenly as a faint cry was heard far in their rear. It
+was a sound not unlike that made by a child in distress. Weird,
+pathetic, startling as it was, neither of the boys was for a moment
+unaware of its meaning. It was the cry of a panther far in the distance.
+
+[Illustration: "'What is that?' At the question the two pioneer boys
+stopped abruptly"]
+
+And panthers not infrequently hunted in pairs. It might be possible that
+two of the treacherous creatures had been following the slowly moving
+caravan, for slow-moving it was indeed. The children and women were
+carried on the backs of the horses. The few heavy wagons were dragged
+with difficulty over the rough ground, and many a time the entire band
+was compelled to halt while the men felled a tree which blocked their
+advance.
+
+"I tell you," said Peleg in a whisper, "that sound we heard before was
+made by a painter."
+
+"It may be true."
+
+"Will you stay here while I go back over the trail a little way to see
+if I can find any signs of the varmints? It is yet too light for them to
+attack us, but I should like to know if there is a pair on our trail."
+
+"Do not go far," said James Boone hesitatingly.
+
+"You may be sure that I shall not be over-venturesome. I shall return
+directly."
+
+In a moment Peleg disappeared from the sight of his companion as he
+lightly and yet swiftly sped back over the way by which they had come.
+
+Left alone, young Boone seated himself upon a fallen tree and awaited
+the return of his companion. Holding his rifle lightly in his hands
+after he had carefully looked to its priming, he was keenly observant of
+all about him. He had been disturbed more than he had acknowledged to
+Peleg by the sounds which they had heard. He had known of instances in
+which a panther had trailed a man for many hours. The conjecture of
+Peleg that a pair of the hated beasts might be following the slowly
+moving settlers was not improbable.
+
+As the moments passed the anxiety of the young hunter for his companion
+increased. No sound to alarm him had broken in upon the silence, and yet
+somehow the son of the great pioneer scout was anxious for his friend.
+
+Rising from his seat he ran swiftly in the direction in which Peleg had
+gone. In a few moments he discovered his friend standing beneath a
+spreading chestnut and holding his gun in such a manner that it was
+manifest that he had heard some sound to alarm him. A huge panther
+crouched upon the limb of the chestnut tree, almost directly above the
+place where Peleg was standing.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+HUNTER SAM
+
+
+If the vision of James Boone had not been trained, and unusually keen,
+the sight of the crouching animal would have escaped him. Its tawny skin
+was of a colour not unlike that of the tinged foliage of the branches of
+the chestnut upon which it was lying. There was an occasional nervous
+twitching of its tail, but otherwise it was as motionless as if it had
+been carved of marble.
+
+So intense was the interest of the savage beast in the young hunter
+directly beneath it that it was unaware of the approach of James Boone.
+Even as he perceived the animal, however, its muscles tightened, and it
+prepared for a leap upon the unsuspecting boy.
+
+Instantly bringing his rifle to his shoulder, and taking careful aim,
+James fired at the motionless target. He ignored the exclamation of the
+startled Peleg, who leaped to one side at the report of the rifle, and
+then, glancing at his friend, followed the direction of his gaze, and
+became aware of the peril above him.
+
+For a moment the beast seemed to be unharmed. It remained in the same
+position, motionless, and with its head leaning below the limb to which
+it clung.
+
+Young Boone did not move from the place where he was standing, but
+instantly began to reload his rifle, all the time keeping careful watch
+upon the movements of the beast.
+
+Suddenly the panther began to claw at the limb to which it had been
+clinging. It was manifest that its hold was broken or breaking. The long
+claws were driven savagely into the bark, but in spite of all its
+efforts the creature plainly was slipping. There were two or three
+snarls, and once it turned and snapped savagely at its side. The tail
+began to lash the branch, and then suddenly became motionless.
+
+Slowly the ability of the savage beast to maintain itself was departing.
+A stream of red showed the effect which young Boone's bullet had taken.
+He had aimed just a little back of the fore-shoulder, and it was
+difficult for him now to understand how even a panther, tenacious of
+life as the beast was known to be, was still able to cling to the
+branch.
+
+Struggling, snarling, the great beast turned and gradually but surely
+began to slip from its perch. For a moment it almost seemed that it
+would be able to maintain its grasp even after its body had turned to
+the underside of the huge branch. But all at once, without a sound, the
+long body fell, striking hard upon the ground twenty feet or more below.
+
+Before the animal could show whether or not it was still alive, Peleg,
+who now had recovered from his first alarm, raised his rifle and fired
+at the prostrate body.
+
+There was slight question now as to the approaching death of the savage
+beast. It lay almost motionless on the ground, but there was still an
+occasional nervous twitching of its long tail. Both boys, however, were
+too skilled in the art of the hunter to venture within reach of the
+terrible claws until they were satisfied that the dreaded enemy was
+indeed dead.
+
+"There may be another," said Peleg nervously, as he glanced into the
+woods after he had hastily reloaded his rifle. "That cry we heard
+probably was the call of this one's mate."
+
+"That may be so," said young Boone.
+
+"What are you going to do?" inquired Peleg in surprise, as he saw his
+companion place his rifle against a tree and draw his hunting-knife from
+his belt.
+
+"I am going to skin this big cat."
+
+"Do you think we ought to stop for that?" asked Peleg.
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Then let me help."
+
+"No, you keep guard. Our guns may have stirred up more trouble than we
+know."
+
+Acting upon this suggestion, both boys became silent while young Boone
+began his task.
+
+Swiftly and deftly he slit the beautiful skin the length of the body,
+and then did likewise on each leg. So skilful was the young hunter that
+in a brief time he had drawn back the skin sufficiently to cause him to
+call to his companion, "Come here and help me."
+
+Together the two boys then tore the skin from the body, and young Boone
+rolled the panther's hide into a small, compact bundle. He tied this
+securely with a deerskin thong, and then added it to his burden.
+
+At once the boys began to run swiftly to regain the distance they had
+lost. They had not advanced far, however, before they saw some one
+approaching them on the trail.
+
+"'Tis as I thought," said James Boone with a smile. "Our guns have
+'roused our friends."
+
+"That's Sam Oliver."
+
+"I see it is," replied James.
+
+Neither of the boys spoke again as the man rapidly approached them. Both
+knew him as one of the hunters of the company, and as one whose labours
+chiefly were confined to that field.
+
+Sam was perhaps fifty years of age, tall, rawboned, sunburned, with an
+expression of face not unpleasing, and a frequent twinkle in his eyes.
+As for felling the trees or building the houses of logs, Sam was willing
+for others to assume those labours, and whatever honours might accrue
+from such tasks. For himself he much preferred to do his part by
+supplying the band with game.
+
+Frequently the two boys had gone with the trapper when he had made the
+rounds of his traps, and in the warm days of summer nothing had
+delighted either more than to accompany him into the forest, where they
+were interested in the weird, and at times fantastic, tales Sam related
+of his personal adventures, and also of the characteristics of the
+denizens of the forest.
+
+"What's wrong, lads?" inquired the hunter as he approached.
+
+"Nothing is wrong now," laughed Peleg. "We shot a painter back here. And
+there is its hide," he added as he pointed with pride to the bundle
+which was suspended from his companion's shoulders.
+
+Glancing at the object to which his attention had been directed, Sam
+whistled and then said, "Seen any more?"
+
+"No, sir."
+
+"Seen any signs o' redskins?"
+
+"No, sir. Have you seen any?"
+
+"That's for the King to say," replied the hunter, laughing in apparent
+heartiness, though no sound escaped his lips.
+
+The expression, "that's for the King to say," was one that fell so
+frequently from the lips of Sam Oliver that both boys understood what he
+meant. It was his method of evading a direct reply to any question he
+did not wish to answer.
+
+"All of which means," said James, "that you _have_ seen some redskins."
+
+"A few signs. Nothing very bad, and nothing that should be spoken of by
+either of you. In course we are bound to find the varmints following us,
+but I don't think they will attack us if we are on our guard. We must do
+our best, and after that there is no good in trying to do anything more.
+Your father says everything that happens is right, or it wouldn't be.
+Strange," he added, as he again looked at the panther's skin which James
+Boone was carrying, "strange that you should have got him so easy. I
+have known the time when it would have taken half-dozen bullets to put
+an end to a fighting painter."
+
+"Have you shot a good many of them?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"Oh, a few, a few," replied the hunter. "The strangest sight I ever see
+was one time when I was followin' three o' the varmints. They led me a
+hard chase, and it was two days before I caught up with them, and when
+I did, I almost wished I had not."
+
+"Why?"
+
+"I will tell you. When I came near a big open space there in the woods I
+heard the worst screechin' I ever heard in my life. You simply cannot
+describe it. They were snarlin' and spittin' and screamin' and growlin',
+and sometimes it seemed as if they were doin' all four things at once.
+My first thought was that this was no place for Sam Oliver. It sounded
+like a hundred painters were fightin' to the death. I reckon I did turn
+back a little way, but the screechin' and the screamin' kep' up so that
+I finally decided that I must find out what was goin' on."
+
+"What was it?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"When I crep' up close to the clearin' and peeped out I saw two painters
+a-fightin'. They were crouchin' on the ground facin' each other and
+callin' each other every name they could think of in painter language. I
+did not know what had happened to the third painter, but I knew I ought
+not to stay there long. But all at once the two varmints leaped at each
+other and a minute later they were in such a plight that you would not
+have known what kind of beasts they was. They had ripped and torn and
+clawed and scratched and bit each other until it did not seem as if what
+was left could hang together. Then all at once one of them got the
+other fellow by the throat and it wasn't long before he said good-bye."
+
+"Did you shoot him?" asked Peleg.
+
+"No, for just then I heard a noise right behind me and when I looked
+back I see the third painter creepin' toward me and I fired at it and
+ran. Somehow I managed to get away, and next day I went back to the
+scene o' battle but I could not find anythin' there except the dead
+painter. The others had gone. I had been so long trailin' them that I
+thought I wouldn't follow any further. But if I live to be a hundred
+years old I shall never forget that there fight I saw between those two
+big cats! There are some animals," continued the hunter, "that seem to
+have reg'lar feuds, jest like fam'ly troubles. They may fight one
+another once in a while, but they will make up to fight the enemies of
+the fam'ly every time they get a chance."
+
+"What do you mean?" asked Peleg.
+
+"Well, for instance, there's the beaver and the otter. They seem to have
+had a declaration of war from the very beginning same as cats and dogs.
+I see a beaver house one day las' winter standin' right in the middle o'
+the pond which the beavers had made. You know they build a long tube
+right up through the centre o' the floor which looks somethin' like a
+chimney. The top o' this one was about four feet higher than the floor,
+and it was a good two feet through. The water round their house came
+almost to the top of the door. Mr. Beaver, when he wanted to go into his
+house, used to dive and come up through the tube, then he would shake
+himself, and slide down to his floor, which was always dry. It was
+always warm, too, for even in the coldest weather the water all round
+the house kep' it from freezin'. I reckon this particular fam'ly was
+pretty well provided for because they were all fat. Leastwise they
+looked as if they might have been, though they were dead when I saw
+them."
+
+"How was that?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"Why, the otter had gone after them."
+
+"Into their house?"
+
+"No! No! No otter would ever dare do that. In a fight in a place like
+that the beaver, which has such strong teeth and is such a strong little
+brute anyway, would have the advantage every time. The otter works in
+'nother way. The beaver fam'ly had been busy all through the summer
+hidin' their strips o' poplar and birch and willows in the bottom o' the
+lake which they had made. They intended to have their easy time in the
+winter, and they do, too, unless some otters happen along.
+
+"In this case I am tellin' you about, a couple o' otters had tried to
+break into the house, but the walls was hard as granite. If the otter
+can only get the beaver into the water he can catch him easily, because
+the otter is as quick as a fish. So the beaver simply works on the
+defensive and builds a house strong enough to keep out any otter that
+may happen along. But pretty soon the otters begin to look into the
+beavers' dam. By and by, when they find a weak spot, where they can work
+a hole straight through, they begin their job. When the weather is not
+too cold and the ice not too thick, just as soon as the water in the
+lake begins to drop a little, then the beavers begin to hunt for the
+leak. But when the water falls fast and there is a covering of ice all
+over the lake and sometimes the ice caves in, you see the beavers then
+cannot get their provisions, and the inside o' their houses is as cold
+as it is outside.
+
+"The otters have a reg'lar course they follow, goin' from one place to
+'nother and making their rounds 'bout every ten days to two weeks. I
+reckon in the case o' this beaver fam'ly I am tellin' you about that the
+otters came back in a fortnight or so and found the beavers all dead or
+in no shape to fight. Here comes Daniel Boone himself," the hunter
+exclaimed suddenly, "and I reckon you boys will have to explain to him
+what you meant by your shots back yonder."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+THE HUNT FOR GAME
+
+
+At the words of the hunter the boys looked up and saw the scout
+approaching. He was a tall, lean man, quiet in his bearing, in the prime
+of middle life, and with every indication of self-control, as well as of
+strength, stamped upon his face and form. His expression showed that he
+was anxious concerning the shots which had been fired, but as he drew
+near the boys he was not the first to speak. Peleg's admiration was
+manifest in the manner in which the young pioneer looked up to the great
+leader, though the boy, like others of his day and age, seldom spoke to
+his elders unless first they had spoken to him.
+
+In response to the question which was expressed in the eyes of Daniel
+Boone, rather than in words, Sam Oliver said quietly, "The boys shot a
+painter."
+
+There was a slight smile on the face of Daniel Boone as he said, "Did
+they? Was it necessary?" he added, as he turned to his son.
+
+"Yes, sir," replied young Boone. "The varmint was just ready to spring
+on Peleg. He was crouching on the branch of a tree directly over him,
+and if I had not fired he would have had him."
+
+"It must be right. You know," added Boone quietly, smiling again as he
+spoke, "I am one of those who believe that whatever happens is right."
+
+"And yet," suggested the hunter, "you don't stop tryin' for yourself,
+nor for others, either."
+
+"Not at all," answered the scout. "A man must follow the best light he
+can get and then, beyond that, where he cannot go, he must believe that
+things do not 'happen.' I have heard some men blame their 'luck' for
+what befell them. I have never thought there was any such thing as
+'luck.' The trouble is we do not always see the connection in events,
+and in our ignorance we say a thing 'happens.' I am sorry the boys had
+to shoot the painter."
+
+"I never knew," laughed the loquacious Sam, "that you had any sympathy
+to waste on those critters."
+
+"I haven't," replied Daniel Boone, a trace of a smile again appearing on
+his face as he spoke. "I am not sorry that the painter was shot. I am
+sorry that the boys had to shoot it. Just now I am more afraid of their
+rifles than I am of painters."
+
+The trio looked quickly into the face of the leader, but his quiet
+expression was unchanged, and what he may have implied by his statement
+he did not explain.
+
+"I do not love the varmints," said Sam, shaking his head. "I shall put
+them out of the world every chance I get."
+
+"So shall I," assented Boone, "although sometimes I feel sorry that I
+have to do so. I do not suppose that a painter is following anything
+else than the instinct which was given him, the same as a hound dog
+follows the track of a rabbit."
+
+"How about men?" inquired Sam.
+
+"I believe the same thing is true of men," said Daniel Boone seriously.
+"Fortunately for me, I had a good father and a good mother, so that when
+I was a child I was kept free from many of the things which drive some
+people I have known into divers sorts of evil."
+
+The little party was advancing steadily during this conversation, and
+apparently, now that the explanation of the two shots had been given,
+the leader was no longer apprehensive. To Peleg, however, who was
+watchful of the man's every movement, it seemed as if he was continually
+listening for sounds which the others were unable to hear. The boy was
+aware of the threatening peril from the Indians, although not once had a
+red man been seen since the emigrants had departed from Powell's Valley.
+But the fact that the Shawnees kept themselves hidden from sight by no
+means proved that they might not be near. Frequently he and James Boone
+had talked over the possibility of an attack by their foes, but the
+presence of the additional forty men that had joined the expedition
+recently provided an added sense of security. They felt that it was
+doubtful if even a large band of warriors would venture to attack a
+party so well defended as was that now led by Daniel Boone.
+
+When the sun set the entire band halted and preparations were made for
+the night. The few wagons were drawn toward one spot and left with their
+rear ends turned toward the forest. An enclosure was formed in this way,
+in the centre of which a fire was kindled and preparations for supper
+were speedily made. Meat from the deer which had been shot the preceding
+day was roasted on spits turned by some of the younger children. Only a
+scanty supply of vegetables was to be had, and for the most part the
+hardy settlers were compelled to rely upon the supplies of game which
+the boys and Sam Oliver and other hunters had no difficulty in obtaining
+in the forest.
+
+Guards were assigned for the night, one man being stationed on each of
+the four sides of the camp and close to the encircling wagons. The dogs
+which accompanied the expedition were also used as aids in detecting
+the presence of enemies, but throughout the night nothing more dangerous
+than a deer or a curious night-bird was heard.
+
+There were several young girls in the company whose duties consisted
+largely in looking after the younger children and in helping prepare the
+meals when the emigrants halted. There was an air of confidence in the
+bearing of almost all the members of the expedition, but Peleg Barnes
+was convinced that Daniel Boone himself was far from feeling at ease.
+The boy felt sure, of course, that the leader was anxious not for his
+own safety, but for those who were following him in their search for the
+wonderful land which he had found in Kantuckee.
+
+Before sunrise preparations for the resumption of the journey were
+completed, and after an ample breakfast, though the food did not differ
+materially from that of the preceding evening, the word to depart was
+given.
+
+The little children and many of the women rode on the backs of the
+horses, some of which were hauling the heavy wagons that contained the
+simple household possessions of the emigrants. As there were more horses
+than wagons, there was ample provision made for all who were unable to
+endure the hardships of the march. The sister of young Boone, however,
+frequently insisted upon walking with her brother, except when he was
+to be one of the guards. No fresh excitement occurred and no fears were
+aroused until after the band had passed Walden's Mountain.
+
+"Cumberland Mountain is not far beyond," said Sam to Peleg and young
+Boone when the nightly camp had been made after a second mountain had
+been crossed. "When once we get beyond that we shall soon see the land
+o' promise. I think to-morrow I shall have to take you two boys with me
+and see if we cannot get some fresh venison. Our stores are runnin' low,
+and a few pa'tridges or wild turkeys would not be bad, either, and I am
+sure we shall find plenty o' both in the valley."
+
+"There must be pigeons left from those we shot yesterday," suggested
+Peleg.
+
+"There are some," replied the hunter, who was in general charge of the
+larder, "but it would be a change for us if we could get a few turkeys.
+We ought to find some fish, too, in the stream in the valley, and I
+think I shall set some o' the boys to catchin' them. We shall go ahead
+o' the main party to-morrow, or else let the band go ahead of us, so
+that if there happen to be any redskins on our trail they will not
+mistake us for the whole band."
+
+"Have you seen any more signs?" inquired Peleg quickly.
+
+[Illustration: "He was a tall, lean man, quiet in his bearing, and with
+every indication of self-control, as well as of strength, stamped upon
+his face and form"]
+
+"Plenty o' signs, but we have not seen one o' the varmints. I know from
+the way Daniel Boone is watchin' that he is a bit fearful. I think I
+shall tell him to-morrow when we start for our game that we will let the
+rest o' the party go ahead of us and we will bring up the rear. It may
+save time to do that, because it will be easy to follow the trail they
+will leave. Most of this country is new to me and the only one that is
+sure of his way is the scout himself."
+
+"I think that would be better," assented young Boone, "and, besides, if
+we hunt in the rear of the party we shall be able to do double duty by
+serving as a rear guard at the same time."
+
+"That is right," laughed Sam. "Though that's for the King to say. The
+great trouble with him is that he does not say very much."
+
+"You have never been troubled that way, have you, Sam?" laughed Peleg.
+
+"I can't say that I have. I think o' so many things; and if I think o'
+them I want some one else to know what they are, too. You make your
+arrangements with the King and we will be ready to do our share on the
+morrow."
+
+Accordingly, on the following day, when the advance was resumed, Sam
+Oliver and his two young comrades waited for the cavalcade to pass and
+then began their task of providing supplies and game for the company.
+
+The emigrants now were nearing Cumberland Mountain. The three mountains
+were not far apart and looked almost as if they had been carefully
+planted at equal distances in the midst of the wilderness by some giant
+hand. Some of the cliffs were so wild and rugged that when the creaking
+wagons drew near the edge the children screamed in their terror. In the
+main, however, the trail was less difficult than had been expected. The
+huge masses of rock had been torn asunder in places by some volcanic
+action in preceding ages and had left narrow passageways through which
+the moving cavalcade was able to proceed without much difficulty.
+
+October had come and the foliage which had been slightly tinted in the
+preceding days had turned to a deeper shade. The trees were now ablaze
+with colour. Sam Oliver in his enthusiasm declared that within a half
+hour he and his companions would be able to rejoin the company with
+ample supplies for the following day.
+
+When the boys began their search for game his words seemed about to be
+verified: near the mountain brook they spied three deer, two of which
+fell at their first shot. Sam, who had preferred to hunt alone, also
+must have found game plentiful, the boys concluded, because twice within
+five minutes the report of his gun had been heard.
+
+"We must get some turkeys before we go back," suggested Peleg.
+
+"I am afraid you will have to wait until later in the day if you want to
+get them," responded young Boone.
+
+"I don't know about that," began Peleg. He stopped abruptly when, as if
+in confirmation of his own opinion, a gobble was heard not far to their
+right. This was quickly followed by an answering gobble from their left.
+
+"You take one and I will look for the other," eagerly suggested young
+Boone.
+
+The plan was instantly adopted, and each of the boys, crouching low and
+stealthily making his way among the trees and through the brush, tried
+to steal upon the bird, which still was noisily announcing its presence.
+
+James Boone moved forward thirty yards from the place where he had left
+his comrade and cautiously peered about him for a sight of the calling
+turkey. His feet, clad in moccasins, made little noise as he advanced
+over the moist ground. Deftly he parted the bushes in making his way,
+and they closed behind him with no more noise than as if they had been
+swayed by a gentle breeze.
+
+Suddenly young Boone came to a place from which he was able to see
+plainly a short distance before him. The gobble now was so distinct
+that, he held his gun in readiness for instant use. Cautiously
+advancing, he peeped from behind a tree, hopeful that he might obtain a
+sight of the bird he was seeking. To his terror he saw an Indian
+directly before him leaning against the trunk of a huge tree. The mouth
+of the warrior was partly closed by his hands. His face was daubed with
+paint, and his discoloured cheeks seemed to be doubly disgusting as he
+emitted sounds which even the keenest of the wild turkeys would scarcely
+have detected as different from its own.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+THE GOBBLERS
+
+
+At the moment when the young pioneer discovered the Indian, the warrior
+also became aware of the presence of his enemy. Whether it was because
+James was amazed at the redskin's skill in mimicking the call of the
+wild turkey, or because his enemy was somewhat quicker in his movements
+than he, is not known. At any rate, before young Boone could raise his
+gun to his shoulder the Indian turned and with all his strength hurled
+his tomahawk.
+
+True to its aim, the weapon struck the face of the young hunter, almost
+cleaving his head in twain.
+
+As the body of the stricken boy fell forward, the Indian halted a moment
+and then in his shrillest tones imitated the call of the crow four
+times. He waited until there was a response similar to his own, and
+then, running to the prostrate young hunter, deftly removed his scalp.
+He then dashed into the woods and ran in the direction from which the
+answering call had been heard.
+
+Meanwhile Peleg Barnes, who had been striving to locate the "turkey"
+which had been gobbling steadily in response to the calls of the one
+first heard, was more fortunate than his friend. Stealthily creeping
+through the bushes and darting from tree to tree, he discovered the
+warrior that was imitating the "gobbles" before the latter was aware of
+his presence.
+
+The boy almost intuitively was aware of the purpose of the warrior, and
+without hesitation raised his gun and fired.
+
+As the Indian fell to the ground Peleg did not wait to discover the
+effect of his shot, but ran back at his utmost speed toward the camp.
+Frequently, as he ran, the terrified young hunter shouted his warning of
+the presence of his enemies.
+
+Before he had regained the camp he was joined by Sam Oliver, who was
+angry as well as startled by the wild shouts of his young companion.
+
+"What's the trouble, Peleg?" he demanded.
+
+"I shot a redskin! There must be a good many more!" replied the boy,
+almost breathless in his excitement. "The varmint was daubed with paint
+and gobbling like a turkey, trying to draw some one into his trap."
+
+"Did young Boone go with you?"
+
+"No, he heard another 'turkey.'"
+
+"Where is he now?" demanded Sam sharply.
+
+"I do not know. We must get word to the scout."
+
+Nothing more was said until the returning hunters, both of whom were
+running at their utmost speed, came within sight of the place where the
+camp had been made. In a brief time they gained the open place in front,
+for the camp this time had been pitched on a small plateau, sheltered by
+a frowning cliff on one side and protected by a steep, rocky gulch on
+another, while in front of it was sufficient space to enable the
+watching guard to detect the approach of an enemy from that direction.
+
+As soon as they were within hearing, both hunters shouted their
+warnings; but even as they raised their voices the sound of rifles was
+heard and a moment later there was a sudden cry and rush made by at
+least three score of the Indians. The suddenness of the attack as well
+as the lack of preparation, due to the faith of the emigrants in the
+security of the position which they had selected for their halt, and
+their confidence in the guards which had been stationed, prevented an
+immediate response.
+
+The Indian warriors, hideously painted, crouching low and running
+swiftly, and at the same time emitting their terrifying whoops, fired at
+every paleface that they could see.
+
+To the startled pioneers the region seemed to be filled with their
+foes. The screams of frightened children, the calls of the women, and
+the shouts of the men as they summoned their companions increased the
+confusion. For a time the din was almost deafening. Above the shouts and
+cries were heard the frequent reports of the rifles of the attacking
+party.
+
+Peleg and Sam, who by this time had gained the shelter of the camp,
+instantly joined the few men that had rallied as soon as the warning was
+given. All now were doing their utmost to check the onslaught. Every
+man, without waiting for orders, fired at the shouting, leaping savages.
+As soon as their guns had been discharged, however, it was plain that
+the attacking party had many other weapons. Those who had emptied their
+rifles brandished their tomahawks and tried to make amends by the
+fierceness of their cries for their lack of more formidable ways of
+attacking. In a brief time the defenders were thrown into confusion,
+outnumbered as they were at the moment, and driven back toward the place
+where the camp was located.
+
+It was speedily known that several had fallen before the fire of the
+warriors, but just who or how many there was no time to ascertain. It
+was now every man for himself as they sought protection behind the
+great trees or darted for the friendly shelter of rocks, which were
+numerous in the region.
+
+It was at this time, however, that the great leader himself appeared
+upon the scene. Familiar with the ways of the Indians, Daniel Boone
+ordered every man to conceal himself behind some tree and make no
+attempt to flee from the place until the entire party had been driven
+away. The presence of Boone seemed to revive the courage of the
+retreating guards. As soon as sheltering places had been secured, every
+man reloaded his rifle and, following the example of the great scout,
+fired at the enemy, who now almost had crossed the open space before the
+camp.
+
+The fierceness of the onslaught of the Indian warriors was well known,
+but it was also understood by every white man that the red men seldom
+persisted in a long attack. A stealthy and sudden dash was their
+favourite method of fighting, but if the resistance was determined or
+prolonged they would usually withdraw to the shelter of the forest.
+
+In their present attack the Indians followed their customary plan. As
+soon as Boone and his companions ceased to flee and began to return the
+fire with vigour, the Indians faltered, and then, after they had given
+several unusually wild whoops and a final discharge of their weapons,
+they all fled back to the protecting forest from which they had so
+suddenly emerged.
+
+As soon as the enemy had departed, Daniel Boone, who thoroughly
+understood Indian nature and ways, doubled the guards, assigned some of
+his followers to the task of bringing in the bodies of the fallen, and
+then ordered the others to withdraw within the camp itself, and hold
+themselves in readiness for a sudden call. Meanwhile they were told to
+do their utmost to quiet the frightened women and children, the latter
+still vocally expressing their terror.
+
+It was soon learned that five of the whites had fallen. Their bodies
+were hastily borne within the protecting circle of the camp and two men
+who had been wounded were at once cared for.
+
+Peleg, whose excitement during the short, sharp fight had been intense,
+now recalled that he had not seen young Boone since his comrades had
+returned. Without voicing his fears he made a hasty tour of the camp,
+searching in every conceivable place for his friend.
+
+When at last the young hunter was convinced that James was nowhere to be
+found among the emigrants, he ran to Daniel Boone himself and said,
+"Have you seen James anywhere?"
+
+"No," replied the scout, glancing keenly at the young hunter. "Was he
+not with you?"
+
+"We were together until we heard the 'turkeys' gobbling. Then he
+followed the sound of one and I went after the other. When I came near
+the place I saw it was a warrior trying to decoy us."
+
+"And James was not with you?"
+
+"No, sir."
+
+"Did you call to him?"
+
+"No, sir. I shot the redskin and then started for the camp as fast as I
+could go. Sam Oliver came with me, and if it had not been for our alarm
+I am afraid the redskins would have done more damage than they did."
+
+The leader was silent as he gazed into the surrounding forest. He was
+well aware that the woods might conceal many more hostile Indians than
+had appeared in the sudden attack upon the camp. That he was deeply
+troubled by the message Peleg had brought him was manifest. Had his
+enemies already killed his son or had they made him a prisoner? What had
+become of James?
+
+"Do you think they have taken him?" inquired Peleg in a low voice.
+
+"That is what I hope," replied Daniel Boone; and then in response to the
+unspoken question of the young hunter he added: "If they have made him
+prisoner we may be able to get him again, but if they have not----"
+
+What the pioneer scout left unsaid was fully understood by Peleg, whose
+face became pale as he saw the anxiety of the leader for his boy.
+
+"A man must do his best, and it is useless to rebel," said Daniel Boone,
+almost as if he were speaking to himself. "If James has fallen, all that
+we may try to do will be useless. If he has escaped, he will not need
+all our help. If the Shawnees have made him their prisoner, then we
+shall do more to help him by quick action than in any other way."
+
+Turning from the women, who were weeping over the bodies of the dead men
+that had been brought back to the camp, in a few words Daniel Boone
+related to his companions what Peleg had told him. A band of twenty or
+more was speedily formed, every one eager to join in the search for the
+missing boy.
+
+"Peleg," inquired the scout just before the men departed from the camp,
+"do you think you can lead the way to the place where you and James
+heard the 'turkey'?"
+
+"Yes, sir," replied Peleg.
+
+"Then let us start at once."
+
+No man in the band was without fear when they entered the forest lest he
+might be the target of some concealed Indian. And yet the little force
+was relying upon the very boldness of their venture for its success.
+
+There was no trace of fright, however, when the men ran across the open
+space and followed Daniel Boone as he led the way in the direction
+indicated by Peleg, who was close behind him.
+
+In a brief time the party came to the place where Peleg had shot the
+Indian that had been imitating the gobble of a turkey. There was no
+delay, however, and as soon as Boone was convinced that the red man was
+dead he turned with his companions in the direction in which the other
+"turkey" had been heard.
+
+As yet not a sign of the presence of their enemy had been discovered,
+although every one was aware that dark eyes were doubtless watching
+their every movement. Why they had not been fired upon was as yet not
+understood.
+
+In a few minutes, however, these things were forgotten when Peleg led
+the way to the place toward which his young companion had gone to seek
+the "turkey" which had so noisily announced its presence.
+
+A low exclamation escaped the young hunter's lips when he and the leader
+halted a few minutes later and saw upon the ground before them the
+prostrate body of the missing boy.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+PELEG'S NEW PLACE
+
+
+Not a word escaped Daniel Boone's lips at the gruesome discovery of the
+body of his oldest son. He ran quickly forward, turned the body so that
+the face could be seen, and in this manner instantly realized the
+terrible fate which had overtaken James.
+
+Peleg Barnes, who was close behind him, never was able to forget the
+sound of the one long, dry sob to which Daniel Boone gave utterance.
+Then, almost as if he still was unaware of the presence of any one
+except the dead boy, he lifted the body tenderly, and with exceeding
+care placed it across his shoulders. Then, turning about, the great
+scout started back toward the camp.
+
+For a moment the other members of the party stood silent as they watched
+their suffering leader. There was not one of the men who would not have
+been glad to express his sympathy in words, but they were all aware of
+Daniel Boone's prejudices against giving full expression to one's
+feelings; and they had not yet recovered from the staggering surprise
+which the discovery of the body of James had created.
+
+When Daniel Boone disappeared in the brush, Sam Oliver ran to the spot
+where this discovery had been made and, picking up the gun of James,
+turned to his companions and said: "We must follow him. We must keep
+close to him. The redskins might almost scalp him and he would not
+understand what they are doing, the way he feels now."
+
+Acting upon this suggestion, the men all turned to follow the direction
+in which their leader had disappeared. Peleg had run in advance of the
+other members of the band, eager to help the scout in his task. Quietly
+the leader shook his head, but did not speak in response to the young
+hunter's offer to aid. Apparently he was hardly aware that his friends
+were so near him.
+
+Without delay the party soon gained the open space in front of the camp.
+There Daniel Boone stopped, and, turning to his friends, whose presence
+apparently neither surprised nor startled him, said: "I shall take my
+boy to the place where the other bodies are lying. I desire you to say
+nothing of what has befallen him until first I shall break the news to
+my wife."
+
+No reply was given to the request of the hunter, nor was any expected.
+There was no protest by the scout, however, when Sam Oliver and Peleg
+followed him as he bore his burden to the place where the bodies of the
+men who had fallen in the sudden attack by the Indians were lying,
+covered by blankets. There, still quiet, and as tender in his manner as
+a woman, Daniel Boone lifted the body of his boy from his shoulders and
+laid it beside those who were his fellow victims.
+
+Peleg, whose eyes were watching every movement of the man for whom his
+feeling was little less than adoration, in spite of his grief, marvelled
+at the wonderful strength the scout displayed. There was no evidence of
+struggle on his part, and as soon as he had deposited the body, Daniel
+Boone turned away, and the two hunters required no word from him to
+inform them that he had gone to tell his wife of the great sorrow which
+had come into their lives. Peleg's eager look followed him even when he
+saw him beckon her to one side of the company, and then both withdrew
+from the sight of the entire band. The bearing of the scout was still
+unchanged. So great was his self-control that no one in the party, who
+did not know of the calamity, suspected that anything had befallen the
+leader beyond the common feeling of sorrow for the loss of the five men.
+
+What was said by Daniel Boone to his wife in that heartbreaking
+interview no one ever knew. When the scout rejoined the band, which now
+had assembled behind the protecting barricade, he said simply: "We must
+prepare for a hasty burial. These bodies must not be left for the wolves
+to maltreat." The leader spoke as quietly as if he were referring to one
+of the ordinary experiences of life, instead of one that would have
+wrung the heart of the strongest man.
+
+On the hillside, near the place where the camp had been pitched, the
+bodies of the fallen men were hastily buried. There were cries and sobs
+from many of those who had been bereaved, and the unutterable fear and
+horror which more or less possessed all the emigrant band were apparent
+in the glances of terror which were frequently cast toward the forest.
+Even some of the men gave way to their sorrow and anxiety. Not a trace
+of either emotion, however, was to be seen in the face of Daniel Boone
+when at last the leader turned away from the place of burial.
+
+Later in the day Peleg chanced upon the scout when the latter believed
+himself to be alone. Seated upon a log looking steadily upon the ground,
+still without a cry, the man's frame was shaken in his agony of grief.
+Abashed by the discovery, Peleg, whose sorrow at the loss of his friend
+also had been keen, stealthily withdrew from the place and did not refer
+to his discovery when later he joined his companions. Before the scout
+returned, the boy had decided that at his first opportunity he would
+explain to him how strong had been the friendship between himself and
+James. Peleg was too modest to believe that the great man had ever been
+aware of the friendship between the two boys. Such matters were of too
+minor importance for him even to recognize, much less to remember,
+thought the lad.
+
+Great then was the young hunter's surprise, and greater still his
+pleasure, when the scout stopped by his side the next day and, looking
+into his face, said calmly, "Peleg, you and James were great friends."
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"Hereafter I shall have a special love for you, Peleg, because you loved
+my boy."
+
+Tears, which the young hunter was unable to control, sprang into his
+eyes at the words which were evidence not only of the keen observation
+of Daniel Boone but also of his regard for one who had been the friend
+of his son. Still the scout's voice was quiet and calm. Peleg was
+convinced that he was not unaware of his inability to reply. "It is one
+of the things, Peleg, which cannot be changed," continued Daniel Boone.
+"James was a good son and I looked forward to a useful life for him, but
+he is not to be here. It does no one any good to rebel uselessly, and
+only children and savages complain when everything they desire is not
+arranged as they wish."
+
+"Yes, sir," assented Peleg. At first he suspected that the words of the
+leader were intended as a rebuke to him for the display of his feelings.
+Perhaps it was a weakness, he thought, and yet, somehow, the young
+soldier was convinced that the father of his friend perhaps did not
+think any the less of him because he had been deeply moved by the tragic
+death of James Boone.
+
+"It is not the first time," continued the scout, "that I have been
+compelled to face sorrow. Somehow I feel that one is like a leaf carried
+on the stream. It may whirl about and turn and twist, but it is always
+carried forward." As he spoke, the leader stooped, and taking a tiny
+branch which had fallen to the ground tossed it into the noisy little
+stream which went tumbling down the side of Cumberland Mountain on its
+way to the great river and the sea beyond. "It is somewhat like that, my
+lad," continued Daniel Boone, running his fingers through his hair as he
+spoke. "Man is borne onward by a Power which he does not understand, and
+yet which he must recognize as greater than his own. It is so that one
+is carried by the years. One is helpless to stop them in their course,
+as helpless as that little branch which I threw into the water. It does
+no one any good to rebel or complain. Every man must accept the facts of
+his life, believing that there is a Power that guides and controls far
+better than he knows how to do."
+
+The scout spoke musingly, almost as if he thought himself to be alone. A
+brief silence followed his words, and then Daniel Boone turned once more
+to Peleg. "My lad," he said, "all I say is that one cannot turn back.
+However much I may sorrow over the loss of my boy, I cannot go back to
+him. The only direction in which I can move is forward. If one can only
+find the right way, that is not so bad."
+
+"Yes, sir," said Peleg, hardly aware of the full meaning of Boone's
+words.
+
+"You were a friend of my boy."
+
+"Yes, sir," again responded Peleg, his voice breaking once more in spite
+of his efforts at self-control.
+
+"You shall be _my_ friend from this time forward. You cannot take the
+place of James, but because you were his friend you shall have a share,
+if you so desire, such as he might have had, in my life and my plans.
+Your father is not living?"
+
+"He has been dead three years."
+
+"And your mother?"
+
+"She died when I was a baby."
+
+"Then there is no one to whom you can turn?"
+
+"I have lived with my uncle, but I have no desire to go back to him."
+
+Boone looked keenly into the face of the boy by his side and was silent
+a moment. "Peleg," he resumed, "I meant what I said just now. If you so
+desire, you shall be my friend."
+
+"I do desire it," said Peleg impulsively. "There Is nothing I want so
+much as I do to be with you. It is good of you to think of me----"
+
+"Say no more," interrupted Boone. "I shall not forget, though I may not
+speak to you soon of this matter again. When the time comes, I shall not
+fail to let you know."
+
+When night fell the guards of the camp were doubled, for with the coming
+of darkness the terror of some of the emigrants increased. There were
+frequent cries heard from the little children, cries which the mothers
+were unable to quiet and in which some of them even joined. A feeling of
+terror had settled over the whole camp.
+
+To Peleg was assigned a post of danger, as his position as guard was to
+be near the gulch. Steep as this was, it would have been possible for a
+warrior to climb its rocky sides if he were familiar with the spot.
+
+Before Peleg departed for his station he was joined by Israel Boone, a
+younger brother of James, who insisted upon sharing the vigil. In the
+light of the campfire Peleg saw the face of the scout change colour
+when the suggestion was made by his son, but he did not offer any
+objection, and in spite of Sam Oliver's declaration that "One boy was a
+boy and two boys was half a boy," the leader quietly gave his consent.
+
+When the silence of the outer night became more marked in the deepening
+darkness, the occasional cries of the children did not cease. They were
+cries not of suffering, but of terror. There were times when even the
+two young guards shared in the prevailing fear. The darkness that
+surrounded them might conceal painted warriors who were watchful of
+their every act. At any moment a bullet from some unseen enemy might
+find its way to the heart of a watching sentinel. Such a condition was
+not long to be endured. As the hours passed, both boys grew more eager
+for the coming of the morning, when, whatever plan might be formed, at
+least relief from the depressing silence would come.
+
+To Peleg no thought of any change in the plans of the emigrants had
+occurred, and he was therefore the more astonished the following morning
+when, after he had been relieved from duty and had obtained a few hours
+of sleep, he was informed before breakfast that the men were assembling
+for a council. Even his feeling of hunger was ignored in the exciting
+announcement which soon was made by Boone.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+SCHOOLMASTER HARGRAVE
+
+
+Before breakfast had been prepared Peleg was aware of a certain partly
+suppressed excitement among the members of the band. The women, with
+tears in their eyes and with their children clinging to their skirts,
+frequently had been in conference with Daniel Boone or with other men of
+the party.
+
+It was therefore not without some previous intimation that Peleg heard
+the scout summon the men to a new conference.
+
+As soon as they were assembled Boone said, "It will not be possible for
+us to proceed at this time."
+
+"Why not?" demanded Sam Oliver.
+
+"The women are terror-stricken. I myself had not thought that we should
+so soon be attacked by the savages. I have reason to remember our stay
+on Cumberland Mountain----" For a moment the scout was silent, and an
+expression of sympathy ran through the entire assembly. Once more in
+control of his feelings, Boone continued: "It is not for myself, as you
+know, that I am asking this return. It is useless, however, now to go
+on with such fear among our womenfolk, and the redskins opposing us more
+strongly the farther we go into Kantuckee."
+
+"Where can we go?" inquired one of the assembly.
+
+"I have decided that our best plan is to return to the settlement on the
+Clinch River."
+
+"How far is that from here?" asked the inquirer.
+
+"About forty miles."
+
+"I am not one to favour return just because we have been
+unfortunate----"
+
+"There is no question," said Daniel Boone, his eyes flashing in spite of
+the quiet manner of his speech, "about what we shall do. We shall make
+our plans to return at once."
+
+Whatever feeling of rebellion may have been aroused in the minds of some
+of his followers, the decision of the leader was not to be disputed. The
+confidence of every one in his courage, integrity, and judgment was so
+strong that no one at the time would have dared oppose the great scout.
+
+Accordingly, hasty preparations were made for the return of the entire
+band, and within an hour the emigrants were on their way.
+
+The same order was maintained which previously had been used. An advance
+party of five and three rear guards were formed, but now the scout had
+in addition a small body moving on each flank, parallel with the main
+body.
+
+With the departure, renewed confidence came to all. As the band withdrew
+further from Cumberland Mountain their spirits in a measure revived, and
+when on the third day they arrived at the little settlement which they
+were seeking on the Clinch River, even the tragedy which had befallen
+them was seldom mentioned. Even the packhorses pricked up their ears and
+required no incentive to induce them to move rapidly down the
+mountainside.
+
+When the emigrants at last arrived at their destination it was found
+necessary to erect several new houses. The nights already were cool, and
+a snowfall might be expected at any time. Even Sam Oliver, who seldom
+assisted in the labours of the settlements, was induced to aid his
+companions in felling the trees and cutting the logs for the little
+houses which must be the sole protection of the people throughout the
+coming winter.
+
+Not many weeks after the return of Daniel Boone and his party,
+Schoolmaster Hargrave found his way into the settlement. He was a
+peculiar man in his appearance, exceedingly awkward and angular, a fact
+which was made more marked by the odd clothing he wore. Disdaining
+garments made from the skins of wild beasts, his clothes were of
+woollen material, and made, too, after a fashion that in itself was
+fearful and wonderful to behold. Even his cocked hat did not become him,
+but in some way seemed to make more prominent his long nose, which was
+covered with splotches of red, as were also his cheeks. That he was
+earnest and deeply interested in his tasks no one denied. The prime
+qualification for the work of the schoolmaster in that day, however,
+consisted in the fact that he was very muscular and able to compel the
+obedience of even the oldest boys in his school, who frequently were
+tempted to pit their strength against his.
+
+At the suggestion of the scout, a schoolhouse of logs was erected soon
+after the coming of Master Hargrave. In this little schoolhouse there
+was a fireplace, or chimney, which extended nearly across one entire end
+of the building. When a huge log fire was burning there it sent out not
+only its genial heat, but at frequent intervals with the changing winds
+it drew clouds of smoke down the chimney and into the eyes of the
+children that were seated on the rude benches. The little building was
+equipped with more windows than the cabins which had been built for
+dwellings. The windowpanes were of paper and made transparent by oiling
+or greasing them.
+
+Young Daniel Morgan Boone, the third son of Daniel, became a constant
+companion of Peleg in the days that followed the return of the
+emigrants. Daniel had begun to attend school as soon as the rude little
+building was erected, and many of his experiences with the awkward
+schoolmaster were gleefully related to Peleg, who now was no longer
+counted a pupil of the master.
+
+"Master Hargrave," said Daniel one day, "makes us learn many verses of
+Scripture."
+
+"Does he?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"Indeed he does. To-day he gave us three: 'The rod and rule give
+wisdom,' 'A rod fits a fool's back,' and 'He that spoils the rod is not
+wise.'"
+
+Peleg laughed and said: "I remember those verses myself. He taught them
+to me. Does he rap your knuckles with his ferrule?"
+
+"Sometimes he uses a ferrule, but more often he stands there by one of
+the windows making a pen, and out of the corners of his eyes watches
+every one of the eighteen scholars. He always has a stout hickory in his
+hand or under his arm. The other day there was a disturbance on one of
+the benches, and without waiting to find who was guilty he laid his
+hickory across the backs of every one of us."
+
+"So you have your share, too, do you?"
+
+"Indeed I do. But the strangest part was day before yesterday, when
+Schoolmaster Hargrave chased Return Sharp. Return would rather go
+fishing or swimming or hunting any day than go to school. He says he
+does not care for learning."
+
+"He is a stout, burly fellow. I suppose a beating does not trouble him
+much?"
+
+"That's the strange part of it," laughed Daniel gleefully. "He doesn't
+seem to mind one at all. The other afternoon when the boys had been
+called in from recess, Return ducked around the corner of the house and
+began to run. Master Hargrave spied him, and, spitting on both his
+hands, he grasped his hickory and sallied forth to catch him. Return saw
+him coming and took to his heels. Every one in the school was out there
+in front of the schoolhouse watching the sport. We were ready to dodge
+back into our seats, but we wanted to see the race."
+
+"What did he do? Did the master get him?"
+
+"Return took a circuit and started for the meadow, and in a little while
+he was of course coming back toward the schoolhouse. Master Hargrave was
+gaining upon him at every jump, and just as Return cleared the fence
+Master Hargrave let him have it with the hickory. For once in his life
+Return made haste, I can tell you. He was not very long in reaching the
+ground from the top of that fence! The schoolmaster was on the other
+side, and as he saw that all the scholars were watching him he jumped
+over the fence and started after Return faster than ever. I would not
+have believed that he could run so fast. Return looked back to see how
+near the schoolmaster was, and just then he stumbled and fell, and
+Master Hargrave was so close behind that he, too, stumbled over Return
+and then tumbled to the ground. Return jumped up and took a back track,
+but the Master was after him in a minute, and before he got halfway to
+the schoolhouse he had caught up with him, and at every jump the master
+also let him have it with the hickory. Return got the last love pat just
+as he tumbled over the fence and crawled into the schoolhouse. We all
+thought when the master came in that he would use his hickory on Return
+plentifully, and also on all the rest of us; but for some strange reason
+he seemed to have given Return all that he had to spare that day.
+Strange how he seems to take delight in beating poor Return."
+
+"He always took his whaling like an ox," laughed Peleg, "and grows fat
+on it every day. I have marks yet on my knuckles that the schoolmaster
+gave me."
+
+"What are you doing?" demanded Daniel, apparently for the first time
+becoming aware of Peleg's occupation.
+
+"I am making a new stock for this rifle-barrel."
+
+"The gun looks like it might kick," commented Daniel sagely, looking
+critically at the rifle-barrel which was lying upon the rude little
+bench at which Peleg was working.
+
+"It would if a boy like you should try to use it."
+
+Daniel laughed derisively and said: "Pray, Mr. Venerable Barnes, how
+long since you were a boy yourself?"
+
+"If you think you can fire this gun, I shall let you be the first one to
+try it. I have it almost ready now, and all I have to do is to fit the
+barrel into the stock----"
+
+"Hello!" called Daniel, looking up sharply as he became aware of the
+approach of a man on horseback. "This is some stranger. I wonder what he
+can be wanting."
+
+A visitor from any of the faraway settlements was a matter of moment,
+and Peleg advanced to the door to see who the newcomer might be.
+
+The man was a stranger to both boys. As soon as he spied the lads he
+said, "Is Daniel Boone in this settlement?"
+
+"He is, sir," answered Peleg promptly.
+
+"Where can I find him? I would have word with him."
+
+"Daniel, do you tell your father there is a gentleman here who desires
+to speak to him."
+
+"I am a messenger," spoke up the stranger, "a courier from Governor
+Dunmore. 'Tis a matter of importance, and Mr. Daniel Boone will do well
+to report promptly."
+
+Peleg looked at the messenger, who was not much older than he. His air
+of importance was not lost upon the young settler, who laughed slightly
+when, after Daniel's departure in search of his father, he turned again
+to the visitor.
+
+"It is a great honour I have for Daniel Boone," suggested the courier.
+
+"That depends somewhat, I fancy, upon who you are and what you have to
+bring him."
+
+"I have told you already that I am a messenger from Governor Dunmore. It
+is meet in you, young man, to respect men who are high in authority."
+
+"I do respect the Governor," said Peleg dryly.
+
+"Then you should have respect for the Governor's messenger."
+
+"I have respect for all who are respectable."
+
+"What mean you by that?" demanded the visitor hotly; as he spoke he
+leaped from the seat on the back of his horse and advanced threateningly
+upon Peleg.
+
+His attitude changed, however, when Peleg quietly stood his ground and
+even slightly smiled at the pompous words and manner of the visitor.
+
+The return of young Daniel Boone interrupted the interview.
+
+"My father will be pleased to see you," said the lad, glancing
+questioningly first at Peleg and then at the messenger.
+
+"Of course he will see me," declared the courier. "Why did he not return
+with you?"
+
+"He is awaiting your coming and bade me conduct you to our home."
+
+"Is it far from here?"
+
+"No, sir"
+
+"Very good. I shall be pleased to go with you and give my message to
+Daniel Boone."
+
+Peleg was an interested observer of the departing visitor, and his
+interest would have been still keener had he known how much the message
+from Governor Dunmore concerned his own future.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+TWO SCOUTS
+
+
+Peleg resumed his congenial occupation, working steadily upon the rifle
+which he was fashioning. The barrel had been part of a gun which
+belonged to one of the men who had fallen in the recent attack by the
+Indians, its stock having been shattered by the blow of a hatchet. After
+the weapon had been found, instead of throwing it aside as its finder
+was tempted to do, Peleg had taken it for himself. All the way from
+Cumberland Mountain he had carried the barrel, which was all that he had
+saved of the rifle. He was aware of the confidence which its recent
+owner had in its qualities, and he had determined to fashion from it a
+gun for himself upon which he might rely.
+
+A smile of satisfaction lighted up the countenance of the young hunter
+when after several hours had elapsed he critically examined his new
+weapon, the parts of which now had all been joined.
+
+At supper time at the home of Daniel Boone, of whose family Peleg had
+been made a member since the death of James, the visitor of the
+afternoon was recalled by a question of Israel Boone, the second of the
+five sons of Daniel Boone.
+
+"Why did not that man stay all night?" he inquired of his father when
+the family was seated about the rude table.
+
+"He would not remain," replied his father quietly.
+
+"Who was he?" continued Israel.
+
+"A messenger from Governor Dunmore."
+
+The lad was eager to continue his questioning, but evidently he saw
+something in the glance of his father which precluded further attempts,
+and he became silent.
+
+It was not until the following morning that Peleg learned of the reason,
+and then only in part, for the coming of their recent visitor.
+
+"Peleg," said Daniel Boone quietly, "would you prefer to remain here in
+the settlement, or go with me on a scout?"
+
+"I would rather go with you," responded Peleg promptly.
+
+"It is possible that we may be gone two months or more."
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"And may have to travel something like eight hundred miles."
+
+"I shall do my best."
+
+"You are well aware, lad, that we shall meet many hard experiences."
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"And you are not afraid?"
+
+"Not if you are to find the way."
+
+Daniel Boone smiled and reached for Peleg's new gun. He examined the
+weapon critically, raising it to his shoulder and sighting it several
+times.
+
+"'Tis a handy rifle, lad," he remarked, when his inspection was ended.
+"Have you tried it?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"And is it true?"
+
+"It is as far as I am able to make it so."
+
+"If you go with me, is this the gun you will take?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"Why do you not prefer to remain in the settlement? There is work to be
+done here. The gardens are to be cared for and the game must be provided
+for the people. Here is where I should remain were it not that when I
+hear the call of Governor Dunmore I realize that there is work for me
+which I must not neglect."
+
+Peleg was silent as he watched the great scout. Even while the man was
+speaking there came into his eyes an expression such as the boy had seen
+only when he and his friend had been together in the forest. It was the
+look of one seeing visions, and yet there was also in it the expression
+of a man of resolute purpose.
+
+"'Twill not do," continued Daniel Boone turning again to Peleg, "to take
+any chances. I had thought at first to take Sam Oliver with me, but now
+it seems good to me for you to go, if you so desire."
+
+"I do."
+
+"I suggest that you try out your new rifle several times before we
+leave. The time to prepare is before we start. After we have gone on our
+way a hundred miles or more 'twill be difficult then to correct any
+fault or change any plans. More than half the winning of any battle
+depends upon the preparations one makes, I care not whether it be a
+fight with the Indians or with one's own weaknesses. There are other
+rifles from which you may make a selection," Boone added.
+
+"Yes, sir, but I think I prefer this. I have made it myself and have
+tested and tried it every way. I have chosen a name for it."
+
+"What have you named it?" inquired Boone.
+
+"Singing Susan."
+
+"And you have sufficient bullets?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"And powder?"
+
+"Yes, sir," responded Peleg. As he spoke he showed a huge powder-horn
+which he had polished and upon which he had carved the following dire
+warning:
+
+
+     "Ye mann what steles this powd^r horne,
+     Will go to helle as sure as y^re borne."
+
+
+The scout slowly read the inscription and, shaking his head, said: "I
+think I should leave that horn behind. There are plenty more which are
+not so sharp in their warnings."
+
+"But it is true, isn't it? If a man steals, isn't that the place where
+he belongs?"
+
+Apparently the thoughts of the great leader were withdrawn to other
+matters, for, ignoring the question, he said: "Peleg, we shall start
+before sunrise to-morrow morning. These June days are long and we do not
+want to lose any of the hours."
+
+"Shall we stop at night?"
+
+"That will depend much upon events. There may be times when we shall be
+glad to have the night protect us in our advance, and when it will be
+necessary for us to hide in the daytime. There are some things to see to
+before we go. One of these is that you must learn how to follow my
+trail."
+
+Peleg's eager manner expressed a question. His interest was keen.
+
+"If you are lost or are not able to find me I shall mark my trail with
+five stones placed like this." As he spoke the pioneer arranged five
+small stones in a semicircle on the ground near him. "You may expect to
+find these near the springs or at the places where I may cross the
+rivers. We must plan to keep closely together, but I am referring to
+this in case anything should happen to separate us. There are some other
+things about which I shall tell you after we have started. I wish I felt
+a little more confidence in that rifle," he added. "What did you say you
+have named it?"
+
+"Singing Susan."
+
+Boone said no more, and Peleg withdrew beyond the border of the
+settlement to make additional tests of his newly made rifle. Apparently
+these were satisfactory, for at three o'clock the following morning when
+he and Daniel Boone departed from the little settlement it was "Singing
+Susan," which Peleg was carrying over his shoulder.
+
+As yet the boy did not know whither he and his comrade were going. Only
+in a general way had Boone explained how long they might be absent.
+However, it was clear to the mind of Peleg that the scout was moved by a
+feeling that he was engaging in an enterprise from which there was to be
+no turning back, and that he felt that he needed some one to accompany
+him.
+
+To be near Boone was sufficient reward in itself, and buoyantly the
+young man carried himself as they moved in single file through the
+passes of the mountains. It was seldom that either spoke, and it was
+agreed that their guns were not to be fired except when it was necessary
+to secure game.
+
+Many miles had been covered when the two hunters decided to rest, for
+night was at hand. Selecting a sheltered spot near a swiftly running
+brook, they were protected from peril from the rear of their camp by the
+huge walls of the hill which rose abruptly behind it. A fire was kindled
+with Peleg's flint and tinder and allowed to burn only long enough to
+roast the loin of deer which had been secured by a shot from the scout's
+rifle early that morning.
+
+As soon as their supper had been eaten the fire was extinguished. The
+June air was warm and it was with a sense of comfort that Peleg seated
+himself upon the ground with his back against the protecting cliff. His
+companion had seldom spoken to him throughout their journey, and the
+pace at which they had been travelling had told more severely upon the
+younger hunter than upon Boone. Yet there was a feeling of deep comfort
+in Peleg's heart. The stars were twinkling in the sky, the gentle breeze
+that swept the treetops was softly musical in its sound, and beyond all
+these was the pleasure of being in the company of the man to whom he
+looked up as to no one else. All combined to make the young hunter
+happy.
+
+To his surprise he found that Daniel Boone was willing to talk more
+freely than he ever had known him to do before.
+
+"Yes," Daniel Boone was saying, "my grandfather came from England and
+settled in Pennsylvania. He had nine sons and ten daughters. My father
+he called Squire. I do not know just why, unless it was because he was
+more active than his brothers. I was born on the right bank of the
+Delaware in Bucks County, Pennsylvania, in 1734. Not long after my
+father married he moved to another part of the colony, and when I was a
+little lad he took us overland through Maryland and Virginia and settled
+at the headwaters of the Yadkin."
+
+"A fine place, too, that is," said Peleg.
+
+"Indeed it is," assented the scout, "but it was not for me. Somehow I
+seem destined to find the way for others rather than to be able to enjoy
+much of quiet and rest myself. It was on the first day of May, 1769,
+that I left my family in quest of the country of Kantuckee. Five men
+travelled with me, all of us relying upon the reports of John Finley,
+one of our number, who had been trading with the Indians there. He
+averred that he had found the most beautiful of all lands. I shall not
+soon forget the seventh day of June that year, when John Finley and I,
+from the top of an eminence, looked out upon the beautiful land of
+Kantuckee. Buffalo were more numerous than are cattle in the
+settlements. They fed upon the grass that grows marvellously on those
+plains. We saw hundreds in a drove, and the numbers about the salt
+springs were amazing. On the 22d of December, John Stuart and I were
+having a pleasing ramble. We had passed through a great forest and were
+amazed at the variety of the blossoms we saw. As for game, why it almost
+seemed to seek us out instead of making us the hunters. It was near
+sunset and we were near the Kantuckee River, when a number of Indians
+rushed out of a canebrake and made us their prisoners."
+
+"How long did they keep you?"
+
+"Seven days. We did our utmost not to show any uneasiness, and gradually
+they became less suspicious of us. But in the dead of the night of that
+seventh day, when we were lying by a large fire and all the others were
+asleep, I gently shook my companion, whispered my plan, and we left the
+camp without disturbing any one. My brother and another man, who had
+started after us to explore the country, found the camp of our party,
+but it had been plundered and the other men in our band had fled.
+Strangely enough, we soon came upon one another in the forest. You may
+be sure that this meeting with my brother was most welcome. The man who
+was with him, however, soon went on a private excursion and was attacked
+and killed by wolves. John Stuart was killed by the Indians. There we
+were in a howling wilderness, hundreds of miles from our families and
+surrounded by Indians who were determined to kill us. All through that
+winter we had no trouble, however, and on the first of the following May
+my brother went home for a new recruit of horses and ammunition, leaving
+me alone. I had been without bread for a year; I had no salt nor sugar,
+and not even a horse or a dog for company.
+
+"I knew I must not lament, however, and accordingly I undertook a tour
+which I thought might be of benefit to others who, I had no doubt, soon
+would follow me. Often I heard the hideous yells of the savages
+searching for me. On the 27th of July my brother returned, and together
+we went as far as the Cumberland River, scouting through that part of
+the country and giving names to the different rivers. In the following
+March I went back to my family, determined to bring them as soon as
+possible, even at the risk of life and fortune, to make a home in
+Kantuckee, which I esteemed a second Paradise.
+
+"You know, my lad, how I sold my land on the Yadkin and disposed of
+such goods as we could not carry with us, and how with five other
+families we started on the 25th of September to journey to Kantuckee.
+You were one of us at that time.
+
+"You well remember also what occurred on the 10th of October, when our
+company was attacked by the Indians, how I lost my boy, and how we all
+journeyed back to the settlement on the Clinch River."
+
+"And now?" queried Peleg.
+
+"And now," answered Daniel Boone, "you and I are to journey to the Falls
+of the Ohio. Our surveyors there are in great peril from the Indians. We
+shall, without doubt, find ourselves often in danger, and I am selecting
+you to accompany me because already I have found that I could rely upon
+you. You have been quick to learn what I have taught you, and I do not
+believe you will easily be taken unawares, because you have already
+learned how to prepare yourself for any event. Any one who has not
+learned that lesson can never become a successful man, to say nothing of
+succeeding as a scout."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+PELEG'S ENCOUNTER
+
+
+The following morning dawned clear and warm, and as no signs of Indians
+had been seen the two scouts renewed their journey with lighter hearts.
+At least a part of Peleg's fear was gone, though it was impossible for
+him to determine by anything his companion said whether or not he shared
+his feeling.
+
+Without an open declaration of war, the Shawnees, Wyandottes, Cherokees,
+and Delawares were working more or less together at this time and were
+untiring in their determination to prevent the whites from entering and
+establishing homes in the region which the Indians believed was entirely
+their own.
+
+The second day passed, and the progress of the two scouts was unbroken.
+Still Daniel Boone was using great caution, forbidding the discharge of
+guns except when food was required, and insisting upon the fire being
+extinguished as soon as the meals had been prepared.
+
+On the fourth day of their journey the anxiety of the great scout
+became more manifest. "I have seen some things," he explained to his
+companion, "which are troubling me."
+
+"Are the Indians near us?"
+
+"I have been convinced that they have been near us all our journey, but
+I fear now they are approaching still nearer. My suggestion is that we
+separate, and I will go to the south and you to the north of the path we
+would have taken and meet again in our camp here a few hours from this
+time. We may throw them off our trail."
+
+"Shall we start now?" inquired Peleg, rising at once as he spoke.
+
+"'Twill be well to do so. The sun is now two hours high, and we must
+both be back here in camp by noon."
+
+As he finished speaking, Daniel Boone departed silently into the forest
+and his example was promptly followed by the younger scout.
+
+The young hunter had been gone almost an hour and as yet had discovered
+only a few signs of the presence of their enemies. He was near the bank
+of a stream some twenty feet or more in width when, glancing behind him,
+he saw two Indians swiftly approaching.
+
+His first impulse was to fire upon them, but holding his rifle in
+readiness he waited for them to come nearer. Suddenly one of the red men
+raised his gun and fired at Peleg. The young scout heard the bullet
+whistling close to his head, and, instantly taking aim, returned the
+fire, causing one of the Indians to fall forward upon his face. The
+other warrior, however, was armed, and was swiftly approaching.
+
+Peleg's first impulse to use his gun as a club and strive to defend
+himself was quickly abandoned when in some consternation he became aware
+of the size of the advancing red man. Never before had he seen an Indian
+so large as the one who was now approaching. Not merely was the man
+tall, but his breadth of shoulder and every movement alike showed the
+great strength which he possessed.
+
+Thinking this was a case where discretion was the better part of valor,
+Peleg darted swiftly into the woods. As he did so his enemy fired at
+him, but fortunately the boy escaped unhurt. He ran at his utmost speed,
+but as he glanced over his shoulder he saw that his pursuer was speedily
+gaining upon him. Peleg Barnes was considered the best wrestler and the
+strongest of the younger men in the little settlement on the Clinch
+River. He now was more than six feet tall and the muscles in his arms
+and legs were marvellously developed. If the man behind him had not been
+of such gigantic and ferocious aspect, the young hunter would have
+ventured a single combat; but Peleg had decided that flight was the
+safer course.
+
+For several hundred yards he ran at his utmost speed, but every glance
+backward showed him that, swiftly as he was running, his pursuer was
+steadily gaining upon him.
+
+The woods through which they were speeding consisted almost entirely of
+small trees, few of which were large enough to provide protection or
+even shelter.
+
+Peleg had passed a large walnut tree, which he had noticed standing like
+a patriarch among the surrounding saplings, and suddenly he paused in
+his flight and ran back ten steps to gain it. This action of the young
+scout plainly startled the Indian, who halted a moment, thereby giving
+his adversary the advantage of reaching the shelter he was seeking.
+
+If Peleg's gun had been loaded the solution of his troubles would not
+have been difficult. As it was, the huge warrior resumed his rapid
+advance. Again Peleg fled, but he was well aware that sooner or later he
+must stop and strive to defend himself by using his rifle as a club.
+
+The moment for such action soon came, and, abruptly halting, Peleg
+seized his rifle by the barrel and raised it above his head. The Indian
+dropped his empty gun and advanced upon his victim with his tomahawk.
+
+Instead of waiting to receive the attack, Peleg suddenly leaped forward
+and struck with the stock of his gun. The warrior at the same moment
+whirled his tomahawk and threw it.
+
+In a manner both blows took effect. The stock of the rifle was
+dislocated by the blow which Peleg struck the Indian's skull, and at the
+same time the vicious blow of the tomahawk was deflected by the barrel
+of the rifle, though it cut deeply into Peleg's hand between his thumb
+and forefinger as it glanced.
+
+As the Indian attempted to draw his knife, Peleg seized him and together
+both fell to the ground.
+
+For a time the efforts of the Indian were by no means violent, and Peleg
+was hopeful that the blow which the warrior had received had partly
+disabled him; but it was soon manifest that the Indian had recovered,
+for, wrapping his long arms around Peleg's body, he pressed him to his
+breast with well-nigh crushing force.
+
+[Illustration: "The Indian had been able to draw his knife and struck at
+her again and again, while the bear held him in one of her most fervent
+hugs"]
+
+Peleg, powerful young scout that he was, had never felt an embrace like
+that of the huge warrior. Relaxing his efforts for a moment, he
+endeavoured to convince his enemy that his strength was well-nigh gone.
+The Indian apparently was deceived by his trick and made an attempt to
+reach for Peleg's gun, which had fallen on the ground nearby. The young
+hunter at the same moment made a sudden and desperate attempt to free
+himself from the arms of the giant.
+
+Success crowned his efforts, but before he was able to escape from the
+place the Indian leaped to his feet, and, seizing Peleg with one hand
+and grasping the collar of his hunting shirt with the other, he drew his
+enemy steadily to his hip, and then by a sudden effort threw him at
+least ten feet into the air, much as he might have tossed a little
+child. Peleg fell upon his back at the edge of the stream, but before
+the savage could spring upon him, he was again upon his feet, and, stung
+with rage as well as desperation, instantly, and with a violence which
+for a time made up for his lack of strength, he renewed his attack upon
+his gigantic enemy.
+
+The Indian, however, closed again with Peleg and hurled him to the
+ground, though the young hunter still doggedly clung to his foe.
+Together they rolled into the water, where the struggle continued
+unabated for a time, as each did his utmost to thrust and hold the head
+of his opponent beneath the surface.
+
+It soon was plain that the Indian was unused to such long-continued and
+violent exertion, and Peleg felt sure that his enemy was weaker than
+when the struggle began.
+
+Suddenly the young hunter by a supreme effort seized the warrior by his
+scalp-lock and thrust his head under the water, where he succeeded in
+holding it until the struggles of the Indian became faint and convinced
+Peleg that the contest was ended.
+
+The cunning warrior, however, had been shamming, and as soon as Peleg
+released his hold he quickly regained his foothold and in turn forced
+Peleg under the water. In the struggle which followed both contestants
+were carried into the current of the stream beyond their depth, and were
+compelled to let go their hold and swim for their lives.
+
+Peleg was the first to gain the shore. A low hill, partly wooded, was
+directly before him, and he ran as swiftly as his strength permitted up
+the long, sloping ridge. In a brief time he discovered that the Indian
+was gaining upon him so rapidly that all hope of escape departed.
+
+At that moment the young scout saw at his side a large tree, which in
+some storm had been torn up by its roots and was lying prostrate on the
+ground.
+
+Instantly he ran along the side of the tree, aware that his enemy was
+following upon the opposite side. Doubtless the red man expected to
+seize him when the huge roots of the tree had been gained.
+
+On the warm ground at the roots of the tree, all unknown to the pursuer
+and the pursued, a huge she-bear was lying with her two cubs. The Indian
+was the first to arrive at the spot, and as he darted around the roots
+the savage animal with a snarl of rage instantly sprang upon him. The
+growls of the bear and the cries of the warrior instantly produced a
+deafening uproar.
+
+The Indian had been able to draw his knife, and struck at her again and
+again while the bear held him in one of her most fervent hugs. Peleg,
+without waiting to learn the result of the startling and noisy contest,
+instantly turned and ran back over the way he had come.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+AT THE SPRINGS
+
+
+The young scout was breathless and exhausted when at last he arrived
+safely at the camp. His appearance was such that no explanation was
+required by Daniel Boone, who was already there. He instantly noticed
+the wound which Peleg had received on his hand and how blood-stained his
+clothing was. He asked no questions, however, and at once attended to
+the wants of his companion.
+
+In a short time Peleg had recovered sufficiently to enable him to relate
+the story of the adventures which had befallen him.
+
+"You have lost Singing Susan?" suggested Boone.
+
+Peleg nodded in response, but did not speak.
+
+"Can you find the place where you dropped her?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"And the place where the Indian was hugged by the bear?"
+
+Again Peleg nodded.
+
+"If you will tell me where the places are I might go to both of them."
+
+"Very well," said Peleg quickly, "but I shall go with you."
+
+Boone said no more and busied himself in arranging the small packs which
+the two scouts were carrying. It was not long before Peleg declared he
+was ready to accompany his friend, and without a further word they
+departed from their camp.
+
+It was not difficult for the young hunter to find his way to the place
+where the Indian had been seized by the angry mother-bear. Cautiously
+approaching, both men peered intently about them, but they were unable
+to discover any signs of either the warrior or the animal that had
+attacked him. When they advanced to the spot where the tree had been
+uptorn by the roots they found an abundance of footprints of the bear
+and also of the moccasined Indian, but that was all.
+
+"They both got away," said Boone at last.
+
+"Or ate each other up," suggested Peleg with a smile.
+
+"We will look for Singing Susan. You lead the way, Peleg."
+
+Wearied as Peleg was by his recent contest, he nevertheless responded
+promptly, and in a brief time the hunters arrived at the border of the
+stream near which Peleg had been compelled to drop his rifle. When he
+had cast it from him he had tossed it into the nearby bushes, dimly
+thinking that if by chance he should escape he might return and find the
+weapon which he prized so highly. A part of the scout's teachings
+already had taken effect in this forethought of his young comrade. To be
+prepared for any emergency was an essential part of life in the woods.
+As they drew near the spot, Peleg was thinking of the great lesson he
+had learned from Boone. He ran to the bushes, pushed aside the brush and
+drew forth his gun with some pride. A smile lighted the face of Boone as
+he nodded his head in approval of the forethought of his young friend,
+and advancing, he extended his hand to inspect the weapon.
+
+"What happened to the gun?" he inquired, as he marked the condition of
+the stock.
+
+"I struck the skull of the Indian."
+
+"'Twas a hard blow, son, and I have slight doubt the Indian's head is
+aching."
+
+"If it had not been for that, I should not be here to tell you about it
+now."
+
+"No one can say about that. You _are_ here, Peleg, and we must act upon
+that which _is_ rather than upon what might have been. Indeed, I have
+long since learned to accept my life with that understanding. I had
+nothing to say about when I should come into the world, and I have as
+little to say about when I shall leave it. The only part I can guide is
+that which is in between. I can fix this stock," he added, "and soon we
+shall have Susan singing again. We will push forward a little farther
+and find some place where we can camp for the night. A good sleep will
+do you more good than anything else, though first I must attend again to
+that hand of yours."
+
+Selecting a linen bandage, a small supply of which Boone always carried
+with him on his expeditions, he gathered some leaves of the witch-hazel
+plant and, pounding them to a pulp, spread them upon the cloth.
+Thoroughly washing the wounded hand of Peleg, he then bound the cloth
+and pulp of the leaves upon the wound, saying as he did so: "In a week
+you will be as good as new."
+
+As soon as this task had been accomplished the journey was resumed,
+although only two miles was covered before Boone was convinced that his
+companion was too weary to proceed farther.
+
+The following day, although Peleg's hand still was sore from his wound,
+he found little difficulty in carrying his rifle, for the great scout
+had been successful in restoring Singing Susan to her former efficient
+condition.
+
+Increasing signs of the presence of the Indians were seen, and once
+Boone turned aside from his pathway when an old canoe was found, which
+with a little effort he was able to patch up.
+
+"I am fearful of the water," he said, "for I cannot swim. Can you, son?"
+
+"Yes, sir," replied Peleg, glancing up in astonishment at this
+acknowledgment of his friend's one weakness.
+
+"It is well you can," said Boone with a smile. "I never was able to get
+the knack. You will have to be the leader now. We can go down this
+stream five or six miles, perhaps more, before we strike across the
+country again."
+
+"How is it," inquired Peleg, "that you find your way through the
+forests? I am never afraid of being lost in any of the woods where I
+have been before, but I should not be sure of myself in trying to go to
+the Falls of the Ohio, although even now we must be within a few days of
+the place."
+
+Boone smiled as he replied: "There are some things which a man can learn
+and some which must be born in him to help him in the forests. A man who
+can sing, if he will go to the singing schools faithfully, may become a
+better singer; but if he has no voice to begin with, there is little use
+in his saying _do, ra, me, fa, so, la, si, do_ over and over again. So
+it is in the woods. I watch the birds, the trees, and the leaves, as
+well as the lay of the land, but beyond all that there is a part which
+I cannot explain. It must be my nature, just the same as it is for a
+fish to live in the water or a bee to seek the flowers."
+
+"Do you think I ever can learn?"
+
+"I do, son. I have marked you often and know that you have the ability
+as well as the will to learn."
+
+Signs of the presence of Indians increased as the two scouts proceeded.
+It seemed to Boone that the Indians were moving eastward, a matter which
+promised ill for the scattered settlements on the border.
+
+However, the days passed, and Boone and his companion evaded their foes,
+and on the twenty-ninth day arrived at the Falls of the Ohio, whither
+Governor Dunmore had directed them to go.
+
+Only once had Daniel Boone referred to the purpose of his journey, and
+then he had explained to Peleg how the Governor had become exceedingly
+anxious concerning the safety of the surveyors. Cut off as they were in
+their faraway camp from the help of others, they also were unaware that
+the hunters were bringing word of the increasing restlessness among the
+Indians. Some of the scattered settlers recently had been killed by the
+angry tribes, and the rumours and reports all had it that the Shawnees,
+Delawares, and Wyandottes were becoming more and more savage in their
+attacks upon the whites, upon whom they now looked with deadly hatred
+because they were making homes in their land.
+
+The coming of Daniel Boone and his young companion aroused much interest
+among the band of surveyors whose headquarters were at the Falls of the
+Ohio. Several log houses had been erected by them there, and the little
+settlement bore more evidences of refinement than one usually found on
+the frontier. There were many questions asked and a deep interest shown
+in the doings of the great world beyond, with which the lonely men had
+had nothing to do for many long months.
+
+When, however, Daniel Boone explained the purpose of his coming, most of
+the men received his word with incredulity. They acknowledged that
+occasionally they had seen a few Indians, but not yet had they been
+molested, nor had any threats been made against their remaining where
+they were.
+
+To such statements the great scout made no reply except to repeat the
+reason for his coming, and the anxiety of Governor Dunmore in their
+behalf.
+
+"We will sleep over it and let you know to-morrow," declared one of the
+men laughingly. "You don't think anything will happen to-night, do you?"
+
+"I am willing to wait until the morrow," said Boone quietly. "You must
+decide, however, within two days what you will do."
+
+There was one young member of the surveyors' party who apparently had
+not been long in the new world. He explained to Peleg, to whom he was
+drawn because they were nearly of the same age, that he had come to
+America to make a fortune. "I am the youngest son of Earl Russell. In
+England the younger boys do not have many opportunities, because all the
+property is left to the oldest son, so I have come to America, and hope
+to secure for myself some great tracts of land over here. They may not
+be valuable to-day or in the near future, but some time, as surely as
+the sun rises, they will be of great worth. You must come with me," he
+continued, "early to-morrow morning to Fontainebleau."
+
+"Where?" demanded Peleg.
+
+"Fontainebleau."
+
+"Where is that, and what is it?" demanded the young scout.
+
+"It is a name we have given to a spring about a mile from here on the
+opposite side of the river. Five or six of us go there every morning and
+drink the waters. We have an idea that they are better than the waters
+of the real Fontainebleau."
+
+"Where is that?"
+
+The young Englishman laughed as he said: "'Tis plain that you have
+never travelled in France."
+
+"I never did," acknowledged Peleg. "I have travelled in the woods,
+though, and before we get back to the settlement some of you may be glad
+that Daniel Boone and I have had that experience."
+
+The young Englishman again laughed, but made no reply.
+
+In the morning, however, he, together with six other men, stopped at the
+little cabin in which Daniel Boone and Peleg had been spending the
+night, and in response to his invitation the young scout joined the
+party when they explained that they were going to Fontainebleau to drink
+of its marvellous waters.
+
+The carelessness and indifference of the men somewhat alarmed Peleg, who
+was still under the influence of his recent companion, the scout. Daniel
+Boone had impressed upon the boy the need of continual vigilance and
+silence. No one could say when danger might suddenly present itself.
+Frequently he recalled the escape he had had through the shot which
+James Boone in the preceding year had fired at the panther crouching
+above his head. This always impressed the young woodsman afresh with the
+need of continual care. Nevertheless he enjoyed the conversation of the
+men with whom he was walking, though he himself seldom spoke.
+
+When the little party arrived at the spring the waters caused Peleg to
+express his disgust. Heavily charged with sulphur and various other
+chemicals, the taste was one that did not appeal to the young scout. His
+companions, however, professed to enjoy the water, which was
+marvellously clear and sparkling, and drank deeply, casting themselves
+prostrate upon the ground as they did so, and drinking from the spring.
+
+Three of them were in this position and the other four were urging their
+companions to make haste, when suddenly wild yells arose that seemed to
+come from every direction at once. Before the startled men were fully
+aware of what was occurring a band of Indians rushed from the woods,
+some armed with rifles and others using their bows and arrows.
+
+Only part of the little band of surveyors had been armed when they had
+started that morning from the settlement for the spring at
+Fontainebleau. The young scout, however, who was mindful of the
+teachings of his leader, had brought Singing Susan with him. As Peleg
+was about to fire, an arrow pierced the young Englishman between the
+shoulder blades, and with a loud cry he fell to the ground.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+A TERRIFIED BAND
+
+
+It was Peleg's first experience in taking command of a party. The
+helplessness of the surveyors, however, and the fact that they all
+turned to him for directions, at once decided the young scout to lead,
+and he well knew there was no time to be lost.
+
+In his position he was aware also that the Englishman was in dire
+distress, and apparently he was the only one who could aid him. The
+decision to act had come to the young scout promptly, and he had almost
+instinctively raised Singing Susan to his shoulder and fired at the
+Indians, whom he could see darting from tree to tree and plainly trying
+to come nearer the spring.
+
+Before he reloaded his gun Peleg turned to his companions, two of whom
+were already disappearing among the trees in the distance.
+
+"Come here," he said in a low voice. "Help me with this man."
+
+Two of the young surveyors obeyed his word, and with all speed the trio
+carried the body of their fallen comrade within the shelter of the
+forest. When Peleg looked down into the face of the suffering man he was
+convinced that his wound was fatal.
+
+It would never do, however, to leave the man in his misery. Turning to
+his companions he called: "Retreat cautiously! Use the tree trunks for
+shelter! Take this man with you!"
+
+While speaking, the young scout hastily reloaded his gun. This task
+completed, he turned once more to his companions and said: "Take the man
+now and go! Do as I tell you! I shall bring up the rear and do my best
+to stave off the Indians. They are sure to follow us, though I do not
+think there are more than eight or ten in the whole band."
+
+Three of the men who were members of the party which had visited the
+spring had brought their guns with them. Two of these weapons were in
+the hands of the men who were to carry the young surveyor back to the
+settlement.
+
+Seizing these weapons and making certain that all were loaded and
+primed, Peleg darted behind a huge maple, from which he was able to see
+that the Indians were stealthily approaching. No cry had been heard from
+them since the loud whoop they had given when first they had darted into
+the open space and fired upon the unsuspecting men.
+
+Peleg waited until the men who were carrying the surveyor had had an
+opportunity to withdraw to a considerable distance among the trees, and
+as he saw the red men were coming nearer he abruptly fired upon them. He
+first discharged Singing Susan, and then, before the smoke had cleared,
+he fired the other two guns in quick succession.
+
+A low exclamation of pleasure escaped his lips when he saw that his
+shots had taken sufficient effect to cause the Indians hastily to
+disappear from sight and to send forth several of their noisy
+challenges.
+
+Taking advantage of the favouring opportunity, the young scout reloaded
+his own rifle and, casting the other two guns from him, ran at his
+utmost speed in the direction in which his recent companions had
+disappeared.
+
+As soon as he had overtaken them he was aware that the Indians were
+again closing in upon the retreating band. He was startled to find that
+the red men were moving in the form of a semicircle. By this means they
+doubtless hoped to cut off the men before they could regain the safety
+of the settlement.
+
+Bidding his friends make haste with their burden, Peleg once more fired
+upon the yelling Indians. His main purpose was to try to impress upon
+their minds the fact that the retreating band was armed and prepared to
+defend itself. He was more and more disturbed, however, by his
+increasing fear that their retreat would be cut off, and all three might
+fall into the hands of the yelling savages.
+
+Several times the same maneuvers were followed, Peleg bidding his
+friends, who still were carrying the young surveyor, to precede him on
+their way back to the settlement, while he himself remained behind to
+fire Singing Susan at such of the Indians as exposed themselves. After
+each shot he hastily reloaded his rifle and withdrew to join his
+companions.
+
+After his third shot Peleg was almost persuaded that escape was
+impossible. The semicircle had been extended until he was fearful that
+if the warriors should rush upon them they would enclose the three white
+men.
+
+Still the boy was determined to do his utmost to help the fallen
+surveyor and protect the two men who were bearing their unconscious
+comrade through the forest. In his zeal the young scout had almost
+forgotten his own peril. His attention was divided between the
+retreating party and the Indians who were pressing so swiftly upon them.
+
+Suddenly Peleg said to himself, as he heard the report of a rifle far
+away, "There is Daniel Boone! If he and the other surveyors have come
+out to help us we may stand a little better chance of getting out of
+this alive."
+
+The report of the rifle which had been heard by Peleg was speedily
+followed by the sound of other guns. Convinced by what he had heard that
+help was at hand, Peleg regretted the loss of the guns which he had cast
+aside in his fear that they might hinder him and his friends in their
+efforts to withdraw from the spring. Soon the reports of the guns were
+repeated, and as Peleg sent forth his wild halloo he was answered by a
+cry which he recognized as coming from Daniel Boone himself.
+
+It was not long before Peleg saw the scout approaching through the
+forest. The silent man was thoroughly aroused. Usually quiet in his
+manner and deliberate in his actions, it now seemed as if his every
+nerve was tingling in his excitement. Sheltered behind nearby trees,
+Peleg watched the approaching surveyors, some of whom were loading their
+rifles rapidly, while others were firing at the enemy.
+
+It was soon evident that the Indians, disheartened by this fresh attack,
+were withdrawing into the forest.
+
+As soon as Daniel Boone saw Peleg and the two men approaching with their
+burden, his plan instantly changed. Summoning the young scout, he said,
+"Send all the rest of them back to the settlement as fast as they can
+go. You and I, lad, are the only ones prepared, so we are the only ones
+who can protect these men."
+
+"Will the Indians leave?" inquired Peleg in a low voice.
+
+"For a time, yes," answered Daniel Boone. "If the surveyors make haste
+they will be able to get back to the settlement. You and I, lad, must
+try to hold these Indians off until our friends have had time to carry
+back the man who was shot. Was he killed?"
+
+"No. He was alive when I saw him last, but I do not think he will live
+long."
+
+"Was it an arrow?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+Daniel Boone nodded his head and made no further reply. Darting from
+tree to tree, the two scouts stealthily made their way through the
+forest in the direction in which their friends had gone.
+
+Apparently there was no longer any peril of an immediate attack by the
+Indians. None of them appeared within sight, and the sound of their wild
+cries no longer was heard.
+
+Alternately stopping and retreating, Daniel Boone and his young
+companion at last regained the shelter of the settlement at the Falls of
+the Ohio.
+
+The little houses of logs were well protected, and as there was an
+abundance of ammunition as well as of food on hand, the great scout said
+to Peleg: "We could hold out here two months if it should be necessary."
+
+"But we are not to stay here, are we?" inquired Peleg anxiously.
+
+"No. We must leave just as soon as we can do so safely."
+
+The conversation was interrupted by the entrance of the surveyors in a
+body. Fear, and even panic, was manifest in the face of every one. The
+unexpected attack upon their comrade had confirmed the warning which
+Governor Dunmore had sent by the two scouts, and not only did no one
+want to remain, but all were eager to be gone at once.
+
+"We must start to-night," said MacHale, the oldest of the party. "We
+must not remain!"
+
+"Not to-night," said Daniel Boone quietly.
+
+"Why not?"
+
+"It is as necessary for us to know our way as it is for us to retreat."
+
+"But you found your way here! Why can you not find it when you go back?"
+
+"I can," replied Boone quietly. "It is not for myself I fear. I would
+not be the leader of a party unfamiliar with the woods and facing what
+we must if we leave here in the night. You must be prepared to start as
+soon as the gray of dawn appears."
+
+"But we want to go before!" persisted the surveyor.
+
+Boone quietly shook his head and gave no further explanation. The matter
+was decided, and plainly the scout thought there was nothing more to be
+said. Ignoring the anger as well as the alarm of the surveyors, the
+great scout at once busied himself in preparing for the departure which
+would not take place until the following morning. The services of Boone,
+however, were not required in caring for the wounded surveyor, because
+life had fled before the party regained the settlement.
+
+There was a hasty burial in the dim light, and then Boone bade his
+companions obtain such sleep as they could, he himself preparing to
+serve as guard throughout the night.
+
+At last, however, he consented to the pleadings of Peleg and permitted
+the lad to keep watch during the earlier hours. As soon as this had been
+decided Boone cast himself upon the ground and, apparently confiding in
+the ability of Peleg to protect the camp, was soon sleeping soundly.
+
+Just before daybreak the entire band departed from the Falls of the
+Ohio. In advance went Daniel Boone as guide, while Peleg was to serve as
+the rear guard.
+
+"It is a long race," the scout explained to his companions. "We have
+four hundred miles to cross before we arrive at the settlement on the
+Clinch River. Our safety depends largely upon the promptness with which
+you do my bidding. If there is one of you who is not willing to obey me
+in every particular I shall greatly prefer to have him go by himself."
+
+Every member of the party, however, assured the scout that his word was
+to be law and that every one would implicitly follow his directions
+throughout the long journey. When daylight came it was manifest in the
+faces of the surveyors that the terror of the forest was still strong
+upon them. Every man was armed, and every one carried a small pack upon
+his back.
+
+It was impossible to make as good time on the return as had been made by
+Boone and Peleg in the journey to the Falls. However, both hunters were
+urgent and seldom stopped even when heavy storms came upon them.
+
+At last, when the long journey had been safely made, and the settlement
+on the Clinch River had been gained, the spirits of the surveyors
+revived, although they were free to declare that it was the care and
+wisdom of Boone and his young companion which had brought them safely
+through the wilderness.
+
+Nearly eight hundred miles had been covered by the two scouts in their
+long journey, and only sixty-two days had been required to complete it.
+
+Boone and his companion, however, were not to be permitted to rest long.
+Less than a week had elapsed after their return when Boone called Peleg
+aside one morning and explained to him that a new project, and one still
+more perilous than that through which they had safely come, was now to
+be undertaken.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+THE ADVENTURE OF THE SCHOOLMASTER
+
+
+"Peleg," said the great scout, "Governor Dunmore has sent another
+request to me."
+
+"Has he?" inquired Peleg eagerly.
+
+In spite of the perils and labours of the long journey which had been
+made to the Falls of the Ohio, Peleg was eager to be with Daniel Boone
+wherever he might be. The boy's admiration for his friend had increased
+with every passing day. The coolness and calmness of the great scout,
+his gentleness and consideration of others, his fearlessness in time of
+peril, the readiness with which he met every event, and above all the
+conviction which held him that he was divinely called to be a pathfinder
+for the coming generations, all had made a deep impression upon his
+young companion. Peleg was not without hope, too, that somehow he was
+coming to hold a place in the interest and affection of the man which
+once had been held by his son James.
+
+"Yes," continued Boone thoughtfully, "the Governor has given me the
+command of three garrisons in the campaign which is to be made against
+the Shawnees."
+
+"When do you go?" queried Peleg.
+
+"Immediately--that is, if I can persuade you to look after my family
+while I am absent. Israel is beginning to feel that he is almost old
+enough to take the place of his brother James, but I shall feel very
+much more at ease if I can go with the assurance that you will be
+looking out for the welfare of my wife and children."
+
+Striving to repress the disappointment which he felt at the words of his
+friend, Peleg said quietly, "You know, sir, that I shall be willing to
+do all in my power for you at any time. I do not know, but----"
+
+The rare smile known only to his closest friends appeared for a moment
+on the strong face of the hunter as he shook his head and said: "Nay,
+Peleg, not this time. I fancy there will be other and perhaps greater
+work soon to be done, and in that you shall have your share. The time is
+coming when I hope to take my family again to that marvellous region I
+have found in Kantuckee. No land I have ever seen can compare with it.
+There I would live and there I would die. Meanwhile I must do my part in
+trying to make the lives of these hardly beset settlers a little safer."
+
+"You may depend upon me to do my best," said Peleg cordially.
+
+"That is all I need to know, lad, and I shall be at ease while I am
+gone."
+
+The great scout immediately departed from the little shop which Peleg
+had built and in which he was accustomed to make or repair the various
+utensils used by the household of Daniel Boone. Here he had fashioned
+Singing Susan, and in this place he had rebuilt his gun after his return
+from the long journey he had made with the scout and in which, as we
+know, the rifle had suffered from the blow of the tomahawk which the
+huge Indian had hurled at him.
+
+A moment Peleg stood in the doorway watching the scout as he departed.
+The expression of the lad's face plainly showed his love and admiration
+for the man. The calm courage of Boone, softened as it was by his
+gentleness and guided by his prudence, was crowned by a marvellous
+modesty. His robust, somewhat uncouth body showed the great strength of
+the hunter, while it concealed his quickness. His manner was dignified,
+almost cold, so silent and quiet was he under ordinary circumstances.
+His face, however, homely though it was, was at times lighted by an
+expression that was exceedingly kind and tender. He seldom spoke, and
+almost never of himself, except in reply to direct questions.
+
+Several times during the months that followed Daniel Boone returned to
+the little settlement on the Clinch, to visit his family and make
+certain of their safety. On each occasion he was warm in his expressions
+of gratitude to Peleg for the care which he was taking of those who were
+in a measure dependent upon him.
+
+There was work to be done every day, and the time passed rapidly for the
+young scout. One day, while he was busy in his little shop fashioning a
+new hunting knife, he was suddenly interrupted by the voice of Mrs.
+Boone. "Peleg! Peleg!" she called. "Come! Come!"
+
+Instantly running toward the log house, Peleg was met by the frightened
+woman, who, touching him on the arm, said: "Do you hear that sound? What
+is it?"
+
+Peleg turned abruptly toward the log schoolhouse and listened intently.
+From within the rude little building sounds such as he never before had
+heard were issuing. There seemed to be snarls and growls such as a wild
+beast might have emitted, and mingled with these were cries and screams
+as of some one in dire distress.
+
+A moment served to convince the young scout that either Schoolmaster
+Hargrave was in trouble, or some of the school children were in peril;
+and he darted into his little shop, returning with Singing Susan in his
+hands.
+
+Swiftly as he ran toward the little building, which was not more than
+two hundred and fifty feet away, when he arrived he discovered that
+already several of the women from the settlement were there in advance
+of him, and with terror-stricken faces were looking first within the
+schoolhouse, and then to the road for help.
+
+"What is it?" demanded Peleg, as he ran to the door.
+
+"We do not know. We cannot tell," answered one of the women. "It may be
+evil spirits." She was almost hysterical, and convinced that he could
+obtain no information from her, Peleg pushed back the door and entered
+the room.
+
+The sight which greeted his eyes was more perplexing than startling. He
+saw Schoolmaster Hargrave leaning against one corner of the rude desk
+over which he presided, his face plainly expressing agony or fear; Peleg
+was unable to determine which feeling predominated.
+
+"What is it, Master Hargrave?" called the boy anxiously.
+
+In reply no articulate words were spoken; but a scream was followed by a
+groan, and in the midst of it all were also sounds like the gasping and
+snarling of some wild beast. The suffering of the man was manifest, but
+the cause was nowhere to be seen.
+
+There flashed into the mind of the young hunter the suggestion which
+Mistress Horan had made that evil spirits were the cause of the
+commotion. Such beliefs were not uncommon at the time, and although
+Peleg had never shared in the superstitions of the more ignorant people,
+nevertheless the mystery of the terrifying sounds, as well as the
+expression of Schoolmaster Hargrave's face, caused even the young hunter
+to hesitate.
+
+"What is it, Master Hargrave?" he shouted, for the uproar still
+continued.
+
+"Oh-h-h-h! Help me! Help me!"
+
+The cries of the schoolmaster were interrupted by strange noises, that
+still appeared to come from within the desk. Moans and cries and snarls,
+such as a wild beast might have emitted, were plainly to be
+distinguished in the midst of the uproar.
+
+Peleg had stopped a few feet in front of the desk, and in amazement was
+watching the man before him. Apparently the schoolmaster was struggling
+and striving with some unseen body or person, and with intense effort he
+had grasped both sides of the desk and held it with all his strength, as
+if he was fearful it might escape. In one hand he also held a
+cylindrical ruler.
+
+At this moment Mrs. Horan, who had gained sufficient courage to enter
+the building, advanced to Peleg's side. "I fear 'tis sick the man is,"
+she said. Turning to the schoolmaster she suggested in a loud whisper:
+"If 'tis colic you are suffering from, Master Hargrave, I would
+recommend----"
+
+Her recommendation, however, was interrupted by a terrible scream from
+the suffering man.
+
+"'Tis good for you," said the kind-hearted woman once more. The
+schoolmaster, however, still writhed as if in great agony and looked at
+the woman with an expression that might have quieted the tongue of a
+less courageous woman than Mrs. Horan.
+
+"Why do you cling to the desk in that manner?" demanded the woman.
+
+The agony in the expression of the schoolmaster's face seemed to be
+deepened by the question, but he made no response.
+
+"What's the matter, Master Hargrave?" demanded the woman once more.
+"'Tis Peleg and I who are here to help you."
+
+Suddenly from the lips of the tormented man came the cry, "I have caught
+a cat!" Perspiration was streaming from his face, and his manner,
+expressive of fright, agony, and fatigue combined, made his words
+scarcely recognizable.
+
+Peleg glanced behind him and saw that many more of the neighbours had
+arrived and were curiously standing within the room at a safe distance
+from the desk, watching the actions of the man, who still writhed and
+twisted as he clung to the desk in front of him.
+
+The young hunter darted around the corner of the rude desk, to discover
+the cause of all the trouble. He first saw that a part of the clothing
+of the unfortunate man had been torn from his body, which was pressed
+against the edge of the desk. Closer inspection showed that the teeth of
+a huge "cat," or lynx, were fastened in the side of the schoolmaster.
+Bringing his gun to his shoulder the scout was about to fire, when the
+fear of Master Hargrave became stronger even than his sufferings.
+
+"Don't shoot! Don't shoot! You will hit me! Oh-h-h-h!" he screamed,
+still striving to hold his adversary against the edge of the desk.
+
+Disregarding the appeal, Peleg fired, and after a few confused
+struggles, the huge cat was lifeless.
+
+Still the schoolmaster held the body in its place, however, and when his
+sympathetic friends drew him back they were horrified to discover that
+the jaws of the dead lynx were locked about one of his ribs. Several
+minutes elapsed before the man was freed from this death grip.
+
+Meanwhile the assembly in the room had increased, and several children
+that had been brought by their mothers lifted up their voices to add to
+the general confusion.
+
+In the midst of it all, Mrs. Horan was not to be denied the
+satisfaction of her curiosity. Pressing more closely upon the man who
+now had been placed on one of the rude benches almost in a fainting
+condition, she said: "I thought at first, Master Hargrave, that it was
+spirits, but now I see it was just a cat. Why did you fight the lynx in
+that way?"
+
+Ignoring his suffering, the schoolmaster managed to gasp out a tolerably
+full explanation:
+
+"What do you suppose? I was sitting alone at my desk, writing copy for
+the children to use on the morrow, when I heard a noise at the door and
+saw this enormous cat with her forefeet upon the step, every hair
+standing erect and her eyes shining as if they were on fire. My position
+behind the desk at first concealed me from her sight, but a slight
+motion of my chair revealed my presence, and in a moment the cat and I
+were each looking into the eyes of the other."
+
+Master Hargrave stopped to recover his breath, and aware of the interest
+of his hearers, for all the visitors now had gathered about him, he
+resumed his story: "I had heard much from hunters concerning the power
+of the human eye to quell the fury of wild beasts. Accordingly, I
+frowned savagely at my visitor. Apparently, however, she was not
+alarmed. Her eyes flashed fire and she began to gnash her teeth,
+seemingly bent upon serious hostilities. Aware of my danger, I
+immediately made great haste and snatched this cylindrical ruler from
+the desk, but the wildcat was too quick for me."
+
+"Why didn't you hit her?"
+
+"I had nothing but the ruler with which to strike; besides, she was too
+quick. Springing upon me with all the proverbial ferocity and activity
+of her tribe, she fastened upon my side with her teeth and began to rend
+and tear with her claws like unto a fury. In vain did I strive to
+disengage her. Her teeth seemed to be fastened about my ribs, and all my
+efforts served but to enrage her the more.
+
+"When I saw the blood flowing so copiously from my wounded side I became
+seriously alarmed, and as a last resort threw myself upon the edge of
+the desk and with the entire weight of my body pressed the animal
+against a sharp corner. It was at this moment that the cat began to
+utter the most discordant cries to which I ever listened, and as
+doubtless I was somewhat excited at the time and lost a measure of my
+self-control, I have no question that we engaged in a duet that must
+have resounded loudly throughout the settlement."
+
+"That's enough of the story," said Peleg. "We have killed the cat and we
+shall now take you and put you in bed."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+AN ATTACK
+
+
+Several weeks elapsed before the schoolmaster recovered sufficiently
+from his wounds to enable him to resume his task.
+
+It was now March, 1775, and Daniel Boone had returned to the settlement
+on the Clinch. The task which Governor Dunmore had assigned him had been
+accomplished. He found Peleg and the members of his family engaged in
+their preparations for the spring work.
+
+At the close of the first day after his homecoming, the great scout once
+more had an interview with Peleg. "I have just come from Watage," he
+explained when no one was near, "where there has been an assembly of the
+Cherokees. I went at the request of a gentleman named Henderson, who is
+acting for several other men as well as for himself. He desired me to
+represent him in the purchase of land south of the river of Kantuckee. I
+did as he requested, and arrangements for the purchase of all the land
+as far as the Tennessee River were completed."
+
+"Why did Mr. Henderson----"
+
+"Colonel Henderson," broke in the scout; "Colonel Richard Henderson."
+
+"Why did Colonel Richard Henderson," repeated Peleg, "and the other
+gentlemen wish to purchase so much land?"
+
+"Because they had learned of the fertility of the soil through the
+reports which my brother and I had given them. In a way I am to be their
+agent."
+
+"Did the Cherokees sell to him?"
+
+"They did. I fancy they were glad to part with an empty title for a
+solid though moderate recompense. Trouble arose, though, when Colonel
+Henderson and his friends prepared to take possession, relying upon the
+validity of the deed which the Indians had given them. Unfortunately,
+the land lies within the limits of Virginia, according to the old
+charter which King James gave, and I understand that the Virginians are
+claiming for themselves the privilege of purchasing the title to all
+land which the Indians held within the limits of their state. Already
+the treaty of Colonel Henderson has been pronounced null and void as far
+as he is concerned, but the Virginians declare that the title given by
+the Cherokees is valid, and that they will assume the rights. That is a
+very peculiar method of dealing, according to my light. But 'tis not
+concerning that, lad, that I would speak to you to-day."
+
+The scout was silent a moment, and Peleg, interested far more than his
+quiet manner betrayed, looked eagerly into the face of his friend,
+waiting for him to explain.
+
+"I agreed," resumed Boone, "to take a band of men with me and mark out
+or clear a road to this region in Kantuckee."
+
+"A road?" asked Peleg in surprise.
+
+"Yes, a road over which packhorses and wagons can be driven. It will
+require patience and much labour, but the reward will be great. Whenever
+I think of that marvellous country and of the possibilities contained in
+it for families like my own, I am eager to open the way to it. I am
+authorized by Colonel Henderson to say that he will pay thirty-three
+cents per day to every man whom I may select to be of our company."
+
+"When do we go?" inquired Peleg eagerly.
+
+"On the day after to-morrow. How is Singing Susan?" inquired Boone with
+a smile.
+
+"She is doing famously. I have gained a reputation in the settlement for
+being a better shot than I would be warranted in claiming to be, unless
+I had the song of Susan to help me."
+
+"That is good," said Boone cordially. "Now if you can secure an axe that
+will render you as efficient service in its way as Singing Susan does
+in hers, you will be well equipped for our expedition. It is important
+that we make haste, if the way is to be opened in time for settlers to
+sow any crops this spring."
+
+Hard as it was for Daniel Boone to leave his family again in charge of
+Israel and Samuel, nevertheless his strong feeling that he was simply an
+instrument being used to further the advance of the rapidly growing
+nation in the American colonies was sufficient to induce him to accept
+this task. In addition, his wife shared the same conviction. She, too,
+was eager for him to continue his labours, and in spite of the anxiety
+she would suffer during his absence, she urged him to accept the offer
+which Colonel Henderson had made.
+
+At the appointed time a band of twenty-five men, every one fully armed
+and all equipped with axes, departed from the settlement on the Clinch.
+Confidence in their leader and the hope that not only would they be able
+to open a way into the marvellous land, but that their own families also
+might share in the reward, made all the men eager to go. It was not
+believed that the task would require many weeks, but the necessity of
+preparing the soil and planting some crops before the summer came was an
+inducement for haste.
+
+There were places where trees had to be felled, and the ringing of the
+axes was heard all the day long. In other regions, however, very little
+labour was required, because the road, as it was selected, led in its
+winding course around many open ledges and through sparsely wooded
+passes of the hills and mountains.
+
+Nearly three weeks passed and the hardy band of hunters and woodsmen was
+drawing near the region which they were seeking. They had not been
+molested by the Indians, and were beginning to congratulate themselves
+that they were to escape the perils which every day threatened them.
+
+Without warning, one day, however, above the ringing of the axes were
+heard the wild cries of the red men. Darting from the woods, shouting
+and brandishing their guns and hatchets, the Indians suddenly appeared.
+Dodging from tree to tree and firing upon the startled white men, they
+seemed to be on all sides at once.
+
+Instantly the coolness and courage of Daniel Boone became invaluable.
+Though many of his comrades had been surprised and terrified by the
+sudden onslaught, the great scout had held himself prepared for the
+present emergency.
+
+"Run for the trees!" shouted Boone. "Run! Hold your fire until you gain
+cover and then give the rascals your best!" As Boone looked out from his
+own shelter after his rifle had been discharged, he saw several of his
+companions lying dead or wounded upon the ground.
+
+Calmly yet swiftly Boone darted from the protection of the forest, and
+lifting one of the men in his arms bore him back within shelter.
+
+The example of the leader, mindful of the needs of others in the hour of
+his own peril, inspired his companions to similar action, and, in the
+midst of all the turmoil and danger, the other wounded men were rescued.
+It soon was discovered, however, that three of the fallen men were
+already dead.
+
+The temporary withdrawal of the warriors to the forest left the field
+free once more, and Boone turned to his companions and said, "Come with
+me, every one!"
+
+Instantly his followers responded, and, dashing to the place where their
+companions had fallen, they bore the bodies back to a place of safety,
+thankful to find that they had not yet been mutilated.
+
+There was no time for ceremony or for lamentations, and the three who
+had fallen to rise no more were hastily buried in one grave by their
+comrades.
+
+The unexpected attack, following as it had the long days of quiet, was
+seriously disturbing to the roadmakers. That evening there were no
+camp-fires, and guards were established to watch through the night.
+
+When morning came the alarm had not been repeated, and many were
+persuaded that the assault of the previous day was merely the act of a
+desperate band which had attacked the settlers without any preconceived
+plan. Nevertheless Daniel Boone declared that it was necessary to
+maintain a guard throughout the day.
+
+The labour was entered into with zeal, and though a renewal of the
+attack was not made, thoughts of the new peril were in the minds of
+every man, and made all serious. At the request of his followers Boone
+devoted most of his time to scouting in the nearby region, a duty which
+he insisted upon sharing with his younger companion, Peleg.
+
+The sun had dropped below the borders of the forest, and the men were
+congratulating themselves that the day had passed without a renewal of
+hostilities, when suddenly both scouts were seen running swiftly toward
+the place where the men had encamped for the night.
+
+This startling sight was sufficient to arouse every member of the party.
+Every man seized his gun and ran for the shelter of some huge tree.
+
+[Illustration: "Boone quickly rallied his startled followers, and when
+the red men returned the hardy settlers were ready and awaiting their
+coming"]
+
+Boone was wildly gesticulating as he drew near, but his gestures were
+misunderstood by his friends. Before either scout was able to regain the
+place where the pioneers were hiding, there was another wild whoop and
+a band of Indians larger than that which had been seen the previous day
+darted from the woods in the rear of the settlers. Before they were able
+to return the unlooked-for fire, two of their number fell dead from the
+bullets of their enemies, while three more were wounded.
+
+Like a flash the Indians were gone again. But Boone quickly rallied his
+startled followers and when the red men returned, as they did within a
+few minutes, appearing from another section of the forest, the hardy
+settlers were ready and awaiting their coming.
+
+Once more had the careful preparation of Boone for what he thought was
+likely to occur saved his followers and himself from peril.
+
+Several of the Indians fell under the deadly fire of the white men, and
+with loud cries and lamentations the warriors dragged their fallen
+comrades into the forest and once more disappeared.
+
+"Never have I seen the Indians so savage as in these two attacks," said
+Boone soberly to Peleg, after guards had been established for the night
+and the men had stretched themselves on their blankets to obtain such
+sleep as was possible in the midst of the threatening dangers. "They
+seem almost beside themselves with rage."
+
+"Do you still plan to go on?"
+
+"I shall go on," said Boone simply. "The way must be opened for our
+people to gain some of the advantages of this wonderful region toward
+which we are moving. The tribes hereabout are a strange people. I have
+never known Indians more hospitable than are the Cherokees and Shawnees.
+If one brave enters the wigwam of another, even if it be that of a
+stranger, he is deeply offended if he is not given an invitation to eat,
+though he may just have had a meal at his own wigwam. Nor is it
+sufficient on these occasions that the ordinary food be offered him. You
+know the Indians live mostly on venison and hominy, but when a visitor
+comes, sugar, bear's oil, honey, and rum, if they have it, are to be set
+before him."
+
+"Suppose they do not have anything in the house to eat?"
+
+"Then the fact is stated quietly. It is at once accepted as sufficient.
+I was in a wigwam not long ago where the visitor thought the host was
+not as hospitable as he ought to be and he took him severely to task. He
+said: 'You have behaved just like a Dutchman. I shall excuse you this
+time, for you are young, and have been brought up close to the white
+people, but you must remember to behave like a warrior and never be
+caught in such _little_ actions. Great actions alone can ever make a
+great man.' They are a strange people," added Boone thoughtfully. "I saw
+a white man some time ago trying to help in carrying some game which
+the warriors had shot. I shall never forget how the Indians laughed
+when, after the squaws and the boys had started to bring back the meat,
+this white man took a large piece of buffalo meat on his own back. After
+he had gone two or three miles he found it was becoming too heavy for
+him and he threw it down. Then I saw one of the squaws, laughing as if
+it was a huge joke, take the meat which the white man had dropped and
+put it on her own pack, which already was as large as that of the man,
+and carry the double burden back to camp."
+
+"They are not as swift as our men, though," suggested Peleg.
+
+"Not for a short distance," assented Boone, "but they can keep up a pace
+for an almost incredible length of time. I have known Indians who could
+run twelve or fourteen hours without a morsel of food, and then, after a
+light meal and a short rest, start again and go as far as they had
+before they stopped."
+
+"They never do that in fighting, though."
+
+"No, they may keep up a warfare for many years, but they never make a
+prolonged attack. They like a sudden dash such as they made upon us and
+in which those poor fellows were killed. Peleg, I fear the morrow. The
+Shawnees that are watching us see our axes, and they are sure now that
+we are trying to enter their hunting grounds and take away their lands.
+We shall have serious trouble, I fear."
+
+And the following day Boone's fears were confirmed.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+THE WHITE SHAWNEE
+
+
+There was no open attack by the Indians such as had been made
+previously, though the yells of the warriors were frequently heard in
+the distance. It was plain that they were striving to terrorize the
+hardy settlers and make them turn back on their way.
+
+One of the men who had been stationed as a guard was shot early in the
+morning and his mutilated body was not found until Daniel Boone, making
+a tour of the camp, discovered what had befallen his companion.
+
+Returning to the camp, Boone summoned his men, and as soon as they were
+assembled, said to them: "We must stop our work on the road for a time
+and build a fort."
+
+There was an expression of consternation on the faces of some of his
+comrades as they heard this quiet statement from the scout, and, aware
+of what was in their minds, though no one spoke, Daniel Boone continued;
+"It will not require many days. I think a fortnight will be sufficient
+for us to build such a fort as will protect us. We are now almost as
+far on our way as we wish to go. We will begin the work at once."
+
+Whatever disappointment or fears may have been in the minds of his
+companions, no one made any open protest, and the task immediately was
+begun. Certain of the men were assigned to the felling of trees, others
+dug trenches and set the logs in the stockade, which was erected first.
+
+When the stockade had been completed, various cabins were built wherein
+the men might live if they were compelled to seek the refuge of the
+fort.
+
+The defences were erected near a spring of water that promised to be
+never-failing. Nearby was the river, so close to the fort as to enable
+the defenders to escape if flight became necessary. And yet the fort was
+sufficiently far from the banks to prevent an approach by their enemies
+without being discovered.
+
+So steadily did the men labour that Boone's prophecy was fulfilled, and
+when fourteen days had elapsed the little fort was declared to be ready
+for occupancy. The stockade was strong and had been made of the stakes
+fashioned from the trees. One end of each log was sharpened and then all
+were driven into the ground side by side; portholes being provided at
+frequent intervals.
+
+A feeling of intense relief came to the hardly beset men when the work
+was completed. The supreme thought, however, in the mind of the leader,
+was voiced when he explained to Peleg the following day: "It is now
+April, and I must go back to the settlement on the Clinch for my
+family."
+
+"Alone?" inquired Peleg quickly.
+
+"Yes, alone. I must not take one man away from the party here, and I
+shall be doubly anxious for you all while I am gone; but the time has
+come when I may think of my family and myself. In this wonderful land I,
+too, would make my home."
+
+"But will you dare to come back with your family with only you and
+Israel to protect them?"
+
+Boone's face lighted up with the rare smile which occasionally appeared
+upon it as he said: "There will be others, many others, I hope, who will
+join us on our way."
+
+"I never knew the Indians to be so savage as they are now," suggested
+Peleg anxiously.
+
+"That is true," said Boone, "and one cannot altogether blame them. They
+seem to be well-nigh mad in their hatred of us because we have begun to
+build our homes in the land which they planned to keep as their own. If
+it were not for their fear of the 'Long Knives,' as they term us, I
+fancy they would make a desperate assault very soon. As it is, however,
+they have a wholesome feeling of fear mingled with their anger, and
+although you will have to be continually on your guard, I do not
+believe they will venture to attack the fort while I am gone."
+
+Peleg made no reply, and the scout, acting as if the last word had been
+spoken, soon after set forth on his long journey to the Clinch.
+
+During the absence of their leader the men continued their labours,
+felling the trees and clearing the land, until in the immediate vicinity
+of the fort sufficient ground had been made tillable to enable them to
+plant the few seeds which Boone had insisted should be brought with
+them.
+
+The days now were warm, and the delights of the marvellous climate were
+appreciated by all the men.
+
+The only event of special interest that occurred during the absence of
+the scout was the coming of Sam Oliver. As unconcerned as if he had long
+been a member of the company and had earned his thirty-three cents per
+day for his labours, the hunter entered the fort one night and
+composedly received the warm greetings which were given him. It was well
+known that the newcomer was a famous shot, and the coming of even one
+man strengthened the little garrison not a little.
+
+The general line of the defence of the fort was at once mapped out by
+Sam, who without a word assumed the position of leader. It was he who
+arranged the details and the nightly guards which were maintained, and
+it was his word which decided any dispute that arose among the men.
+
+One day Peleg was on guard in the adjacent forest. His watch was almost
+ended and he was about to return to the fort, when he was startled to
+behold an Indian approaching with the palms of both hands extended.
+
+Holding Singing Susan in readiness for instant use, and glancing keenly
+about him into the adjacent forest to make sure that his visitor was
+unaccompanied, Peleg waited patiently for the stranger to approach.
+
+As the warrior drew near Peleg looked at him with increasing
+astonishment. Dressed in the Indian garb, the warrior, who seemed to be
+only about twenty years of age, nevertheless had no features like those
+of the neighbouring tribes. Tanned, the stranger undoubtedly was, but
+nevertheless his skin did not have the bronze colouring of the Indian.
+His figure and even his walk were more like the white man's. And yet in
+every other point the stranger apparently was of the Indian race.
+
+As he drew near Peleg, his face was lighted by a smile as he said, "Me
+broder. Me white Shawnee."
+
+Peleg did not respond, although his astonishment was increased by the
+speech of the approaching warrior.
+
+"Me wan' go home. No fader. Me Shawnee fader. Me wan' white fader.
+White moder dead. White fader dead. No Shawnee fader some more."
+
+The puzzling statements were followed by some words unintelligible to
+Peleg, though he concluded that they were spoken in the Shawnee tongue.
+
+"Do you want to see Daniel Boone?" he inquired.
+
+Gesticulating forcefully, the young man inquired, "He me fader?"
+
+"No."
+
+"White fader dead. White moder dead. Shawnee warriors kill me fader.
+Kill moder. Many moons ago."
+
+"How many?"
+
+A puzzled expression for a moment appeared on the stranger's face, and
+then, comprehending the meaning of the question, he opened and closed
+his hands so many times that, although Peleg was unable to count the
+number of moons indicated, he concluded that the Shawnee was
+approximately of his own age.
+
+"Me live in Shawnee wigwam many moons. Me Shawnee. Me white Shawnee. Me
+have Shawnee fader and Shawnee broder," and he held up two fingers to
+indicate the number of his brothers.
+
+[Illustration: "One of the men who had been stationed as a guard was
+shot early in the morning"]
+
+"What are you doing here? What do you want?" demanded Peleg sharply. He
+was mystified by the statements which had been made and was fearful of
+some trap or treachery on the part of his visitor or his companions, who
+might even then be watching from the nearby forest.
+
+"Me fader, me broder, me go," the visitor replied, pointing to himself.
+"All go trap many beaver, many mink, many muskrat," he added, making a
+circle with his hand to indicate his inability to count the pelts which
+had been taken. "Me broder he wan' go on warpath. He wan' help drive
+palefaces out Kantuckee. Me fader he say he go," nodding his head many
+times to emphasize his statement. "But one night many owls scream and
+cry. He say then no go. Me broder he say go. Me fader say yes."
+
+"Where are they now?"
+
+The young stranger gazed earnestly into the face of his questioner, and
+at last, apparently comprehending his question, turned and waved his
+hand toward the forest to indicate that the men to whom he had referred
+were far away.
+
+"Why are you here? Why do you not go with them?"
+
+"Me wan' see white faces some more. Me wan' find white broder. Me white
+Shawnee, where go? Must see paleface wigwam."
+
+For a moment Peleg was silent as he gazed earnestly into the face of the
+young man who had so strongly impressed him. He was convinced that he
+was indeed white, and he concluded that he must have been adopted by the
+Indians many years ago. As a consequence of his association with the
+Shawnees, doubtless he had almost forgotten the language of his own
+people.
+
+In his statement words unknown to Peleg were spoken, but he had
+understood enough to convince him that either the white Shawnee was
+speaking the truth, or else was trying to set some trap into which the
+defenders of the fort might be drawn.
+
+"Come with me," said the young scout finally. As they turned toward the
+fort they met Sam Oliver, who stopped and gazed in surprise at Peleg's
+companion, and laughed scornfully when he heard the story of the
+stranger.
+
+"You say you and your Shawnee father and brother buried the canoe in
+which you came down the river?" demanded the hunter brutally as he
+turned upon the visitor.
+
+"Bury canoe."
+
+"Then you take us straight to the place where it is. I know well enough
+you are trying to play some sneaking game on us, and if you are, you
+will be the first one to suffer for it. If you try to lead us into any
+trap, no matter what happens to us, I will put a bullet into you."
+
+"No go," pleaded the young warrior.
+
+"You must go!" retorted Sam Oliver harshly.
+
+Peleg sympathized with the stranger. He understood, he thought, the
+desire of the returning white man to shield his foster-father and
+brother. The young hunter was now convinced that his visitor had spoken
+truthfully.
+
+"Sam," he ventured to suggest, "this young brave was stolen when he was
+a little child, and he has lived with his Shawnee father ever since. He
+doesn't want to betray him. You cannot blame him for that, can you?"
+
+"There is only one way to deal with the varmints!" retorted Sam hotly.
+"You might just as well try to make a pet out of a nest of rattlesnakes
+as to try to be friends with an Indian. No, sir! This--whatever he is,
+white man, or red man--he must prove what he has said, and the only way
+for him to do it is to take us to the place where he pretends that canoe
+is buried in the ground."
+
+The brutal manner of the hunter apparently had made a deep impression
+upon the stranger. With manifest reluctance he finally consented to
+conduct the party to the place where the canoe was buried. It was well
+known among the settlers that the Indians, after their voyages on the
+river, buried their light canoes to prevent them from being warped by
+sun and rain.
+
+"You go where owl cry. Owl scream, me fader--iron----" The stranger
+stopped as if he was unable to recollect the word he wished to use,
+making motions with his hands to describe what he wished to say.
+
+Peleg suggested, "Was it an iron kettle?"
+
+A vigorous nod from the stranger indicated that was the word he was
+trying to recall, and he continued, "Me fader hide iron kettle in hole
+in tree. Me show you."
+
+"You wait here," ordered Sam, "while I get two or three more men and we
+will soon look up that kettle."
+
+Peleg suspected that the white Shawnee, in order to delay the quest of
+the hidden canoe and thereby give his foster-father and brother an
+opportunity to escape from the region, had suggested a visit to the tree
+where the cry of the owl had alarmed his father.
+
+In a brief time, however, Sam and his companions returned, and the
+hunter roughly ordered the stranger to lead the way.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+THE HIDDEN CANOE
+
+
+While Sam Oliver had been gone to the fort to secure a few of his
+comrades to accompany him, the young Indian, or white, or white
+Indian--Peleg was uncertain to which class his visitor really
+belonged--entered with apparent confidence into conversation with the
+young scout. In his broken English he related many things concerning the
+life which he had lived in the wigwam of his foster father.
+
+Peleg was impressed by the increasing facility with which the white
+Shawnee, as the young brave preferred to call himself, was using the
+language of the whites.
+
+It may have been that the words he now heard recalled to his mind
+expressions which had almost faded from his memory. At all events he
+talked more freely and with an increasing ability to express himself.
+
+"Me fader hear owl cry. He know from strange cry that some die or be
+pris'ner. He old man. He 'fraid. He say go back up river. Me broder he
+say no. Me say no. Me fader still 'fraid, but he keep him promise."
+
+"What was his promise?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"He say he take us on warpath to help keep palefaces from going into
+Kantuckee. He no wan' go, but he say he go. We all lie down sleep.
+Pretty quick me fader wake up. Me fader wake me broder. Wake me, too."
+
+"What was the trouble?" asked Peleg.
+
+"Me fader have sleep and see----"
+
+"What do you mean, he had a dream?"
+
+"That so," replied the visitor, nodding his head. "Me fader have dream."
+
+"What did he dream?"
+
+"He say we go to Kantuckee, we die. Me fader cry. He no wan' go on
+warpath."
+
+"But you came," suggested Peleg.
+
+His visitor nodded and continued: "Me fader say he keep him promise. But
+he say more. He say we go back to wigwam. Go quick. He good man. Heap
+good man. He keep him promise. Me broder say me fader mus' keep him
+promise now."
+
+"So you came?"
+
+"We go on warpath. Me fader say he go quick. No stay any more where we
+sleep."
+
+"So you started right away, did you?"
+
+"We go on warpath all night. When light come we turn to place where
+white man build fort."
+
+"Are there many Shawnees here?"
+
+The young visitor, nodding, said: "Pretty quick, heap Shawnee come."
+
+He held up three and then four fingers to express the idea that the
+Indian bands were advancing in parties of three or more, and at some
+prearranged place or by some well-known signals the scattered little
+parties would be brought together and one large band formed.
+
+The information was startling to the young scout and seemed to him to be
+altogether probable. It was in accordance with the well-known methods of
+Indian fighting, and agreed with experiences which the young hunter
+already had had.
+
+He deeply regretted the absence of the great leader. The gentleness and
+firmness, the courage and resource of Daniel Boone would be greatly
+needed if the Shawnees attacked the little fort. Boone, however, was not
+near and his help could not be relied upon.
+
+Meanwhile Peleg was awaiting the return of Sam Oliver. He was well aware
+of the excellent qualities which the hunter possessed, and he was
+familiar also with the intense bitterness with which Sam looked upon the
+Indians. For him they possessed no good qualities. They were simply
+enemies of the whites and to be exterminated like the rattlesnake and
+the panther. He recognized no feeling of patriotism on their part, and,
+because the method of their warfare was cruel, he judged their motives
+accordingly.
+
+"Me no wan' go where canoe is," said the young brave earnestly. "Me love
+Shawnee fader. Me no betray him. Him good man. Me fader kind to me. No
+wan' him lose scalp."
+
+"It is too bad," acknowledged Peleg. He was distressed by the fear that
+Sam Oliver and his companions would have little mercy upon the Indian
+father to whom they were compelling the young man to conduct them. In
+his heart there was a desire to help the young stranger who had felt the
+call of his own people so strongly that he had even deserted the family
+which had cared for him since his early childhood.
+
+Peleg's thoughts were interrupted by the return of the hunter and four
+of his comrades. It was evident that all five were suspicious of
+treachery, and also that they were determined to put the strange
+visitor's words to the test.
+
+"Now, then!" ordered Sam, as he turned sharply upon the white Shawnee.
+"You take us straight to that place where you say your canoe was hid."
+
+Apparently unmoved by the brutal demand, the young visitor answered, "Me
+no wan' you hurt me fader. Him good fader. Him take care me."
+
+"Why didn't you stay with him then?" laughed Sam.
+
+"Me wan' see white fader's people, too. Me wan' find white moder's
+people," said the visitor simply.
+
+"You will have time enough to look them up after we have found out
+whether you are telling us the truth or not," declared Sam. "I have my
+suspicions that you are trying to get us into some trap, and as I told
+you before, if you are I shall fill you full of lead the first thing. If
+I find you are trying to trap us, you cannot complain if I do just what
+I tell you I shall do."
+
+"Me no wan' go," repeated the young man.
+
+"You are going whether you want to go or not," retorted Sam Oliver
+brutally. "Are you coming with us, Peleg?" he inquired, turning to the
+young scout.
+
+"I am," said Peleg quietly. He had made his decision instantly in his
+desire to protect or help the young visitor, whose suffering in the
+prospect of being compelled to betray his father had deeply stirred the
+heart of the young hunter. Aware that there was no escape from the
+demand, the white Shawnee turned and led the way into the forest.
+
+The men who were following him were continually alert, suspicious as
+they were of the treachery of their guide, and fearful of the presence
+of other Shawnees in the forest through which they were moving.
+
+The confidence of Sam Oliver, who followed close upon the heels of the
+stranger, in a measure strengthened the courage of his followers.
+
+Peleg, who was next behind the leader, was as observant of the hunter as
+he was of the signs in the woods. He was convinced, too, that the young
+stranger was using time either to delay his followers or to give them an
+opportunity to abandon their demand for him to be false to the
+foster-father who had cared for him since his childhood.
+
+If such thoughts had been in the mind of the young white Shawnee they
+were not expressed and certainly were not fulfilled. There was no
+escaping the demands of Sam Oliver and his companions.
+
+At last, when an hour or more had elapsed, the guide stopped and,
+raising his hand in token of silence, in a low voice explained that they
+were approaching the tree in which the iron kettle had been concealed.
+
+Instantly the demeanour of the settlers changed and they began to creep
+forward more stealthily. Every man was alert to discover the presence of
+the Indian who still might be near the place where the kettle had been
+hidden.
+
+After a few moments Peleg perceived two Indians not far before him.
+Both were seated before a fire cooking some venison. One of the warriors
+was an old man and his companion not much more than a boy.
+
+The guide discovered the two Indians at the same time that Peleg did and
+instantly he became greatly agitated. Once more he turned to Sam Oliver
+and in low tones begged him not to kill the man who had been his
+foster-father nor the other who had been his foster-brother.
+
+"Sam," whispered Peleg, "it will be better for us just to make prisoners
+of these two men. I think we ought to do this. The boy plainly has
+spoken the truth. He did not want to betray his father and his brother,
+and you and I cannot blame him. Take both the Indians prisoners, but do
+not fire upon them."
+
+Aware that Sam was somewhat moved by his plea, Peleg repeated his
+request more urgently and was almost as relieved as the guide when at
+last Sam reluctantly consented.
+
+In accordance with the directions of the hunter the band scattered to
+surround the place where the two unsuspecting Indians were cooking their
+dinner. When all the preliminaries had been completed, Sam Oliver
+stepped forward and in his loudest tones demanded the surrender of both
+men. At the same time his companions darted forward, making a rush upon
+the unarmed warriors.
+
+To the surprise of every one, the old Indian made a desperate
+resistance. With an almost incredible quickness the Indian boy dodged
+his enemies and escaped to the forest. The old man, apparently striving
+to hold back the attacking party, resisted to the utmost of his strength
+until in his rage Sam Oliver raised his rifle to his shoulder and shot
+him.
+
+The recent guide, when he saw his foster-father fall, instantly rushed
+to the spot where the old man was lying. The aged warrior was bleeding
+profusely, but he was still conscious. Flinging himself upon the ground
+beside the prostrate body, with the tears streaming down his cheeks and
+his voice broken by sobs, again and again the white Shawnee spoke to the
+aged warrior. Even Sam Oliver was silent as he saw the grief of their
+guide.
+
+His companions indifferently watched the bereaved boy, but Peleg looked
+away when he saw the old man raise his hand feebly and place it upon the
+head of his adopted son. It was a token of his forgiveness, although his
+few words were not understood by the listening group. The meaning of the
+act, however, was clear to every one.
+
+Soon the old warrior breathed his last, and as soon as Sam Oliver was
+aware that the end had come his sympathy speedily departed. Turning
+once more to the guide and ignoring the grief of the boy, he roughly
+said: "Now take us where that canoe is buried. The other Indian has got
+away from us, and he will probably make straight for the canoe. You lead
+us there about as fast as you can travel and we will try to head him off
+before he can go down the river!"
+
+In broken utterances the young white Shawnee begged the hunter not to
+enforce this last demand. "Me show where me fader was. Me fader dead. Me
+no show where broder is. Me wan' broder escape. No go broder! No go
+broder!" he besought the hunter earnestly.
+
+Sam Oliver, however, was not to be turned from his decision. "You go
+with us or I shall make you!" he said, and in spite of Peleg's protests
+he turned the young guide's face to the forest and with many threats
+compelled him to lead the way.
+
+Two hours elapsed before they came near the place where the canoe had
+been buried. Creeping cautiously among the trees, the settlers came
+within rifle shot of the spot, and as they peered keenly about them no
+one at first was able to discover the presence of the young Indian.
+
+By the direction of Oliver every man remained in his hiding-place
+waiting for the arrival of the Indian boy, who, Sam was convinced, would
+soon come to the place. This expectation was fulfilled, as in about ten
+minutes the young Indian appeared and started to the sandy shore of the
+river.
+
+Without hesitation he proceeded to the spot where the canoe had been
+hidden and, as he began to dig the sand, the hunter ordered his
+companions to fire upon him. The reports of the five rifles rang out
+together.
+
+The young Shawnee leaped high into the air and fell dead upon the sand.
+Doubtless he never knew of the unwilling treachery of his foster-brother
+by which he and his father had lost their lives.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+GATHERING CLOUDS
+
+
+The grief of the white Shawnee at the death of his foster-brother was
+pitiful to behold. Even Sam Oliver and his companions, who seldom showed
+any sympathy for the Indians, were not unmoved by his agonized cries of
+grief.
+
+In the Shawnee tongue, some words of which all the white men present
+understood, the young stranger poured forth his sorrows. He called upon
+the spirits of his foster-father and brother to wait for him in their
+journey to the happy hunting-grounds. He explained that in no way had
+his treachery been of his own choosing. In spite of his protest, he
+explained, he had been compelled to direct the white men to the place
+where those who were nearest and dearest to him had fallen before their
+fire.
+
+Several minutes elapsed and no one of the settlers spoke. Then Sam
+Oliver said sharply: "We have had enough of this! I feel just about as
+guilty as I do when I shoot a panther cub." Without a further word the
+hunter stepped to the place where the body of the young Indian was
+lying and scalped his victim. Even Peleg, hardened though he was to the
+scenes that were enacted upon the border, shuddered as he saw his
+companion perform this act.
+
+At the urgent request of Peleg the white Shawnee was permitted to return
+with his newly found friend to bury the body of his foster-father, after
+his brother also had received decent burial at his hands.
+
+When this act, in which Peleg had aided, was completed, the young hunter
+turned to his heartbroken companion and said, "You must come to the fort
+with me."
+
+"No go! No go!" wailed the visitor.
+
+"I do not blame you very much," acknowledged Peleg, "but you have no
+other home, and you might just as well come with me. I am sure you will
+be treated kindly, and as soon as Daniel Boone comes back you need have
+no further fears. If you go back to the Shawnees they will think you
+have betrayed your father and brother. Of course I understand that you
+did not do anything of the kind."
+
+"Me do! Me false to me fader," interrupted the white Shawnee, his
+lamentations breaking forth afresh.
+
+"What is your name?" abruptly demanded Peleg.
+
+The reply of his companion sounded to him very like Tontileaugo, but
+although it was repeated several times Peleg was unable to pronounce it
+distinctly.
+
+"I might call you Tonti, and I might call you Henry. Which do you like
+better?"
+
+"No call Tonti."
+
+"Then I will call you Henry. Don't you remember what your name was when
+you were a white boy?"
+
+"Henry" shook his head, although plainly he was striving to recall the
+name which belonged to the years that were now dim in his memory.
+
+"You come with me," said Peleg.
+
+Together the two boys returned to the fort. Neither of them spoke until
+they entered within the stockade, where the men of the settlement were
+assembled listening to Sam Oliver's dramatic description of the events
+which had just taken place.
+
+The sight of the hunter seemed to revive the sorrow of Henry, as Peleg
+henceforth called the young stranger, and bring back recollections of
+his own, unwilling treachery to the family which had been kind to him
+since the time of his adoption into the tribe.
+
+However, Peleg did his utmost to shield his friend, to whom his heart
+went out in strong sympathy.
+
+"What you goin' to do with your friend?" laughed Sam as he spoke to
+Peleg when the group at last scattered.
+
+"I am going to take care of him," replied Peleg quietly.
+
+"Make a pet of him, are you? The next rattler I find or the next wolf's
+cub I run across I will bring back to you, lad, and let you make a pet
+of that, too. The only trouble is that a rattlesnake is kinder at heart
+than an Indian."
+
+Peleg shook his head but did not reply to this statement of the hunter.
+
+"It is true, what I am tellin' you," continued Sam, as if somehow he was
+striving to justify himself. "It's got to be extermination. Either you
+kill the redskins or they will kill you. There isn't room for both in
+the same land. They are trying to kill us off, and I am not one to sit
+down quietly and invite them to bring their tomahawks and brain me. If I
+can get the drop on them before they can get it on me, that's all to my
+advantage."
+
+"I think Henry feels----" began Peleg.
+
+"Henry? Who's Henry?" broke in Sam Oliver.
+
+"That's the name I have given this boy. He told me what his name was in
+Shawnee, but I could not quite get it. It sounded like Tontileaugo, and
+I offered to call him Tonti for short but he didn't like that."
+
+"You will live to regret the day you ever took him in," warned Sam.
+
+"But he is a white boy," persisted Peleg.
+
+"Born white, but raised an Indian. It doesn't make much difference where
+a man is born. He grows to be like what he sees and is used to. He has
+been brought up to look at things through Indian eyes and he thinks
+Indian thoughts. You will find he will play you false before you are
+done with him."
+
+"I shall have to take my chance as to that," said Peleg. "Daniel Boone
+has told me to try to do something to help somebody every day. He told
+me to start out with that in my mind the first thing every morning."
+
+"You are makin' a mistake, lad," said Sam Oliver more quietly.
+
+It was plain to Peleg that the old hunter was convinced that what he
+said was true, and there had been many experiences along the border to
+justify him in his conclusion. What Sam Oliver had been unable to
+comprehend was that, much as the methods of the Indians in their warfare
+were to be condemned, they still were fighting for the protection of the
+lands which they believed to be their own.
+
+A few days afterward Daniel Boone and his family arrived with their
+little caravan, which included two milch cows and several pack-horses.
+The scout was hilariously greeted by the settlers, and without
+opposition at once resumed his position as leader of the little
+community.
+
+Every one that could share in the labour was busily engaged now
+throughout the long hours of the day. The sound of the axe was
+continually heard, and the few crops which had been planted were
+carefully tended, and, what is more, were giving promise of an abounding
+harvest from the small sowing.
+
+Peleg had related to the great scout the events which had been connected
+with the coming of Henry to the settlements. The young scout's heart was
+still sore for his friend, who now had little to say to any one except
+Peleg. Together the boys toiled in the field or hunted game in the
+forests; but Henry was never stationed as a guard.
+
+"It is this way, lad," said Boone, after he had heard the entire story.
+"Sam Oliver means right, but he has no understanding of the feelings of
+any one else. Because _I_ shoot an Indian and _he_ shoots an Indian, he
+thinks we both act from the same motive. Never yet have I raised my
+rifle to fire at an Indian without feeling in my heart that perhaps he
+might be as fully entitled to the land for which he is struggling as I
+am. I should be glad to share with him. The trouble is he will not share
+with me. There ought to be room enough here for us both; but, now I am
+sure, lad, through the actions of the Indians themselves, it must be
+either white man or red man who will dwell in this wonderful country."
+As he spoke, Daniel Boone looked around him at the wonderful vision that
+spread before his eyes. It was a day late in the summer and a slight
+haze rested over the forests and the fields. The silence which enveloped
+all things was in itself impressive. The cloudless sky and the colours
+of the trees below the hill where the scout and his companion were
+standing combined to impress upon their minds the marvellous beauty of
+the region. "This is destined to be a great land, lad," Boone said
+simply. "It is a wonderful thing that you and I should have a little
+part in opening it up. When I close my eyes, almost I see the homes that
+will be built here, the men and women who will find resting-places here;
+even the voices of the little children who will be born two hundred
+years from now are sounding in my ears." Changing his tone, Boone said:
+"Have you seen anything in your friend to make you feel suspicious of
+him?"
+
+"Never!" said Peleg positively. "Have you?"
+
+"No. There are some men in the settlement, however, who are fearful that
+he may try to betray us when trouble comes."
+
+"He never will," said Peleg positively. "If you had been with me and
+seen him when Sam Oliver shot his foster-father and brother I am sure
+you would never suspect Henry of not being true."
+
+"That is my feeling, lad," said Boone gently. "Do all in your power to
+prevent him from doing anything which might arouse the anger or even the
+suspicions of our men."
+
+"He never talks to Sam Oliver and very seldom to any one else. He stays
+with me all through the day, except when I am on guard."
+
+"You are welcome to bring him to our home any time."
+
+"To stay there?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"That is what I mean, lad," replied the great scout, his face lighting
+up with the occasional smile that appeared upon it. "My wife and
+daughters feel toward him as I do. Do you know that they were the first
+white women ever to stand on the banks of the Kantuckee River?"
+
+"I had not thought of that," replied Peleg.
+
+"There are many others coming soon. Already I have received word that
+Mrs. McGary, Mrs. Hogan, and Mrs. Denton are on their way here."
+
+The arrival soon afterward of more than a score of white men to join the
+settlers aroused great enthusiasm, because now it was confidently
+believed that, after so many had passed safely over the roadway which
+Boone and his companions had opened to the beautiful region, many more
+would surely follow. These expectations were soon fulfilled.
+
+The continued labours of the whites, however, had increased the intense
+hostility of the Indians, who naturally believed all these lands
+belonged to them. When they saw the settlers felling the trees and
+erecting their houses and planting their crops, a spirit of
+determination to drive the whites from the region spread among the
+tribes.
+
+There was just now, however, a lull in the direct warfare. Dusky faces
+occasionally were seen in the forest, but there was no open attack.
+
+Daniel Boone, however, was not to be deceived. He was confident that it
+was simply the hush which at times precedes the coming of the tempest.
+In his own mind he was convinced that the Indians simply were reserving
+their strength until they could rally a sufficient number to make an
+attack worth while. And Boone in the midst of all his labours--for he
+was toiling with the men of the settlement--was forming plans by which
+he hoped to meet the fierce attacks he expected the Shawnees to make.
+
+Frequent sallies upon the men when they were at work in the fields now
+began to be made. While they were plowing, the stealthy warriors did
+their utmost to waylay and shoot them. When they were hunting they were
+chased and sometimes fired upon. Sometimes an Indian would creep up near
+the fort in the night and fire upon the first of the garrison to appear
+in the morning. The little settlement soon was in a state of continual
+and increasing alarm.
+
+Even many of the ordinary duties of life were performed only at great
+risk. But the determination in the hearts of the hardy people to defend
+their new homes in the wonderful region strengthened with every passing
+day.
+
+Many of the settlers every night assembled within the walls of the fort.
+It was the expressed desire of Boone that all should do this, for in
+this way only could the safety of every one be assured. For the most
+part the people responded willingly to his appeal, and after a certain
+eventful night all were willing to heed his counsel. On that particular
+night occurred a struggle with the prowling Indians which made the name
+of one of the heroic women long to be remembered.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+CAPTIVES
+
+
+As has been stated, the opening by Daniel Boone of the road through the
+wilderness to the new settlement, and the safety with which the journey
+thither had been accomplished, were strong inducements now to other
+families to make similar ventures.
+
+Within a few months the little settlement had increased until it
+contained at least one hundred and fifty people. Trees had been felled,
+log houses had been built, and with great energy the new people were
+preparing to make permanent homes in the fertile valleys. Most of the
+newcomers were more than willing to follow the suggestion of Boone, who
+strongly advised all the settlers to seek safety in the shelter of the
+fort when night fell.
+
+The great scout was convinced that the Shawnees were continually
+watching the little community, and that their anger at the determination
+of the settlers to make permanent abodes in the beautiful region was
+steadily increasing. Every day Boone was watchful. Occasionally the red
+men were seen, and not infrequently they crept close enough to the fort,
+or to the men when they were toiling in the forests or fields, to fire
+upon them; but as yet no concerted attack had been made.
+
+Among the families which had come was one named Merrill. Mr. Merrill was
+a vigorous, active young man, and his wife was almost as large as he and
+as strong. So convinced were the two young people of their ability to
+withstand any attack that might be made upon their home that they had
+been somewhat unmindful of the request of the leader.
+
+One morning in December Daniel Boone said to Peleg: "I wish you to go to
+Mr. Merrill's at once, and say to him that I have seen recently some
+signs of the Indians which greatly disturb me. It will not be necessary
+for you to say more, except that I strongly urge the Merrills to comply
+with my suggestion and come nightly to the fort."
+
+Peleg, at the request of the scout, mounted a horse and rode in the
+direction of the little log cabin which the Merrills had erected on the
+extreme border beyond the settlement. He and Henry, accompanied by young
+Israel Boone, who now had become almost a man in size, had been frequent
+visitors at the friendly home of the Merrills. It was therefore with a
+feeling of personal interest as well as anxiety that the young hunter
+hastened to carry out the suggestion of the great scout.
+
+Before he arrived at the little house its appearance suggested to him
+that something was wrong. It was early in the morning and yet no smoke
+was rising from the chimney. The silence which rested over the place
+seemed ominous. So anxious was the young scout that he dismounted before
+he entered the clearing, tied his horse to one of the trees, and then
+cautiously crept forward to discover what might be amiss with the
+household.
+
+When Peleg approached the border of the little clearing he halted and
+peered anxiously before him. No one was seen about the place. Delaying
+only a brief time, and holding Singing Susan in his hands ready for
+instant use if occasion required, Peleg called to the inmates of the
+house.
+
+"Hello!" he called. As no response was given to his hail, he raised his
+voice and called again, "Hello! Mr. Merrill!" Not even the dog, which
+was a great pet of Peleg's, made any response. Several minutes elapsed
+and the silence was still unbroken.
+
+Troubled by his failure to arouse any one, Peleg darted swiftly across
+the clearing and, as he approached the door, stopped in astonishment
+when he beheld near the threshold the bodies of two dead Indians. As he
+looked about he saw bloody trails leading into the forest, which
+indicated that others also had been wounded. In the door a large breach
+had been made which was evidently the work of the Indian tomahawks.
+
+The young scout, his flesh creeping at his discovery, glanced about him
+in every direction, but no sign of friend or enemy could he see. The
+door itself was partly open, and as Peleg stepped within the little
+cabin the odour of burned feathers greeted him.
+
+There were many indications of a struggle which plainly had taken place
+within the room, but it was not until he had passed out to the rear of
+the little building and descried Mrs. Merrill approaching that his full
+courage returned. The resolute woman, her face pale, but otherwise not
+betraying any emotion, approached the young scout and said quietly: "I
+have just buried my husband."
+
+The astonishment of Peleg was so great that he was unable to reply to
+the staggering statement, and then aware that the silent grief of his
+friend was almost more than she could bear, he assisted her within the
+house and soon was listening to her story.
+
+"I did not like to bury my husband so soon," began the woman at last,
+"but I dared not wait to ask any one to come."
+
+"Tell me about it," said Peleg quietly, "unless you think that we had
+better start for the fort right away."
+
+Mrs. Merrill shook her head as she said: "I do not think there is need
+of immediate haste. It must have been about midnight when our dog began
+to growl so savagely that my husband thought something must be wrong. He
+got up, and when he opened the door to find out what the trouble was he
+received the fire of six or seven Indians. He sank to the floor, but
+managed to call me to close the door and let down the bars.
+
+"I don't know that I ever had such a thrilling or awful moment in my
+life! I could hear the savages on the porch, and I was afraid they would
+get to the door before I could shut and bar it. Just as I managed to
+close it and let the bar fall, the Indians began to pound upon it with
+their tomahawks. If I had been one second later they would have got
+inside the house and I should now be where my husband is. They kept
+pounding on the door until they made a large hole in it. They did not
+know that I stood close by, waiting for them with an axe, and as fast as
+one after another--four of them--tried to crawl through, I killed or
+badly wounded every one that made the attempt. They could not force
+their way into the cabin," she added simply.
+
+"How many Indians did you say there were at the door?" inquired Peleg
+in astonishment.
+
+"Four, but only two of them were killed. At least there are only two
+left here, and the others may have got away."
+
+"I saw two," said Peleg. "How many were there altogether?"
+
+"Seven, I think. They kept away from the door after that, but pretty
+soon I heard them up on the roof. I knew then that they were trying to
+get into the house by coming down the chimney."
+
+"I think I know how you kept them out," said Peleg, smiling slightly.
+
+"Yes," replied the woman. "I grabbed the only feather bed we had in our
+cabin and ripped it open, in desperate haste, feeling just as I did when
+I was trying to close the door. I knew if I was not quick enough the
+Shawnees would be in the room. It was fortunate that there were coals on
+the fireplace, and just as soon as I put the feathers on them a blaze
+sprang up and such smoke as I never saw began to pour up the chimney. In
+less than one minute two of the redskins fell into the fireplace, and
+with the same axe with which I had defended the door I quickly put an
+end to both varmints."
+
+"That made six of the seven, then," suggested Peleg.
+
+"Yes. But the seventh wasn't ready to leave yet. He ran around to the
+door and tried to crawl through while I was busy at the chimney. It was
+fortunate that I chanced to see him. He got a gash in the cheek, and you
+ought to have heard him yell when he ran away from the door. Talk to me
+about the Indians never making any fuss! This man was yelling so that
+you might have heard him at the fort. He called me the 'Long Knife
+Squaw,' but I didn't care so long as he cleared out for good and all!
+And I don't believe any of them will come again very soon."
+
+"What are you going to do now?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"I haven't any plans."
+
+"You must come with me to the fort."
+
+"But I must not leave my clearing," said the heroic woman. "Now that my
+husband is dead, I shall have everything to do."
+
+"Come with me, and I will find some one to do what ought to be done
+here."
+
+Yielding to the persuasion of the young scout, Mrs. Merrill accompanied
+him to the fort, where at once some of the women offered her the solace
+of their sympathy.
+
+Peleg at once assembled a little company of men, and led by Daniel Boone
+himself they returned to the scene of the brave woman's struggles. The
+dead Indians were buried and the two cows were driven within the
+stockade.
+
+"It will not be safe," said Daniel Boone to Peleg, "for Mrs. Merrill to
+come back here alone. If she does insist upon coming, either you or
+Israel must be with her. She should be persuaded, however, not to expose
+herself to such dangers as she will meet here."
+
+"She seems to be able to protect herself," said Peleg dryly.
+
+"Indeed she does. I question if there is another woman in our settlement
+who would have been able to do what she did. Single-handed, to keep off
+seven Shawnees! I believe that the story of her bravery will be told to
+your grandchildren, Peleg."
+
+Mrs. Merrill, however, was found to be more reasonable than the great
+scout's fear had warranted. She was quite willing to make her home for
+the present where the peril and the loneliness were not so great as in
+her cabin.
+
+The attacks of the Indians continued, although no party as large as that
+which had attacked the home of the Merrills was seen. The plowmen in the
+fields, the men cutting the timber, and those who separated from their
+fellows while hunting game were continually in danger.
+
+The determination of the whites was as great as that of the Indians,
+and although every one was anxious, no one thought of withdrawing from
+the settlement.
+
+To Daniel Boone himself there came a little later an experience almost
+as thrilling as that which had befallen Mrs. Merrill.
+
+Among the new families was one named Callaway. In this family there was
+a girl of nearly the same age as Daniel's Boone's daughter Jemima. One
+morning, early in the summer, the girls, taking the one canoe which was
+kept near the fort, paddled out upon the river.
+
+"Do not go more than one hundred feet above or below the fort," warned
+Daniel Boone, who stood on the bank watching the girls. Both promised,
+and soon in their light-hearted way were paddling the canoe back and
+forth from shore to shore.
+
+Satisfied that the girls were well within the protection they needed,
+Daniel Boone returned to his labours and no one was left upon the bank
+to watch them.
+
+As the sport continued, and before either of the girls was aware of the
+fact, the light canoe had drifted beyond the points which had been
+designated by the scout as the limits of safety. Discovering some
+flowers along the shore, they pushed the little craft in among the tall
+rushes while they plucked the blossoms they were seeking. The canoe was
+well within the rushes and concealed, as the girls thought, from the
+sight of any one on the bank.
+
+Suddenly the younger girl, emitting a piercing shriek, turned to Jemima
+Boone, and exclaimed: "Look there! Oh, look there!"
+
+As Jemima sharply turned about she saw, creeping through the rushes and
+concealed from the sight of any one on the shore, a huge Shawnee
+warrior, who already had seized the painter of the little craft.
+
+Scream followed scream when the Indian began to pull the canoe toward
+him. In a moment he was joined by several of his dusky comrades. The
+canoe was drawn to the shore and the girls, prisoners of the savages,
+were dragged up the bank.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+THE PURSUIT
+
+
+The screams of the terrified girls were plainly heard at the fort. A
+little company of frightened women and frantic men quickly assembled
+upon the bank, but in spite of the piteous appeals it was too late to
+help the unfortunate prisoners. Four additional Indians appeared and,
+assisting their comrades, seized the girls and with them rushed into the
+wilderness.
+
+The men from the fort who were standing on the bank of the stream were
+unable to cross, the only canoe being now on the opposite shore.
+
+Calling to one another, the men endeavoured to find some one who would
+venture to swim to the other shore. No one volunteered, however, as all
+were afraid that the Indians might return if such an attempt should be
+made. Both Daniel Boone and the father of Miss Callaway were absent from
+the settlement at the time, and it was nearly night when they returned.
+
+Stopping only a moment to comfort his heartbroken wife, Daniel Boone, as
+soon as he was informed, acted promptly and decisively, as was his
+habit. He was well aware that no time should be lost, and fortunately he
+discovered Peleg at that moment returning to the fort.
+
+"The girls have been taken by the Indians," said Boone, suppressing his
+emotion.
+
+"What girls? What do you mean?" inquired Peleg, aghast.
+
+"Jemima and her friend, the Callaway girl."
+
+"When?"
+
+"This noon. I have no time to explain. We must get a party to start
+right away. Find every man you can and I, too, will look about, and we
+will meet here at the fort just as soon as we can get our party
+together."
+
+Darting into the house, Peleg secured Singing Susan, and then, finding
+Israel Boone, who was almost as aroused as his father, the two instantly
+began their search for men who would join the rescue party.
+
+Soon afterward a band of eight men stood with the scout on the bank of
+the Kentucky River near the fort. The quiet of the summer evening was
+unbroken save by the occasional cry of some night-bird. It had been long
+since the screams of the disappearing girls had been heard, but the
+direction from which they had come indicated the way in which to start
+the pursuit.
+
+"How many are here?" inquired Boone, as he glanced about the group.
+
+"Eight," replied Peleg, "including you and Israel."
+
+"We need more, but I shall not wait. We will start at once."
+
+The canoe meanwhile had been secured by one of the boys of the
+settlement who swam across the river at dusk and returned in the little
+craft, paddling with his hand, for the blades had been broken by the
+Indians to delay pursuit.
+
+The men now were ferried across the river, and as soon as every one was
+standing on the opposite bank Daniel Boone again inquired: "Is every one
+prepared?"
+
+Every member of the party declared that he was ready to follow wherever
+the great scout might lead.
+
+Instantly Daniel Boone led the way into the forest. The anxious scout
+was so quiet and self-controlled that an uninformed spectator would
+never have suspected that he was labouring under special stress. Even
+Peleg was astonished at the composed bearing of the man.
+
+Turning to Israel, the young scout remarked: "Your father is saving
+every ounce of his strength for the work ahead of us. He is not wasting
+any time crying."
+
+"He never does," responded Israel proudly. "Do you know, Peleg," young
+Boone said, "there are times when Parson John Lythe preaches to us that
+he speaks of the Great Father of us all, and somehow I always think of
+Him as if He looked somewhat as _my_ father does."
+
+Deeply impressed as Peleg was by the reverence in which the son of
+Daniel Boone held his father, there was no opportunity at the time for
+further conversation.
+
+In Indian file the pursuers advanced, and all soon were running,
+following the custom of the Indians. So skilled was the leader in this
+work that it was well known that he was able for many hours to maintain
+the pace at which he was now moving.
+
+"One time," said Israel to Peleg, "my father ran like this for eight
+hours, then rested two hours, and then ran eight more, and after he had
+taken another rest he made the third stretch of the same number of
+hours."
+
+The leader had not spoken except when in the dim light of the moon he
+was compelled to stop to search for the trail. Once when he halted he
+said to his companions: "The Shawnees are not moving in one body. They
+have broken up into ten parties and are moving in parallel lines."
+
+"Did they expect to throw us off the trail in that way?" asked Israel
+scornfully.
+
+"Doubtless they hoped to. Peleg," inquired Boone, turning to the young
+scout, "how many do you make out were in this band that stole Jemima?"
+
+"About thirty, I should say," replied Peleg.
+
+"It is more nearly thirty-five," declared Boone, as he turned to direct
+his followers to resume the pursuit.
+
+Somehow the night did not prove to be a serious obstacle to the great
+leader. Almost as if by instinct Boone found his way, and the parallel
+trails made by the Indians, instead of throwing the pursuers into
+confusion, really aided them. If the trail was lost in one place it then
+became comparatively easy for the men to scatter and in a brief time
+discover it nearby.
+
+"How far have we come?" Israel inquired of his father when a halt was
+made in the morning.
+
+"Thirty miles," replied Daniel Boone.
+
+"Do you find anything new?"
+
+"Yes," replied the scout, nodding his head. "The Indians are less
+careful than they were. The trail is becoming plainer. I hope we shall
+overtake them before noon."
+
+It was not long before the pursuit was resumed, and the pace of the
+entire party was increased when it was discovered that the Indians had
+entered a buffalo road and were following that clearly defined path.
+
+The expression upon the face of Boone, who, with Peleg and Israel, was
+in advance of the little band, made every one aware that he expected
+soon to overtake the savages. The time of anxiety as well as peril was
+surely approaching.
+
+"Peleg," whispered Israel, "what do you think will be done to the girls
+if the Indians see us before we get within rifle shot?"
+
+Peleg shook his head and did not reply, although both he and his friend
+were aware that the Indians would doubtless tomahawk their captives and
+then flee if they should discover their pursuers close upon them.
+
+Nearly ten more miles were covered before the escaping band was
+overtaken. Each party discovered the other almost at the same moment.
+The Indians were in the act of kindling a fire and preparing camp for
+the night. Almost as if it was one sound, the rifles of Daniel Boone,
+Peleg, and Israel rang out together.
+
+Two of the Indians fell to the ground. All the other braves, as if
+driven by one impulse, instantly turned and fled from the spot, leaving
+the terrified girls behind them. So sudden had been the flight of the
+savages that when they darted into the adjacent forest they had been
+unable to don their moccasins. Not a man in the pursuing party had been
+injured.
+
+The cry of Jemima Boone when in the dim light she beheld her father
+approaching at the head of the rescuing party was one that those who
+heard her never were able to forget. She sprang from the ground where
+she had been seated and threw herself into her father's arms. For a time
+not a word was spoken by any one, while the well-nigh exhausted girl
+clung to Daniel Boone sobbing as if her heart would break.
+
+The pursuit which had been led by the great scout had been so swift and
+unrelenting that scarcely any time for rest had been given the band
+since its departure from the fort the preceding evening; and only a
+short time for recuperation could be allowed even now. This was some
+hardship for the men, but for the girls, who, in addition to the terror
+and despair which had possessed them, had been compelled to travel
+through the forests at a speed which exhausted their strength, it was
+doubly hard.
+
+Jemima explained to her father that they had arrived at the place where
+they had been discovered only a few moments before the coming of the
+hunter and his friends. The girl shuddered as she said: "If the Shawnees
+had had two minutes more they would have killed both of us before they
+ran; and I do not understand why they ran, anyway."
+
+"How many warriors were in the band?" inquired her father.
+
+"Thirty-six."
+
+"We cannot stay here long. The varmints will be coming back, and they
+outnumber us so greatly that we may have serious trouble."
+
+It was accordingly decided that the party should begin their return at
+once. For a time Daniel Boone carried his daughter in his arms, while
+her companion, almost exhausted, was also carried by one of the men.
+
+When several miles had been covered word for rest was given, and then,
+after a hasty meal was made from the loin of a deer which Peleg shot,
+the flight toward the fort was resumed.
+
+It was soon discovered, however, that the Indians were not pursuing, and
+when Boone became convinced that this was so, his anxiety was relieved,
+and he decided not to maintain the swift pace at which they had been
+moving.
+
+Two days later the party arrived at the fort on the bank of the
+Kentucky, and the relief of the distracted mothers as well as the
+general rejoicing over the safe return of the rescuers was great. After
+a rest of a day, the scout and all the party resumed their accustomed
+summer tasks.
+
+It was a few days afterward, while Peleg and Israel were engaged in
+hoeing a field of corn that belonged to Peleg, that the scout approached
+his friend.
+
+"Peleg," he said, as he halted in front of the boy, "we are to have a
+meeting in the fort to-morrow at noon and I hope you surely will be
+present."
+
+"What is the meeting for?"
+
+"We are to pass some laws. We now have more than one hundred and fifty
+souls in this little settlement, and up to the present time every one
+has been a law unto himself. We now must pass some laws which shall
+govern us as a community."
+
+"Is Sam Oliver here again?" inquired Peleg with a laugh.
+
+"Not as yet," answered Boone quizzically, smiling as he appreciated the
+discovery his young friend had made as to one of the causes for his
+desire to pass some laws by which all should be regulated.
+
+"Colonel Henderson will preside," said Boone. "He, as you know, was the
+original purchaser of this tract of land from the Cherokees, and he
+kindly consented to permit us to make a settlement here."
+
+"I shall try to be there," promised Peleg, as the scout passed on to
+make further arrangements for the meeting, and the two boys resumed
+their task.
+
+It was a serious assemblage of men that met the following noon. After
+accepting the chair, Colonel Henderson said: "I shall ask the Reverend
+John Lythe, our pioneer preacher, to address the Throne of Grace."
+
+At the conclusion of the old minister's prayer, Colonel Henderson
+solemnly said: "This legislature is now opened in the name of his
+Majesty the King of Great Britain." In his address he reminded his
+hearers of the importance of laying a broad and strong foundation for
+the future. He declared that the secret of future success depended
+largely upon the carefulness of their present preparation. He also
+explained how good and wholesome laws, such as would command the respect
+and support of the people, would benefit not merely the settlement as a
+whole, but also every individual member.
+
+Various laws then were proposed, discussed, and adopted by vote of the
+assembly.
+
+In the midst of the meeting, which both Peleg and Israel were enjoying
+keenly, Daniel Boone arose and asked for recognition from the chairman.
+
+"My father is going to make a speech!" whispered Israel in amazement, as
+he leaned toward Peleg. Never had either heard the scout speak under
+such circumstances. He was so self-contained in his manner and spoke so
+seldom that no one had thought of him as a man to make a public address.
+It was therefore with intense interest that every one present turned to
+listen to what Daniel Boone might say.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+A BAND OF SCOUTS
+
+
+"He would rather face three live painters," whispered Israel gleefully.
+"I never saw my father scared before."
+
+In a moment, however, the boys were listening intently to what the great
+scout was saying.
+
+"I am no speechmaker," began Daniel Boone, his voice trembling slightly
+as he spoke. "I know a little of the language of the deer and of the
+songs of the birds. The cry of the nighthawk has its meaning for me, to
+which it almost would be possible for me to reply. Even the scream of
+the painter is in a language which I understand, but when I look into
+the faces of my friends, who are much better fitted than I am to say
+what is best for this little community, I am at a loss how to proceed."
+The hunter paused a moment and the sympathetic interest of his hearers
+plainly encouraged him to go on. "It is true," he continued quietly, "I
+have a name for being somewhat successful as a scout and a hunter. I
+think you will all bear me witness, however, that never yet willingly
+have I inflicted pain upon even the weakest of God's creatures.
+Whenever I draw a bead on a deer I do so with the thought in my mind
+that here is the provision of the Almighty for food for His children.
+With all my might, mind, and strength I am opposed to any cruelty to
+dumb creatures, and also to any wanton waste of the game in our forests.
+I am sure I am giving voice to your convictions also when I say that we
+want no man within our settlement who does not have some such feeling as
+I have just described. Sometimes our boys are thoughtless and shoot
+perhaps more for the sake of killing than to secure provisions for our
+homes. We must be patient with them and strive to show them how mistaken
+they are. What I desire greatly just now is that a law shall be adopted
+to protect the game in our forests." The hunter took his seat and a
+murmur of applause at once came from the little assembly.
+
+"Do you make that as a motion?" inquired Colonel Henderson.
+
+"I do," responded the scout, rising and gravely bowing as he spoke.
+
+The motion was seconded, and without one opposing vote the assembly
+agreed to the suggestion of Daniel Boone.
+
+As soon as this motion was adopted the great scout once more arose and
+in his quiet and dignified manner again began to speak: "There is
+another matter in which I am deeply interested. I have never been able
+to understand how any man made in the image of his Creator could take
+his Creator's name in vain. In my experience I have noticed that
+profanity is limited to men who are either weak or vicious. I think, my
+friends, that you will agree with me that we want neither class in our
+little settlement on the banks of the Kentucky. I therefore move that we
+adopt a law prohibiting profanity."
+
+It was manifest that not every one in the assembly agreed with these
+sentiments of the hunter, and there was a moment of hesitation. Peleg,
+however, always ready to further the efforts of his friend, whom he
+admired more than he did any living man, promptly arose and seconded the
+motion, which then was passed without any opposition, though not with
+the enthusiasm which had greeted the preceding motion.
+
+Once more the tall scout arose and said: "I have still one other desire
+in my heart. As you all know, our little settlement has been unusually
+free from the brawls which occur in so many of the hamlets on the
+border. I am confident it is the desire of every one here that the same
+things shall continue to be true. If we must fight, then let us fight
+hard; but all petty quarrellings and brawls, let them not henceforth
+even be mentioned among us. With this peaceful desire in our minds, I
+greatly desire that a law shall be adopted to express the wish of this
+settlement that the Sabbath shall not be like other days. We surely toil
+so hard throughout six days of the week that if there were no other
+purpose in our minds we ought to rest on the Lord's Day. In order that
+this may be clearly understood, I move that a law be adopted which shall
+voice the sentiment of this community against the profanation of the
+Sabbath Day."
+
+There was no openly expressed opposition to the desire of the scout, and
+Peleg having promptly seconded this motion, his third suggestion also
+was adopted.
+
+Soon afterward, Colonel Henderson called upon the pioneer preacher to
+close the meeting with prayer, and the assembly dispersed.
+
+Peleg, Israel Boone, and Henry departed together from the fort. The last
+named was now able to express himself in English and, though he was
+still reserved in his bearings toward the people in general, his
+friendship for Peleg and Israel had strengthened with every passing day.
+
+"I never know such man like your father," said Henry to Israel.
+
+"He is the best man that ever lived!" broke in Peleg enthusiastically.
+"He has been just like a father to me, and if he was my real father I
+should be the proudest man in all Kentucky."
+
+"That would mean a great many people," suggested Israel with a smile. "I
+understand there are new settlers arriving every day. I have heard that
+Logan's Fort and Harrodsburgh are filling in very fast."
+
+"So I have heard," responded Peleg.
+
+"If the Indians would only leave us free!"
+
+"But they will not," broke in Henry. "They say white people not make any
+more settlements, and it not long before they drive out those that are
+here."
+
+"Let them try!" said Israel dryly.
+
+"They have been trying," remarked Peleg. "There is not a day that we
+have not seen some signs of the Shawnees or Delawares prowling around
+the forts."
+
+"They have not made any open attack for some time now," suggested Israel
+Boone.
+
+Henry shook his head as he said: "That means they only wait. Pretty soon
+you see. They feel for white men like wolf feel for bear."
+
+"And that is about the same love that a dog has for a cat," suggested
+Peleg with a laugh.
+
+"That is it," acknowledged Henry soberly. "I never know why bear and
+wolf no like each other. They kill many other things, but when wolf
+find trail of bear he call to all his friends and they begin to chase
+Mr. Bear. One day I saw a pack of wolves chasing big bear."
+
+"Was the bear running from them?" inquired Israel.
+
+"Yes, he run much fast. By and by he come to place where he can go no
+more, then he stand up with his back to tree, and the way he cuff those
+wolves first one side, then on other, make me laugh."
+
+"Yes," said Peleg, "I have seen the same thing myself. It is like the
+feeling that Sam Oliver says the otter has for the beaver."
+
+"Or the mink for the ermine," suggested Israel.
+
+"Both mink and ermine bad as they can be," said Henry, shaking his head.
+"They kill all things not so strong as they."
+
+"Yes," suggested Peleg, "I think the mink and ermine are about the worst
+animals alive. The mink is three or four times as big as the ermine is
+and has a good deal more strength----"
+
+"But the ermine so quick," interrupted Henry. "He so quick," he
+repeated, "and he most bloodthirsty little animal in the forest. When he
+begin to fight he always fight on until either he is killed or mink is
+killed."
+
+"Sam Oliver was telling me the last time he was in the settlement," said
+Peleg, "that last winter he was trailing a fox that was chasing a
+rabbit, and when Sam came to his trap-line he heard, away off to one
+side, a mink scream. He says you can hear a mink scream almost a quarter
+of a mile away. He was trapping minks and he thought he had one caught,
+so he turned and started for his trap. When he got there he saw, so he
+said, the biggest fight he ever saw in the woods. A mink was caught in
+his trap and an ermine was fighting him.
+
+"Pretty quick he saw that instead of there being only one there were two
+of the ermine. They kept walking around the mink in a circle and kept
+going faster and faster until by and by one of them, quick as lightning,
+right in front of the mink, jumped for him, and almost at the same time
+the other ermine jumped in, too, and tried to get a grip on the mink's
+neck. They must have tried that same thing before, because this time he
+heard the mink scream, too, though he was doing something besides. For
+about half a minute Sam said he couldn't hear or see much of anything
+except the fracas. Then just about as swiftly as the two ermine had
+jumped into the fight, they jumped out and began to circle around the
+mink again. The next time they tried to get the neck hold only one of
+them slipped back. The other got his teeth fastened right where he
+wanted them, and you know they are like needles. Then the other ermine
+came back and he, too, got a throat hold. In just a few minutes the
+whole affair was ended and the ermine came out ahead. Sam said he could
+have walked up to them and picked them up, they were so excited,
+squeaking like mice, and trying to tear the dead mink all to pieces."
+
+"Sam got the two ermine then, didn't he?" inquired Israel.
+
+"Yes. I told him, though, I thought they had earned their right to live,
+but Sam never feels that way about such things."
+
+The reference to Sam Oliver had brought a scowl to the face of Henry and
+caused him to become silent as long as the hunter was a topic of
+conversation.
+
+In the succeeding days reports of the presence of Indians steadily
+increased. Several men toiling in the fields were fired upon by Shawnees
+who had crept up to the border of the forest.
+
+Steadily the Indians showed their determination to do their utmost to
+prevent the settlers from making homes in their hunting grounds. The
+hostilities of the Shawnees became more marked with every passing month.
+Indeed, so many were the manifestations of their plan to attack the
+settlements that finally Colonel Clark, who at this time had been given
+the command of all military forces in Kentucky, became so convinced
+that there was a plan in the minds of the Indians to assemble a great
+body of their warriors to destroy the border forts and their inhabitants
+that he begged the pioneer scout to act as a spy and to assume charge of
+other spies that were to be sent among the tribes to learn their numbers
+as well as their designs.
+
+Daniel Boone, fully aware of the danger, and in spite of his desire to
+remain at home, responded to this new call because he looked upon
+himself as in a measure answerable for the safety of the people whom he
+had induced to come into Kentucky. At this time the region was known as
+the "dark and bloody ground," so many had been the attacks and conflicts
+between the incoming whites and their Indian foes.
+
+Daniel Boone ordered his spies to start out in different directions, and
+after they had scoured the country for miles around, they were to meet
+at a time and place agreed upon and report what they had discovered and
+form their plans for the future.
+
+Convinced at last that there was no immediate danger of a concerted
+attack by the Indians, the scout returned to Boonesborough and resumed
+his labours.
+
+"Peleg," said Boone one day not long after his return, "we must have
+some salt. I shall take a party to Blue Licks. Will you come?"
+
+"Yes, sir," replied Peleg promptly.
+
+"I shall leave Israel at home to protect the family, but I shall want
+you and Henry to go with me. We ought to have a party of twenty-five or
+thirty men not only to make the salt, but to keep back the Shawnees, who
+are likely to make trouble for us if we are not strong enough to defend
+ourselves."
+
+The following day Daniel Boone, together with Peleg and twenty-six other
+men, departed for the salt springs, or Blue Licks, as they were called
+by the settlers. Neither of the scouts, however, was aware that he was
+there to meet with the most thrilling adventure of his life.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+THE CAPTURE
+
+
+Several days of hard work followed the arrival of the party at the salt
+springs. Fireplaces had to be made, boilers arranged, and the water
+evaporated, leaving its deposit of salt, so necessary in the life of the
+people of Boonesborough.
+
+The process, however, was exceedingly slow, although the men toiled day
+and night because of their desire to return to their homes, and their
+fear of the prowling Indians. On the third day, when the supplies of
+food were low, Daniel Boone suggested that he should for a time leave
+his companions at their task while he secured some game which might be
+prepared for their dinner that night.
+
+Taking his rifle and shaking his head when Peleg offered to accompany
+him, the hunter departed. No one expected him to be gone more than an
+hour. When, however, three hours had elapsed his friends became
+increasingly uneasy. They had relied on their numbers as being a
+sufficient protection against the prowling Indians. The savages were
+known to be near, and occasionally they had been seen skulking from tree
+to tree. Because of this condition, the decision of Daniel Boone to go
+alone had been opposed by his companions, and as his absence continued
+there was increasing anxiety for his safety.
+
+Meanwhile, if Peleg and his companions had known what had befallen the
+scout, they would have had even stronger grounds for their fears.
+
+For some reason Boone was unable to discover any game in the immediate
+proximity of the camp, so he proceeded several miles through the forest
+in his search. When he halted at last and looked about him he concluded
+that he must be at least four miles from the Blue Lick Springs. He was
+aware of the peril which might beset a lonely hunter at such times, and
+as the afternoon sun was steadily declining, decided to retrace his way
+toward camp.
+
+As he turned abruptly he was startled to behold five young Indians
+swiftly approaching.
+
+Without hesitating a moment Boone whirled about and ran. Exerting
+himself to the utmost, he sped through the forest, closely followed by
+his pursuers, who, for some reason which he did not understand, had not
+fired upon him.
+
+Capable as Boone was of a long-continued race, speed could not be his
+main reliance. He was no longer a young man, and his pursuers were in
+the prime of their young manhood.
+
+Glancing behind him, Boone was aware that his enemies were gaining upon
+him. Wheeling suddenly he darted into the brush, then leaped into a
+swiftly running stream and ran with the current for one hundred feet or
+more before he jumped to the bank on the opposite side and once more
+resumed his flight.
+
+Apparently, however, it was impossible for him to shake off his
+pursuers. Doggedly they held to the chase, and the conviction was
+strengthening in Boone's mind that not only were the young warriors
+gaining steadily upon him, but also that they were maintaining a pace
+which would soon be too great for him to keep up. Indeed it was only a
+few minutes later when by an unusual burst of speed his enemies overtook
+and surrounded him.
+
+Boone smiled in spite of his peril when he saw that their first demand
+was for his rifle. It was plain that they knew who he was and were proud
+of their success in capturing the great scout. One of the young Indians
+was able to speak a few words of English, and advancing to Boone he
+extended his hand as a token of friendship and shook hands after the
+manner of the white people.
+
+"Big scout broder," said the young warrior, "No shoot. No kill."
+
+Boone smilingly nodded his head in token of comprehension and without
+demur followed his captors as they led him rapidly through the forest.
+If he was chagrined or cast down his feeling was not betrayed by his
+countenance.
+
+The Indians seldom spoke as they proceeded, and Boone's surprise was
+great when after an advance of an hour he was taken into the midst of a
+group of one hundred and fifty Shawnee warriors.
+
+Here, too, the hunter was recognized, and there were many expressions of
+delight over the capture of the man whom all the Indians of the region
+knew and feared. Boone soon was to learn that they also entertained for
+him a feeling close to affection.
+
+Apparently unmoved by the peril in which he now found himself, Boone
+looked quietly into the faces of the braves and awaited their action.
+
+In a brief time, in the midst of the band, he was conducted back toward
+Blue Lick Springs. Surprised at first by the direction in which they
+were moving, his fears for his friends increased with every passing
+mile. They were outnumbered by the Indians in the approaching party, and
+were without his leadership. How would they be able to defend themselves
+from an attack?
+
+This question was unanswered when the band arrived within a half mile of
+the place they were seeking. Then one of the younger chiefs approached
+Boone and said in his broken English: "Big hunter. No hurt. Broders of
+big hunter no hurt. No shoot."
+
+"Do you mean," inquired Boone, "that my friends will be taken prisoners
+and not shot?"
+
+The Indian laughed, for his pleasure at the apparent success of their
+undertaking was manifest, and he said: "No shoot. No kill white broder."
+
+"Do you mean," asked Boone once more, "that if they do not shoot, you
+will not?"
+
+"No shoot. No hurt," answered the Indian.
+
+"Which means that you will take us all to your village?"
+
+The Indian nodded in assent.
+
+"And if they do not shoot and you make captives of them, do you promise
+that you will not harm them when you take them to your village?"
+
+"No shoot. No hurt," repeated the Indian, nodding his head several times
+to add emphasis to his words. "Big scout go with Owaneeyo--tell
+broders."
+
+"You want me to tell them that you are here, and that if they do not
+shoot then you will not shoot, either, and that you give your word that
+they will not be harmed if they go with you to your village?"
+
+The Indian smiled broadly as he said: "Big scout go with Injun--tell
+broder. Shawnee no shoot. No hurt white broder. White broder shoot,
+Shawnee shoot. No take white broder to village, take white broder
+scalp."
+
+For a few moments Boone silently considered. He well knew that it would
+be impossible for his friends to escape the united attack of the
+Shawnees. Every warrior was armed with a gun, and, as the band
+outnumbered the whites nearly five to one, it would be worse than
+useless for them to attempt to defend themselves. On the other hand, if
+they submitted quietly it might be possible partly to disarm the captors
+of their watchfulness, and as there were so many of the whites some
+opportunity might arise that would provide an avenue for escape. In the
+latter event the chances that more of the men would escape alive were
+much better than they would be if they attempted to defend themselves at
+the present time.
+
+Accordingly, Boone said to the young chief: "I will go with you to tell
+my brothers what the chiefs say if you will come with me unarmed."
+
+For a moment there was an expression of anger or suspicion in the eyes
+of the stalwart young Indian, but it quickly passed, and he said: "Big
+scout no lie. Owaneeyo go without gun. Tell broders what Owaneeyo say to
+scout."
+
+Turning to his companions the young chief gave his command for them to
+encircle the springs where the white men were at work. As soon as his
+orders had been obeyed he stepped up to Boone and bowed low to indicate
+his readiness to accompany the scout.
+
+Without a word both advanced, with Boone moving directly before his
+companion. They soon came to the spot where the whites were engaged in
+their task, all unaware of the peril that was threatening them.
+
+Many curious glances were given the companion of the scout when Boone
+and the chief first appeared. In compliance with Boone's suggestion, the
+men gave up their labours and assembled to hear what the chief had to
+say.
+
+The speech of Owaneeyo was not long, but every word held a meaning which
+strongly impressed the listening settlers.
+
+When the chief ceased speaking Boone himself stepped forward and said:
+"My friends, there is nothing else to do. I am sure you would not credit
+me with being a coward. I am speaking that which I know. There are at
+least one hundred and fifty of the Shawnees here and they are in a
+circle all about us right now. We have no defences behind which to
+fight, and they are able to pick us off without exposing themselves. If
+we run we should find in whatever direction we went that we were going
+straight into their arms. They promise us that if we do not fire upon
+them they will not shoot any of us. The chief also has agreed to see
+that we have good treatment not only here and on our way to their
+village, but also after we arrive there."
+
+There were some murmurs of disapproval, but the word and the example of
+the scout were both so influential that assent was soon given, and the
+chief was told that the white men would make no protest.
+
+At his bidding their rifles were all deposited in one place. A moment
+later he emitted a loud call, and almost as if they had sprung from the
+ground itself the Shawnees came running to the place where the settlers
+were awaiting them.
+
+The entire party soon left the springs, the white prisoners being
+scattered among the warriors in such a manner that no two were able to
+converse. In spite of the fierce glances of some of the braves, there
+was slight fear on Boone's part that the word of Owaneeyo would be
+broken. Cruel the Indian might be in his own way, and treacherous
+according to the standards of the whites, but his promise, once having
+been given, was binding.
+
+The band moved rapidly, stopping only occasionally by night. Not one of
+the prisoners was aware what Indian village was to be their destination,
+although the scout, from his familiarity with the region through which
+they were conducted, was convinced that they were being taken to the
+place called Chillicothe.
+
+His surmise proved to be correct, and on the fifth day the returning
+party with their prisoners arrived at the capital of the Shawnees. Their
+coming was greeted with cries and shouts and many expressions of delight
+by the Indians of Chillicothe. To these, however, the warriors gave
+slight heed, and the prisoners endeavoured to follow their example,
+though it was difficult for some of them completely to assume an air of
+indifference. What the fate of the captives was to be was not to be
+known until the following day.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX
+
+AN OFFER OF RELEASE
+
+
+There had been slight opportunity for Peleg to have any conversation
+with his friend throughout the march.
+
+The Indians, rejoiced over their success in making a prisoner of the
+great scout, nevertheless appeared to be fearful lest the man whom they
+valued so highly should escape. Throughout the journey the prisoners
+were treated with consideration, although when night came and the halts
+were made for rest the white men were compelled to sleep within a circle
+formed by their captors. In this way they were deprived of every
+possibility of escape. When, however, they had arrived at the old
+village of Chillicothe, there were a few minutes when Daniel Boone and
+Peleg and several of their comrades were left together in the wigwam
+into which they had been thrust.
+
+"Peleg," said Daniel Boone in a low voice, "what a mistake our enemies
+have made."
+
+"What do you mean?" inquired Peleg quickly.
+
+"If they had taken us to Boonesborough or to Logan's Fort and there had
+shown us to the settlers they could have demanded almost any price they
+might choose for our ransom."
+
+"Will they not do it yet?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"I hardly think so," replied the scout, shaking his head. "The Indians
+are like children in many ways. When they have been successful, either
+on the warpath or in the chase, they immediately return to their friends
+to celebrate their good fortune with them. They are easily elated, and
+are almost childish in seeking the praise of those whose opinions they
+value. That is the reason why they have come back to the village with
+their twenty-eight prisoners."
+
+"What will happen to us?" inquired Peleg anxiously.
+
+"That no man can say. All that I am sure of is that we must bear
+whatever comes in the spirit of those who know that it is the best thing
+that could happen for every one of us."
+
+"If they burn us at the stake?" inquired Peleg bitterly.
+
+"Yes, even if they burn us at the stake. It will be hard to bear if they
+do that, but I am not without hope that they will adopt some other
+course."
+
+"They may make us run the gauntlet."
+
+"Yes, they may," admitted Boone, "but there is one thing, Peleg, we do
+not have to do."
+
+"What is that, sir?"
+
+"We do not have to bear anything before it comes. All that any man can
+do is to prepare for what may befall him, and then, whatever comes, bear
+it like a man. But he who worries over his troubles before they arrive
+is in no condition to bear them after they come."
+
+"I know that is your way of thinking," said Peleg, "but I have not
+learned it yet."
+
+"That's the correct word, Peleg."
+
+"What word?" inquired the younger scout quickly.
+
+"The word 'learned,' No one has it at the beginning of his life. Even
+Preacher Lythe told us one time that he, like Paul, 'learned' in
+whatsoever state he was, therewith to be content."
+
+"So have you!" said Peleg cordially.
+
+Boone smiled and shook his head as he replied: "I have learned not to
+reveal all my feelings. Beyond that I cannot say. But I am so fully
+convinced that whatever befalls me in this life is part of a great plan,
+that it would be foolish for me to complain or whine. Whatever happens,
+no one shall ever be able to say that he heard a whimper from Daniel
+Boone. Whate'er may come to us, lad, do not let any of these Shawnees
+see that you are in the least cast down."
+
+"I shall do my best."
+
+"I am hopeful," said Boone, "that we shall not be treated severely.
+Chief Owaneeyo gave us his promise when we surrendered that we should be
+treated with kindness both on our journey and after we arrived at the
+Indian village. I believe he spoke truly."
+
+"What I am afraid of," said Peleg, "is that some of these braves will
+not listen to him. I think Owaneeyo will live up to his promise as far
+as he is able."
+
+"There, Peleg, you are borrowing trouble again. What shall I do with
+you?" said Boone gently. "For myself, I shall look for the better side,
+and if the hard times come I shall bear them as I may be able, but I am
+expecting that things will not be as bad as you fear, and I shall keep
+myself ready if Providence reveals any opening for our release. I
+believe firmly that such an opening will come and that we shall yet go
+back to our friends."
+
+"I hope so," said Peleg fervently.
+
+"But whatever comes, Peleg, you must be cheerful, at least in your
+appearance. If the Indians see that you are cast down or afraid, they
+will immediately lose their respect for you, and no one can tell what
+may happen."
+
+In a measure the words of the scout proved to be true. The prisoners
+were treated with kindness and were assigned to various members of the
+tribe in such a manner that they seldom had an opportunity of
+conversing with one another.
+
+Mindful of the directions of the great scout, Peleg did his utmost to
+maintain a cheerful manner. He was confident, too, as the days passed,
+that however heavy his own heart might be the Shawnees were sure that he
+was adapting himself to the life of their tribe and was not unhappy in
+their midst.
+
+A few days after the captives had been brought into the village,
+Owaneeyo came to Boone one morning and said: "Big scout shoot. No shoot
+brave, shoot----"
+
+The word which he wished to use failed the young chief, but laughing
+heartily he conducted the hunter to a place where Daniel Boone saw that
+a target had been erected. He concluded that the plan of the Indian was
+for him to enter into a contest with some of the best shots among the
+Shawnees.
+
+With apparent eagerness he accepted the invitation, and soon many of the
+warriors were assembled, keenly watching the contest between Boone and
+three of the braves.
+
+Daniel Boone wisely was shooting well, but not too well. Two of his
+competitors he easily outdid, but the third, who was Owaneeyo himself,
+and no mean shot, he permitted to beat him. The glee of the Indian when
+the match was ended was so marked and childish that Boone instantly
+decided that if future contests of a similar character were held he knew
+what his own course of action must be.
+
+The following day a second contest was arranged, and at Boone's
+suggestion Peleg also was summoned to share in it.
+
+"Lad," whispered Boone, while he was apparently bending over his rifle
+and looking to its priming, "I am sure if we are careful we shall soon
+be permitted to have our own rifles. Perhaps you can get yours now for
+the match, if you want it, but my advice to you in any event is to let
+the Indians beat you, but not too easily."
+
+The delight of the Indians was even greater than on the preceding day,
+when Owaneeyo and one of his warriors succeeded in making a better
+record than Peleg and were tied with the work which the scout did.
+
+At frequent intervals throughout the autumn these contests were held. In
+every event the white scouts were careful to shoot well, but not too
+well. So manifest was the feeling of affection and confidence among the
+Shawnees, especially for Daniel Boone, that it was not long before the
+white men, one or two at a time, were permitted to accompany the Indians
+whenever they went on the hunting path.
+
+In this manner the winter passed and already there were promises of the
+return of spring. March had come and the snows were beginning to
+disappear from the depths of the forest. It was in this month that
+Owaneeyo came to Daniel Boone one day, saying eagerly: "Broder go with
+Shawnees."
+
+"Go where?" inquired Boone. His anxiety for his family in their faraway
+home by the Kentucky by this time had become almost unbearable. As they
+were unaware of the fate which had befallen him and his companions, and
+yet were fully aware of the cruelty of the Indians and the hatred which
+they had manifested for the settlers at Boonesborough, the scout was
+continually thinking of the anxiety which must possess his own family at
+this time. Not a word had come to them concerning his safety or his
+whereabouts, and there was no means by which such word might be sent. It
+was therefore with a feeling of consternation which it was difficult for
+him to conceal that he heard the statement of the young chief.
+
+"Broder see where go," laughed the Indian, as if he was preserving some
+great pleasure for his friend.
+
+Aware that protests were vain, Boone, with apparent cordiality,
+expressed his desire to accompany the Indians, although he was ignorant
+of the destination of the proposed journey.
+
+To his surprise, the following day when the party set forth from the
+village, he found Peleg and nine other whites in the company.
+
+There was no opportunity, however, for conversation among the captives,
+who, in spite of the freedom which of late had been granted them by the
+Shawnees, now were watched more carefully as the warriors sped through
+the forest.
+
+When the band at last arrived at Detroit, Boone was not surprised at the
+destination. Here several days elapsed before Owaneeyo expressed his
+purpose to return. Just why Boone had been compelled to accompany the
+Indians the scout did not yet understand.
+
+However, on the day before their departure, Governor Hamilton summoned
+Owaneeyo and Daniel Boone to his quarters.
+
+After a few preliminary words the Governor said to the Indian: "I will
+give you L100 for the ransom of this man."
+
+A scowl instantly appeared upon the face of the chief and he turned as
+if about to depart from the presence of the Governor.
+
+Wheeling abruptly about, however, his eyes shining and an expression
+upon his face which showed how deep his feeling was, he said: "No sell
+broder. He my broder." As he spoke, Owaneeyo looked steadily into the
+eyes of the scout, and there was no question in the mind of Daniel
+Boone as to the sincerity of the young chief's feelings.
+
+"But he is a white man," protested the Governor.
+
+"He my broder," declared Owaneeyo, as if no further explanation need be
+made.
+
+"Ask him if he would rather go with you or stay here."
+
+"I would rather go," said Daniel Boone, "than have you pay so much gold
+for my release. The Shawnees have been good to me, and though I am a
+white man, my own friends and country could not deal more kindly with me
+than have Owaneeyo and his tribe."
+
+"No take gold," said Owaneeyo, and strode from the Governor's quarters
+as he spoke.
+
+Boone delayed a few minutes, explaining to the Governor that it would be
+impossible for him to accept such a ransom, saying in his simple way: "I
+am in the hands of a greater Governor than even you, Governor Hamilton,
+and I am sure that the right in the end will be done."
+
+Apparently the commander was not yet fully persuaded, for on the
+following morning, before the Shawnees departed from Detroit, several of
+the Englishmen at the post, deeply touched with sympathy for the scout
+in his captivity, came to Boone himself with offerings of money for his
+release. The sturdy scout smiled, however, and shook his head,
+explaining that it would be impossible for him to accept such benefits
+which would forever be beyond his power to return or repay.
+
+"But you need never return the money to us. It may be our turn to be
+prisoners of the Indians soon, and then some one will have to do for us
+what we now are trying to do for you," protested one of the men.
+
+"I cannot take your gifts," said the hunter shortly. It was manifest
+that all efforts to induce him to change his decision would be
+fruitless.
+
+In a few hours the entire band of Shawnees and their captives set forth
+on their return to Chillicothe. No reference was made by Owaneeyo to the
+offer which had been made by the Governor and his friends, but it was
+plain to Daniel Boone throughout their long march that the chief's
+feeling of affection for him had been greatly strengthened by what had
+occurred at Detroit.
+
+However, when the party at last arrived at the Indian town, even Daniel
+Boone was startled by the proposition which was made by one of the
+Shawnee chiefs.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI
+
+FLIGHT
+
+
+"What do you think, Peleg?" inquired Boone a few days after the return
+from Detroit. "Blackfish wishes to adopt me into his family."
+
+"What!" exclaimed Peleg in amazement.
+
+"Yes. One of his sons was killed not long ago and he wishes me to take
+his place. I do not know how much older my foster-father will be than I
+am. As a rule I think it is wise for a father to be a little older than
+his son," added Boone quizzically. "But it won't make any great
+difference in this case."
+
+"You are not going to allow it, are you?" repeated Peleg.
+
+"I must. Blackfish seems to be very fond of me, and since we came back
+from Detroit, Owaneeyo has spread many reports of my devotion to the
+tribe. He little realizes what restraint I have had to put upon myself,
+and how there are times when it seems to me that I would almost give my
+life for the privilege of looking upon the faces of my family once
+more. It will never do for me to refuse."
+
+Peleg said no more, but in spite of the scout's information he was
+scarcely prepared for the "adoption" which followed in a short time.
+
+In the presence of the family of Blackfish and of some of the leading
+warriors of the tribe, a good deal of hair was pulled from the head of
+Boone, leaving his scalp-lock not unlike that of the Indians. His body
+then was bathed in several waters, the medicine-men who performed the
+act claiming that in this way his white blood was washed away, and he
+became essentially a Shawnee in nature as well as in name. A feast
+followed the formality of adoption, and then Daniel Boone was given a
+name--"The Man with the Long Rifle"--and formally declared to be a son
+of the great Chief Blackfish.
+
+There was a slight change in the treatment which Boone and his
+companions received after this event. The increasing confidence of the
+Indians was manifest, and found its most complete expression when a few
+days afterward they sent Boone, together with two or three white men and
+a score of warriors, to the springs of the Sciota to make salt.
+
+Upon their return from this expedition Boone was alarmed as well as
+astonished by the appearance of the Shawnee braves. Many of them were
+daubed in their war paint, and it was apparent on every side that the
+warriors were preparing for battle.
+
+It was not difficult for the great scout to learn that the object of the
+campaign was to take the little settlement on the Kentucky, where his
+home was located.
+
+Familiar as he was with the Indian customs, Boone was aware that more
+extensive preparations than he had yet seen would be made before the
+warriors started on the warpath. Meanwhile, he was determined to escape
+from the Indian village, and return with his warning to his friends on
+the Kentucky.
+
+In spite of the freedom he enjoyed, he knew that it would be extremely
+difficult for him to escape. At least one hundred and sixty miles of
+forest and wilderness intervened between the village and Boonesborough.
+To obtain supplies of food, or weapons by which he might defend himself
+from beasts and warriors, was well-nigh impossible.
+
+Nevertheless the determined man decided to try to escape from the
+Shawnees at the first favourable opportunity. He was fully aware that he
+must not do anything to arouse the suspicions of the tribe. Yet the time
+of the departure of the warriors could not be far distant.
+
+Meanwhile, he talked over these matters in the occasional interviews he
+was permitted to have with Peleg. Almost all the younger scout knew,
+however, was that his friend had determined, when the proper time
+arrived, to flee from the village and warn the settlers of their peril.
+It was also understood that, after the departure of the scout, if Peleg
+should see the least opportunity, he, too, would attempt to leave the
+Indian village.
+
+When June came the great scout saw that the men were preparing for a
+march within a few days. Whatever he was to do must be done quickly. No
+opportunity had been granted for a further word with his young friend,
+when early one morning Boone fled from Chillicothe.
+
+A small piece of jerked venison was all the food he had been able to
+take with him on his long journey. He was without rifle or knife and
+before him stretched a pathless forest through which he must flee one
+hundred and sixty miles before he again would be among his friends! No
+one knew better than Boone himself that it was to be a race for life,
+for pursuit on the morrow was as certain as the rising of the sun.
+
+Nevertheless with the same quiet courage which had ever been the great
+scout's strong reliance, he struck out for the Ohio River. Through the
+deep forests, over the high crags and rocks, across the creeks and
+following the courses of the river, by day and by night, he forced his
+tireless way.
+
+Success crowned his efforts at last, and he gained the shores of the
+Ohio. But when he arrived upon the bank he found the river full and at
+least a mile in width.
+
+Unable to swim, for a time the scout was uncertain what his next move
+should be. Fortunately, he found, on the bank near the place where he
+was standing, an old canoe which had been driven against the shore.
+Although the little craft was untrustworthy, one end having been badly
+broken, the intrepid man succeeded in paddling his way in it to the
+opposite bank.
+
+Four days and four nights the scout had been running with only an
+occasional brief respite. Throughout that time he had eaten but one
+meal. His strength was failing, but his hope was strong, for Daniel
+Boone was aware now that he was near to his home. At last the quaint
+fort was seen before him and the end of the journey had been gained.
+
+The return of the scout was almost like that of one who had come back
+from the dead. Every man in the little settlement had believed that
+Daniel Boone was to be seen no more. No tidings had come from faraway
+Chillicothe, and no one in Boonesborough had any means of knowing what
+had befallen the party in their labours at Blue Licks.
+
+"Where is my wife? Where are my children?" demanded Boone as soon as he
+entered the fort.
+
+"Gone," answered Sam Oliver, who at the time was making one of his
+occasional visits at the settlement.
+
+"'Gone!'" repeated Boone in astonishment. "'Gone!' Where?"
+
+"Your wife and all your children except Jemima have gone back to North
+Carolina. They all believed you to be dead and your wife felt that she
+could no longer remain here. Jemima is the only one that stayed."
+
+It was not long before the scout found his intrepid daughter, who in
+spite of the departure of the other members of the family had been
+strong in her conviction that either her father would return or some
+definite word concerning his fate would be received. For that reason she
+had remained in the fort.
+
+Not a moment was to be lost. Weary, indeed almost exhausted by his long
+flight, as soon as food and a brief rest had been obtained Boone at once
+helped the little garrison to work day and night upon their
+fortifications. New gates were made and double bastions were speedily
+completed. The horses and cattle were driven in from the fields, and
+powder and balls prepared. Before ten days had elapsed the fort was in
+readiness for the coming of the enemy.
+
+Early in the morning of the final day, while Daniel Boone was himself
+on guard, he discovered a man approaching from the forest. Keenly
+watching the indistinct figure and prepared for instant action, although
+as yet he had not summoned any of his companions, Boone soon was aware
+that the returning man was none other than his friend Peleg.
+
+The young scout was admitted by Boone, and in response to his queries he
+was soon describing what had befallen him.
+
+In the midst of the excitement which had followed the escape of Boone,
+Peleg found the opportunity for which he himself had been waiting, and
+he, too, fled from the little village. In some ways, however, he had
+been more successful than his friend, inasmuch as he had been able to
+secure both Singing Susan and some ammunition, together with a
+hunting-knife.
+
+"Have they followed you, lad?" inquired Boone eagerly.
+
+"I do not know. They were filled with the plan of attacking the fort and
+I do not know whether anything has been done to turn them aside from it.
+I have had many trials," continued the young scout. "If I had not found
+the circles of stones which you left I could not have followed your
+trail. I do not know how you crossed the Ohio."
+
+"I found an old canoe," explained Boone.
+
+"That makes everything plain, then," laughed Peleg, "for I used the same
+canoe. Some one must have brought it back or it had floated down stream;
+at any rate it saved me from getting Singing Susan wet. The first place
+I found your stones was about two miles from the river, at the spring
+where there is a little waterfall. I can't tell you what it meant to me,
+for I was not sure of my way. I tried to think of everything you had
+told me about the stars, the course of the streams, and the changes in
+the trees, and then every little while I climbed to the top of a hill
+when I came near one and got my bearings from there."
+
+"You are here, lad," said Boone. "You were led as I was. That is enough.
+Now tell me about the Shawnees. Are they coming?"
+
+"I think so, but the attack will be delayed several weeks."
+
+"Why is that?"
+
+"Because you escaped. They tried their best to overtake you, but when
+Owaneeyo and some of the other warriors of the tribe came back and said
+they had not found you, then Blackfish declared that you would come to
+the fort here to warn the settlers. They then decided, I think, to put
+off their march about three weeks."
+
+Boone nodded his head several times as if the explanation Peleg had
+given was one that commended itself to his judgment. There was no
+alteration, however, in the plans of the scout for strengthening the
+defences of the little fort. By this time the alarm had spread
+throughout the little settlement and every man was alert.
+
+The delay in the coming of the Shawnees, however, continued so long that
+Boone concluded that they might have become discouraged by the report of
+their spies concerning the condition of the fort.
+
+Prowling Indians had been seen frequently in the vicinity of
+Boonesborough after the arrival of Peleg, and the scout now decided that
+it would be a good plan for him to turn the tables and with a party
+invade the country of the Shawnees themselves.
+
+Choosing nineteen men from the little garrison, he led them swiftly and
+silently as far as Paint Creek on the Sciota. He had come within four
+miles of the little Indian village, when unexpectedly the band met a
+party of thirty warriors, who were marching to join the expedition
+against Boonesborough.
+
+There was no opportunity for retreat or deliberation. Instantly Boone
+called upon his companions to follow his example and fired upon the
+astonished warriors.
+
+The Shawnees without attempting to respond, and doubtless unaware of
+the numbers of their enemies, immediately turned and fled.
+
+The scout now halted his forces and sent two spies to discover what was
+taking place in the village. The men returned with the information that
+it had been abandoned.
+
+As soon as this information had been received, Boone summoned his
+followers and said to them: "I am convinced from the reports of our
+friends that a great army of the Indians is now marching against
+Boonesborough. Our friends are in almost as great danger as are we.
+There is nothing left for us except to return and make the best possible
+time in our march."
+
+Every one assented to the suggestion and the return was begun, the men
+marching day and night, hoping to elude the Indians, who, the scout now
+believed, were between them and Boonesborough.
+
+It was not long before the returning band discovered the trail of the
+advancing warriors. Thereupon the leader decided to make a detour and
+avoid his enemies. All unknown to the Indians, on the sixth day of the
+returning march the intrepid band passed the red men, and on the seventh
+arrived safely at Boonesborough.
+
+The following day five hundred hideously painted, thoroughly armed
+Indians appeared at the fort.
+
+The alarm of the little garrison would have been still greater had they
+known that Duquesne, for whom Fort Pitt was first named, was in command
+of the entire band. Even Blackfish for the time had resigned his
+position as leader, preferring to have the skilful Frenchman assume the
+command in the attack on the fort. Nor was Captain Duquesne alone, for
+twelve of his countrymen also were with him to assist in leading the
+savages in their attack.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII
+
+THE COMING OF BLACKFISH
+
+
+"Peleg," said Daniel Boone after the appearance of the enemy in front of
+the fort, "I understand now why it was that I was so long a prisoner of
+the Shawnees."
+
+Peleg expressed his question without replying in words and the hunter
+continued: "If I had not been a captive I never should have known how
+strong they are nor what their plans might be. And I think, too, that I
+never should have known what the relation is between the Shawnees and
+the French."
+
+"Do you think we can hold this place?" inquired Peleg anxiously.
+
+"We shall do our best, lad, and the result is not altogether in our
+hands. I have sent messengers all through the settlements asking for
+reinforcements."
+
+The conversation was interrupted by the appearance of a messenger from
+the attacking army--a white man. Before he arrived at the stockade he
+was hailed by Daniel Boone, who, with Peleg, was standing on one of the
+bastions.
+
+After a few preliminary words the man said: "I am instructed by Captain
+Duquesne to state to you that he has received orders from Governor
+Hamilton at Detroit to take this fort, but to save the lives of the
+people, if it is possible so to do."
+
+Boone gazed down into the face of the speaker, but did not reply.
+
+"I am further instructed by Captain Duquesne," resumed the messenger,
+"to ask you to send nine men from the fort to arrange for a treaty. You
+can meet the men from our army wherever you desire."
+
+"I shall report to you as soon as I have consulted my friends," said
+Daniel Boone as he and his companion retired to the fort.
+
+When the defenders were assembled Sam Oliver declared hotly: "I should
+never send nine men out to meet the redskins! It is one of their tricks,
+and not one of the nine will ever come back."
+
+"I do not feel that way about it," said Boone. "I suspect that it may be
+a trick, as you suggest, but it may help us to put off the beginning of
+the fight until some of the other settlers for whom we have sent can
+come to our aid. I favour sending a delegation of nine men to meet a
+delegation from the Indians, but the place must be within fire from the
+fort. I do not know how you feel, but for myself I am willing to say
+that we shall never surrender this place while there is one man left
+alive to defend it."
+
+"That's the way we all feel," said Sam Oliver, who still opposed the
+proposed meeting.
+
+Daniel Boone returned to the bastions and announced to the messenger
+that nine men would meet a party from the Indians in accordance with the
+proposition which had been made for the conference.
+
+Selecting eight of his followers, the scout led the way to the appointed
+place of meeting, which was sixty yards from the fort. There the little
+band met Captain Duquesne and eighteen or twenty Indians. The red
+warriors were silent, but their flashing eyes impressed the scout more
+than any words could have done.
+
+"What we propose," began Captain Duquesne, "is that every man in the
+fort shall swear allegiance to King George the Third and submit to our
+rule. If this can be done we can assure you that you may live in peace
+and retain all your property."
+
+Boone, who was the spokesman of the settlers, arose to reply. He knew
+little of the great struggle which at that time was going on for the
+independence of the colonies. His life on the border was too remote from
+the battlefields of the north and east, and only occasional rumours of
+the long contest came to the pioneers.
+
+Boone's speech, conditionally agreeing to Duquesne's proposal, was
+followed by one from Blackfish. The old chief, looking only once upon
+his adopted son, and by the gleam in his eyes expressing his hatred,
+asserted that when two great armies entered into a treaty it was
+customary for the men to shake hands, and in doing so for two Indians to
+shake the hands of each white man. There were smiles among the men from
+the fort as they heard the smooth words of the crafty old chief, but as
+all the warriors and white men were unarmed they were not unduly
+alarmed.
+
+At that moment a gun was fired as a signal from the forest, and the
+Indian members of the council, advancing with open hands, grasped the
+hands of the white men. Instantly the warriors endeavoured to drag their
+white enemies toward the woods where many of the Shawnees were
+concealed. A desperate conflict followed, and the Indians from the main
+body begun to rush quickly toward the spot.
+
+At the same time the watching men at the fort began to pour a fire upon
+the approaching enemy, and in a few minutes, under stress of the
+excitement, the scout and his friends tore themselves from the grasp of
+the Indians and fled back to the fort. The heavy gate was closed and
+bolted as soon as they were behind the defences. Fortunately only one
+man had been wounded by the fire of the savages.
+
+Captain Duquesne and Blackfish now ordered an attack upon the fort. As
+the place was almost surrounded by woods except on the side toward the
+river, the attacking party was well protected. The advance was made from
+three sides at once.
+
+Amid the wild yells of the Indians a volley of bullets was poured into
+the fort, and as soon as the guns were discharged they were again loaded
+and a steady fire maintained.
+
+The defenders of the fort, however, were not wasting their scanty
+ammunition. Every man from his porthole, or the place which he was
+occupying on the bastions, was selecting his own special mark and every
+shot was telling in the work of death. The fight continued throughout
+the day, and when night fell, contrary to their custom, the Indians
+still maintained their attack.
+
+Another day and another night followed, without any break in the
+struggle. Daniel Boone was aware that the Indians were now being guided
+by Captain Duquesne and were not following their usual custom of
+abandoning an attack when darkness fell. Meanwhile Boone was moving from
+place to place encouraging his men and making sure that all things were
+well.
+
+Jemima Boone, by the direction of her father, was firing through one of
+the portholes. In the second day of the fight a negro, who had fled from
+the fort, climbed into a tree near by, fired at the girl and wounded
+her.
+
+Daniel Boone, who at the moment was standing near his daughter,
+instantly peered through the porthole, discovered the deserter, and the
+report of his rifle was followed by the fall of the man from the tree in
+which he had hidden.
+
+Day followed day and still the attack was maintained. The Indians were
+unable to force an entrance into the place, but they were unwilling to
+abandon the attack.
+
+One afternoon Peleg came to Daniel Boone and, greatly excited, said:
+"Come with me!"
+
+Leading the way to the side of the fort which faced the river, he called
+the attention of the scout to the colour of the water.
+
+"What does that mean?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"It means that the varmints are trying to dig a trench from the bank of
+the river to the fort," said Boone. "The earth they have thrown out has
+coloured the water. If they once get inside the fort they may compel us
+to surrender."
+
+"What can we do?" inquired Peleg. "We must do something!"
+
+"Come, I will show you," replied Boone quietly.
+
+Selecting several men to aid Peleg in his task, he soon arranged for a
+counter trench to be dug which would cross that which the Indians were
+digging. Nor was it long before the discovery of the work of the
+defenders caused the red men to abandon their scheme.
+
+More furiously than before, the siege was continued. A new device was
+tried by the Indians on the fifth day.
+
+Arrows with burning brands attached to them were shot in such a manner
+that they struck the roofs of the houses within the fort. It was
+impossible for any one to prevent this work.
+
+At last a cry was raised that the fort itself was on fire. The cry,
+terrifying as it was, instantly brought Henry to the front, who said
+calmly: "I put out flame."
+
+For a moment every gun and voice within the fort was silent while the
+anxious inmates watched Henry as he made his way to the roof where the
+fire already was kindled. A wild yell from the Indians greeted the
+appearance of the young man and a shower of bullets fell all about him.
+
+Undismayed by his peril, Henry succeeded in making his way to the
+blazing arrow, flung it to the ground, and succeeded in putting out the
+fire. As he turned to make his way back to his friends another shower of
+bullets fell about him, and a groan escaped the watching defenders when
+they saw the young hero suddenly lose his grasp upon the roof, and
+after a brief struggle roll to the ground outside the walls.
+
+The numbers of those who had fallen within the fort had not been great,
+protected as they were by its wall and also by their own continued
+vigilance. The ranks of the assailants, however, steadily had been
+thinned, and on the ninth day, without any warning to the defenders, the
+attacking Shawnees withdrew from the place.
+
+Peleg was engaged in his duties in the fort on the morning following the
+siege when the scout approached him and, in response to the enthusiastic
+words of the boy, smiled as he said: "Well, we did pretty well, lad. We
+lost only two and had only four wounded."
+
+"And Henry was one of the killed," suggested Peleg.
+
+"I do not know. He has not been found," replied Boone. "If one had to
+die I think Henry was the best one to go." In response to a look of
+inquiry from the boy, the scout continued: "He had no family; his white
+blood prevented him from being entirely at home among the Indians, while
+his Indian bringing-up would have prevented him forever from feeling
+that he was one of us. There were times when I was afraid for the life
+of Sam Oliver, so bitter was Henry's hatred of him."
+
+"Do you know how many of the Indians were killed?"
+
+"It is reported that thirty-seven were killed and a great many wounded.
+It is difficult to say just what the losses were, because the Indians
+always carry away their dead and wounded."
+
+"Do you think they will come back again?"
+
+The scout shook his head as he said: "The country hereabouts is
+increasing so rapidly in its population, and there are so many other
+stations now between Boonesborough and the Ohio, that I hardly think
+they will attack us again. Certainly not in the near future."
+
+"How is Jemima this morning?" asked Peleg.
+
+"She will be all right in a few days," replied Boone. "It was only a
+flesh wound in the shoulder that she received."
+
+"What are you planning to do next?"
+
+"If you agree," replied Daniel Boone, "I shall leave you in charge of my
+farm and start as soon as I can for North Carolina, to bring back my
+family."
+
+It was not long before the scout set forth alone on his journey to the
+Yadkin, whither his wife had gone with all her children except Jemima,
+to find a refuge in her father's house, after she had become convinced
+that Daniel Boone had been killed by the Indians.
+
+The journey was successfully made and the coming of Boone was to his
+wife almost like the return of one from the dead. There were some
+matters on the Yadkin, however, which prevented their immediate
+departure, and it was not until several weeks had elapsed that the scout
+with his family returned to Boonesborough.
+
+Meanwhile Peleg had looked carefully after the farm which his friend
+owned, and he received warm words of praise for his efforts when Boone
+came back.
+
+As soon as the scout saw that his family once more was established in
+the settlement, and the attacks of the Indians, for a time at least, had
+ceased, with his brother, who also now had joined the settlers, he once
+more started for Blue Licks to make salt, of which the settlers and
+their cattle were greatly in need.
+
+"Are you not afraid to go to the Blue Licks?" inquired his brother when
+Boone was ready to set forth on his expedition.
+
+"Why should I be?" inquired Boone.
+
+"It was there that you were taken by the Indians."
+
+[Illustration: "The scout, with his family, returned to Boonesborough"]
+
+"They say," replied the scout with a smile, "that lightning never
+strikes twice in the same place. I am not afraid. I think the Shawnees
+have been taught a good lesson. Colonel Bowman and his one hundred and
+sixty men, though he was not very successful in his attack upon old
+Chillicothe, nevertheless showed the Indians that we were not unmindful
+of their plans. And Colonel Harrod at all events, when he made his
+attack with the horsemen, certainly scattered the Indians on every side.
+I think they will remember both men, although I wish that we might have
+inflicted greater damage upon their village. The report is that only two
+scalps were taken, but that may mean very little. The attacks which
+Colonel Bird, with his five hundred Indians and Canadians, made upon
+Riddle's Station and the little station upon the Licking River, seem to
+me to show that the Indians are not ready to give up yet."
+
+Boone's assurance overcame the objections of his brother and persuaded
+him that there was no special danger attending their labours at Blue
+Licks.
+
+The confidence of the scout seemed warranted when several days had
+passed, the necessary salt had been made, and the two men were preparing
+to return to the fort. Not an Indian had been seen, nor had there been
+any signs of their presence.
+
+Hardly had the two men, however, set forth on their return when, without
+warning, they were attacked by a band of Indians. Boone's brother was
+killed and scalped. But the scout instantly darted into the thickest
+part of the forest. Owing to his superior knowledge of the country he
+was not overtaken at once; and running steadily and as swiftly as he was
+able, he at last sought refuge in a ravine, followed by a dog which the
+Indians were using to trail him. Boone waited quietly until the savage
+animal approached and then calmly shot it. Aware that the report of his
+rifle would reveal his presence to his enemies, the intrepid man, as the
+woods about him were dense and darkness was approaching, resolutely made
+his way into the forest again and resumed his flight toward
+Boonesborough.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII
+
+FOUR WARRIORS AND MORE
+
+
+With his usual coolness and fortitude, the great scout continued on his
+way, and without further trouble arrived at the fort.
+
+"Peleg," he said the following day, when the two were labouring in the
+field together, "Blue Licks somehow seems to be destined to be a place
+of trouble and sorrow for me. Only a few days ago my brother was calling
+my attention to that fact and now his death has confirmed his words. It
+grieves me that I could not even bring away his body. That, however, is
+a part of the fortune of pioneers, and as no man ever yet has heard me
+whine, I do not intend to begin now. But my brother's death is a source
+of very heavy sorrow to me."
+
+"Do you think the Indians are planning another attack?"
+
+"Not right away. I suspect that they are trying to attack or capture me.
+Their anger against the settlement doubtless is as keen as ever, but
+they look upon me as one who has deserted their tribe. Some day they
+will find me. But I have one consolation, and that is that they will
+not find me unprepared."
+
+The words of the scout concerning the further attacks by the Indians
+were confirmed during the year that followed. The little settlement at
+Boonesborough steadily increased in numbers and prosperity. For a time,
+free from the attacks of the Indians, the families toiled in their
+fields. More extensive clearings were made and in the marvellously
+fertile soil the crops were bountiful. There were many new homes
+established in the community, too, for among the continually arriving
+settlers were many young women.
+
+In the quiet labours on his clearing Boone found peace and comfort such
+as he seldom had enjoyed. Peleg, who had secured some land adjoining the
+farm of his friend, worked with the scout and Israel, and as they
+assisted one another both places steadily improved.
+
+The feeling of Boone, however, that he was still an object of hatred
+among the Shawnees was confirmed repeatedly. His most critical
+experience came one day when, all unknown to the scout, four athletic
+Shawnees were detailed by Blackfish to approach the settlement without
+arousing any suspicions of their presence, watch the movements of the
+scout, and either bring him back to the tribe or bring his scalp.
+
+On his farm the scout had erected, not far from his cabin, a little
+house in which he dried the tobacco he cultivated. The little building
+stood in the midst of his tobacco patch. Within the house there were
+three tiers of timber from which the tobacco leaves were hanging to dry.
+
+Boone and Peleg were busily engaged here one autumn day, almost
+unmindful of peril, the younger scout believing that the fears of his
+friend were without foundation.
+
+"The tobacco on this lower tier," said Boone after he had made a careful
+investigation, "seems to be entirely dry."
+
+"Then we had better change the sticks to the tier above," responded
+Peleg. "That will leave plenty of room for the leaves we have not
+brought in as yet."
+
+"That's a good suggestion," answered Boone, and together the two scouts
+began to transfer the sticks from the lower to the second tier.
+
+Peleg departed from the building to bring in more of the tobacco leaves
+and left Boone standing on the poles that separated the upper tiers.
+
+Suddenly as the scout glanced below him he saw four Shawnee warriors
+stealthily enter through the door and laugh as they looked up to him.
+
+"You no get away some more," said one of them whom Boone recognized as
+Owaneeyo, "We take you to Chillicothe this time. You no cheat us some
+more."
+
+Every one of the savages was armed and looking up into Boone's face,
+while the direction in which the guns were aimed added force to this
+declaration.
+
+Not for a moment losing his self-control, and aware that he was in the
+greatest peril of his life, Boone's careful preparation now showed its
+value. "Ah!" said he quietly. "Glad to see you, my friends. How have you
+been this long time?"
+
+"Been heap mad," said Owaneeyo, frowning in a manner which betrayed his
+rising anger. "You come down."
+
+"I shall be very glad to go with you, my friends. Tell me, how is
+Blackfish these days?"
+
+"You come down!" repeated Owaneeyo.
+
+"I just told you," said Boone, "that I shall be glad to come down. I
+prefer, however, to have you wait until I finish with my tobacco." In
+the hunter's heart there was hope that Peleg would discover his
+predicament and bring him aid before he should be seized by the angry
+warriors.
+
+"Make yourselves comfortable," continued Boone pleasantly. "You see I
+cannot get down from here and I cannot get away from you." The scout
+paused a moment and glanced at his would-be captors.
+
+"You like tobacco?" he resumed. "When I have this cured I will give
+some of it to you and we will smoke together."
+
+The Indians were becoming impatient, and plainly were unaware of what
+the scout was doing. Continuing his conversation and making more
+inquiries concerning his friends in the Indian town, he did his utmost
+to hold the attention of his dangerous visitors while he gathered
+together some armfuls of tobacco.
+
+Carefully arranging the bundles of the dry tobacco between the poles and
+standing where he was able to look directly down into the faces of his
+enemies, Boone suddenly cut the strings by which the sticks of tobacco
+were held. At the same moment, with his arms full of the dried leaves,
+he leaped down upon the Indians, and instantly filled their mouths and
+eyes with dry tobacco dust. The Shawnees were blinded and well-nigh
+suffocated in the little tobacco house. There were sneezes and shouts
+and cries from the startled warriors, who now were unable to see even
+the direction in which the door was located.
+
+Darting from the little house, the scout made his escape and ran swiftly
+to his cabin. In a moment he seized his trusty rifle, but as he returned
+to the tobacco house he saw the Indians running blindly and staggering
+toward the woods.
+
+Boone restrained his impulse to fire upon the fleeing warriors, and
+called to Peleg and Israel, who with several of the younger members of
+the settlement were now hurriedly approaching, all of them prepared to
+pursue the departing Shawnees.
+
+"Do not go after them!" called Boone.
+
+Reluctantly the young men halted, and Peleg said: "Why do you not want
+us to chase them? We might have had every one of them."
+
+"If the Shawnees do not go on the warpath, why should we?"
+
+"They were on the warpath for you!" said Israel. "It was lucky you got
+away."
+
+Boone laughed silently as he recalled the appearance of the Indians when
+he had thrown the tobacco dust into their faces. "I am sure," he said,
+"the Shawnees will remember what I said to them and how they were
+treated by me. Perhaps it will do more good than it will to shoot them."
+
+The months passed and the peace of the settlement remained unbroken. Few
+even suspected the terrible struggle which was awaiting them.
+
+The game in the forest was becoming somewhat scarce. The settlers,
+increasing steadily in numbers, now were scattered from the Kentucky
+River to the Ohio. It was commonly believed that the Indians had finally
+accepted the coming of the whites as inevitable, and no longer were
+ready to dispute their occupation of the western forests.
+
+The one marked exception was Daniel Boone. To all the assertions of his
+friends he replied by expressing his own conviction that the red men
+were simply biding their time. No one was more familiar with the Indian
+ways and thoughts than the scout and he was positive that they had not
+forgotten the injuries which they had sustained at the hands of the
+whites. Sooner or later they would strive to obtain vengeance and at the
+same time unite in a supreme endeavour to drive the hated people from
+the lands which they believed to be their own.
+
+"I am more convinced than ever that trouble is brewing," said Boone one
+day to Peleg and Israel, who now were his frequent companions. "I know
+Simon Girty, and a worse man never lived. He is a renegade and a
+traitor. He has given up living among the whites, and in everything but
+colour and in their better qualities he has become an Indian. I am sure
+that we shall hear from him before many months have passed."
+
+Little the great scout dreamed that even while he was expressing his
+opinion to the boys, runners at that very time had been sent by Simon
+Girty to many of the northwestern tribes, urging them all to lay aside
+the jealousy they felt for one another and unite in one common cause
+against the white invaders.
+
+The following spring the storm burst. As the pattering raindrops
+sometimes fall at the beginning of a downpour, so among the scattered
+settlements a renewal of attacks by prowling bands of Indians indicated
+what was to follow.
+
+One day when Daniel Boone returned to his home he was unusually cast
+down. He explained that he had just learned of an attack which a party
+of twenty-five Wyandottes had made upon Estill's Station. The warriors
+had stolen into a little cabin which was apart from the others in the
+settlement. They had seized the occupants--a woman and her two
+daughters--and tomahawked and scalped all three. The bodies were still
+warm when they were discovered upon the floor of the cabin by
+neighbours. The scout told what followed.
+
+"Immediately Captain Estill collected a band of twenty-five daring men
+and followed the Indians more swiftly than I followed the band which
+took Jemima prisoner. The Wyandottes at first seemed to be frightened
+and began to run, but at last they made a stand on one side of a creek,
+while the whites were on the other. They were not more than fifty yards
+apart and every man was sheltered behind a tree or rock and firing at
+any enemy that could be seen. Captain Estill had lost one third of his
+men and had shot about as many of the Indians, but the braves were still
+returning his fire, and showed no signs of leaving. He thought if he
+should keep up that kind of a fight, every one at last would be killed,
+unless perhaps it should be the very last white or Indian.
+
+"Mindful of this, Captain Estill sent out a party of six men, led by
+Lieutenant Miller, telling them to creep around and attack the Indians
+on their flank. But the chief was as shrewd as the captain, and as soon
+as he saw that the fire of the whites was slowing up in front of him, he
+instantly made a stronger attack upon the men that were left. Jumping
+into the water, they fell upon the captain and his men, driving them
+before them and killing a good many. Those who escaped finally got back
+to the Station, and you can readily see how alarmed the people are."
+
+"What happened to Captain Estill?" inquired Israel, greatly shocked by
+the story of his father.
+
+"He and eight more of his men were killed, and, besides, four were
+wounded."
+
+"That's more than half that went out, isn't it?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"Yes," answered Daniel Boone.
+
+The report of the misfortune which had overtaken the men of Estill's
+Station was speedily succeeded by another report no less alarming. A
+band of Indians had crept up to Hoy's Station and there had stolen two
+little boys.
+
+Quickly Captain Holder gathered a band of seventeen angry men and
+started in pursuit of the Indians. It was not long before he overtook
+them, but he and his men were driven back after more than half the party
+had fallen.
+
+The alarm now became widespread. The success which had attended the
+plans of the Indians encouraged them to continue their efforts.
+Sometimes singly, frequently in small parties, they crept close to the
+settlements and by their stealthy attacks kept the people in continual
+alarm.
+
+There was no one now to dispute the great scout's prophecy that more
+serious trouble was to come. Within a few weeks an army of Indians, made
+up of bands from many of the northwestern tribes and numbering nearly
+six hundred warriors, began its march from Chillicothe.
+
+The renegade Girty was in command. The little army moved with great
+caution, and their approach was unsuspected by the whites. One August
+night they arrived at Bryant's Station, surrounded it, and prepared to
+dash upon the unsuspecting people the moment the gates should be opened
+the following morning.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV
+
+A DECOY AND AN ATTACK
+
+
+The fort at Bryant's Station was for the protection of forty cabins
+placed in parallel lines upon a little hill on the bank of the Elkhorn
+River.
+
+All through the night the garrison had been preparing as soon as
+daylight came to depart from the fort to carry aid to the men at Hoy's
+Station. A messenger had brought word to Bryant's Station of the defeat
+which almost had overwhelmed Holder and his men. If Girty's band of six
+hundred Indians had arrived a few hours later they would have found in
+the fort only a few women and children, besides a small number of old
+men, unable to fight.
+
+Afterward it was learned that the Indians were listening all through the
+night to the sounds of the activities within the fort, and when they saw
+the lights gleaming from the blockhouse and the cabins they must have
+suspected that news of their coming already had been received by the
+inmates.
+
+However, they made no attempt to steal upon the fort in the darkness,
+although Girty and the Indian chiefs were planning and arranging their
+attack for the following day.
+
+For some strange reason many of the forts on the border had been built
+at a considerable distance from the springs upon which the people
+depended for their water. The fort at Bryant's Station was no exception.
+
+By Girty's direction many of the Indians placed themselves in hiding,
+within shot of the spring. One hundred selected warriors also were
+stationed at a distance from the spring. The latter were ordered to open
+a sharp fire and make their presence known to the garrison. Doubtless
+the hope of the red men was that the actions of this party would draw
+the white defenders from their place of safety.
+
+If their plan succeeded Girty then expected that the other band of
+warriors instantly would rush upon the opposite gate of the fort and hew
+it down with their tomahawks while the men were chasing the little decoy
+force. In this manner all the leaders of the attacking force expected to
+make their way into the little cabins within the stockade.
+
+When daybreak came the garrison was almost ready to open the gates and
+march to the assistance of their friends at Hoy's Station.
+
+Suddenly there was a furious and continued discharge of rifles
+accompanied by such hideous yells and screams and whoops that they
+terrified not only the women and children of Bryant's Station, but
+alarmed even the men, accustomed though they were to the methods of
+Indian warfare.
+
+Running to the stockade and peering out through the loopholes, the
+startled white men saw before them a small band of Indians. These
+warriors were plainly exposed, yelling and making the most insulting and
+furious gestures toward the fort.
+
+All this was so different from their usual custom that some of the older
+men of the fort warned their comrades that a trick of some kind was
+being played upon them.
+
+"It is a decoy party," said one of the men positively. "They will draw
+you out of the fort and before you know it you will find yourselves
+surrounded by more than a hundred of those howling savages."
+
+"That is right" said another. "My suggestion is that we all make for the
+other side of the fort. I believe the Indians are trying to draw us out
+on this side and then attack us on the other."
+
+The experiences which many already had had with the Indians of the
+border confirmed the impression made by the words of the last speaker.
+Even the younger men, who were eager to sally forth and attack the young
+warriors that were making such a commotion, were held back by the
+suggestion.
+
+"We cannot protect ourselves very long in the fort," said one of the men
+when the defenders had been divided into two bands.
+
+"Why not?" inquired another.
+
+"Because we have no water. There is not enough water in the fort to last
+us thirty hours."
+
+"What can we do?" inquired one of the older men after a tense silence
+had followed the statement of the speaker. "If we go down to the spring
+the Indians will pick us off, every one."
+
+"Send the women," suggested another. "They go to the spring every
+morning. The Indians may not think we have any suspicion of what they
+are planning to do. If the women and girls go to the spring for water
+just as they usually do the Indians will not fire at them. They will
+want to save all their bullets for their attack on this side when our
+men have been drawn out to chase the savages who are yelling now on the
+other side."
+
+"It seems cowardly," said another man "to ask the women to go down to
+the spring when we know it would be sure death for us to go."
+
+"It will not be sure death for the women, and my opinion is that not one
+of them will be harmed," said the first speaker positively. "At all
+events we can ask them to go and let them say whether they will or not."
+
+When the proposition was made to the women there were some who made
+replies not unlike those which their male defenders had suggested in the
+council. Some of them said: "If the men were afraid that they might be
+shot, why should they ask the women to go in their place?" Then it was
+explained just why the request was made. Immediately some of the bolder
+women and girls, taking their buckets, opened the gates and started
+toward the spring, which was only a short distance from the fort.
+
+Frightened, the women undoubtedly were, and with good reason. But with
+unbroken lines they continued on their way to the spring. One by one
+they knelt and filled their buckets and then joined the line which was
+returning to the fort.
+
+When the matrons and maids had arrived within a few yards of the open
+gate their terror became so overpowering that they all began to run for
+the shelter. Many a dusky face had been seen on the borders of the
+forest, but not a shot was fired at the bold girls and the women of
+Bryant's Station when they brought the water from the spring to the
+inmates of the fort.
+
+"Now is our time," said one of the men, after the return of the women.
+"We ought to do two things: First we must get some one out of the fort
+to carry word to Boone of the trouble we are having."
+
+"And second?" inquired one of the company.
+
+"We must send out some of the younger men to attack that decoy party."
+
+"That's right," suggested one of the young men eagerly. "We must go out
+and make all the noise we can. Then all the other men here in the fort
+can be ready for Girty when he comes, and I know he will come."
+
+"I will carry the message to Boone," volunteered one of the younger men
+named Bell. It was arranged that he should depart with the young men who
+were to attack the decoy party, and then instead of returning to the
+fort he should make a dash into the forest and try to make his way to
+Boonesborough as speedily as possible.
+
+The men in the fort were all serious when they saw thirteen of their
+younger companions depart from the fort through the gate which opened
+toward the place where the decoy party had been seen.
+
+"Do not chase the varmints too far," charged one of the watching men.
+
+No response was given to the warning, and as soon as the hardy, young
+settlers had departed the gate was closed and the remaining men, cocking
+their guns, took their positions to await the result of the expected
+attack as soon as it should be unmasked.
+
+It was not long before the report of rifles was heard from the distant
+road, and gradually the sound indicated that the men were being decoyed
+farther and farther from the fort.
+
+"Girty will order an attack on us soon, now that the boys have made so
+much noise," suggested one of the waiting defenders.
+
+Scarcely had the man spoken when Simon Girty, springing from the forest
+at the head of five hundred of his painted warriors, rushed upon the
+western gate of the fort. It was plain that they were trying to force
+their way over the undefended palisade.
+
+The men of the Station had been carefully arranged in small divisions;
+and at the word from their leaders they fired upon the approaching
+warriors. The determination of the white men and their anxiety for their
+wives and children served to steady the nerve of every man and make of
+him a sharpshooter.
+
+The consternation of Girty's army cannot be described. Startled by the
+unexpected resistance and beholding their comrades falling on every side
+of them, with wild cries of anger and dismay the painted braves
+scattered, and in confusion all ran back into the sheltering forest.
+
+Two minutes after the sally not an Indian was to be seen, and the party
+of thirteen young settlers returned to the shelter of the fort.
+
+Every defender of Bryant's Station, however, was aware that this was but
+the beginning of the siege. The attack now was undertaken more in
+accordance with the usual methods of Indian warfare. From behind trees
+or protected by rocks the red men fired upon the defenders whenever any
+one showed himself. And the men of Bryant's Station were replying to the
+attack in kind. Not much time had elapsed before it was plain that this
+method of warfare was without marked effect on either party.
+
+By the middle of the afternoon, however, a sudden change occurred which
+instantly altered the entire combat. The cause of this change was due to
+the messenger who had been sent from Bryant's Station as soon as the
+discovery of the Indians had been made. Upon the fleetest horse in the
+settlement young Bell had succeeded in making his way to Lexington, with
+news of the dire need of help at Bryant's Station.
+
+The messenger, however, was keenly disappointed when he found only the
+women and children and a few old men in the place. He was informed that
+the able-bodied men had all marched to the rendezvous at Hoy's Station
+as soon as the knowledge of Holder's defeat had been received.
+
+Following the direction in which he had been informed the fighting band
+had gone, it was not long before Bell overtook them and gave them his
+message.
+
+In the band were sixteen mounted men and more than twice that number of
+men on foot. As they set forth in response to Bell's appeal, their
+courage was strengthened by the report of the coming of a force of men
+from Boone's Station, among whom were Peleg, Israel, and the great scout
+himself.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV
+
+A FIELD OF CORN
+
+
+At a good pace the band was moving steadily over the rough roadway that
+led to Bryant's Station. The men were silent for the most part, for they
+had serious work before them. What a siege by five hundred Indians was
+likely to be, led by such a man as Simon Girty, required no description.
+The mounted men, however, preceding the men on foot, found little on
+their way to indicate the peril of their friends.
+
+It was late summer now, and already some of the leaves of the forest
+were tinged with the colours of autumn. The song of a bird was seldom
+heard, although the locusts were noisily announcing their presence in
+the treetops.
+
+As the advancing men came nearer the end of their journey their
+precautions increased. The men on horseback still led, but were closer
+to their comrades than in the earlier part of the journey. The
+information which the courier had brought had been so meagre that the
+exact location of Girty's band of warriors was not known. Bell had
+reported only that Bryant's Station was besieged and that Girty was the
+leader of the howling horde of savages.
+
+Bryant's Station was less than a mile and a half distant. The advancing
+men were in a bend in the road, on one side of which stretched the
+primeval forest, while on the other one hundred or more acres had been
+cleared and planted to corn. The stalks of corn were higher than the
+head of the tallest man in the band.
+
+"Come on!" called Peleg to Israel and his friends. "Let the men who are
+riding go around by the road and we'll cut across lots through this
+cornfield."
+
+The suggestion at once was acted upon, and the men on foot, among whom
+were most of the boys and younger men in the rescuing party, ran into
+the cornfield where they were soon concealed from the sight of their
+companions. Around them the stalks were standing so high that it would
+have been an easy matter for one not accustomed to such places to lose
+his way.
+
+Meanwhile, the mounted men continued on their way. It was unknown to
+them, as it was also to their companions in the cornfield, that the
+keen-eyed Indians had been aware of the departure of the courier from
+Bryant's Station. Indeed, it was suspected afterward that intentionally
+the red men had permitted him to proceed through their lines. All the
+warriors apparently were eager for the messenger to return and bring the
+men who doubtless would respond to his appeal.
+
+Consequently, when the mounted men drew near the forest opposite the
+cornfield, they had no information or even suspicion that Girty's
+warriors, concealed behind the trunks of the great trees, were awaiting
+their coming. Steadily advancing, the horsemen soon were drawing near
+the place where the ambuscade had been formed.
+
+Meanwhile, Peleg and Israel, in advance of their comrades, had been
+moving through the cornfield. They had arrived at a point which they
+thought must be midway in the great field, when at the sound of a gun
+both young pioneers stopped short, and Israel seized Peleg's arm as his
+face became pale and he said, "What has happened?"
+
+There was slight need for Peleg to reply to the startling question. On
+the August air arose the reports of many rifles and the terrifying
+whoops of the Indians.
+
+It was impossible for the men in the cornfield to see what was occurring
+in the road. They were aware of the attack, of course, and there was
+slight doubt in the mind of any that the entrance of the men on foot
+into the cornfield had been seen by their watching enemies.
+
+"Keep close to me," said Peleg to his companion. "It is every man for
+himself, now, but I want you to stay by me. We will take our chances
+that way."
+
+Peleg started when a whoop wilder and fiercer than any that had preceded
+it came from the bend in the road.
+
+"I wonder if they got every man," whispered Israel, his voice trembling
+in his excitement. "I do not believe one of our men suspected there was
+any danger here. Not even my father spoke of it."
+
+"Your father does not always speak of his fears. If it is possible for
+any one to get away I am sure your father will be safe."
+
+"What's that?" whispered Israel sharply. From the sounds it was evident
+that some at least of the mounted men were fleeing from the place. The
+shots of the Indians were plainly heard, and it was clear that they were
+following the fugitives. Perhaps a few had contrived to force their way
+around the bend.
+
+The two anxious young settlers, however, soon were recalled to the
+perils of their own position. Suddenly, not far to their right, they
+heard a rustling sound, as of the furtive approach of some one moving
+through the standing corn.
+
+"Drop!" whispered Peleg. "Don't move! Do not say a word!"
+
+The two boys cast themselves upon the ground, each holding his rifle in
+readiness for instant use. The sound of some one moving in the midst of
+the corn might indicate the presence of an enemy or of a friend, and
+until the anxious boys could determine which was near, they remained
+motionless.
+
+All at once the silence which had continued for moments was broken by
+whoops nearby, and the reports of rifles from within the field. Both
+boys were startled when each looked into the other's face and found his
+suspicions confirmed. The Indians were aware of the presence of the
+settlers in the cornfield and were stealthily entering from every side
+of the field at the same time. Already some of the unfortunate settlers
+had been found and their fate had been sealed. The summer stillness was
+broken by the wild whoops which indicated the success of some warrior in
+bringing his victim to the ground. There were also calls and cries from
+the wounded, mingled with the frequent reports of the rifles.
+
+The standing corn, a few yards in advance of the place where Peleg and
+Israel were lying, now suddenly was drawn apart and the boys saw three
+painted Shawnee warriors in single file stealthily making their way
+between the tall stalks.
+
+They concluded that discovery was not to be avoided, and after Peleg had
+whispered to his companion to follow his example, one after the other
+the boys raised their rifles and fired upon their enemies.
+
+Aware that one and perhaps two of the approaching red men had fallen and
+that the third warrior had darted rapidly away at the discharge of the
+guns, both boys sprang to their feet, and, crouching low, began to run
+through the corn.
+
+Both were too experienced to lose their way easily, and not many minutes
+had elapsed before Peleg, without speaking, laid his hand warningly on
+his friend's shoulder. Instantly both stopped and listened.
+
+Peleg believed that they had arrived near the border of the field. He
+was fearful now that reserves had been stationed so that from whatever
+side the unfortunate settlers might attempt to escape they would be met
+by the bullets of the watching warriors. Both boys listened intently
+until several minutes had elapsed.
+
+"We had better separate here," whispered Israel. Peleg hesitated a
+moment and then quietly nodded his assent. The possibility of escape,
+slight as it was, would be increased if they proceeded singly rather
+than together.
+
+"You know the way to the Station?" whispered Peleg. Israel nodded his
+head, and, moving to a place twenty feet to his left, turned, and in a
+course parallel to the one Peleg was following, cautiously continued on
+his way toward the border of the field.
+
+When Peleg came near to the edge of the field he stopped once more and
+peered cautiously all about him, listening for sounds that might
+indicate the presence of his enemies. From behind him still were heard
+the shouts and shrieks that were mingled with the reports of the guns
+and the whoops of the excited Indians.
+
+Somehow, in spite of his peril, the beat of the young settler's heart
+seemed to be almost normal. He watched a little field mouse that
+fearlessly peered up at him from the ground. He even counted the swings
+of a spider making her web between the swaying branches of an enormous
+stalk of corn.
+
+Apparently the fighting was confined to the farther side of the field.
+Only infrequent sounds of the conflict were heard at his right and left,
+while from the region before him there had been almost no sounds of
+conflict at all.
+
+Was the border in front of him unguarded? Or was it doubly dangerous
+because the Indians were attempting from the other three sides to drive
+the unfortunate men into a trap?
+
+Stealthily Peleg still crept forward. After each step he paused and
+looked keenly about him as he listened for sounds which might indicate
+renewed peril. He had seen nothing of Israel since his friend had left
+him.
+
+Suddenly he was startled to hear what evidently were the sounds of a
+struggle between two men nearby. The laboured breathing and an
+occasional exclamation which he heard alike convinced him of this. With
+increasing anxiety Peleg crept forward.
+
+He was not molested when he came to the end of the row, but before him
+he saw a contest which threatened to terminate speedily as well as
+fatally for Israel Boone.
+
+The son of the great scout was in the hands of a white man, and was
+struggling desperately. His contestant, however, plainly was much the
+stronger. Peleg saw the face of the man distinctly, and he assured
+himself that never before had he looked upon so villainous a
+countenance. The man's face was distorted and discoloured by his
+efforts, and the perspiration streamed down his cheeks leaving furrows
+behind it. In spite of his excitement, Peleg asked himself if the man's
+face had ever been washed. The necessity for quick action, if his friend
+was to be rescued, caused Peleg instantly to raise his rifle to his
+shoulder and fire.
+
+Israel's contestant dropped to the ground as Peleg had seen an ox
+collapse from the blow of an axe.
+
+Instantly darting to the side of his friend, Peleg whispered, "Come!"
+
+"That is Simon Girty!" gasped Israel, looking down into the face of the
+fallen man before him.
+
+Startled as Peleg was by the words of his companion, he did not wait to
+verify them, but turned back at once into the cornfield. As soon as he
+had gone a short distance, bidding Israel follow him, he turned to his
+left, and, still running swiftly and silently, the boys advanced a
+hundred yards; they then turned abruptly to their right in the direction
+of the side of the field where they had first entered. Although
+mystified by the action of his companion, Israel did not protest as he
+followed Peleg in his flight.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI
+
+THE WHITE SHAWNEE AGAIN
+
+
+Again turning to his left, Peleg, still followed by his friend, ran
+swiftly toward the border of the cornfield.
+
+The cries and whoops in a measure had died away, and from what he could
+hear Peleg concluded that some of his friends had escaped from the field
+and were being pursued in their flight toward the fort.
+
+When Peleg and Israel found they were near the road, on the opposite
+side of which stood the forest where the Indians had made their
+ambuscade, they peered cautiously in all directions, but were unable to
+see any of their enemies. That another band of warriors had followed in
+pursuit of the men who had escaped from the first attack and from the
+fight in the cornfield was most likely, they concluded.
+
+Peleg whispered: "The safest place for us is where the Indians were
+hidden. They have gone from there and will not come back to look for any
+of us."
+
+Israel nodded his head in assent, and, firmly grasping their rifles,
+the boys darted across the road and gained the shelter of the trees.
+When the two young scouts were convinced that their immediate presence
+had not been discovered, Peleg said to Israel: "Are you sure you can
+find your way if we again separate?"
+
+"Yes," answered Israel. "But the Indians are between us and the fort. Do
+you think we can ever get through?"
+
+"We must," said Peleg. "The folk at Bryant's Station are in such danger
+that not one of us must fail them now."
+
+The words hardly had been spoken when there was a sharp report of a
+rifle, and a bullet passed so near them that both boys heard it singing
+on its way.
+
+Moved by a common impulse, they turned and dashed into the forest.
+Whether or no any of their enemies were hiding behind the trees toward
+which they were running neither knew.
+
+They were chiefly intent upon speed now, and ran on for several minutes,
+well knowing that their lives depended upon the success of their
+efforts.
+
+At last, breathless, both halted for a rest, and Peleg said to his
+companion, "I am sure it will be better for us to separate now. You know
+the way, and can look out for yourself. I shall come, too, and if we
+succeed In getting through, it had better be before night."
+
+"Yes," assented Israel. "If we wait until dark and then creep up to the
+fort, the guards will be likely to fire upon us, mistaking us for
+Indians."
+
+With these words Israel departed. Peleg watched his friend as long as he
+remained within sight, and then began with caution to retrace the way
+over which they had come. Keeping a firm grip upon Singing Susan, Peleg
+darted from tree to tree and did not venture from each refuge until he
+was convinced that no one was near him.
+
+His attempt to proceed was interrupted, however, by the report of a
+rifle, and again a bullet whistled uncomfortably close to his head,
+tearing some splinters from the tree at his elbow. The young scout at
+his utmost speed darted into the wood at his right.
+
+He was aware that a swift flight could not long be maintained because of
+his recent exertions. Where a refuge might be found he did not know. But
+just then he noticed the trunk of what appeared to be a huge hollow tree
+leaning over a shallow brook, across which he must leap if he continued
+his flight.
+
+He entered the stream, ran swiftly a few steps with the current, and
+then retraced his way to the tree. It was but the work of a moment for
+him to climb to the broken top, and great was his relief when he saw
+that the tree indeed was hollow. Without thought of where he might fall
+he dropped into the welcome opening.
+
+He fell several feet before the decayed wood provided a foothold strong
+enough to enable him to stand. Fortunately the hollow of the tree was
+larger than his body, and although he was cramped and almost blinded by
+the decayed mass, he nevertheless managed to reach his hunting-knife,
+and, making a small opening through the soft wood, peeped out to see if
+his enemies were within sight. As he did so his fears were aroused that
+the tree itself might fall. It was a mere shell and so decayed that he
+was surprised that his descent had not torn it asunder.
+
+At that moment a wild cry, plainly from the road, came to his ears. Then
+shouts were followed by the reports of guns and answering whoops from
+the Indians.
+
+Anxious for his friend Israel, Peleg turned once more to ascertain if
+any of his enemies were near his hiding-place. He was hopeful that his
+trail could not be followed farther than the bank of the little brook,
+although he was sufficiently familiar with Indian ways to know that the
+red men, if they really were pursuing him, would run in either direction
+along the banks until they found the place where he had left the water.
+He smiled as he recalled how he had been standing in the stream when he
+had thrown his arms around the trunk of the bending tree. Singing Susan
+was still held, but it would be impossible for him in his cramped
+position to make use of her musical voice.
+
+Suddenly Peleg was startled to behold an Indian step forth from the
+forest and stand for a moment on the bank of the stream almost directly
+beneath him. His surprise increased when he recognized the warrior as
+Henry. He had believed that the white Shawnee, as Henry had loved to
+call himself, had been killed in the attack on Boonesborough. His brave
+deed in extinguishing the fire that had been kindled by the burning
+arrow had been followed, as Peleg and others had believed, by his death.
+At least every one had seen him fall from the roof and roll to the
+ground. It is true, his body had not been recovered, but there were
+other bodies which had similarly disappeared.
+
+When his first feeling of astonishment had passed and Peleg was
+convinced that it indeed was Henry who was beneath him, a feeling of
+intense anger swept over the young settler. Henry was white, and yet had
+renounced his allegiance to his own people and gone back to the
+Shawnees, and with them he was now making war upon his own nation! There
+was little in his present appearance to distinguish him from other
+braves of the tribe. He wore the scalp-lock and was clad in the Indian
+garb.
+
+Peleg's problem in part was solved when at that moment the rotten wood
+gave way beneath him, and the tree, unable longer to support the weight
+of the young scout, fell with a crash to the ground. As it struck the
+bank the tree was rent asunder, and to the white Shawnee's astonishment
+Peleg scrambled to his feet from out of the wreckage.
+
+Before he could brush the dust from his eyes and bring Singing Susan to
+his shoulder Henry leaped forward and placed both hands upon the barrel
+of the rifle, saying, "No shoot broder."
+
+"You are no brother of mine!" said Peleg. "You are a Shawnee and not a
+white Shawnee, either! You are fighting us!"
+
+"No fight broder," repeated Henry. "Broder show way to fort."
+
+For some strange reason which Peleg was unable to explain even to
+himself, he said abruptly: "Lead the way, then! If you can take me
+safely through the line of these savages, I shall never forget you."
+
+The young scout was eager to inquire of his companion what had befallen
+him and why he had returned to the Shawnees. His present peril, however,
+was so great that he restrained his impulse, and in silence followed
+Henry as he led the way toward Bryant's Station.
+
+Occasionally a halt was made when from some nearby place shots were
+heard indicating that the scattered settlers were being pursued either
+in small detachments or individually, for the terrified men had
+scattered when first the ambuscade had been discovered.
+
+When Henry, who apparently was aware of the location of the besieging
+braves, drew near the fort he stopped and said: "Now go."
+
+Peleg looked about him, and, unable to discover any of his enemies
+nearby, followed the advice which had been given him, and, placing his
+hat on the end of the barrel of Singing Susan as a token of his peaceful
+intentions, approached the gate.
+
+He was at once admitted, and his relief was great when the first to
+greet him was Israel Boone.
+
+"How many are here?" asked Peleg.
+
+"I do not know," answered Israel. "I have heard that only six of our men
+were killed or wounded. When we all started toward Lexington they might
+have chased us all the way and taken the fort there, because there was
+nobody left to fight for it."
+
+"How many Indians were in that ambuscade?" asked Peleg.
+
+"I hear there were three hundred."
+
+"How did you get to the fort?"
+
+"I ran straight ahead for an hour," replied Israel with a smile. "How
+did you come?"
+
+"Henry got me through the lines."
+
+"Henry!" demanded Israel in surprise. "Henry! I thought he was dead."
+
+"So did I, but he is very much alive. I had no time to ask him how he
+came to be here. I was thinking mostly of getting inside the fort."
+
+"It is a comfort to know that at least Girty will not lead any more----"
+
+Israel stopped speaking as a lusty shout was heard from a stump that
+stood near one of the bastions, and the two young defenders to their
+amazement beheld Simon Girty himself standing erect upon the stump and
+waving a cloth which at some time in its history may have been white.
+
+In response to this hail every man ran to hear what the renegade leader
+of the Indians had to say.
+
+They were soon to know the purpose for which Girty, on his hands and
+knees, had crept to the place where he now was standing.
+
+"What do you want?" shouted one of the defenders.
+
+"I have come," replied Girty in a loud voice, "to save your lives. We
+have more than six hundred warriors here, and by to-morrow we shall have
+more. Some of our friends will bring cannon, and when we have them we
+can blow every cabin in Bryant's Station into flinders. If we storm your
+fort, as we sure can do when we get our cannon, I will not promise that
+one life will be spared. You know the redskins well enough to understand
+how I shall not be able to hold them back. If you surrender now, I give
+you my word of honour that not a hair of the head of any one of you
+shall be hurt. I am Simon Girty, and you know you can rely upon every
+word I speak."
+
+A derisive cry from several of the defenders greeted this assertion, but
+when Peleg and Israel looked about them they were aware that many of the
+men had been strongly moved by Girty's appeal.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII
+
+THE STRUGGLE IN THE RAVINE
+
+
+Before any conference of the defenders could be held, one of the younger
+men leaped to the wall to reply to Girty's plea.
+
+"You know who I am, don't you?" called Girty.
+
+"Indeed I do know!" shouted young Reynolds: "Everybody south of the
+Falls of Ohio knows that you are Simon Girty. I have a good-for-nothing
+cur dog which I have named Simon Girty, or Simon Dirty, he looks so much
+like you. If you have any reinforcements or artillery, bring them up!
+But let me warn you that if you or any of those naked rascals with you
+ever get into this fort we shall not use our guns upon them. We have no
+powder to waste on such wretches. We have cut some big bunches of birch
+switches and have scattered them all through the fort; and that is just
+what we cut them for--to thrash you and your rascally comrades. And let
+me tell you," he continued, "that you are not the only ones who are
+expecting reinforcements! We have received word that the whole country
+is aroused and marching to help us, Simon Girty!" he shouted. "If you
+and your gang of murderers stay twenty-four hours longer before the fort
+you will never be able to leave. Your scalps will be drying in the sun
+on the roofs of our cabins."
+
+A loud laugh from his friends greeted the words of the young backwoods
+orator, and it was plain that the spirit which young Reynolds had
+displayed had aroused the drooping courage of his companions. Many of
+the men were aware that on more than one occasion the Indians had indeed
+brought cannon with them, and by their aid had succeeded in destroying
+two of the stations.
+
+All became silent when Simon Girty once more stood up to reply. "It is
+too bad," began the renegade, "it's a pity that such people should be
+tomahawked and scalped! I can protect you now, if you will surrender,
+but I give you fair warning if you do not I shall not be able to hold
+back my warriors."
+
+A derisive shout greeted this declaration, and in apparent sorrow Simon
+Girty at once withdrew.
+
+It was not known within the fort that he instantly ordered preparations
+to be made for raising the siege. Throughout the night not a sound was
+heard, and when daylight came the Indian camp was deserted!
+
+When Peleg and Israel sought the place where the warriors had encamped
+they found the fires still burning brightly and even pieces of meat
+left on the roasting-sticks.
+
+"You see!" said Israel gleefully. "They left just a little while before
+daylight."
+
+"Yes," said Peleg, "that is when they usually roast their meat. I wonder
+if they are all really gone?"
+
+The rejoicing at Bryant's Station was great when it was known that the
+Indians had departed. Before noon the fighting force of white men was
+increased to one hundred and sixty-seven. Among those who entered came
+Daniel Boone, or Colonel Boone as some now called him, since he had
+received his commission from Colonel Clark.
+
+"What does this mean?" demanded Israel when he saw his younger brother
+Daniel among the men in the assembly, "What are you doing here?"
+
+"I think I have as good a right to come as you," retorted Boone's
+younger son. "I am almost seventeen."
+
+"And old enough to know better," laughed Peleg, who was fond of the boy
+and many a time had taken him with him on his expeditions into the
+forest.
+
+The officers, who had hastened to the place as soon as reports of its
+peril had been brought, now assembled, and at once called the men of
+Bryant's Station to a conference.
+
+"It is known," explained Colonel Todd, "that Colonel Logan has
+collected a strong force in Lincoln and that it will be here within
+twenty-four hours. If we wait for his coming we shall be that much
+stronger when we start in pursuit of Girty and his savages. What do you
+think?" he asked, addressing Boone, who stood leaning upon his rifle in
+the rear of the assembly.
+
+"It will be wise to wait," replied Boone quietly. "I have never found it
+to be a mistake to get ready before you attempt to do anything. Girty,
+according to his story, has treble our numbers. The trail which the
+Shawnees have left behind is so plain and so broad that I am suspicious
+that they have made signs which they hope will lead us to pursue them.
+My advice is to wait until Colonel Logan shall come with his men."
+
+The younger members of the force, however, were unwilling to delay. To
+them appearances were convincing that the Indians had fled because they
+were alarmed. Now was the time, they declared, when the savages ought to
+be chased and taught a lesson! If there should be a delay even of a day
+in following them, the Indians would gain such an advance that they
+could not be overtaken and punished for their evil deeds.
+
+The fiery zeal of the young men was not to be denied. Against the
+counsel of Boone and others of the older scouts, who had long
+experience in dealing with their Indian enemies, a swift pursuit
+instantly was begun. Many of the men were mounted on horses, but the
+entire mass, horse and foot, kept well together.
+
+The eager party had not gone far from Bryant's Station before a halt was
+called, when it was discovered that the retiring Indians had turned into
+the buffalo road and, almost as if they were attempting to make their
+trail still more evident, it was noticed that they had chopped many of
+the trees, on either side with their hatchets.
+
+Boone shook his head when he discovered these indications of apparent
+carelessness in the band they were following.
+
+"My opinion is," he said soberly to Colonel Todd, "that Girty is trying
+to lead us on. Just as our men ran into their trap on the way to
+Bryant's Station, I am afraid now that they will be led into another."
+
+"But it is too late to go back," said Colonel Todd.
+
+"Yes, I am afraid our men will not go back now. My only word of advice
+to you is to go ahead cautiously."
+
+"Will you be one of the advance guard?"
+
+"If you so desire."
+
+"At least you are not afraid, and you will not see what is not there."
+
+"I shall do my best," said Boone quietly.
+
+As Peleg, who was standing nearby and had heard the conversation, looked
+into the face of his friend he became aware that the years of anxiety
+had left their mark upon his rugged countenance. There was, however, a
+deeper expression of gentleness on the face of the great scout which in
+no way detracted from the impression of strength which his entire body
+still produced.
+
+Orders were soon given to camp for the night in the forest, and on the
+following day the little army arrived at the Lower Blue Licks. Just as
+the force, proceeding without any form of order, arrived at the southern
+bank of the Licking, some of the men saw several Indians climbing the
+rocky ridge on the opposite side. The red men halted when the
+Kentuckians appeared, looked at them intently a few minutes in silence,
+and then, as calmly and leisurely as if no enemies were near,
+disappeared over the top of the hill.
+
+A halt of the white men was made at once, and several of the officers
+held a consultation.
+
+Apparently there were differences of opinion among the leaders, for
+after a few minutes had elapsed Colonel Todd summoned Daniel Boone and
+inquired his opinion as to what had best be done. All the officers were
+now very serious.
+
+The great scout, leaning upon his rifle, spoke in the deep, quiet tones
+he usually used: "My opinion is that our situation is critical and
+difficult. The force before us without question is ready for battle and
+outnumbers us largely."
+
+"Why do you think that?" inquired Colonel Todd.
+
+"Because of the easy and slow retreat of the Indians who just went over
+the crest of yonder hill. I am familiar with all this region and I am
+fearful they are trying to draw us on. About a mile ahead of us there
+are two ravines, one on either side of the ridge. There the Indians can
+hide and attack us at the same time, both in front and on our flanks,
+almost before we could know they were there."
+
+"What do you think is the best thing to do, then?" inquired Colonel Todd
+seriously.
+
+"My advice," said Boone, "is to do one of two things: Either wait for
+the coming of Colonel Logan, who without doubt is on his way to join us;
+or, if it is decided to attack the Indians without waiting for him to
+come up, then my advice is that half our force ought to go up the river,
+cross the rapids, and fall upon the Indians from that side at the same
+time the others attack them from the front."
+
+"I am afraid that cannot be done," said Colonel Todd, shaking his head.
+
+"Whatever is done," said Boone quietly, "my advice to you is to go over
+the ground carefully before the men cross the river here. Send some
+scouts ahead. I have never found, Colonel Todd, that any man lost by
+being prepared for what might befall him."
+
+Every man in the little assembly was listening with deep attention to
+the great scout who was a man of silence unless his advice was sought.
+
+When he ceased some urged the adoption of his recommendation to wait for
+the coming of Colonel Logan and his men. There were others, however, who
+were strongly in favour of advancing at once.
+
+In the midst of the warm discussion Major McGary, one of the young
+officers who was unable to endure the thought of being near an enemy and
+not fighting, let out a wild whoop. At the same moment he waved his hand
+over his head, spurred his horse into the river and then shouted in his
+loudest tone, "Let all who are not cowards follow me!"
+
+Instantly the mounted men dashed into the river, every one apparently
+striving to be the first to gain the opposite shore. The men on foot
+also rushed into the stream, which for a time seemed to be a rolling
+mass of men and water. No order had been given and no order now was
+desired. Through the deep river horses and men staggered forward, with
+McGary still leading the way.
+
+They gained the opposite shore where the unprotected nature of the
+ground seemed to forbid their advance. Trampled by the buffalo, every
+bush and low tree had been stripped bare. Multitudes of rocks blackened
+by the sunlight were to be seen on every side. No scouts were sent in
+advance and none acted on the flanks. The contagious example of Major
+McGary acted like magic, and men and horses went forward as if every one
+was doing his utmost to outstrip his neighbour.
+
+Along with the others went Daniel Boone, his two boys, and Peleg. The
+expression of Boone's face had not changed since his sober advice had
+been disregarded by his impulsive comrades. But he was not one to draw
+back when his friends were rushing into action.
+
+Suddenly the men in front halted. They had arrived at the place
+mentioned by the scout, where the two ravines met. A small body of
+Indians appeared for a moment and fired at the approaching settlers.
+
+Instantly McGary and the men with him returned the fire, although they
+were at a great disadvantage because they were standing upon a bare and
+open ridge, while their enemies were in a ravine in which the bushes
+partly concealed the warriors.
+
+As the reports of the guns were heard, the men in the rear rushed
+forward to assist their friends. But before they were able to gain the
+ridge they were stopped by a terrible fire from the ravine which was on
+their flank. They halted, and it was almost as if they had been shut in
+by the jaws of some enormous beast. There was no cover, and a terrible
+fire was being poured into them from front and side, while their enemies
+still were hidden from sight.
+
+Gradually, however, the Indians pushed out from the ravine as the fire
+became fiercer. Indeed they were striving to extend their lines and turn
+the right of the Kentuckians so that their retreat would be cut off.
+
+As soon as this was made clear by the increase of the firing from that
+quarter, the men in the rear attempted to fall back, and then by
+breaking through the attacking party, gain their only way of escape--to
+the river.
+
+Their actions, in part misunderstood by their companions, created what
+was almost a panic. From the ravine to the river the sight was
+indescribable. Above the reports of the guns rose the shrieks and cries
+of the wounded and the wild and merciless whoops of the Indians.
+
+Many of the mounted men escaped, but those who were fighting on foot
+were in deadly peril. Daniel Boone, in the thick of the fight, saw his
+boy, Israel, fall lifeless before the guns of the Indians. Even the
+death of his son, however, did not prevent the great scout from becoming
+aware that he himself was almost entirely surrounded by the frantic,
+howling, whooping mob of warriors.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII
+
+AT THE LOWER BLUE LICKS
+
+
+It was in such crises that the great scout best displayed the qualities
+which had made him a marked man among the pioneers. It had been
+impossible for him to rescue the body of his fallen son. Around him on
+every side were heard shouts and cries and the continual report of the
+rifles.
+
+Whatever occurred, Daniel Boone was never long at a loss how to act.
+Controlling his feelings, he turned to the men who were near him and
+said quietly, "Come with me!"
+
+As the men obediently followed, the scout, who was familiar with the
+entire region, instead of running toward the ford as most of the
+fugitives now were doing, dashed into the ravine where many of the
+Indians previously had been concealed. Apparently they had now left to
+join in the wild pursuit of the demoralized settlers.
+
+Boone and his comrades were not to escape, however, without attracting
+the attention of some of the howling Indians. A half dozen or more
+discovered the fleeing settlers and with wild whoops started in swift
+pursuit.
+
+It was here that Boone's knowledge of the region, as well as his
+coolness, came to his aid. Leading the way to a place in the ravine
+where there was a narrow passage between the rocks, he ordered his
+companions to precede him, while he himself raised his rifle with
+deliberation and fired at the approaching Indians.
+
+The entire band halted, for their own rifles were not loaded at the time
+and they were depending upon a similar condition among the whites. The
+red men were now relying on their tomahawks.
+
+As soon as the band halted, Boone waited a moment to assure himself that
+his companions were safe, and then, running swiftly, rejoined them. When
+the fleeing men came to the end of the ravine, once more they found a
+small band of their foes awaiting them, and with wild cries they started
+toward them. But the great scout, in spite of the need of haste, had
+bidden his companions to reload in preparation for this very emergency.
+After receiving the fire from their guns, the Indians dropped back,
+while the white men, quickly making use of the advantage thus afforded,
+were able to escape to the woods beyond.
+
+"We shall now be able to make our way to Bryant's Station," said Boone.
+"There will be no Indians to interfere with us from this time on."
+
+His words proved to be correct, and by the middle of the afternoon the
+half-dozen men with the great scout arrived safely at the fort.
+
+Throughout the remainder of the day many of the men who had so
+confidently gone forth in the morning came straggling back to the fort.
+
+Peleg, who had been among those who rushed to the ford, returned to
+Bryant's Station when it was nearly dusk. He had secured the aid of two
+others, and the three were carrying young Daniel Boone, who also had
+been shot in the fight at the Licks.
+
+It was soon discovered that Boone's younger son was not seriously
+wounded. When the welcome information was received the face of the great
+scout remained unchanged in its expression, though the deathly pallor,
+that for a moment had spread over it when he had been informed of what
+had befallen his boy, disappeared.
+
+"'Tis a wonder," said Peleg, "that any of us are left alive to tell the
+story. Some of us ran up the stream and swam across. Young Dan was as
+brave as any man in the crowd. Even after he had been shot in the
+shoulder he did not give up, but he swam across the stream, keeping up
+with the rest of us. The men who could not swim were the ones that were
+shot down or were made prisoners without being able to do anything to
+defend themselves."
+
+"Were any shot after you had crossed the river?" inquired Boone.
+
+"I do not know of any," replied Peleg. "But from the ravine clear down
+to the ford the loss was heavy. One of the bravest deeds I ever saw in
+my life was that of young Aaron Reynolds--he is the one who made us
+laugh when Simon Girty mounted the stump and gave us his speech.
+Reynolds was on horseback, and about halfway between the battle ground
+and the ford he found Captain Patterson completely worn out. The captain
+had dropped in his tracks, he was so exhausted, for you see he had been
+wounded three or four times in the fights we had with the Indians two or
+three years ago."
+
+"I remember that he was," said Boone.
+
+"The Indians were almost ready to close up on the captain, but just at
+that moment Reynolds saw what was going on. He jumped from his saddle,
+helped Captain Patterson to mount, and then turned and ran on foot as
+fast as he could go. He ran like a deer after he was out of the main
+road, then jumped into the river right where you said you crossed, and
+swam to the other side. There he had some serious trouble, though. He
+was wearing a pair of buckskin breeches and they became so heavy and
+full of water when he was in the river that he could not run very fast
+when he struck the shore. When he sat down and tried to get rid of a
+part of the water some of the Indians rushed up and before he knew it he
+was their prisoner."
+
+"Did you say he is here now?" inquired Boone.
+
+"Yes, sir. I was afraid the Indians would tomahawk him, but they kept to
+their regular plan of not putting any of their prisoners to death until
+they get back to their own country, so Reynolds wasn't troubled very
+much at the time. They left him in charge of three of the braves while
+the others started for some more of our men who were nearby. The three
+Indians were so excited when they saw our men that two of them left
+Reynolds in charge of the third while they ran to join in the chase with
+the others. Then the Indian that had Reynolds in his charge started for
+the woods."
+
+"Were they both armed?" asked Boone.
+
+"Reynolds had had his rifle taken away from him, but the Indian had a
+tomahawk and a rifle in his hands. After they had gone a little way the
+Indian stooped to tie the string of his moccasin and Aaron instantly
+jumped upon him, knocked him down with his fist and then ran for the
+woods. Captain Patterson has just come in and he says he is going to
+give Aaron two hundred acres of the best land he owns."
+
+Such of the bodies as had been recovered were now being brought to the
+fort, and the fact that many of the men of Bryant's Station had been
+made prisoners by the attacking Indians increased the feeling of gloom
+that settled upon the place. Among the men who had fallen was Colonel
+Todd, who had sought the advice of the great scout and then did not
+follow it.
+
+Long before nightfall Colonel Logan and his men arrived at Bryant's
+Station. In his force were no less than four hundred and fifty men. Upon
+their arrival they learned from the men who had succeeded in returning
+to the fort of the fate which had befallen the band which Colonel Todd
+had led against the Indians.
+
+Waiting to hear no more, greatly alarmed for his friends and suspecting
+that only a part of the disaster had been reported, Colonel Logan at
+once led his men over the way by which the defenders of the fort had
+gone in their untimely pursuit of their wily foe.
+
+[Illustration: "Silently the men crossed the ford"]
+
+With Colonel Logan went Daniel Boone and Peleg, as well as many others
+of the defenders. The great scout showed plainly the suffering through
+which he was passing. Two of his boys had been shot by the relentless
+Shawnees and his third son had received a severe wound. Apparently Boone
+did not believe that his sufferings were to be relieved by anything his
+friends could do to aid him. He had seldom spoken since the men had
+departed from the Station, but Peleg was confident that he understood
+the purpose which was urging the gentle-hearted hunter forward.
+
+The second day the advancing soldiers came near to the place where the
+fight had occurred. Long before they had arrived, however, Peleg had
+shuddered when he discovered flocks of circling buzzards that were
+hovering over the battle ground. He glanced into the face of his
+companion when the discovery had been made, and knew that the scout also
+understood the meaning of their presence.
+
+When the advancing band approached the bank of the river they discovered
+many of the bodies still floating near the shore. They were the
+unfortunate victims that had been shot by the Indians after they had
+rushed into the stream.
+
+A silence, indescribable, intense, awful, settled over all the men.
+There were tears in the eyes of some of the hardiest of the settlers at
+the fearful sight upon which they looked. No man was able to recognize
+among the putrid bodies the face of his lost friend.
+
+Silently the men crossed the ford and advanced toward the ravine. In
+the scene of the recent fight the sight was even more heartbreaking.
+Here, too, the bodies of the many who had fallen could no longer be
+distinguished one from another.
+
+Daniel Boone, unmindful of the presence of his comrades, had been
+searching quietly among the bodies for that of his missing boy. Even the
+men who were most eager in their search for their friends stopped a
+moment as they watched the man in his agonizing and fruitless quest.
+
+The great scout soon turned to Colonel Logan and said: "'Tis no use,
+Colonel. We must give the poor fellows decent burial here and now."
+
+The men at once carried out the bidding which their leader gave.
+Silently the settlers, for the moment all thoughts of vengeance gone
+from their minds, dug trenches wherever the soil permitted, and in these
+the bodies of their dead and mutilated friends were buried.
+
+There were many faces in the band down which the tears were rolling
+while this task was being accomplished. The manner of the great scout,
+however, was unchanged. Only the deepening of the lines in his face and
+his unusual pallor gave indications of the strain through which he was
+passing. His manner still was silent and self-controlled, as in the days
+when the joyous things of life had more often been his portion.
+
+When the gruesome task at last was finished, it was Daniel Boone
+himself who said to Colonel Logan in reply to the latter's inquiries:
+"It is useless now to try to follow the Shawnees."
+
+"Why do you say that?" inquired the colonel.
+
+"Because by this time they are far beyond our reach. They have lost no
+time, you may be sure."
+
+"How many captives do you think they have taken with them?"
+
+"Not many," said Boone.
+
+"But there are some sixty-seven of our men missing."
+
+"Yes," assented Boone, "but we have accounted for nearly sixty this
+day."
+
+"I am told," suggested the colonel, "that they will put every prisoner
+to death, or so many of them as may be required to make good any loss
+they themselves have had."
+
+The great scout shook his head as he replied: "The Indians have not lost
+as many as we."
+
+"Why do you say that?"
+
+"Because the advantage was all with them. They greatly outnumbered us,
+and in a good part of the fight they were sheltered by the rocks while
+our men were fighting in the open. It was the bloodiest fight I was ever
+in."
+
+"And to you one of the saddest," suggested the colonel.
+
+Boone nodded his head but did not speak.
+
+"I cannot understand," continued the colonel, "why it is that you take
+your own troubles so quietly. You certainly have suffered more than most
+men on the border, and yet I fancy the man has yet to be born who has
+heard you complain."
+
+"And why should I complain?" inquired Boone, smiling as he looked into
+the face of his friend. "It does not make my own griefs less to try to
+have another share them. That is something no one can do. My heart, at
+least, must bear its own burden. If any one thinks that his troubles are
+less than those that come to his friends, he is probably mistaken. My
+experience has led me to believe that almost every one has about all he
+can bear. There are only two classes of people, at least as far as I
+have observed--and I am well aware how little I know in this
+particular--but as I said--there are only two classes of people that cry
+and laugh easily."
+
+"Who are they?"
+
+"Children and savages. Neither class has learned to control itself. A
+strong man shows his strength, at least in my humble judgment," Boone
+added modestly, "by being able to refrain from useless words, and by not
+whining over his troubles."
+
+"I think you are correct," said Colonel Logan musingly. "Now, then," he
+continued after a moment, "is it your judgment that the best thing for
+us to do is to return to Bryant's Station?"
+
+"It is."
+
+"Then if it is a good thing to do it will be well for us to do it
+quickly. I shall see that the order is given. We have some stirring days
+before us because I am sure it will never do to let the Shawnees believe
+for any length of time that they have been able to defeat the white
+men."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX
+
+TO THE MEETING-PLACE
+
+
+The judgment of Daniel Boone was accepted by all the men in the band.
+Indeed there were many now who were blaming others as well as themselves
+for not having listened to the word of the wise old scout before they
+had entered into the unequal struggle with the Indians at Blue Licks.
+
+Swiftly and seriously the men retraced their way to Bryant's Station,
+where they were dismissed by Colonel Logan with the understanding that
+they would respond if he should call for their help in the near future.
+This he fully expected to do.
+
+In a rude wagon Daniel Boone and Peleg carried the wounded boy back to
+his home. The wound itself was not believed to be serious, although
+naturally after the tragedies which had occurred in his family Daniel
+Boone was anxious for his son. Daniel Morgan Boone, or "young Dan," as
+he sometimes was called by the settlers, to distinguish him from his
+father, made light of his experiences and even declared that he was
+prepared to ride his horse back to Boonesborough instead of being
+carried in the jolting wagon. His protest, however, was not heeded, and
+in a short time the Boonesborough men were back in their settlement.
+
+To all it now was evident that Daniel Boone held a place in the regard
+of the settlers such as he never before had won. His deep sorrow over
+the distressing tragedies which had resulted in the loss of two
+promising sons, and his willingness to do all in his power to aid his
+friends: these qualities won him sympathy and affection in addition to
+the respect in which he was held because of his excellent judgment. The
+simple manner of the great scout, his skill as a hunter, his knowledge
+of the Indians, and his enduring friendship, were more highly
+appreciated with every passing day.
+
+Shortly after the return of Boone and his companions, the scout said to
+Peleg, "I have just received word from Colonel George Rogers Clark from
+the Falls of the Ohio."
+
+"What does he want?" asked Peleg quickly. The sturdy colonel in control
+of the forces of the entire region was known to be a man of action, and
+one whose activities were familiar to all the settlers.
+
+"He sends me word," said Boone quietly, "that he plans to raise a force
+of one thousand men to go against the Indian towns."
+
+"Why does he do that?"
+
+"He has two reasons: One is that the people are so discouraged and
+disappointed by the recent successes of the Indians that many are
+thinking of withdrawing from Kentucky. The other reason is that he
+thinks the Indians ought not to be permitted to rest upon the victories
+which they have won, and that the battle of Blue Licks and the fight at
+Bryant's Station must be avenged, or the Shawnees and the Wyandottes
+will soon be more active than they have been."
+
+"What do you think?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"It is not for me to say," replied Boone, his rare smile lighting his
+face for a moment as he spoke.
+
+"But you think what you do not say," persisted Peleg.
+
+"I think Colonel Clark is doing the only thing which will bring help to
+our stations. Either the Indians or we are to live in this country. It
+is a pity that we cannot say, the Indians _and_ we; but from the feeling
+they have shown, and the way in which I know many of the whites look
+upon them, I am afraid such a plan will be impossible. There is then
+only one thing for us to do."
+
+"What is that?"
+
+"It must be decided once for all whether the country is to be occupied
+by the white men or by the red. There can be but one answer. However,"
+continued Boone, "I have little time to discuss these matters with you,
+now. It is a time for action, and much as you and I may dislike to leave
+our homes, we cannot lightly regard such a summons as Colonel Clark has
+sent us."
+
+"What is the plan?"
+
+"He proposes to raise an army of one thousand men, as I said, and march
+to destroy the Indian villages."
+
+"Where do we meet?"
+
+"At the Falls of the Ohio. I have seen Colonel Logan, and he is to
+assemble his men and march in one body to the meeting-place. My own
+judgment is that it would be better for the force to split up into
+smaller parties, but that is not for me to say. I have, however,
+arranged with Colonel Logan for you and six other men to go as a band of
+scouts to the north of the route we are to take, and at the same time
+have several bands move to the south. I do not believe there will be any
+danger before we arrive at the meeting-place, but it is well to provide
+for what may happen before it comes to pass. As you know, that has
+always been my plan. I do not think I ever had a fight with an Indian
+that I did not try to think what he would do, or what I would do if I
+were in his place, before the real contest began."
+
+"Are you to lead the scouts on the south?"
+
+"That is for the King to say," replied Boone, smiling as he quoted the
+well-known saying of Sam Oliver.
+
+The following morning Peleg, as leader of his little band of scouts,
+departed for the place of assembly. The advance to the Falls of the Ohio
+would require three days or more. It was not believed that there would
+be anything more than occasional attacks on the main body by small bands
+of Indians, for few braves would dare to oppose the coming of this great
+army.
+
+In Peleg's little band was Sam Oliver, the hunter. Sam now was plainly
+showing the effects of the passing years. He was suffering from
+rheumatism acquired by exposure in the many winters during which he had
+been known throughout the settlements as a great hunter. His visits to
+the stations were more frequent than formerly, and he remained longer
+than in the preceding years. He was still sensitive, however, concerning
+his physical strength and skill, and refused to listen to any suggestion
+that he was not in condition to accompany the younger men on their way
+to the meeting-place of the army.
+
+"Peleg," said Sam Oliver, when the party, all mounted, had set forth on
+their expedition, "I know a little Indian town about seventy-five miles
+from here where we can get some horses."
+
+"Is it on our way?"
+
+"It is not far from the river. If we can get a dozen or more horses it
+will make the heart of Colonel Clark rejoice."
+
+In explanation of the hunter's words, it may be said that stealing
+horses from the Indians was not looked upon as any crime by the early
+pioneers. Such a conviction may have been due in part to the fact that
+the tribes and white settlers were usually in a state of war with one
+another. The Indians' intense distrust of the early settlers had, as we
+know, long ago deepened into enduring hatred.
+
+There were few who believed the Indians were governed by any other than
+treacherous, bloodthirsty motives. So intense had become this belief
+along the border that it was well-nigh impossible for the men of that
+time to look upon the simple questions of right and wrong in any way
+that might favour the red men or even do them simple justice. To them
+they simply were enemies that must be driven from the region or
+exterminated.
+
+Late in the following afternoon Sam Oliver, when his friends halted,
+donned his Indian garb. In his disguise he was scarcely to be
+distinguished from one of the warriors.
+
+"I have learned the lingo, too," he said laughingly. "A good many times
+I have gone right into their villages and no one has suspected that I
+was a white man. I want to get about fifteen horses," continued Sam,
+"and I want almost as much to get one of the Indians alive."
+
+"What for?" demanded Peleg in surprise.
+
+It was seldom that prisoners were made of the warriors at that time,
+because whenever a fight occurred it was usually a struggle to the
+death. The Indians, however, occasionally, as we know from the
+experiences of the great scout himself, not only made captives of their
+prisoners, but at times adopted them into their tribes in place of young
+braves that had been killed in battle.
+
+"I want one for a pet," laughed Sam Oliver.
+
+"I would sooner have a rattlesnake," declared one of the party.
+
+"That is what I used to say," said Sam, "but then that was years ago
+when I was young and slender. I know more about them now, and if I can
+get one alive I am going to make a pet of him."
+
+"You will be making a mistake," declared Schoolmaster Hargrave, who also
+was one of Peleg's band. It had been long since he had wielded the
+ferrule or had taught the boys and girls in Boonesborough. In recent
+years he had been toiling in the fields, as had the great scout and
+Peleg. He was, however, scarcely more successful in raising tobacco than
+he had been in training the children in his school. The title of
+"Schoolmaster" still clung to him, and when Sam Oliver laughed loudly
+and turned to answer his protest, he said, "Well, Schoolmaster, I can
+understand how you do not like the Indians. You had some pretty wild
+experiences yourself, in the schoolhouse. I understand that two or three
+of the boys disguised themselves the way I have and put you out through
+the window. Is that true?"
+
+Whether the statement was true or not it was never explained, for the
+hunter suddenly warned his companions to become silent as they were
+approaching the village he was seeking.
+
+Advancing with three of his companions and leaving Peleg and the
+remainder of the party behind to await their return, Sam stealthily
+began to make his way toward the little Indian village which he said was
+located only a few yards distant from the spot where a halt had been
+made.
+
+Sam was absent only two hours. His approach was heard by his waiting
+companions long before the hunter could be seen. It was plain, too, that
+he had been successful. The noise of snapping branches and an occasional
+whinny indicated that Sam was not returning empty-handed.
+
+"Did I not tell you what I would do?" boasted the hunter, when he
+returned. "I said I wanted a dozen horses. I have six, so that I am only
+half as happy as I ought to be."
+
+"You are happier now than you soon will be," retorted Peleg, "unless we
+leave this part of the country right away."
+
+The horses which had been secured were all young and only partly broken.
+It was impossible for the party to mount them, and there were times when
+it was difficult even to lead them by the leathern straps which were
+fastened about their necks.
+
+Sam acknowledged the seriousness of the situation, and no urging was
+required to make the men push forward rapidly.
+
+When night fell they selected for their camp a spot on the bend of a
+little stream. Two of the men were assigned positions in the rear of the
+camp to watch for any pursuing Indians. There was no fear of an attack
+from the opposite side of the stream.
+
+At midnight the guard was relieved, and as it was Peleg's turn to take
+the position, he said quietly, "I can do this alone. All the rest of you
+turn in and get your sleep."
+
+His directions were speedily followed. The night passed without alarm,
+and the young scout was beginning to think that either the warriors of
+the village were aware of the plan of Colonel Clark, and had departed to
+join their own bands, or that they were absent from the village at the
+time, and had not yet learned of Sam's theft.
+
+The first faint streaks of the dawn had appeared, and Peleg, taking a
+little bucket, stepped to the brook to secure some running water. The
+fire which had been kept alive throughout the night was burning low.
+When Peleg returned to the camp he was startled when he discovered by
+the dim light that the water in his bucket was muddy. There could be but
+one explanation, and the young scout hastily aroused his companions.
+
+"The brook was not muddy last night, but it is now," said the young
+leader. "To my mind that shows that we are being followed, and the
+Indians are coming down the stream to creep close to us."
+
+Just then the schoolmaster was seized with sharp pains and began to
+groan and writhe in his suffering. No one understood the nature of the
+attack, and the simple remedies which were used apparently produced no
+relief. At last the suffering man was covered with a blanket and placed
+near the ashes of the fire. All the men except Peleg then lay down once
+more upon the ground. A strenuous day was awaiting them, and whether
+Master Hargrave was ill or not, they must get their necessary rest. They
+were inclined to believe, too, after their long wait, that no Indians
+were near them. The stream might have been muddied by any one of half a
+dozen other means. Probably a 'coon had been the guilty party.
+
+And yet all unknown to the little body of settlers a band of twelve
+warriors had been furtively approaching them in the very manner Peleg
+had suspected. Their noiseless footsteps had even brought them within a
+few yards of the camp. Only the coming of the morning was required to
+enable them to attack.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX
+
+CONCLUSION
+
+
+The light of the rising sun had appeared when the crouching Indians
+together fired upon the silent little camp.
+
+By some strange chance almost all the bullets took effect in the body of
+the suffering schoolmaster. There was not even a cry from the stricken
+man, and as the Indians sent forth a wild whoop every one in the camp
+leaped to his feet and fled from the spot.
+
+There had been no time for plans to be made, and consequently every man
+fled by himself. They were followed by the shots and the cries of the
+pursuing Indians, but no one knew what had befallen his comrade.
+
+Peleg, who was fully dressed and better equipped than his friends for
+flight, with Singing Susan in his hand, suddenly fell as he ran along
+the border of a swamp which he had not noticed before.
+
+The warriors swept past him, all believing that the young scout had been
+shot, and that his scalp might be secured when they returned.
+
+Waiting only until the howling band had passed him, Peleg made his
+escape. He sped swiftly back in the direction of the camp, hoping to
+secure one of the stolen horses. When he arrived, however, his
+disappointment was keen when he found that not one of the horses was
+still there.
+
+Exerting himself to the utmost, and still gripping Singing Susan, Peleg
+ran swiftly into the forest in the direction of the meeting-place which
+Colonel Clark had selected.
+
+Several hours elapsed before the young scout arrived at the rendezvous.
+Before night fell three of his recent companions also appeared, but Sam
+Oliver was not of their number, and in fact he was never heard of again.
+
+Daniel Boone was now present, and when he and Peleg were together as
+darkness fell over the camp Boone said: "I am more hopeful now that we
+shall soon have peace than I have ever been before."
+
+"Just now," suggested Peleg with a laugh, "I am thinking more of
+something good to eat than I am of getting into the Indian villages."
+
+"That suggests the one mistake which I fear has been made. In his
+eagerness, the colonel has assembled his men before he has secured
+supplies. The result is that almost every man is hungry to-night."
+
+"I think I can endure it if the rest of the men do not complain," said
+Peleg sturdily. "I have not been with you through all these years
+without learning that I must not cry if everything I want does not come
+to me just when I want it."
+
+"That is well. I do not think we will remain here long. It may be that
+we shall start within a few hours. All the men are eager to be gone, and
+there is nothing to be gained by delay. Without sufficient supplies for
+our horses as well as our men, the sooner we start the better it will be
+for us all."
+
+"Are all here who are expected?" inquired Peleg.
+
+"There are about one thousand here now, including the regulars."
+
+This conversation was interrupted by the announcement that they would
+depart at once. There was a sufficient number of horses in the camp to
+provide one for Peleg and for others who had come on foot.
+
+Just previous to the start the great scout explained to Peleg, "We are
+not far from one of the largest villages of the Indians. It may be that
+we shall come to it before morning. That will depend upon the pace at
+which our men advance."
+
+The morning dawned, and still no sign of the first of the Indian
+villages had been seen. Not a trace of a warrior had been discovered
+throughout the night, nor had any been seen when several hours of the
+new day had passed. Whether or not the Indians had been informed of the
+approach of their enemies was not known.
+
+Steadily the hungry men pressed forward, their conviction that the time
+had arrived for them to obtain lasting relief from the attacks of the
+treacherous Shawnees being even stronger than their feeling of hunger.
+
+Peleg and the great scout were in the front lines, if indeed the
+advancing body could be said to be moving with any appearance of order.
+It is true the men kept closely together, but the nature of the ground
+over which they were moving and the forests through which they passed
+made any approach to military order well-nigh impossible.
+
+The men near Peleg abruptly halted when not far before them on the
+opposite shore of a large pond they spied a solitary Indian. The warrior
+was standing as motionless as the nearby trees as he gazed steadily at
+his approaching enemies.
+
+Suddenly he turned and fled into the forest, disregarding the calls of
+the men and even unmindful of the few scattered shots which followed
+him.
+
+"Who was that?" whispered Peleg to Daniel Boone.
+
+"It was Henry."
+
+"I believe it was," declared Peleg excitedly. "What will he do now?"
+
+"He will give the alarm to the village. We are not more than a mile
+from it now, and he will be there long before our horses can carry us
+over such ground as we have had for the past few miles."
+
+Just at that moment there was a sharp call for an advance. The entire
+body at once responded, although the hungry horses were in no condition
+for swift action.
+
+The words of the great scout were fulfilled when the force drew near the
+Indian village. Not one of its people was to be seen. Fires were still
+smouldering and even the meat which was being roasted and the corn that
+was boiling in the kettles had been abandoned in the precipitate flight
+of the Indians.
+
+The discovery of the food was perhaps more welcome to the hungry men
+than would have been the sight of their foes. At all events, a halt was
+made, and such food as could be obtained was speedily allotted.
+
+At the right of the village a large field of corn was seen, and the
+discovery that the corn was in the ear and ripe for food was good news
+indeed. It was not long before the hunger of every man was appeased, in
+a measure at least, and the entire force was ready for the further
+commands of Colonel Clark.
+
+The village was set on fire in several places, and flames were also
+kindled in the field. In less than an hour the men departed, leaving
+behind them only the smoking embers of what a short time before had
+been a prosperous village of the red men.
+
+Colonel Clark now urged his men forward with increasing speed. At times
+the force divided and the task of burning certain villages was assigned
+to the different bands. At other times the entire force proceeded as one
+body. But their enemies still had not been seen. Occasionally a solitary
+Indian would crawl within gunshot when the camp was pitched, discharge
+his gun, and then instantly flee; and once a small party of warriors,
+mounted upon superb horses, advanced boldly within gunshot. The red men
+coolly surveyed the little army, but when a force was sent to attack
+them they rode away so swiftly that pursuit was useless.
+
+Village after village was burned to the ground, and rich fields of corn
+were left in ruins. The pioneers were determined to rid themselves once
+and for all of further possibilities of attacks by the ferocious
+Shawnees.
+
+The alarm over the advance of Colonel Clark had spread throughout the
+entire region, and with one accord the red men had abandoned their homes
+and fled into the wilderness beyond.
+
+When the attacking forces at last disbanded and the men returned to
+their homes, Daniel Boone and Peleg Barnes went back with their friends
+into Kentucky. The warfare with the Indians was ended. The Kentucky
+homes were now free from the attacks of the Shawnees or Cherokees.
+
+Peleg was no longer a boy. The years that had passed during these
+pioneer days had made of him a man. He now had his own home and a tract
+of land adjoining that of his great friend, Daniel Boone.
+
+Not a word was heard concerning Henry. There were occasional vague
+reports of the presence of a white man among the Shawnees, but whether
+or not this referred to "the white Shawnee" was never known.
+
+As for Daniel Boone, it seemed as if the days of his peril were ended.
+The region which he had opened up for the incoming people had now become
+well settled. The sound of the axe was heard more frequently than the
+rifle. Prosperity smiled upon the efforts of the sturdy settlers, and
+the steadily advancing civilization and the spread of education wrought
+wonders among the people.
+
+In the diary of Daniel Boone there occurs the following:
+
+
+     "Two darling sons and a brother I have lost by savage hands which
+     have also taken from me 40 valuable horses and abundance of cattle.
+     Many dark and sleepless nights have I spent, separated from the
+     cheerful society of man, scorched by the summer's sun, and pinched
+     by the winter's cold, an instrument ordained to settle the
+     wilderness."
+
+
+Another writer has left the following:
+
+
+     "He (Boone) has left behind him a name strongly written in the
+     annals of Kentucky, and a reputation for calm courage softened by
+     humanity, conducted by prudence, and embellished by a singular
+     modesty of deportment. His person was rough, robust, and indicating
+     strength rather than activity; his manner was cold, grave, and
+     taciturn; his countenance homely but kind; his conversation
+     unadorned, unobtrusive, and touching only upon the needful. He
+     never spoke of himself unless particularly questioned."
+
+
+As the years passed he showed more and more the spirit which has been
+described by one of his admirers in the following words:
+
+
+     "There never beat in man a kindlier or more philanthropic heart.
+     While he was a stranger to selfish and sordid impressions he was
+     alike above mean actions; and he lived and toiled for others, amid
+     hardships and sufferings that would have crushed thousands of
+     hearts."
+
+
+The simple-hearted scout, shrewd in his dealing with the Indians, was
+honest and straightforward with the men of his own race, and looked for
+similar treatment from them. One can therefore imagine his surprise and
+indignation when he was informed that he had no legal right to an acre
+of the land which he had discovered, and into which he had led many
+families that already were sharing in the steadily increasing
+prosperity. The clearing he had made, the acres he had cultivated, he
+was informed, were not his property now, but belonged to a man _who had
+signed certain papers_!
+
+Boone intensely loved Kentucky. Its rocks and trees, its rivers, its
+forests, its very soil, were dear to his heart. In Kentucky he had
+experienced his deepest sorrows and many of his highest joys. Perplexed
+as well as disheartened, the great scout departed from the settlement
+which in a large measure was his own work. He was homeless in a land in
+which he had helped so many to secure homes for themselves.
+
+Deep as was Boone's sorrow, he was, as we know, a man whose feeling did
+not find expression in useless words. Quietly he returned to the banks
+of the Delaware where he had been born, and then went on to Virginia. On
+the borders of the great Kanawha he dwelt for five years in the woods
+with his dogs and gun.
+
+Meanwhile his son and a brother had gone out into the remote and almost
+unknown land beyond the Mississippi River. Their reports and appeals
+were so strong, that at last, when the great scout was sixty years of
+age, once more accompanied by his faithful wife, he journeyed away from
+civilization and went to join his sons in the faraway wilderness.
+
+The name of the great scout was so well-known and his character was so
+much admired that the Spanish Governor at once made him a present of
+eighty-five hundred acres of land in what is now the State of Missouri.
+
+Here the great scout in a measure renewed the experiences of his early
+life. By working steadily and saving the money which he received from
+his crops and his furs he acquired a considerable sum. He then returned
+to Kentucky and looked up every man to whom he owed any money through
+the loss that had come to him by his inability to retain his land in the
+region he had loved. It was not long, however, before "he went back to
+Missouri, his heart lighter and also his pocketbook."
+
+When the scout was seventy-five years of age, he still was a great
+hunter. Friendly with the Indians in the region, he paddled in his light
+canoe over the creeks and the little streams in the new territory, and
+it is said that even along the banks of the great Missouri River he set
+many of his traps for the beaver.
+
+As long as the Spanish and French were in control of the Missouri
+country, Boone continued to hold his land safely; but when Napoleon sold
+the vast territory to the United States Boone once more suffered a heavy
+loss, for his own government refused to recognize his claim to any part
+of the region. It seemed almost as if the closing days of the great
+scout were to end in darkness.
+
+Through his friends, Daniel Boone now appealed to the legislature of
+Kentucky to see that justice was done him. Eager to recognize the
+services of the man who had done so much for their state, the
+legislature urged Congress to do justice to the white-haired old scout.
+After some delay the petition was granted, and a gift of eight hundred
+and fifty acres of land was voted Daniel Boone.
+
+It was in December, 1813, when Daniel Boone received word of this gift,
+but his relief and pleasure were lessened by the death of his wife.
+Selecting a choice spot that overlooked the river for her grave, the old
+scout said that when he, too, should die he wished to be buried by her
+side.
+
+Seven years later, when he was eighty-five years old, this last request
+of Daniel Boone was granted.
+
+Missouri, however, was not to be the final resting-place of the famous
+old scout and his wife. A quarter of a century later the legislature of
+Kentucky requested the children of Boone to permit the people of the
+state for which he had done so much to bring the bodies of the great
+scout and his wife to Frankfort, Kentucky.
+
+To-day, on a beautiful site overlooking the banks of the Kentucky River,
+looking down upon the city of Frankfort, a fitting monument marks the
+place where all that is mortal of Daniel Boone lies resting.
+
+THE END
+
+[Illustration: Logo]
+
+THE COUNTRY LIFE PRESS GARDEN CITY, N. Y.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's Scouting with Daniel Boone, by Everett T. Tomlinson
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE ***
+
+***** This file should be named 31590.txt or 31590.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/3/1/5/9/31590/
+
+Produced by David Garcia, Martin Pettit and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Kentuckiana Digital Library)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/31590.zip b/31590.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dc3d514
--- /dev/null
+++ b/31590.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..903ea67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #31590 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/31590)